<^ .e lessons of Part I., and the selections prescribed by the University for Junior Matriculation have been added as a Reader, followed by exercises in Composition, based on the text of these selections. CONTENTS. PAGE Preface Introduction. — Alphabet ..***** * Examples of Pronunciation General Remarks on Pronunciation . Quantity of Vowels Accentuation .... * ._ Orthography • . , . German Script Ill I 6 8 10 II '3 PART I. LESSON I. Present Indicative of laBcil, to have . II. Use of Cases. — Definite Article . III. Xicfcr Model. -Imperf. Indie, of ^oBetl, to have IV. mdn Model. - Indef. Article. - Present and Imperf. Indie, of fcin, to be ... V. Declension of Substantives : — gjloler Model," or -I, -tti, -n, -r Stems . . . '. VI. Present and Imperfect of toerUcn, to become. ~^°"^*^"'^*^°" °^ ^"""P^^ ^^"tences VII. Declension of Substantives: — @o^n Model. — Question Order VIII. Conjugation of ^oBcit, to have. -Place of Participle and Infinitive .... IX. Weak Conjugation : loBcn. - Dependent Sen- tences. — Prepositions with Accusative only X. Weak Verbs (continued). — Declension of Substantives : — $otf Model, or Plural in -er PAGE 17- i8. 20. 22. 25- 28. 32. 41. 1,2 3-5 6,7 8-is 16-18 19,20 21-23 36. 24-26 27-3U. 47- 3S-3: CONTENTS. LESSON XI. XII. XIII. A. XIV. XV. B. XVI. C XVII XVIII XIX, XX. XXI. XXII XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII. D. Personal Pronouns .... Possessive Adjectives. - Use of Articles Construction of Sentences : — Place of Ob^ jects, Adverbs, etc. - Prepositions with Da- tive only Additional Remarks on Personal Pronouns and Prepositions Conjugation of fein, to be. —Declension of Substantives: -Weak or n Stems: itnahc Model Mixed Declension. -- Double Plurals. — Pre- positions governing Dative or Accusative . Anomalies of Declension • • • Declension of Substantives : Recapitulation. — Proper Names. — Prepositions with Gen- '^^^« Proper Names. — Foreign Substantives . Gender of Substantives. — Interrogative Pro- nouns and Adjectives. — Indirect State- ments and Questions . Gender of Substantives (concluded). — Gen- eral Remarks. ~ Double Gender Relative Pronouns. — Irregular Weak Verbs Declension of Attributive Adjectives : Strong Form. — Conjugation of Strong Verbs Passive Voice . Declension of Adjectives : Weak and Mixed. — Strong Verbs: Bcifecn Model . Possessive Pronouns.— Strong Verbs: tUlftttl Model . Declension of Adjectives (concluded) : Table, General Remarks. — Strong Verbs : ((^iegcn and fed^ten Models Comparison of Adjectives. - Strong Verbs :* fricren Model Demonstrative Pronouns. — Strong Verbs : ftltflcn Model Indefinite Pronouns. — Strong Verbs : fhin- licit and ^Clfcn Models .... On Certain Adjectives and Pronouns PAGE 52. S8. §§ 3S-42 43.44 64- 45. 46 70. 47-51 72. 80. 87. 89. 95- 52-59 60 65 66 69 70-75 76-78 97- 79-^8 105. 89-91 III. 92-99 iiS. loo-m 126. 112-U4 134- 115-118 142. 119. 120 147- 121-124 154. 125-131 162. 132 144 171. 145-159 178. 160 162 ;,ESSON XXVIII. XXIX. XXX. XXXI. XXXII. XXXIII. XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. E. XXXVII. XXXVIII. XXXIX. XL. F. CONTENT*)- Numerals : — Cardinals and Ordinals. — Strong Verbs: fprC(^CII Model indefinite Numerals. -Strong Verbs: efffli Model Derivative Numerals — Time, Measure] Date. - Strong Verbs : fdilagcn Model . Adverbs. - Strong Verbs : faOcn Model . Adverbs (continued): Formation and Com- parison. — Table of Strong Verbs and General Remarks on the same Adverbs (continued) : Idioms. — Irregular Strong Verbs .... Modal Auxiliaries >Iodal Auxiliaries (continued): Idioms Compound Verbs On Certain Prefixes . Reflexive and Impersonal Verbs. Prepositions governing the Genitive Prepositions (continued) : — Idioms Conjunctions. — Interjections Conjunctions. —Additional Remarks PAGE §§ 1 80. 163-1(1 189. 168-18 196. i82-i8t 204. 18-/, iSg 210. i89-i9< 217. 195. »9t 22:,. 197-199 233- 200-202 239- 246. 203-208 209-213 249. 214 22c 257- 264. 221-22^ 225-23^ 282. 23S-24C 241 PART II. XLI. XLII. XLIII. XLIV. XLV. XL VI. XLVIL XLVIIL XLIX. L. G. Dative and Accusa- SYNTAX. Synta:: of the Cases. — Nominative and Genitive Syntax of the Cases tive ....... Indicative Mood : Syntax of its Tenses Subjunctive and Conditional Moods . Imperative and Infinitive Moods. Infinitive Mood (continued) The Participles Concord and Apposition Apposition (continued): Appositive jectives. —Syntax of the Preposition Word-Order . • • • • Complex Sentences - Clause-Order . Ad 286. 242-24; . 291. 248-255 • 299. 256-262 . 304. 263-268 . 311- 269-272 318. 273-278 • 325- 279 2S4 • 334. 1- 2S5-2S9 • 34r. 290, 291 . 348. 292-301 • 360- 302-306 CONTENTS. PART III. SUHFLKMENTAUY ExEKCISKS PAflK ao4 I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. IX. X. XI. XII. XIII. XIV. XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. READER. ^otfappdjen ((SJebrubcr (Sjrimm) 5Ii>ie'^ bev Virte mad)t (^^(uberfeii) ®ag neiie jtleib „ 93enebig „ ^otl;[d;ilb „ S)er mx ^immelS[rf)luffer (©rtt) . ^as eiferne Slxeii^ (gronimer) . S^icotiona (33aum6ac^) . 3)er ©olbOaum (33oumbod)) . 2ovdd (^cine) S)u hift luic eine 23ruine (-Oeine)) ©djciferg eonutag^lieb (liljlaiib) 3^0^ ®c^ro§ am ^eere „ 3)ag ec^lo^ ^oncouvi (^rjamiffo) ■^k etevne (6loubiu§) . 3)ei- 9iie[c ©olittt^ (glaubiug) ajJignon (®Detf;e) . evlfomg M . . . S)er ©dnger (®oetf)e) S)er bungling am 33ac^e ((Sc^iUer) 415 419 425 425 427 428 429 434 438 442 448 449 450 450 452 453 454 456 457 458 460 Composition Exercises . Abbreviations Vocabulary: /^^^"^^"-English I English-German Index 463 484 485 542 569 PAflK 415 419 425 425 427 428 429 484 438 442 448 449 450 450 452 453 454 456 457 458 460 463 484 485 542 669 INTRODUCTION. (For Rekerenck only.) THE GERMAN ALPHABET. Characters. ^ a » h ® c Narric. @ e » f ® B bay tsay dcy ay eff gay Sound. Observe the dif. ference betvyeen like a in f, below. ^0 is used at the end of words, otherwise [. 9t and R X and £. f and l c 11 THE GERMAN ALPHABET. Characters. Z i U u 8 J Name. tay 00 fow vay iks ypsilon tset Sound. as in Eng. ; t^ also like // ti in foreign words, preceding an- other vowel, like tse.<^ long, like 00 in hooX\ short, like 00 in ioot. like Eng. /in Germ, words; in foreign words, like Eng. v, like Eng. v, except after [c^ and I, when pron. like Eng. w. like ks, even when initial. like the Germ, vowel i; or like ii. like t$. Observe thu dii- ference between U and %., 35 and 33; t>, fc, ^, V. E and r. Char"cters. C(Cc) ii iiaic) ii MODIFIED VOWELS (UMLAUTSX Sound. like the Germ, vowel e. (The forms %t, etc., are replaced by %, etc., in modern ortho- graphy.) about like u in m//rder; nearly like French eu, but with lips rounded and nearly closed. nearly like French u; there is no corresponding sound in Eng. Pronounced with lips rounded and po-'nted, as for whistling. THE GERMAN ALPHABET. DOUBLE VOWELS. Characters. %a aa like d ee ec <( Co 00 (( Sound. like long a (a in farm). " e (a " care), " (never like Eng. oo), DIPHTHONGS. Cliarac»era. Sound. m ai ■ m ei f like / in f/re. ^it au like ot/ in hour. $(u ($(eu) m @u eu ie like oy in j^j. like /> in f/t'ld (not found at the beginning of words) ; in the unaccented sylls. of foreign words, i and e are pronounced separately. CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS. Characters. ^ in Sound. after a, o, u, o\x, like ch in Scotch \och ; softer after d, e, i, 5, u, ciu, eu ; it does not occur at the beginning, except in for- eign words, where it is pronounced like k before a, o, u, and like final d; before e, i. In French words it has the sound of sh, as in French ; d;^ when in one syll. =^ x. THE GERMAN ALPHAJET. Characters. m Sit) \P ff6 « Sound. like Eng. ck ; when divided between two lines, is written !-!; not found at begin- ning. pronounce both p and f distinctly. as in Eng. ; in foreign words only. like s/i in Eng.; but when the § is in a distinct sylL, pron. separately. like soft i-///> in Eng, at the beginning ; other- wise like s/>. like soft s/it in Eng. at the beginnin wise like sf. g; other- like ss; ^ replaces ff after long vowels in the middle of a word, and always when final. Hence gu^ (long u), gen. gugeS ; but glu^ (short u), gen. gluffe§; and beigen, h'xff, ne» biffen. Diphthongs are always followed by i. Not found at the beginning. like ts. It stands for gj. Not found at the beginning. EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. Simple Vowels. « long : gor, bat, fnm ; short : fait, 3J?onn, ^amm. ^ long : ^cr, ben, bcm ; short : ^crr, bfnn, 33ctt. In formative sylls. foil, by a consonant shorter still' genftcr, ^aben, (gfcl. In final syll. not foil, by a consonant, like a in Louis^^ • @nbc, .t^abc, ©abc. Also in prefixes, as in the first syll' of GC^angen, cjcfaffen, @cban!en, Ufalkn, 6cbenfen. 3 long : rnir, btr, mim ; short : ftilT, mit, bitten. O long- ^on, loben, ^olen; short: ^onne, fommen, fall, tt long : .^ttt, bu, ^lutcg ; short : SJlutter, bumm, unter. ?) long : ^^mmx% $or^> ; short : Ti^xU, ©^fte'rn. Double Vowels (all long). «o : §oor, 3lttl, ©toat. | @e : ^Icc, leer, 93eet. Oo : SBoot, 3Koo§, 2oo§. MoDiFTED Vowels (Umlauts). n long : S3ttr, fame, ^riigen : short : ^atk^ ^amme, fofft. O long : 01, sriine, ©triime ; short: fiinnte, ©otter, iiffnen. ii long: m^, fitr, ftbel; short: .m^, fiiffen, miiffen. ElPHTHONGS (all LONG). m : mai, §oin, main. Hi : mctn, ^citer, biciben. ^i: §ttttt, 5lue, bittu, Sn : §attte, 53aume, riiulen. ®u : l^cute, ncu, iCeute. it : bie. ^ler, ticf (in somr foreign words, pron i-e: gamilie, ©todnicn Sinle). examples of pronunciation. 7 Simple Consonants. b final (=-/). flj,, (SJraB, 06. c soft {=^ fs) gcifar, €eremonie, Gitcero, n ftnai (= f) . . gfiai,^ c^oii, Sicb. r (= ^ in ^ve) ..... geben, beginnen, ^ageg. ^](='^) ^ag, bog, cjiitig, gjlagb. L (-= 0/^ in French words^ . @ente, ©age, ^age. f^o^e, So^e, ^ra^e, fii^ren, ^ "^"te •] fa^, Sa§n, 2:^ure, 2;4aler, ( 9tat(i), gjiut(§). ; j (= -'^) jeber, jemanb, ^atoh, I (= ^/^ in French words) . . 3aloufie, 3ournaI. t |^*^i>^/ wurren, ^aar, ©tern, ' * * * 1 @rbe, $rebiger. f i'*itial and medial (= s in ^^^^•^y) (Sonne, biefer, (Sattel, ^aufer. S fnal (= s in ye^) .... ^auS^ bie0, eg, gafter, legbar. < m foreign words before i (= ' national, patient. jj j in Germ, words (=/) . . tion, $ater, abetter. ( in foreign words(== v) . . SRodember, bitiibieren, STbtiofat. m j (= Eng. v) menu, mer, too, mie. ( (after fd; and 3 = Eng. w) . ©c^tnefter, fc^ltier, gttiei, 3ttiec!. X initial (= ^s) leeryeg, a^enop^on. i (=^^) Sivrbe, ju, jiran^ig, gorn. ^ Remark. — In the above list, only those consonants are given, which differ in pronunciation from their equivalents in English. Below are given also certain consonantal com- binations, most of which do not occur in English. 8 ••i-^ ♦f GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs. initial (= ^) a^aracter, a^or, a^rifu " (=(^ guttural) . . aftiru'rg, a§emie'. medial and final (guttural) \ ^^S^' "^^^^^^ ¥^, Su^ 33Icr^ in French words (-= .-//) . (?,§arlatan, Chicane. (in same syll. = :r) . . 2)a(^8, D(^§, ^arjg, ^It^fe. ^fcrb, g>fennio, ^ii^ifen. '^rjaf, Sconce, (»tjiff; but \^ir=sh) .. pron. g separately when it belongs to a different syll., as; i)du^3=rf)en, ©am5* fl initial (= sht softened) . . Stanb, >le^en, Stengel, ^i\xU. f|i initial (= shp softened) . . f^iurcn, (g^riic^e, (S^orn. jl (preceding vowel short) . . inilffen, fiiffen, laffen, gJZcffe. r medial (preceding vowel long) grower, fto^en, fvagen. ^ I final (preceding vowel long) g}ia§, gro§, ^-u J (gen. ^ugeS). final (preceding vowel short) \ ^^^ fe^"' «^^-ff^^)' ^^^^ fe^^- ^ ^ 9^offe^^).gIu§(gen.gluffe^,). A. GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION. 1. The acquisition of a correct and pure pronunciation of the vowels is the most important point to be attended to; especially that of the vowel % which must never have a shade of the sound of the Eng. a in hat, ha\\ or cr/ne. Look after your Towels, and the consonants will look after themselves. 2. The most difficult vowel-sounds are the Umlauts, of modified V07i>els. esoeciallv H nnH "t Ax/hi^h rY^,^^*^ u« i j from the teacher. QUANTITY OF VOWELS. 5. The only difficult consonant-sounds are: r, with strong guttural roll. f, initial, and medial before vowels, which is like s in daijy, or e in ^^one. § final « ss in English. l5(and g final), which must be learned from the teacher. 4. The pronunciation of the following consonants, though j^)t difficult, differs from the English pronunciation : h final =/. C before d, e, i — /j. b final = A Q never like g in gesture. g final see above. i = jv in >'et. ti «/in Germ, words. to= V, except after fc^ and 3. 8 *-^J. $. There are no silent letters in German, except ^ before consonants, after t (see below), and between vowels ; thus c is never silent. Hence (Snb-c, @ab-c are dissylls.; and a, t in @nabc, ^na6e must be heard. B. QUANTITY OF VOWELS. Long: Double vowels and diphthongs are always long. Simple vowels are long before a single consonant; before a consonant preceded by ^ ; when not followed by a consonant; also before and after tj. Exceptions : Articles, pronouns, prepositions, and other unaccented monosylfs., also unaccented prefixes, and inflexional sylls. in c and t, have the vowel short before a single consonant. Short : Vowels followed by a double consonant (but see note 2 below), or by more than one consonant, vowels of un- accented woids and prefixes, and of formative and terminal sylls., are short ; also most vowels before (t), and all vowels before jc§. lO ACCKNTUATION. KxcKiTioNiiJ Long v.twtiU lii'foio several ronsonantm ?tb(pr, eagle, rrfl, 'Inst*; ('•^I'luiil, *l)iill»*5 S}nh, •IumiIIi'; .V.Vibi', Micnl'; ,Vil)'lni, 'touKh'; SdoiU'Y, •(•(Mivciit •; .UioliC, Sr.ih'j ^.l)^1n^, 'maid'; iUfoilb, •moon"; \U'bH, *hvsU\vH'; Clift, 'fruit'; Off, 'cast'j Oftnil, MCasUr'; 'ImU'I'I, 'popo'; fiiXh, 'hoisc'; ^^moIMI, 'prchoiulary'; i2'i1)ii|ln', 'hIioo- malviM •; ^'>il)Uint, 'swiml'; f|i'lv\ • routinually 'j loM, 'dead' (now Hprlt toi); Jrolt, 'iunH..Iati.ont, 'goveiiK.i'; ^Jl^iiflr, 'desi-rl'; uIho ^ti\M, 'litwn,' wl>ii h has (In- vowfl Hhoit in tlic Hlng., lonp.tluns it in Iho phn. ^;?fiiMo. I.onj; vowels litiou- H) : flmlini, 'to curso'; l)od), • lii^-.h ' (but sjjoit in .^odl^dt, wcddinj-); *2d)inai1), 'dl.s}>,raco'; ^pnii1)r, 'speech.* Nori'S. I. Long radiral vowels remain long even before tw»)orjnore cons.»nants; thus: lolnu, (^||) luh-ft, (cj) loM, iH'-loO t, all vvilli long vowel, aceonling lo the (piantity of the stetu. \ lU'fore ff all vowels are short; before § medial, long; before ^ linal, II, 0, II asc sonu-titnes lomv, sonietintes short ; c ami i always short 3. The vowel il is always lonj; beloic v. KXKKCISK IN QUANITIY OK VoWKLS. (Accent on fii-st ayU, «)f dlssylls.) .'i>anvf, 'Jlvt, offru, lobni, lobt, ^nxt, mcc, ^^Mrr, tl)nn, bitnuii, aifoo^ iVclui, Cfni, i^fo^, obo, i-ftev, ndt, juiht, roiiii, Uh\ .Ual)u, ^Miitti-r, iil)iilid), Vifbf, ilbnv bilmi, i^ilno, Vooct, ^alUl, I^dnc, 01)r, nomoi-brii, Ul)r, ikm, unlliiYub, niflu-. bn-, bav\ t^, bniii, Afrru. fli'i'm'- mnntnv ^U\t)t, ^imc, U!0^i-<', i?iiii-c, are directly from the Latin, the t-c being pron. sep/ i»telv. w OKTIIOGKAPHY. il N"oTr,.s.--i. With ihcHc few exceptions, formative »yll8. are always IIIKK < Clltcd. ::. Ill toiiiiM. 1111(1 substantives, adjc^ctivcs and verbs, the first component generally has tlio principal accent; in otiur coni|)omi(I.s (prepositions, ad- vcrhial conjunctioiiM, c!( .), generally tlu; last component. 3. The following i)rerixea arc never accented: ht-, Ct-, tmp", flit-, 0c > ucr , a"-' ExKRcrsKs m Acckntuation. 1. Simple words: 9^•lull1Ullll, li()i(ii1)f,'it, (Sfcf, ^inftmilS, flflttfl, fpar- fain, espiniamfnt, A^'iiiiat, ^Wrlrijtimi, rciiilid), 9i\nnliri)reit, Tuflcnb, tuacnb- 2. Compound words: 9tuvrnii«, l)iiiriiisirl)ni, ed)U)nr.^U)n(b, bal)cr, anfdiinUfl), «rttc(flab, Tloutan, Tlitkib ninhujic, 'Frederick tlie Grea iiarl ber gunfte, 'Charles 13 ADDITIONAL REMARKS. the Fifth'; ^^re ^majeftat, 'Her Majesty »; ©einc 35urc6. laud)t, ' His Serene Highness.' 5. Adjectives from names of persons, as : bic ©oetbcfAen ©ebtd^te, 'Goethe's poems.' Notes. -I. Adjectives, with the above exceptions, are never written with capitals, as: Ijmifjiid), 'Prussian '; eiiglifd), ' English.' 2. The numeral cin, «one,» is sometimes spelt with a capital, to distmguish It from the indef. art. ein, ' a,' 'an.' E. RECENT CHANGES IN ORTHOGRAPHY. These changes relate chiefly to the rejection of lengthening 1^ after i, which takes place : 1. in derivative sylls. : ^onigfum, Ungefiim, etc. 2. after t medial and final : mm, dtai, rot, h)ert, etc. 3. before diphthongs : ^^ier, teuer, 2eil, etc. 4. before short vowels : 2urm, etc. Note. — In the majority of text-books, the pupil will still meet with the old orthography; but in the High .School German Reader, and in the present senior author's editions of texts, the 1| is invariably rejected F. ADDITIONAL REMARKS. 1. The use of Italics being unknown in German print, an emphasized word is printed with larger spaces between the letters, as : id; f)aU nur e i n e n ©o^n, ' I have but one son.' 2. The double vowels never take Umlaut; hence: 93iiiit plur. mu. ^^ 3. The modified vowels as capitals art 2lways written % 0, U, not (as formerly) «c, Oe, Uc. I THE GERMAN SCRIPT. a /f^^ ^>^ ^j' -^/^ ^ ^^ ^./ ^/. ^. ^<^ yM^ w~- M THE GERMAN SCRIPT. // UMLAUTS. // ^vi ^: ' // /^^ /J y-^/^ DOUJLE VOWELS. yo-ry DIPHTHONGS. a'^ y^^y/^ <^ /^^ ^^//^ CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS. THE GERMAN SCRIPT. Observe carefully the Difference between* CAPITALS. »5 ^ (.nd ♦* . and SMALL LETTERS. y y. and yy y, and -toy ^ and -« *j^ rtiiu -rp ' -^a. ana -jt, SPECIMEN OF GERMAN SCRIPT.* 1. C£:-^ ^Z^ J:L.f^yLj^ ^-^JZ'^J t^L^^^^j^^ ^y^^/ ,i^*^ izf**^^^ -t*.-^^ -^^ j^^y -»-*»-r«. i»t •*--»->l». / / C -f'^'^'iCft-M^ *iC-«. ^ y*. ■»-»-*-^ -^wi^-* "*-*■ J •*■»- ■^-rt-ffi. y*.-,^ y^-g^ty -i^.-Ki-tJ^y^ . 7. c/»^ * These sentences, with the exception of the last two, are idei with those of Ex. IV , -.4. cuiica. i6 THE GERMAN SCRIPT. / "^ ■«^^»-«-«i.-».«. ^■tt.-t^-M-^t-n- iv' y^-iii».»j ^ r*>^'--e«- ^ 9- V^— - -42^ ^w- :^«- -^-^ -rm-^^-r^ -^a-«A--*-*. 't^-^m- o/ i^-»>«- ■*-*-*^-*- ^» »- O t-- *. .-t^ ^^»-»-*- ^t^-*-^ t^^,.-^A^J:'/S( lo. ^-^ -*--^«- 'jc-«>'M»-»-«-i — *3r,.^c^*** X^^ ^/ •»►**♦■».** '^ follow each other. 4. Never omit the hook over/^;/^ , which alone distin- guishes it from ^//^. 5. The most difficult letters to make neatly are ^^ ^ J: y ^ ^^ y^A^ GERMAN GRAMMAR. PART FIRST. 1. LESSON I. Present Indicative of JoBeit, to have. Sing, id) ()abc, I have bu ^aft thcu hast er ^at he has fie Ijat, she has eg \)ai, it has Piur. trir ^r.bcn, we have ,4' ^ahi, ye have (te ^abcii, they have ^abe id^, have I ? ifjaft bu, '-ist thou IjoX er, has he 'bfxi fie, has she l^at e§, has it ^aben it)ir, have we l^abt i^r, have ye §aben fie, have they 2. Rule i. The verb agrees with its subject in number and^person, as : ic^ ^abc, I have ; er i^^^i, he has ; fie ^abcil, they 2. Words used in a partitive se.tse, i. e., indicating only a part^ not the whole, of anything, have no article before them m German, and the English some or any remains untrans- lated, as : Has he {any) bread ? I have {some) gold. bread, ^rpt-* meat, <}teifc^-^ gold, @oib 'M flour, ml^i -M milk, mW^ Vocabulary silver, Silber-jirf water, SBaffertf* wine, 2Bein^ and, unb or, ober X4 also, aud^ what, toag? but, aber yes, \a not, nidpt f 17 i8 LESSON II. 5?3 I EXERCISE I. A. 1. /iai ? as; W/ion {w/iat) do you see? I see the man (the house). 4. Declension of the Definite Article. MASC. Nom. ber Gen. bc§ Dat. bcni Ace. ben Singular. FEM. bie ber ber bie NEUTER. bag beg bem bag Plural. ALL GENDERS. bie, the ber, of the ben, (to, for) the bie, the 5. Rule i. The Definite Article, like every determinative word, agrees with its substantive in Gender, Number, and Case, as: bcr mmn, 'the man' (masc); bie grau '*the woman ' (fem.) ; bag 5^inb, ' the child ' (neuter). 2. Articles and other determinative words should be re- peated before each substantive in the singular, as : 3)er l^fann unb bie ^rau ; ber Se^rer unb ber ©c^uler. Vocabulary.* (N. B. Always learn the definite article with each German substantive.) dog, bcr |)unb'.x boy, ber ^nabet teacher, ber Sef)reriunb, abcr fie I^aben nid^t bag ^ferb. 6. ^c^ f,abc ben ©todf, bag iyu4> unb bie ^eber ; aUx ber ^mU \}ai nur bag 33uc^ unb bie geber. ^. 1. Have we not the book of the mother? 2. We have the book of the mother. .'J. Have the pupils the dog and the horse, or have they only the horse ? 4. They have the horse, but they have not the dog. 5. Has the mother of the girls the flower ? C^. She has not the flower, but she has the book of the girls, and they have the pen. 7. To the mother and to the teacher. ORAL EXERCISE II. 1. Was hat der Hund.? 2. Wer hat den Hund? 8. Wer hat Schuler ? 4. Was haben die Lehrer ? 5. Was hit das Madchen ? 6. Hat er den Stock ? LESSON III. liefer MODEL. -IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF ^okn, to have- 6. Declension of bicfcr, this, that. • Singular. Plural. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. biefc biefcg, this biefc, these bicfcr biefc0, of this bie»cr, of these biefcr bie[cm,(to,for)this biefcn, (to, for) these biefc biefeg, this biefe, these In the same way decline jener, that; ieber, every • jvtiu;vi^ wiiicn r MASC. Nom. biefcr Gen. bicfcS Hat. biefcin Ace. biefcn [§§6 7] IMPERFECT OF fjabcn. 21 I Remark. — The accusative of declinable words differs in form from the nominative in the masculine singtdar only. 7. Imperfect Indicative of ^abcn, to have. ^ing. ic^ ^atte, I had bu l^attcfl, thou hadst er ^attc, he had fie ^attc, she had e§ ^atte, it had Plur. n)ir flatten, we had i^r ^attct, ye had fie fatten, they had Vocabulary brother, bct ^ruber I garden, ber ©arten I gardens, bic ©iirten bone, ber ^nod^en X bones, bie ^nod^en reader, ber Sefer X readers, bie Sefet_ man, ber 5Kann i^ son, ber ®d{)n n father, ber ^ater Z EXERCISE III. A. 1. ^d; ^atte biefe ^eitung. 2. liefer ^unb ^atte .^nocfien. 3. 2)iefer Sefjrer \^^i bier ©c^iilcr, aber jener 2e{)rer \:)Q^i nur brei. 4. ^er 33ruber biefer ^rau \:j^iit jene^ §Qug, unb er fjatte auc^ jene ®drten. 5. ^ebeg ^ud) f)at Sefer. 6. SSelc^eg 33ud; fatten biefe ^cibc^en 'c* 7. 2)er ©c^mefter unb bem Smber. B. 1. Which newspaper had the father of these girls? 2. The dog had these bones, but he had not this stick. 8. W ich stick has this man? 4. Which man has this stick? 5 This father had three daughters, but that woman had only l^atte i(^, had I ? ^attcft bu, hadst thou {;atte er, had he ^atte fie, had she \) daughter, bie ^pc^ter daughters, bie 3:od;ter newspaper, bie 3^itu«0 ^ ' house, ba0 ,^paug fe- two, jttjei three, brei four, bier 22 LESSON IV. [§§8^ two. 6. The son of that woman had this dog and horse 7 We had the book of those pupils. 8. To the brother of those girls. ORAL EXERCISE III. 1. Welches Madchenhatte die Zeitung? 2. Welches Buch hatten die Madchen ? 3. Wer hatte das Buch dieser Schiiler ? 4. Welche Feder hatte dieser Knabe.? 5. Welchen Hund hatte jener Mann .? 6. Was hat dieser Lehrer ? LESSON IV. Mtin MODEL-INDEFINITE ARTICLE.-PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF fcui, to be. 8. Declension of mcin, my. Sifii^Hlar. MASC. Norn, mein Gen. meincg Dat. meincm Ace. mein en FEM. meinc metncr meincr mctnc NEUTER. mein meincg meincm mein Plural. ALL GENDERS. meinc, my meincr, of my meincn,(to,for)niy meinc, my 9. The following words are declined like mein- fein 'no'- [etn, ' his, its ' ; i^r, ' her, its, their ' ; unfcr, ' our.' The indefinite article ein, eine, etn is also declined in the same way, but has no plural, thus : MASC. FKM, Nom. cin eine Gen. eine§ einer Dat. einem einer Ace. ein en eine Remark. -This model differs from the bicfcr model only in having no distinctive ending in the nom. ^ino- „i..sc and neuter, or in the ncc. neuter. Thus, while we say biefcr NEUTER. ein eineg einem ein a t( w '1 [§§8^ 13] PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF fcm. 23 5}?ann, but biefcg 33uc^, we say em (!ein, mein, etc.) mann ■ and also cin (fein, etc.) 33uc^. ' (O. Present and Imperfect iNDrcATivE of fcjn, to be. ^^^^^^^^' Imperfect. Sing, icf) bin, I am ^ ju^j^ i ^^g bu bi[t, thou art bu tt)ar[t, thou wast cr ift, he is g^ jy^^j^ h^ ^,^3 fie ift, she is fie tt,av, she was ^^ i^ ^t is e§ iDor, it was ^/2^r. h)ir [inb, we are ^jir hjaren, we were i^r fetb, ye are i^r iraret, ye were fie finb, they are fie n)aren, they were 6in id^, am I ? etc. tt)ar id^, was I ? etc. 11. Time before Place. Rule. — In German sen- tences, expressions of time always precede those oi place, as.: This man was here to-day. 2)iefer Wimw umr ^cutc ^ier. 12. Place of the Negative nij^t. Rule. — The nega- tive nit^t precedes that member of the sentence which it negatives. Hence : @r mar geftern nirjt ^ier, he was not here yesterday. 13. Agreement of Pronouns. Rule. — Pronouns agree in gender, number and person with the substantive to which they refer, as : 2)cr ^ut (masc.) ift nicbt gro^, cr i[t flein, the hat is not large, // is small; but bic ^eitung (fern.) ift nicbt grofe, fie ift flein, the newspaper is not large, // is small. The English pronoun it must therefore be rendered by er when it refers to a masc. substantive, by fie when it refers to ^ fern., and by eg when it refers to a neuter. « 24 LKSSON IV. (§§ 14- 14. OnsERVK: In the sentence * the boy is good,' ^<:;£;^/ is a predicative adjective. Rule. — J^rcdicative Adjectives are not declined. 15. A substantive following the verb to be is of course subject, not object, and nuist therefore be put in the nominative^ and not in the accusative, as : (Sv i[t chl (not eincil) 3Jiann, he is a man. VoCAI?ULARV. friend, bcr <^rcunb ' gentleman, bcr .^crr \\\ bird, bcr 'inn^cl carriage, ) . ,,,, wagon, > • carriages, bic iBa^cn city, bic (Stabt garment, ) weather, ba^ '^Better j old, alt pretty, ^iibfd^ cold, fait small, little, flcin tired, iniibc beautiful, fine, fd;5n strong, ftav! idle, trnc^c warm, Juarm windy, luinbig very, very much, fel^r yesterday, j^c'ftcrn pleasant, agreeable, anqcncbm to-dav, bciitc great, large, big, tall, jjrofj still, yet, nod^ (referring to time) for, bcim EXERCISE IV. A. 1. (5in5^atcrunb fcin,slinbimbicl3t flier. 3. @ine fitter imb ihr Atinb timrcn j^-ftcvn bier. 3. ^3JJciu ^Ikiibcr bat fcin '^wd}, aber er bat ctn Dh-ffcr. 4. Uufcr ^-rciinb Umr bcr :ee^rcr biefcr edndcr. 5. T^icfc ^^nau ift mcinc Sdnucftcr, unb fie ift auc^ bie 3Jiuttcr biefcr ai?abd>cn. (>. ^^Bir finb flcin, aber fie finb nvofe. 7. Unfcr ■]. Our brother and his dog are big and strong, but our sister and h(ir bird are small and pretty. 4. Which gentleman was here ye« terday .? .5. The friend of our brothers was here to-day, but he was not here yesterday. «. My sister had her book, but she had not her pen. 7. Our father and mother have still their carriage, but they have no horse. H. The weather was cold and windy, but it is now warm and pleasant. 9. To my brother and sister. ORA^ EXERCISE IV. 1. Wo ist unsere Mutter.? 2. Wann war sie hier? 3. Wer war gestern hier.? 4. Was ist sein Vater.? 5. Wer ist die Mutter dieser Schuler .? 6. Wer sind diese Madchen ? LESSON V. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES r-lWtttcr MODEL, OR -I, -m, -It, -r STEMS. 16. Declension of bcr aWolcr, the painter. Singular. Norn, ber 9J?aIer, the painter Gen. beg 3)ialcr8, the painter's, of the painter Dat. bem 5D^ater, (to, for) the painter Ace. ben DJJaler, the pointer Plural. bie 3JiaIer, the painters ber 3KaIer, the painters', of the painters ben SJlalem, (to, for) the painters bie aji'aler, the painters Observe : The only changes are additional -% in the gen. sing., and -n in the dat. pi. 1 7. In the same way are declined ; 26 LESSON V. [§§17 -J- I. Masc. and neuter substantives ending in -el, -cm, -HI, -^ -cr, and diminutives in -r^eit and -lein (these last being always neuter). 2. Neuters beginning with @e- and ending in -c, as : 't li ©cmdlbe, the painting. 3. Two feminines : bie iUiutter, the mother, and bie ^od^ter, the daughter. 4. 2)er ^afe, the cheese. (a) But many masculines with 0, 0, It in the root, the two feminines Gutter and Xodjt^v, and' one neuter, bag 5llofter, 'the convent,' take also Umlaut (modified vowel) in the plural, as : — Sing. N, D.A. 33ruber, g. 33ruberg; /"/ur. n. g.a. 33rubcr, D. Sriibcrn. (d) Substantives in -n do not add n in the dat. plur., as : Sm£^. N. D. A. mat)6)tn, o. SOJabd^eng; P/ur. n. o. d.a. 3Jidbc^en. (c) In feminine substantives all cases are alike in the sing. Hence, MutUx and 2:oc^ter are thus declined : Srng. N.G.D.A. 9)?utter; J'/ur. n. g.a. mntUx, d. 5D^uttcni. Sing. N.G.D.A. Xo^Ux; Plur. n.g. a. Siic^ter, d. ^od^tern. Further examples : 2)er 35ogeI, the bird : Sing. n. d. a. 3Sogel, g. SSogelS ; Plur. N. g. a. SSiigel, d. SSogcIn. ^er SBagen, the carriage : Sing. n. d. a. 213agen, g. SSogcnS; /'/«r. N. G. D. A. 2Bagen. ®ag genfter, the window : Sing. n. d. a. genfter, g. genfterg; Plur. N. G. a. genfter, d. genftern. T)a§ ©emdibe, the painting: Sing. n. d.a. ©emolbe, o. ©emdibeg ; P/z^r. n. g. a. ©emdlbe, d. ©emdlben. I«J DECLENSION : — gjJaler model. 2^ Decline with Umlaut: ber Satcr, the father; ber ©Atoaaer the b.other-in-law; ber ^i^fcl, the apple; b r ©artt he garden ; ber 3JZanteI, the cloak. ' ^.^nV^^'u """"P''*" "'' °^ Substantives of this declension that .^ake Umlaut m the plur., see App. A. * Decline without Umlaut: ber Se^rer, the teacher; ber ierD^i^h? ^'^ '—'^ ''' ^^"^^^' ^^- winter; bem @arten, contr. im ©arten ; in brm SBaffer, contr. im Saffcr. ' t.n*.f .1.^'''^^ ?' ^^^^^^^^^^o^- - " the verb is in a simple tense, the predicate adjective comes at the end. tree, ber S^aum ^ fire, bag ^euer 1 spring, ber gru^lingTI autumn, bg'ijerbft ^/ stove, ber Dfen ' diligent, industrious, flei^ig poor, arm hot, hd^ ill, franf rich, reic^ Vocabulary. ripe, reif weak, [c^hjad^ satisfied, ) . . ^ contented, I ^"f'^^^^" quickly, fd^nett not at all, gar nic^t not yet, noc^ nid^t with, mit (gov. dat.) in, in (gov. dat.>J ^^- whose, h?effen? EXERCISE V. ..t' \ !^''^^^'' ^''^'^ ^^^c^en h^aren mube. 2. @g it,ar malbe biefeg a«alerg finb gar nic^t fc&on. 4. Un^er. mr,.. fi^. toar arm. 6. aWit ben gliigeln biefer ^ogel. 7. 3)ie ec^uler 28 LESSON VI. [§§I9 bicfc« Mjxixi iuarcn !ranf. 8. Die "9JJantcl mciner 2'66)tcx finb alt. 9. X)ic Wartcn in bicfcv Stabt finb [cl;r fd;on. 7^ 1. The father of tliis girl was my teacher. 2. Our father and mother are old and weak. :}. The gardens of my brother-in-law are very beautiful, but his carriages are not at all beautiful. 4. My uncle is not at all satisfied with his daughters. 5. These apples are not yet ripe. (i. The teacher of these pupils was not very rich. 7. With the wings of this bird. 8. The weather is liot in the summer, but it is cold in the winter. 9. The eagle is a bird. ORAL EXERCISE V. 1. Wann ist das Wetter kalt.? 2. Mit welchen Schtilern sind die Lehrer xufrieden ? 8. In wessen Haus sind die Brlider dieses Madchens .? 4. Wo waren sie im Herbst > 5. Sind diese Miidchen trage oder Heiszig ? 6. Ist die Blume schon ? LESSON VI. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF iDCrbcIt, to become. - CON- STRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 19. Present and Imperfect of tQCrbcn^ to become. Present Indicative. Sing. id5> it)erbc, I become bu tuirft, thou bccomest er tuivb, he becomes Plur. \mx h)crbcil, we become ii/V Vocvbci, ye become pe Ujerbcn, they become Present Siibjunctii^. id; luerbc bu tt)i*rbcft er Jucrbc to^ 'uerben \%x ryctbct fie tuerben th at m€ a s [§§I9 ?tcr finb 2. Our s of my i not at vith his 6. The le wings )ut it is chtilern ind die )st ? 5. \ Blume -CON- me. «o] CONSTRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 29 Jmperfrct Indicative, Imperfect Subjunctive. Sing, id; hjurbf or tuorb, I became irfi iuiirbe bu iuuvbcpt or luarbft, thou becamcst bu luiivbcft er luurbc or luavb, Jie became cr iuiirbe J'/ur. tuir tuurbcn, we became unv tuiirbcn if;r iuurbet, ye became i^^ tuiirbct fic tDuvbeu, they became fie luiiibcn Observe: i. the persistent c in the subjunctive endings; 2. the Umlaut in the impcrfcU subjunctive ; ^ 3. the second form (juarb, etc.) in the singula, onlv of the imperfect indicative. 20. Construction of Principal Sentences. — Place OF Verb and Subject. Rule. - In principal sentences containing a statement, the verb IS the second idea in the sentence, as : SUHjKCr. ™„. PREDICATE. SUBJECT. VEK«. PREDICATE. ^^ ft"t ^ier. ^r ift fran!. A am here. He is ill. Observe: i. The verb is the second idea, not necessarily the second word, in the sentence. Thus the subject with its attributes and enlargements constitutes but one idea, as : . * 2 8 SUBJECT AND ATTRIBUTE. VERB. ADVERB. ■' — — — ^ ®er Skater b:v(eg Se^verg tuar ^ier. 2. The subject (or subjects) with attributes and enlarge ments may come either in the first or in the third place as • SUBJECT. VERB. A'DVERB. ADVERB. VERB. SUBJECT. ^^ ^^» ^H'r; or: §{er bin irj. 3. 'V\i^ predicate adjective is placed last, when the verb is in a simple tense, as : 30 LK.SSON VI. 20 I ;mi sntislu'd with luv (liiii!.»,hlrrs. ;,\il> bill init mcincii JiWMcvn ,^ufiicticii. Rkmauks. I. Any otluT incmlxM of llu* sml'Mno u\,\y occupy (he liisl pl.u r, luit in ihat raso llu* siil»it'('t is thrown «{//<•/ 1 1 U' V(m1». widrh sdll oviupics (hi' stMoiui phuc. Thus? AnV. IMIUASK. VI Kit. SU ll lie P. I'U I'l >ICA II'.. '^m 'isvM\n\\ flub Mr (Miirtcii fobihi. i. In l''n»;lish. on the fondary, (hr snhjrcl pioiH'dcs (ho \ril>, which is. in snch i.ist>s, in tho ////>v. 1MIKVSK. sunncr. vkkh. ruKnicATK. In (ho spring {\\c };aiilons arc hoan(il"nl. ^. '/'///> //.\r«//'('.v///( 7; o/f/ir verb iis iltc second idea in every iietnum f^fitieif^ttf senfenee shou/,/ nerer he fofxoffen. .}. Tho < o»iinnr(ions iinb, abcv, obcv, bcnii do \\o\. connt as inonilHMS of (hr scn(onoo. sloij;h, bcv ^^d^UKcn'jt (liuiuior slotm. ba\^ (jK'Untlov J adiMUivo. aiifmcirfam jjroon. ^x\\\\ now. ncu your .. iuiij^ inattoniivo, unaufmcvrfam nnploasant, \ disaiiiocablc, > unan^V'"'''^''!^ ViH'AlUM.AUV. dissalisltod. im^ufvlobcu af'vM-. nad» i^wiih Ua(.) (hoioloro, on thai account, bv\^balb never, nic so, fi> why. unu'um ? ai;ain. luicbcv well, UHil;! EXEROISa vt. A. I. ')i\ui> bcm (>H'UMttcv UMubo bav^ "ilvcttcr fduMi unb toarm. 'J. C^K'ftcvn univbcn mcinc '})iiii(cv unb ibvc c^dMncftcv fvan!, abcr •ct,u jinb fie voobl '^. '^n'ttct 18 « •o] (.ONSTHUCTION Of PRlNClI'Ar. SKNTENCES. 31 mi Wi>,. .n,b m,,u 5. Pec m,m h>itb u,. «f iX„ e„„ "r*./- ""f«'.^J'""« if -"*' i-n, «bcv fie ? J £2"" ^ '"• ®'' """■^•" •" •^«'''b"vfl. «t« fie ,u«vc„ nie in /••• I. The brother of these pupils I.ecame our teacher a oaehers often hocou.e dissatisliocl with their pupils a it the spr,„K our sar.leu i,eeomes beautiful. 4. Our brothers" ■n-Iaw were u, I'aris; they are now in L„„do„. 5. Thi tree .eco„,es fjreen very quiekly. 6. The pupils of this tenclier Loeame very auentive. 7. My dauj;hter are not contnted wu,he.r cloaks a in the autun.n (the), apples heco.riS > I .e father of these ^rls becomes old and weak. 10. Vvlth 0. feathers of an ea„e. „. We became rich, but he became poo.. U. I he eagle .s a bird ; it is large and strong. ]•} Ihe cloaks of those girls were new, but now they are getting (say : become) old. ' b^^i'ng ORAL EXERCISE VI. iiics OnkcLs? .J. Wnnnwaren seine Briider in Hamburcr? 4. Wann werden die Apfel reif? 5. Wird der Baum Tm boninier griin ? (>. Wann wird das Wetter kalt ? ate ouutted m (jcrmaii, but not in English. ^ilNCttCt 32 LESSON VII. [§§ai- LESSON VII. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-(Sojn MODEL- QUESTION ORDER. 21. Declension of \ '^^^ ®"4«' *^^ ^on ; ( bcr §unb, the dog. Plural, bie ©ii^nc, the sons ber ©bf^ne, the sons', of the sonj ben ©iil^ncn, (to, for) the sons bie ©of)ne, the sons {a) With Umlaut in the plural : Singular. Nom. ber ©of)n, the son Gen. beg (Sol>n(c)g, the son's, of the son Dat. bem ©of)n(c), (to, for) the son Ace. ben ©o^n, the son Observe : i. The -eg of the gen., and -c of dat. sing. 2. The Umlaut and -e of the plur. 3. The additional -n of the dat. plur. 4. The -c may be dropped in the dat. sing., and (except after sibilants) in the gen sing., but is usually retained in monosyllables. {b) Without Umlaut : Singular. Plural. Nom. ber §unb, the dog bie §unbc, the dogs Gen. beg $unb(c)8, the dog's, ber §unbc, the dogs', of the of the dog dogs Dat. bem ^unb(c), to the dog ben .^unbcit, (to, for) the dogs Ace. ben §unb, the dog bie ^unbe, the dogs 22. In this way are declined : I. Most masculine monosvllables : add Umlau*" (see App. B.) as] CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. 33 2 Masculines in -at, -ic$, -I9, -h,g, -(i„g: ,,,,,^^ .^jd Umlaut. 3. Many feminine monosyllables with a, U, or au in the root : a/ways add Umlaut (for list, see App. C.) 4. Substantives in -nU and -jnl : never add Umlaut. 5. Many neuter monosyllables (all those in -r) : ne7'er add Umlaut, except ^-lo^, Qijox, Boot (335te or ^oote) App. E. 6. Foreign masculines, with accent on last syll., in -nl, -an, -or: generally without Umlaut; in -aft, with Umlaut J in -\tx, -on, -or, and foreign neuters in -at : never with Um- laut (for exceptions, see App. D.) Further examples : jDie ^cnb, the hand : Sing, n. g. d. a. §anb ; Plur. n. g. a ^onbc, D. ^onbcii. (Observe again : Feminines have all cases of the sing, alike.) 1)ag SBegrdbni^, the burial, funeral : Sing. n. a. ^egrabm? G. 33egrdbniffe0, d. «cgrabnif(fc) ; Plur. n. g. a. Seqrabniffc' D. 33egrdbmffcn. ' (Observe the doubling of the final -g when a termination is added.) !Der momi, the month : Sing. n. a. momi, g. 3JJonat(c)8 D. tomtit) ; Plur. N. G. A. momtt, D. ^onatcn. JDa§ Sa^r, the year : Sing. n. a. ^a^r, g. ,^a§i(e)8, d. ^a^r(e) ; /'/«^-. N. G. A. ^a^rc, D. ^a^rcn. 2)er Sl^felbaum, the apple-tree: Sing. n.a. 3r)3fet6aum g 2r^fel6aum(c)g, d. 3rpfelbaum(c) ; /y/.n n.g, a. 2tDfelbttume' d. Sl^felboumcn. (Observe that in compounds only the last component is varied, and is declmed as when standing alone). 23. CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. Examples : I. Has the dog meat.? 2. Which man is old.? Qat ber^unb gleifc^? SBelc^er a)Jann ift att? 34 LESSON VII. l§23 * « 12 8 3. Who is in the garden? 5. What has the teacher ? 2Ber ift in bcm (Baxim ? %a^ ^at bcr Sel;rev ? 4. Where is my father ? 6. When was the pupil here ? 2Bo ifi meiu^^ater? ilBatm tuar ber ed;uler ^ier? Ohskrve from these examples : I. That the construction of Direct Interrogative Sentences is exactly the same in German as in English, as far as the position of Verb and Subject is concerned. ^ 2. That in both languages the question-word always begins the sentence. Vocabulary. (An Asterisk (*) after a word signifies that the plural has Umlaut.) Tuesday, '^mx^s'taQ marsh, swamp, ber ©um^f * enemy, bcr ^einb day, bcr %aQ finger, ber giiifler carpet, ber %cppid) Friday, grci'tag curtain, ber ^oi'(;an9 * foot, bcr ^u6 * week, bie 2Kod;e general, bcr (General' room, ba§ dimmer young man, youth, ber ^iino'lintj thirty, brei^ig emperor, bcr ^laifer five, funf acquirements, bie ^cnntniffe long, tang king, ber SUn'iQ Wednesday, ber 9)?itf luod^ Monday, ber 9Jion'tiig officer (military) bcr Dffi^ier' town, city, btc ©tabt * Sunday, ber ©onn'tag S. , i ber (Snim'nli»Mtb aturaay, s " ~ ^ "'^ ( or ©am^'tag new, ncu magnificent, \ixad)ixQ red, rot seven, fie6cn white, lueig where, tuo? -» 6* t§23 §23] CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. 35 :her? ev? here ? er ^ier? ntences r as the i becrins ilaut.) um^f* EXERCISE VII. A. 1. (Sin ^a^r \)ai jjublf ^lonatc unb in jebem 3}?onat finb breijia 2:a3e. 2. ^ie §dnbe biefcr 3Kabd;en finb !Iein. 3. ^ie ©artcn m biefen Stcibten h)urben im griifjling fc^on. 4. 2)ic 2:a0e finb im eommer lang, aber im SBinter luerben fie furj unb fait. 5. 2)ie 5Jlutter meineg greunbeg h)ar geftern in ber ©tabt. 6. ^ie 5lenntniffebeg Sefjrergfinb groj. 7. ^ie 3Sor^dnge bicfe^ 3immerg finb \oi\% aber bie Se^^ic^e finb rot. 8. 2)ie ©c^hjager biefer Dffijiere finb ©enerale. B. 1. The horses and dogs of this young man are hand- some. 2. We have two feet and two hands, and each hand has five fingers. 3. The emperor and the king were enemies, but now they are friends. 4. These trees are old, but they are still beautiful. 5. The curtains and carpets in this room are new and magnificent. 6. Every week has seven days: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday. 7. The sons are tall, but the father is not quite so tall. 8. The funeral of the king was magnificent. 9. My father has two apple-trees in his garden. 10. Where are the frogs ? In the spring they are in the marshes. ORAL EXERCISE VII. 1. Wo waren die Briider seiner Mutter gestern ? 2. Sind die Vorhange weisz oder rot ? 3. Was hat sein Vater im Garten? 4. Wer war gestern in der Stadt.? 5. Wessen Schwager sind Offiziere ? 6. Welche sind die Tage dei Woche ? ^^ LKSSON VI 11. I§a4 LESSON VIII. CONJUGATION OF ^nllCII, to have. -- placE OF PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 24. Paradicm ()!.• ^,lllCll, to hr r Priucipal Parts. Pkks. lN,.m. babfii Jm,.k. Ind.c. Inittc Pasp Part. ger;abt Indicative. Subjunctive. id) babe, I hnvo bu bafi, thou Jiast cr bat, he lias Unv babcii, we have ibv babt, ye liave fie I;abcil, tliey liave Pkksent. id; l;abc, I (may) have, etc. bu f;abc(l cr Iiabc luiv babcn il;v babct fie l;abcu ImPKRI'KCT. id) ()aHr I had i,„ „jittc, 1 had (mighthave), bu battcft, thou hadst bu bancft fete ci- battc, he liad ev l;iittc luiv battfii, we had jyiv biiitcu tin- hatH ye had u^, 1^^^^,^ fie batten, they liad |ie inittcu Perfect. (Pres. of l)al)cii -f- \\ Part.) I have had, etc. j (,,,,3.) ,,,,^^ j,^^^^ ^^^ id) babe bu baft cr \\\i h)ir babcn ibr hK\hi \ fie ^aben J I iK^aM td^ babe bu babeft cr babe ioir baben ibr babct fie \)ah^\\ ^ Sr^aM C§a4 §34] PARADIGM OF f)ahtn. 37 Indicative. ^iljaU e, etc. lave), [etc. Subjunctive. Pluperfect. (Imperf. of ()abcu + I'. Tart.) I had had, etc. I had (mi<;ht have) had, etc. id; \)atic bu l;attc[t er ijaiU tuir I;attcn il;r (;attct fie Ijatkn Hc^abt id; bdttc bu l;attc[t er I;dttc h)ir (;dttcn \\)t I;dttct fie l;dtten Future. (Pres. of tBcrUeil + Infin. of \]ah(l\.) I shall have, etc. I shall have, etc. id; ttjcrbc 1 id; iucvbe bu tuirft bu tucrbcft crtuirb U-^-,. ev Jucrbc tmrtt>crbeu ^ ^ tvirtocrbcn ^ti^M \l)x lucrbet fien?erben ^ if)r tucrbct fie luerben Future Perfect. (Future of {)abcn + P. Part.) I shall have had, etc. ic^ h)erbe ^ahtn bu iuirft er iDirb tuir tuerben if)r iuerbet fie Juerben I shall have had, etc. id; hjcrbe gc^aBt fjadcu Simple. (fmpf. Subj. of Juerbcu -f Infin. of t)al)cn.) I should have, etc. Conditional. bu iucrbcft er hjcrbc toir trerben ibr iuerbet fie tuerben nc^abt i^ahtn id; miirbc ) ^ ^ buiDiirbeft ) Ctt Compound. (Simple Cond. of l)ahm + Past Part.) I should have had, etc. LESSON VIII. «5- ^ahtn er hjiirbe h3trtt)urbcn i^r n^iirbet fie it)urbcn , Imperative, l^abc (bu), have (thou) l)aht (ibr), have (ye) Conditional. er ttiiirbe "j fie hjiirben J infinitive; (au) Ijahtn, (to) have fic^ofit (ju) ^aben, (to) have had Participles. Pres. ^abcnb, having Past, gc^abt, had. 25. Use of Auxiliaries of Tense. — i. gabcn forms the perfect tenses of all transitive and most ^intransitive verbs precisely as above. » In any verb not conjugated with fein (see 4, below) : The Present of \)ahm + P. Part, of any verb form the Perfect of that verb. The Imperfect of ^a6en+ P. Part, of any verb form the Pluperfect of that verb. 2. mtvhtn forms the Future and Simple Conditional thus: The Present of h)erben -1- Infin. of any verb form the Future. The Imperf. Subj. of toerben + Infin. of any verb form the Simple Conditional. ^ 3- The Future of ^aben + P. Part, of any verb (not con- jugated with fein) form the Future Perfect. The Simple Conditional of f)aUn + P. Part, of any verb (not conjugated with fein) form the Compound Con- ditional. 4. (Scin replaces ^aben in the Perfect Tenses of many Intransitive Verbs. (See § q.cj.) Comoare the En t-u^,. l _ . tired and are now in the garden. 7. To-morrow we shall have ws^r [§§ 26^ ) iDerben 31] PARADIGM OF Io6en. 41 >w. ii'bera irm. 2, be einen nbfd;u^e gcne^m, 3et;rer§ ? )e l^abcn. ^ Setter I unferm ! hjerben J So^ne 2§ Setts r l^atten meinen Jreunbc tter \vax Ve had ds. 4. 5. We )ecame .11 have a holiday, for it is Saturday. 8. We were in the garden yesterday and the trees are already green. 9. What has he had? He has had apples and nuts. 10. Dogs, wolves, and foxes are animals. ORAL EXERCISE VIII. 1. Wer hatte Recht und wer hatte Unrecht ? 2 Wann werden wir einen Feiertag haben? 3. Wo sind die Segel- schiffe? 4. Wessen Sohne haben Wagen und Pferde^ 5 Warum wurden die Gaste miide? 6. Welche Gemaide'sind schon ? LESSON IX. WEAK CONJUGATION : loBctt. - DEPENDENT SENTENCES - PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 27. The stem of a verb is what is left when the termina- tion of the Present Infinitive (-c„ or -«) is dropped, as: .^ab-en, stem ^ah ; lob-en, stem Uh. 28. The Principal Parts of a verb are the Present In- finitive, Imperfect Indicative, and Past Participle. 29. Any verb, when these principal parts are given, may be conjugated throughout, by using the auxiliaries, precisely as in the paradigm of ^aUn in Less. VIII. 30. Weak verbs are those which form the Imperfect by adding -U, and the Past Participle by prefixing «- and adding -t to the stem, as: lob-en, to praise (stem hh), Imperfect lob-tc, P. Part.- gc-Iob-t ; tabel-n, to blame (stem (ttUcI), Imperf. tabeMc, P. Part, ge-tabel-t. Note. — Weak verbs are also called J^e^z^ar or Mocfern. 31. Paradigm of foBcn, to praise. Principal Parts. Pres. Infin. lobtn IMPF. iNDic. lobtc Past Part, ^tloht 43 Indicative. LESSON IX. Present. t§3» Su Junctive. ic^ lobe, I praise (am praising, ic^ lobe, I (may) praist do praise) bu Iob(e)P, thou praisest, etc. bu lobefl, thou (mayest) praise er lob(e)t, he praises cr lobe, he (may) praise h)ir lobcn, we praise h?ir loben, we (may) praise \l)X Iob(e)t, ye praise i^r lobet, ye (may) praise fte loben, they praise fie lobeit, they (may) praise • ■ ■ Imperfect. (Same form for both moods.) tc^ lobte, I praised (was praising, etc.) bu lobtefl, thou praisedst er lobte, he praised U)ir lobtcn, we praised i^r lobtet, ye praised fie lobten, they praised Perfect. • (Pres. of l)aben + P. Part of loben.) ic^ ^aU gefofit, I have praised (been ic^ l^ahi gelofit praising) bu ^aft gelobt, thou hast praised, etc. bu l^abeft gelobt, jc. » Pluperfect. > (Imperf. of I)oben + P. Part. loben.) \6) l[iatte gelofit, I had praised (been \^ ^atU gclaBt, K. praising), etc. Future. (Present of tOCrtCIt + Infin. of loben.) td^ irerbe (oBen, 1 shall praise (be id^ h)erbe lofien ' praising) bu mirft loben, thou wilt praise, etc. bu toerbeft loben, K, ill t§3» §30 PARADIGM OF loUtX. Indicativa. •Future Perfect. . (Future of ^o6eit + r. Part, of (cbeit.) 43 Subjunctive. id^ trerbc gclobt l)aUn, I shall havo praised bu toirft gelobt f)ah^n, thou wilt have praised, etc. _, Conditional. • Simple. (Impf. Subj. of mxtcn -f Infin of lobeii.) id} toiirbe lokn, I should praise(be praising) etc. ■ Imperative. lobe (bu), praise (thou) tobe er, let him praise loben luir, let us praise lobt (i^r), praise (ye) loben fie, let them praise Participles. ^^^. mmb, praising . p^sf. gclobt, praised • Remarks. _ i. e is sometimes found in the termination, of he followmg pans . Pres. Ind. b« foKOft, er IoD(e)t, i^r (oKe)t • Impf (Ind. and Subj.) i<^(ob(c)te, etc. ; P. Part.VeIo6(e)t etc .nd .s^always retained in certain verbs. (See ] 35 W;,' 2. Note again the persistent e of the Pres. Subj in GeS nf;^::!'""^'" '°™^ °' *^ ^"'' ^- '° "« --ded I praise i /_„ • t ^^ * (praise I ?) ic^ toerbc gelobt ^aben bu hJerbcft gclobt i^aben, k. Compound; (Simple Cond. of Ijaben -f P. Part. of loben.) td^ h)urbe ^tUU f)aUn, I should have praised, etc. Infinitive, (au) loben, (to) praise. • gctobt (^u) ^aben, (to) have . praised } ) praising )- id; lube am 1 praising? C lobe id; ? I do praise ) "lii A IJiciismg r >- do I praise > ) ■ 44 LESSON IX. [§§31- (he pr. ised not) \ ^^ j^^^,^ (praised he not?) he was not praising > ^.^^^ was he not praising? he did not praise ) did he not praise ? J ntc^t? I have been praising, etc., id) l)abc gelobt, etc. Had I been praising ? ^atte id) gelobt ? 4. The only true Imperative forms are those of the 2. sing. and 2. pUir., lok, Mt. For the other persons, the pres. subj. is used, as: lobe cr, let him praise; loben linr, let us praise; loben fie, let them praise;— the verb preceding the pronoun! Construction of Dependent Sentences. 32. The Verb in a Dependent Sentence comes /as/, as : 3c^ c^huh, ba^ er ®elb ^at I believe that he has money. Remember : that the auxiliary is the verb in compound tenses. 33. In compound tenses the Participle and Infinitive immediately precede the verb; if both be present, the Parti- ciple precedes, as in principal sentences, thus : 3cl) nl«uk, bap er ®clb gc^oBt Ijat, I believe, that he has /za(/ money. 3d) Ciian^i, bap er ®elb IftaBcn mirb, I believe that he will /lave money. 3ci> glaube, bap er ®elb gcjnBt Ijcihn toixi, 1 believe that he will have /la^ money. Note.— The place of the Subject, in a Dependent Sentence, is usually the same as in English. 34. Prepositions governing the Accusative only. 95i§, bur^, fur, gcflctt, ajnc, urn, tuibcr. His, (i) till, until (/me), as: I shall not come until to- morrow {M inovgcn). [§§3i- UUt cr nic^t? 2. Sing, es. subj. praise ; ironoun. ^asff as: npound ifinitive i Parti- ence, is y. itil to- 34] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 45 (2) up to, as far as (/>/ac6^, as : He travelled with us as far as (Jig) Montreal. burrS, through ; as : He rode through the forest (bur* ben 2BaIb). fur, for; as: That is for my friend (fiir meinen greunb); the scissors are not a toy for children (fiir ^inber). flCgcu, towards, against (not necessarily denoting hos- tility), as: The enemy advanced towards (or against) the bridge (gcgcu bte 5Briicfe). C^m, without ; as : We cannot travel without money (ahnt ©clb). ^ ^^ urn, (i) around, about; as: We drove around the town (urn bie ©tabt). (2) at, about (//>;), as : He came at four o'clock (urn Dier U^r); it happened at (or about) Christmas (nm 2Bet^nad ten). toibcr, against {opposiiion, hostility^,, as : He swam against the stream (mibcr ben ^trom); the soldiers were fighting against the enemy (inibcr \^txi geinb). Remark. - ^urc^, fur, and um are generallv contracted -th the Neuter of the unemphasized Definite Article, thus: burc^ ba§ = burrjg (burd;'g) fur bag = fiirg (fur'g) um bag = urns (um'g) Vocabulary. believe, gluuben bve, rie6en hope^offen make, do, mac^en ^"y' ^''"f^" say, fagen laugh, \(x^)zx^ send, [d;i(fen ""^^ ^^^^^ play, Ipielcn learn, remen geH, berfaufen : t 46 LESSON IX. [§§34- weep, cry, \mnm bishop, bcriBi'[d;of*<^ German, 3)eutfcf) servant, bcr 2)iener industry, diligence, bcr ^leig young lady. Miss, ba^ Jrciulein cardinal, bcr ^arbinal ~ noise, ber Sarm Latin, ba§ Satcin palace, bcr ^ala'ft* pope, bcr ^a^ft * Idiom: to take a walk, Note. — A past tense after UJenn place, square, bcr ^lal^ "^ ' ring, bcr diiuQ walk, ber S^ajier'Qang * time, bie 3nt , good, kind, flut merry, merrily, luftig sad, traurig that (conj.), bag because, hJCil if, iucnn why, Jtiarum'? efiicn Spajfergang ma*en. ('if') is put in the subj. mood. EXERCISE IX. ^. 1. :Dte ^arbinale unb 33i[(i^ofe h)arcn geftern im $alafle bc§ ^a|)ftcg. 2. ^a§ ^rciulctn Irirb bicfe SRinge faufen, benn fie finb fc^on. 3. Dcr ^IKalcr tDurbc bicfe^ ©emcilbc nid^t t)cr!aufcn. 4. ^c^ njiirbe biefcn Diing faufen, hjcnn i^ reic^ irdre. 5. ^at er eg gegraubt .? ©r ^at e§ gcglaubt, tDcil fctn 3Sater c^ gcfagt ^at 6. ^ie ©c^iiler ^aben bid Sarm gcmac^t. 7. 3Btr roben ben Siingling, tccil er ftetgig ift. 8. !Der ^onig n){rb feine ©cnc» rale gegen ben ^einb fc^iden. 9. g^ctne ©d^toeftcr h)irb §anb* fd^ul)e faufen, benn t^re §anbfc^u^e finb fd^tet^t. 10. SBir Mrbcn l^cute cincn S^ajicrgang burrf; bie ©tabt mtdjen, toenn bag SSctter fd^on iuare. 11. 6ie tDiirben auc6 cinc« (S^ajiergang gemad^t f)abcn, tDcnn fie 3cit gc^abt flatten. 12. ^,e Jmrb fagen, bag id^ ^Jlcc^t Ifiabe. 13. Sd) ^abe immcr ge^offt, bag er lerncn h)urbe. 14. 6ic liebt i^rcn SSater unb t^re ^JJutter, benn fie finb gut. 15. @r hjiirbe ba§ ©cmalbe ntd^t gelobt ^abcn, benn e§ Ujar nid^t fd^on. B. 1. What were they doing yesterday ? They were playing in the garden. 2. Thlt gentleman will nrm'cp hi'' ^'-r-^-^Tfe^ for they are industrious. 3. We have taken a walk about 55J ENDINGS OF WEAK VERBS. ' 47 the town. 1. The squares in those cities are very fine 5 Where were the daughters of the officers .? They were livin- in a convent. 6. Without industry we shall not learn mucir 7. The boy was playing with the dog. 8. The gentleman has sold his horses and carriages. 9. What are the young ladies doing now.? 10. Why was she crying.? She was crying because she was sad. 11. They are laughing because they are merry. 12. We* shall have learned much in a week. 13. I am laughing because the child is playing so merrily. 14. To-day we are learning German, to-morrow we shall learn Latin. 15. We have bought shoes and stockings for the beggars. ORAL EXERCISE IX. 1. Weshalb hat sie gelacht? 2. Wer machte so viel Larm.? 3. Wo haben die Fraulein einen Spaziergang gemacht .? 4 Was hat die Frau gekauft } 5. Weshalb hat seine Schwester Handschuhe gekauft ? 0. Was werden wir morgen machen ? LESSON X. WEAK VERBS (continued). DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES: — 2)0rf MODEL, OR PLURAL IN -Cr. 35. Endings of Weak Verbs in Simple Tenses. Indicative. Sing. 1. — e 3. -(C)t I>/ur. 1. —en 3. —en 3sent. Imperfect. SUBJUNCT. Ind. andSubj — c -(c)tc -eil -(c)tcfl — c -(c)tc —en — (c)tcn —it —(e) let — CIl -{i)itxi Imperative. Sing. 2. — e Plur. 2. —{c)i Infinitive. —en Participles. Pres. — enb Past, ge— (e)t 48 LESSON X. [§§35- Imperative. Plur, 2. rebet (ifjr) Remarks.— i. Observe the following endings: {a) Final -t of the 3. sing, occurs only in the Pres. Indie. {b) The 2. sing, has -ft except in the Imperative. {c) The 2. plur. has -t throughout. 2. Verb-Stems in -b or -t (tj), or in -m or -n preceded by another consonant, retain -c throughout after the stem, as : tcbcn, to speak. * Imperfect. Sing. 1. id) rebcte S. bu rebcteft etc. Thus : arbeiten, to work : Irf) arbeitcte ; atmen, to breathe : bu atmcft ; regnen, to rain : eg regnct. 3. Verb-Stems in a sibilant (§, frj, g, y, j) retain -c ir the 2. sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj. only, as : tan^en, to dance : bu tanjcft ; reifen, to travel : bu reifeft. 4. Verb-Stems in -cl and -cr drop c of the stem before terminations in -c (i. e. in i. sing. Pres. Ind., i. and 3. sing. Pres. Subj., and 2. sing. Imper.), and, except in the Subjunc^ tive^ never insert c after \ or n, as : Pres. Ind. Sing. 2. bu rebcft 3. er rebct I'/ur. 2. il)x rebct Pres. Ind. id) tabic bu tabclft er ta'btU wix tabcin i^r tabcU fie tabcin tabclit, to blame. Pres. Subj. tabic tablcft tabic tablcn tablet Imperfect. id^ tabclte, etc. Imperative. tabic tabcit P. Part. getabcit tablcn 5. Foreign verbs in -icrcil C-trcn^ do not take th^ nrpfi , . . - - — ^ — ., ... gc- m the P. Part., as : ftub-ieren, to study : P. Part, ftubicrt 37] DECLENSION: ^Otf MODEL. 49 (not gc-ftubtert) ; 6ombarbicrcn, to bombard: P. Part, houu barbictt. 6. Verbs with the prefixes 6c- cr- cm^- cnt-, flC-, ticr- aer- also omit the prefix gc- in the P. Part., as : h^a\)Un, P. Part. bcsa^It ; tierfc^hjenben, tJcrWmenbet. 36. Declension of bttS 2)orf, the village. Singular. Nom. bag 3)orf, the village Gen. beg 3)orf(ejg, of the village Dat. bem ^orf(e), (to, for) the village Ace. bag 3)orf, the village Plural. bie ^iirfcr, the villages ber 2)iirfer, of the villages ben ^iirfcrn, (to, for) the villages bie ^iirfcr, the villages Remarks. — I. The Singular is formed precisely as in the So^n model. (See § 21.) 2. Observe -cr of the Plural, with the additional -n of the Dative. 3. All Substantives of this Declension with a, 0, u or (x\x in the stem take Umlaut. 37. In this way are declined : 1. Most neuter monosyllables (exceptions in App.E.). 2. Substantives ending in -t(J)um. 3. Five neuters with prefix @e-, viz. : bag ©emac^, the apartment bag ©ef^enft, the spectre bag ©emut, the temper, dis- bag ©etranb, the garment , P^^^^^^'^ (al3o©eMt; see § 64) bag @efd;Iecr;t, the sex . ' ^^ 4. Two foreign neuters, viz. : \i^.% ^eoiment, the regiment: bag §o^ital (or ©)3ital), the hospital. so 5. The following .5 fiine bcr ^i)[cluirf)t, the villain ber ©cift, the spirit bcr ©ott, the God ber Seib, the body bcr 3Kanii, the man, husband (Lat. vir) LESSON X. masculines f§37 ber ^anb, the edge, margin ber ^ormunb, the guardian ber 2BaIb, the forest ber 2Burm, the worm (also 3)orn, Drt ; see App. E.) Further examples (Sing, like eoF;n) : ^ag 6c^Io|3, the castle, palace: Flur. n.g.a. ^m\\tX %^i Su4 the book : nur. n. g. a. ©Uc^cr, D. Siic^etn. Ja« Sinb, the child .- 7y«^. n. g. a. Sinbtr, d. fii„betn 5Da« §aua, the house : /-/^^ n. g. a. §aufcr, d. §aufetn. Vocabulary. to row rubern child, bag ^inb 3 shake, fc^iittern dress, bag ^leib 3 waste, t)erfd;h)enben clothes, pi. of ^leib exercise, task, bie 2rufga6eu>K song, bag Sieb 3 leaf, bag ^latt 3 ^gg, bag @i 3 possession, property, bag (Sigentum 3 earth, bie ©rbe gardener, ber ©artner I fowl, bag §u\)n 3 courage, spirit, ber mnt a woman, wife, bag Seib 3 yellow, gelb enough, genug well (adv.), gut a long while, lange too, 311 EXERCISE X. f.ff ■ o' l"l !'!:?^' ?'c^'" "' *'*"" fl^'^' *«"" *">« better ift f"";..',!'! '"l'^ l'^\5!"^'^^"' -^eil fie i^„ Slufgabe „i«. ,.".iv.. 5)u„». o. ;ym ffiuuer ftubtsrtcn bie Siinglmge; im f§37 §37l DECLENSION : 2)orf MODEL. 51 margin lardian :e App. ern. inner, d xn. iferit. WtiA b.3 ©ommcr arBciteten [ic. 4. „^u rubcvft nic^t ^djmU genug, man SBrubcr/' ^ac^k id;. 5. Dicjc ^JJiaimcv liebcn i^rc iSeibcr unb ^inber. 6. 2)cr Se(;vcr [agtc, bafj bic i^inbcr 511 i^iel 2dxm ntac^ten. 7. ^er ^onig rebete mit ben ©eneralen, unb lobte ben Tint i^rer ^egimenter. 8. ®ie SSormiinber biefer Hinber finb ^ii5[elt)ic^ter, benn fie f)aben bag ©igentum ber ^inber toerfc^tvcnbet. 9. 3)ic SBiirmer leben in ber @rbe, aber bie 0=ifd;e leben im Staffer. 10. 2Bo finb bie Gier ber ^ii^ner? 6ie finb in unferen ilorben. ll! ^^ toerbe mube, h)eil id; gegen ben ©tvorn rubre. 12. ®er ^aifer l}at bie ©enerale getabett, aber i^re Sf^egimenter i)at er gelobt. B. 1. The general has bombarded the town. 2. The woman was buying books and clothes for her children. 3. The gardener is shaking the apple-tree. 4. The children were learning songs. 5. The boy is industrious; he has studied well. 6. The apartments of the palaces are magni- ficent. 7. It rained yesterday, but it will not rain to-day. 8. We have rowed a long while against the stream. 9. These men travelled through towns and villages. 10. The hospitals in London are large and fine. 11. The leaves of these trees are large and beautiful. 12. This gentleman would buy my houses, if he had money enough. ORAL EXERCISE X. 1. Weshalb warden die Blatter gelb? 2. Wessen Regi- menter hat der Konig getadelt.? 3. Was sagte der Lehrer.? 4. Wo leben die Wi.irmer > 5. Was lernten die Kinder ? 6. Wurde dieser Herr das Haus kaufen ? etter tfi •e nic^t je; im 52 LESSON XI. [§§.^8- 38. LESSON XI. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Declension of Personal Pronouns. First Person. S^g' N. id;, I G. mciner (mein), of me I>. mir, (to, for) me A. mid;, me Plur. N. h)ir, we G. imfcr (unfrcr), of us D. ung, (to, for) us A. ung, us ! Third Person. Singular. Second Person, bu, thou beincr (bein), of thee bir, (to, for) thee bid;, thee '^¥, ye, you euer (eurer), of you tnd), (to, for) you euc^, you I FEM. fie, she i^rer (i^r), of her if)r, (to, for) her fie, her NEUTER. REFLEXIVE ev3, it (all genders). feiner (fein. e§), of it if;m,(to,for) fidf;, (to, for) himself, It herself, itself eg, it fid^, himself, herself, itself MASC. N. er, he G. feiner (fcin), of him D. i^m,(to,for) him A. i^n, him XT r ^1 Plural. N. fte, they ■\ G. i^rer (i^r), of them I D. i^nen, (to, for) I ^^^ them I ALL GENDERS A. fie, them J 2. The form t^rti fVio. ^ oi~~ ,„ , . ^ . , " - ^^ ^^ ^'^" ^- •^^"S- gen. neuter is only used in cer- tarn phrases, as: ^c^ bin cl mube, I am tired of it. ftc^, (to, for) them- selves fid), themselves [§§s» 39] IDOMATIC USES OF C8. 53 3. The gen. and dat. of the 3. sing, neuter do not occur, except when referring to persons (e. g. ^dbc^en, grciulein). 4. The Pronouns of the 3. sing, must agree in gender with the substantive to which they refer, as : ^aftbubcn^ut? Hast thou the hat ? §afti'ubte33Iumc? Hast thou the flower ? SBoiftboggJiabc^en? Where is the girl ? 3a, \i) f)a6e iljn. Yes, I have it. Sf^ein, tc^ babe fie nid^t. No, I have it not. m ift im ©arten. She is in the garden. 5. The Pronouns of the 3. person are 7iot used after Prepo- sitions, when referring to inafiimate objects, but are replaced by the adverb i)a(r), there, before the Preposition, the r being inserted if the Preposition begins with a vowel, as : SBift bu mit biefcm ©ur^e jufrieben? ^a, ic^ bin bamtt gufrteben. Art thou satisfied with this book ? Yes, I am satisfied with it {therewith). How much did you pay for this hat } I paid two dollars for it, bafiir (therefor). What have you in your purse ? I have money in it (bttrin, therein), ■ 39. Idiomatic Uses of c8. I. Before the verb, representing the real subject, which follows the verb, and with which the verb agrees, as : Who is it ? It is my cousin ; it is my cousins. 2Ber ift c§? (|0 ift mein ^Setter ; e§ finb meine ^tiitxn. @8 leuc^itct bie ©onnc, the sun shines, i. e., it is the sun that shines. @S leuc^tcn bic 6terne, (it is) the stars (that) shine. 1 54 LESSON XI. [§§39- Remark. - ©^ in this construction is often rendered by there ' in English, as i ^ There is a bird in this cage. Crg ift ein ^Bogel in biefcm 53auer. There are three books on this table. 6-8 finb brei Sucker auf biefem 2:i[c^. (See also e^3 gicOt, Less. XXXVII.) 2. When the real subject represented b- :§ is a personal pronoun, with the verb /o be, e^ follows ' the verb which agrees with the real subject in person and number, as: It is I, c^c^ Bi„ e^, ( 2)u Bift eg. It is you, ^ g^r fctb eg. ©ie finb eg. It is we, It is they. Is it you ? tuir finb eg. fie finb eg. finb eieeg? 3. After the verb, representing a predicate or a clause and corresponding to the English 'one ' or *so,' as : Is your father a soldier.? Yes, he is one (eg). We are free, and you shall be so (eg) too. 40. Use of Pronouns in Address. I. 3)n is used only in addressing persons with whom we are very mtnnate, or towards whom we use no ceremony also m addressing the Supreme Being, as; So 6ift bn, Hekry^rcunb? Where are you, dear friend? SBa-g macBft bn, mcin .tliub? What are you doing, my child ? ^.. »ji?e» ^tM^, \2}M\,x\ we praise ihee, o Godl MJ REFLEXIVK and RECiPROCAL PRONOUNS. 53 2. 35r (plur. of bu) is used in aadr-ssing a number of per- «ons, each of whom we should address by bu, as : 2Ba^ mac^t ijr, ^inbcr? What are you doing, children? 3. In all other cases we use for 'you' in German, whether sing, or plur., the pronoun of the Third Plural : (Bit, g^rcr, 3§ncn, (Sic, distinguished by a ^^///^/ /eUer, (See also § 43.) 41. Paradigm of (often with Reflexive Pronouns. Present Indicative. Sm^. 1. tc^ Io6c mi^, I praise myself 2. bu lobft bidj, thou praisest thyself 3- «r ^ he ^ / himself she >- praises -j herself it ) ( itself we praise ourselves ye praise yourselves they praise themselves So throughout the verb, as : Perfect : ^c^ ^a^e mic^ gelobt, bu ^aft hid) gelobt, er hat M gelo&t, etc. ' 42, Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns — fclfifl. 1. The Pronouns of the First and Second Persons express re/exive action without a specia' form, as shown by the above paradigm, but those of the Third Person have the form firj. 2. These pronouns are also used in the Plural to express redprocal action, as : We met each other ; they will see each other again Wx becjegneten \\xi.in mcui i^atcr ift jel^t ml)l 13. ^Ofaric, liebft bu bcine (Sltcrn? ^a unb fic hcbcn mid; aud;. 14. ^d) imirbe einen e^ajiergang mit ^f)ncn mad;cn, itjcnn ic^ 3eit i)atu. 15. .^at bcr Scorer Maxk gctabca? ^a, er F,at fie getabclt. 16. ^ie et^iUer loben fic6 fclbft, \ml fic ir;re STufgabc fo fc^meff gcmad^t babcn. 17 ^ir luurben nm felbft auc^ lobcn, menu wiv unfre ^Tufgabe gcmad;t Flatten. 18. @r it)urbc fic^ fd;amen, h)enn er mit feincr ^lufgabe mc^t fertig mare. 19. Segf;alb lobcn biefe ^unftler einanber? 6ie loben cmanber, ttjcil i^re ©cmcilbe fc^on finb. 20. einb ®ic mit memcr STrbeit juf ricben ? ^JJcin, i,^ bin nic^t bamit aufricben. B. 1. Is the table large? No, it is small. 2. Her father has bought her a ring. 3. Were the fishes in your basket? Yes, they were injt. 4. Who has told it [to] her ? 5. John have you my sho^s ? No, I have them not. 6. We sit down because we are tired. 7. Even the beggars of this city have snoes and stockings. 8. Who has bought this hat? 9. I : it myself in the city, and paid four dollars for it. lo, ^)0U 58 LESSON XII. [§§43 Charles and his teacher love each other very much. 11. Mother, have you bought me apples or nuts? 12. Mr. A., here is a chair for you ; sit down. 13. Has the teacher blamed him? Yes, he had not done his exercise. 14. Do you believe that this milk is good ? Yes, it is very good. 1 5. The teacher is ashamed of her, because she has not finished (with) her work. ORAL EXERCISE XI. 1. Wurden sie einen Spaziergang mit mir machen ? 2. Weshalb ioben Sie sich so viel .? 3. Was sagten Sie mir ? 4. Sind Sie mit meiner Arbeit zufrieden ? 5. Was werden wir morgen mtichen .? 6. Werden Sie morgen Ihre Eltern bosuchen .? LESSON XII. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. -USE OF ARTICLES. 43. Possessive Adjectives. First Person. Seconi" Person. Sing, mcin^ my bcilt, thy Plur. unfcr^ our cucr, your Third Person. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Sing, fcin, his (its) i^r, her (its) fcin, its Flur. tjr, their Poss. Adj. of Polite Address : ^^r. REMArKS. — I. The Possessive Adjectives are the Genitive Cases of the respective Personal Pronouns, declined after the mcin Model. (See § 8, above.) 2. Unfer and euer may drop c of tLe stem wh*»n inflected ; or they may drop c of the termination, unless the termination is -c or -cr, as : unferc or unfrc ; unfcrc§, un{rr§ or unfcrg. 3. Observe the correlatives of the Pronoun.s n( Address: btt — bcin i§t — - CUiT 44l USE OF THE ARTICLES. 59 <( u Thus -Ne say : bu l^aft htine ^Tufgabe gelernt, ) ijr f}aht cure „ f you have learnt your (Sic ^aben 3Jre ,, " j lesson Adj. ot Third Plural as Pronoun of Address. 4. Observe also the correlatives of the Third Person • Referring to subst. masc, sing. fcj„ ^whether animate " fern. " i^y J or inanimate ** neuter " fp|,i tosubsts. plur.(allgenders) \\x Thus we say ; ^cr §unb ^at fcincn ^noc^en berroren (lost) ^tc Slume ,, i§rc 33Idtter „ 3)tt8 33uc^ „ fcinc , '' 5. The possessive adjectives agree in gender with both the possessor and the thing possessed. The termination will depend on the gender (number and case) of the substantive they qualify (the thing possessed) ; the stem (as above) on the gender of the substantive to which they refer (the possessor) lady"gcn7ra^r'"i^ "TT^^^ -^^-= ^a^djen, girl, ^rdurein, young aoy. generally take the possessive ad ective referring to them in the feminine, agreeing with the sex rather than the gender, as: 3)ag yjZcibc^eu liebt t^rc 9Wutter. The girl loves her mother. For Possessive Pronouns, see Less. XXIII. **• Use of the Articles. The Definite Article is required in German, contrary to English usage, in the following cases : ^ i.^Before^all substantives used in the full extent of t^^-.* Signincation (i. e. in a general as well as in a par- ttadar sense); hence : » 6o LESSON XII. [§44 {a) Before nouns (sing, or plur.) denoting a whole class, as: $cr SJJenfd^ ift fterblic^, Man is mortal; ^ic 3Sogel ^aben ^Zefter, Birds have nests. {b) Before names of materials, abstract nouns, etc., ased in their unlimited sense, not partitively, as : ^tt§ ©Ia§ ift burc^fic^tig. Glass is transparent; ^ttg ©otb ift ttjcrtDoder oX% tiag ®i(6cr. Gold is more valuable than silver ; but : @o(b unb Silftcr f)abe id) nic^t, Gold and silver I have not (have none of). %\t 9^ot ift bie 3Jlutter bcr ©rfinbung. Necessity is the mother of invention; ^ic m\xS\l ift eine 5lunft, Music is an art ; but : %x ftubiert 9Wufif, He studies music (Hmited sense). Note. — In Proverbs and Enumerations this article is omitted, as: 9iot tcnnt felii ®cbot, Necessity knows no law; gWuflf unb ajlolcrei fiub fd[)i3ne ^unfle, Music and painting are fine arts. 2. Before names of mountains, lakes, seas, rivers, ^/orests, streets, seasons, months and days of tlie week, as : %tX SSefut), Mount Vesuvius. ^cr Ontario, Lake Ontario. ^ic ^^emfe, the Thames. %tx (Sjjeffart, the (forest of) Spessart. ^ic griebric^ftrafee, Frederick Street. §44] USE OF THE ARTICLES. Oi Sot ^tixf)lmQ, in spring. ^cr Sanuar t[t fait, January is cold. »m montaQ, on Monday. Also before |,immer, @rbe, ^olle, as: 3m ^immef, in heaven ; Sur @rbe, to earth ; and before places of public resort, as : Sur ©c^ule gel;en, to go to school. 3c^ wax in ber 5lirc^e, I was at church. 3. Before names of countries when not npuf^r ^. i, preceded by an adjective, as: ' ''' ^^'" 2)tc (Sd^toei^, Switzerland. 2)Q§ fc^one granfreic^, fair France. B^eirr:^^;:;^:^^^^^^ - ^^^ --^^^ .,, proper Names is Article in German when used distributively (L each) as' 3h)eimar beg ^a^re§, twice a year ^rei 3:^aler bic @ae, three dollars a yard. 5. The Indefinite Article is omitted before the unqualified predicate after fein or toerben, as : unqualified ^^^ ^^ er ift (hjurbe) ©olbat, he is (became) a soldier ; @r ift ctn ta)jferer ©orbat, he is a brave soldier AdieSiv Jl ''''"'' t-'"''' ^^P^^^^^ ^^« Possessive @r fterfte bic §anb tn bic Stafd^e, He put his hand into his pocket • vTi fu;uiien; Qm Ko))f, He shakes his head. 62 LESSON XII. [§44 ©eben ©ie mir bte §anb. Give me your hand. {b) With parts of the person, clothing, etc., the Dative of the Personal Pronoun + Definite Article replace the Pos- sessive Adjective, as : @in ©tein fiel tjm auf ben ^o^f, A stone fell on his head ; (gill 5?agel ^at mir ben Sffocf gerriffen, A nail has torn my coat. Note. — If the subject is the possessor, the reflexive pronoun is used, as : ®r l)at fti^ in ben finger gefd)nttten, He has cut his finger. to cost, foften hurt, wound, Uerle^en cry, weep, Jt)einen draw, jeid^nen doctor, physician, ber Slrjt*^ axe, bie Sljt * 'i~ mountain, hill, ber Serg ^ lead-pencil, ber SBleiftift 5 iron, bag (gifen / window, bag 5^nfter / wing, ber ^liigel / Vocabulary. master, ber 5!Jieifter ' Mont Blanc, ber 5J?ont Slanc music, bie 3Ku[if coat, ber 5Jod *^ Schiller-street, bie ©emitters ftra^e wk tailor, ber ©c^neiber / cloth, bag %\x&) 3 exercise, practice, bie ilBung ^^ hot, (;ei^ light, Iei($t dear, teuer as, when, alg purse, ber ©elbbeutel \ hope, bie §offiiung ^A. ^^, „..^,,, merchant, ber ^aufmannf^^^^ often, oft farewell, (bag) 2ebeh?o{)I i EXERCISE XII. A. 1. libung mad^t ben 3}iei[ter. 2. 3)ie 9Kufif unb bie 95?alerei finb ^iinfte. 3. ^inber, 'i)abi x\)x eure Slufgaben gemac^t? ^^a, tt)ir Baben fie aemacht A 'Tipr Wo«t ^fin" K* -^J- oa^^^ :.. w-„ ©c^toeij. 5. ^ft biefeg Stuc^ teuer? ^a, eg foftet brei ^^aler §44] USE OF ARTICLES. 63 noun IS bte @ae. 6. Xk mmux W^dt i^re ^inber gur Sd;ule. 7. §a6en ©le ©olb m Sfjrem ©elbbeutel? ^c^ ^abe !ein ©olb, aber icB l^abe ©liber. 8. 2Bag lernt bag DJldbc^en ? ©ie krnt i^re 2luf. gabe. 9. 'Der SSater fd;uttelte feinem ©otjne bie §anb unb [agte t^m Sebett)o^I. 10. 3)ie gliigel ber 3SogeI finb fe^r leic^t unb ftarf. 11. ^at ber ©c^neiber ^(jren 9?ocf nac^ ^aufe ge^tcft^ 12. 3^em, er l)at i^n noc^ nic^t ge[cf)icft, aber er toirb i^n morgen [c^icfen. 13. Unfere (gltern reiften in ^eutfc^lanb unb in ber ©c^h^etj. 14. ^m ^uli ift ba§ SBetter oft fe^r ^ei^. 15. !Da§ (Stfen h)irb rot, n^enn e§ ^ei^ mirb. 16. manUn ©ie, bafe icb ^ec^t ^abe? 17. tol berle^te fic^ bie §anb, aU er mit einer m arbeitete. 18. ^c^ hjiirbe ©olbat tt)erben, n)enn ic^ alt genug tocire. 19. 2Bir tourben greunbe ge^abt ^aben, toenn Wxv reicb getoefen i»aren. ^. 1. Gold is yellow, but silver is white. 2. Mary is studying music and painting. 3. Are your parents still living in Frederick-Street > 4. No, they are now living in Schiller-Street. 5. Mont Blanc is a moui. iain in Switzerland. 6. The girl is crying; she has hurt her hand. 7. Is your father a doctor } No, he is a merchant. 8. Glass is trans- parent, and we make windows of it. 9. What are you doing with your lead-pencil.? I am drawing a fiower with it. 10. The emperor is satisfied with his generals. 11. I blame you,' because you are not industrious. 12. What are you drawing now.? I am drawing a bird. 13. Why are you crying, my child? 14. The doctor shook his head, for he had no hope. 15. Would you buy a horse, if you were rich .? 16. Miss b' has sent her mother a present. 17. The girl will visit her parents. ORAL EXERCISE XIL 1. 1st das Gold weisz .? 2. Weshalb weint das Madchen? 3. W^erdeii Sie sich ein Haus kauten ? 4. Sind Sie Soldat? 5 Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 6. Was machen Sie mj^ Ihrem Gelde ? 64 LESSON XIII. t§§ 45- LESSON XIII. CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES: PLACE OF OBJECTS, AD- VERBS, etc. - INDIRECT NARRATION. - PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY, 46. Rules for Position of Objects, Adverbs, etc. Rule i. (a) Pronouns first of all, unless governed by a preposition, when they come after all other objects, ad- verbs, etc. (/^) Adverbs or Ad^'crbial Expressions of Time precede everything except Pronouns without Prepositions, thus : 12 8 4 6 {Germ.) ^c^ fc^icfte i^m ftcftcm (bicfc Sotjc) einen 33rief, 12 8 4 6 {Engl) I sent him a letter yesterday (this week); but: 12 3 4 6 {Germ.) ^d^ fc^itfte gcftcm einen Srief an ijti, 12 8 4 5 {Engl) I sent a letter to him yesterday; 12 3 4 6 6 {Germ.) ^d; f^a^e cs ^cutc meiner (5d;h)efter gefc^idft, 12 3 4 5 6 {Engl) I have sent it to my sister to-day. Rule 2. Of Nouns, persons (unless governed by pre- positions) before things, as : 12 8 4 5 {Germ) ^(^ fc^icfte geftern meincm ©otcr dncn «ricf, 12 3 4 5 {Engl) I sent my father a letter yesterday; but: ^ 12 8 4 5 {Germ) ^c^ fc^icfte gc^tem cincn ©ricf on mcincn mUx, 1 2 a 4 5 {Engl) I sent a letter to my father yesterday. 48) PLACE OF OBJECTS, ETC. 65 Rule 3. Of Pronouns, Personal before all other Pro- nouns, as : %^) l;abc i^m bag (Demonstr. Pron.) gecjeben, I have given him that. Rule 4. Of Personal Pronouns, Direct Object before Indirect Object, as : 1 2 » 4 6 {Germ?) % \) \^(xU eg i^m gegeben, 12 8 4 5 {Engl.) I have given it to him. Rule 5. Adverbs o*" place, cause and manner follow ob- jects in the order named, as : 12 3 4 6 6 7 {Germ,) (gr ^at ba§ 93u^ ^u .^nufc jc^t f(ci§ig ftubtert, 12 8 4 6 e {Engl^ He has studied the book very diligently 7 at home. Remember : i. That in compound tenses all these objects, adverbs, etc., come between tht auxiliary and the participle or infinitive. 2. That any of these members of a sentence may occupy the first place instead of the subject, especially an adverb of time, etc., and that the subject (see § 20, Obs. 2) is then thrown after the verb, as : 1 2 ,3 4 5 ©cftcrtt fc^icfte it^ i^m einen 33rief. 1 234 5 2)icfc aaSot^c fi^idtc id; einen 33rtef (x\y ifjn. 46. Prepositions governing the Dative only. nac^, fcit, t»on, 311 \ ^^^^''^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^ase. tttt§, (i) out of {motion)^ as : He came out of the house (aul bcm ^aufe). I I 456 LESSON XIII. [§40 (2) of {made of), as: This \v §015). 'ise is built of wood (ou0 (3) from {origin), as: He comes from England (aiil Gnglanb) ; from the town (au^ bcr ©tabt). (4) from {cause), as : I did it from fear {tiU gurd;t). CUgcr, (i) outside of {rest\ as : The table is standing out- side of the room (augcr bctti dimmer). (2) except, besides, but, as: I had nothing except (besides, but) my stick (ougcr meincm ©todc). Bet, (i) (near) by, as : The chair stands (near) by the table (Bci bcm or beim %\\6)t). (2) at (the house, etc., of, = Fr. chez), with, as : He lives at the house of (or: with) his uncle (or- at his uncle's), cr tuof;nt ki [eincm Dnfel. (3) about (one's person), with, as : I have no money about (with) me (Bci mir). VXW, with, as : He is coming with (along with) his friend (mit fetnem greunbc) ; he struck the dog with a stick (mit eincm etocfe). ntt«, (I) after {time, order), as : He arrived after his brother (naift feinem 33ruber). (2) to (with names oi places), as : He is going to Quebec (naiS Quebec); to England (noij ©nglanb); home- (wards) (naij §aufc\ (3) according to (often follows its case in this sense) as : This is wrong according to my opinion (naifi memcr S^eumng, 01 meiner aKeinuiig iiocft). fctt, since, as : He has not been here si.xe the war (fcU bcm .^v.vgt, , j,,i vjxxxxM^xi ^af)mi, tor the iab. Hundred years. §46] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY. 67 tion, (i) from, as: He has just come from dinner (don bcm, Ham 'I>?ittagyc|fen). (2) of, as : We were speaking of our mother (tioit unferct mntUx). (3) by (with personal agent after the passive voice), as : Children are loved by their parents (Han ibrcit Jtt, (i) to {persons), as : He went to liis friend, or to his friend's (jn feincm greunbc) ; he spoke to me (ju mir). (2) to {places, if not proper ni^mes ; see nad^, above), as: He was going to the town (jn ber, or jur ©tabt). (3) at (with proper names of towns only), as : He lives at Ottawa (jn Dttatua); at home (jn ^o.\x\t). Remarks. — i. SBei, tton and ju (and sometimes au^er) are contracted with the Dative Sing. Masc. and Neuter of the unemphasizedViQ,^m.x.Q Article, thus : bei bem = Beim, t)on bem = bom, %\x bem = jum ; ju is also contracted with the Dat. Sing. Fern., thus : gu ber = §ur. 2. The -c of the Dat. Sing, is never used when a preposi- tion (except jn) stands before a substantive without an article, pronoun or adjective preceding, as : aug ^olg, of wood ; mit ;5Iei|, on purpose ; but nnij §aufc, home ; jn §aufe, at home. 3. Observe the following : {Germ.) 3)er S3rief meincg Dnteig, {Engl.) The letter of my uncle = My uncle's letter. {Germ.) 3)er ^rtef )»m meincm Dnfel, {Engl.) The letter from my uncle. The English preposition of with a substantive must gen- erally be rendered in German bv a Genitive case without a preposition, whenever it can be turned into the English Posses- eive case, as above ; otherwise by Don, as : 68 LESSON XIII. He Oh [§40 w-'s spca ing of his mother (tioa femci mntUx). 4- Uhscrve niso me iollowin„ . S''. a"°* "~. ''""^' '■" '"' ^ S"^"^ ■"« 'he book, ' -hn- r'lf"' ^" "'" '""' *"* ^°"'- "'"'<'"' I'-Position). ever the s^,t.! ^ ^'""'^ »">/'««/<. /..A^V'i.. when- tive ab've :,," ''-'"r' '"'° "^= ^■■'""^'' '"^'-ct Objec- tive, as above; otherwise (generally) by the preposition ju/as: He spol , . Seit wann lernen Sie 1 )eutsch .? 4. Wer hat mir diese Zeitung geschickt ? o. Was mnchte ich nach de^>^ Mittagsessen ? 6. Wo hat mein Vater c .cses Buch gekauft m^-M 70 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A. [§§47 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND PREPOSITIONS. '*7. Pronouns in Address. r. The pronouns bu and ihr irp tu., .. i 2)cr «ccf)cr Ift JicJti, Uiib btcfcii muQ iiorf) bcflimm' irf) J)|r, The goblet is thine, And this ring too I'll keep for thee. mU »otcr, gcniig fein bag graiifame epiel ©r l)at euj^ bcftanbcn, juas tciiier l)cftet)t Unb fount iHr be. .r;,er^rn« ©elilfteu nid,t^df,mcn, u. f. r, iinough, father, of this cruel sport He has ventured for you what none will venture, And If you cannot subdue the desire of your heart, etc. l^^ ) 2. ^r and Sic (3. sing.) were formerly r.gularlv used 1 address towards inferiors, with the verb agree"^ in / P^°"°r« ^^ are often found so used in th. .1 ""Sr^emg m 3. suig.. and they Their use ...^ i.^ly contempt so f""T' '""^ ^^"'^ "^^^ ^ ^P'*-' who is otherwise addressed Tslur:"^' "^' ^° '^^ ^^^-"^^ ^^S-r, ©et er fclii frfjcncnlanter X^or, Don't be a jingling fool. (Gohthb, „3.auft.«) dingt:heSm:t:^f^:;j;^;::^rr^^^ ^^- P^""^-^' "^y people of the lower orders substantives, eit'hl i:^^!; :^;:^:'::: - -^-indeclinable ffiir merben fcmc0flrci,§cn ntc iDi.bcr fel)en, We ne'er shall look upon his like again. You are not (a person) like me (my equal). (For the use of beggleidjcii, bergleic^en, see §§ 97, 139 ) [§§47 If I 51] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE. 71 X'uvd)(nu(f)t, 'Your Serene Highness'; (Sure SDfJnieflat, • Your Majesty,' etc., is used, also without the poss. adj., and with the verb in the plur. It was this plur. use of complimentary tides that gave rise to the use of ®ie as the pronoun of polite address. The old forms 3t|ro, 2)cro, are now o])solete. 50. Prepositions with Accusative. 1. The preposition foitllcr takes the accusative, hut is of rare occurrence. 2. ©CflCll has an obsolete form pen, now used only in certain phrases, as: gen ^illimd, heavenwards; jjcn yiorbcu, northwards, etc. 3. Ol)T J has a dative in the phrase ol)ncbcm, ' at any rate.» 4. 53i8 may be followed by another preposition, indicating motion or direction to (narf), ^u, an, auf, etc.) ; if this preposition is one governing dat. or ace, it will always take the accusative when combined with bi«, as : (Sr ging bis on'g 2;{)0iv he went as far as the gate. 61. Prepositions with Dative. The following additional prepositions take the Dative only : 1. Sinncn, within (of time), as: 33initcu },\m\ %a%m, within two days. Notes. — i. S3innen sometimes governs ihe gcnitw''. 2. SBinnen is used of time only; innerrjalb (see § ) of space and time. 2. ««j0e'0en 'contrary to, as: | ^'''"^^ ^^''*f^""fl ^^tf^^fl^" (^unjiber), 3- .gi'^aiftcr I I contrary to my inclination. 4- ©Cgenuficr, opposite (to), follows the case, as : Sent 2;i)ove gcgeniiber, opposite the gate. Note. -The case is sometimes placed between the two parts of the preposition, as: gegcn bein S^ore iiber; but this is not to be imitated. 5- ©Climg, according to, agreeably to, precedes or follows its case as: oeincm SBunfAe geina§ (or gemdfj feinem SBuufc^e), Agreeably to his desire. 6. @let^, like, precedes or follows its case, as : ®ie Idrfielte g(pici) cinent (2ngel (einem (gngcl gleic^), She smiled like an angeJ. 7- 9lOfS]fl,or ) , ^ ^ Mi'iM i ""'^' '° ^^^ °^ Proximity (= KCoeit), as 72 LESSON XIV. [§§ 3X i^ dt fa§ niirtjft mtr (or mir sunacf)fl), He sat next to me. (2) of succession, as : 9^ail)R i)em I'rbeii !iebt cr bie @f)re, Next to life he loves honour. no.iH ''''^' ""^-"f *^' r"'"' ^°""^' '*^ ^""'^ ' "«^f* '^ the commoner of the two as pre. position, especially in the senses under (2) ^ 9. 9omt ( *^Sether with, along with,as: S)cr ,r^crr fain iicbft fetiiem ^^rcnnbe, The gentleman came along with his friend. 3)cr 'iMitcr faint fciiica .^iiiibcvn, The father together with his children. Note ,. Distinguish ncbff, along with, and nebcit (alongside of, near). 2. Snmt is used of objects naturally belonging together, as above. la 06 is poetical and obsolete for iibciv and denotes : (1) above (of/^.///,;«), as: Ob Hem 3l(tare, above the altar. (2) about, concerning, as : Gntruftet ob bicfem ^reUel, indignanf about (at) this outrage. Note. — In the latter sense it also takes a genitive. LESSON XIV. CONJUGATION OF fcilt, to be. - DECLENSION OF SUBSTAN- TIVES. -WEAK OR -11 STEMS: - <^nttfie MODEL. 62. Paradigm of fctn, to be. Principal Parts. Pres. Infin. fcin IMPF. iNDic. Uior Past Part. geltJCfcn Indicative. id; Bin, I am bu Iiift thou art er tft, he is t»ir finb, we are i^r fcib, ye are fie f(nb, they are Present. Subjunctive. icf; fci, I (may) be, etc. bu feicft er fei U)ir [eicn t^r [cict fie feicn 52] PARADIGM OF fein. 73 Indicative. id) toor, I was bu hjarft, thou wast er Wax, he was h)ir hjaren, we were if)r tDaret, ye were fie tt)aren^ they were I have been, etc. id) Bin Subjunctive. Imperfect. id^twarc, (if) I were (might be), etc. bu tDjireft, thou wert er toiire, he were U)ir tuiiren, we were ilf>r hjaret, ye were fie n)(iren, they were Perfect. (Pres. of fcin + p. Part.) bu bift er ift n)ir finb ti^r feib fie finb I (may) have been, etc. ic^fet ' gctccfen 1 had been, etc. ic^ mot bu lt»arft er tx)ar tt)ir ttjaren il^r iuaret fie hjaren bu feieft cr fei U)ir feien i^r feiet fie ^mn Pluperfect. (Imperf. of (cm + P. Part.) ^ctnefen ^ gctoefen I had (might have) been, id) miire ] [etc. bu toiireft er WavQ Wiv hJttren i^r hjoret fie tDiiren gemefen I shall be, etc. id) lucvtc ) : , bu uirft ) Future. (Pres. of toerbcn + infin. of fein.) I shall be, etc. id; luerbc ) , . buiBcrhpff }'"" — I- < 74 LESSON xrv. m sa- lndicai!V9. ei Juirb U)ir irerben tf)r tt)erbet fie luerben fcin er merbe it)ir mcrben Subjunctive. fetn I shall have been, etc. id; luerbe bu toirft er i»irb n)ir hjerben il^r njerbet fie lucvben gctticfcn fcin gctocfctt fcin i^r lucrbet fie itjerben Future Perfect. (Future of fcin + P. Part.) I shall have been, etc id) n)erbe bu tuerbeft er hjerbe tt)ir trerben . i^r toerbet fie tt>frben Conditional. Compound. (Simple Cond. of fcin -f- Pas* Part.) I should have been, etc. id) n?urbe bu iDiirbeft er tDitrbe i»ir iDiirben i^r JtJiirbet fie tt)urben Indicative, (au) feiit, (to) be gctticfcn (ju) fein, to have been. Participles. J^rinci|>al sentence preceded by a .subordinate clause has tlie subject after the verb, the si,l,ord. clause l>eim,. reckoned as a single Idea (see § jo), as : SBJcnn ill) @e|b ijfittf, fo luiiibc id, Srtuiibc I)abcu. " EXERCISE XIV. ^ 1. aSir luerben morgeii 311 unfercr ZanH in Ottaiua teifcn -u" ?'"I". ^'* 3Jionar(^en finb mit bet 3iac§ric^t na4 aSarig gee.It 3. 35.e3Jrmeme8 DJiefen finb fet,r tang unb ftat! 4. ft !"Z."' ^"^'" ^"''"" f'"* f'^^ f*»" setoefen, abet iefet fmb bie ©latter gelb getoorben. 5. J)er SJater ift i„ ber Stabt getoefen unb ^at feinen finaben SBud,et getauft. 6. 3c^ ktounbre b.e Sdjonbett btefet Sanbfc^aften. 7. Die ©c^uler unb ibr Sebter tebeten »,el son ben %i,aUn ber §elbe„. 8. 2)ie Sc^uicr t^crben r; *]"•"' """" f'' ■"" '^"' ^'^"'i f««8 finfe- 9. Sinb bie Men §eiben? 3!ein, fie finb E^riften. 10. aJlein SJeffe .„ar angetn SSerltn getoefm unb §atte bort bie SBiffenfc^aften ftubiert. 11. 5SReme ec§»eftet tear mit i^rer attbeit nic^t fertig, a(« i* geftetn Bet .§r mx. 12. iWe Stftrotoge., rebeten m Jm ginf J ber Aometen unb 5t5ra>.eten. 13. J..; ^e^ter lobte feine ©cbiiler !!!!*^^® V]','*r-V'^^' f"* f"^'3 getoefen." 14. Sen,, ic^ nat^JDeutft^Ianb retfe, loetbe it^ ,neine Dijeime unb meine lanteit befuc^en. 15. ©te finabe,. fatten Biet 58ergniigen, als fie b.e ^afen unb guc^fe burc^ Si^alber unb Ifjaler jagten. le! S,e ©tafmnm toaten fe^r gtiicHicft, at« fie bie 3Ja*ricf,t i^on ibrem «>a.et t;o«en. 17. m( ^etrcn toerben ar„, rtetbe,., tpenn f.e i^x So LESSON XV. [§§60- C^clb [0 ucrfc^tDcnbcn. J 8. Unferc 9icffcn [inb lange bei nm ^. 1. The castles of the count are magnificent. 2 The churches of this city are large and beautiful. 3. When will your brother be at home ? 4. Are these soldiers Prussians > No they are Russians. 5. The bears live in the forests, b. Ihe boys have two ravens and three hares. 7. The ladies have been in the church, but they are now at home. 8. Who was right.? 9. For a boy of (Don) five years he is very large. 10. I should be happy, if I were rich. 11 He has not been at home to-day. 12. When she was in the city she lived at her aunt's. 13. Would the girl he contented, if she were with her mother.? 14. The studencs became tired because they had studied too much. ORAL EXERCISE XIV. 1. Was hat Ihr Neffe in Berlin gemacht.? 2. Hatte ich Kecht > 3. Wer eilte mit der Nachricht nach Paris .? 4 Haben Sie jemals Hasen oder Fiichse gejagt.? 5. Wann wird mein Bruder zu Hause sein ? 6. Wiirde ich glucklich sein, wenn ich reich ware } V LESSON XV. MIXED DECLENSION. -DOUBLE PLURALS. - PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. Declension of ber 9lamt, the name. 60. ^ Singular, Nom. ber 9^amc, the name Gen. bc^ 9Zameng, of the name Dat. bem Xiamen, (to, for) the name Ace. ben Seamen, the name Plural, bie ^o,Xi[t\^, the names ber 9^amen, of the names ben '^Xo.vci.txi, (to, for) the names bie ^JJamen, the names CU-X^K . , llt^tA- 63J DECLENSION :— ^amC MODEL. 8i 'B' ber .^aufe, heap ber (Same, seed ber (Sd^abe, harm, injury [pi. 3d)ttbcn] ber SiHc, will Observe: i. -c in the Norn. Sin 2. -cu all other cases. 3. No Umlaut, except in Sd;abe (see below). Note. — The Nom. Sing, sometimes has -n. V 61. In this way are declined the following masculines : ber 33ud^ftabe, letter (of the Al- ber ©eban!c, thought, idea phabet) ber ^riebe, peace ber Junfe, spark ber ©laube, faith, belief, creed Also one neuter : ba§ ^erj, the heart (Ace. Sing. ^erj). 62. Some masculine and neuter substantives follow the model of maitX (§ 16) or Sol^U (§ 21) in the singular, and that of gmhc (§ 54) or @rof (§ 55) in the plural, as ; 5Der 9?a#ar, the neighbour: Sing. n.da. 9^acf)bar, g. 5Zac^= 3)a§ £)^r, the ear : Sing. n. a. Df)r, a Of)t(c)0, d. £)^r(c) ; P/ur. D^reit. 63. In this way decline also : 1. Certain masculines, as : ber ©taat, state ber SSetter, (male) cousin ber <3traf)I, beam, ray 2. Certain neuters, as : bag 2(uge, eye bag 33ett, bed (A full List of these substantives will be found in App. G.) 3. Foreign (Latin) masculines in unaccented -or, as : ber ^rofef for, the professor : g. ^rofefiorg ; J^/ur. ^rofeffo'rcn. ber ^ortor, the doctor : g. 3;o!toi'g ; Plur. 2)o!to''ren. bag vSnbe, end 82 LESSOV XV. 64- O-t. SUUSTANTIVKS WITH DourUK PlURAL. The follovvin^,^ have double forms of the Plural, with a aillerent meaning for each : Sitigular. ba^ 53anb, ribbon ba^ 33anb, tie, bond (bcr 58anb, volume bie iBanf, bank (commercial) bie "^(xvX, bench bag (^cflc^t, face, countenance bag @efi4)t, vision ber Saben, shop ber Saben, shutter bag Sanb, land, country bag 2anb, province PluraL 33ttnbcr ^ttnbc SBttnbf) Sanfcn Sanfc ©efic^tct ©efic^tc Siiben Sttben ;?ttnbcr Sanbc bag iffiort, ( --'^^■^''^^ ^vo^ds considered separately word ' / ^''^^f/ '^ords considered comiectedly \ (as making sense) Remark. -The plural Sanbc is also used in poetical lan- guage ; and in the compound bie ^JJieberlanbe, the Netherlands (= Lower Provinces). 65. Prepositions governing the Dative or Accusative. The following nine prepositions govern the Dative when hey indicate /..^///, „,erely, or answer the question where?' or 'in what place?'; the Accusative when they imply motion, direction or tendency (figurative motion) towards, or answer the question 'whitlier?' or 'to whJ place or person ? ' ; ^^ <>«^ auf. Winter, in, itcacw, uftctr, ttntcr, tJor and jmifc^cii. [§§ 64- «5] P^ 'OSniOiNS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 83 an. )f plat5ef)nten ..> ,iu[t). He will arrive on Monday (mu 5!Jtontag). Observe : that in this use the Prep, and Article are always contracted. onf, (of place) : {a) With DAT., on, upon {on top of)^ as : The book lies on the table (auf bcm %\\&j), (jf) With ACC, to, towards, on, as : I lay the book on the table (auf ben Sifc^). Winter, behind : {a) With DAT., as: The dog lies behind the stove (Winter bcm Dfen). {b) With ACC, as : The dog goes behind the stove (Winter ben Dfen). fn, I. (of place) : {a) With DAT., in, as : The gardener is in the garden (tm ©arten). ib) With ACC, into, as : The gardener goes into the garden (in bcn ©arten). surface horizontal / ■ * } P'>-»A IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) ^ ^-A^ 'Q. Cl % Wa % 1.0 I.I 1.25 I4S " Ui 1^ III i. ^. 2.5 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.4 1.6 % V] c'l ^ > >% // '>> '^V- v-« /A Photographic Sciences Corporation # iV ^^ A^' \ % v ^^^ ^T '^. '■^ 73 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14S80 (716) 87!2-4S03 ^^ W &». t/. 84 LESSON XV. [§65 2. (of fme) in (with dat. only), as : God made the world in six days (in fec^tf %aQtn). ntfim, near, alongside of, by ; (a) With DAT., as : The chair sfands near (by) the tab:e (ncben bcm 2tfc^c). (^) With Acc, as : I ^/ace the chair near the table (ncficn ben ^ifd;). iifier, i. (of />/a<:e) over, above : (a) V/ith DAT., as : The bridge /. over the river (nhcv (^) With ACC, as : I go over the river (iificr bcn ^lug). 2. (of ^^^^x.f) over, above (with acc. only), as • He remained over (more than) two days (uhtt mi Xagc). 3. about, concerning (with acc. only), as : He spoke with me about his journey (ii^r feine 9Jei[e). Untcr, I. {oi place), under, beneath, below: {a) With DAT., as : The cat lies under the chair (mitt bcm etur;Ie). ^ (P) With ACC, as : The cat creeps under the chair (untcr bcn ©tu^I). 2. (of number) among : W With DAT., as: The wolf is among the sheep (untcr bcn ®d;afcn). {b) With ACC, as : The wolf mingles among the sheep (nntci* bic ©c^afc). I. (of place) before, in front of : (a) With DAT., as : The chair stands before the wiiv dow (tior licm genfter). tior. §65] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 85 (/^) With Acc, as : Place the chair before the window (lior§ (^cnfter). 2. (of order) before (with dat. only), as: He came before me (tior mir). 3. (of time^ before, ago (with dat. only), as : He came before two o'clock (tior "pzx U^v)- He came two hours ago (tior jmei 6tunben). JtOifll^en^ between (of two objects) : {a) With DAT., as : The chair standi between the door and the window (jtnifl^en bcr ^^iire unb bcm J^enfter). (h) With ACC, as : Put the chair between the door and the window (jltlifr^cn bic Vcjxxxt unb bag '(^enfter). Remark. — Observe the following contractions wi:h the unemphasized Definite Article : an bem = nm in bem = m ' an ba§ = anS in ba§ = tnS auf bag = aufg Also the following, which are of less frequent occurrence: Winter bem = ^interm unter bem = unterm Hnter ba§ = f^interg unter bag = unterg iiber bem = iiberm bor bem = tjorm iibev bag = iiberg bor bag = borg Vocabulary. please, lit., (I) beg, (I) pray, lay, legeu (id)) bitte hang (trans.), ^angen ^ fetch, bring, get, f)oIen v/ hear, bbren ^ hunt, chase, pursue, jagen ^ \H put, place, set (down), fe^en w put, place, set (upright), ftetten ^ seek, look for, fud^en ^ kill, tijten w 86 LESSON XV. [§§65- wait (for), fvaxttn (auf + acc..^ strawberry, bie Grbbecrc w fire, ba^ ^euer ^ Netherlands, bic 9^ieberlanbe w philosophy, bie $^iIo[o|)l^ie' vV stove, ber Of en*/ school, bic ©d^ule "^ door, bie 3:^ur(e) ^ difference, ber Unterfdjieb '2- university, bie Hnik)erfitat ^v dictionary, ba^ ^bxUvhud) 3 open, offen heavy, hard, [cl^it)er ten, geBn thereupon, on it, etc., barauf first, not before, erft if you please, gefdaigft no longer (lit., not more), nic^t me^r. where, h)o in order to, urn (foil, by infin. with gu at end of clause) EXEBOISB XV. ^. 1. Sener mam fe^te fic^ gegen meinen SBiaen auf bie ifAt? r^r^i'f ^^^^- '• ^Barum^cnmeine'^ettern uber (at) tiTtc^ getac^t? 4. 3J?etn Skater tt)irb «ng am ^ntag ober (am) ©lengtag in bie ©c^ule fc^icfen. 5. ^er ©oBn unb 3Batbe. 6. aKetnJBater unb meine abutter finb feit brei ^oc^en auf bem Sanbe. 7. ^ie 33anfen trerben erft morgen um ^efcn Ubr offen fern 8. Segen eie gefdHigft biefe ianbeUen S a b^ ^anf. 9. 2)er .^ouig ber ^ieberlanbe reifte burc^ feb etaaten unter bem 9Zamen eineg ©rafen. 10. ^er ^ri/be beg §errn ei mit euc^. 11. 2)er ©raf [c^icfte feinen ®ofn anf bie Um.a:ft tat. 12. ^a. ^inb ift fe^r fran! unb bie LtU Z S iT 'r^K ''•• ^^'^'^' ^^^^^" ^''' f^ ^«"9e bor ber Xl)ure ^ 14. 2^ie ^erren jagten ben ^aren Winter ben 2BaIb tt)o ftc t^n toteten. 15. ^m SlUnter fe^en t.ir un. oft .or faf^eue unb ben>unbern bic ^unfcn. 16. Unferc .^er,en h,erben imm raung n,enn nnr 9?ac^rid;t bom ^riege r;oren. 17. m, ift I I nterfd;teb 3imfd;cn ben sil^ortcvn il^anfen unb^dnfc^ 18 ^ic migen be., etubcnten finb fd;tuad;, toei( er ju .id ftubieri f;at 19. ^e^en ®te ftc^ auf biefen ©tu^l, benn ^ie finb mube. 20 66] ANOMALIES OF DECtENSION. 87 33ttte, ^ttUixi 8ie tnir biefen ©tu^l Winter ben Ofen. 21. ^ie etubentcn lernen bom ^rofeffor bie dhmn ber ©otter ber9f{bmer. M. 1. The children were playing before the house. 2. What is the name of this professor > His name is Schmidt. 3. Hang the picture of my father over the door. 4. Every human being ha-« two eyes and two ears. 5. Why do the professors praise their students? (5. The professors praise the diligence of their students. 7. The difference between my brother and me is not great. 8. I laid the pens upon the table, but they are no longer there. 1). Our neighbop.rs sent their children into the wood to search for flowers. 10. Our cousin lived hnppy and in peace with his neighbours. 11. The pupils would look for the words in a dictionary, if they had time. 12. Your eyes are tired, because you have studied too much. 13. These words are hard to learn, for every word has ten letters. 14. Place this chair, if you please, be- hind the stove for me. 15. If Charles is not ready, we shall go (reifen) without him to Germany. ORAL EXERCISE XV. 1. Wann wird Ihr Vater Sie auf die Universitat schicken? 2. Weshalb hat die Mutter die Doktoren geholt.? 3. Was lernten die Studenten von den Professoren > 4. Werden Sie ohne mich nach Chicago reisen .? 5. W^o reiste der Konig der Niederlande ? 6. Wann werden die Kirchen offen seini 66. SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B. ANOMALIES OF DECLENSION. Substantives without Plural. The following classes of substantives are used in the singular only : I. Proper names, unless they denote a class (as: bk ^Knfadc, painters ///r Raphael), or several individuals of the same name (as; bie Oicr erftCU i)etnrid)f, the first four Henries, i. e., kings of that name). 88 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B. ■ [§§66- 2. Names Of materials, etc., unless they denote different iinjs of the an,e .natenal (a.. (Stiiirr, ©aljt, diff.renl /.W. of grass^samtthe' «.ey have a special leaning ^^ .. s,,„, ,„„, „, J^^^J ^^^^ '^^^^ A list of these is giver, in App. H. For the plural of nouns of measure, etc., see Less. XXX. 67. Substantives without Singular. The following classes of substantives are used in the olural only or ;e.teC:hetra^t "'''''"' ""''' ^^^"^^"' ''' ^^""^-^^ ^^^ ^'^f-n 2. The following names of festivals etc • >S. viz.: atpcn, Alps; SBrilltleibcr trm, sers; 8„rf|d,„f,™ documents, gi„,,i„(,e, incom; tvenul @(, ^ parents; gfneii, holidays; ©liebmofien limh,. ¥,(.„ T ' «.f.m,U„tof,c„,expenseI;'tc„tc,p":^L: ^oto, ctt: ''^''' ^""' yJLZifz^z';z'u '• '"'"^""^^^ ''""■«-"''"•■ -««= (a) Regularly when denoting «^& ;W,i.,v/«„& or occupations a,. ste"sr„"' '"'^"''^' '*"•""""""' -- °^ '-™- ®~'Jr; (^) By changing -monn into -|cu(e, when used «/to,w„ „, ,„ , e(,cl«fe, mamed people; .*Ja»bcl«Icute, trades - people ■ JanS' country-people; ?anb«le„te, people of the same country/sw ! ' lodgers (male and female). ^ ' -^""®»f"«/ 2. ®ic OI|nmad)t, the fainting-fit, and bie 'HoUmn*, ,u^ attorney ,f™n, m,«t, pl. 3KS,f,t.t hive the 1. S- ^ Z^ ' the answer (frotn m «ort, pl. «„v.e and ffiirte,), h« "l. ';;.^"'"'°"' 70] SUMMARY OF DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 89 69, Special Cases, i. A few substantives in m viz • 9rtpm Obem «robem breath ; «rofam, crumb ; (gibam, son-in-]a;, foil'ow t^e mux model (§ 16) m the sing. The plur.. if it occurs, ends in -e (6unb model, § 21, d, no Umlaut), except ^rofam, which is more commonly wfafi m the plur. (-etl). ' 2. Weak feminines are often found with the old weak gen. and dat in -en, especially when used without article after a preposition, as : ailf erben, on earth (but auf bcr Gibe, on the earth) ; ju ei)ren, in honour of lit (dJnabeii/ m mercy, etc. LESSON XVI. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-RECAPITULATlON.-PROPER NAMES. -PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 70. Summary of Declension of Substantives. The following tables show the endings of the various forms of Substantive Declension : A, Strong Declension. I. ^aUx Model. (Contracted Form.) Sing. Nom. Gen. g Dat. Ace. Plur. -(n) II. ©o^n Model. (Primary Form.) Sing, Plur. —t — e —en — c -(00 -(c) III. ®orf Model. (Enlarged Form.) Plur. Sing. -(c)l -(c) — er — er —cm — cr Remarks. — i. The term ♦ Strong Declension ' is applicable to all the three forms given above. 2. The @o^n Model is sometimes called the Primary Form of the Strong Declension, and shows the -« of Gen. Sing, and -c of the Plur. From this are derived the other two forms, viz. : 90 LESSON y.vi. 7^- 3. By contraction (dropping -c of the termination), the 3JZaIer Model, hence called also the Contracted Form of the Strong Declension ; and 4. By enlargement (adding -r in the Plur., the Sing, remain- ing the same), the ^orf Model, hence also called the En- larged Form of the Strong Declension. 5. Feminines remain unchanged in the Sing. 6. The Umlaut may occur in any of these forms, viz.: generally in masc. monosyllables, regularly in feminines and in Enlarged Form ; never in neuter monosyllables of Primary Form. (See Lists, App. A., B., C, E.) B. Weak Declension, ^nabe, ©raf, 33lume Model. Sing. Nom. (e) piur. Gen. (e)n Dat. (e)n Ace. (e)n ■(On -(c)n -(c)n -(c)tt Observe: i. The persistent -it. 2. The absence of Urn laut. 3. Uniformity of Cases. 4. Feminines unchanged in Sing. C, Mixed Declension. I. 9?ame Model. Sing. N. — c Flur, — n G. — nj — n D. -tt -n A. — n — n II. mc^bar, D^r Model. Sing. Plur. — (c)n -(e)8 -(c)n -(c) -(e)tt -(e)tt Remarks. — i. All three follow the ^nabe Model in the Plur. ^. The mme Model is a Mixture of the 3}?a(er and ^nabe models in the Sing., usually taking -g in the Gen., sometimes -tt in the Nom. 7a] DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 91 3. The Jlaii)hax Model follows the maUv Model in the Sing. 4. The Dl)v Model follows the Bo^n Model in the Sing. 71. The Essential Parts for the Declension of a Sub- stantive are : The Nominative Singular, The Genitive Singular, and The Nominative Plural. These being given, the remaining cases of the noun can be formed from the above Tables, with the assistance of the following : Remarks.— I. All Feminines are unchanged in the Sing. 2. The Nom. and Ace. Sing, are always alike, except in the Weak Declension (^nabe, ©raf and ^arm models). 3. The Gen. Sing, ends in -g in Masculines (except in the Weak Declension) and in a// Neuters. 4. The Nom., Gen. and Ace. Plur. are a/ways alike. 5. The Dat. Plur. always ends in -n. Decline the following substantives throughout : bcr geiertag, bie @(^n)ener, ber ©laube. ilftamein, Declension of Proper Names. 72. Geographical Proper Names : 1. If never used without an article, etc. (see § 44, 2, 3), are declined like common nouns, as : ber dif)m, o. beg m'ein(c)g D. bem 9t^ein(c); bie (Scanjets, o. ber ©c^ivei^, d. ber ©c^hjets, etc! 2. If not generally used with an article, etc., they take no •ending except -g in the Gen. Sin^r. rnnl -.jS tney eriu \ii lii U 92 LESSON XVI. [§§ 7a- sibilant), as: ^cutWIanb, Germany, o. ^cutfcf;ranb0 ; Jranf. rcid;, France, g. grantrcid;8 ; ))iom, Rome, o. .^K oiii0. 3. If they end in a s/d/Aw^ (», fij, 3, ^ j), the Gen. is replaced by the preposition Uoii, as: 3)ie iScfcftipngen Hn $arie', the fortifications of Paris. 4- ©on may replace the Gen. with other names also, and is always used after titles, as : 3)ic 5li)mgin bott Gnglanb, the Queen of England ; ber SBurgermdftcr tioit Toronto, the Mayor of Toronto. 5. When the Name of a Place is preceded by a common noun, they are in apposition to each other, but the proper name is not inflected, as : ^ic ®tabt Soitboil (not tion Sons bon), the City of London, g. bcr etabtSonbon. 2)a§ ^onigreic^ gJrcugcit, the Kingdom of Prussia, g. beg 5li3mgrcid;g ^reujen. 6. Proper Names of Places are not used in the Plural. 73. Proper Names of Persons are now inflected in the Gen. Sing, only, as follows : 1. If preceded by an article, etc. (which shows the case) they remain unchanged, as : The letters of Cicero, bie iSriefc beg Sicero. 2. If not preceded by an article showing case, etc., those ending in a sibilant, and Feminines in -c, add -(c)ng in the Gen. ; all others add -§ only, as : Slay, g. Maitm ; Souifc, a Souifcng ; .^arl, g. !^axU. Remark. — Surnames and classical names in a sibilant now commonly take an apostrophe instead of -cnl, as: Dpi^' SBerfc, Opitz's works. 74. Family Names are used in the Plural with added -g, as in English, but without article, as : the Schmidts, ©d;mibt^ (meaning the members of the Schmidt family). Further Remarks on the Declension of Proper Names and of Foreign Substantives will be found in Supp. Less. C*. below. [§§7a- ; Jranfs Gen. is 0cn Hon Iso, and an'b, thft ; Mayor lommon proper on Sons Jnigreic^ Jreugen. ral. I in the ; case) J iSriefe , those g in the >uifc, G. iibilanl \^, as: ied -I d;inibtg Foreign 75] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 93 76. Prepositfons Covernino thk Genitive. I. llOcpCU, on account of, on behalf of, for the sake of (sometimes foUoivs its case), as : I remained at home on account of (for the sake of) my child, (tucgett tneinee i^inbc0). Note. — SBcgeu always folldnbler i cousin (fern.), bie (Soufine w Elizabeth, ©lifabet^ Europe, @uro'))a i festivity, bie geftlic^feit '^ Frederick, ^riebrid^ Fred, Freddy, %x\% poem, bag ©ebid^t "^ George, ©eorg Greece, (bag) ©riec^enlanb capital (city), bie §au)3tftabt*^ clear, !(ar Ireland, (bag) Srianb Margaret, SJlargarete speech, oration, bie 9lebc ^ St. Lawrence, ber ©t. (©anct) So'renj Sarah, 8ara Scotchman, ber (Sd^otte street, bie ©trafee W Thames, bie %\jm^\% ^ work, bag 2Ber! "> William, 5Bil^eIm broad, wide, &reit high, j^od^ 94 LESSON XVI. m 75- turbid, muddy (of water), triibc soon, balb everywhere, iiberaCC Idioms, to b« on a vl8it at (any one'*), auf «ie auf ben ^ifc^ ftetten. 11. griebric^g gjtutter fc^enft l\)m Bop^iod^ aSerfe, benn ^eute ift fein ©eburtstag. 12. ^a^ 2Baf?er be« ©anct Snrens ift flar, aber bag 2Baffer ber ^I^emfe ift triibe. 13. Souife, f}oU (Bop\)k unb ©lifabetb unb loir toerben einen ©^ajiev* gang im 2Salbe mac^en. 14. ^;efei (Sd;otte rebet biel 'oon .^urng' ©ebid;ten. 15. ^einric^g greunbe ioerben balb nac^ ©nglanb reifen, unb fie toerben aud) granfreid; befud5>en. 16. ®ie ©tra^en Xorontog n)aren tDafjrenb ber geftlid;feiten fe^r fd^on. n. aSeg^alb ftubieren ©ie bie 9leben beg :i)emDft^eneg? i8.* 2lm g^reiwg ober ©onnabenb n)erben toir nad; ^ingfton reifen urn Souifc unb 3}Zargarete gu befuc^en. 19. ©eorg ift je|t bei feinem 33etter gri^ auf Sefuc^. 20. 2(m ©onntag toaren toir toegen beg ©turmeg §u §aufe. 21. ^^ ^abe in ber ©d[jn)eia mci^t biel 35ergnugen gefjabt, loeil ic^ auf ber ^ieife fran! itjar. B. 1. Charles, bring Freddy and Max, and we shall play in the garden. 2. We have looked for William's book every- where. 3. The streets of Paris are wide and beautiful. 4. [§8 75- 76] DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 9S Who has bought these ) If the governing word precedes, the title has the article anr, th. ^^sSr^: -- -- — undeciined,r;i:e5;:;: ^^^to:^lzi^i:;:i::,^^- ^" ^-^ -- -- ^s: ... 6 In the case of a Christian name without article, connected with a family name preceded by Don (indicating noble rank) : ^ (^) When the governing word >//...., the family name only is de chned, as : ^viebtvf) tjon ®c^i(ler5 @cbirf)te. ^ ^" {^) When the governing word precedes onlv i\^,^ r\..\.^- declined, as: ®ie @cbid,teViebnd;^ ^^f ^c^Tul '^'"^ ^^ • ,r T^^i "^"''' °^ '''' ^^''^°"'' ^'^"^ ^''^•if^"^/ "dually both follow the ^.ahn declension, thus : n. .^efu0 S{,riftu8, G. ^efi dhriftl d ^fu ffhW .« _ ^OTE. - Other biblical names, if without article, also follow the Lati-, infl...- oally n, the gen., as : SDa. (S.angelium St. ^att^a'i, the Gospel of St Matthew"' "'" 77. Declension of Foreign Substantives. 1. Most foreign substantives follow one or other of the regular form, of declension, all feminines being weak. ^ ""* 2. Most masculines and neuters from the Latin, ending in -«« have tnmZtt'^''\^' "^^' "^ case-inflection in either^numbe; ^I ber areobtti?, the mood: n. g. d. a. i».^. a«ob«0, />/«.. ^Jfobi • bei LuV the case: N. G. D. a. ^/;.^. ^o^vii, Plur. ^aftt^ ' ba« 2:emZ' thlr ' 2. 2)er 2rtra3 has pi. bic 2ltranten. .h/^eltr"" "°* ''""' "' ®™'* -'"' '"' "=^'- "■ '» -'"• -d .ake -, ,„ 3- Neueers in -a from the Greek, and in -„„, from .he I.a,i„ ,ak. 8 [§§76^ 8o] GENDER ACCORDING TO MEANING. espe. 97 theme Plur. ^f,cmcn ; bae ,^nbidibn«m, the individual. G. Sing. 3nbH,i- bnnn.3, Plur. .s.ibiDibuen ; ba« i^nOum, the verb, />/,,,.. bie i?e4n Note. -Das ^lima, the climate, has pi. iUimato or .ftUmateil. 4. Neuters from Latin Substantives with plur. in -ia add -% in the Ren smg., often dropping the Latin sing, termination, and form the plur in -ten, as: bag 5(bUcrb(ium), the adverb, g. ^/;.^. 5lbm-b(inm)g Plur 9Tb Plur. Ireinobr"" ^"'' ^«^^f^'"°^' the jewel, has Plur. meinobien as well as the regular 5- Masculines and neuters of recent introduction from modern lan- guages take -g in the gen. sing., and add -g to form the plur., as : 2ovhS eiubg, ^ofag, Saiiquierg, ^^ortrait^, ^oB, etc. ' Note. - Italian words are also found with their proper foreign plur., as Soil, Gonti. 78. The Article with Names of Persons. Besides the cases specified in § 73, i, above, the article is used with names of persons : I. Colloquially ^nd familiarly, as: Ucr ^ax\, W ?OUi[e lingio^^'" *^'^ '^'"°''' ^ '^"''^ ""'' citt SBeUington, a (.,.«« //^.) v/el- ^J;of'^°? "^"''' ""^ P^''"t"^gs, etc., named from a pers., etc, as: cin Mm, a {A'^-,«^ 4^) Rafael; i,ic 9,^emi8 Don 2)^(0, the {statue of) Yenus of Milo. ■' ' LESSON XVII. €NDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. - INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 79. The Gender of Substantives is determined in German ■ T. by Meaning ; or II. by Form (Ending, etc.). 80. I. Gender as determined by Meaning. I. Masculine are names of: {a) Males, as : ber maxin, the man ; tJCr 4)elb, the hero. I 98 LESSON XVII. R§8o- Remap.k : But diminutives in -Afii inrf f.i- fcaS mmUin or mnnd,m. '" ''' "'"'"' "= = Dcr 3anuar, January ; bcr Wittmd), Wednesday W ^««.. ./M. ..«^.„, ,3 : ier 9Jorb(.„), the north. 2. Feminine are names of: dau^^L^""'"' "•• *"' ^-"' "'^ — „. bie Soc^ter, the Remark : But baS Sei6, the woman is nentPr . ,i j- ■ tives in -,Jc„ and -Wn as- h«; ^ ^ ,^' '^'""""■ daughter; b«* 2Rab<^ 'the drl b.S^f ,*'"' f' ""'^ lady. ' ^ ' ""^ Swulein, the young (i) ^'■'^", plants, fruits 3.M flowers z^T^^r-W^, =.. s- ^-^ 3. Neuter are names of : iN GTE. ~ ^Cr @tal)I, Steel, is Masc. ®e6ir8. the Jo'unSS:'^" '^'""'"^ ^'^"^ ®'-' ^^ ^ *«« W G7a«/r/« and /wt,/w^.f almost always as • (i,„i\ ,? . Europe; (b««) 6„„afc„. j^i.^^s cities totn, ^^f^""'"^^' <^'-.. as: (b„,) ^«„^„,,,. (ba'^S/w ^"'^'"' ""=•' Remarks. -I. Names of countries and provinces in „• s"ar^ '^"""'-' -■ «' ^«'H Tur4:brei"4 82] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 99 2. Names of countries, etc., when not neuter, always have the definite article (see § 44, 3). {li) Infinitives, letters of the alphabet, and other parts of speech (except Adjectives used of persons, and Cardinal Numerals; see 2, c, above), used as Substantives, as: bad Sac^en, the (act of) laughing; bttg % the (letter) A; ba0 ^c^, the I; bo8 2Senn unb bag 2l6er, (the) *if ' and (the) 'but.' Give the gender of the following Substantives, assigning the rule in each case: Slpril, @oIb, (grbbecrc, 3:ocf)tcv, (Suropa, 33ifcf)of, bonbon, 3urQ, 9?ubin (ruby), 2Ballarf)ei (Wallachia), Unredjt, @uben (South), @elb, ^aufen, @ommer. 81. Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives. The Interrogative Pronouns are : 1. tDcliJcr? which? — Definite. 2. tucr? who? ) , •} »«..» Q u ^ ■» r ~~ Indefinite. 3. iDaS f what ? ) 82. aSBcl^cr? is declined after the biefer Model, but, as Pronoun, lacks the Gen., thus : Singular. NEUTER. dLU Remarks.— I. 2BeIc^er? asks 'which of a number.?' of persons or things, and agrees in gender with the noun follow- ing it, as; SBeld^er i)on biefen 9Wonnern iff f)ier getoefen? Which of these men has been here > SSeld^cg Don biefen Siirjcrn ^abcn ©ie Which of these books have you had ? MASC. Nom. ireld^cr Gen. ■ ■ ■ Dat. n)elc^cm Ace. iuelc^cn FEM. Plural. ALL GENDERS. h?e(d;c, whiph toelc^cn, (to, for)which hjetd^e, which ? 100 LESSON XVII. [§§83 2. The neuter sing. n,clr^c0 is used before the verb 'to be ' irrcspcct.vely of the gender or number of the subject (com- pare the snnihir use of e^, § 39, i), as : Which is your sister (brother)? 2BeId;c0 ift ^Ijxc ©d;h)efter (^sl)v Sruber)? Which are the children of the count? 2BeId;c£i finb bic ^inbcv bc^ ©rafcn ? MASC. AND FEM. ^^^^^^ Nom. iuer,who? tt)a§, what? Gen. iucifcn (or iuc^5), whose, of lucffcn (or h)c^) of '^'^^^"^ what Dat. tucm, (to, for) whom Ace. iucn,whom iuag, what Remarks. - x. JlBcr is used of persons only, for all gen, ders and both numbers, as : .r» t gen ^/'/^. An'r fino bicfe gWanitcrV etc. 2. SBttS is not used of persons. 3. Sog is never used in the T^ative. In the Dat. or Ace With prepositions, mv, is replaced by m (^ov before vowels)* placed ..>. the preposition (compare § 38, Rem. 5, fS similar use of btt), as : ^ ' • i> ^^i^ ^.rauffi^.., eU? On what (whereon) are you sitting? aCoton fprcc^c, ^,c? Of what (whereof) are you speaking » Note. - SB„„„„ , = fo, „;,,,, „,^^^f^^^_ ^^^ , ^^^ ^^^____^^ 4. With prepositions governing the Gen., mti is used before wher^^r^h^; '- "*^"'^' »'*'"'«-'^ - -"- -oun, 5, The u^uter Gen {nr'ffmP I't: ' j o VTcn. ,v,||vu ,r IS i^iciy used, except as above. 86] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. Id 6. 3Ba§ is sometimes used (as interrog. adv.)ior toarum, why? (For the use of lya§ for cttvag, see under etltJag, § 149, i.) 84r The Interrogative Adjectives are : 1. ttictr^cr, mclr^C, mclt^cg? which? what ? — Definite. 2. tuaS fi'it citi, tuag fiir cine, mag fiir cin ? j what kind of t Phir. X(MXi \\\x'i \ —Indefinite. 8S. gBclr^cr, as Interrogative Adjective, follows the biefer Model throughout, as : Sitigidar, Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. h)eld)er Gen. h)eld)e^ Dat. tuelc^em Ace. toeld^en 'm^{^^, which h)eld;er, of which hje(d)en, (to, for which) tpeld^e, which tDcId^er iueld^e^ n)eld;cr meldjem Examples : Which man was here ? SBcli^cr 3Jiann mar fjier ? What books have you ? SOelt^c Siid^cr fjaben (Sie ? Remarks. — i. iBcIc^er is also used in exclamatory sen-^ tences (= what !), sometimes without termination, as : 9!CeI^(c8) SSergniigen ! What pleasure ! 2. The stem hjeldfi is also followed by cin, and is unin- flected, as: 2Bclf^ ein ©turm ! What a storm ! 86. In declining n)a§ fur ein, Ira"? remains unchanged, while cin agrees with the substantive, ai : N. M. 2Ba§ fur cin §ut? a. 3lia§ fiir eincn §ut? What kind of (a) hat? D. 2Bag fur eincm §ut? To what kind of a hat ? 102 LESSON XVII. t§§86- c. F. 5Da« fOt eincr S81«mc ? Of what kind of (a) flower, etc. In the Plur. waS fur is used without article, as • !>• afi«« fur Rmbern ? To what kind of children > The etn is also omitted before nam». „f . • . other words used partitively, as 7 "'''"''' ^""^ What k.nd of wood .' What sort of weather .> 4 Sy* Indirect Statements. Direct Statement or Quotation : He said:* I am tired.' Indirect Statement or Quotation : He said (that) he was tired. I. An Indirect Statement is always a su^or^^.afe clause the imp.), and i./s the same' ^^^'I^^tj^l^ ^^^^ statement were made direafy, as : ' J>res.), They said that it was true" " ' .oJaTa7".^r:t™;:e\rer;,:r *-- '-— 3. The conjunction bag may be omitted in such clause, wh,ch then have the construction of a principa sentence (i. e., verb m secofu/ place), as : sentence ®t foflte, er fei gcftetn angefommen. 88] 88. INDIRECT STATEMENTS AND QUESTIONS. Indirect Questions. 10.3 Dirbct Question : Who is there ? Indirect Question : He asked who was there ? 1. In Indirect (or Dependent) Questions the con- struction is that of a dependent clause (verb last). 2. If the verb of the principal sentence be in the Impf., that of the question will be in the subjunctive, and have the same tense which it would have in the direct question, as : ©agen ©ie mir gefatligft, tt)o jener §err too^nt (Dir. Qu. : 2Bo n)of)nt jener ^txx'i pres.), Tell me, if you please, where that gentleman lives ? (5r fragtc mic^, toelc^er bon biefen .*perren mein 53ruber fei. He asked me which of those gentlemen was my brother (Dir. Qu. : aSelc^er, etc., ifi %\jx ©ruber t pres.) V0C\BULARY. *#* The article will be supplied by the pupil, according to preceding rules, where not given. to use, braud^en march, marf(^ieren save, retten answering, b^ 2lntit)orten paying, b*^ ^Beja^Ien jewel, precious stone, b-^ ©belftein asking (of questions), b-^ S^ragen Italy, ^talien fire-place, -b-2^ ^amin' elm, \i^ Ulme blue, blau light, easy, leid^t useful, m%\\^ buying, b^ 5?aufen life, b^ 2e6en learning (act of), b^ Semen lily, b^ Sitte market, ber 3Jiar!t morning, ber 3Jiorgen afternoon, ber ^fJad^mittag plum, b-^ ^flaume emerald, b-^ ©maragb' winter-month, ber SBintermo'* nat valuable, precious, tDertboII generally, usually, getoo^nlid^ etc., a. [. tt>. (= unb \o ttjeiter, i. e. " and so further ") "V- I04 LESSON XVII. [§§8a- Genitive with adverbial force. in the morning, motgen« or be« TOorgenS in the afternoon, nod^mtttngg or bc« Sfac^mittagg The Cardinal Poii ts of the Compass (= bie bict §imtnel«. goflenbei.) : North, (bcr) Siotbcn ; South, (bet) Siiben • East (bet) Often ; West, (bet) Sffieftm. ' ' bet ai„ta, bet aR«, bet 3u'ni, bet Su'Ii, bet auguft', bet B^p, tembct, bet Dttobet, bet Siobcmber, bcr Scjember. Wiom .• I saved hlg nfe. lil. I saved to op for him the life 3* KtrtK 1 1) m b « «(6tji. See § 44, 6 (i). BXBBCISE XVII. ^. 1 ffiet f)at bos SBilb Bon mcincm 9?cffen u6et bag fiomin SI ^-^TJl t'"J^^^ ^"'3"^'""" «"f bem TOatfte gctouft ? 3. 2luf toelt^e S8ont luetben tnit img feften 8 4 ffiel- ^em finaben ge^ott biefc« SDJeffet ? ®s g^Stt Sil^erm'. 5.' SeneS ajiobclen auf bet Stta^e ift bag Joc^tetc|en unfetes SJae^batJ. 6. ffia« mac^cn Ste gctoii^nlicf;, itienn Sie einen gciettag fcaben' 7. S)es gRotgenS ftubiete t*, unb be« gjacT^mittagg tubte xS auf mf^t ^- ^'^'^'^ f'"^ ^'' ^'""*" ^« f«6«n S«9e ber SBoc^e ? Wontag u. f. «,. 9. 2Bem fc^iien Sie biefen Stief? 10. ^(^ fdjtctc ,^„ bem Suc^^anbler. 11. Sffiorubet haitrx be §etten gelac^t ? 12. fflet ift bie gtau neben meinet $ante auf bet JBanf ? 13. SffiaS fut Sttugen ^at ber Stitbent ? Seine Slugen finb Mau. 14. SfBotouS mat^en wit Sdjiiffe? SBir maien fie au« gifen unb eta§[. 15. fiat! ift tnit bem Setnen feinet 2tuf. gabe nic^t fettig. 16. Sotauf l^aben bie Sc^uret fic| gefew? ®ie ^aben ftc| auf bie ©ructe gefe^t. 17. SBag fiit @bet teine ^aben Ste ba? 18. 3c| l,aW einen !Diamant(en), einen SRubin utib etnen Smatagb. 19. 3)aS §eer ift bon Jranfteic^ „a* ^fatten matfc^.ett. 30. 3Jat,oIeon f<^ic(te bem ©rafet. einen Hia- mont(cn;, U'cil ber ©tof i^m boS Men getettet tiatte. S. 1. Which of yonr sisters are learning German ? U For H-hom IS this diamond > It is for the countess. 3. Which 89] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 105 are your pens ? 4. The askingj)f questions is very easy, but the answering is very difficult. "s.^The north, the south, the east, and the west are the four cardinal points of the compass. 6. Which of these students is Mr. Braun .? 7^ TheT)oy buys himself pears and plums in the market. 8. My uncle has three children — a girl and two boys. 9. June, July, and August are very hot in Canada. 10. Buying is pleasant, but paying is very disagreeable. 11. Iron and steel are very useful. 12. The rose and the Hly are flowers, but the oak and the elm are trees. 13. I blame Mary because she wastes her money. 14. What would you do with your money, if you were rich.? 15. We always hoped that William would learn German. ORAL EXERCISE XVII. 1. Wo hangt das Bild von Ihrem Neffen .? 2. Wer ist das M^^dchen vor unserm Hause .? 3. Weshalb schickte der Konig dem Biirgermeister einen Diamant(en).? 4. Was fur Augen hat der Student? 5. Ist das Fragen leicht.? 6. Was wurden Sie machen, wenn Sie einen Feiertag h^tten .? LESSON XVIII. GENDER Of- SUBSTANTIVES (concluded).- GENERAL REMARKS. -DOUBLE GENDER. S9. Gender of Substantives as determined by Form. I. Masculine are : (a) Substantives in -ittf, -19, -ing, -lit, a/wosf a/ways, as : bcr ^xani^, the crane ; htv ^ontjj, the honey; bcr grembHng, the stranger ; bcr %tm, the breath. (f) Those in -c(, -cil (not infinitives' -cr, generally (names of agents in -er always), as : bcr 2offeI, io6 LESSON XVIII. [§S8^ the spoon ; ttv ©artcn, the garden ; ber &axtntv, the gardener. (c) Monosyllal)Ies — generally (but with many excep* tions), as : bcr ^ricg, the war; bcr %o^<^, the day, etc. 2. Feminine are : {a) Substantives in -ei, -^cii, -fcU, -Waft, -Utt0, -in, always, as : bie ®4)meic^clci, flattery ; bie (Sc^i)n3 l^cit, beauty; btc ^anfbarfcit, gratitude; bie ^rcunbf^ttft friendship ; bic -t^offnunfl, hope; bie ©rcifin, the countess ; bie Jreunbin, the (female) friend. Note. — The termination -in is used to form feminine names from masculines, usually with Umlaut, always so in monosyllables, {b) Those in -t (especially after a consonant), -cttb, generally, as: btC Kraft strength; bic 3ufunf<, the future ; bie Xugcilb, virtue. {c) Those in -c, generally (but with many exceptions), as : bic §o^e, height ; bie ©ro^e, size. {d) Some in -niS (see also under neuters), as : bic SSilbnig, the wilderness. ie) Foreign Substantives in -age, -ie (French); -if (Greek) ; -cn^, -fiit, -(t)ion, -ur (Lat.), always as : bie Courage, courage ; bic ^Jlelobic', the melody ; bie ^ufif, music; bic 3lubici^', the audience; bie Uniberfitat', the university ; bie 3fiatiott', the nation ; bie 3^atur', nature. ' 3. Neuter are : {a) Substantives in -ijeu and -fcin (diminutives), al- ways (without regard to sex), as : bn| g3?ann!etn, bag ^riiufein, bag ^iibj^en. ftd GENERAL REMARKS ON GENDER. lo; (b) Those in -turn, utmost always, as : bad (S^riftentum, Christendom, Christianity. (f) Those in -nil, -f ol, -fcl, generally, as : bai ercigniS, the event ; bal Sd;ic!fttl, fate, destiny ; bad 9lats fcl, the riddle. («/) Those beginning with the prefix ®c-, unless other- wise determined by meaning, termination, or derivation, as : bad ©cmcilbe, the painting ; bad (Ucmac^), the apartment ; but : bcr ©ebattcr, the godfather; bic ©cbattcrin, the godmother; bie ©efeHfrJaft, the company; bcr ©ebraur|, the usage (from bet SSraudj^/ ™asc. monosyll.). Give the gender of the following substantives, assigning the rule in each case: i8eilcf)cn, §ut, ^ird)e, ^Ilnftler, l*aubfd)aft, gffig (vinegar), «lume, ©ejdienf, .tnablein, «cgrabnl«, ^urd)t, ^afen, Oewittcr, ginger, Stpfel, ^orb, Untocrfttcit', Stftrolog, %m\6), ^^^iIofopl|lc. 90. General Remarks on Gender. 1. Gender agrees, as in English, with sex, except in bad SSeib, in Diminutives in -r^cit and -Icilt, and in certain compounds (see below). 2. Inanimate objects, which in English are all alike neu ter, may be of any gender in German, as determined by Meaning or Form, as : btr §ut, bic S3lume, bad Sud^. 3. Each substantive of which the gender is not determined by the rules should be learnt with the Definite ArHcle as the sign of its gender. 4. Compounds are of the gender of the last component (hence bad ^rfluenjimtncr, the woman, is neuter), except bcr 2lbfi^eu, disgust, from bic 6c^eu. bic STnttnort^ the answer, from bad ^Bort. bcr ^itttUOr^, Wednesday, from blC 2Boc^e. io8 LESSON XVIII. [§§90 pcmlu r''''" ^^"^P^""^'^ o( mt, Which are given in Ap- 5. The exceptions to the foregoing lists will be found in Appendix I. ^1- Double Gender. ^ The gender of the following substantives (with others given in App. J.), varies with their meaning: Plural, 33iinbc \ 53ttnber \ See § 64, above. Sonbc ) S3auern Sauer ^eiben ©c^ilbe bet S3anb, volume ( bond, tie bcr S3auer, peasant , bo8 33auei', bird-cage bcr Oetbc, heathen ) ble §cibe, heath ) brr (Sc^ilb, shield b08 (Sc^ilb, sign (of an inn, etc.) ©c^'ilbcr bcr (2ee, lake y bic ©ee, sea j ®^^en bcr 2:(ior, fool, g. beg ^Ifiorcn ^^orcti bad Vcjtix, gate, G. beg ^^orcg 3:r;orc Vocabulary. (The pupil will supply the article in German where not given.) to visit, study (at a univer- relate, tell, enciMen sity), befud)en (+ Ace.) paint, malen collect, gather, fammein ( ieniale> neighbour, b^ 9^ac&. peasant, country-man, b-^^- * avin ^^"^^^ . orator, b- 9tebncr •^"^ bedroom, b^ ©c^Iafaimmer bee, b-^ >^ 91) DOUBLE GENDER. 109 boat, ba^ ?^out friendship, b^ grcunb[d;aft inn, b^ (^Hi|t(;aug . district, locality, b-^ ©e'genb history, story, b-^ ©efd;ic^te waiter, b-^ ^^cHner piano, ba^ ^(05)161/ vice, ba« 2a\icv lesson, b-i- Seftion' people, hie Scute Cpl.) love, b-^ Siebe , mathematics, b-^ ajfait^cinati! (sing.) so, fo littie^son, b-^ SiJ^nd^en sun,^-S^ Sonne city-j^ate, town-gate, b'^ (Stabtt^or . ingratitude, b-^ Unbanfbarfeit way, road, b-^ 2Beg vind, b^Binb rage, fury, bie 28ut sign, ba^ S^^^^^ terrible, terribly, fiirc^terlic^ strong (heavily, of rain, etc.), ftar! willingly, with pleasure, gem Idioms : 1, i like to learn German, 3cl) (erne flcrn iDcutfd), 2. A week affo to-day, ^tuu x>t>v adU Xagcii (Dat). 3. A week from to-day, ^tutt ii b e r caiyt Jage (Ace). EXERCISE XVIII. A. 1. D^ne (bie) 3reunbfcf;aft, (bie) §offnung unb (bie) 2ie6c iuuvbe bag Scben fe(>r traurtg fein. 2. Unfere 3Settern traren ^eute Dor ac^t %a^^l^ bet un§. 3. (^ie) ©c^meic^elei ift fein 3eic^en bev Sreunbfc^aft. 4. SSil^elm, lerne Inne Se!tio«. 5. 2Ba§ fur S3anbe finb auf bem 3:i[c^e in ^()rer ^ibliot^e!? 6. @g finb fiinf Scinbe Don ©c^itterg 2Ser!en. 7. !Die 2But beg ©turmeg ift furd;ternd>, a6ev bag (Scf;iff ift frf;on im §afen. 8. Semt ^^r ©ruber gem ^at^ematif? ^ein, aber er levnt gem ^eutfc^. 9. 2BeId;em 3}?abc^en gefjijren biefe 3^inge, ber 9JJarie ober ber ©ara ? 10. 3)te ©an!barfcit ift eine ^ucjenb, aber bie Unbanfbar= feit ift ein Safter. 11. iRarl ©c^mibt bcfuc^t im SKinter bie Unis berfitat, aber im ©ommer tt)o^nt ev bet fetnen ©Item auf bem 2anbe. 12. ^ene§ graulein Ijai i^rer 3=reunbin ein Sanb gum ©eburtgtag gefc^enft, unb i^re ^reunbin ift bamit febr mfrteben, 13. 3)iefe §anbfc^Uv^e 0el;oren nic^t mir, fie ge^oren meinem no LESSON XVIII. 91- ©cr;tua0cr. U. ^cv m^Ux Ijai cin ecf;tlb fur bag ©aftl;aug m bcm nov ficmalt. 15. iVado, l;aft bii bic i»^anbcv fiiv boinc mmUv flcfrtuft V ^J^cin, abcr id; luerbc [ic morjicu obcv am ^)Jfitt. ItJoc^faufcn. 1<;. McUncr, r;olcn 6ic mir ocfalliaft cin ^3Jfeffer unb cmcn Sbffcl. 17. (Sr ijat mir !cinc ^Intiuort auf mcinm ^H'lcf flefd)icft. IH. ai^rt^ fiiv cine ^JJJelobic f^iclt ba^ Ti^c^terAen unfcrcr !iBirtin auf bcm .itlauicr? 1}>. SBcnn id; ©clb l)attc fo iuurbc Id; cincn Tc^nd; unb 58orI;annc fiir mcin Sc^Iaftimmer fmifcn. 20. mmx mavk i(;rc ^cftiou nid;t lerut, fo luirb fie in bcr 6d)ulc nid;t flut antJuurtcn. B. 1. This country-man lives on a heath near the lake 2. The tempest is terrible, but the ship is already in the harbour. ;j. The stran-er praises this locality on account of the beauty of the landscape. 4. What kind of a flower is it ? It IS .1 violet. 5. We met a stranger on the way to the uni- versity. (J. Your aunt is my neighbour. 7. Who are these people ? They are the parents of my cousin. 8. The mother relates to her litlle^son the story of the little man in the wood. <). Have you heard the words of the Orator? 10 Dunng the tempest the wind shook the house. 11. The girl hangs the bird-cage before the window in the sun (ace.) 12 The bees gatlier honey from the flowers upon the heath, and the peasant sells it in the town. 13. When we hastened home yesterday, it was raining heavily. 14. I shall not wait for George, because I have no time. 15. When I resided at (bci) ni3^ uncle's, 1 was always at home at ten o'clock in the evening. ORAL EXERCISE XVIII. 1 W^er war heute vor acht Tagen bei Ihnen .? 2. Was f-ir Bucher haben Sie auf Ihrem Tische .? 3. Lernen Sie aern Mathematik? 4. Was macht Karl Schmidt im Winter? 5. Wer spielt jetzt auf dem Klavier? (j w-- — ^-^ o:. neute liber acht Tage macheii .? 94] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Ill LESSON XIX. RELATIVE PRO'AJOUNS.- IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. 92. Relative Pronouns. The Relative Pronouns are : 1. bcr, bic, ba3, > who (of persons), which (of 2. ttjclrjcr, tuclr^e, hiel^eS/ > things) — Definite. 3. met, who (= he who, whoever) ) 4. tUllS, what (= that which, whatever) ) Indefinite. ^ w \ '1 i the like of whom or which — Indeclinable. 6. bcrglc:£§cn, > 03. %tx, bit, bo§, as Relative Pronoun, is declined as follows : Singular. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Nom. bcr bie ba§ Gen. bcffcn bcrcn bcffcn Dat. bem ber bem Ace. ben bie bag Plural ALL GENDERS. bie, who, which, that bcrcn whose, of which bencn, (to, for) whom, which bie, whom, which, that Observe. — These forms are the same as those of the Defi- nite Article, except the added -en of the Gen. Sing., Gen. Plur., and Dat. Plur. 94. JBclrfjer, as Relative Pronoun, is declined after the bicjcr Model, but, like the Interrogative Juelc^er, lacks the Genitive. 112 LESSON XIX. [§§95- 96. Remarks on bcr and Iticljjcr. 1. ^cr and toell^cr refer alike to both persons and things, and are interchangeable, except that : (a) In the gen., bcffen, bcrcn, beffen,//. beren (not twelc^eg, etc.), are always used (see § 82, above). (<5) 5)cr is used when the antecedent is of the First or Second Person, the relative being, in that case, always fol- lowed by the Personal Pronoun, as: I, who am your friend, ^d^, bcr i^ ^l)x ^rcunb Bin, (or : ^c^, bic t(4 ^^re greunbin bin). O God, (thou) who art in Heaven, D ©ott, ber btt im §immel bift. 2. 2)cr and mliiitv, referring to inanimate objects, are usu- ally replaced by tQO (iuor- before a vowel) <^c/^^r^ a preposition (compare § 83, 3, above, for similar use of too for luag), as: The table, on which {ivhereofi) the book is, $Der %\\^, auf mcl4>em, or : morauf bag Suc^ ift. 3. The Gen. beffen, etc., always precedes its case, as : A tree, the leaves of which are green, @in 33aum, beffen flatter flviin finb. 96. Remarks on tncr and tting. 1. aScr and nia0 are declined like the Interrogative Pro- nouns iuer ? and luag ? 2. SBer is used of persons only, for all genders and both numbers? te!l§ never of ■tersQtis, 9«] REMARKS ON WCV AND m§. 113 3. 2Bcr and ttin^ as relatives, are .W.>//. and co.^j^ouud in meaning, and include the antecedent, as : aCcr nic^t f)bren iria, mufj fuf)lcn, (He) who will not hear, must feel. SBaS ic^ S6ncn ocf*icft fjabe, ift nic^t biet What (= that which) 1 have sent you, is not much. 4. mv never has an antecedent, since it includes the ante- cedent Itself ; therefore never say : ^er mam, totv ^ier tvav, but: ^er 5J?anji, ttJclj^cr ^ier toar, (The man who was here). 5. aBnS never has an antecedent, unless the antecedent be a neu er adjective or pronoun, such as nidm, nothing • ,ttmi someth,ng- ; aUc. everything ; or a phrase, in which c^a es «.i always replaces ba8, as: Nothing (that) I say, etc., 31^^, h,«8 irf; f^g^, etc. All (that) I have, etc., StlTcS, am t# i,ahc, 4. 1 he best (that) I have, etc., ®a§ SBefte, ms id, i,aU, etc. He does not learn his lessons, which (i. e. ' th; not tottS fe^r [cf;abe tft. ^ ' 6. Ever = aur^ or immtv after tucr or tt)a§, as : SSer e§ au^ (immer) cjcfagt ^at, Whoever has said it. 7. The Relative h,a§, like the Interrogative, is not used a ter prepositions in the Dative or Accusative, but is re placed m the same way by m(v); with prepositions governing the Genitive, \m is used (see § 83, 3, above). OBSERyE.--There/af^^e.n.s, never be omitted \n German, as It so frequently is in English, hence ; (Engl.) The man I met, {Germ,) 2)er mam, m\^m (bent) tc^ Beoegnete. 114 LESSON XIX. [§§97- 97. ^CSglcidjCil and bcrg(ci(^cn are indeclinable words, the former referring to a masc. or neuter noun in the sing., the latter to fern, or plural nouns, as : ©in Mann, bcggleid^en (dat.) icf) nie begeguete, A man, the like of whom I never met. §aben <3ie jemal^o bcSgleicfjen gef^ort? Have you ever heard the like of that ? ©inegrau, bcrgleic^en, etc., A woman, the like of whom, etc. ^inber, bcrgleic^en, etc., Children, the like of whom, etc. 98. Construction of Relative Sentences. I. Every relative sentence is of course a dependent sen- tence, and as such must have the verb at the end, as : The wine, which I have sent you, is very good. 5Der SBein, ben id; ^f)ncn gcf^irft Jofic, ift fef^r gut. a. The Relative must immediately follow its antecedent, when the latter (whether subject or not) precedes the verb of a principal sentence, or when the separation from the ante- cedent would cause any ambiguity, as : !E)er 5}?ann iucld)er geftern ()tcr juar, ift mein DnM. The man who was here yesterday is my uncle. S)a^ 33uc^, iueId)ivJ Sic mir [dncftcn, ^a'be \^ nic^t gebraud)t, I have not used the book you sent me, but : 3^^ ^a\it ba^ 33u(^ ttid)t gebraui^t, welched «. 0. ». 3. In sentences with lt)er or i»a§, the relative clause will be counted as the first member of the principal sentence, which will therefore begin with the verb, e. g. : aSctr nic^t f)oren iuiff, mufe fufjlen, He who will not hear, must feel. Note. — In German, every dependent sentence or clause is separated from the sentence on which it depends by a comma. The relatives h)etd)eu and bei must therefore always be preceded by a comma. 99] IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. 115 ®^» Irregular Weak Verbs. I. A Few Weak Verbs, besides adding the termination -it to form the Impf., and -t to form the P. Part., also change the Stem Vowel in the Impf. Indicative and P. Part., but nof in the Impf. Subjunctive. They are : Infinitive. Brcnnen (intr.), to burn, be consumed with fire fcnnen, to know, be ac- quainted with nrnnen, to name rennen, to run (at full speed) Impf. Ind. Impf. Subj. P. Part. brannte brcnnte gebrannt fonnte fcnnte gefonnt [cnben, to send U)cnben, to turn fcnbcte tccnbcte genonnt gemnnt ( gefonbt 1 gejcnbct ( gehjanbt 1 gettjcnbct ttannte ncnnte rttnnte rcnnte ( f anbte ( fenbcte f tt)anbte ( tocnbcte Observe: i. The double forms of the last two verbs, of which the shorter are in more general use. 2. The three following verbs have also a consona?it change, with Umlaut in the Impf. Subj. : Infinitive. Impf. Ind. brittgen, to bring ^^a^te bcnfen, to think bttdjte biinfen, to seem (impers.) ) ^^^^'^^ (beuc^ten, baud)ten) ) (^f*te) I biintte Remarks. — I. Compare the English: bring, brought; think, thought. 2. The forms baud^te, gebauc^t, are as yet more common than beud)te, nebeuc6t, but the latter are according to the new official orthography. Impf. Subj. briic^te bitc^te bcur^te (bauc^te) biinfte P. Part. gebm^t t3ebttrjt gebcut^t (gebduc^t) gebitnft ii6 LISSSON XIX. [§99 3. Besides- the Inf. bcud^tcn, there is also a Pres. Ind. 3. sing. bcud;t. NoTK. — The German Perfect often replaces the English Past or Imperfect (see also Less. XLIIL), as : I sent you the book yesterday, 3rf) ^abc M)ncn flcftcvu ba<5 ii3url) gcf^iift. I was working yesterday the whole day, S^-l) ^obc gcftevu hm gausen Xci^ gcor&citet. Vocabulary. consider, bcbenfen (trans.) order, bespeak, bcfteltcn tliink of, benten an (-f- ace.) or benfen (+ gen.) recognize, er!cnncn ' like to hear, (jern l;i3ren divide, share, teilen burn, consume with fire (trans.), bcrbrenncn wish, triinfd^en apply to, fid^ hjcnben an (+ ace.) acquaintance, bie 33efanntfc^aft -^/ postman, ber ^oftbote -^ title, ber S^itel all, everything, 2(IIe^ unhappy, unfortunate, un= improbable, untDaijrfc^einlid^ just now, ebcn, foebeu diligently, industriously, flei^ig easily, readily, leid^t really, lt>ir!lid; Idiom,: It Is a pity, @« ifl fcfjabc (adj.). EXERCISE XIX. A. 1. 2)er ^ai[ci* fanbte einen SSoten mit ber ^fZac^rid^t nad^ S3erlin. 2. 2Bcr nic^)t fiir mic^ ift, ift tuiber mic^. 3. ®ie £eute, bei bcnen ic^ auf ^efud; geiuefcn bin, finb ©c^otten. 4. §at ber ^ettncr 3l((e§ gebvad^t, it)a§ luir brauc^en? 5. 2)er ^oftbote ^at mir bie '^lad)x\d)t gebrac^t, ti:)orauf id; hjartete. 6. ^d; erfannte h)ir!Itc^ ben .§crru nid;t, ber cjeftcvii mit meinem Setter in ber 0rd;e Wax. 7. ^a§ ^ferb bc§ (S)cneral§ rannte urn ben $rei§. 8. ^er ?^rembUna, beffcn 33efanutfd)aft icb m mad)en tDiinfcbe, ttJtrb morgen l^ier fein. 9. ^a§ 3=euer brannte im Dfen unb toers §99] IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. It; btamu bas §c(,. 10. SBcnn er ungtecHid; wnr, tranbte er M b.e ®ef*.d,te bie ®ie mir gcftern er5al,ltcn,t, b J ; ! fe, baruber aela^t. 12. ^,t i„ jJiener bie Silver 1*12 fiebra^t b.e 4 6eim Suc^^anblcr gefauft ^abe? Is. SOicn^ 3 bu ,c .ba#t, toa« bu bift? 14, Sir i,aL b«« ^olj fcbon i« kann ba^ m m aijt lagen gcfauft babe,,. 15. i jT^tb @.e b.e ®eW.<5te, bie .fperr 9ra«„ uns evjaljit r,aty is^" Stan, beren Jiid,ter<^e„ bei un.3 auf Sefuc^ i t/toirb morgen „!* '^iVt'i •";■.'"• 2S"«®iein ber Stabt get^ort §aben!itS «ntoa^rWemI.c^^ 30. @, .egncte geftern, 1^ febr ^^^Xat ba teir auf bent Sanbe toatcn. ' A 1. Do you hear what X say to you,? 9 Mv fath,.r ,1 ways burnt the letters which were no'longer us^ul 3 H ' has not told me what he wishes. 4. The man, in whose house we hve:. .s the brother of our neighbour. 5. Here s the meat wh„; . you have ordered, fi. The honey which the countryn,an brought us yesterday is not good. 7 Do vou know the artist who has painted this picture.? \:pJZ who are not industrious do not become rich. 9. We readUv beheve what we hope and wish for. 10. What we fy I thmlcmg of when you met me yesterday.? 11. Have you all you need? 13. I believe that I know the man who "s in front of the house. 13. I always bum the newspapers T d" no need. 14. The students to whom these books beb„' t not study them diligently, which is a pity. 1.5. I do not know the song, the title of which you have just named, "g What was burnmg ? The gardener was burning leaves. ORAL EXERCISE XIX. 1. Was m.achen Sie gewohnlich mit den Zeitungen, die Sie n.cht mehr brauchen? 3. Wer hat Ihnen diese Nachricht ii8 LESSON XX. [§§xoo^ gebracht? 3. Woran denken Sie ? 4. Was m?chen Sie, wenn Sie einen Feiertag haben ? 5. Glauben Sie jede Ge- schichte, die Sie horen ? 6. Was erzahlt das Kind ? LESSON XX. DECLENSION OF ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES:- STRONG FORM. -CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS. 100. Declension of Attributive Adjectives. The boy is good — Predicative Adjective. The good boy — Attributive " Remember: That Adjectives used as Predicates are not varied (see § 14). 101. Every Attributive Adjective either is or is not preceded by a determinative word (?. e., article or pronominal adjective), which shows gender, number and case by distinc- tive endings. 102. First Form. — If not preceded by any such deter- minative word, the Attributive Adjective follows the Strong Declension, which is the same as the biefer Model through' out, thus : Strong Declension of ^i, good. Singular. Plural. MASC. Nom. gutcr Gen. gutcg Dat. gutciU Ace. 0uten FEM. gutc fiiitcr gwtc NEUTER. sutel SUtCg i3uieitt Sutcg ALL GENDERS. 0utcr Quten 9«te loa] STRONG ADJECTIVE DECLENSION. Substantives with Adjectives. 119 Singular, Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. MASC. good wine gutcr 2Bein 9ute8 (en) 2Bein(e)§ 0utcm 2Bein(e) <^\xitxi 223ein FEM. good soup flute aft gefungen, thou hast sung, etc. bu babeft gefungen, etc. \^ bin gefafien, I have (am) fallen, etc. id; f ci gefallen, etc. Pluperfect. (Imperf. of | j'^^^^" [ + P. Part, of J fingen ) \ / fatten ) J \6) f)atte gefungen, I had sung, etc. ic^ ^atte gefungen, etc. i^ ttiar gefaUen, I had (was) fallen, etc. ic^ todxt gcf alien, etc. Future. (Pres. of merben + Infin. of i |^"^''" i ) ic^ tDerbe fingen (faHen), I shall sing [^ h)erbe finaen (faKen) (fall) bu hJtrft fingen (fallen), thou wilt sing bu it)erbeft fingen (faUen), (fall), etc. etc, ktOj COMPOUND TENSES OF fingcn, faflen. 133 Indicative. Subjunctive. Future Perfect. ic^ n)crbe gefungcn ^abcn, I shall have ic^ h)crbe gefungett ^Ben sung bu h)irft gcfungen l^abcn, thou wilt have sung, etc. tc^ tDcrbc gefaflen feltt, I shall have (be) fallen, etc. Conditional. Simple. (Impf. Subj. of merben -|- Infin. of fmgcn, faflen) ic^ hJiirbe ftngen (fallen), I should sing (fall), etc. bu h)erbeft gcfungen ifahtn, etc. ic^ tDcrbe gefallen fern, etc. Compound. (Simple Cond. of \ ^?^'" \ + P. Part, of fmgen, fallen) id^ h)urbc gcfungcn f)ahm, etc. x^ twiirbe gefaHcn fcin, etc. Infin. Perf. gefimgen (ju) ^aben, to have sung gefaHen 3U fein, to have (be) fallen 109. Compound Verbs. — Compound Verbs are con- jugated like the simple verbs from whic they are derived; those having one of the inseparable particles ht-, tx-, ttnp-, tni-, 9c- bcr-, jcr~, do not take the prefix ge- in the P. Part., as : k-fingen, P. Part, fic-fungen (compare Je-ja^Ien, P. Part. Bc-ga^lt, § 35, Rem. 6), and in the Inf. take ju l>e/ore the prefix ; other compounds take the prefix ge- and the particle ju between ihe prefix and the verb (Part, or Inf. respectively). 110. The Strong Verbs are divided into classes, according to the 'Ablautj ' or Vowel-changes, of the root (see § 105, Rem., above). These classes, with the verbs belonging to each, are given in the following Lessons (XXII-XXXI). 124 LESSON XX. r§"i 111. Shorter Forms of the Conditional. The Impf. and Plupf. Subj. are frequently used in all Verbs instead of the Simple and Compound Conditional respectively, thus: tdj) ^dttc = \art hoarse, fjeifer bad, fcf)Ied)t black, fd)tt)ar3 brave, valiant, ta^fer true, faithful, treu weighty, important, tt)i(f)ttg at last, finally, enblid) yes (emphatic), yes indeed, ja n)D^l Idioms: To appoint (as) governor, jum @0UDerneur crncnncn ; cheer- fully, frolKU SOlutCd (genitive with adverbial force); good »Siorning, gutcn Wtotf gcii (i. e., 3d) tounfd^e Sbnc" eincu quUh SOlorgcn). EXERCISE XX. A. 1. Wuin Wh\\^x ift t»on gutem, l;artei!t ©ta^le. 2. §o{;e SBciume fjaben geh?o^nli4> gvo^e ^ilfte. 3. 2Ba§ fiir ^ferbe l^aben §"ll SHORTER FORMS OF CONDITIONAL. 125 ©ic geJauft? ^d; ^abe Wirnrje unb n)eif,e ^>ferbe ge!auft. 4. pKcu 6ie Gcfairigft mcin ®la§ mit fiifd^cm Staffer. 5. STa^fere eolbaun eileu fvo^en mnU^ in bic ©c^lac^t. 6. 3h?ei glucflic^e gjlen[d;en iuof;nen in jenem ipaufe. 7. ipaben ©ie etma^ 9?eueg in beretabt ge^ort? ^a Woi)l biel 9^eue§, aber nic^tg ^nte* reffante^. 8. ^ier i[t guter ^afe unb frifd^eg SBrob; bitte, bebienen @ie fic^. 9. 2Cer bu bi[t geigt beinc ©efettfc^aft. 10. ©uten ^JJorgen, .^err ^xam, i^ ^o[fe, bag iuir ^eute fd)dne§ ^Better ^aben ioerben. 11. ^n hjelc^em ^aFjre ernannte bie ^onigin ben ©rafen Don 3)ufferin gum ©ouberneur Don ganaba? 12 ^d) ^aU guteg $a^ier, aber meine ^eber ift fc^Iec^t. 13. ^ie .^inber liebten meinen Dnfel, mil er nie miibc h)urbe, ifjnen fd)one @efd;icf;ten gu erjafjlen. 14. @ie {jaben enblid^ befannt, bafj ®ie Unvec^t f)aben. 15. ^c^ ^abe mic^ erfditet ; mm id) je|t fange, it)urbe id^ fjeifer twerben. 16. ^c^ ^aU fd^on oft ba§ Sieb gef)ort, h)elc^e§ bie ©dngertn im Ron^^xt gefungen ^at 17. ©ute md)cx ftnb treue O^reunbe, bie immer ^at fiir un§ fjabcn. 18. 2Benn tt)ir fleigig finb, fo toerben unfere Sef)rer ung (oben. B. 1. Have you black ink or red? I have black. 2. Rich people are not always generous, and generous people are not always rich. 3. What kind^of neighbours have you .? We have friendly neighbours. 4. Please fill my glass with pure fresh water. 5. High mountains and beautiful valleys spread out before our eyes. 6. I have something important to say to you. 7. New friends are not always good friends. 8. This mother buys her children something useful. 9. Have you white paper or blue } I have white, but my brother has blue. 10. I like to hear the singer, who sang at (in) the concert yesterday. 11. My sister did not sing at the concert, because she was hoarse. 12. If she had not been hoarse, she would have sung. 126 LESSON XXI. Riia ORAL EXERCISE XX. 1. Weshalb liebten die Kinder meinen Onkel? 2. Wer wohnt in jenem Hause ? 3. Was hat die Mutter ihren Kin- dern gekauft? 4. Was fur Papier haben Sie fiir mich gekauft ? 5. Warum sangen Sie nicht ? 6. Womit haben Sie mein Glas gefiillt ? LESSON XXI. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 112. The Passive Voice is formed by means of the vailous tenses of the auxiliary verb Incrbcn, to become (sec § j >)) + the Past Participle of the Verb to be conjugated, as in the Paradigm below. Principal Parts of ttierbett : iNFiN. tucrbcn Impf. touxht (toarb) Past Part. geiDOrbcn Note. — The perfect tenses of tDerben are formed with fein (see S 53. fl), Perf. 3t^ Bin gciuorben; Plupf. irf) toar geirorbeii, etc For the formation of the future and conditional, see fein (§ 52). Paradigm of the Passive Voice of loBett, to praise. '"^'c**'ve- Subjunctive. Present. (Pres. of roerben + P. Part, of loben.) I am (being) praised, etc. I (may) be praised, i*.to id) tt)erbe ^ id^ njerbe i>w h)irft bu h)erbeft er it)irb I er toerbe toir toerben f 8^^**" tvix toerben f 9^^**^* t^r iuerbet i^r merbet ftetoerben J fiehjerben §iial PASSIVE VOICE OF loBen. 127 Indicative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. (Imperf. of ttjciben + P. Part, of toben.) I was (being) praised, etc. 1 might be (being) praised, id) tt>urbe (toarb) bu tDurbeft (tDarbft) er luurbe (n)arb) hjir tr>urben \i}x ttjurbet fie n)urben gc(oH ic^ tt)iirbe bu iDurbeft er tuiirbe h)ir iDurben i^r icurbet fie itjiirben [etc. gelobt Perfect. (Perfect of irerben + P. Part, of loben.) (Part, of tDerbcii omits gc-) I have been pr ased, etc. id) bin bu bift erift h)ir finb il^r feib fie finb I (may) have been praised. gclofit hjorben ic^ fei bu feieft er fei h)ir feien i^r feiet fie feien [etc. gclafit h)orben Pluperfect. (Plupf. of ttjerben + P. Part, of lobcn.) I had been praised, etc. I might have been praised, ic^ Wax gclobt it)orben ic^ trare gclobt iuorben [etc. bu iparft gelobt iDorben, etc. bu n)areft gelobt iporbcn, etc. Future. (Future of njerbeu + P. Part, of lobcn.) I shall be praised, etc. I shall be praised, etc. ic^ Jtjcrbe aelolit lucrben ic6 toerbe cdahi toerben bu njirft gelobt n^evben, etc. bu toevbefrgelobt ttjerben, etc. 128 LESSON XXI. [§iia Indicative. Subjunctive, Future Perfect. (Fut. Perf. of lurrbni + P. Part, of lobcn.) I shall have been praised, etc. I shall have been praised, etc. id; iuerbe flclobt iuorbcn fein id; iDcrbe gcloftt tDorben [ein tu luirft gelobt toorben fein, etc. bu tuerbeft gclobt trorben fein etc. Conditional. (Cond. of JDcrbcu + P. Part, of loben.) Simple. I should be praised, etc. id; luitrbc ge(o&t Juerben bu it)urbeft geIo6t tuerben, etc. Infinitive. (Infin. of iDtxbm + P. Part of loben.) J^res. to be praised gcIoBt Qn) luerben Per/", to have been praised gclofit )t)orben (511) fein Compound. I should have been praised id) iDiirbe gdobt tworben fein bu miirbeft gelobt morben fein etc. Participles. (Pait. of iDcrbeii + P. Part of loben.) J^res. being praised gc(oBt tDcrbenb Past been praised gclofit iDorben Imperative. (Imper. of tucrbcit + P. Part, of loben.) be praised, etc. twerbe gclafit it)erbe er gelobt iuerben Irir gelobt trerbet geIo6t it)erben fie geloBt Remarks. — I. The shorter forms, i. e. Impf. and Plupf. Subj. (see § m, and Note), are commonly used for the longer forms with miirbe in the conditional. §112] PASSIVE VOICE. 129 2. Observe the omission of the gc- in the P. Part, of iDcrbcn (loorbcn for gc-morbcn) when used as auxiliary of the passive voice. 3. The personal agent with the passive voice (which is the subject of the active verb) is denoted by the preposition Hon (Engl, by), as : ^er unartige ^nabe h)trb Hon feinem 2ef)rer Beftraft, The naughty boy is being punished by his teacher. 4. The auxiliary participle tDorben is omitted whenever the state of the subject may be regarded as still continuing, thus : ^a^ ^mi \\i (jebaut. The hous^ has been (is) built (and is still standing). 5. The Engl. *I am,' * I was,' etc., as part of the passive Auxiliary *to be,' must be rendered into German as follows: {a) By the proper tense of tocrbm when they are equivalent ^ *I am being,' ' I was being,* etc., as : The child is (i. e., is being) punished by its parents, ^a^ ^inb ttJtri Don feinen ©Item kftraft ; The dinner was being served, when we arrived, 3)a§ ^Httag^effen mnrbc ferbiert, alg h)tr anfamen ; or when the verb, being turned into the active voice, is in the Jsresent or imperf. tense respectively, as : The boy is (was) always punished by the teacher, Passive: \ ^^^" ^® ^^ ^^^^^ naughty, ] 3)er 5lnabe loivb (tuutbc) immer tjom Se^rer 6e= ftraft, ioenn er unartig ift (toar) ; The teacher always punishes (pres.) or punished Active: \ (^"^P^') ^^^® ^^^^ ^^^^"^ ^^ ^^ (was) naughty, I Tier 9(>fnvr fipWrnff /'fipflvnWi*^ tmmov hfn '^■^ych^vi [ hjenn er unartig ift (ipar). I30 LESSON XXi. [§§"a- {b) By the proper tense of fciii (with or without h)orben. see last Remark), when they are equivalent to 'I have been, 'I had been,' etc., or when the verb, being turned into the active, would be perf. or pluperf. respectively, as : Passive: j I ^m (=- have been) invited to the party, C ^cf; Mn 3ur ©efca[d;aft eingclobett (hjorben) ; Active: \ ^^^V ^^^^ invited (perf.) me to the par* ,. ( man ^at mid; gur ©efeUfc^iaft ciiigcrobcii. (The dinner was (« had been) served, when we Passive: ■< arrived, ( ^a^ 3)?iltag§effen mx \tx\s\txi, al^ trir anfamcn; Active: \ '^^^^ ^^^ served (plupf.) the dinner, etc., ( 93Jatt f^tiiit bag gjiittaggeffcn fcrtJicrt, u. f. h>. The following examples will serve to show more clearly the proper use of the various forms of the passive : ' {a) 3)ie Saben mcrbcn W r^^\o\\^xt. The shops are being shut now (present), (P) 2)ie Sabcn finb biefe Socl^e fru^er Qe^roffen marbcn, The shops have been shut earlier this week {perfect), {c) 3)ie Saben finb je^t sefc^Ioffen, The shops are (and remain) shut {past state, contijiuing in the present), {a) !5)er ©olbat ttiurbe Don einer ^ucjer ticrltjunbct The soldier was wounded by a ball (a ball wounded him, i?np/,), (P) 2)er eolbat hiar bon einer ^ugel berhjunbet morbeit. The soldier had been wounded by a ball {pluperf,). {c) 2)er ©olbat tuar f(^tt)er t)ertt)unbet. The soldier was severely wounded (and still suffered from his wound : past state, continuing in the/^j/). J 2. < 113^ LIMITATIONS OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. I3i ' {a) ^iefc 23ruc!c hJurbe Dor ^cbn ^af>ren grbaut. This bridge was built ten years ago (they built it ^ then, that is the date of its being built, imp/.) (b) 2)iefe iBriicfe luttr bor ge^n ^at^ren gebaut. This bridge was built ten years ago (and is still standing: past state, continuing in t\iQ present). Exercise on the Preceding Rules. A. Turn the following sentences into German: 1. This house was built by my father. 2. My window is broken (flebrodjcn). 3. The child Is washed (gcwafd)cii). 4. This man is esteemed by everybody (jebcrnianu). 5. The garden must be sold. 6. The enemy was beaten ((]c|ci)(ogcn). B. Turn the following sentences into the passive : 1 . 2Boi:au§ madden h)ir aJieffcr? 2. 9tobert ©tcDeufou I)at bic 55ictoria^Sracfe bci Safontreal gebaiit. 3. 9«ciu S3ntber {)at mir biefe lU)r gofd)cntt. 4. 2)ie ^ciube bom- barbtcrtcn bie @tabt. 5. 2)cr ?cl^rer l)attc \iz\\ ^naben bcftraft, hjeil bet ^nabc fein SSucf) oertoren (lost) ^atte. 6. ©ein 33ater iDirb bid^ loben. 113. Limitations of the Passive Voice. I. Only the direct object of a transitive verb can be- come the subject of the passive verb ; thus we say in the Active : 3)Jein 23ater liebt miij ; and in the Passive: ^^ hjerbc Don meinem SSater geliebt. But the sentence : * I have been promised help by him * = §ulfc ift mir t)ou i^m berf^roc^icn (promised) ioorben, since in the Active: @r ):)Oii mir §ulfe berf^roc^en (promised), §iilfc is the direct, but mir the indirect object. Hence it fol- lows, that 2. Intransitive verbs can only be used impersonally in the passive, thus : 132 LESSON XXI. m nj He has been helped = (M, iff ((,„, get^olfen luorbcn. This mpersonnl passive is also used in expressin-^ an action without specifying any agent, as : " "°" e» liiuibe goftcrii 3t6enb Bid jtkiiit IPiir \m cilaubt ; ©cflcrit 3(6cnJi tnuriie, etc. 114. Substitutes for the Passive Voice. The passive voice is much less frequently used in German than m Enghsh particularly in the longer forms. It is "en replaced, especially with intransitive verbs : withlh!^ 'X^'^'^f/''' P^°"^"" "»•»« (Fr....,see Less. XXVII), with the verb in the active voice, as : aWttn gloufif i^m md;t. He is not believed • man tann x^m nic^t traucn. He cannot be trusted. W By a reflexive verb, as : ^er ec^Iiiffer Juivb fi,§ fi„ben. The key will be tound- and particularly with laffcn, as : ' 3)a§ im ^ U\d)t mac^en. That can easily be done Vocabulary. to conquer, overcome, ero'Bern mill, bte gjiu^le believe, glaubeu (intr., + dat. of person) wait (for), it)arten(auf -I- ace.) workman, bcr Wbeiter visit, visitors, b^r m\ud) beef, bag ^iubfleifc^ courage, bie STajjferfeit untruth, falsehood, bie Wn't it)a^r^eit as, alg 114] TH^. PASSIVE VOICE. 133 once, cin'mal carefully, forg'faltig this evening, f^cutc 2l6cnb severely, ftreng as soon as, fobalb* little, h^enig Idioms : As a child, when (I etc. was) a child, ali «lnb ; This house is for sale (lit., to sell, to he sold), bfcfc* ^aud ift ju oerfaufen; to have visitors, aSefud) tjabeti. EXERCISE XXI. A. 1. 3)iefe§S8ilblDurbebonTnemer®c^it)eftergcmaIt,unbe§ift i)ie( gelobt hjorben. 2. ® ie (Stabt ift bom ©eneral bombarbiert unb cr* obert iDorben. 3. 2Bir hjerben beftraft hjerben, h)enn tuir unfere Se!* tion nic^t forgfaltig lerneu. 4. 2)ieSaben finb gefcf;Iof(en, benn f)cute ift (etn) geiertag. 5. ^ft bag ^an^ neben ber ?!)iu^le bcvfauft? 6. ^ahjot;!, c« tuurbe geftern toon ^^rem ^effcn gefauft. 7. 3^on lt)em tourbe ba§ ^inb gerettet, aU ba§ §au6 brannte? 8. @g Itjurbe t)on einem 5(rbeiter gerettet, h)elc^er hjegen feiner ^a^ferfeit t)on ben Seuten gelobt n)urbe. 9. 3Bare ber ^nabe nad; §aufe gefc^icft iDorben, trenn er nic^tunarttg geit)efen h)are? lu. 9'^eben bem ^aufe unfereS 9fJac^bar§ hJirb cine ^irc^e Q^haut 11. ©g iDurbe geftern SCbenb i)iel bet m^ gefungen imb gef^ielt, benn tuir \)atUn 53e[uc^. 12. ^ft ba§ Sfiinbfleifc^ gefc^ic!t :t)orben, n^elc^eg id) beftetrt ^abe? 13. ®er 2ef)rer fagte, bag er mit meiner Strbeit gufrieben fei. 14. 2)ag 33ilb hjdre toon ben ^liinftlern nic^t gelobt hjorben, t enn e§ nic^t fe^r fc^on getoefen irare. 15. 211^ ^inb tourbe id^ tmr..er Don nieinem SSater ftreng beftraft, n)enn icb eine Untt)a^r^eit fagte. 16. SBirb e§ un3 eriaubt fein, imfere ^(ufgaben JU berbrennen, tvenn ioir bamit fertig finb? 17. @§ n)trb fjeute biel gef^iett, aber it^enig ftubiert, toeil iuir morgen feine ©(f;ule §aben. 18. (S§ ift mir nicf)t§ babon gefagt morben. 19. 2Bir tourben nic^t gelobt, beil iuir nic^t flei^ig tuaren. 20. ©oDalb bie Seftionen gelernt finb, iucrben Joir cincn ©^a^iergang mac(Kn. B. 1. Our parents love us. 2. We are loved by our parents 3. By whom was this letter brought? 4. It was brouo-ht b< a me.'isenger. 5. Our house is built, and we are already ^ving in it. 6. Is the dinner served ? No, it is being served -n 34 LESSON XXII. [51x5 now. 7. Was the soldier in the hospital wounded, or was he 111 ? H. He had been wounded by a bullet. 9. The carriages of the count will be sold to-day. 10. His horses are already sold. 11. Why is this boy not believed? 12. He is not believed because he once told an untruth. 13. It is agreeable to be praised. 14. My sister is learning the song, which was sung at (in) the concert yesterday. ORAL EXERCISE XXI. ]. Wer hat dieses Rindfleisch gebracht? 2. Wann wird uns erlaubt werden, im Garten zu spielen ? 3. 1st das Haus neben Jer Kirche verkauft? 4. Wird heute Abend viel stu. diert werden.? 5. Von wem wurde der Knabe nach Hausa geschickt ? 6. 1st dieses Bild zu verkaufen ? LESSON XXII. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES: WEAK AND MIXED.- STRONG VERBS: Bd§cn MODEL. 116. Declension of Adjectives: Second Form. If preceded by the Definite Article or by any deter- minative word of the bicfcr Model, the Attributive Adjective follows the Weak Declension, and takes -c in the Nomi- native Sing, of all Genders, and in the Accusative Sing. Feminine and Neuter; otherwise -en thr ughouti Weak Declension of ^ut, good. Singular, Plural, MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. gate Gen. gutcn Ace. guten gutc guten 6utc flute ^"^it flutet) [§"5 §»'5l WEAK DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 135 Substantives with Adjectives. Singular. MASC. FEM. Nom, Gen. Dat. Ace. the good man the good woman ber gutc 3Kanu bie gutc ^rau be^ gutcn ^Itonneg ber gutcn 3=raii bem giitftt '^i)lo<\\XK^ ber gutcii J^rau ben guten 9JZann bie gutc %xtx^^xy bife oebtffen Engl. Analogy : bite bit Ablaut: (| \ bitten w t LIST. Notes. - i. Compounds are only given in the Lists when the slmpl, Verb IS not found in the strong form. 2 R. = Reflexive; N. = Neuter, i. e, conjugated with feitt onlyj ^ tr, /"'"' ^'"^ ^""''^^^ '- ^" ^**^ '^^^ °^ ^«^^«5 W. indicates that the Weak form is also used without difference of meaning. beigen, bite (er)6leic^en (W. N.), turn pale (6e)flci^en (R.), apply one's self 9leid;en, resemble, be equal to gleiten (N.), glide greifcn, grasp, seize fneifen, pinch icibcn, suffer erblic^ befli^ 0"ff fniff mt gebiffen erblid^en befliffen geglic^en geglitten gegriffen gefniffen QdiiUn ii8] STRONG VERBS : BciJeU MODEL. '39 jjfetfen, whistle rei^en, tear teiten (N. A.), ride fd^Ieid^en (N.), sneak fd^Ieifen, grind fd^meijen, fling fdjineiben, cut fdjireiten (N.), stride ftreic^en, stroke ftreiten, contend h)etc^en, yield titt m^ Mmig fd^nitt fd^ritt ftrid^ ftritt gejjfiffen geriffcn gentten gefd^lid^en fiefd^liffen gefc^miffen Qcfc^nitten gefc^ritten geftridjien geftritten geh)id^en Remarks.— I. The root vowel being shortened in the Impf., the following consonant, if single, is doubled; and stems in -b (fc^neiben, (eiben) change b into it 2. Those whose stem ends in -ft change g into f( in the Impf. (unless final) and P. Part., as : beigen, ic^i big, toxx biffen, gebiffen. 3. The following Verbs are weak when they have a different meaning, as below : bleic^en (trans.), bleach bletc^te gebteic^t fc^leifen, drag ; raze (to the ground) frfjleifte gefc^Ieift ttjeidfien, soften, soak tt)etd^te geh)eid(>t 4. Segleiten, to accompany, is no compound of gleiten, to glide, but of teiten, to lead (weak, = be-ge-leiten) ; ijerleiben, to make disagreeable, spoil (not from leiben, but Seib) is weak. Vocabulary. to set out, depart, ab'reifen cut off, ab';d;neiben paint (not pictures), a\x- = ftreid^en slip, slide, aug'gteitcn comprehend, understand, be: QIC t fen seize, ergreifen I40 LESSON XXII. f§ii6 fear, fic^ fiirc^ten (i)or + dat.) tear (to pieces), §errei|en pass (time, etc.), gu'bnngen Cinderella, 3(fc^en^uttel barber, ber 33arbier' idea, notion, ber 33egriff steamer, steam-boat, bag S)am^ffc^iff thief, ber 2)ieb grass, bag ©rag hair, bag §aar hay, bag §eu huntsman, hunter, ber Sager illness, bie ^ranf^eit fever, bag gieber ' slipper, ber ^antoffel rain, ber dtcQm rheumatism, ber 9fif)eumatigmug piece, bag evil, angry, cross, 6ofe joyous, merry, fro^Iid^ smooth, slippery, glatt golden, of^gold, golben violent, he^vy (of rain), ^eftig naughty, ill-behaved (of children), un'artig true, iua^r furious, tDii'tenb on that account, beglregen of it, bat»on the day before yesterday, tor's geftern H Jf * "" ^^^ P"*"* "^ ^^* *^""* *»^' <»" ^'Srim fcf tt. You are tired, are you not? ®ic |Tnb mube, nid,t n>al)vl So are we, 2BJr finb ti and), George has torn my coat, ©corg ftat mir ben mod jerrfffcn. EXERCISE XXII. ^. 1. ^er ©enerat m. ritt auf etnem [c^hjarjen ^pferbe burcB he ©tra^en ^Torontog (t)on Toronto) . 2. 2Bie Fjaben ©ie bie 3eit auf bem Sanbe gugebrac^t ? 3. 2(n hjag fiir einer ^ranf^eit ^at ^^r 3Sater fo lange gelittcn? 4. ©ie finb miibe, nic^t tua^r? 3Bir finb eg and). 5. 2r(g mein S3ruber jung mx, l)atU "r fc^lec^te 3a.^ne unb litt fefjr an ^afjniuef). 6. ®er fc^n)ar^e anb un= fer(e)g 3^ac^barg ift bofe ; er f)at borgeftern ein fleineg^^inb ge* btffen. 7. llnf(e)re alien ^c^barn begleiteten ung nac^ bem §afen, alg Juir abvciftcn. 8. ^o Woljnt ber «nrbicr, ber 5^nen bag §aar gcfd^nittcn ijat^ 9. %cm alteg meffer fcTmetbet jen gut, benn ber Wiener l;at eg geftern eefc^liffen. "lo/^llg id; bor §ii8] STRONG verbs: bcijen model. 141 ber ©c^ule iiber bie glatte ©tra^e fcJ^ritt, glitt ic^ aug unb jerrife mir ben neuen 9floc!. 11. %l^ ber !Dieb im 33egriffe Wax, ing gaug ju fc^leidjien, ergriff i^n ber Wiener. 12. Unfer alter 9iac^« bar litt lange an (am) 9fl^eumatigmu§, unb hjar beStoegen immer ju ipaufe. 13. ®er ©eneral rttt mit feinen Dffijieren iiber bie Sriicfe. 14. ^er b5fe ^nabe auf bem Sl^felbaum rig bie reifen ^^)fel toom SBaume unb fd^mig fie auf bie @rbe. 15. 3Jlein junger ^fJeffe, ber auf ber Uniuerfitdt toar, ^at am gieber gelitten, aber er ift je^t irieber hjo^l. 16. Slfcfjen^juttcU ©cl(>h)efter fc^nitt fic^ (dat.) ein lic^eg Sieb. 19. ^iefeg 5iKeffer ift nid)t fd^arf; n^ann trurbe e§ gefc^Iiffen? 20. RaxU fcfjoner, neuer died n)urbe bom §unbe gerriffen. B. 1. Where is the old knife that you ground? 2. When Mary was young she resembled her mother. 3. The bears sneaked (perf.) into the wood, but the hunters followed (perf.) them. 4. Where does the painter live who painted (perf.) our house ? 5. The industrious countryman tut (perf.) the grass yesterday, and is making hay to-day. 6. Why are you crying, Charles? I am crying because George pinched (perf.) me. 7. The rain spoiled my (dat. -|- def. art.) journey to the corntry. 8. The steamer has whistled already. Now I shall say fc^' r ell. 9. Little Charles is a naughty child; he has torn his (dat. of refl. pron. -f- art.) new dress. 10. Old people often suffer from rheumatism. 11. Have you understood what he said ? 12. The gardener was burning the boughs, which he had cut from the trees. 13. I have quarrelled with my old friend, because he was wrong. 14. This blue ribbon is too long, please cut a little of it off for me. 15. Why is Charles crying ? He has been bitten by a dog. 142 LESSON xxm. [|II9 ORAL EXERCISE XXIL 1. Was fiir einen Hund hat Ihr Nachbar? 2. Wie wiirden Sie die Zeit zubringen, wenn Sie reich waren? 3. Was machte der Wanderer, als er durch den Wald schritt? 4. Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 5. Wann werden Sie Heu machen? 6. Weshalb sind Sie so schnell nach Hause geritten ? LESSON XXIII. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS: Utihttt MODEL. 119. Possessive Pronouns. 1. The Possessive Pronouns are used when no substantive is expressed, as : \ The hat is mine (Pronoun) ; but : It is my hat {Adjective). 2. They are formed from the stems of the corresponding Possessive Adjectives by adding certain endings, as follows : {a) Endings of biefer Model (without article), as : Singular. MASC. Norn, meiner Gen. meincg Dat. tneincitt Ace. meincti Plural. ALL GENDERS. FEM. NEUTER. meinc mein(c)0 meincr meincg tneincr meincm tneinc mein(c)g Observe : In the Nom. and Ace. Neuter, -c of the ending may be omitted. meine, mine tneincr, of mine meincn, (to, for) mine nteine, mine So for the other persons : MASC. FEM. Sing, beincr beinc fein?t feinc i^rer i^re NEUTER. beincS, thine f(>tni>& flic ifo i^rcg, hers (its) §"9l POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 143 NEUTER. ttnf(e)vc0, ours eu(e)rc0, yours tf^rei, theirs ^^rc8, yours) MASC. N. ber tneine G. be^ meincn D. bem meinen A. ben meincn So Plural. ALL GENDERS. bie meincn, mine ber meincn, of mine ben meincn,(to, for)mine bie meincn, mine MASC. FEM. Plur. unf(e)rcr un[(e)rc eu(e)rcr eu(e)rc il^rcr if^rc (S(?rcr ^t^rc {b) Preceded by the Definite Article, and hence with end- ings of Weak Adjective, thus: Singular. FEM. NEUTER. bie meinc ba§ meinc ber meincn be§ meincn ber meincn bem meincn bie meinc ba§ meinc ber; bie, ba§ beinc, thine ber, bie, ba§ eu(e)rc, yours ber, bie, ba§ feinc, his, its ber, bie, bag ifjrc, theirs ber, bie, bag if)rc, hers, (its) (ber, bie, bag ^^rc, yours) ber, bie, bag unf(e)rc, ours {c) Preceded by Definite Article, with ending -ig -[" Weak terminations, thus : Singular. MASC FEM. NEUTER. Norn, ber meinige bie meimge bag meintge Gen. beg meinigen, etc. ber meinlgen, etc. beg meinigen, etc. Plural. ALL GENDERS. Nom. bie meinigen, mine Gen. ber meinigen, of mine, etc. So : ber, bie, bag beinige, thine ber, bie, bag feinige, his, its and so on for the other persons. Note. — i. In unjrigc and citrige the -e of the stem is always omitted. 144 LESSON xxiir. f§§ "9 Remark. -I. These forms are interchangeable, without ditterence in meaning, as : I have my book, but I have not yours, Sc^ f)aU mm 33uc^, a6er id; f)ah nic^t J bag g^rc His letter is here, but ours is not here, ( unf(c)rcr ) ©em 53rief ift ^ier, aUvj bcr unf(c)rc f ift nic^t ^ier. ( bcr unfrige ) 2. When a Possessive Pronoun is used as pre^icafe, it may be replaced by the Possessive Adjective w///iou^ ending, as : This book is mine, ^iefeg 58uc^ ift mcitt. 3. Observe the following idiomatic uses of the Poss. Prons. : W Sci^ rtJerbe bag aWcinigc (neuter sing.) x^jm, Is shall do my part, my utmost. ip) %\t 3J?eimgen, bic ©einigen (Plur.), My, his friends, family. {c) A friend of mine = mtitv boil metnen ^reunben. This friend of mine = J^icfcr mcin ^reunb. 120. Strong Verbs; filcibcii Model. Infin. Impf. Germ. Model: biciben blic6 Eng, Analogy : wanting Ablaut: ei |e LIST. Hci6en (N.), stay, remain Hie^ (ge)bei^en (N.), thrive gebie^ leil^en, lend, borrow \x%h P. Part. geblicben le ge6Iie6cn acbteBen Seliei^en r2o] STRONG vxHBs: hUxbm model. HS meiben, avoid |)reifen, praise reiben, rub f(^eiben (N. A.), part (intr. and trans.) fdfieinen, shine ; seem, appear fc^reiben, write fc^reien, scream, shout fd^toeigen, be silent \pmn, spit fteigen (N.), mount, ascend treiben, drive iDetfen, show, point out ^eii^en^ accuse Vocabulary. mieb gemieben ^)rieg gepriefen rieb gerieben fc^ieb gefc^ieben fd^icn gefd^ienen fc^rieb gefc^ricben 'd)xk gefc^rieen fc^h)ieg gefc^hjicgen frie gef|)ieen ftieg geftiegen ttieb getrieben toieg geh)ie[en aie^ flejie^en to copy, ab fd^rciben hang up, aup^cingen ascend, befteigen (trans.) prove, demonstrate, bes toeifen appear, erfc^einen shine, glitter, glanjen descend, f)erab'fteigen guard, keep, {jiiten rule, reign, govern, regieren write (to), fd^reiben (dat. or an -f- ace.) climb, fteigen (auf + ace.) pardon, excuse, t)er§eif)en remain behind, ^uriirf'bleiben cold, bie (grfaltung family, bie gamilie herd, flock, bie §erbe Idiom: Up to the present heat, bie §i^e last, ber Seiften pepper, ber ^feffer shepherd, ber ©chafer shoemaker, cobbler, ber ©d^ufler silence (act of keeping s.), ba§ ©d^tDeigen speaking (act of), bag 6prec^en throne, ber ^^xon pasture, pasturage, bie SSeibe fifty, funfgig, funfgig bright, brightly, ^ell loud, loudly, laut correct, ric^tig round, lunb bad, fc^Itmm strong, severe, ftarf time, still, noci) immcr. ti6 LESSON XXIII. EXERCISE XXIII. [§§ lao ^. 1. eg tft nid;t mU^ ©olb, m^ cjiim 2. e^rec6cn ift et^er ©^t^etgcn ift (s)oIb. 3. ®rf;ufter, bletb' 6ei beinem Seiften. 4. ©at a^t Xagcn bm ic^hJegen einer ftarfen ©rfciltung gu §aufe gebheben 5 @ine bon meinen Gouftnen ift je^t bei ung auf 33efu4 ober fte bleibt nic^t lange. 6. 28ag fur ^iere finb in jenem 3BaIbe? @g ftnb Saren. 7. ^te 9«utter unb i^re ^ocbter memten ^eftig, aU fie t)on einanbcr fc^ieben. 8. Mm Dbeim bheb h)egen ber gro§en ^i^e mit feiner ^amilie auf bem Sanbe. 9. ^an l)at an feinen 3Sater gefc^rieben, unb ic^ bin im Seqriffe an ben meinigen gu fc^reiben. 10. ^er ^5nig fc^imeg unb fcbien traurtg p fern, alg er bie fc^rimme ^cbric^t i^orte. 11 ^itte l^ergeiJ^en @ie mir, bag ic^ ^f^nen noc^' nic^t gefc^rieben f}ah,[ 12. m t)ah,n 6ie ^f;ren ^nt aufge^dngt ? ^c^ ^aU i^n neben bm^^ngen ge^cingt. 13. m^ tvxx auf ben Serg ftiegen, fcbien he eonne fc^on jett. 14. SSelc^e bon biefen Suc^ern n)unfien ©te ? ^^ tDunfc^e bie meinen. 15. 2Bir Mrben auf bem Sanbe gebheben fem, tt)enn unfere greunbe auc^ geblieben tDdren. 16 ^U §erben n)urben auf bie Seibe getrieben, aU U)ir bom ^era ^crabftiegen. 17. @§ ift nm bett)iefen h)orben, bag bie @rbe ninb tft. 18. ^ov funfgig ^a^ren beftieg bie ^onigin Victoria ben X^ron, unb fie regiert noc^ immer. 19. SSurben ®ie nacb ^uxopa reifen, w^nn id) sumcfbliebe, um 3^r §au§ ju buten ? 20. 3)ie ^naben ^fiffen unb fd;rieen, a(§ fie auf ben SBerg ftiegen. B. 1. George has black ink, but mine is red. 2. Mary's sister and mine are learning German. 3. We have looked for William's books and ours everywhere. 4. Your exercise is not correct, copy it. 5. Whose gloves have you .? I have mme and yours. 6. Why did the boy shout so loud? 7. To whom were you writing the long letter yesterday.? 8. I have black eyes, but yours are blue. 9. In what year did Goethe's * Faust' appear.? 10. Waiter, please bring me the vinegar and the pepper. 11. This lead-pencil is mine, where is I2(] TABLE OF ADJECTIVE ENDINGS. 147 yours? 12. Your aunt and mine are neighbours. \'^. The. professor seemed not to be at home, for his windows and shutters were not open. 14. I should write to him, if he wrote to me. 15. I was writing to my mother and Charles was writing to his when the postman brought us the letters. ORAL EXERCISE XXIII. 1. Seit wann sind Sie schon zu Hause geblieben? 2. Was machten die Schafer, als wir vom Berge herabstiegen ? 3. Wann bestieg die Konigin Victoria den Thron .? 4. Was fiir Tinte haben Sie.? 5. Fur wen ist dieser lange Brief.? 6. Welches sind die Namen der Monate .? LESSON XXIV. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES (concluded): TABLE, GENERAL REMARKS.- STRONG VERBS: fljiegcn AND Mtcn MODELS. 121. Table of' Adjective Endings. I. Strong. Singular, MASC. N. — cr G. — c8(cn) D. —cm A. —en FEM. NEUT. — C — C8 — ct -c§(cn) — cr —cm — c —eg Observe: -en for -eg in Gen. Sing. Masc. and Neuter before strong substs. Plural. M. F. N. — C — cr —en — c II. Weak. Singular. MASC. — C — Ctt — cn —en FEM. — c — cn —en — e NEUT. — c —en — cn — e Plur. M. P. N. — cn — cn —en ~en Observe: Persistent -n, except Nom. Sing, of all genders, and Ace. Sing. Fern, and Neuter. I4S LESSON XXIV. [§§ lai- MASC. Noin. — ei* Gen. — pii Dat. — en Ace. — en III. MiXF:n. Siiiirulaf. ■Jiri/^ imir . FEM. NKUTER. — e — e0 —en —en —en —en — e —ti ^'lural. M. F. N. —en —en —en —en Observe: Same as Weak (II), except Norn. Sing. Masc. Ace. Sing. Neuter. arv, Nom. 123. General Remarks on Adjectives. 1. Participles used attributively are employed and declined as Adjectives, as : geliebter 3Satcr, beloved father ; ba^ it)einenbe ^mb, the weeping child ; meine gee^rte 3)Zutter, my honoured mother. • 2. Adjectives and Participles used as Substantives vary their declension according to the rules for Adjective Declen- sion, but are spelt with capital letters, as: ber ^ranfc the sick man, patient ; Fern, bie ^ranfe, the sick woman; Plur bie ^tanfen; m. ^rarier, a sick man, patient; pi. S^ranfe sick people, patients. Remarks.— I . Many words, the English equivalents of which are Substantives only, are Adjectives in German, as: ber ^rembe, the stranger, foreigner, PI. bie ^^remben, but m. greht= ber, PI. grembe ; ber 9?eifenbe, the traveller, nw S^cifenber, etc. These Adjective-Substantives, when Masc. and preceded by the Definite Article, have the same inflection as the Weak Declension. 2. Names of languages from Adjectives are not declined when used without the article, as : aSa^ ift bie§ auf ^eutf* ? What is this in German ? laa] GENERAL REMARKS ON ADJECTIVES. 149 3. Adjectives of colour used substantively a-e indeclinable, or add -g in the Gen. Sing., as: ba« GJriin, be^ ©run(«). 4. If the Substantive is not expressed, the Adjective shows by its ending the gender, number and case, as : Gin !leiner iUfann unb ein grower, A little man and a tall one. Note. — The English ' one ' is in these cases not to be translated into German. 5. If a Substantive is preceded by a succession of Adjec- tives, they all follow the same form, as: gutct, alter, rotcr 2Bcin ; ber gutc, alte, rote %un ; eine^S outen, roten SSeineg. 6. Adjectives whose stem ends in -e(, -eti, -er, as : ebel, noble ; golben, golden ; ^ei[er, hoarse, drop -c of the stem when inflected ; those in -el, -er may drop -e of the termina- tmi instead, unless the termination is -e, -er, or -el, as : ba§ golbne Suuer; ber cblen or ebc(n ^rau; bem f>eifren or l^eifern ©anger. 7. The Adjective {)oc^, high, drops c when inflected, as : ber I5)0^e 33aum, the high tree. 8. Adjectives can generally be used without change as ad- verbs, as : luftig, merry, merrily ; angenefjm, agreeable, agree- ably ; gut, good, well. 9. Adjectives (so-called) in -er from names of places are indeclinable, as : bie Sonboner ^^i^ung, the Londqn newspaper; .hamburger ©d;iffe, Hamburg ships; ein ^^arifer §anbWu^, a Paris glove. Note. —These adjectives correspond to the English use of the I^roper names without inflection. They are really sulxstantives in the Gen. Plur., thus: bic ^ouboiicr Rcitiiiui is strictly bie Beitiina tierl^niibnnrr; the newspaper of the Londoners. Hence they are spelt with a capital letter. ,^ \ 150 LESSON XXIV. rS§ XM I o. After personal pronouns, the Adjective follows the strong declension except in the Dat. Sing, and Norn, (and some- times Ace.) Plur., as : (for) me, poor man ; yot: good people ; us little children, mir anncn manm ; i(;r gutcu 9.eute ; un^ f leinc(n) .cn, smell (tr. and intr.) (cr)fcl;aacn (W.N.), sound, resound faufcn, drink (of beasts) (dncjen, shoot fd^Iie^cn, lock, shut fieben (W.), boil (intr.) f^ric^en (N.), sprout triefen (N.), drip Remarks. — i. Observe, ns under the bei^en Model (§ 118, Rem. I, 2) the doubling of consonants and the interchange of 9 and ff : also the change of b into ii (as in letben fcfcnei- ben, ik Rem. i). 2. dtad)cn/to avenge,' is weak but has also P. Part, gcrod^en. 3- eaufen has also fiiufft, fiiuft in the Pres. Indie. 2. 3. Sing. 4. The simp/e verb [c^aaen is usually weak ([c^attte aes fcf) attt). ' 5. In fieben the weak P. Part, (gefiebct) is rare. fllomm Jlnrmi flenog xo^ erfc^oH foff fott f|)ro^ troff Oeglommen Ocfloumicn ge!rorf)en Senoffeu 0evorf;cn erfc^oHcn flefoffen flefcr;o[fen Oe[d;Ioffen gefotten ge^roffen getroffen 124. Strong Verbs : fc(Stcn Model. Infin. Germ. Model: fcd^ten Ejigl. Analogy : wanting Ablaut : ( 2.3. S, Pr. Ind. 2. S. Imper. fic^tft fic^t fid;t I LIST. Impf. foc^t P. Part. gefod^ten fcd)ten fip-ht irf?t[t, ^, fid;t flec^ten, weave, twine fad;t[t, flid;t, flic^t froc^t gcfoc^tt'ii gefloc^tten 152 LESSON XXIV. [§184 (er)lo[c^cn (N.), be- (erIiWeft) erlifc^t ertofc^ erIoW queHen, gush forth [d^meljen (N.), melt (intr.) fd;tt)eKcn (N.), swell come extmguished (erlifd^) melfen (W.), milk (milfft, mil!t, ntilf) molt gemolfen (quirift, quiat, queKe) quott gequoaen (fc^mil^eft) fc^mitgt fc^mol^ gefc^jmoljen (fc^mil^) (fc^miaft) fc^'.Diat fc^tooa gefAtDoaen Remarks. — i. Rare forms are enclosed in ( ). 2. The simple verb Ii3fa;en, 'to extinguish ' (ti.), is weak (lofc^te, geIofd;t), as are also its separable compounds e ^ 3- ec^mclsen (intr.) has also the forms (fc^mergeft), fc^tneht 4. ©c^meljen, ' to smelt ' and [c^h?eaen, ' to cause to swell ' (trans.), are weak. Vocabulary. extinguish, put out, au^'Iofc^en water (flowers, etc.), begie^en prescribe, ijerfc^reiben flow past, Uorii'berflie^en close, shut, j^it/fd^Iief^en exhibition, bic STu^'fteaung health, bie ©efunb^ett drink, beverage, bag ©etrcinf cow, bie ^uf)* maid, maid-servant,bte 39?agb* mid-day, noon, bcr 3)Jittag pain, bcr 6d)mcr5 snow, ber ©d^nee ^ight, o,6)\ celebrated, famous, beru^mt blind, bltnb healthy, healthful, ge[u'..u dear, lieb Limburg (adj.), $^-im6urgef dead, tot Toronto (adj.), ^Torontoer thereon, baran past, by, t)oru6er Jdiotna : 1. To ero uasf, tht> iw»,<.o ^... r^..*- . 4, In German, auf ^cutfd) or im ^(titfd[)en. §1241 strong: verbs fe*ten model. EXERCISE XXIV. 153 ^.1. 2Bie tDurben eie biefe 3Borter auf Deutfc^ fc^reiben? ^. ^d; f;abe memen 33ricf gefd^loffcu unb iuerbe i^n jetu naA ber ^oftbrmflcn. 3. ®c§ 3Jiorocu§ ftcicjen bie flcinm 33ogeI sum §im= inel auf unb finoen luftig. 4. SBetcf; grof^cS qSergniigen. aute ©e- funb;eit gu oeniefeen! 5. Gin fleincr etrom m tufticj an unfmm jpaufe i^oriibcr. 6. Xcx ^u^ bc§ ^lran!en ift gelcbtDolIen unb er Icibet fe(;r baran. 7. Unfcr geef)rtcr ^rofef|or ift feit ad)t ^abxm tot. 8. S)er 3^o!tor ^at bcm ^Iranfen guten, alten, roten Sein berf^ricbcn. 9. 2)ie Seitungen tx^Un m wn bcr STorontocr 3Iu§fteaung. 10. ^er S^egen quoK bom §inimel unb lofrT^e bag ghmmcnbe geuer au§. 11. Unfere Solbatcn fc^Ioffen bie 6tabt- t()ore unb focf;tcn ta|)fcr gegen ben geinb. 12. ®ie 9}?agbe ^aben bie Jlu^e gemolfcn unb je^t begiegen fie bie 33rumen. 13 Sitte frf;iDeigt, i§r gutcn 2^uU, benn bie ^ran!en leiben teM qrofte ed;mer3en. 14. SBufbe bcr M;rcr bbfe n^erben, h)enn ber ©Iter ^ne STufgabe scrriffe? 15. 5)er ©deafer f^at bem 9teifenben ben ^ii5eg nac^ bcr etabt gemicfcu. hi 2Burbe e^ ^^nen bie ^eife bcrleiben, tr)enn ic^ gurucf bliebe ? 17. ^ahm ©ie bie ^rdcBitgen ^Mumcn gefcf;cn, bie tt)ir bem ,^ranlen fd;iden? 18. ^er ©cbnee fc^molg unb bag SBaffcr troff bon ben §du[ern, alg bie Sonne gegen SJ^ittag tuarm fd;ien. 19. ^er Slinbe, ber neben um tt)o^nt, floc^t alDci ^orbe fur meine ^^utter. 20. 3)er junge unb bcr alte grembe, bie im Salbe jagten, ^ben biele 33ogcI ge. Wfen. 21. a?Dn h)cm finb bie Slumen begoffen toorben? <5ie fmb bom ©drtner begoffen h)orben. B. 1. The golden slipper was too snail for Cinderella's sisters. 2. Paris gloves and Limburg cheese are famous every- where. 3. The huntsman shot a hare and brought it home 4.^ Our neighbours are not at home, for their doors and wmdows are closed. 5. I do not believe every story I hear <>. Please, dear mother, tell us little children somethin- new and pretty. 7. If Charles tears his new book, his m'other 11 154 LESSON XXV. [§§ 124- will be very angry. 8. He seemed not to hear what I said to him. 9. These flowers are for the patients in the hospitals. 10. (The) green is agreeable for those who have weak eyes. 11. The horse is drinking the water which we have brought him. 12. Pure fresh water is a healthful beverage. 13. A week ago I was at (in) a concert, where this singer {/.) sang. 14. When the weather becomes cold, the dogs like to creep behind the stove. 15. The travellers enjoyed the beauty of the landscape, when they were ascending the high mountain. 16. Please tell me how this word is written in German. ORAL EXERCISE XXIV. 1. Haben Sie Ihren Brief schon geschlossen? 2. Wie lange ist Ihr geehrter Professor schon tot .-* 3. Was hat der Doktor der Kranken verschrieben "i 4. Weshalb wurde der Lehrer bose ? 5. Wer hat diese Vogel geschossen ? 6. Was hat der Jager mit dem Hasen gemacht, welchen er im Walde geschossen hat ? I LESSON XXV. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. - STRONG VERBS? fricrcu model. 125. Comparison of Adjectives. In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison are formed by adding to the Positive : -cr to form tlie Ojmparative, and -(c)ft " '' " Superlative, as : neu, new ncucr, newer neu(e)ft, newest reid;, rich rcic^cr, richer reidfift, richest aagenctim^ agreeable aiu-^cucbmcr, more agreeable angenel;jnft most agreeable 116] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 155 Remarks. — I. Monosyllabic adjectives with 0, 0, u (not OU) generally take Umlaut (but with many exceptions, giVen in App. K.), as: lang Ittttger ISngft tnxi fiirjer fiirjeft 2. The syllables -cr, (c)fl are added to every adjective, without regard to its ler.gth, as in the case of angme^m (given above, but see § i6i, note). 3. Adjectives used attributively in the Comparative or Superlative degree are declined, and add the usual endings fi/Ur the syllables -er, -eft respectively, as : ber reic^erc aJlann ein reic^ercr 3Jlann mein cilteftcS llleib liebftcr ^reunb 4. Participles are compared like adjectives, as : geliebt, beloved geliebter geliebteft 5. -c of the Superlative ending is retained only after b, i or a sibilant (f, ftj, 3, g, y), as : alt, Superl. altcfi ; but grofe always has Superl. grojt. 5. Adjectives in -c, -cl, -en, -er drop e of the stem in the Comparative, as : trcige, trager, tragft; ebe^ ebler, ebelft. 126. The Comparative. 1. 'Than ' = aU after the Comparative. 2. The compound form with me^r (Engl. * more ') is never (except with the adjectives given in § 161) used in German (as it is in Engl, with polysyllabic adjectives), unless when two acl^ectives (i. e., two qualities of the same object) are being compared, as : @r tft me^r \6)\qo.^ alg !ran!. He is more (i. e., rather) weak than ill. 156 LESSON XXV. [§§1.26 3. Comparison of equality : I am (just) as ricli as he, ^d) Bin (ebcn) fo reid; ttJic er. 4. * The . . . the ' before comparatives = je^ftcflo or nm W— |C W^O or urn fo), as : The longer the nights, the shorter the days, 3c (bcfto) Idnger bic md}H, jc (bcfto) fiivjcr bie 2:age. 5. When the comparative is declined, the omission of c of the stem takes place just as in Adjectives in -er, as : ben reid)er(e)n Wann, etc. Note. — The syllable -cr may occur three times successively at the end of the same adjective, viz. : i ° as part of the stem, e. g., Ijciict, hoarse* 2° as inflection of comparison, e. g., l)cif{c)rcr, hoarser; 3° as ending of strong adjective declension, e. g., ein I)eif(e)i-ercr ©anger, a hoarser singer. as: 127. The Superlative. ■ I, The Superlative is not used, even as Predicate^ in the undeclined form, but : (a) If the substantive is expressed, or if the substantive of the preceding clause can be supplied, the (weak) adjective form with definite article is used, as : This river is the broadest in America (i. e., the broad- est river), 2)te[cr glu^ ift bcr fircitcftc in ^merifa (ber breitefteglug). The days in June are the longest (days) in the whole year, ^ie ^age iin ^uni jinb bic innjjftcn (XaK) na^er nciijft (nearest, next; in- ^. r . serts c in Super I \ mel,mucb „iej, mcift (different root) n)entg, little (of quantity) miitber minbeft (different root) m^ZT^'^y'l f '^' 1' "''"^ '' '^^''^ °^ ^"^"*^*y °"^y- For the Subst. mel)rcrc5, Pi. mcl)verc 'some, several,' see §§ 152, 175. 2. Senig also has the regular forms lueniger, liienigft. 130. Defective Comparison. The following Comparatives and Superlatives are formed from adverbs, etc. (some of which are obsolete) : (au6en, without, adv:) ciufeet, outer aufeerft, outermost utmost, extreme (e^e, before, conj:) (e^er, sooner, ad7> ) -[ ^^^^^' soonest ( erft, first (^tttten, behmd, adv.) ^{ntcr, hii-Icr ^{nterit, hindmost (mnen, withm, .^^z;.) inner, inner innerft, innermost 1 131] COMPARISON OP ADVERBS. 159 (lafj, late, obsolete) (mittcl, middle) (nib, below, obsolete) (okn, above, adv.) (unten, below, adv,) ~ leljt, latest, last mittlci-, middle mittclft, iiaddle nieber, lower nicbcrft lowest obcr, upper unter, lower (born, before, adv.) \)ox't>^x, fore oberft, uppermost unterft, lowest, undermost borbcrft, foremost 131. Strong Verbs: fticrcn Model. Infin. Tmpf. p. Part Germ. Model: frjcrcn fror cj'cfroren Engl. Analogy: freeze froze frozen' Ablaut: ic^etc. o 5 Note.— The long o is what dlstint(uishes this MnrlrO Ur.r^ fi c^- c Model (§ 123). fau'^nes mis Moriel fiom the fc^iegeit LIST. A. (Infin. ic, ii.) biegen, bend bieten, bid, offer fitegen (N.), fly (on wings) flic^en (N.), flee (escape) frieren (N. A.), freeze, be cold ^cben, lift, raise (er)f{e[en, (er)!iircn, choose liigen, lie (tell a falsehood) (ber)neven, lose [c^ieben, shove, push fd^JDoren, swear (be)trugcn, deceive, cheat ioiegcn, weigh, have weight (intr.) 5ie^en(N.A.), pull(tr.); move antr.) 50 Remarks. — I. ^iegen, bictcn, fliegen, also the forms (now used only in poetry) bog bot flog flo^ fror ijjob, ^Mh erfor log tjerlor fc^ob gebogen geboten gefrogen gefloben gefroven geboben erforen gelogen t)er(oren gefc^obcn fd)loor, fc^touv gc[d;Jooren ^t'ti'og betrogen ii^og gcloogcn gejui^en flie^en, jicben, have with cu for ic in the i6o LESSON XXV. f§i3» 2. and 3. Sing. Pres. Ind. and 2. Sing. Imper., as : bcuaft, bcugt, beuG ; Pcud;ft, ficud; ; jcud;ft, jeuc^. 2. SSicc^en, to rock, is weak (micgte, getmegt). 3. Observe the change of f) into g in jie^en, 509, gcjogen. B. (iNFiN. c, a.) Weren, shear ^^^^ geWoren toebeu (W.), weave j^ob geluoben tt)dgen, weigh (trans.) h,og geiDogen (be)h)egen, induce, persuade betrog beii)ogen Remark. — ^ettjegcn, *to move (set in motion)' is weak (betoegte, behjegt). Vocabulary. to offer, an'bietcn abolish, annul, cancel, aufs l[)eben put off, delay, postpone, au^^ fd;ieben remove (neut.), auS'jie^cn prefer, bor'sicbcn (dat. of pers.) fiy away, ItJcg'fUegcn roof, bag !Dac^ colour, bie garbe hunger, ber §unger cook, ber ^06) * Idioms : 1. I prefer gold to silver, 2. I like the winter in Janata gem. metal, bag m^taW red (subst.), bag dtot sparrow, ber ©j^erling part, portion, ber %cxt shore, bank, bag Ufer on that account, therefore, begfjalb yet, still (in spite of all), bod^ straight, gcrabe (adj.) exactly, just, gerabe (adv.) as soon as, fobalb 3* jieljc bai ©olb tern ©fiber ©or. Canada, yd) (jabe ten aSBfnter in EXERCISE XXV. w4. 1. (Sin ©J)erlinq in ber .?Sanb \h beffer ^l& '>^^^^i -..c s.-^ SDac^e. 2. SJiarie ift junger alg Souife, aber fie ift ^od) gvojer. §131] STRONG VERBS : frtCrClt MODFX. i6i a. §unger ift ber bcftc ^oc^. 4. ^er jun(^c (General S ift ein ta^frcrcr ^clb aig fein Skater. 5. xk ^Kcifcnbcn fd;oben ba^ «oot Dom Ufcr unb rubcrtcn iiber ben dH- H. 5tufge[dioben ift m6)t aufaclyobcn. 7. SBcIrfje^ tjon biefcn 9JJabcr;cn ift bag'gri)Bte? 8. 3e ^o^er ein a^oget fliegt je tleiner fc^eint er ju iccrben. 9. 3)er grembe f)at mir mefjr fur mein ^au^ angeboten aU Bk, aber ic^ QianU m(t)t, ba^ er fo gut be5at)tcn n)urbe. 10. ^e fleifeiger Wix fmb, befto me(;r lernen toir. 11. :3m Sommer i)ahc ic^ bag £anb gana gern, abcr im Sinter jie^e i^ bie etabt bor. 12. 3Kir line glucflid)en ift ber ^ufe erfroren, aU id) md) ^paufc ritt. 13. ©0= balb h)ir unfer ^am berfauft fjatten, ^^ogcn iuir an§. 14. 211^ ic^ auf bent Sanbe mx, Woq icf; nte^r aU id) je|t n^icge. 15. e§ ift ml)x, ba^ bie reic^ften $>eute nic^t immer bie gludflic^ften finb. 16. ^er 3iegen, h)elcf)er un§ bie 9^eife berleibet ^t, toar me^r nii^Iirf; aU angene^m. 17. ^ie 9Jhttter ^ob bie ©tucfe bon bem ©tag auf, h)elc^eg i^r unarttgeg ^inb auf bie (Srbe gefc^miffen Wt^. 18. 2)iefer ^mhc ^at feine (Sltern betrogen, unb beg^alb tft er ungliicfac^. 19. grieren (Sie, §err ^rofeffor? ^e|t nic^t, aber ic^ fror, al§ id) auf ber ©tra^e hjar. 20. ^er ^ager lS)at ben SBogel gefc^offen, gerabe alg 'er auf h^n ^aum flog 21. 33on h)em twurbe 3^r §aug gefauft? 22. S8on cinem J^remben, ber feit bierje^n ^agen bei meinem S^etter auf «e= fuc^ ift. B. 1. Lead is a heavy metal, but gold is the heaviest. 2. This painter is not so famous as his father, but his pictures are just as fine. 3. George lost his parents when he was still very young. 4. Those students have lost a great deal of time, but now they are studying more industriously. "5. TTie bird flew away, just as the huntsman was on the point of shooting it. 6. When is the weather coldest in Canada .? In the month of January it is coldest. 7. Which bird flies fastest ? 8. The useful is better than the beautiful. 9. What kindj)f a dog has the huntsman lost.? 10. Iron is heavy, lead i62 LESSON XXVI. (§S 13a- is heavier, but gold is heavi^ ,t of all. 11. Green is a more agreeable colour foi the eyeslhTn red. 12. If the stick is too long, cut a piece of u off. 13. T . , up,>er part of the city of Quebec is much finer than the l,,wer. 14. The weather seems to be warmer to-day, but it froze (perf.) yester- day. 1 5. When I was younger, I weighed more than my brother, but now he weighs more than I. IG. The upper part of the city of Quebec was built earlier than the lower part. ORAL EXERCISE XXV. 1. Istder junge General ein tapferer Mann? 2. Ziehen Sie das Land der Stadt vor .? 3. Weshalb ist der Knabe so traurig.? 4. Wann hat der Jager den Vogel geschossen.? 5. Welche Studenten lernen am meisten? 6. Welches ist besser, reich und unglucklich oder arm und lucklich (zu) sein? ^ ^ ^ LESSON XXVI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS: fingm model. 132. Demonstrative Pronouns. The Demonstrative Pronouns are : 1. bcr, hit, bos, that 2. biefcr, bicfc, btcfci this, that 3. jcncr, jcnc, jcncS, that, yonder 4. bcrjcnige, bicjciugc, bagjcnigc, that 5. btr namlufjc, btc namudje, urn namlir^c, the same 6. berfc(6(t9)Pr bicfclli(i9)e, bttgfclKigc), the same I94l DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 163 7. folr^(cr), fotc^Cf), foIrftCc^), such, such a a bCffgicil^CII, bcrglcir^Clt, of that kind (of those kinds) Remark. — These may all be used eitht as Substaative or Adjective Pronouns, except b^^flfeic^c: (:iee § 139, i, below). 133. I. 2)er, bie, ba§, used adjectively (i. e„ before a subbiantive), is declintil like he Definite Ariicle (which is merely the demnnstvitive adjecti e weakened and un- emphasized), as : 2)cr' mam, that man. !5)er Tlam', the n.an'. 2. When used substantix ely it is declined thus : MASC. Nom. Dcr Gen. beffcn Dat. bem Ace. ben Singular. FEM. NEUTER. Plural. ALL GEN RS. bie bercr (berrn)^^^^^:*^*^^^^ bencn bie <^u ? I have seven of fhem. Sic oiele ^inber f)nben @io ? 3cf) ^abe bcren fiebeit. 134. 2)tcicr and jciicr both follow the biefer Model fsee §6), but bie§ is used for biefeg in the Neuter Nom. and Ace. Sing, when used substantively, as : ^icK iff mein 33uct) (Sr ^atte bic8 md;t gc^^ort. This is my book. He had not hoard this. bicfer = this (the 7iearer of two objects, hen also =) the latter, as: jcner = that, yonder (the more remote of two objects, ^ence also =) the former : 2)icfcr 33aum ift grofe, a6ei jcucr ift gro^ •. This tree is large, but that (one) is lai -er. 'wH . l64 LESSON XXVI. £§§ 134- 3encr 39aum, yonder tree (pointed out as remote), Aarl unb Siir;clm finb ^iriibcr; bicfcr ift fleifjin, jcncr ift tvdflc, Charles and William are brothers ; the latter is diligent, the former is idle. 135. I. ^crjcnigc is declined in both parts, like the Defi- nite Article followed by the adjective form jemg with weak endings, thus : Singular. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Nom. bcrjcnigc bicjenigc bagjenigc Gen. bcejcnigcn bcrienigcit bcSjcmgcn etc. etc. etc. Plura, ALL GENDERS. bicjcuigcn bcrjenigcn etc. 2. ^cr or bcrjcnigc is used : {a) before a genitive case, as : Sc^ f)abe vl^tcn rc8 53rubf<8, I have your hat and that of your brother (youi brother's); Note. -The demonstrative may also be omitted in this constructjon. as in English ; or the simple bcr may be used. {p) before a relative clause, as : 2)cr(jcnigc), ttJcIticr jufrieben ift, ift glucflic^. He who is contented, is happy. ^ic(jcnigc) ^rau ift am fd;onften, tuelr^c gut ift. That woman is most beautiful, who is good. S^r ^:)^\x$> unb bo§(jcntgc), lnorin iutr n)of)neit, Your house and that in which we live. NoTE.-In sentences like the first, where ber(ienigc) is used cubstantivelv the demonstrative and relative together may be replaced by the compound relative lt)ci, thus ; *^ SOBer jufrieben ifi, ift gtadUc^. «39l DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 165 Plural. ALL GKNDERS. bicfclbcn bcr[cI6cn etc. 136. !DctfcI6e (berfelBicje) =- ' the same,* as : the same hat, bC(f)clbc ."put ; and is declined like bcrieuicjc, in two parts, written as one word, thus : Singular, MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Nom. bcrfclbc bicfclbc btt0[elbc Gen. bcsfclbcn bcrfdbcn bcgfclbcn etc. etc. etc. (For examples of its use see § 143, 2-4, below). Note, — ^elbtg is sometimes used without article, with strong end- ings : felliigcr, -e, -e8. 137. $cr ttiimiii^c sometimes replaces berfelbe. 138. I. (Sol^, when used alone, follows thebiefcr Model, as: folc^cr 2Bein, such wine; foIcf)C§ 53rDt, such bread. 2. After cin, it follows the mixed declension of adjectives, as: Nom. cin foIrf;cr 3Bein, such a wine Gen. eine^ folc^Crt 335eine§, of such a wine, etc. 3. Before ein, folj^ is always, and before an adjective, gen- erally, uninfiected, as : aii'^ unb jcncg. This house and that one. 2. As Relative by bcr or hiclrijcr (see § 95), thus : The book that I have, ^a^ md), ba§ (ttJcIdjcS) i* ijaU. 3. As Conjunction by tafi, thus ; I shall tell your father that you are dilio-ent S* lucvbc beincm lUikx ^ac^.n, boft bu ffcifjk^ bift. riik?/; Jl'l ""'"''' r^'''""' ^•^^^ ^^^f(^^^' j^"f^ ^re used (like CI, see § 39, i, and mcidicg, § 82, Rem. 2) before the verl> M3] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 167 'to be,' representing the real subject, which follows the verb and with which the verb agrees, as : ' ^aS ift mein 33ruber, That is my brother. 2)icf(c§) {ft Sf,re Qd)\vc\kx, This is your* sister. 3enc§ finb feine 33urf;er, Those are his books. 142. 3^cr and jciicr, when referring to inanimate objects are often replaced by the adverb bo(r), 'there,' before pre positions (compare § 38, Rem. 5) and biefev by ^m, as : ^cf; baOe md)U$ tmii ,^u ttmn, I have nothing to do with that (t/ieremth). 0icrmit mu^ tc^ lcf;liejjen. With this {/leremth) I must close. Note. — This substitution is not made before a relative, as: Stf) barf)tc nil tiag {no^ bnraii), njo0 ®ie fagtcn, I was thinking of that which (what) you were saying. 143. Use of Demonstratives to replace Personal Pronouns. 1. The neuter gen. beffcit replaces that of the neuter pers pron. (feiner) referring to things, as : 3c^ erinnrc mid; bcffcn ntc^t, I do not recollect it (fciner = him, of him). 2. The genitive of bcr and that of bcrfcIOc are frequently used to replace the possessive adjective of the 3. person, in order to avoid ambiguity, as : ^er ©raf tuar mit filnem (be§ ©rafen) ^ciger unb beffen (beg Sagcrg) .t^unben (or mit ben ^unben bcSfciacn) auf ber gagb. The Count was at the hunt with his (the Count's) huntsman and his (the huntsman's) dogs. NoTE.-2«it fejnen Apmibcn would mean 'with the Count's dogs.» 3. ^crfclfie is used in other cases also to prevent ambiguity (also biefcr in the same way), as : 1 68 LESSON XXVI. t§§ 143 'mm 33ruber ift &ei meinem greunbe, unb bcrfclfte (or bicfcr) ad)kt Ifyi fc^r; or: cr (,acm 33ruber) acfitet bcnfelkn febr My brother is at my friend's, and he (the latter, the friend) esteems him (my brother) very niuch ; or • he (my brother) esteems him (my friend) very much. 4. 2)crfc(6c also replaces the personal pronouns, to p/^vent repetitions like if;n - 3^„en, Sie- fie, etc , as : liefer 2Bcin ift out, irf; fann ^^nen irenfcrOcn (for IM 30ltcu) cn:^fcl;Ien, This wire is good, I can recommend It to you. 144. Strong Veres: jtngctt Model. Germ. Model : ■Engl. Analogy Ablaut: Infin, fingen sing w t LIST. btnben, bind bringen (N.), press finben, find llingen, ring, sound (ge)linGcn (N.), succeed (impers., with dat. of pers.) rtngen, wring (the hands, etc.) fc^lingen, twine ; swallow fcf;iDinben (N.), vanish fd^lDtngen, swing fingen, sing finfen, sink frringen (N. A.), spring, leap trin!cn, drink (of human beings) trinben, wind ^toingen^ force Lmpf. fong sang « 6anb brang fanb flang gelang rang fc^Iang fc^tranb fc^iuang fang fan! fprang tran! ttjanb ai»ang P. Part. gefitngen »6ng gebunben gebrungen gefunben geHungen gelungen gerungen gefc^tungcTi gefc^iimnben gefd^jDungen gefungen gefunfen gcfprungen getrunfen gemunben ge^hjungen ^44] STRONG VERBS : fingeti model. 169 Vocabulary. to press in, penetrate, ein^ on board, am Sorb escape, entflie^en [bringen invent, erfinben remember, fic^ erinnern (4-gen. of thing) drown, be drowned, ettrtnfen spring upon, Io§'f|)ringen (auf + ace.) mean, suppose, metnen oblige, ijerbinben vanish, t)erfd;h?inben grammar, bie ©ramma'tif dealer, ber ^dnbler lion, ber £oit)e diver, ber ^auc^er telephone, bag %dtpf)on' clever, gefc^irft prudent, cautious, tJor'fic^tig unfortunately, (eiber below, mUx\)alh (+ gen.) never yet, noc^ nie EXERCISE XXVI. A, 1. 3)ie§ ift mein ^Setter an^ 3Kontreal; fennen ©te iBn« 2. ^atooM, biefen fenne ic^ ganj gut, a6er nic^t ben, ber mir aeftcrn ben «nef Q,brad>t f^at 3. @in 6o[er ^nabe fcftt^ang fic^ auf ben 5t^felbaum im r^^arten feineg ^ac^barg unb f($mi^ bte tbfel auf bte ^rbe. 4. ^n biefem ^elbe ^a6en bie 33auern fc^on bag ©rag gefc^mtten, aber m >enem trerben fie eg erft morgen fcfeneiben o. .?;e6et bie, bie eu(^ |«f en/' 6. ^eneg finb meine §unbe, aber bieg fmb btejemgen, met^e cer ^ager m ad)t ^agen berloren hat unb bte tc^ gefunben ^abe. 7. ©rinnern eie fic^ beffen, tuag icb ^l)nen i^om alten 2d)lo^ am Ufcr beg eccg er^ciblt l)ah^ 8 8 3; c m t^urbe ic^ feinen ^^aler leifjen ; b e r iDurbe nie' be^a^Ien. 9 3)ie ©chafer Ineben i^re .^erben liber benfelben 33erg auf ioetcben h)ir ftiegen iO. 3)er ^kifeube ftieg t)om ^ferbe unb banb bagfelbe an emen !lmten 33aum. 11. 3)a.i Scbiff ftiefj an mm JVelfen, bag gaffer brang em, unb bag ®u;iff fan!. 12. 3d, babe n.ic^ be= fhffen, Satem .^u lerncn, aber eg ift mir nic^t getungcn. 13 ^er ^oiue n>ar gerabe im ^egviffc auf ben ^Hcifenben Hufpringen, aU ber ^^agcr t^n frf;of3. 14. fennen Sic .^errn ^,U ? md^m cr[d)munben gu fein. 17. ®ag finb [c^one erbbeeren ; Wo IjaUn (Sie biefclben gefauft? 18. @ie finb fd;on, md)tti?af)r? Soldj) ^racf)% 33eeren finben Sie md;t bei jebem iQdnblcr. 19. So (jcijieg 3Setter ^aben n)ir nod; nic^t ge^abt. 20. 2Ba§ hjurbe bir gcantlrortet, aU bu nacp bem ^xanUn frags tefi? 21. gjian fagte mir, er fei ein tt^enig beffer. ^. 1. The patient is just as weak to-day as he was yester- day. 2. Such happy days I have never yet passed ! 3. Where do you generally pass the winter? 4. Where is my pen? Have you found it ? 5. This is my neighbour of whom you have already heard so much, 6. The ship has sunk, and the people who were on board have been drowned. 7. I was lookingjor my coat, but found my father's. 8. I should be very much obliged to you, if you sang me a beautiful song. 9. Which is poorer, he who has no money, or he who has no friends? 10. How should we escape if the boat sank? 11. Charles has already finished (the) learning (of) his lesson ; he is cleverer than I thought. 12. The diver that jumped from the bridge has unfortunately been drowned. 13. It will have been a good lesson for us, if it makes us more prudent in future. 14. Is that a new song? No, it is the same that I sang a week ago at your house. 15. The St. Lawrence River is the broadest in Canada ; below the city of Quebec it is broadest. 10. The patient is better to-day; he will be allowed to go out to-morrow. ORAL EXERCISE XXVI. 1. Was ist aus dem Taucher geworden ? 2. 1st Karl ge- schickter als Johann ? 3. Was hat der bose Knabe gemacht ? 4. Ist der Reisende dem Lowen entflohen ? 5. Ist es Ihnen gelungen, Latein zu lernen ? 6. Wessen Hunde sind das ? M5] INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 171 LESSON XXVII. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS: f^lltncn AND §c(fcn MODELS. 1*S» Indefinite Pronouns. The Indefinite Pronouns are : {a) Substantive: 1. mm (indecl.), one, they, people (Fr. o?i) " 2. jcbcrmantt, everybody, everyone 3. icmanb, \ somebody, anybody I of persons ( some one, any one | only 4. nicmonb, I "°^°^y' "^ one, no person ( not anybody, etc. 5. eiltia§, something, anything 6. m^U, nothing, not anything 7. etnct, one, some one 8. fcincr, no one, none ") of things j only (biefer Mod- el) persons ^^^^ things if) Adjective (also used substantively) • 1. cinigC, ctHrJc (plur.), some, a few, several 2. jeb(tticb)cr (jegli^cr), each (one), every one 3. manr^cr, many (a one) 4. mejrcrc (pi), several 5. Hid, much, pi. tiiele, n):.ny 6. mcntn, little, pi. itjcniflc, f^w 7. mdc^cr, some REMARK.-The fndelinite i.onominal Adjectives are also used as Indefinite Numeral Adjectives (see Less. XXIX). (biefer Mod- > el) persons a7id things 172 LESSON XXVII. [§§ 146^ 146. JWon (spelt with small letter and one Xi, to distinguish it from Dcr ^JJiann, the man, from which it is derived) is the Indefinite Personal Pronoun, and is used to make a state- ment without specifying any particular person. It is equivalent to Engl. ' one, they, we, you (indef.), people,' etc., (French on), or to the impersonal use of the passive voice, as : aWttlt [aflt. One says; they, people say; or it is said. m-, ^V^ - „0. .0^, \^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 4. A /. ii" f/. 1.0 I.I 1.25 ^1^ IM 1.4 1.6 Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) e7i2-4503 ^ fV ci^ \ \ % s %"■ <^ Qr h \ 178 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D. [§§l6o^ latter was a great musician, the former a great poet. 6. Mr. A. is a lazy man; he would not work at all, if necessity did not force him tojt. 7. We found the money we lost a week ago. 8. Many^ajjne begins what he will never finish 9. Mary, my child, Th^ow that apple away; it is spoilt. 10* Have you shot many pigeons ? We have shot only a few.' 11. Except my brother and me nobody is at home. 12. The mother is scolding, because her naughty child has thrown a plate upon the ground. 13. Where is the River St. Lawrence broadest.? 14. When the children had drunk, the cat drank the milk which remained over (was left). 1.5. The women on (an) the shore screamed and wrung their hands, when the boat sank in which their husbands were. 16. Has the money which was lost been found ? ORAL EXERCISE XXVIL 1. Wann wird man den Hafer dreschen .? 2. Warum ver- birgt der bose Knabe sein Gesicht .? 3. Wem hilft man -ern > 4. Sind Sie ein Freund vom Jagen > 5. Was fur ein Mann 1st Herr Bell.? 6. Weshalb schilt die Frau ? SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D. ON CERTAIN ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 160. Adjectives used as Attributes only. The following classes of adjectives are not used as predicates: I. Derivatives in -CK, -Cttt (denoting material), as; golbcn, of gold, golden; filbem, of silver. These are replaced in the predicate by the substantive with t)on, as : 2)icfe \l\)V ift bon (SUbciV This watch is of silver. 2 Many in -if« and -It^, as : bicbifcf), thievish ; tierifu^, bestial ; fieiicfi. tcrifd,, hypocritical; tciglid), daily; jdfjrlic^, annual ; hiirflid), actual, real 3. Those in -If, from adverbs of time and place, as: ^cutig, of to-day; WlXQ, of this place. ^ i6«] .UJJECTIVES USED AS PREDICATES ONLY. 179 161. Adjectives used as Predicates only. The following classes of adjectives are not used as attributes : 1. Those that are really nouns (though spelt with a small letter) such 2. The following among others : emgcben , mmdful gemoDr, aware gar, cooked, done (of food) gram, averse gang unb gdbe, current (of money,etc.) irre, astray, wrong tcilf)aft, partaking Note. — Both these classes of adjectives are innnaV.l» ^f o« • • . ;;3^^W.eco..a.t.ea.s;eHaU.X:S^^ r?r ruurbe^meinem 58rubev immer „.c^r mm, He grew .ore and .... .,,,,, ,„ ^^ ®a§ t^at mir am meiPcn leiH, I was most sorry for that (../«,,-.. super!.). 162. Remarks on certain Pronouns. 1. The pronouns tucv, ft)a§arefrequentlyfolIowedby the demonstrative ierm the ./...clause, and always so when the Ictter'the seemWan^! cedent) is m a different case from that of the relative, as : mtV liat, bcm Juirb gegeben, To him that hath shall be (is) given 2. The neuter pronouns eg, ba6, tt)a8, jebeg, alle§ are often used in ihe Norn, and Ace Smg. in reference to a uumier of persons or things, espe- cially if of different gender, as : ^ ^ fanner, Seiber, ^inber, aUtS f(^vie urn C)ilfe, fo hut t§ fonnte Men, women, children, all cried for help as loud as they could • mull iibt ftrf), toa§ nn ar^eifter twerben toiU, Those practice early, who would become masters. Note. —Observe that the verb is singular. 3. 3Sa§ is sometimes used for rtinnim? ('why.?'), as: aBttSnjeinftbu? Why dost thou weep .? 4. The relative adverb lt)ie ('as ') after folrf) ein or fo eln ('such a') is NoTE.-The demonstrative folc^or fo is often omitted, as indicated in the above example. i8o LESSON XXVIII. [§§ X63- «65] LESSON XXVIII. 60 70 NUMERALS: CARDINALS AND ORDINALS. - STRONG VERBSi f v^ 80 f^rClJCU MODEL. 90 Numerals. 100 101 163. Cardinals, 104. Ordinals. 123 1. eing; ein(cr), -c. -(e8) 1st. ber crflc 2. 5t»ei 2nd. „ gtoeitc 3. brei 3rd. , hxiiU 4. ijier 4th. „ ijierte 5. funf 5th. ,, funfte 6. fed;g 6th. „ fecf^gte 7. fieben ( 7th. „ fiebente 8. ad)t 8th. „ a6)tt 9. neun 9th. „ neunle 10. ^e^n 10th. „ ge^nte 11. elf 11th. „ clfte 12. gttjolf 12th. „ gtrolfte 13. breijc^tt 13th. „ breije^ntc 14. mer3ef)n 14th. „ bier^eijnte 15. fiinfje^n or funf^ef )n 1 5th. „ funfs or funf^ebnte 1 16. fcr^je^u loth. ,, fed;^e§nte 17. ficiseljn 17th. „ fiebse^nte % I] 18. adS>t5e^n 18th. „ ad;t5er;nte 4k wha 19. ntimjel^n 19th. „ neunje^ntc 20. jlottujig 20th. „ gnjangtgfte 1 21. tin unb shjanjig 21st. „ cm unb gtran^igfte 1 22. jttici unb iWan^xQ 22nd. „ gtoei unb gtoanMte 1 I. 30. breijig 30th. „ bret^tgfte 1 40. i)ier3t9 40th. „ toierjigfte 1 50. funfgig or funfjig 50th. „ funfjigfte 01 • ftiftf= 1 '65] REMARKS ON THE CARDINAL NUMERALS. I8l ()0. [cc^jig 60th. ber fed^jigfte 70. fieD(cn)5i0 70th. „ fieb(en)3igfte 80. ac^tjig 80th. „ ad^t^igfte 90. neungig 90th. „ neungigfte 100. .^unbert .100th. „ fjunbertfte 101. t^uiibcrt (unb) einS 101st. „ ^unbert unb erpe 123. ^unbert (unb) brei unb ^23rd. „ ^unbert (unb) brei ghjanjig unb gtoanjigftc Cardinalo. 200. jtuei ^unbert 300. brei ^unbert 1000. taufenb 1001. taufenb unb etnS 1036. taufenb (unb) fec^g unb breif^.g 1887 1 ^^"^^"^ (""^) ^^ 1 or ad;t3ef)n^unb &t f)unbert (unb) fieben unb ad^tjtg ert fie6en unb adj^tSiQ 10,000. jefjn taufenb 100,000. f^unbert taufenb 1,000,000. eine miUM 2,567,849. jtwei miUxoMn, fiinf Fjunbert (unb) fieben unb fed^jig taufeni ), a6)t ^unbert (unb) neun unb toierjig. Interrogative Ordinal : ber tnicbiclpc ? which (in order) .? what day of the month.? (See § i66, 3, Note 2). 165. Remarks on the Cardinal Numerals. I. @tn only is declined throughout, thus : (a) Before a substantive after the mein Model (§ 8), like the Indefinite Article, which is the same word un- eniphasized, as : ©in' 3Jiann, one man ; ein 5!Jiann', a man. 1 82 LESSON XXVIII. [fiOS . ^^"^"^^^-7.^^ """^'^''^^ ^"' ^s sometimes printed with a capital, or spaced out (= Engl. Italics) to distinguish it from the Article, as : Sir ^abeii @in' (e i n) S3uf(), We have one book. SBir ^abcn etn 53ud)', Wc have a book. (P) Used substantively (see also § 150, above) without article, after biefer Model (§ 6), as : ®tner i)on meinen ?^rcunben, One of my friends. Hnfcr eincr. One of us {o/oar sort), (c) After an article or other determinative word, like an adjective, as ; 5Der einc 33ruber, The one brother. 3«ein eincr ©c^ub, (The) one of my shoes. alsral:""^'*^ '^' "^^^"^'^ ^'*''^' '' ""^^ ^^ "'"'^ substantively ^er eine unb ber anbcre, (The) one and the other- and even in the plural (=^ some, one party), asr ^tc eincn faflteii Vm, bic anbern jcncs, Some (the one party) said this, others (the other party) that. (d) @in§ is the form used in counting. 2. gtnei and brci may have -tx in the Gen. and -en in the Dat. when not accompanied by any article, etc., as • 2[u§ gh)eicr ober breicr 3eugen 3)?unb !ommt bic 3Ba^rf;? Out of the mouth of two or three witnesses cometh the truth. "^an lam nic^t gtoetcn §erren bienen. One cannot serve two masters. Note. -The Gen. -cr is necessary to show the case, but may be re. placed by Doit; but the Dat. -eu before a substantive is rare, the -« of the substantive sufficiently showing the case. 3. «Bni}C= 'both/ refers to two objects taken together and is declined like an adjective in the Plur.: N. 6eibc' G. beibcr, etc. ; bie beiben ; meine fceibcn ^ruber. It often §»6S] REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. 183 replaces jtwet after determinative words, as in the last example. The neuter sing, form beibc0 is also found, as : SBeibcg ift \oo!)X, Both (things) are true. Notes. — i. Both 0/ us = h)ir bcibe(n) (we two). 2. • Both ' as conjunction = fottJol)!, etc. (See Less. XL.) 4. Other cardinals are not declined unless used substan- tively (see next section). 5. The numberi 7rom 13 to 19 are formed by adding -je^tt (Engl, -teen) to t,ie units (but [ec^jebn drops -g). 6. The multiples of ten (20—90) add -gig to the units, Jtoangig, breigig being irregular, and fecf)5tg dropping -0. 7. The um'^s always precede the tens in compound numbers from 21 upwards, both being joined by the conjunction unb 'and ' ; hence 25 = fUnf Uttb gmanjig (Engl. ' five and twenty '); 156 = ^unbert fec^g nnh funfjig, etc. 8. §unbcrt and 2:;ttttfcttb are generally used without ein be- fore them, and the conjunction unb may be omitted after them. 9. *One by one, two by two,' etc. = je einer, je gttJei (or jejiDei unb girei), etc. 10. The Cardinals may be used as substantives : (a) With a substantive understood (as simp/^ numbers only), with -c in Nom. Ace, -en in Dat, as : 3lffe mere. All fours. Mit fed^fcn. With [a coach and] six [horses]. (d) As feminine substantives, of the spots on dice, etc., or of the figures i, 2, 3, etc., see § 80, 2, (r), with plur. in -en, as : 2)ie @ing, the one-spot, figure one, plur. @tnfen. 1 84 LESSON XXVIII. I§§ 165- f 1/ (0 ot fiinf unb jroanjlg 3al)icn gcborcn. »»»•"» ». Please take another apple (1. e., yet one more), ^ittt, neb, men Zie nod) eimn 2IpfeI. ' 8. Take care, yttl)mtn ^it fidf in ^^t. §««7J STRONG verbs: |t)K(^en MODEL. 187 BXBROISB XXVIII J. 1. ffite art fmb ®ie ? ^c^ bin in mcincm neun unb man. 3.0ften Sum Jenen. 3. ^ebet 3«onat aufecr bcm Sefetuafba cnttoebct brcifeifl obct cin unb bve.feig Jaqc 4 25™ Bie ,;,1 b. MJase fmrn h,ir ben 0e6urt.tng ber ijiinigin I Z ber erfte »on gngtanb .»ar bcr SBafet fiat! II. ,mb Satob II T'^ll aU e,e biefelbc i,btk. 7. SJai fiinf unb mnMUn t«f ,?toir eertn Sett auf bem Sa^n^ofc, gerab J aH I in. S S iwl %.. c ^ *""' 'f' '^ """ ^'" ''*« S»« "Soften Sorfe? Ungefa^r funf unb jtoanjig e„glifcf;c 3Reire„. U. el najm bi; 12. ®as @,« 6r,(|t, ne^men eie f.c^ in 3r#t. 13. §unterte ion Sienfc^en ^aben toa^renb be* gvbbebena b«« Sebcn serip e„ 14 englanb. 15. SRe.ne beiben fflriibet reiften am funf unb .im„ 8.Bften 3«m .on Siueipool ab unb famcn erft am iSn S m nuebec an. 16. 3Bann lommt 3^r ®e6«rt«i ? ^"„ ri„ unb 8toa„3.gften JJoBen.bcr. 17. Sie Siegierung fteinri* VIiT ^«r emc ber berii^mteftcn in ber OeWic^te ®ng anb 18 S« ^.r cmen ©paj.ergang marten, ^aben ioir me^rere unferer Lnb! onsettoffen 19. SSon ,oem ift g^nen geratcn toorb n ife @" re.fe 3U mac|en? 6, ift mir .on me^reren trjten gerat'en" orten' 2 Ma^ O"^ g«""^'/=o"""a„ds thousands (dat.) of soldiers. 2 Mary has broken her pen, but she has taken Louisa's. 3 The ce IS oreakmg ; take care, Fred. 4. This is mv learf^ pencl, not William's. 5. You have taken only one appk"^ east otrotr /;,^''-^°- celebrate theQueen'SdJ On the 24th of May. 7. What day of the month is it to-day? i88 LESSON XXVIII. [§§ x67' To-day is the 3 1st of March. 8. The thief was thrown into (the) prison, because he had stolen five hundred dollars. 9. Which do you prefer, (the) hunting or (the) fishing? I like both. 10. A bee stings, but a dog or a cat bites. 11. The days are longest in the month of June, and shortest towards Christmas. 1 2. When our neighbours w^re at church, a thief went (fommen) into the house and stole several hundred dollars. 13. In the year eighteen hundred and eighty-seven Queen Victoria celebrated the fiftieth ye ir of her reign. 14. The eldest son of the Queen of England was born the ninth of November one thousand eight hundred and forty-one. 15. Tell me how much thirty-two and eighty-eight make. Ifi. There are sixty seconds in a minute, sixty minutes in an hour, twenty-four hours in a day, seven days in a week, four weeks in a month, and twelve months in a year. 17. Would you make a voyage to Europe if you were advised to do so .? 18. Yes, I should like very much to make a voyage to Europe. Read in German: 2 mat 11 ift 22, 3 md 12 ift 36, 4 mat 8 ift 32, 5 mol 9 ift 45, 6 md 7 ift 42, 7X10 ift 70, 8X 11 ift 88, 9X r ift 108, lOX 10 ift 100, 11X11 ift 121, 12X12 ift 144. 5Ibbiert 2,342, 25,891 unb 989,346. @ubtral)icrt 27,763 oou 31,551. 2«uttipticiert 591 mit 473. 2)it)iblert 2,581,640 mit 61. ORAL EXERCISE XXVIII. 1. Wie weit ist es von Hamilton nach Toronto ? 2. Wann sind die Tage am kiirzesten ? 3 Wie viel macht das, wenn man 337 mit 2 multipliciert ? 4. \A ie viele Tage sind in einem Jahre f 5. Wann bekommt ihr Ferien ? 6. Wessen Bleistift haben Sie.? i69l INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 189 LESSON XXIX. INDEFINITE NUMERALS, - STRONG VERBS: cffeit MODEL 168. Indefinite Numerals. The Indefinite Numerals are : 1. ttfl, all 2. gcnj, whole, all 3. jcbcr, ■) 4. jcbracbcr, ,^ each (bicfcr Model) 5. jegHi^er, J 6. fcin, none, not one 7. cintac, ) 8. e«id|e.r°"^^^'^^^^" 9. manii^C, many 10. me^rere, several 11. biel, much (pi. many) 12. ttienig, little (pi. few) 13. ettuaS, some \ 14. gcnug, enough C (indeclinable) 15. mcjr, more ) Remark. — All these, except aU and gan^, are used as In- definite Pronouns (see Less. XXVII). 1.69. I. Wi expresses number as well as quantity, and denotes that every iv dividual part of a whole is present. 2. Wlien declined, it follows the biefec Model, whether used v/ith or without a substantive, as : aaer ^df-* attc SCrbeit tt)ar ijergeblid^ ; aacg 33rot ; all [the] cheese ; all labour was useless ; all [the] bread. 3. Unless used substantively, it always precedes the deter- minative word, and then generally remains uninflected in the sing., and often in the plur., as : igo LESSON XXIX. [§§lCd' 5(ff metn ®elb, All my money. 2111(c) meine greunbc. All my friends. 4. When used substantively and preceded by a determin- ative word, it still follows the strong declension, s: 3)iefe^5 (ba^:?) aUcg, All this (that). S3ei bcm aacm. With all that. 5. It is not (as in English) followed by the definite article, but may be followed by the demonstrative ber, bie, '^o,^, as : 3iae§ ©clb, All [i:he] money. 2ta(cg) bag ©elb. All that money. VSit ^cn[cf;en, All [the] men. Me btc 5[Renfc^ert, All those men. 170. I. ©ttttj expresses quantity, not number, and repre- sents an object as mnplete and undivided, without reference to its parts. When therefore the Engl. ' all' = ' whole ' it must be rendered by gaitj, not by att, as : I have been working all (the whole) day long, ^d; f)abc ben ganjcn ^acj gearbeitet. 2. @onj is declined like an adjective, and always f'^Ilows the determinative word, as : 3)cr gangc % f>^&e ntc^f ?^reimbe al§ er, I have more friends than he. 180. The Engl, 'some, any' are generally omitted be» fore substantives, unless a small qua?itity (some, but not much) is denoted (see § 157, above). In answer to a question, without a substantive, they are rendered by etnigeS (sing.), einige (plur.) or luelcf) (sing, or plur.), not by ^Wva^ (which = * some- thing'), as: §a6en (Sic ©elb ? ^d^ l^aBe einlgcg (tueld^eS). §aben ©ie greunbe ? gc^ ^abe einifle (mel4)e). iSil STRONG verbs: cffeil MOD.TL. 193 181. Strong Verbs: cffcn Model. Infin. Pres. Ind. 2. 3. Sing. Imper. 2. Sing. Germ. Model: Engl. Analogy: (incomplete) Ablaut: cffcn iff eft, ijt, ig eat wanting Impf. ate P. Part. C5i:(g)cffen eaten \\ lie LIST. bitten, beg, ask Bittcft, bittet, btttc lai gcbeten effen, eat (of man) iffeft, ijt, i^ a^ gegeffen freffen,eat(ofbeasts) f riff eft, frt^t, frig fra§ gefreffen geben, give .9i(e)bft, 0i(e)bt, gi(e)b o.ah <^zq,tUxf. (ber) geffen, forget bergiffeft, bergijt, toers bergag bergeffen lefen, gather ; read liefeft, lieft, Iic§ Ia§ gelefen liegen, lie down lie^ft, liegt, lieg lag gelegen meffen, measure miffeft, mijt, mig mag gemeffen (ge)nefen (N.), re- genefeft, geneft, genefe genag genefen cover (from illness) (ge)fc^e^en (N.), gefc^ie^t happen (impers.) fefien, see fiefjft, fie^t, fie^ fa^ gefe^en fi^en, sit fi^eft, fi^t, fil^(e) fa§ gefeffen trcten (N. A.), tread trittft, tritt, tritt trat getreten (tuefen^N., obsolete), — — — 'max geh)efen to be Observe. — i. The changes from ff to §; also that § of the Impf. is retained through that whole tense, the vowel be- ing long, as : toir ajen, ic^ d§e. 2. That genefen does not change c into it. gefd^al^ gefd^e^^cn 194 LESSON XXIX. t§i8i 3. The change in fitjen of i^ into § and ff. 4. That the long c of the root is changed into it, the short e into short i. 5. The inserted g in the P. Part, of effcn (gejicffen). 6 The doubling of t in 2. sing., etc., of trcten, and omission of final -tm 3. sing, (tritt). Vocabulary. to experience, feel, em^finben telegraph, bcr ^cregra^^' intend, contemplate, \)ox's absence He ^IDiuefen^eit Francis, g^ranj ' century, bag ^a^rfjun'bert cherry, bie ^irfc^e province, bie ^rotjinj' romance, novel, ber Socman' swallow, bie (Srf;U)aI0e misfortune, bag Ungliicf world, bie 3SeIt pardon, bie SSerjetlfiung thin, biinn almost, nearly, betna^e, faft immediately, (fo)gleic^ lately, not long ago, neulid^ late, ^pdt while, h)d^renb Idioms: 1. Therein there wa«, etc. (general statement), c« gfebt. e« in ben ^erien, uno fie genag fef;r langfam, h)eir bag SSetter fo ^eig h)ar. 14. (Sine ©c^toalbe mac^t!einen @om= mev. 15. (gin ^ier frigt unb fduft, aber ein m^n^d) tgt unb trinft. 16. ^Durc^ ben ^elegra^^en ^ort faft bie gan^e SSett in bier unb jiDanjig ©tunben bon bem, ttjag in irgenb einem Sanbe gefc^ie^t. 17. 3(lg ein 9teid;er aug feinem ^aufe !am, hat t^n ein Slrmer urn ein toenig ©elb, aber er gab bem Slrmen !eing. 18. ®ag $ferb beg 9teifenben frag ein ix)enig §eu unb §afer, U)a^renb fein §err bag SJiittaggeffen im ©aft^aufe ag. 19. ':^a^ 5?inb ^at fd)on aEeg 33rob unb gleifc^ gegeffen, eg i)at and) affc mild) getrun!en, bie im ©lafe Wax, 20. ©inem Sitgner n)trb nic^t geglaubt, felbft twenn er bie Sa^rfjeit f^ric^t. B. 1. The wholejDf England is not so large as the Pro- vince of Manitoba. ^2. Henry VIII. of England, Francis I. of France, and Charles V. of Germany were the greatest monarchs of the i6th century. 3. Where did you find the money ? It lay in the grass. 4. Every summer the birds eat the cherries in our garden. 5. The sick man lay seven weeks in the hospital, but he has now recovered. 6. The rich (man) gave the poor (man), who sat before the house, some money. 7. This youth has read all the books in the library of his father, but unfortunately hj forgets just as fast as he reads. 8. Napoleon I. died on the 5th May 1821 ; he was 52 years old. 9. Have you forgotten what I told you two months ago .? 10. During the rain we sat under a tree and 196 LESSON XXX. (§§ i8a. told stories. 1 1 . One forgets easily what one reads too quickly. 12. If you have more paper than you need, please give me some. 1:J. Nineteen hundred years ago the Romans pos- sessed almost the whole world. 14. Many young people read hundreds of novels, and forget after some time almost all they have read. 1 5. Twenty-five years ago our neighbour possessed only a few hundred dollars, but now he is one of the richest men in the city. 16. Speak the truth, whether you are believed or not. ORAL EXERCISE XXIX. 1. Giebt es in Amerika Vogel, die nicht singen? 2. 1st jemand wahrend meiner Abwesenheit gekommen ? 3. Was haben Sie mei.iem Onkel gesagt, als er hier war ? 4. Was sagen Sie vom Lesen der Romane ? 5. Welchen Apfel iszt Georg ? 6. 1st das Telephon eine neue Ertindung ? ' LESSON XXX. DERIVATIVE NUMERALS. -TIME, MEASURE, DATE. -STRONG VERBS: fcjiagcn MODEL. 182. Derivative Numerals. From the Cardinal and Indefinite Numerals are formed the following Derivative Numerals : (a) By adding -ma\, adverbs denoting * so many times,' as: einmttl, once; bicrmtti, four times; einunb^ ghjanjigmol, twenty-one times; monc^mol, many a time. Notes. — I. 2Jitat is neuter, hence iebcSmd, each time; and wi^ Indef. Numerals sometimes adds -g, as: t)iclmQt(0), me^rmalg. |S3] DERIVATIVE NUMERALS. 197 2. ©in'mal = * on one (single) occasion,* as : 3cf) \)cbt i^n nur einmat flefel)en, I have seen him only once. (Sinmar (elnSinalS, einjt) = 'once upon a time,' as: 68 mar cinmor eiu ^buig, etc. (Grimm.) 3. S^ii^t ein'mal, • not once,' as ; (gr tft nid^t ein'mat ^ier neirefen, He has not been here once. 9?i(i)t cinmo!' (or nirf)t maV), 'not even,' as: (Sr ifl ni(f)t (ein)mor ^ier gettjcfen, He has not even been here. (d) By adding -fnc^ or fiiltlg, adjectives denoting *so many fold,' as : einfttdj, simple ; gloeifttt^ (jluiefac^), twofold, double; bicrfttij Ofttltig), quadruple; DieU foij, manniijfad;, manifold. Note. — ©infcittig = 'foolish, silly.' {c) By adding -Ici to the gen. fern. sing, or plur., indedi- nable adjectives denoting 'of so many kinds,' as: eincrlei, of one kind; breicrici, of three kinds; melcrici, tnanc^crlct, of many kinds, etc. Note.— (58 ift mir lincrtci = 'It is (all) the same to me.' 183. From the Ordinals are formed : {a) By adding -(, the fractional Numerals, as : ein ^rits tel = \\ ba§ 5Siertel, the quarter; brci 3n)ansigftel == ^/2o, etc. Notes. — i. These are substantives formed from the ordinal + %t\\ (= part), and are therefore neuter, thus: S)a8 5)tittet = ba8 britte S;eit, 'the third part,' etc. 2. 'Half* as substantive — ijie ^olftc ; as adjective or adverb = |ol!^ which is declined like gatij (see § 170, 2), as: 3cf) ^Qbe i>ic §dlftc meine8 (gigentum8 ocrtorcn, I have lost half (of) my property. 2)er ^nabe war ^alb tot, ate man ii)n fanb, The boy was bsUf 4ead when be was found 198 LESSON XXX. l§§ 183 .&0I6 2Saft)inflton, or US fialht SafI)ington, (The) half (of) Washington. •Oolb or bas Ijalbt j^ranfrcicf), half France; but ^le Wk ar cine aaugc 2Soc^e franf, I was ill (for) a whole week. 2. Point of time is also expressed : i84] EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. 199 {a) By the preposition on with the Dat. (always contracted with the article), of date^ as : tint erften 3anuar, On the first of January. %VX (Sonntag, On Sunday, %m ^Jlorgen bie[e^ ^acje^. On the morning of this day. {b) By the Genitive case, with Xag, days of the week, or divisions of the day, when denoting indefinite time or habitual action, as : $)Cg ^agc^. In the day time, by day. ©onntagg. On Sundays. C^CS) 2(benb§, In the evening. 2- The Time of Day is thus expressed : gcBacfen gefa^rcn gcgraben gelaben gefcbaffen gefc^Iagen getragen getoad^fen gewafd^en geftanb frug fra0te I 0«fra0t 202 LESSON XXX. [§i8r. Remarks.— i. 33ac!cn is usually weak i. the Impf. (bacfte\ but strong in the P. Part, (gcbacfen). Observe also the single f in Impf. 2. gabren is conjugated with fcin when intr., with ^a6en when trans. 3. ed;affcn 'to work' and (Dcr)frf)affcti 'to procure' are weak. Observe the single f in the Impf. Vocabulary. to set out, depart, leave, ah'> minute-hand, ber Wmnkn^ fal;reu rise, auf[tcl;en invite, ein'laben understand, Derftcfjen dine, ju WittaQ cffen go for a drive, f^ajieren fasten absence, bie 2lb'n)efenf)ett littlejree, bag 33aumc^en dozen, ba§ 2)u|'enb yard, bic QUt multiplication-table, bag (Sin* malcin^3 thread, ber Jaben * driving, bag i^a^xm driver, coachman, berSlutfd^er hole, bag Soc^ jeigcr pound, bag ^funb post-office, bie ^oft riding, bag dk'xkn sentence, ber (^al^* hour-hand, ber ^tunbenjeiger cup, bie ^affe tea, oer J^ee clock, watch, bie U^r train, ber 3"9 * two weeks, a fortnight, biers je^n ^age then, bann early, fru() slow, slowly, tancjfam at least, iuenigfteng first, first of all, juerft night, bie ^ad)t* Idioms: 1. The Boston train, 5)cr 3ug ( JJJj, gjoftun. 2. What time (o'clock) is it ? SBic oiel Uf)r ifl ed » EXERCISE ?^XX. ^. 1. @in breifari)»'r }aben bric^)t md)t leid)t. 2. ^^r ^utf c^et fci^rt [o langfam, b.v- v, tr uirf;t Dor brci IVxcxki auf jludlf an* lommen iDerben, a. ^R ber einen $dlfte ber S33eli i[t eg %aQ, § »86J STRONG VERBS : fd^lagCtt MODEL. 2O3 i^a^ircnb eg in ber anbcrn §alfte m6t tft. 4. ©«§ gicbt c« f)cute ^cucfi? 5 aBe^l;fllb l;a6cn ©ie mi(^ flcftcru nid;t 6efud;t? (Srftcne n^eil eg regnete, imb ^tueitcng tucil id; [clbft ^k'fud; IjaiU 6.^u t^a[t flut geUfcn, I'm nod) einen ©a^. 7. mc uicl bicaen 6ie? ^cf; imcge unGef% ^imbert unb fiinf^vn ^^funb. H^er £u0 !ommt um brei ^V^kxUl auf ncim an unb fdl;rt nni fiebcn 3^mutcn nac^ jeFjn ab. 9. .f^aben ©ie ^^re lUjv bci fid)V ^a aber bie ^^cber ift flcbrod;cn. lo. ^c^ fjahc jl^ei ^u^enb ©Idfcr bejicUt, abcr [le finb nod; nid;t angefonimen. 11. mx ^abcn unfere muxn eingclaben, lua^renb ber Jerien bicnebn ^Tacje bei ung ju^ubringen. 12. 9Bir effcn im ©ommer um ^alb jtrei m mttaQ 18. Sc^ ttJiirbe gem mit ^\)mn fya^imn faf;ren, tuenn ©le mic^ emluben. 14. ^er §unb berbarg ben ^noc^en in ein So^, lDeld;eg er Winter bem Slpfelbaum grub. 15. '^i, maah ^k\)t frutj (beg) 5)?orgeng auf, trafc^t bie %, and «7eo. ORAL EXERCISE XXX. 1. Wie viel macht drittehalb, fiinftehalb und neuntehalb? 2. Um wie viel Uhr kommt der Zug von Boston an 1 3. Was sagte der Reisende, als der Bauer ihn fragte, wie viel Uhr es sei? 4. Wie viel Uhr ist es nach IhrerUhr? 5. Wie viele Satze hast du schon gelesen ? (3. Ist jemand wahrend meiner Abwesenheit gekommen ? LESSON XXXI. ADVERBS. - STRONG VERBS : fattcU MODEL. 187. Adverbs. Adverbs may be arranged according to their meaning as follows, with examples of the simpler and more commonly oc- curing ones under each class : L Time. neuIidEi, the other day, lately toor'gcftcvn, the day before ■\T-pcfArr1q\7 Moxlfix', before (a) Fast: bainal§, at that time cbcn, just, just now ge'ftcrn, yesterday {d) Present: \)i\xU, to-day nun, ) ADVERBS. 205 now (c) Future: 6alb, soon j^ernad^', afterwards morgen, to-morrow nodbl^et', afterwards nimmer, nevermore ii'knnorgcn, the day after to- morrow ( almost 206 LESSON XXXI. [§§ 187 wholly, altogether gar, at all, very genug, enough gerabe, just, exactly !aum, hardly, scarcely, no sooner nod), still, more nur, only fe^r, very [0, so ungefcifjr, about ixUx\)anpt', generally U)te? how? 5u, too giemiic^, tolerably IV. Aflarmation. ja, yes ; to be sure geit)iJ3, certainly jatDO^l, certainly natur'Iid;, of course freilic^V to be sure, indeed lt)ir!lid^ to be sure, indeed furiuaf^r, truly, really gtDar, it is true, certainly netn, no V. Negation. nic^t, not VI. Possibility. etiua, > h)af)rfd)einlid;, probably )fDoi)l, perhaps VII. Necessity, atterbtngg, certainly buvd)au§, absolutely, entirely VIII. Cause. iuaruti \D• therefore be^^alb, ) Note. — These last, as well as many of the others, are also used as Conjunctions. Sec Less. XL. t88] STRONG verbs: fallen model. 207 188. Stronc; Verbs: fottcit Model. Infin. Pr. IND.2.3. Sing. Impf. P. Part. (same as Inf.) Germ. Model: faaen fottft, fallt fid gefattcn Engl. Analogy : fall wanting fell fallen (incomplete) Ablaut: a a ie a (Note. — This is only a seeming Ablaut ; 3ee § 192, Rem. 4.) LIST. Brafen, blow bicifeft, blcift braten, roast (tr. and intr.) brdtft, brdt faflen (N.), fall fangen, catch F^alten, hold f)angen, hang ()ttuen, hew ^ci^en, bid ; be called laffen, let IttUfen (N. A.), run fcittft, fdllt fangft, fdngt ^dltft, ^dlt ijdngft, f)dngt f)ttueft, ^ttut Idffeft, Id^t (dufft, Iduft blie§ briet pel fi(e)ng Ijjtelt geblafen gebraten gefaEen gefangen gefjalten (>i(e)ng gefjangen raten, advise (gov. dat.) rdtft, rdt rufft, ruft fd;Idfft, fc^Idft ftoBeft, fto^t I5)iefi lief riet rief fc^Iief ftie^ ge^auen gel^cifeen gelaffen gelaufen geraten gerufen ge[d;Iafen geftofeen oKOng gegongen rufen, call fcf)(afen, sleep ftoften, push Also the irregular gejen (N.), go ge^eft, ge^t Remarks. — I. Observe in ^xoiel oon itjm. 5. HoTTcloyoudo? (How are you?) SBie geljt ei 3^nen? 6. He has not been here for a long time, @r ifi lange nidyt hiev gcrocfcn (@r ifi nidyt langc bier gcwefen = He has not been here I«>ng). EXERCISE XXXL ^. 1. mit Bpid fangt man 9Jiaufe. 2. 2)er ^na6e fiel, aU er (Sc^littfc^u^ lief, unb ftie^ fic^ ben ^o^f auf§ @ig. 3. ©in fc^Iafenber 3ucf)§ fdngt fein §u^n. 4. ^m §erb[t bidft ber SSinb !alt, unb ^feift burdS> ^^" 3BaIb. 5. ©ffen, trinfen unb f($lafen^ ^^eijt (ift) bag leben ! 6. ^m 2iSinter fc^Iaft man gett)0^nlic^ langen aU im ©ommer. 7. Man Idfet je^t bie genfter offen, benn ba§ SSetter ift tuarm geh)orben. 8. ^c^ laufe nidj^t gem (Sd^littfc^u^, aber meine @ef^ielen finb groge greunbe batjon. 9. ^ic ^agb fling gum Saben unb faufte brei ^funb X^ee, gmei $funb Sutter^ §i88] STRONG verbs: faffeu model. 209 ge^n ^funb 3uder unb jtoei Jtafc^en 33icr. 10. ^ort ftanb ber 33aum, ben ber ^ned;t neulid; umoie^aucn Ijat. 11. (Sacjcn 6ie tnir, h?o^in 6ie ijorgeftern gingen, al§ id; ©ie in ber ^oniggftrage traf. 12. ^er Sc^iiler lieg feine Siic^er ju §aufe, aber er ift gleic^ nac^ §aufe getaufen unb ^at biefelben gcbolt. 13. 3Sorige SSoc^e er^ielt meine 7. It was a quarter past eight when the concert began. 8. That horse kicks; take care. 9. At what o'clock will you be at home ? I shall not be at home before half past ten. 10. When we were going home, we met our friends, who were coming out of church. 11. What is the name of the long street, which runs from King Street towards"(nad)rthe north ? 12. My friend, of whom I thought so highly, died in his nineteenth year. 13. In September we began to learn German, and the study of that language pleases us very much. 14. A lost child was crying aio LESSON XXXIL rSiSg upon the street, and calling after its mother. 15. Some one asked it what its name was. 10. The poor child answered that Its name was William, and that it lived in Frederick- Street 17. I wrote to my cousin a month ago, but I think he is angry, for the letter has not yet been answered. ORAL EXERCISE XXXI. 1. Was ist geschehen, wahrend die Knaben Schlittschuh fiefen ? 2. Weshalb sind diese Fenster offen gelassen worden? 3. Was kaufte die Magd auf dem Markte ? 4. Weshalb ist dcr Schuler so schnell nach Hause gelaufen ? 5. Wann haben Sie Nachricht von Ihrem Bruder erhalten ? 6. Sprechen Sie Deutsch ? LESSON XXXIL ADVERBS (continued):- FORMATION AND COMPARISON. - TABLE OF STRONG VERBS AND GENERAL REMARKS ' ON THE SAME. 189. Formation of Adverbs. I. From Adjectives (including most adverbs of manner): ifl) Most adjectives i ay be used without change as adverbs, as : %t Iciuft fc^ncDf, He runs quickly. (b) By adding -lirj (Engl, -ly), sometimes with Urn- laut, as : freilt^ of course, to be sure neuK^, lately, the other day mm entirely \^^,x\^, hardly, scarcely fur^hi^, recently ' Also to participles, as : tiJt]]entiidi, knowingly [§i89 uag] FORMATION OF ADVERBS. «II (0 By adding -HngS^ as : Blinblingl, blindly (d) By adding -|, -en0, as : anbers, otherwise Hnfg, to (on) the left hmi% already ,ec^t8, to (on) the right kfonberg, especially a6rigcn0, moreover Also to participles, as : eilenbg, hastily 2. From Substantives, by the use of the genitive case (sometimes with article), to express ; {a) Time, as : aSenbg (or bcs Sr^enbS), in the nac^tg (or beg ^c^tg), by evenmg ^jght (anomalous, ^/acBt morgeng (or beg iWorgenS), in being fern ) the morning anfangg, in the beginning (s; Manner, as: flugg, in haste tetlg, in part 3. From Prepositions, by adding -en, sometimes with b(a)r- prefixed, as: ^' au6cn, > outside, out of t,orn(e), before braugcnj doors oben, above i""'^"' I within, in-doors ""*"^' ^^^°^ brinncn, f bruben, over there ^inten, behind Note. -Prepositions in composition with verbs are really adverbs e« fu^ particles Qb, eiu, empor, \\ (also guriid). 4. By combination. For these see Part III. 212 LESSON xxxri. [§§19 190. Comparison of Adverbs. I. Some adverbs are compared, as: ^t y soon oft, often %trn, willingly mi e^er am e^eften ofter am ofteften Hefier am lith^Un {different root) ) ^ ' I well Jeffer am bcflen ( « u 2 Adjectives are used as adverbs in the comparative, as m the positive, without change, as : @r rauft fr^iicflcr alg [ein 33ruber, He runs more quickly than his brother. 3. In the superlative degree, the form with am is used fo? the relaitve superlative (see §§ 127, 2, and 128), as: @r lauft om frjitcfiften ijon arTen, He runs most quickly of all. 4. "Tht absolute superlative (see § 127, 2) is usually formed by prefixing an adverb of eminence (such as fe^r, ^oc^ft, i*upvv[i/ etc.^, as: ©r fc^reiet au^crfl fc^on. He writes most (i. e., very) beautifully. ^ 5. Adverbs from adjectives in -ig, -(i,J, -fam use the un- inflected form for the superlative absolute, as : @r I'm freunbfit^fi grufeen. He desires to be most kindly remembered. Also a few monosyllables, as : langft, long ago ; &5cBft, most highly. 6. The superlative absolute may also be expressed by auf bog (aufg) prefixed to the suoerlative adierfivp t^ ^v^r-eo tlie ntghest possible degree, as ; 19 igaj TABLE OF STRONG VERBS. 213 ®r Bcforgt feine ©efdfiaftc auf baS (auf§) ®eh)iffenf?afte|le, He attends to his business in the most conscientious manner (possible). 7. A few superlative adverbs eni in -eitS, with special meanings, as : I()0ci^ftcn8, at most tneiftcnS, for the most part hjemijftciiH, at least ndd;[tcn8, shortly Also the ordinal adverbs, erfteng, etc., see § 183, (c). 191. Position of Adverbs. Adverbs generally precede the word they modify (except genug, see § 178, Note). For further particulars as to their position in the sentence, see § 45, Rule 5. 192. Table of Classification of Strong Verbs. German Model. Abl aut. Class. Div. English Analogy. In FIN. Impf. P. Part. 2. 3. sing. Pr.Ind. Lesson. 2.S.IMP. I.] a beifien bite et I I XXII. b bleibcn (wanting) et ic tc — XXIII. n.\ a jd)iegen shoot ic,etc. u XXIV. b frieren freeze ic,etc. — XXV. t a fmgcn sing I a U — XXVI. III.) b c jpinnen spin (wanting) I a a w I Ixxvii. IV. — fprerf)en speak e, etc. a t.te XXVIII. V. — effcn eat t, etc. a c t,te XXIX. VI. fd)Iagcn slay a u a Umlaut XXX. VIL falieti ■fall various Tc same as Infin. Umlaut XXXI. I 214 LESSON XXXII. t§§ iga- Remarks.— I. The Umlaut of classes VI., VII. does not occur in the Imperative. s. The varying vowels of the Imperf. Subj. are given in the lists, where necessary. 3. The English Analogies printed in Italics a^e incomplete. 4. The vowel-change of class VII. is not an Ablaut but the result of reduplication. ' 5. The lists of the various classes contain only the verbs of common occurrence ; all others will be found in App. L. 193. Distinguish between the verbs of the following groups : ^ f eitten, beg, ask f^^t (a) j htUn, pray (intr.) f^^^^^^ ( bteten, bid, offer ^jt ( licgen, lie (be recumbent, intr.) lag (^) j Icgen, lay (trans.) [egtc ( liigen, lie, tell a falsehood log geBetcn gebetct geboten flelegm fielegt gelogen gegtc^en Segeigt r hitf)irx, pull (trans.), move (intr.) gog W < m^^^, accuse ^jp^ ( setgen, show ge^g^p 194. Remember the Irregularities of: effen (P. Part gegeffen) ftejen, ftanb (or ftunb), ge= ISiauen (Impf. ^lefi) ftanben Qe^en, ging, gegangen giejen, 309, gejogen Also the double forms in the Impf. of : ^eben (^ub, m fc^j^oren ([rf;tt)ur, fc^h)or) Note. -There are a few strong P. Parts, from verbs now otherwise weak as: gemaf,IciK from „,oI)lcn, to grind (Impf. ,nal)Uc) ; qefa(;ctl rem faljen, to salt (Impf. fal^te); fl.fpaltcn, from fnnffnr. to i,i? ^ "^ fpaltete) J also some strong participles used only as adjectives, viz. ; 194] GENERAL REMARKS ON STRONG VERDS. 215 erijobcn (from crl)cben), exalted, sublime bcfcl)clbcn ( " bpfcf)fibcn), modest Ucrnjorrcn ( " oenuirreu), confused Vocabulary. examination, bag ©jamen kitchen, bie ^{\x6)t place, spot, bie ©teHc employed, busy, befc^ciftigt then (conj.), bcnn hungry, ^ungrig left, linf right, i^,d)t salt (adj.), gefalgen in spite of, tro^ (+gen.) improbable, unUJa^rfd^einlicI^ like, tuie to wind up (a clock, etc.), aufjiet^en pass (an examination), bes ftcl)en . greet, salute, griifien go (or be) too slow (of a clock, etc.), nac^'fje^cn run after, nac^'Iaufen (+ dat.) cry, rufen go (or be) too fast (of a clock, etc.), t)or'c\e^en command, ber S3efe^I visit, visitors, bet 33efuc^ Idioms: 1. I saw your friend to-day ; he wisheg to be remembered to you, 3cl) I)abc beutc 3f)rcit Sreunb gcfcbcii ; er iafit Sie griiftcn. 8. How do you like Boston ? mie gcfdHt ti 3fjncn f n ®of»oti ? EXERCISE XXXIL A. 1. ©e^t S^re U^r tjor, ober gei)t fie nad^? 2. ©ie ge^t gang ric^tig. 3. §aben ©ie ^f)re Uf)r aufg'^gogen? 4. ©in !leine§ gjJdbc^en fragte, n)ie t)tel U^r e§ fei. 5. ©in §err gog feine U^r au§ ber ^afcf^e unb ^eigte fie bem ^inbe tnit ben SBorlen: „eage bu mir felbft, iDie i)ie( U^r e§ ift." 6. ^o finb beine ©c^h^eftern? ^larie ift oben in ber ^ibliot^e! unb ®o|)^ie ift unten in ber i^iic^e. 7. 2(nfang§ tDo^nten 'mix nic^t gem in biefer ©tra^e, abcr je^t gefdllt un^3 biefclbe ganj gut. 8. ^d^ glaubc, \m luerben cinen bei^en eommer l^abcn ; iva§ meiucn ©ie? 9. ^ie meiften Seute effeu licber frifd;eg gleifc^ ds ge= 2l6 LESSON XXXII. [IS 194- fal^fncg. 10. ^ro§ bc« 39cfcM« be« mnxQ^ betetc 2)aniel jcbcn a:ag breimal. 11. gjlcine !J:ante, bic in Berlin i»of>nt unb bercn S3ruber eie !cnnen, ift fc^r franf. 12. ©riijen ©ie freunblic^ft SN Gltern fur mic^, hjcnn Sic nac^ §au[c fommcn. 13. .^offent- lidji toirb 5ri| [cin Gf amen gut beftcFjen, bcnn er f)ai aufg gemiffcn- ^afteftc ftubiert. 14. Gr n)irb e« fc^ttJerlic^ befte^en, ba er erft feit 5h>ei ^a^ren in ber ©d)ule ift. 15. ^er luQt, tvC^tt toiffentlic^ eine ]Xnwaf)xl)c'ii fagt. 16. ^d) effe gem gebratene« SRmbfleifc^, befonbcrg tt>enn ic^ rec^t ^ungrig bin. 17. gfJec^tg 'cov. ber ©d^ule fte^t eine ilirc^e, linfg ftc^t ber maxlt 18. 2Bir l^aben tieber abenbg 33efuc^ al^ morgeng, benn morgeng finb toir eeh)5^nlic^ befd^aftigt. 19. 3)iefeg ^inb h)irb nac^ften^ fran! toerben, benn eg Fjat feit brei ^agen faft gar nid^tS gegeffen. 20. eg ftanb fru^er eine ^irc^e auf ber ©tette m h)ir je^t finb, aber Tte ift fc^jn Idngft berfd^tounben. 21. 93on toem h)urbc bic ^ird^e gebaut, n)obon eie f))rec^en? 22. ^c^ it)ei§ eg nic^t, eg ift mir nie gefagt Ujorben. B. 1. Please show me the way to the post-office. 2. If George is up-stairs, tell him that I am down-stairs. 3. 1 do not like London ; I prefer to live in a smaller city. 4. The pen still lies on the book uponj\^hich I laid it. 5. Please tell me who lives overjhejvay. gT This boy has been stung by a bee. 7. Of all animals the horse runs quickest. 8. Give me what you have in your (the) left hand. 9. Lessing died on the fifteenth of February 1781. 10. The soldiers ran blindly into the battle and fought like lions. 11. The train for (nac^) Montreal leaves (ab'fa^ren) at twelve o'clock at night, and arrives in Montreal at ten o'clock in the morning. 12. A little beggar ran after a gentleman, and asked him for some money. 13. ' My father is dead,' cried he, *my mother is dead, and all her children are dead!' 14. *Who are you then?' asked the gentleman. 15. What answer was given to V,-.- --^fy^^z vjj viiv. ^tiincmaii, wiicii iiu was asKeci *ot money? <95] IDIOMATIC USES OF ADVERBS. 217 ORAL EXERCISE XXXII. 1. Was wurden Sie sagen, wenn ich Sie fragte, wie viel Uhr es sei ? 2. Gefallt Ihnen die Strasze, worin Sie jetzt wohnen ? 3. Hat Fritz sein Examen gut bestanden ? 4. Wo ist meine Feder? 5. Was fur Sprachen haben Sie studiert? 6. Glauben Sie, dasz der Herr dem Bettler etwas ge- geben hat ? LEoSON XXXIII. ADVERBS (ccntlnued): IDIOMS. - IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS. 196. Idiomatic Uses of Certain Adverbs. 1. nnn, well. 9tm, eg ift mir einerlei. Well (why), it is all the same to me. Note. - 9luil is here really an interjection, and hence does not throw 'tie subject after the verb. 2. then, just, exactly. ®a3 ift rten berfelbe mam, That is the very (exactly the) same man. SBir fmb (fo)fbcn angefommen. We have just arrived. 5Dag !ann man thtn nic^t fagen. One cannot exactly say that. 3. gctti, licbct, am liehfien* 3c^ cjfe gctn ^^tfc^, I am fond of (eating) fish. ^^ ejfe lithtt gifc^ M gleifc^, I prefer (eating) fish to meat. @r h)urbe c§ ger« t^un. He would be glad to do it. would do it with pleasure. ^KlpiAyo (^'txrnfka {itM»Jt^»^ /«:^ ^ IT'.CM 'Xr^' W\*/ V i/v ^jfi. iUfiH Which language do you 15 prefer (speaking) ? 2l8 LESSON XXXIII. (§195 4. ctft, first, only, not before, etc. a iW tUl 3)lan mufj crft benfen, bann [prcd^en. One must think first and then speak. aWein ^kuber mirb crfl movgcn fommen. My brother will not come before to-morrow. 9Bir l}anm crft jtoei ^JJctten marfrf)iert, We had only marched two miles. 9}ktn 33ruber i[t crft gtoei ^af^re alt. My brother is only (not more than) two years old. 5. sncvft, first of all ; for the first time. 2)icfe^ ©d)iff ift gucrft (Dor alien anbern) im .s^afm arxQt-^ !ommen. This ship arrived in the harbour first (i. e., before any other). Sc^ iDcrbe jucrft (or crft^ sum 6d)neiber, bann pm ^u^^ ^anbler geben, I shall go first (of all) to the tailor's, then to the bookseller's. ^c^ f;abc i^n geftern jucrft (^um erften Wial) gefe^en. I saw him for the first time yesterday. Note — ^UCrfi refers to time only, as above; cvfi;n0 = ' firstly, in ths first place,' refers to order only, as in enumerations, thus : 3d) toiuitc iud)t fomnien, crftcnH, roeil e« rcgnetc, jhJCttcttS, moil id) hanf imir, I could not come, first (in the first place) be- cause it rained, secondly, because I was ill. 6. fcfjott, already, as early as, etc. ©inb (3te f{Jon ba ? Are you there already ? Sft ^^r 33ruber fr^on in granfrcicfi gcmcfen ? Has your brother ever been in France > '^d) Un frfjon brei ^age in ber etabt, I have been in the city for the last three days. 2)as Sd>iff i[t fi^uu ijcftcrn angcioiumcn. The ship arrived (as early as) yesterday. » '95] IDIOMATIC USES OF ADVERBS. 219 @r ft)trb ftjott fommen, He will be sure to come (he will come, no doubt). ^^ Note. - (gffjou is often, as in the fourth of th^ oi left untranslated in English. ^' ^^'°''' sentences, to be V^; Ut rime: ©inb eie no^ ^ter ? Are you still here > 3c^ Bin ncij nie in 3)eutfc^lanb getDefen I have never yet been in Germany. ' @r bar nor^ bor cincr ©tunbc ^ier. He was here only an hour ago/ IWord^eute Even to-day (while it is yet to-dav not later than to-day). ^ ^' "°* Note. - Observe that ^^.^, precedes the negatives nie, nidjt, etc. {b) Of Number: IRor^ eine ^affe 3:^ee, Another cup of tea. 5lO(J 5tt)ei, Two more. 5lar5 (ein)mar [0 t)iel. As much again. . ^ 8. bod^, yet, alter all. {a) Adversative: ''ort*:;,;™"'^"'«^*'"---^'>°Pe (emphasis W With Imperatives: ftommen @ie b«i$ ^ctdn. Pray come in (»r^.^„/). 220 LESSON XXXIII. (§§ 195^ (c) In answer to a ncgatii'e question or statement: Have you not seen him? Yes, I have. ^d; I;ak c§ nirjt gct^an. ©ie \:iCkUx\ e« boi| get^an. I did not do it. Yes, you did. (For bod; and nod) as Conjunctions, see Less. XL.) Note. — 2)ocl^ gives an affirmative answer, where a negative one is expected. 9. auc^, also, even, etc# $lu(^ fein SSater toar gegen \\)n, Even his father was against him. ^D^lcin 33rubcr \mx ntdjt miibe, unb ic^ ttjar au(^ nicftt mube. My brother was not tired, and I was not tired either. §aben ®ic au^ 6ebad)t', \m^ ©ie fagen. Are you sure you have considered, what you say ? (emphasis on bebadjt). 10. ttiofti, indeed, etc. @r Icugnet c§ ttio^l, abcr e§ ift bodf) iwa^r. He denies it indeed (to be sure) but yet it is true. ©ie finb ttJO^t ein grember ? I suppose (presume) you are a stranger (no doubt you are, etc.). Note. — @ut, not luol)i, is the adv. of the adj. gut, good, when modi- tying a transitive verb. 11. \a, yes, to be sure, etc. ^^un ©ie e§ jo', Be sure to do it, do it by all means (emphasis on ja). ©r ift jtt mcin ^atcr'. He is my father, you know (em- phasis on ^ater). 12. nnx* (With the Imperative.) ^ommen ©te nur herein. Just come in (reassuringly). 196] }§ 195' 190. IRREGULAR STR >NG VERBS. Irregular Strong Verbs. 22 1 I. ^t^Utt, to do, Impf. iljat, P. Part. getl;an. Xf^ai, like Engl. * did/ is a relic of the old Impf. by re duplication, the old form being it-ia, i. e., the stem to- with reduplicating syll. it- prefixed, then ie-k, tct, ti)at Xfjun rejects c of the termination throughout, except in i. Sing. Pres. Ind., and in the Pres. Subj. II. Imperfect-Present Verbs, Inpin. hJtffen, know biirfen, dare fonnen, can miigen, may miiffen, must follen, shall Pres. Ind. Prks. I. Sing. i.Plur. Sukj. Imperfect Ind. Subj. P. Part. totii h)ijfen tt)iffe njufjfc tDii^te gehjufet borf biirfen biirfe burftc biirftc geburft fonn fiinnen fiinne fonnte fonntc gefonnt mttg tnogcn tnoge mor^tc mod;te gemodjjt mufe miiffen miiffe mujtc mii^te gemufet fott foaen foac foHtc foate gefottt III. SSoC^cn, will, Pres. Ind. i. Sing. h)t(t, i. Plur. hjollen, Pres. Subj. 4er II. and III. : ^) All have the same vowel (mostly with Umlaut) in the Inf. and the jP/ur. of the Pres. Ind. ; but (except fotten) a different vowel in the Sing, of the same tense. {p) The Impf, Ind, and P, Part, have the weak endings —it, -i, but the vowel is without Umlaut; U)iffen changes i to u; mogen changes g into i^. {c) The Impf, Subj, has Umlaut, except in foUen and tooUen. 222 LESSON XXXIII, (//) The Sing, of the Pres. Ind. of these Verbs toiffen follows, the Plural being regular : bu hjci^t l§ igfl IS as mSgen er tvtii \^ mag bu mogfl er ntog biirfen r ic^ barf -] bu barfft ( er barf fonnen ic^ fttnn bu fttnnft er fann follen bu foHft er foK ( id) mug miiffen -j bu mult ( er mu6 r ic^ lt)ill tooHen-j bu hjillft ( er it)iff Observe here the different vowel of the Inf. and Indie, (except foH); also the want of \h^ person-ending in the i. and 3. Sing, (ic^, er tt)ei§, barf, fami, etc., not \ot\^-i, barf-t, !ann-t ; com- pare Engl, can, may, etc., not can-s, may-s, etc.). 2. The forms of the Present in the verbs under II. were originally Strong Imperfects (hence their want of person-end- ings), which came to be used with a Present meaning ; the new (weak) Imperfects were formed from these, with vowel- change. 3. The Present of h)oIIen was originally a Pres. Subj., used as Indie, and therefore also without full person-endings. 4. The Imperative is wanting in all under II., except tDiffen, Imper. iDiffe. Notes.— i. Stiffen (= Fr. savoir) is used of knowledge, and of things only ; fcnueil (= Fr. cmmaitre) of acquaintance, of persons and things, thus: {^K. Ajwh'^) SBiffcn @ie ben aScg? Do you know the road.? (i. e., do you know which is the right road ?) Jh a^vuOia'/lftennctt @ie ben 5Bcg? Are you acquainted (familiar) with the road ? Hcnncn ®ic meiuen 93ruber? Do you know my brother.? aSiffcn 6ie, mas er gefagt ^atV Do you know what he said? §1961 IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS. 223 2. All these verbs, except miffcn, govern another Verb in the Infin. without 311 (see Less. XLV), as: 3(^ barf gel^cn, I am permitted to ga Vocabulary. to put on (a hat), auffe^cn expression, ber Slu^'brucf * French (language), granjo'fifc^ building, bag ©ebaube commandment, bag ©ebot' watch-key, ber U^rfdfiruffel dwelling-house, bag SSo^ns ^aug clear(ly), distinct(ly), bcutlic^ although, obgleic^' Idioms : 1. WUl you be so kind as to lend me your pen ? aBoflen Sfc fo gut fcin unb inir Sljre fjefccr Iciljcn? (Ut., will you be so kind and, etc.) «. I am sorry (I regret), (Si ttfut miv Ulb (leib to be treated as a separable particle). 8. What is that in German ? fflBfc Ijclftt fca* ouf il>cutfd) ? 4. I do not need to go to school to-day, 3d) bvaudye heutt nidft 6. He knows French, C?r fann giraM^Bjifd). EXERCISE XXXIII. A. 1. ^c^ fann bic^ nid;t t)erfte^en; ^pxid) ho6) beutltc^er. 2. ilommen ©ie nur herein, Wmn Bk Wolkn. 3. ^ft eg ^l)nen fc^on gelungen, granjofifc^ §u lerneii? 4. ^c^ h)erbe noc^ kute bie[e Seftion lernen miiffen, imb eg i[t fc^on brei ^^ierteRuf ge^nfl 5. 9Zoc^ t)Dr Dierse^n ^Tagen liefen Wix ©c^littfc^uf), unb ^eute ift bag @ig gefc^molsen. 6, ^ag erfte ©ebot f^eifet (is) : „®u foEft feine anbern ©otter neben mir ^aben." 7. @g tf)ut mir leib, ba^ tt)ir erft morgen abreifen ; ic^ h)are lieber fjeute abgereift. 8. %i)ut eg 3f;nen md;t auc^ leib, bajj (Sic big tnorgen bleiben miiffen? 9. 2Bie ^ei^t ber englifc^e 2lugbrucf ' Do you know my friend ? ' auf ©eutfc^ ? „^ennen eie meinen greunb ?" 10. gJietn Dnfel unb meine 2:ante finb fc^on geftern ange!omnien, aber meine SSettern unb goufinen lt)erben erft iibermorgen fommen fonnen. 11. SSeiJt bu. bafe beine ?!Jiutter anacfommen ift? 19 Occh vr^trr s;<>fpt» ^"i wx^t auffe^en, itjeil er mir gu llein ift. 13. ^^nU barf i^i Idnger 224 LESSON XXXIII. [§§190- ^ier bleiben ; tc^ brauc^e nic^t Dor ^e^n U^r ^u §aufe ^u fcin. 14. moUcn Bk fic^ nic^t [e^en? 15. ^c^ hjerbe me^r ©elb ^ahm miiffen ; ic^ ^a6e nic^t genug jur 9leife. 16. ^e me^r man f)at, befto mel;r toia man. 17. 35ie[e§ unartige ^inb h)eig nic^t, toag e« h)ia. 18. ^c^ l^abe eben ge^ort, bag meine SJiutter fran! ift, abert(^ toerbe fie nic^t bor morgen Bcfud^cn fonnen. 19. SBoITcn @te gefamgft meinen S3nef jur ^oft bringen? 20. 2BiIb:Im iDirb ben ganjen ^ag ju ^aufe bleiben miiffen, tt) ^d^ erfaitel f)at 21. gjjein Sruber fjjric^t gut ^eutfd^, o% j) er erft m in feinem ftebje^nten galore ba§ ©tubium biefer ©^rad^c ange. fangen fjat 22. SSoUen ©ie fo Qut fei.i unb mir fogen (mir ^u fagen), toic biel U\)v eg ift ? ^. 1. A stranger wants to speak Jo (fjjred^en + ace.) you. 2. That building was first a bank, then a shop, but it is now a dwelling-house. 3. How do you know that ? I know it be- cause I have heard it from my father. 4. What shall I do? I have lost all my money. 5. Do you know who has torn this book ? 6. No, I do not know who has torn it. 7. Can you write the name of that stranger? 8. Do you know German? No, but I know French. 9. Do you know the difference between the words * fennen * and *n)iffen*? 10. I had already put on my hat, and was just on the point of going out, when the rain began. 11. These two ships set sail (ah* fa^ren) at the same time, but the smaller arrived first. 12. I could not wind up my watch yesterday evening; I had no watch-key about me. 13. I cannot remain now any longer; I must be at home at ten o'clock. 14. I know this street, but I do not know the name of it (say : how it is called). 16. A brave man is esteemed by everybody. 16. Cf what is bread made ? ORAL EXERCISE XXXIII. 1. Wie heiszt *I am sorry' auf Deutsch? 2. Weshalb bleiben Sie heute nicht langer? 3. Konnen Sie Deutsch? 198] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 225 4. SoUte man gegen jedermann freundlich sein ? 5. Wie ge- fallt Ihnen Paris ? (J. Wie viel Uhr ist es, wenn der Stunden- zeiger zwischen vier und funf und der Minutenzeiger auf zehn steht? LESSON XXXIV. THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 197. The Verbs biirfcit. fiinttcn, inogcn, inuffcn, foffeit, ttioaen (see last Lesson), with the Verb (ajfen (Class VII, Less. XXXI) are called Modal Auxiliaries, or Auxiliary Verbs of Mood, since they are used to form combinations equivalent to various Moods. Thus: Joffct m^ geljen, Met us go,' is really equivalent to an Imperative Mood i. PI. of ge^en ; id^ fattn ge^en, * I can go,' to a Potential Mood, etc. 198. These Modal Auxiliaries differ from the English Auxiliaries can, may, must, shall, 7vill, in having an Infinitive and a Past Participle, and in the consequent ability to form a complete set of compound tenses, which are wanting in the English Verbs, and must therefore be supplied in that language by equivalent phrases, as shown in the following partial paradigms (see also Less. XXXV). burfen, to be per- 1 fiinncn, to be able miigeit, to like, be mitted | (can) allowed (may) Present Indicative. i(J barf, I am pej mitted, may id^ fann, I can, am able may I like, td^ biirfe, I (may) be permitted, Present Subjunctive. ic^ !onne, I (may) be able id^ tndge, I (may) like 226 LESSON XXXIV. Imperfect Indicative. t§i98 id^ burftc, I was per- mitted id; fonntc, I could, was able id^ mod^tc, I liked, might Imperfect Subjunctive. x6) bttrfte, I might be permitted i(S} fonntc, I could, might be able idE> moc^te, I mighl like td^ fjdbt geburft, I have been per- mitted Perfect Indicative. id^ ^abe gefonnt, I have been able id^ l^aBe (^emod^t, I have liked id) \)aU geburft, I (may) have been permitted Perfect Subjunctive. id; .(^aoe gefonnt, I (may) have been able ic^ ^abe gemod^t, I (may) have liked Pluperfect Indicative. id^ f)atk geburft, I had been per- mitted id) ^atU fjefonnt, I had been able id; ^atk c\^mo6)t, I had liked Pluperfect Subjunctive. td^ l^atte geburft, I might have been permitted id; fjiitte gefonnt, I might have been able ic^ \:}aiU gemod^t, I might have liked Future Indicative and Subjunctive. id^ tDerbe biirfen, I shall be permitted id^ h:)evbc fonnen, I shall be able id; iucrbe mogen, I shall like [§I98 §198] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 227 id) h)erbe geburft l^a* ben, I shall have been permitted Future Perfect. id; tuerbc gefonut 1 tcf; tocrbe gemoc^t l;abcn, I shall i^ahen, I shall have been able have liked x^ h)«rbe burfcn, I should be per- mitted Simple Conditional. ic^ iDiirbe fcvmen, I ic^ n)urbe mSgen, I should be able should like Compound Conditional. \^ hjurbe geburft ^a» ben, I should have been permitted ic^ hJiirbe gefonnt ^ah^n, I should have been able tc^ h)urbe gemod^t ^aben, I should have liked muff Clt to be com- f offcn, to be obliged mUttl, to be willing pelled(must) (shall) (^in) Present Indicative. id^ mu^, I am com- pelled, must id) foa, bu foaft, I am (obliged) to, thou Shalt ic^ WiU, I will, in- tend to, am about to Present SubjuNCTivE. t«muffe,I(may)be ic^ », I (may) be tc^ t^oae, I (mav) compelled obliged be willing Imperfect Indicative. ic^ ntu^te, I was compelled id; foKte, I was (obliged) to, ought ic^ tt)oUU, I was ' willing 228 LESSON XXXIV. [§§ 198. Imperfect Subjunctive. 16} mix^U, I might be compelled I have been com- pelled I (may) have been compelled id; foUtc, I might be obliged Perfect Indicative. id) l)aU gefollt, I have been obliged Perfect Subjunctive. id^ f)aU gefofft, I (may) have been obliged id) tDoKte, I might be willing, would x^ f)aU QiWoUt, I have been wil ling id^ l^abe gchJoITt, I (may) have been willing Pluperfect Indicative. id; l^atte gefoHt, I had been obliged t(^ ^attc gemugt, I had been com pelled Pluperfect Subjunctive. id; f)atti oelroHt, I haa been willing id) \)atU gcmu^t, I might have been compelled id) i)atU gefoUt, I might have been obliged, ought to have I might have been willing Future Indicative and Subjunctive. id) hjerbe miiffen, I shall be com- pelled id) h)erbe fjcmujt i)ahin, I shall have been com- peiled id^ h)erbe foffen, I shall be obliged Future Perfect. id^ merbe gefoUt f)as ben, I shall have been obliged ic^ hjerbe tooUen, 1 ohall be willing id^ hjerbe gettjolll fjaben, I shall have been wil ling 199] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES 229 Simple Conditional. id^ U)iirbe miiffcn, I should be con> pelled ic^ tDiirbe foUtn, I should be obliged i<^ rottrbc h)offcn, I should be wil- ling Compound Conditional. (d^ tDiirbc gcmujt i)ahtn, I should have been com- pelled id) tDiirbe gefoUt ^a* ben, I should have been obliged id^ hjiirbc gehjottt i)dbin, I should have been wil- ling 199. Further Peculiarities of Modal Auxiliaries. 1. They govern an Infinitive without 511, as : @r mug ge^cn, He must ^o. 2. In the compound tenses, when a governed Infin. occurs, the weak P. Part, is replaced by the Infinitive (really the old strong P. Part, without prefix ge-, which coincides in form with the Infin.), as : ^d^ ^abe gcmu^t I have been obliged ; — but ^6) i)aU c§ i^nn tniiffcn, I have been obliged to do it. 3. In subordinate sentences, their auxiliary of tense does not come last, but precedes both the governed infinitive and the participle of the Modal Auxiliary, as : @r fagte, bag er e§ ^aftc t^un miiffen. He said, that he had been obliged to do it. Note. — The foregoing peculiarities are all shared by the verbs ^et§en, ^clfen, pren, laffen, mac^en, fe^en ; for other verbs governing an Infin. without ju, see Less. XLV. 4. The shorter (and older) forms of the Conditional (viz. : Impf. and Plupf. Subj., see § 11 1) are preferred to the longer ones (with toiirbe), thus : 230 LESSON XXXIVt Simple Conditional, i^ biirftc — I should be permitted ic^ fiiiintc — I id^ itior^tc = I ic^ mil^tc = I [1 199 t( te er e§ gem berfaufen, aber nie* tnanb iviCf eg. 7. 3)eine SSettern laffen bic^ freunblic^ft grufeen. 8. Stiffen eie, h)te ber iperr ^eijt, ber mic^ foeben gegrii^t l)at? 9. 2)u foKft 5u beinem SSater ge^en ; er tviU bic^ f|)redien. 10. ^cr^nabetnag fagen, tt)a§ er WiU] id) h)ei^, bafe er cine Un= h)af>r^eit gefagt fjat. 11. mod)kn ©ie md;t bet biefem fc^onen SSetter f^agieren fa^ren? 12. §aft bu ben 3ug bon 33uffalo an. !ommen fei;en? 13. ^a tootjl, ic^ \)aht x\)n anfommen feljen, aber c8 tear niemanb barauf, ben id) iamU, 14. @r l^at gebnrft, aber 332 LESSON XXXIV. t§§i9^ tt f)at nM gehJoHt. 15. 3* \)aU in ber ©tabt fagcn l^Sren, bag ein grofecg Ungliidt auf ber (Sifenba^n gefd^e^en ift. 16. @r foil toon biefem SBaum gef^ruugen fein, aber id^ fann eg faum glauben. 17. Sd^ barf nidfft fo f^)at aufbleiben aU mein alterer S3ruber ; iri^ mufe jeben Slbenb urn ge^n U^r ju Sette ge^en. 18. ^d) toiH tl^un, hjag td^ !ann ; barauf !5nnen ®ie fid^ toerlaffen. 19. SSon toem ttourbe bag S3ud^ gefdS>rieben, ba§ ©ie foeben lafen? 20. @g ii)\xt xmv leib, bag t« fagcn bilrfeit. He has not been permitted (allowed) to say anything. 2. ^onnctt denotes: (a) ability {ol persons)^ as : er fonntc fc^on fct^veibcn, He could (was able to, knew how to) write beautifully. 3d^ ^ottc nic^t fommctt fiinneit, I could not have (would not have been able to) come. {b) possibility (of events), as : (S^ fttitn fein, It may be (so), it is possible. 3. SRogett denotes : {a) preference, liking {p{ persons), as : 3^ mag tlcfe^ ©ebit^t nic^t, I do not like (care for) this poem. @r tttOJl^te ttt(^t arbcitctt, He did not like to work. 3(^^ ^atte %)xtxi 23vut)er [e^cn mogctt, I should have liked to see your brother. Note.— This is the usual meaning in \\iQ first person ; also m the Impf. (Indie, and Condit.} throughout. ip) concession, possibility en fein, It must have happened yesterday. , 2Btr tverben au^.q^'^^" muffen, We shall be compelled (or * obliged,' or ' shall have ') to go. Note. — '' To be obliged, compelled ' after a negative is rendered by braucf)cu, as : T am not obliged to go, 3d) fitau^e nid)t ju ge^en. 5. SoUcn denotes duty or obligation, imposed on the sfubject dy the will of another. (a) Imposed by the speaker, as : ^u faflft nic^it fte^len, Thou shalt not steal. (b) Imposed by some person other than, but recognised by, the speaker, as: ^ciS> fan ge^en, I am to go. @r \:}aiit gel^en foflcn. He ought to h ve gone. 2Ba§ fott gefdfiel^en ? What is to be done ? 2Ba§ foilfc trf) i{jm ? What was I to do ? if) It also denotes a statement on the part of another as to the subject, as : @r foU fefjr reic^ fcui, He is said to be very rich. §200] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 235 6. SBoIlen denotes (a) the exertion of the will on the part of the subject, as : (gr ttiia nic^t ge^orc^en. He will not (refuses to) obey. {d) intention or impending action, as : (Sr mia morgen abretfen, He intends (means) to depart. !Da§ @i§ toiU 6red;en, The ice is about to break (threatens to break). (Sr mofltc e6en gefjen (= mx eben im SBegriff ^u ge^en), He was just on the point of going. (c) a statement or claim on the part of the subject, as : @r ttitff in 3nbien getoefen [ein, He asserts that he has been (pretends to have been) in India. 7. fiaffen is used (a) as auxiliary of the Imperative Mood, as : Coffcn ©ie un§ ^icr bleiben. Let us remain here. (^) to express permission, etc., as : man \)at ben ^ieb entf^ringen laffcn, The thief has been allowed to escape. (c) to express the agency of another, as : ^er Dffi^ier Itcg ben ©olbaten Bcfh-ttfcn, The officer ordered the soldier to be punished. 3rfc^en^iitte(-g SSater Hcg ben Saum nm^amn, Cinderella's father had the tree cut down. Note. — The infin. in the former of these examples is rendered by the passwe infinitive in English, the object of the verb laffen being under- stood. Supply the ellipsis as follows: 3)er Offi^ier ()at jcmonti (obj. of laffen), ben ©olbatcn (obj. of beftrnfcn), bcftrnfen lofTctl, The officer has ordered somebodv ta punish the soldier. {d') reflexively, as: I- 236 LESSON XXXV. [§§20O- ©r Itcg PdJ leic^t betriigen. He suffered himself to be deceived easily. 3c^ Ucg eg mir gefaaen, I submitted to it. (SS liigt fi($ ntd^t leugnen. It cannot be denied. 201. How to render shall and will. 1. The Engl. ^ shall ' and ' will ' must both be rendered by torrben when they express mere futurity, as : I shall be drowned and nobody will save me, %^ tticrbc ertrinfen unb niemanb toirb mtc^ rctten. 2. But if they express more than mere futurity (e. g., obligation or tie termination), they must be rendered by foKcn and lnoffrn respectively, as : I will be drowned and nobody shall save me, ^c^ miff ertrinfen unb niemanb fofl mid^ retten. 202. Observe the following parallel idioms : (5r IJot eg nic^t i\^m fiinncn, He has not been able to do it. @r !nnn eg nid^t gct^an IJaficn, He cannot (possibly) have done it. ©r ^ot eg nic^t i\^m m%m, He did not like to do it. @r tttttg eg gctjan jofien. He may (possibly) have done it. @r (at eg t^uil mitffctt. He has been obliged to do it. ©r mu^ eg gct^on (aBcit, He must have done it. r @r §at eg tjun fottcn. He should (ought to) havci J done it. (Sr foff W^ (^) w {//) I done it. eg gctjttit Jakn, He is said to have 202] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 237 W ©r ^at e« f^un tooWcn, He intended to have done it. @r mitt e§ get^an ^oBen, He pretends (claims) j^ to have done it. Vocabulary. to put on, draw on (coat, etc.) Englishman, ber ©nglanber anjie^en expect, erh)arten chat, talk, ^jlaubem reap, fd^netben disturb, interrupt, ftoren try, toerfuc^en last, continue, toal^ren American, ber 2lmeri!aner physician, doctor, ber Slrjt * beggar-woman, bie S3ettlerin steam-engine, bie S)am^fs tnafd)tne naught, cipher ; zero, bie '^uH shoemaker, ber ©c^u^mac^er proverb, ba^ (B]>x\6)Woxt studying, ba§ ©tubieren lesson, bie 6tunbe bunch of grapes, bie ^rau6e thermometer, ber or ba^ %'i)ZXs monie'ter overcoat, ber ttberjiet^er as far as, big nacij> dangerous(ly), gefal(>rli^ sour, fauer Idioms: 1. A doctor has been sent for, Wtan Ifat einen ^rjt f)oIen laffen. ». Every other day (every alternate day), (Sinen Sag um ben anbern. 3. Every week, Slllc ad)t Sage. 4. I should think so! !Sad fodte i^ mefnen! 5. In the right way, 2Iuf tie vidytiQC 9Bcffc (ace). EXERCISE XXXV. A. 1. ^er ^elegra^^ foil t)on einem 2lmeri!aner erfunben tt)orben •jein. 2. „2Ber itn ©ommer nid^t mag frf)neiben, mu^ im 2Binter §unger leiben/' f)ei|t ein beutfd^eg ©^rid^ttjort. 3. 3SDlle nur, \va^ bu fannft, fo \mx\t bu fonuen, \va^ bu toiUft. 4. 3^ad;fte 2Sorf;e foUen n)ir einen geiertag l^aben, tt)enn bi§ ©onnabenb fleifeig [tubiert U)irb. 5. SStaxk hjollte ibre £e!tion in einer balben Stunbe lernen, aber fie i:)at e^ nic^t gefonnt. 6. SBtr h)iirben alle gliidfUrfier leben, \t)ixm h)ir immer ti)aUn, tva^ hjir ti^un fottten. 7. ^d^ toerbe bie 238 LESSON XXXV. [§§ ao2- Seftion uic Icincu !bimcn. 8. ^u Juirft fie Icrncn tonncn, tucuu bu c^ mil* auf bic viditii^c '^Bcifc l^crfud^ft. !>. 9Jian bavf nid;t in bcr Sd;ulc ^>Iaubovu ; ba^ ftbrt bcu ^c(;vcr unb bic 0rf)iilcr. 10. 2Be^= (iaI6 f)at 3(fd;cn^uttcl^ 33atcr ben 33aum uml;aucn laffen? 11. ©ottte .^crr 33. tudt;rcnb mciner 3l6it)efen^eit fomnicn, fo laffen 6ie \\)n auf mid; tuartcn. 12. ^c^ mod)tc nur luiffen, hjarum ©corg auf fid; tuartcn Idf^t! 13. ^d; mijd;tc ©ie nic^t ftoren, abcr fagen Sic mir gcfdllioft, Itjic bicfcr Sal} auf gnglifd^ ^eif^t. 14. ©coi\3^ SSatcr foil gcfdbrlid; !ran! fcin ; man {;at jluei Strj^te f)oUn laffen. 15. ^er 33ogcl JDodtc ebcn bom 33aume flicgen, aU ber ^dijcr i(;n fd^o^. 1(). ©uten ^)?orgcn, .^err iJ3raun, mein iPatcr IdfU l^^ncn fagen, bafj er Sic I;eutc 5lbenb eriDartct. 17. .^a6e id; Sic facjcn (;orcn, ba§ Sic jebcn Xag cine beutfd;e Stunbe nel^mcn? 18. S^Jcin, icf) nefjme eincn ^ag um ben anbern cine Stunbe. 19. 353a^ mid; betrifft, fo mbdjU id) licbcr alle brei %aQt meinc Stunben nefjmen. 20. ^a^o foKtc id; meinen, benn Sie iDiirbcn me(;r ^nt gum Stubiercn fjabcn. 21. ©^rlid^ \r)ai)xt am Idngften, unb Unred;t fc^ldgt feincn eigenen §errn. -5. 1. Let us take a walk; I cannot work any longer. 2. The beggar-woman, who has just asked us for money, says that she is (claims to be) a hundred years old. 3. She is not quite so old, but she is said to be at least above (iiber -|- ace.) ninety years old. 4. The fox said : * The grapes are sour ; I do not like them.' 5. The fox said the grapes were sour, and that he did not like them. 6. Might I ask you how far you are going ? As far as Montreal. 7. Should I put on my overcoat ? 8. I should think so ! The thermometer is (stands) below zero. 9. Is it true that this traveller knows three languages.? It may be [so], but I do not believe it. 10. If you should see little Freddy up-stairs, let him come to me. 11. By which shoemaker do you have your shoes made ? 12. The steam-engine is said to have been invented by an Eng. lishman. 13. Lazy boys learn only because they are obliged 205] COMPOUND VERBS. 239 to learn. 1 ]. He must have been very ill, as (ba) he is still so weak. 15. This house is said to have cost four thousand dollars, but I should not like to give two thousand for it. KJ. He has not been able to come on account of the storm, otherwise he would be here already. ORAL EXERCISE XXXV. 1. Mochten Sie nicht eine Reise nach Europa machen .? 2. Gehen Sie alle Tage nach der Stadt, oder nur alle zwei Tage .? .'i. Was machen Sie, wenn Sie nicht mehr studieren konnen ? 4. Wer soil das Teleplion erfunden haben .? 5. Hat man einen Arzt holen lassen .? 6. Haben Sie das Geld be- zahlen miissen } LESSON XXXVI. COMPOUND VERBS. 203. The Prefixes of Compound Verbs may be either Inseparable or Separable. 204. A. Inseparable Prefixes. Remember : The omission of gc- in the P. Part. The prefixes k-, tv-, cm|)-, twt- flc-, tfcr-, jcr-, mift- loibcr- are always inseparable and tinaccented, the principal accent faUing on the verb. Remarks. — i. The particle mift- varies in usage, as shown in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 209, i, below. 2. Remarks on the force and meaning of these particles are given in Part III. 205. B. Separable Prefixes. Remember: i. The Prefix is separated from the Verb only in Simple Tenses and Principal (including Direct Interrogative and Imperative) Sentences. ^40 LESSON XXXVI. [§§ aos- 2. The gc- of the P. Part, and m of the (a) Simple Verbs. iin. come between prefix and verb. 3. The principal accent is on the prefix. 206. The Separable Prefixes are : 1. The simple prepositional and other adverbs, oH-, an-, auK oug-, etc. ; btt(r)- fort-, cm|ior~, ^cr- ^in-, etc. ' 2. The compound adverbs, such as: botion-, baju-, etc. ; boron-, borons-, etc. ; cntgcgcn-, entjttitK jururf- etc. ' Notes.- I. Observe that these compound adverbs are all accented on the second syllable. 2. The use of the compound prefixes with \%x- and Ijin- is defined m the Supplementary Lesson E., § 210, below. Examples of Verbs with Prefixes. {fi) Inseparable [c) Separable Compounds. Compounds. gejen, go berge^en, pass away | ^wSge^en, go out f jnriirfge^en, go back rcigen, tear jcrreifeen, tear to pieces fommcn, bcfommen, obtain cntgcgenbmmen, come <^o"^e to meet pnben, find crfinben, invent ottlfinben, find out Other Separable Prefixes are : 3. Substantives, forming one idea with the verb, {a) as objects of the verb, as : orStgeben, pay attention (attend); bonffagcn, return thanks (thank); ftottfinben, take place (occur); teilne^men, take part (interest one's self). Note.— The substantives in these combinations are usually spelt with a small letter, and written in one word with the verb when they pre- cede it. {b) with prepositions (= adverbial phrases), as : ao7l DOUBLE PREFIXES. 241 M in tl(|t ncl^men (refl.), take care (be careful); JU Ceibc tf)u\h injure, hurt; ^u Stttttbc bringen, complete; ^u Stonbe fommen, be completed ; im ©tttttbe fein, be able ; jum «arfiftctn fommen, make one's appearance (appear) ; ju SKutc fein, feel. Remark.— These substantives occupy the same position in the sentence as separable prefixes, thus : ^d) ^abe auf fein Setragen orjtgegeben, I have observed his conduct. ^d) fagte i^m fur feine grcunblid^feit botif, I thanked him for his kindness. Note. — Observe that in the above sentences the simple objects with- out preposition (arf)t, bant) /o//ow the prepositional phrases (auf fein SBe- tragen, fiir fcine f5reunbli(f)feit), contrary to rule, on account of their character as separable prefixes. 4. Adjectives as prefixes are usually separable, as : frcirajfen, set free (liberate) ; fep^attcn, hold fast (de- tain) ; fic^ logfagen (refl.), renounce. But many are inseparable, of which fuller particulars are given in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 212. For bott- as prefix see § 208, below. 207. C. Double Prefixes. 1. Separable + Separable prefix; these are compound adverbs, and both separable (see § 206, 2, above). 2. Separable -I- Inseparable ; the former alone is se- parated, as : on'crfennen, acknowledge, ic^ crfcnne an (but see Suppl. Less. E., §213). 3. Inseparable + Separable ; both inseparable, as : ficttttftragen, authorize, ic^ beauf tragte i^n, I authorized iiim ; bctottftaltm, arrange, id^ derotlftaltete bieg, I ar- ranged this. 242 LESSON XXXVI. I§§ 307- NoTF.. These are really not compouiul but derivative verbs, from coini)()uiul nouns (;.Huf'tian, XHll'ftaltj ; hence also the verb (as in the former example) is always weak, not strong — bcailftraiite, bi'auftiagt. 208. D. Prefixrs Separaplk and Inseparable. i'he prefixes liurrff-, ^iiitcr , ii^cr-, untcr-, urn-, tJoff- are sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable. They are : {a) Separable as long as both prefix and verb retain more or less of their literal ox concrete meaning; ij}) Inseparable when both have lost thi meaning, and form together one new idea. A compound of the same verb and prefix may therefore be both sepa- rable and inseparable according to its meaning, as in the following examples : {a) Separable and Literal. (Accent on Prefix, Trans, and Intr.) buri^'reifen, pass (travel) through, as: @r ift geftcru l;ier burrj'gercift, He passed through here yesterday. itn'tcrgel^en, go behind tt'bcrfe^en(tr. or intr.), cross ; jump over, ferry across, as: 6r fc^tc mit einem (S^rungc Ul&er, He jumped over at a bound, ga^rmami, bitte, fe^cn 8ie mic^ iificr. Ferryman, please ferry me across. (/') Inseparable and Figurative. (Accent on Verb, always Trans.) burd)rcrfcn, traverse, travel over, as : ^r t)at ba^ ganjc Sanb burd;* rcifl', He has traversed (travelled over) the whole country. f)intergc'Ji% deceive, as: ©r l^intergiitg' feincn greunb. He deceived his friend. uberfc^'cn, translate, as : ^c^ iiberfc^/c ein beutfc^eg^uc^, I am translating a Ger- man book. ao8] PREFIXES SEPARABLt. AND INSEPARABLE. 243 f^ un'tcr[c^rcibcn, write under, subscribe, as : S(!^rcibcn 8ie '^i)xc\\ Xiamen l^ier uiitcr. Subscribe your name here. Mtn'gef^en, go round, as : ©ie miiff en um'0c(;en. You must go round. tiott'gie^en, pour full, as : (Sr go^ bag ©lag uoH, He poured the glass full. iintcrfd^rci'^cn, sign, as : '^d) l)aU ben '-Wricf nod; nid^t antcrfr^ric'ficn, I have not yet signed the lettef. umgc'^Cil; evade, as : ^JJian nniging' bag Giefe^, The) evaded the law. boCcn'bcM, complete, as : ^c^ \)aU meinc ^itrbeit ijoH* en'bct I have completed my work. Notes. i. These separable prepositional prefixes are only rarely used with the verbs given above, except di?> prepositions proper, governing a case, as : (Sv ging Winter ben Ofen (urn bag §au8), He went behind the stove (around the house). 2. The adverb toietier is separable, except in ttJtcilCr^o'len, repeat (but toie'lJCr^olen, fetch again). 3. Many compounds with these prefixes are used as inseparable com- pounds only ; others ac separable only. Vocabulary. to meet with, an'treffen give up, auf geben cease, stop, auffjoren open, aiifmacf)en leave out, omit, aus'Iafjen pronounce, aug'f^vec^en assist, aid, bei'fte^en go away, fort'ge^en come out, l^eraus'fommen come in, ^erein'fommen set (of the sun, etc.), un'tera gefjen read to, i)orle[en (4- dat. of leave, berlaffen [pers.) promise, berf^red^en present', introduce, t)or'fteEen (+ ace. and dat.) go past, pass by, ijorbei'ge^en close, shut, ju'mac^en come back, juriid'fommen 244 LESSON XXXVI. [8ao8 marriage (-ceremony), bic 3^rauuni] pale, bicid; by heart, au^'tt)enbig since, feitbem' (adv. and conj.) closed, shut (predicate), ju collide, ijufam'mcnftofecn send to, ju'ft^icfcn (-f dat.) coffee, bcr ^affce Northern Railway, bie i)iorb's cifenba^n slave, ber 6!Iat)c even if, Wu\n . . . and) Idioms: 1. Wh»t la the matter with iJml mai m er? 2. He feelH III, ^Jjjm ift fi^lrdjt )u Wute; or: m {ft i(m filledt m ■nil If* 8. To tranNlste Into German, ^n8 ttumt uberfelirtt. 4. In line weather, glei \(^onm mtttn. 6. If you please, SOcnn ii^ bltttn botf (lit., If I may ask). iSXBROISE XXXVI. ^. 1. ^iXQx^ nic^t, m ^enfter 3U5umad;en, mm bu ba3 dimmer toerlafet. 2. SBa^ man auffc^iebt, fommt [citcn ju 6tanbe 3. 5l5nnen ©te mir fagen, tt)ie biefe^ 3Sort auf ^cutfcb au^ae. frroc^en h)irb? 4. 9Keine ©c^h)eftern famen mir entgegeu aber leiber ^aben fie mic^ nic^t angetroffen. 5. mu ^ahtn berf^rodjen un« beijufte^en, aber nur lt)emge ^aben ung toirflic^ beigeflanben' 6. SSir fmb je^t mit bem erften iTeile beg 33uc^e§ beinafje fertig ; na#e SBoc^e fangen tt)ir an, ben gtDeiten 2:eil 5U uberfe^en. 7. SWix 3uge ftnb auf ber «Worbeifenba^n jufammengeftojen. 8 36 ^5rte auf 5U fingen, meil' ic^ ^eifer U)urbe. 9. ^J)?ein ^^ater macbte ben 53rtef auf unb lag benfelben ber g^amilie bor. 10. Ser ein= mal liigt, bem glaubt man nic^t, unb luenn er auc^ bie SSa^r^eit f^nc^t. 11. ^ahtn ♦"/ ^^^« ^^^ o^cvui ^raun uoqteuen. 17. ^db banf^j bielmalg, aber ic^ bin i^m fc^on t)orgefteEt toorben. 18. Sei §ao8l COMPOUND VERBS. 245 fd^Bnem 25ettcr gcl^cn hjir unfenn SSatcr cntgcflcn, tocnn cr nadj ."paufc fommt. 19. ginbet bie ^Tranung 3^rc« 9Settet« morgcn obcr iibcrmorgcn ftatt ? 20. SBoUeu Sie eine Staffc 5C^ce? ©ebcn 6ic mir lieber einc 2:affe ^ajfct. ^. 1. The Reformation took place in the sixteenth century. 2. Have you closed all the doors and windows ? 3. What is the matter with you ? You look so pale. 4. I do not know ; since I have come back, I do not feel at all well. 5. In the year 1865 all slaves in the United States were set free. 6. Have you opened the letters which have just arrived? 7. The sun sets earlier now, and the weather begins to grow colder. 8. Mary is learning a poem by heart ; she has already repeated it ten times. 9. Have you found out at what o'clock the meeting takes place .? 10. Do you know the gentleman who has just gone past > 11. When we were going past the church, the people were just coming out. 12. Pay attention to your work ; you always leave out words, when you are copying. 13. Why have you closed the window ? I was beginning .0 catch cold. 14. I have tried to learn this poem, but it is too hard for me, and I have given it up at last. 15. Goethe's * Faust ' has been translated into English by Bayard Taylor. 16. The marriage of my brother takes place to-morrow at eleven o'clock. ORAL EXERCISE XXXVI. 1. In welchem Jahre wurden die Sklaven in den Ver- einigten Staaten freigelassen ? 2. Lernst du gern Gedichte auswendig } 3. Glauben Sie, dass unsere Nachbarn fort sind > 4. Kennen Sie den Mann, der am Hause vorbeif^eht > 5. Wer hat diesen Brief aufgemacht ? 6. Wie sprechen Sie das Wort G-o-e-t-h-e aus ? 246 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E. [§§209. I SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E. ON CERTAIN PREFIXES. 209. The Inseparahle Prefix mi^-. The particle mtft- is inseparable, but : (a) With certain verbs it takes the gc- of the P. Part, and jU of the Infin. after it, as : m!§'l)anbcln, act amiss mif^'gchanbett nitf3'jul)anb<'ln With other verbs nii^- either : (/;) Has fle- fiifort' it, as: inif5l)nn'bi1n, ill-treat P. Part. gcmiO'danbctt — or: {(■) Drops 0C- altogether, as: mififnricii, displease P. Part, migfaneit Note. — Observe that the principal accent: under (,t) is on the/n:/?x throughout; " (d) is on the /r<'/f.r in the P. Part, only, otherwise on the veri; " (c) is on the veri throughout. 210. Use of the Prefixes ^tt- and ^n-. 1. The particles ^er (' hither ') and j^in ( ' hence ') are prefixed * » verbs, both simple and compound, to indicate the direction towards or from the speaker respectively, as : itommcn @ic l^cr, Come here (hither, to me). ®fhtn @ie ^tn, Go (there) thither (hence, from me). Hence, a person standing np-stairs would say to one below : .H'onimen ^\t l^eraiif, Come up here (up-stairs) ; but to one up-stairs : @cl)cu @ic Ijjmuntcr, Go down there (down-stairs). 2. The simple prepositional adverbs 06 > OH-, nuf-, 0U3-, CJn- nrtJer-, iibcr-, Untcr-, urn-, dor are only used with verbs of motion, when the compound verb denotes motion in a general w.iy, without specified direc'-'on, or when it has lost the idea of motion altogether. §209* 2Zl1 USE OF THE PREFIXES. 247 of the verbs, from 11 the :ifie'i 3. {etter l;atftf^ gednbert. The wind is turning to the east, ^cr 3Sinb bref)t fit^ wad) Dftcn. The door opened, Xk %hnx offncte ftr^. The disease was spreading over the whole town, !5)ie 5lran!l;cit ijerbreitctc fit^ iibcr bie Qaw^c 6tabt. 3. For the use of Reflexive Verbs for the Passive Voice, see § 114, (/^). 4. From what has been said above, it will be evident that Reflexive Verbs are used to a much greater extent in German than in English, which indeed has no Reflexive Verbs in the strict sense defined above. I 210. GOVJ.RNMENT OF REFLEXIVE VeRBS. I. All /;-//(? reflexives take the reflexive (^personal) object in the accusative ; the remote object (the thing) is in the genitive, or is governed by a preposition, as shown in the examples given in § 215, i, above, thus : ai7] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 251 S* Wdme mirfj meincS Setrageng, I am ashamed of my behaviour. ©rinnerft bu bil^ bcffcnnic^t? Do you not remember it? SBir fefjnten ung narj unferer 3Jiutter, We longed for our mother. ' Sc^ er&armte mii^ fcincr, I had pity upon him. 2. Some spurious reflexives have the reflexive {personal) object in the dative, and the thing in the accusative, as : Sd^ fann mir btv3 bcnfcn, I can imagine that. 3cf; HIbete mir bie§ nur ein, I only imagined this. Note. - ©id, fd)mcirf)clu takes the dative of the person with a clause as direct object, thus : 3d) fd)mcid)rUc mir, bag icf) c§ tr)iin fijnnte, I flattered myself that I could do it. ' ^^''* Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal Verbs Proper are those used only in the third person sing., with the neuter pronoun eg as subject. I. Those expressing Natural phenomena, as : C0 fc^)neit, it snows eg ^Xx%i, it lightens C0 regnct, it rains eg ^onnert it thunders, etc. also with the verbs fein or tDerben, as : dg ift (tDirb) fait ^arm, bunfel, etc., It is (grows) cold warm, dark, etc. ®8 ift (|cf)IaGt) fiinf. It is (strikes) five. 2. Those expressing bodily or mental alTcctions id) with accusaiive of person. G^ fricrt mi(j, I am (feel) cold. @g bcvlangt mid; {mdj), I am (feel) de8irou^,. @^ freut mic^, I am glad (it rejoices me). @§ tt)unbert mid;, I wonder (it makes me wonder). I 252 LESSON XXXVII. t§§2i7- I @^ jammcrt mid) (gen.), I pity (it moves me to pity). @§ veut mid) (gen.), I repent (it rues me), etc. (p) with Dative of person. gg bunft (beud)t) init, Methinks. @§ gclingt mir, I succeed, etc. {c) with fein or ii^erbcn {^Dative of person), as : ©§ ift (Unrb) mir iibel, iuD()l (511 ^^lutc), I feel ill, well (it is ill, well to or with me in spirit). (S§ ift mir Ucb, Icib, I am glad, sorry (it is dear, sad to me). Note. - - In this class of verbs the subject C8 is omitted when the per- sonal object precedes the verb, as.- mid) Unnibcrt, etc. 3. Verbs used impersonally with a special sense, as : 2i>ie ftcjt'^ mit ;^l;ncn? How fares it with you "> @§ fipj^ ii^nt gut, He is prospering. 2Sa§ gicbt'gV What is the matter? aBagfcP^l;ncn? What ails you? Also fcin and lt)crben, as under i and 2, (c), above. 4. For the impersonal use of the passive voice, see § 113. Note. — Of the above classes, those alone are strictly impersonal which admit only of C? as subject; others, which are used with other sub- jects, but only in the third person (sometimes plur. as well as sing.) are properly called unipersonal. 218. Conjugation of Impersonal Verbs. 1. Impersonal Verbs form their various tenses, moods^ etc., in precisely the same way as other verbs, but are used only in the third person singular. 2. Some are weak, others strong, as : fricrcn, to freeze, Impf. tH5 fror, gcfrorcn ; fdmcien, to snow, Impf, ^3 fdj^neitc^ Po Part. 0cfd)n?it, 219] GOVERNMENT OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 253 3. Most of them are conjugated with fjabcn, as : (B^ |at gefd)neit, gcfrovcu, etc. ; but some take [ein, e.g., geliiujcu, gliitfen, to succeed ; cje[d;et;cn, to happen (compare § 53), as : ©§ ifi gefc^e^en. It has happened. 219. Government of Impersonal Verbs. 1. Impersonal Verbs expressing bodily or mental affections, etc., take the immediate (^^ersoT^al) object (= Engl, subj.) in the Dafwe or Acaisative (see § 217, 2, v^, above). 2. Those under § 217, 2, («), denoting a mental affection may be used {a) impersonally, with the thing {cause of emotion) in the genitive, as : @§ jammert tnirj fcincr^ I pity him (it moves me to pity of him). ^% reuet mid) meincr 6unben, I repent (it makes me repent) of my sins. {b) personally, with the thing (cause of emotion) as subject, as: dr jammert mit^, I pity him (he moves me to pity). 3}leinc ©unben reucn (pi.) mitj, I repent of my sins (my sins move me to repentance). Remark. — Observe that the English subject is object in German, the verb remaining always in the third person, as: %% freut mtr^^ I am glad. @8 freut bitj. Thou art glad. di freut ifiii. He is Had. ^8 freut ung. We are glad, etc. 254 LKSSON xx.wir. [f^ aao 220, TllKKK IS, IIIKUK ANK, CtC. 1. The lCni;Iish there is, there are (7«v/,s, ivnr^ has hem^ ivill h(\ etc.) must be rcmlcrcd in (Ici'^jan by C0 rticbt (jVib, (hU . . . j^CjV'Ih'H, UMvb . . . i]cbcil, clc), wlien ;m indcjinite Qyi.- istence is expressed, or in .i,w/^7v// assertions, as: (*6 Unli friibcv ImcIc Scute, loclcbc j^laubtcn, etc., There were formerly many people wiio believed, etc. (50 mirb bicfcvs :o,abv inclc '^Nflaumai 0c|jcii, There will be a s^reat many plfnns this year. Remarks. — i. 'i'iio English subjccf is object of (^icbt in German, and is in the accusative, as : (i'<> ijiicbt cincn :'){innan (ace.) uou :ricfcnv% luelcbcr ,.,^cifoliv:{ "9iidtlcb\/' bcifU, There is a novel (nom.) by I )ickens, called 'Nicholas Nickleby.' 2. The verb (i*\cbcu) is always in the s/Nij^u/ar in German, beinj; a true impersonal ; and c^^i is never omitted, as : ^ic|\\s %\\}x flicbt eg, etc. 2. There is, etc., must be rendered into German by c8 iff, H fillb (cv Umr, otc.\ when dcjinitc existence is expressed, or \Yi particular assertions, as: ^% ifl cin '^sotjcl in bicfcm ^^aucr. There is a bird in this cage. ^•0 finb siuci -i'ogcl auf bic)ciu il^aumc. There are two birds on this tree. Remarks. — i. The English subject is also subject {fiomi- native) in German, as : G-S ift cin Slonmn (nom.) non ^ic!cnv3 auf bem %\\^), There is a novel (nom.) by Dickens on the table. 2. The verb (fcin) agrees in number with the ;^tv Zodytcv tc« 3^ofti>r« ocihcirntcf. :J. In ihiH wuy, "Jluf biffc SBcJfc (ace). 4. 1 w»H hiiiiKrry (thirsty), 3d) l)attc .ftutifler (35urf»). EXERCISE XXXVII. yi. 1. (55 Juirb bid; balb beineg Setragcn^ rcuen, lucun l^mid) n\d)t irre; bu foUtcft bic^ fd;amcn. 19. e^ giebt ^cutjutafje ^^oun, unb leibcr i;at eg ju alien ^eitenX^orcn get^cben. 20. ©ie fonnen fidf) benfcn, ba^ eg mid> tounberte, alg id; mid; umbre^te unb meincn langft Derlornen J^-rcunb Dor mir faf). - B. 1. Are you afraid when it lightens ? 2. Yes, I am always afraid of the lightning. 3. What is the matter with you.? You do not look at all well. 4. I do not know what ails me ; I do not feel well, perhaps I have caught oold. 5. It has been snowing the whole night, and to-diy we have fine sleighing. 6. Have you hurt yourself? Yes, I have cut my finger. 7. There are two gentlemen at the door ; do you know them ? 8. I know one of them, but I cannot remember his name. 0. I must dress immediately, or else I shall not be ready at seven o'clock. 10. If you do not dress more warmly, you will catch cold. 11. I am thirsty; please give me a glass of lemonade. 12. I am glad that the thunder-storm is past; the lightning is dangerous. 13. Do you remember whether he was here on the 15th or on the i6th of January ? 14. Have you decided to leave (the) town, and to pass the summer in the country? 15. I hear somebody shouting in the street ; what is the matter? ORAL EXERCISE XXXVII. 1. Sollte man sich vor dem Donner fiirchten ? 2. Wie lange wolmen Sie schon in dieser Strasze ? 3. Stehen Sie Mil % f PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257 gewohnlich fruh des Moi^^ens auf ? 4. Weshalb hast du die Fenst ir zugemacht :' 5. Wie gefallt es Ihnen in diesem Hause ? G. Wird es dieses Jahr viele riiaumen geben ? LESSON xxxvni. PREPOSITIONS. 221. The Prepositions with the Dative o ily have been given in §§46. 51; those vith the Accusative only in ^§ 34> 50; those with Dative or Accusative in § 65. Prepositions with the Genitive. 222. The Prepositions governing the Genitive are chiefly nouns used ndverbiallv. the following lines contain the principal ones, and will aid the mt rnory: Untocii, mittclft fraft unb ttjajrcnb, Cttut, tJcrmiigc, uiiflca^tct, C &cr^al6 unb untcr^aI6, $)icgfcit, jcnjeit, joIJien, megcn, (Sttttt, auc liingS, ^nfolgc, tr"^ ©te^^en mit bcm ©cnititi ; ^od) ift l^ier nic!)t gu ticr^effen, 3)a§ bei biefen kpxn brei Slud^ ber ^atiti ric^tig fei. 223. The mi iiings of these preposi "ons are as follows: ^ ^ V /' ' ^ for the sake of, on ar count of 2. tticgcn, ) Remarks. — i. ^a^V^n), fjalber, always folloivs the case; begen may follow or precede a noun, but always follows a personal pronoun. 258 LESSON XXXVHI. fSaaj I 2. .J>nlb Is used only in bfgbalb and Hjc«{;alb ; {jalhttt after the personal pronouns or sul)stantivcs vvitli a determinative or attributive word; bafbcr after a substantive used alone, as: ^C0 '^vicbcuvS bvilbcu. For the sake of peace. 33ci[))icl^ l;albcr, For the sake of example. 3. The personal pronouns have a special form ending in - before l;albcu and lucflcn, thus : inciuctf;albcn, for my sake unfcrtluci'jcn, on our account, etc. 3. OUftcrlinlfi, (on the) outside 5. oficrjflib, above o^ 6. UUtcr^olb, below 4. iimcr^n(6, (on the) inside of ExA^^»LKs : » Unfcr C^iaitcn ift au&crr)aI6 (inncrjn!6) bcr ©tabt. Our garden is outside (inside) of the town. g)?ontrcat licijt untcr^alb bc«i Cntario=Scc^, Montreal lies below Lake Ontario. Remark. — ^uncrfjalb in expressions of time may be fol- lowed by the dathe of a substantive without article, as : l^nncvbalb jmci ^aijcu. Within two days. 9. (tJCr)mittcIfl, | by means 10. HcrmijQC, S of 1 1 . jufalgc^ in consequence of Re^[ark. — ,3iifoK3C governs the genitive when it precedes its case, but the dative when it follows, as : @v tl;at btc^5 jufolo^e mcinc§ 5kfebl8, or meincm ^43cfcl)I( 5ufoIgc, He did this in consequence of my order. 12. biclfcit, on this side 13. jcilfcit on that (the other) side 7. frttft by virtue of 8. laut in accordance with S aaal I'REPOSITIONS WITH TIIK CENITIVE. 259 Rkmakk. - - ^ic^>fcit and jcnfcit are prepositions (governing a noun); bicisv^\i\-,on\. ba§. ip) Urn, of)nc, and (an)ftatt may govern an infinitive with git, as : @r fam ocftcrn, urn bid> ju kfur^cu, He came yesterday (in order) to visit you. %6) !anii nic baian bcnfcn, ojnc 511 (at^cit, I can never think of that without laughing, liefer ^Wann foKtc arbeiten, nnfttttt ju ficttcin. This man ought to work, instead of begging. Remark. — But if the subject of the infinitive clause is difierent from that of the sentence on which it depends, bttft must be used, as : 223- and 224] GENERAL REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 261 an USfc ive IS tt6 ^cf) fonnte mrf)t iiorbeiGef)cn, o^nc bag cr tnid^ fo^ (not o^nc inic^ 511 fcf)en), I could not pass by without his seeing me. 3. Prepositions may govern adverbs, as: nad^ oben, up- ward ; wad) t;intcn, to the rear ; auf iinincr, forever ; bon fern, from afar ; and the compounds with ba(r)- and it)o(r)- (se». § 38, Rem. 5 ; 8^, s; 9^), 7). 4. A substantive governed by a preposition may be followed by an adverb, for nearer definition, as : 9la^ eincr 9ttd)tung ^in, In one direction. ISBoil aUcit Seitcu ^cr. From all sides. (Bx ritt Winter bem gcinbe ^cr. He rode in pursuit of the foe. Urn ba^5 ^a\i^ Return, Round (about) the house. ??an nun an. From henceforth. 95on Sugenb auf. From youth up. Vocabulary. to observe, remark, bcmcrfen elect, crit)df)len (+ ju) permit, allow, erlauben inquire (about), fid) cr!unbigen (4- ncid)) go about, around, bcrum'gef)en ring (a small bell), flingeln go for a walk, f^ajieren ge(;en divide, teilen let (of houses, etc.), tjcrmiotcn go away, iucc^gcl^cn the opposite, ba§ (^5e'(3cutcil custom, habit, bic ©cluofinl^eit microscope, Wf Wl\txo\top' (the) little Red (Riding) Hood, ba^ S^lDtld^^djen umbrella, ber 9tegenfc^irm drop, ber Xro^fen drunkard, ber STrunfenbolb will, testament, ba^ Xeftament' stairs, staircase, bie 2^re^)3e deceased, ber (bie) ^erftorbene warning, bie SBamung living, leben'big loose, slack, lo^ in^time, punctually, rc($t's Sciti(^ 262 LESSON XXXVIII. [§224 Idioms I For all I pare, SKfJnffhieflm. 2. This house lo for sale, ^\t\ti ^mi \\t )n bcrfflufW (lU., to be 8. He was elerted mayor, (fr Jutirbe jiiin SBtiroermeifier eruialjlt (lit. to or for a, etc., — jiim =-- ]ii r iitrm). 4. I have been here for a «,.pk, ^ri) bin \t\\ niljt laflen Ijicr. 5. To laugh (at), make sport (of), £irt) liiftig tiintftcn (ii6rr-facc.) 6. What Is the matter? aOnS ift WJd? 7. There is a ring (at the door, etc.), 6s riittflclt. EXERCISE XXXVIII. ^. 1. ^a^ .s>aib;^, tucIAcg 511 t)crtaufcn if{, ftcl;t auiVa'halb ber etabt, mrfit Jucit Dom See. 2. Scnn e^ nur iuucrl)aib Dcr etabt ftimbc, fo iuiirbc id) gern taufcnb Tbalcv mchr bafur ncbcn. 3. ©cfallt c^i 3l;ncn bcffcr bic^ifeit bc^ ^ruffee ^^u tuobncn, obcr jenfcit^? 4. Jro^ bc^5 eturmc§ fam ba^5 3c(nff vcdnititicj in 3(Cit) ;9orf an. 5. liefer ^vunfenbolb \jai urn feincr -^'amtlie miaen ba^' Xrinf en aufgegcbcn. (i. (5r fiir*tctc, bafj fcine eobnc bie \d)M)U G5ei\?obn= fjeit (erncn morfHcn. 7. ^cr biuiiirigc Solf ijin^ mebvmale^ urn ba^ ^au^ unb fud;tc J)fotfaV|)dicn. 8. ^l^lcrnuttclft fclnc^3 iirojien (Sinfruffeg bci ben 3{cicbcn \:)ai fid; .f^err 21. gum 33iirijcnneiftcr cnoablen laffcn. 9. @eit iDann tooFjnen eie in bicfer Stvafjc? ®eit brei ^a^ren. 10. Urn tncinettmHen imU er nid^t mit ntir gel;en ; Dieireid^t Irurbc er urn SfjretSinacn ncbcn. 11. ^ft CMcovb obcn ? ^a, cr ift focben bie 3:re^))e binaufGc^angcn. 12. ^affen 3ic un^ liebcr nad) oben gefjen ; e^ imrb m^ bc|fer c^cf arten obcn ;su [il3cn al^ unten. 13. @« l^at nor einicjcn ^33cinutcn ciemngelt; Jucr \mx ba? 14. ©s tt)ar jemanb, bcr fid; erfunbicjen luoKtc, ob bicfiH^ ^m^ 3U t)ermieten fei. 15. ^cm ^Tcftamcntc gufolnc lourbe bcv^ eit>nttum unter bic bciben Sbr^nc bc^ MU>rftoibcncn gctcilt. Ki. ^JJieinettoegcn mag er tje^cn, fobalb e^5 ibm gcfallt. 17. ^Hufun- baf^ (sjcorg cin iocnig grojjer ift, bcmcrft man gar fcincn Untcrfcbicb jJoifdjcn ben bciben Wbcrn. 18. A^^err X. ift eincr mcinor beften ^^-reuube ; er gcbt fcft nie am ^aufe ijoriiber ofjne Ijereingufommen. 19. Unhjeit ber ©tabt 33. ftebt bag ten, About Christmas. (c) In the sense of ' nearly ' (of iiiwiber) = ctttJU, UttgCs filler (adverbs), as : @r \}^i ttttJC (ungcfa^r) taufcnb Stealer itbrig. He has about a thousand dollars left. (./) In the sense of * with/ ' about ' (the person) = Bci, as : ^d) t)abe !ein ©elb ki mir, I have no money with me, about me. 227. At. (ci) Of locality : I. = in, when the action, etc., is within a building, etc., as : 3n ber ©d^ulc, in ber .Tlivd;e, im ::i:f)eatcr, im ^lonjcit At sqhool, at church, at the theatre, at the concert, 228] PREPOSITIONS. 265 2. = on, when the action, etc., is adjacent to the object of the preposition, as : %VX Senfter, on ber ST^iir, om ^tfcf;c. At the window, at the door, at the table (but 6ci X\W, at table). 3. ~ OUf, when the action is on the surface, or on an elevation, as : STuf bem gjkvfte, onf bem Saac-, ouf ber ^oft, ottf ber Umicr[itat, ouf bem (Sc^loffc, At market, at the ball, at the post-office, at the university, at the castle. 4- = Stt or in with proper names of towns (also with ^au§, 'home'), etc., as: • 3tt (i-0 %o.x\%, At Paris. 3u ^aufe. At home. {b) Oitime: 1. = vm (most usually), as: Urn ^a\h bier U^r, At half past 3 o'clock. Urn Dftcrn, At Easter. 2. = 3U, with 3cit and ©tunbe, as : 3ur red^ten 3eit, At the right time. ■^U biefer 6tunbe, At this hour. Note. —Urn with the ace. is also admissible with these words. 3. = IJci, as : ©ci 2:age§anl&rud;, At day-break. {c) Of price = ^u, as : liefer ^ucfcr ioirb 3U ghjei %^o.Uxn ba§ ^funb Derfauft, This sugar is sold at two dollars a pound, 228. By. lyii) Expressing ih^ personal agoit after the passive voice == l»U«, as : ^a*^ .flinb tuirb bon feinen eitern geliebt. The child i- loved by its parents. 18 266 LliSSON XXXIX. [§s 228- I {b) Of a part of the body, etc. = Iici, as : (Sr nabm bag ^linb ki bcr .^anb, He took the child by the hand. (c) Unclassified : ©Ci Jiiid)t, By candle-light. ©Ci ^^Jacl-.t, By night. Mi ©clualt. By force. M\i bcr (5ifcnt)af)n, By the railway. 8u Sanb, 311 Saffcr, By land, by water. 229. For. Rendered usually by fiir, but : (a) Of purpose = 311 {never \x\x), as : ®icy ift [cboiic^5 '^iiUx ^um Spasierenc^cf^cn, This is fine weather for taking a walk. G; vcift jum 'I^cvgniigcn, He travels for pleasure. {/}) Of time : 1. Fast = fcit as : iScit cincm ITionatc, For a month (past). 2. Future = nuf + ace, as : ^cf) lucrbc nuf cinicjc 2aQC Derrcifm, I shall go away for a few days. 3. Duration = ace. without preposition, as : ©r wax eincn oanjcn Wiomt bier. He was here for a whole month. (e) Of r^z/^^^r = au^, as : @r tl;at Ci> ott^ g^uvdit/He did it for fear. (i/) Unclassified : jyiiv'^ (rrftc. For the present. Qmn cvftcn (jlucitcu, etc.) ')M, For the first (second, etc.) time. asO PREPOSITIONS. 267 3um ©eburt^tac^e, ju 2Seif?nac^ten, For (as) a birth- day-present, for a Christmas-present. 230. In. Rendered usually by in, but : {a) ~ ttuf, as : In the street, 9(uf bcr ©tra^e. In the country, 9tuf bem Sanbe. In this manner, ^uf bicfe 2Bcifc (ace). In German, 5tuf 3)eutfd;. (^) == litltcr, as : Unttt (Slifabct^g SfJcgierung, In Elizabeth's reign. 3tt SBacjcn, In a carriage. 231. Of. (a) By the genitive without preposition, to express the relation of the possessive case, as : ®er Sillc unferS ^aterl. The will of our father (i. e., our father's will). ib) = tJOn : 1. After verbs, etc., as: %^ f^red;e lion if)m, I speak of him. 2. Between titles and names of places, as : !^ie ^onigin Uon ©nglanb. The Queen of England. 3. After Jiiimerals and other partitives, as : @iner Hon nieineu ^rcunben. One of my friends. 2)er (iltefte tion ineinen ^riibern, The eldest of my brothers. 4. Replacing a genitive plural without article, as : @r ift ber :i5ater tion bier ilnaben, He is the father of four boys. 268 LESSON XXXIX. [§§ 231- ■ 5. To avoid a succession of several genitives, as : 2)ie Jyrau bom abetter mcinc^ Dnfcl^, The wife of my uncle's cousin. {c) Of cause, when the cause is a disease = an, as: (S'r ftarO nn bcr (Sfjolcra, He died of the cholera. {(i) Oi place, with names of battles: 1. = Bci, if named after a town, village, etc., as : 2)ie Sd;Iad;t ki Sei^jicj, The battle of Leipzig. 2. = on, if named after a river, as : ^ie <3cf^(ad;t an bcr Slhiia, The battle of the Alma. (e) Unclassified : ^Jiangel on @elb. Want of money. SicOc gnm ©clbc. Love of money. 3Sa^ foil on§ mir h?crben ? What is to become of me ? 232. Ou. Rendered usually by ouf, but : {a) Of time or date = Ace. without preposition, or = on -f- Dat., as : J^cn (or om) 3tt)olftcn ^artuar. On the twelfth of January. {d) Of fnodes 0/ progression = ju^ as : gu ^ferbc. On horseback. gn ertt)anbte treaty, ber 3Sertra{j* root, bie SBurjel this evening, fjeiite Slbenb thorough(^-ly), c^riinblid; fortunately, t3ludlid;erh)eife possible, tnoglic^ absent (on a journey), ijerreift Idioms : 1. To be accustomed, lie WcJuolin^eit ftttficn (+ infin. with ju). 2. In the middle of summer, 9Ritteu im (Soinnter. 3. To take a pleasure-trip (excursion), 6inen Sludflug mod^fn. 4. It looks like rain, Kd firt)t nadft Wcflcn ou^. 5. Two or three, ,'{)uci bi8 brei. 6. He sprang out of the window, (?v fjirntifl jum JJeuftcv l^iuttuS (point of ingress or exit denoted by jll -f- dat.). Note : It is customai y, in referring to the relatives of the person addressed, to prefix $"rr, 'grau or (^raulein, as the case may be, but this is not done in speaking of one's own relatives, thus: Sffiie gef)t eS S^rcm §emi SBater? — But : gJlein 9Sater ift ganj iDof)l. S2i4] PR1.POS 'TIONS. 271 EXERCISE XXXIX. A, 1 ^"" i ,ueld>c ^ii^ctfo l^abcn 3ic bic fransbfifd^c S^vadjC [0 gut iielci 3d) l;abv jueiii ic (^rammatit griinblid; [tubiert, unb bam yai^e \d} anb •tl;af^^ ^a' in ^ranfrcid; 3iu3cbrad;t'. 3. 2I-e lange Mcibt ^^r .Cr^di .,o4) fort? Gr fommt erft itbermurort nad) .'Qaufe. 4. :iba6 s]cbent[t bu bcutc 3(bcnb 311 tbun? 3d;h)cincfiJ d;t ; fur'^5 Grfte mufi id; mciue ^hifcjabcn mad;cn. 5. 21' f)a]\ u ben {;ub)c^en ed;lafrod bdommcit ? ^c^ f^abe i^^n jum ©eburtetaoe bcfommcn, unb jiclje i(;n f;eute juni erftcn 5JiaIe an. 6. G^s !Iiniiclt ; tuer i[t an bcv 3:^ur? C5^ ift jemanb, ber ben iQmw f^jrec^ien it)iir, aber er ift bei 1\\d)t unb lafjt fid; nid;t ftoren. 7. ®u fi^eft am enfter; fie^ bod; cinmal jum Jenfter t)inau^5, unb bu iu'rft i^n Diclleid;t fef;en fbnnen. 8. 3u luelc^er 3eit tebte ^JJ^oIieve? Gr lebte unter b ^ic^ierung Submig XIV. Don ,'vran!reid;. 9. ^ft e§ moglic^, 3U berfelben 3eit Don einer Sacf^e ju f)3red;en unb an eine anbereju benfen? 10. ^ie Siebe ^um ©elbe ift bie iBurjel a\W% libels. 11. Unfer .'oaug fteOt am et. Sorenj^JluB, unb Don ben ^^enftevn fief;t man bie Dam^ffc^)iffe uorbcigeben. 12. 2Bi((ft bu mir beine ©rammati! Icif;en? ^a iDobl, mit ber ^cbingunt3, ba^ bu biefelbe Dor morgen auriidbringft. 13. ^ft §err «. ju <5aufe? ' 9Jein, er ift auf brei iKsod;en Derreift. 14. 3:ki ^age^^anbrud; fingen bie S86gel am fc^onften. 15. %{U i^enfter unb ^f)uren tuerben be§ 9fJad)t§au«g gurd;t Dor ^iebcn bei un^ jugefcbloffen. 16. SSe^fialb finb bie i^inbcr md;t gur ©d)ule gegangen?' 17. G§ finb mebrere Hinber in ber Sd;ule, bie an ben m(i\tx\\ gelitten l;aben, unb bie 5JJutter fiird;tet fid; Dor biefer J^ranff;eit. 18. 9teifen Oie lic^n^r p. Sanb ober ^u Saffer ? ^m ©ommer giefje ic^ e^3 Dor, ju SBaffer l\x reifen. 19. ^Kein 33ater fjatte bie ©etDofjn^eit, m^ iilinber urn M gu Derfammeln unb un^5 ®efcf)icf)ten §u er§d{)Ien.- 20. 3}?itten im (Sommer, unb bann tDieber um iBeibnad)ten, ge(;e id) auf§ Sanb, um meine 55ertDanbten ju befud;en. 21. iiJorigen accordingly connective (related to unb) [• nevertheless adversative (related ro ttkr) \ causative (related to bcnn) «37] CONJUNCTIONS, 275 (0^ SO« alfo, so, thus ebcnfO/ just as beflo, I Infofent, the ► comparative tnfofent, ) . , Infotocit I ^"^smuch as, as far 2iS'— restrictive inbcflcn. I "meanwhile barauf, afterwards fchbcm, since then I I time Remarks.— i. Unlike the conjunctions proper, these adver- bial conjunctions, if they introduce a sentence, throw the subject after the verb ; but they may also follow the verb, thus : (Sr tft !ranf ; befjcnungcoi^tct tcirb cr fommen (or : er toirb bcffcnungcnrtitct fommen), He is ill; neverthe- less he will ':ome. (gg regnetc, borum (ba^er, bestregen) fonnte ii^ (or: ti^ fonnte borum, etc.) nid^t augge^en. 2. %\x^ and fogar, when they refer specially to the subject or any other member of the clause preceding the verb, do not throw the subject after the verb, as : ^UiS) [ein 3Sater mar gugegcn. His father, too, was present. (Sogor feinen geinben ^ot er bergeBen, He has pardoned even his enemies. 3. The verb often comes first in a sentence with boc^, to express a strong affirmation, as : §obc ic^ eg bod^ gefagt, Did I not say so } 276 LESSON XL. [§§ 338- 238. III. Correlative Conjunctions. These are: Cllthicbct . . . fiber, either ... or ) tticbcr . . . itOti, neitlier ... nor ) '^''J''"'^^''^ nii^i nur . . . fonbcru our^, | not only . . . ) foltioil . . . ofg 0U(5, I but also \ ^onnecttvi vX&jS. fotOO^I . . . alg, not so much ... as balb . . . Holb, now . . . now (again), at one time . . . at another tcilS . . . tcUg, partly . . . partly einerfdtS . . . onbcrfcitg, on the one hand ... on the other. ^ Remark. — The last three are adverbial conjunctions, and either follow the verb, or throw the subject after it, unless they modify a particular member of the sentence (compare § 237, Remarks i, 2, above). 239. B. Subordinating Conjunctions. 1. Sentences introduced by subordinating conjunctions are always dependent, and therefore have the verb last (see §32). 2. Some of these also are adverbial, but, as this distinction does not affect the construction, they are not separate^ arranged. 3. The principal subordinating conjunctions are as follows {a) Introducing substantive clause : bofe, that ob, if, whether {b) Introducing «rt^z/^r^/^/ clause : ^^^^ ■) ) Bis (bag\ until ) a39jl CONJUNCTIONS. while, whilst Ittbcff'cn, inbcm', untcrbcff'eti, mii^rcnb (bog), fcit(bcm), since fobalb'^ as soon as fo Initgr, as long as (fo)lllic, as soon as teltC, how — manner bcun, than tote, I '^'""' ^^ intoicfern', inasmuch as Jc nnf^bem^ according as bo, since bo§, that tocil, because bo§, that urn bai j ^" ^''^^^ ^h^^ bamtt', in order that toenn, if ol8 ofi, I ttlg tocnn, j toofcrn, j oliglcir^, tocnn gleit^, oBfdjon, tocnn fr^on, ob ourj, tocnn ttur|, obtoo^I, toictoo^t, nngcaj^tct (bog), tocnn . . . vX^, if not, unless as if m case > time > degree * cause purpose condition ^although *=* > concessive 277 2/8 LESSON XL. [58 «3J- Remarks. — I. lIBcnn and 06 take the subjunctive when the verb of the principal clause is in the impf., plupf., of conditional, as : ^d; toiirbe fommcn, hjenn tdj) tuof^l genug toiirc, I should come, if I were well enough. 3d; tmijtc nid;t, ob cr gefoinmen ttjiire (fci), I did not know, whether he had come. 2. 9Bcnn may be omitted in conditional sentences ; the verb then begins the clause, as in the question order (compare § 59). This construction is much more common than in English, and is generally used when the dependent clause, containing the condition, precedes the principal clause, con- taining the consequence, as : ^^attc tift ©elb, fo hjurbe id^ greunbe f)a6en, If I had (had I) money, I should have friends. Note. — The particle fo should not be omitted in the latter clause when the former is without rocmi. 3. In the compound conjunctions dbgletr^, Obff^on, obtOO^I, etc., the two parts may be separated, and the latter part placed after the subject, as : OBgleid^ (oM^on, etc.) cr fran! tt>ar, etc. ; or : Ob er gleii^ fran! tuar. Although he was ill. Note. — With tucnu the particles gteid^, etc., always follow the subject. 4. The ob or hjenn may also be omitted in these conjunc- tions and in nig ob, ol8 tocntt (* as if ') ; the verb then begins the sentence, or immediately follows al§, as : 3|i er glciij !ran!, Although he is ill. @§ fdjeint mir, all ob (menn) tc^ ©ie irgenbiuo gefe^en l^attc ; or : al§ Jiittc i^, etc., It seems to me, as if I had seen you somewhere. 24©] INTERJECTIONS, 279 2*^» Interjections, I. Interjections proper are not, strictly speaking, mem- bers of the sentence, and consist of sounds expressing either : ^ ^ (a) Independent outbursts of natural feeling, as : 0, 0^ of various emotions ; o^ ^ei, ^cifo. jui^^e (hurrah)^ joy; fi/ ia, ^ot surprise; o^ oil, pain-, p]m (fie), disgust ; fta^, contempt ; or (d) Intimations of will, as: ^ft, fi^ (hush), enjoining silence; Jc, Fjcbtt', ^0, ^aHo^, ^oaa^, to call attention. 2. Various parts of speech, and even whole phrases are employed interjecticnally, as: ^cil, hail; m^^ woe (subst.) i)od), hurrah; brai), bravo; feiber, alas; fort, luea, away (adverbs) ; Qottloh, thank God; also in oaths and adjurations. 3. Akin to Interjections are imitations of natural sounds as: jut, ^Ufcj, whizz; |,iff, pafj, |,uff, shot; hau^, tallj plumps, splash. ^' * 4. (a) The Interjections 0, 0^ ^fui, are sometimes fol- lowed by a genitive, as : O ! (ad) ! ))fui !) bcr Sijonbe ! Oh ! (ah I fie !) what disgrace; or by u6er + accusative, as : gJftti ! iificr bid; geigen ! Fie on thee for a coward I (d) The substantives used interjectionally, as under 2, above, are sometimes followed by a dative, as : SBcj mix ! Woe's me ! §etl bcm ^iittige I Hail to the king ! Vocabulary. to call for, ahfjokn go in, ^ineinge^en wear (intr.), ftc^ tragen prepare, Dor'bereiten 280 LESSON XL. I§a40 lay up, lay by, jurlirflcgcn old age, ba^ 21 Iter joy, delight, bie ^reube Lord, bcr ^err price, bcr ^rci^ tortoise, bie Sd^ilbfrbte guilt, debt, bie (Sd)ulb to be to blame (for), fcfiulb (adj.) fcin (an -j- dat.) cheap, bidig certainly, in any case, jebens in vain, bcrgebcnS even if, although, toenn aud^ IdiomM : 1. I am studying (preparing) for an exaniinatlou, ^d^ brreitc mii( nuf rill C^ramrn (ace.) tior. 2. Do you consider tliat good! ^alUn Sie baS fitr ((Ul? 8. To make calls, SrftK^r matfjrn. 4. In the world, Kuf ber 3SSt\U EXERCISE XL. A, 1. Sir foUten aHe DJienfc^en lie^en, )iotxvn, fie un^ aud^ ^affen. 2. ©ie berf^radien, inic^ abjui^olen; allein id^ luartcte toergebeng, bcnn ©ie famen nid;t. 3. 2Bcnn id> C[.\\ ^tjrem ^aufe tooriiberge^c, fo gcF^e ic^ 0eit?i)l;nlic^ l^inein. 4. 21I§ ic^ aber geftern 5lbenb tooruberging, fa^ id; fein 2id;t unb ba^er bin id^ nic^t I;ineingegangen. 5. ^c mefjr iuir lernen, befto nie^r finb hjir im 6tanbe 3u lernen. 6. 3)ie ©dfjuler befommen morgen gerien, barum Jjjringen unb fingen fie i)or ^reube. 7. 2Bie f e^r ic^ mid^ and; bemid;e, eg gelingt mir leiber bod; nic^t, alTe 3d^e bie[.er 2(u[gabe ric^tig gu fc^reiben. 8. ^u tabelft m^, aU ob ic^ fc^ulb baran tDare. 9. ©in borfid^^tiger mam legt in feiner ^ugenb ©elb juriid, auf ba^ er in feinem Sllter ntdit gjjangel Icibe. 10. Stumer Ujenn ic^ fran! ober fc^r befd)aftigt bin, ge^e tc^ jeben 3:ag f)3a§ie= ren. 11. (gr tft nic^t nur reic^, fonbern aud^ freigebig, unb begs ^alb ^at er fo bielc ^reunbe getuonnen. 12. fatten h)ir geicu^t, bafe ©ie fjeute Sefu^ ^aben, fo h)aren n)ir crft morgen gefommen. 13. SBoHen ©ie fid) er!unbigcn, ob grau ©. noc^ in bemfelben iOaufe n)o{)nt? 14. @g giebt nod; mele 'il^wi^ auf bcr 2BeIt, bie tocber lefen noc^ fd[)reibcn fonnen. 15. ©ie ):)Oiiit\\ mir (>elfen fonnen, ipcnn ©ie eg gen)oKt {^dtten^ allein ©ie tooUten eg nid^t. 3 04©] INTERJECTIONS. 281 Uk 'SaU ©ie be« 5?ac{imittaa« nid;t fomnicn !5nncn, fo !ommcn eic bod; be^ 2rbcnb«. 17. Dbolcicf; 5larl [d)on jcbn ^abrc alt ift, faun cr tuebcr flut Icfcn nod) gut fc()reibcn. 18. X)ic £d)ilhfrotc lief, inbcm bcr §afe [c^lief, be^f)aI6 ift fie mic^ juerft anflcfom. men. 19. §attc bcr .C-jafc nid;t ecfd;Iafen, fo Ware cr jcbcnfatt^ jucrft angcfommcn. 20. Xu follft tcinen ^i^ater uub bcinc ^Jhittcr cl^rcn, auf bafe bu lange lebeft im Sanbe, ba^ bir bcr ^crr bcin ©ott gicbt. -ff. 1. We shall come, even if it rains. 2. Before I leave the town, I must make some calls. 3. Shall we go without him, or shall we wait till he comes back I 4. Whilst we were away, a thief ca.ne and stole the money. 5. Do you sit up late when you are studying.? 6. Not generally; however, when I was preparing for my last examination I used to sit up late. 7. Do you consider this cloth dear > The price is not high to be sure, but it will not wear well. 8. Here is cloth, which is dear, but I believe that it is good. 9. I do not, on the contrary, consider it dear, but cheap, since it is good cloth. 10. Since I have been ill, I am allowed neither to read much nor to write much. 11. It seems to me that it is colder to-day than yesterday. 12. It is^alMhe same to_me, whether I travel by the steamer or by the railway. i:i.^[If] I had thought of^that, I should have gone to meet you. 14. The hare slept, and in^the_meanwhile the tortoise ar- rived. 15. If the hare had not slept, he would have arrived first. ORAL EXERCISE XL. 1. Die Fenster sind alle auf, wer ist daran schuld > 2. Legen Sie viel Geld zuriick? 3. Weshalb haben Sie mich nicht abgeholt .' 4. Konnen Sie mir sagen, in welcher Richtung von hier der Fluss liegt ? 5. Hast du dein letztes Examen bestanden? 6. Halten Sie diesen Hut fur teuer? 282 SUPrLEMENTARY LESSON F. C§a4» SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOPJ F. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS. 241. I. ^HHrtlt follows and limits, or corrects, affirtnative statements, as foilbcni aoes ncgativu, thus: (Sr tft vcid), adein cr ift iilcfit fllilcflid), He is rich, hut he is not happy. 2. I^efto or um fo (hut not je) may he used with a single compara- tive, as : GKni <3ir, bamtt (Sic bcflo (inii fo) fvut)rr an!ommcn, Make haste, so that you may arrive all the sooner. 3- '^Oft is the n)ost general in meaning of all the conjunctions. It may be omitted w!ien it introduces a snbstaiiti7'c clause, as in 'idircct state- ments. The sentence then has the construction of a principal clause (verb second ; see §87, 3). But bafj cannot be omitted when it expresses purpose or conseqtfence. 4. The Kngl. if must be rendered by 06 (not tt)eiin) when, it = whether, as : I asked him // he could come, 3d) fraflte it)n, 06 cr toimncu foiinc. 5. For the distinction between al8, lueuil (as conjunctions of time) and itjunn, see § 58. 6. * Than ' should be rendered by alt^ after an adjective in the com- parative degree, not by UUi. 7. ^Clin = ' than ' is obsolete, except v/hen used to prevent the re- petition of al8, as : ©r ift gviifeer al9 1)irf)tcr, llCttn a{§ SDfJcufd), He is greater as a poet, than as a man. 8. In comparisons of equality, as ... as = (e6en)fo . • • iDlf, or alS, iDie being more common, as: He is as tall as I, (Sr ift (eben)fa gro§ tnic id^. After a negative, cbcil is omitted, as : (Sr ift ni(^t fo gro6 mic id). 9. So . . . fo are used with correlative clauses, containing adjectives compared together in the positive degree (compare the use of '\t or bcfto with the compar. degree, § 1 26. 4), as : §a4»J ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 283 ®0 flro[) fv Ifl, fo fflflp ifl er onrf), He is as -owardly as he is Wg; or: 'equally big and cowardly'; lit.: ,.ig as he is, he is just as cowardly. Not. -In the first clause of t'.e above example fo is «,6ora,Haii„jr i in the second coorainatot^, but does .lot throw the subject after the verb. Observe also the following construction, where the clauses cannot be rendered as correlative in Knglish: @o nern Irf) %)\m\ (oiicl)) l)dfcn inbc!)te, fo unniiinlirt) ift e« mir However glad I should be to help you, it is quite impossible for me (or : Glad as I should be, etc.). 10. As, when denotinsr cause (= 'since') must be rendered by ha, as ; ^ I could not come, as I was nc well, ^A lowwit ulcfat fommcii. ha id) nirijt luol)! luar. 11. As, in the sense of • while ' = tnbeffen, ar : He fell asleep, as I was reading to him, Gr )d)Ite; cln, inUf ffcil lA il)ni oodas. ^ 12. Distinguish carefully between the following uses of Engl. since: (a) Since ^^preposition = fcit (not fcitbcm), as : Since last Tuesday, @cit (extern 2)icnftag. (b) Since as ad^'erb or coordinating adverbial conjunction » feitDcm (not fcit), as: He was hero the day before yesterday, but I have not seen him since, i^orgcfteru mx n ()icr, feitficm )^q.U id) ilju abcv nidit gefelicn. {c) Since as subordinating conjunction of time = feltbem or feit, as: I have not seen him since he recovered from his illness, 3(f) ^abc it)u iiid)t neicl)eit, fctt(ftem) er gcnefeu ift. {d) Since as conjunction of cause = Jjo, as : Since I have no money, I cannot pay you, ^0 id) teiu ®elb f)abe, .v.nn id) ^\t iud)t bcgalilen. 13. After e|e, BetlOr and mo^renil, tag may be omitted. 14- ScHor expresses time only, efjC may also express preference (= 'rather '), as : ^ e^e i6i bag tljue, jdIU ic^ jierbcn, Rather than do that, I will dis. 284 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F. [§241 15. Observe that the adverbial conjunctions intieffeit, UntCttlcffen are coordhiathtg when they = 'meanwhile' (the pronoun beft'cil being demonstrative), hut subordinating viYiQU. they =* whilst, whUe * (the pron. being relative), as : ®ic fprarf)eii mit einouber; tnbeffcn (untcrbeffen) ^'7^ t$ '.uf unb ah, They were speaking to each other; (in the) meanwhile I was walking up and down ; but ; ®ie jprocI)eu mit einanbciv inbeffcn (unterbeffen) id) aiif nnb q6 gtng, They were speaking to each other, while I was walking up and dov/n. In the sense of * however,* inbcffen is coordinating oxi\y. 16. ^nt)Cm is subordinating only, and denotes cause as well as time, as: ^6) braiirf)e mcl)i' ®clb, tnlicm id) oiele @d)ulben ^u bej^a^lcu t)abe, I need more monty, since I have many debts to pay (having many debts to pay). ^ntiem cr mir bie .?)anb ^ah, lad)eltc er, As he gave me his hand (giving me his hand), he smiled. 17. SBcil must be used (not )ia) in answer to the question why? or wherefore ? as ; aSorum famen (Sic iud)t? SBcil id) fvant it»ar. Why did you not come ? Because I was ill. 18. 'Unless' is rendered by ttJCnn . . . tli^t (if- • - not\ or by beitn {coordinating a.dv. couj.), as: Sir tcerbeu nid)t au6gel)cu fouiien, tncttii fid) ba§ 3!Setter ni^t (inbevt, We shall not be able to go out, unless the weather changes. ^d} taffc bid) nid)t, bit fegneft mii^ iicnit/ I will not let thee go, except (unless) thou Hess me. Note. — Xcnn in this sense always follows the verb. 19. * But ' after a negative = al0, as : 3d) ^atte nid)t§ alS Ungliicf auf meiner 9?eiye, I had nothing but misfortune on my journey. Note. — 5lid^t§ rcentger al3 = ' anything but ' (not ' nothing less than '), as: ev ift nid^tS loeniBer ali veid), He is anything but rich. 20. Distinguish between : (a) ^0 = ' there ' ; adverb of J>/ace, as : 3^ tt)ar tia, T was there. [§241 §241] ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 285 (f>) Xo = * then ' : adverb of iime^ as : 2)er !Dieb fd)Ud) in« Apaud ; U cigviff id) {l)n, The thief sneaked into the house ; then I seized him. {c) ^0 = 'since,' 'as ': subordinating conjunction, as: 3d) !onnte ntd)t tomiucn, Ha id) frant \mx, I could not come, since (as) I was ill. 21. Distinguish between Jjcffenungcad)tet, 'nevertheless' {coord, adv. :onj.) and Ungead)tet, 'although; 'notwithstanding that' {subord. conj.). EXERCISE F. 1. Our neighbour has failed, but he is only the richer on that account since he has not paid his creditors. 2. The hare was sleeping, whilst the tortoise crept slowly towards the goal. 3. Rather than accept your con- ditions, I will give up my position. 4. He has not been here since last week, and I have not seen him since. 5. Since you have not seen him, I must either go and see him (say: go to him), or write to him. 6. I con- sider him an ignorant man ; he is anything but learned. 7. Have you been at the railway-station.? Yes, I was there as the train arrived. 8. We shall not go out this afternoon, because it looks like rain. 9. We shall not go out to-morrow either {(\i\d)), if the weather does not change. K). The whole family was absent yesterday from eight o'clock till twelve o'clock at night; meanwhile the house took (fangeil )fire. PART SECOND. SYNTAX. LESSON XLI. SYNTAX OF THE CASES : - NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE. 242, Nominative. 1. The Nominative is the case of the subject^ or of a word in apposition to the subject, or of a predicate noun quali- fying it. The nominative is also used in address, there being no special form for the vocative. 2. Neuter verbs indicating a state or transition, such as fein, to be ; trerbcn, to become ; bleiben, to remain ; fd)eincn, to seem, appear ; lj>ei^en, to be called, take a predicate nomi- native, as : @r ift Soltiat geiDorbcn (gebliebcn). He has become (re- mained) a soldier. 3. Verbs of calling take a predicate nominative, verbs of considerifig a nominative with al^, in the passive, as : ^aifer .*peinrirf) I. iuurbe bcr ^^ogler genannt. Emperor Henry was called the Fowler. 3}iein ^aier Itjurbe immcr t>on inir ol^ mcin beftcr greunb betradbtct. My father was always regarded by me (as) mv best friend. Note. — Verbs of choosing generally take the preposition ju instead of the English nominative. 286 §a44) GENITIVE. 287 243. Genitive. The Genitive is used chieHy as the complement of sub- stantives, its use in this respect being much the same as the English objective with 'of,' and also covering that of the possessive. Thus we have : 1. The Genitive of Origin, as: 3)ie %xU)it beg iBaumcg, The fruits of the tree. 2. The Subjective Genitive, indicating the agent or cause^ as : ^cr ©raube eineg 6(;n[tcu, The faith of a Christian. 3. The Objective Genitive, indicating the thing affected, as : ^ie ©ntbccfuncj Stmerifag, The discovery of America. 4. The Possessive Genitive, as : ^er (Garten beg ^onigg. The garden of the king (the king's garden). 5. The Genitive of Quality, as : 3t»et ^inber eincg ^illtcrg. Two children of one age. NoTK. This genitive is frequently replaced by Don, as : (Sill ajiauu \sm l)ol)em %\in, A man of great age. 6. The Partitive Genitive, as : ©tner meiner greunbe, One of my friends. 3)er jungfte meiner Sruber, The youngest of my brothers. Note. — This genitive is commonly replaced by oon after numerals and other partitives. 244. Genitive after Adjectives. Adjectives denoting posssession and interest, plenty, know- ledge, desire,guilt, or their opposites, govern the genitive, as : beburftig, needing, in need be^ufet, conscious begierig (also + \\re usual than the genitive. 245. Genitive after Verbs. I. Verbs of meanings similar to those of the adjectives under the previous section take a genitive of the nearer object, as: ac^ten (also + auf with ace), ben!en (generally + an with pay attention ace), think bebiirfen, need gebenlen, mention bege^ren, desire ■ genielen (generally + ace). brauc^en, want ^ (also + ace) enjoy entbe^ren, miss. bergeffen (generally + ace), do without forget erit)dl)nen,mention ^ Also the following : l^arren (also -\- auf with ace) lac^en, laugh at wait (gotten, mock toarten (also + ace), tend. fc^onen (also + ace), spare nurse 2471 ADVERBIAL GENITIVE. 289 2. Transitive Verbs of accusing, coftdemning, acquittal, deprivation, emotion, take a genitive of the remoter ob- ject, as: an!(agen, accuse berauben, rob befc^ulbigen, accuse entbinben (also + toon), re lieve entflcibcn (also -|- toon), dis robe losf^rec^eit; acquit uberfuf)'ren, convict iiberjeu'gen (also + toon), con- vince toerfid;ern, assure ttoiirbigen, deem worthy gei^en, accuse 3. Also many reflexive and impersonal verbs (see §§215, 216, 219). 246. Adverbial Genitive. For the use of the genitive in forming adverbs from sub- stantives, see § 189, 2. The adverbial genitive may express place, time or manner, as : Sin!cr §anb, On the left hand. ©eincr 2Bege gefjen. To go one's way. iDiefcr 2:age, During these (last) days. Slbenbl, In the evening. ^[Rorgeng, In the morning, etc. SlIlcS ©rnftcS, In all seriousness. ^roc!ncn %\x^t%, Dry-shod. And particularly with 2Beife, 'manner,' after an adjec- tive, as : ©IMIid^cr 2Beife, — or: ) Fortunately (lit., in a fortunate ©lucflirf)ert»eife, manner) 247. For Interjections followed by a genitive, see § 240, 4, {a). For the genitive after prepositions, see §§ 222, 223. 290 LESSON XLI. [§§247 EXERCISE XLI. A. 1. Guten IVIori^cn, Karl; was hast du fur Eile mein Junge? 2. Guten Morgen, Herr ]i. ; es ist bald neun Uhr und ich gehe jctzt in die Schule. '5. So, hast du noch weit zn gehen? •}. Jiis nadi der Friedrichstrasze ; Herr G unser Lehrer, besteht sehr auf PunktUchkeit. 5. Steige nur em, du kannst mit mir fahren, da mein VVeg durch die Friedrichstrasze fiihrt. i;. Ich bin Ihnen sehr dankbar; das ist sehr freundlich von Ihnen. 7. Sitzt du da bequem .? 8. Ja, aber sind meine lUicher Ihnen nicht ini VVege ? «l. Nicht ini' geringsten, aber was fiir eine Menge Bucher hast du da 1 Du hast gewiss viel zu studieren. 10. Ich arbeite jetzt s -hr fleissig, da das Examen nachstens stattfmdet. W. Auf welches Examen bereitest du dich vor ? 1)1. Auf das Ein- trittsexamen der Universitat. 13. Was fiir Sprachen stu^ dierst du ? U. Ich studiere Englisch, Latein, Deutsch und Franzosisch. 15. Natiirlich studierst du auch die Mathe- matik.? 16. Wir miissen Rechnen, Algebra und Geometrie lernen. 17. Bist du ein Freund von der Mathematik, oder ziehst du die Spi-achen vor? 18. Ich lerne sehr gern Ma- thematik, besonders Algebra; mein Lehrer ghmbt, ich habe nicht viel Sprachtalent. 19. Deshalb solltest du desto fleissiger die Sprachen studieren, (auf) dass deine Bildun^^ nicht einseitig werde. 20. Mein Vater ist auch derselben Meinung. 21. Hoffentlich wirst du dein Examen gliicklich bestehen ; da sind wir aber schon bei der Schule. 22. Ich danke Ihnen vielmals fiir den freundlichen Wunsch, wie auch fiir die Fahrt. B. 1. " An honest man is the noblest work of God." 2. A pound of iron is about as large as two pounds of silver. 3. Mr. Cleveland was elected president of the United States in the year 1884. 4. I was to have taken (made) a journey to Europe this summer, but my father needs me in his busi- 247 ile, mein leun Uhr loch weit Herr G., eige nur urch die r; das ist > 8. Ja, N^icht iin da! Du tzt .«jhr 11. Auf ias Ein- len stU' sell und Mathe- ionietrie ik, Oder ern Ma- bt, ich lu desto Bildung :rselben licklich 22. Ich ie auch " 2. A silver. States iourney is biisi- 448] DATIVE. 291 ness and I shall be obliged to remain at home. 5. I have been offered five thoasand dollars for my house, and I shall sell it, for I am glad of the opportunity of getting (to get) rid of it. (). The Duke of Wellington, a great English general (^elb* l;crr), was called the " Iron Duke," as Prince Bismarck, the great German statesman, is called the "Iron Chancellor." 7. He (the former) has deserved that title not only as a soldier but as a man. 8. My neighbour, the merchant, has been accused of forgery, but 1 do not believe that he is capable of such a crime. 9. He was in^need of money, and is said to have done it on that account. 10. I hope that he will be acquitted of this accusation, for I am convinced of his innocence. 11. The discovery of America by (burd)) Columbus was perhaps the greatest undertaking of any man or of any age (^citalter). 12. Columbus was a man of great bodily as well as mental power. 1 8. His whole fleet con- sisted of three small ships, of which two were very old. 14. Have you seen you : brother the lawyer ? ] 5. Excuse [me] ; my brother is not a lawyer, but a doctor. I have not seen him since Christmas. IG. As a student he always used (^ftcc;en) to say he meant^to be (it)crbe.n) a lawyer. 17. We are tired of studying; let us go out. 18. Shall I send for (nad)) a carriage ? 19. No, it is not worth while (ber 3Jiul)e iuert), I would rather walk. 20. Unfortunately it has rained and the roads are bad. 21. We can try (the) walking, and if we get tired of it, we can take the street-cars (^ferbeba^n, sing.). LESSON XLII. SYNTAX OF THE CASES (continued).- DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 248. Dative. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object. The Dative is used to denote the person for whose advan (age or disadvantage a thing is or is done, as : 292 LESSON XLII. 248 Cr ftnt mir eiu 2M.* flcfauff. He has l.ought me a book. * 240. The Daiive is very freely used in Oerman to denote the person who lias son,e mtarst i„ an action or thin.r. This .s ca led the ethical dative or dative of interest and mu usually be left untranslated n, English, i„ which iaCag" use IS obsolete, thus: fe^ioC "s 3* ^aK- mir bic eac?.c auflcfcl^cn, I have considered the thing (for my own satisfaction). 2f)u mit ba.3 nicf;t luicber, Iton't do that again (I tell For the Aw../,., dative replacing, with the definite ar- ticle, a gemt.ve case or (with pronouns) a possessive adjective, 260. Dative after Verbs. verbs^'af ""' ''""'' "' '"'''"■'''■''' Cject of transitire er 3ie6t mir fcaS «ucf;. He gives me the book (the book to me). 2. It stands as the sole object after verbs which expre« a fersonal relation only, such as verbs of : {a) Approach or remmml, etc., as : 6e3C(^,c,., meet .ji,^,„,^ ^,3^^^,^ ntsK^cit, escape „„i,.,,( ,„_ j^,,^^ nt t,rcrf>-„, correspond to nac^fte^cn, be inferior rcn, be wanting „,^ forgcn, follow j^f^.^^,,^ ^^^^^ ip) Pleasure or displeasure, as : c^„."' ' " "7~ broken, threaten banfen, thank p,^,,^^ ^^^^^ 250l DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 2^3 flcfallen, please tnijjfal'tcn, displease gcniigen, suffice fcfjmcid^eln, flatter groUen, be angry ftcl;cn, suit, become {c) Advantage or disadvantage, as : bci[te{;cu, assist mangcln, be wanting biencn, serve nii^en, be useful t^elfen, help fc^aben, harm {d) Command, resistance and their opposites, as : befefjlcn, command troljen, defy gebicten, order h)eid)en, yield ge^Drrf)cn, obey tuiberfte'f^cn, oppose Derbieten, forbid iDiberftre'ben, resist {e) After verbs expressing possession, trust, and various other personal relations, as : anttDorten, answer glauben, believe beiftimmen, agree with fc^einen, seem ertoibern, reply trauen, trust ge^oren, belong gurebcn, encourage Also with fcin and Vrerben, expre'^:sing a state of feeling (with ju 9Jiiite expressed or understood), as : 2Bie ift S^ntn ? How do you feel ? Observe also the idiom : 2Benn bcm fo i[t, * If that is the ^se,' in which bcill is dat. neut. (/) After many verbs expressing similar relations, com- pounded with the inseparable prefixes cr-, tXii~, tier-, luibcr ; with the separable prefixes ttlt-, ttuf-, BcK etttgcgcn- nttij- tior- gu-, etc., and with adjectives, nouns or adverbial phrases, such as : (eib i\jm, be sorry ju ^eit n)erben, fall to one's tup^lrooKen, be well-disposed share ju Statten fommen, be of use bag 2Bort reben, defend 294 LESSON XLII. [§§350- Rkmarks.-!. The great majority of these verbs have become transitive in English, on account of tiie loss of dis- tmction between the dative and accusative; their construe tion ni Clerman should be carefully observed. 2. Many of the verbs under (./), (.) above take a direct object, particularly in the shape of a clause or of a neuter pronoun, as : (Sf \).M niir l>crbotcn 311 flc^cn. He has forbidden me to go. Scf; criuibcrtc, ba^ IrJ fommcn mVit. I replied that I would come. 3)Jcin i^atcr bat ti mir &cfor;ren. My father has ordered me (to do) it. For the Dative with iVr^mr Verbs, see §§ 215, 216- with Impersonai YtxhSy see §§ 217, 219. ' 2^1« Dative after Adjectives. The Dative stands after adjectives similar in meaning to the Verbs given in the foregoing section, such as : {a) Approach^ etc. : a^nlid;, similar fremb, strange fileid;, equal, like (b) Pleasure^ etc. : angenehm, pleasant gndbiij, gracious {c) Advantage, etc. : I;eilfaiu, wholesome fc^ulbig, indebted (aubfd)itl)C fiiib mir dU nvof? (iivoft gcnug), These gloves are too large (large enough) for inc. For the Dative after Prepositions, see §§ 46. 51. 252. Accusative, The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object, Time and Measure. All transitive verbs take the direct object in the accusative. Rkmark. — Many verbs that are transitive in English are in- transitive in German (see § 250, Rem. i, above), 2iHdi vice versa. 253. Double Accusative. The verb Icf)i;cn, ' to teach,' governs two accusatives, one of the person and the other of the thing ; the verb fragen, ' to ask,' takes the latter accusative only when it is a neuter pro- noun, as : ^d; iDcrbc bt(^ bic bcutf((|c ^|)ra((e Icf)ren, I shall teach you the German language. %^) tuoUte bit^ ocrnc ctltiag fragen, I should like to ask you something. Verbs of callingy etc., have a second accusative as facti- tive predicate, as : ^d; \\(xx\XKit ijn cincn ^fZarrcn, I called hi .1 a fool. Of Verbs of considering, etc., some, such as : bctvadUcn regard'; aufcf;eu, 'to look upon'; barftellen, 'to repre. t,* take z. factitive accusative with al§, as : %^ fe^c ben 9legen ale eine 2So^lt§at an, I regard the rain as a benefit. 296 LESSON XLII. m a53- Other verbs of considering, with those of choosing, etc wh.ch take a second accusative of uhis sort in English, are followed by apreposition (fur, ju) in CJerman (see Less. XLIX) 254. ACCUSATIVK AFTER INTRANSITIVE VerbS. I. Intransitive Verl. may sometimes be followed hy an accusative of a meaning akin to their own, called the ..L/. accusative, as : * ^cf; ijabc eincii frf>oncn a:roum fletraumt, I have dreamt a beautiful dream. _ 2. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative of that which is effected or produced by the action they express, as : ?ietru^ mciittc bittcre Xf^vhitn, Peter wept bitter tears 3. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative followed by an adjective, etc., as /aa/fw^ predicate, as : ^d) l)aU miff) \ttii acoeffcn, I have eaten enough (lit have eaten myself satisfied). ®a^ 5linb JDcinte firj in ben ^rjlof, The child has cried Itself to sleep. Remark. -The Accusative in all these constructions, ex- cept the last which is not used in the passive, becomes a m^i- tnative in the passive construction ; that of the thing after e^ren remains accusative; with fragen and mtxy, the ace. of the thing is not used in the passive. For the accusative after ReflexiveV^rU, see § 216- a%^r Impersonal N^xh?., see § 219 ; ^ii^r Prepositions, see §§ L ,0 - after some Adjectives, it replaces the Genitive (see §'24,' and Remarks). ^ ^ ^5' 265. Adverbial Accusative. I. The Accusative i. ^i.ed adverbially to express time (see § 184, i) and measur, .^s .c § 185, 4) ; also distance a-.d w.v .fter verbs of motion, as : "^ ng:, etc., :lish, are XLIX) i by an cognate ireamt t which ■ tears, wed by fh (lit., 5 cried ns, ex- a ?iom- r after ace. of ; after §245, e (see v after 255I ACCUSATIVE. 297 3* bin fcrj8 gutc WxUm sefo^ren, I have driven six full miles. 2BcIc^en SBcg tvcrbcn 3ie oeF^en ? Which way will you go.? The Accusative is used also in absolute constructions especially with participles, as : ' @r fam ju mir, Oen §ut in ber §anb. He came to me hat in hand. (Sr ftanb ba, bte 9rugen in bie §5^c gcri^tct He stood there [with] eyes uplifted. ' EXERCISE XLII. A. 1. Also, Sie haben sich entschlossen, uns morgen friih zu verlassen? 2. Ich muss wohl, da meine Geschaftsangelegen- heiten mir keinen langeren Aufenthalt erlauben. 3 Sie reisen naturlich mit dem zweiten Zug ab.? 4. Wissen Sie, um wie viel Uhr derselbe in B. ankommt .? 5. Ich ka.nn es Ihnen nicht ganz genau sagen, aber er kommt gegen vier Uhr fdes) Nachmittags an. 6. Das ist mir viel zu spat. Man erwartet mich schon um halb 2'A^olf auf meinem Bureau. 7. In dem Falle mfissen Sie wohl den Schnellzug nehmen, der schon um drei V-rtel auf sieben abfahrt. 8. Es lant sich nicht andern. 9. Gut ich werde Sie Punkt sechs Uhr wecken lassen. 10. Ich danke Ihnen ; das wird durchaus nicht notig sein, da ich meine Weck- uhr bei mir habe. 11. Wie viel Zeit brauchen Sie, sich anzu- kleiden? 12. Zwanzig bis fiinfundzwanzig Minuten ; aber ich werde noch mehreres einzupacken haben. 13. Dann ware es jedenfalls besser, die Weckuhr auf halb sechs zu stellen. 14 Bitte, sagen Sie mir genau, wie viel Uhr es jetzt ist ; ich furchte meme Uhr geht nach. 15. Es ist gerade neun Minuten vor elf 1 «.. 1st es moglich ! Dann geht meine Uhr ja vor, anstatt nach oiiid Sic gewiss, dass Ihre Uhr richtig geht? 17. Jawohl • ich habe sie heute nach der Stadtuhr gestellt. 18. Es wird spat • 298 LESSON XLII. [§§ 255- Ich muss mich schlafen legen, 11m morgen friih aufstehen zu konnen. li). Also machen wir es auf diese Weise : Sie stehen um halb sechs auf, urn fiinf Minuten nach sechs friihstiicken Sie, um funfundzwanzig Minuten nach sechs wird der Wagen vor- fahren und in zehn Minuten sind Sie auf dem Bahnhofe. Dann haben Sie noch zehn Minuten librig, um Ihr Billet' zu losen und Ihr Gepiick einschreiben zu lassen. Jetzt, gute Nacht ! 20. Gute Nacht, schlafen Sie wohl ! B. 1. Do not trust those who flatter you. 2. Do not be- lieve them, for flatterers are liars. 3. I always considered my father as my truest friend. 4. The general commands the sol- diers : the soldiers obey the general. 5. What is^the_name of the gentleman whom we have just met ? His name has escaped me. (5. You should never forget to thank those who help you. 7. How does this hat, which I bought myself yester- day, please you ? 8. It does not become you very well ; it is too large for you. 1). When I was going to the railway-station, a boy met me and gave me a telegram. 10. May I ask you if Mr. H. is related to you ? 11. He resembles me very much, but he is not related to me. 1;2. Mr. B. has been ordered, on account of ill-he ilth, to go to a warmer climate. He has been forbidden to pass the winter in the North. 1 3. How long does he remain absent .? 14. He is to remain absent at least four months. 15. Last week I ordered (myself) an overcoat at the tailor's, which he was to bring me to-day. l(i The Niagara Falls are considered (one considers, etc.) as one of the greatest wonders^of^the^world. 17. People say of one who sleeps very soundly that he sleeps the sleep of the righteous. 18. May I ask you to assist me, or at least to advise me.? 19. I should be very glad to be able to help you. '20 1 am in need of money, and should not like to ask any one else for it. 257] THE PRESENT. 299 LESSON XLIII. THE INDICATIVE MOOD:-SYNTAX OF ITS TENSES. 256. The Indicative is the mood of reality and direct statement. As the tenses are used with reference to time in the Indicative only, their proper use is given here. ^^'7* The Present. The Present Tense answers to all the English forms of that tense (e. g., id; lobe = I praise, am praismg, do praise), and is used : 1. To denote action now going on, as : ^a^5 Rinh ftjliift. The child is sleeping (now). 2. To state a general fact or custom, as : S)er ©c^nee ift Wd% The snow is white. ^tx Dc^fe frip (sJra^, The ox eats grass. 3. For the imperfect in historical narrative, to give greater vividness, as : ©efc^tDtnb 5cBt er einen etein auf unb tuirft benfelben bem §unbe, ber if)n beif^en mia, an ben Ab^f, Quickly he picks up a stone, and throws it at the dog, who is about to attack him. 4. For the English perfect (as in French), when the action or state continues in the present, the past beifig inferred and the present alone expressed, as : 2l>ie lange ift cr [rf;on !ranf ? How long has he been ill .? (N. B. — He is still ill.) S* OP^P f^'it ac^t %z^,y^^\\ luteber gur @c6ule, I have been going to school again for the last week (and am still going). Note. This construction is very common w fcit. 300 LESSON XTJII. (§§257- 5. For the future very commonly, where no ambiguity would arise, particularly to replace the English form ' am going to,' as: ^c^ fj^rctfic moreen einen 33ricf an meincn SSater, I am going to write a letter to my father to-morrow. 258. Tin: Imperfect. The Imperfect is used : 1. As the historical {narrative^ preterite, when an event is told in connection with others, as : ^m 3(nfang f^uf ©ott .s>imincl iinb Grbc, unb 3l(lc^5 mar li)ii[tc unb Iccr u. f. \q., And in the beginning God cre- ated heaven and earth, and all was waste and void, etc. 2. To denote customary, continued or contempo- raneous action, replacing the English forms * was doing/ 'used to do,' as: @r ging jeben ^ag lun bier Uf)r (xv&, He used to go out every day at four o'clock. 3lUr juljrcn an bcv 5lirdie ijorbei, al§ bie Uf>r elf fr^Iufl, We were driving past the church, as the clock struck eleven. 259. The Perfect. 1. The Perfect indicates a past event as complete and no longer continuing, thus : ^d> ^ttBc gclcbt imb gcUcBct, I have lived and bved (and both my life and my love are ended). 2. The Perfect is used of an event as a separate and independent fact, simply asserted as true without refeience to any other, ns : (^3ott ^at bic Selt crjrfinffcn, God created the v^orld ; 26l] THE PERFECT. 301 but in the sentence : ©ott frjuf bic 2BeIt in [cc^^ 2aQcn unb ru^tc am fiebenten, God created the world in six days, and rested on the seventh, the imperfect is used, because the two events are connected. 3. The Perfect is used (apart from historical narrative), in preference to the Imperfect, of an event which has not been witnessed or participated in by the speaker, as : ©eftern ift ein Hinb crtrunfen {Pcrf.), A child was drowned yesterday ; — but : ©efterncrtranf {Impf.) ein ^inb, al^ id; am Ufcr ftanb, A child was drowned yesterday, when I was stand- ing on the shore. . Remark. — This distinction between the use of the Perfect and Imperfect is not accurately observed, but it is always better to render the English forms ' was doing,' 'used to do,' by the Imperfect. 4. The Perfect replaces the Future-Perfect, as the Present does the Future, as : Sc^ iuerbe !ommen, fobalb id; meine ©efd^afte obgcmor^t ^ok, I shall come, as soon as I have (i. e., shall have) finished my business. ^®^' The Pluperfect. • The Pluperfect is used, as in English, of a past action •mpleted before another was begun, thus : Gr ^nttc feine STufgabe tioacnbct c^c Sie famen. He had finished his exercise, before you came. ^^1* The Future. The Future Is used ; X. Of an action about to take place, as : Unfer SSater ttiirb un§ loficn, Our father will praise us. 302 LESSON XLIII. [§§261- 2. To denote probability or supposition, as : (S§ mirb mciit ^i^rubcr fciii, bcr aui^efummcu i[t. It is probably my brother who has arrived. 262. The Future-Perfect. The Future-Perfect is the Perfect in the Future, and expresses probability even more frequently than the simple Future, as : ^er 33nef tuirb fc^on ge[tern gcfommcn jcin. The letter probably arrived yesterday. EXERCISE XLIII. A. 1. Diese Hitze ist unertraglich ; ich glaube, nie einen so heissen Sommer erlebt zu haben. 2. Und wie schwiil es ist ! Sieht es nicht sehr nach Regen aus ? 3. Richtig, da sind schon die ersten Regentropfen, und ich meine, vor einigen Minuten Donner in der Feme gehort zu haben. 4. Das macht mir einen Stri^h durch die Rechrung. Bei diesem Wetter kann ich unmoglich zur Stadt gehen. 5. Fiir's Erste allerdings nicht, aber das Gewitter wird nicht lange anhalten. 6. Das ist ein vvahrer Platzregen ; so ein Regen ist dem Lande sehr notig. 7. Ja, ^\ ir haben diesen Sommer iiberhaupt sehr wenig Regen gehabt, aber vorigen Winter desto mehr Schnee. 8. Horen Sie, das war ein Knall ! 9. Ja, und wie schnell der Donner auf den Bhtz folgte ! Furchten Sie sich vor dem Blitze? 10. Seitdem es voriges Jah" ixi unserer Nahe eingeschlagen hat, bin icn ein wenig angstUch. ] 1. Das glaube ich schon, aber sehen Sie doch, jetzt hagelt es noch sogar! 1;>. Das braucht das Land gewiss nicht, aber die Hagelkorner sind nicht grosz genug, um viel Schaden anzuriciiten. 13. Es fancrt schon an. sich aufzuhellen ; das schhmmstfi ist vorbei. 14. Wie sich die Luft abgekiihlt hat ! 15. Und wie schnell ! Das ist oft der Fall hier zu Lande. 16. Jawohl; 5. The Surjunctive in Indirect Statements. The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Statements or Quotations (^see also § 87), i. e., when the words used are quoted in substance only, and not as they were spoken, espe- cially after a verb in the principal clause signifying : {a) Imparting of information (statement, report, con- fession, reminding, etc.), as: aitttuortcn, answer crjaf^lcn, relate behauptcn, assert ctcftcBcn, confess beric^ten, report jageit, say 2661 SUHJLJNCTIVK IN INDIRECT STATKMKNTS. 305 con- (^) Apf^n'hcnsiofi, as : bcnfcn, th>iiU cvinncvn (rell.), remember fu()lcn, feel (;5ren, hear (c) CoHtemplation with fiird^tcn, fear frcucn (rell.), rejoice niaubcn, believe ()offcn, hope (//) Re(]ucst, command ^ befcl^lcn, command bitten, ask crmal)nen, admonish mcincn, be of opinion mcrfcu, observe fcfjHcfKMi, conclude luiffcn, know various emotions, as : h)imbcrn (refl.), wonder Juitufiten, wish jtueifcln, doubt advice, etc., as : raten, advise bcrlangcn, demand 266. The Tensk in Indirect Statements. 7'he verb of the Indirect Statement is, as a rule, in the sanse tense as it would have, if the statement were made dijf:ctly (see § 87, 2), i. e., the tense of the Indirect Statement is the same as that of the Direct. Remarks. — i. An Indirect Statement is always a subordi- nate clause. 2. The conjunction ba^ may be omitted in such clauses, which will then have the construction of a principal se?itence (i. e., verb second ; see § 87, 3). 3. The Indicative may replace the Subjunctive in Indirect Statements, when the speaker wishes to represent his own belief in the correctness of the statement, as : ^d; I^abc ge(;bvt, bajj mciu ^ruber \x(xxd i(i, I have heard that my brother is ill {and he is ill). ©ie mujtc, \}a^ ber Spiegel Jeine Unmat^r^eit \^X(i^, unb merlte, ba^ ber ^dger fie betrogen jatte, etc. (Grimm, 3o6 LESSON XLIV. 266- 1 Sneeii'iffc/irn, p. 52, I. i), She knew that the mirror did not tell a lie, and saw that the huntsman had deceived her {an ii lie had deceived her). But the Subjunctive is used, when the truth of the state- ment is not vouched for, or when any doubt is cast upon it, as ; %(x^ bo^baftc SSeib <\\\ ftc. auf imb mdntc, fie l^attc 0nccmittd;cib5 l^uiuic unb Scbcr ot'oeijon {ibid., p. 49, 1. 8), The malicious woman devoured them, and thought she had eaten Sneewittchen's lung and liver (whereas she had not eaten them). 4. The tense of the Indirect Statement does not depend on that of the principal clause, and the sequence of tenses ^\\\Q\i is observed in English is not found in German, as : {Engl.) He said he was not ill. {Germ.) @r facjtc, cr fci nic^t !ranf. Notes. — i. The Subjunctive is unusual after the verbs under (3) and (c) in the previous section (except pvcn), if the principal clause has a present tense. 2. The rule as to tense is not always strictly observed, the tense used being sometimes determined by the want of distinctive subjunctive forms. Thus in the following sentence two different tenses are used : 5lud) fd)Io(3 cv, c8 miiffc bie earje Dom @(a§mdnnlehi nid)t \t\)x bcfainit fciii, nub biii'epnid) mit^tfitnur tuentgcn)i[fcn(HAUFF, Das kalte Herz, p. 8, 1. 7), Further, he concluded that the legend of the Glass-manikin could not be very well known, and only a few people could know the verse. 3. After an Impf. in the principal clause, the Subjunctive is usual in the Indirect Statement, except as in the second exami)le under Kemark 3, above. 4. The verb of the principal sentence sometimes remains unexpressed, or is replaced by a noun of kindred meaning, as : (Sr X\z% mid) abmcifen, tuetl ev franf fef, He refused to see me, because {as he asserted) he was ill. 266- that the luntsinan he state- ast upon fic mtt (/., p. 49, em, and mg and ;pend on which is 367I HYPOTHETICAL PERIODS. 307 er (6) and use has a mse used ive forms. nid)t fe^r t (Hauff, that the lown, and usual in emark 3, xpressed, ) see me, 3d) (icf fo fd)iicU \\)k niogliri), am J^urr^t, id) moiitt jit fpcit foiii. men, I ran as quickly as possible, from fear that I might come too late. 55o« f^dttt id) flcfant? (Do you mean to say that) I said that? This last construction is very frequent In German, to express empha- tically a doubt as to the truth of a statement. 267. The Subjunctive and Conditional in Hypothetical Periods. Example of a Hypothetical Period: If I had followed your advice, I should have been happy. 1. The above sentence consists of two parts. Of these the one expresses a condition, conceived, in this instance, as unreal or impossible, viz. : If I had followed your advice {which I did not^\ the other expresses a result, also unreal or unrealized, whirh would have followed, had the condition been realized, viz. : I should have been happy {which I am not). 2. In both parts of the above period (in the condition and .n the result), the verb is in a past tense (Impf. or Plupf.) of the Subjunctive Mood, as : SBenn ic^ ^^ren gffat Bcfolgt ^attc (Plupf. Subj.), fo ttiin \^ gliidiid; gctucfcn (Plupf. Subj.). Remarks. — I. Either of the two clauses may stand first; thus, the sentence given above may have the form : ^c^ h)are glu^Iic^ geirefen, it)cnn u. f. U). 2. The conjunction juenn may be omitted, especially when the condition precedes the result, in which case the verb will begin the sentence, as : giittc \^ 3()ren ISi^i befolgt, fo todre ic^ glucffic^. 3o8 LESSON XLIV. f"(2'7 3. If the result clause follows the condilional clause it., usually .ntroduced l,v the particle fo, and a;,aa,. when ,„ ,m Js^o..t.ed m the preceding conditional clause Jee S 5c, and Suti ■^''' *=°"''"'°"»' t«"«" '"''y rep-ace the Impf. and .'lupf. Subj. m the apodosis, result or conclusion onh- as • 2Benn ic§ S^rcn Slat bcfolgt Ijattc, fo wUrbe ic^ gludli* gcucfen fciit. ' • K^\ *u^ condition is stated without its unreality bein- .mphed, the verb is in the Pres., Perf., or Fut. mJhT^:. ■ Senn er immi, fo luetbe ic^ fortge^eu. If he comes, I Shall go away. •as'if^Zs?"" ""^ *" '""■°'^"'''' •'>""«"'«"« or «I8 ,i, et fie^t aug. Bis locnn (oi) et trani wate. He looks as It he were ill. (Sr fiefit a\i^, ale hjorc cr tranf. 268. Other Uses of the Subjunctive. 1. The Pres Subjunctive replaces the missing persons (1 and 3.) of the Imperative Mood, the subject bein<. then put after the verb, except in the 3. person, where it m^y al precede, unless the pron. eie is used for the 2. person as • @c^c er (or er Gef)e) nac^ ^an\t, Let him go home a wis Jt .'"''''' "' '''"^^* Subjunctive are used to express 2Bare ic^ Bei g^nen ! Would that I were with you ! Note. .-This is really an elliptical conditional c\zn^^, with the result unexpressed ; the full form may be supplied thus : Sore ic^ bet 3i,nen, (fo ttjcire id^ gluda^). nafi? a68] USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 309 use, It ij >en jucun i 59> and id I'lupf. ty being ^/'?v, as : )mes, I r 0(8 oli, ooks as , and the persons g then ay also , as : Dme. express ou ! e result 3. The Subjunctive is used in clauses expressing purpose^ with the conjunctions baf^, auf ba^, bamit, as: 6r eilte, bn^ (auf bafe, bamit) or ,^uv rcd>tcn 3^tt onfiimc, He hastened, (in order) that he might arrive in good time. 4. It is also used after a negative or an indefinite relative, as : ^ier ift mcmonb, bev mid) nidU fcnnte, There is nobody here, who does not know me. ^d; luerbe eg \kj\xxK, itJOg ttur^ bai?on fommen moflc, I shall do it, no matter what may come of it. Note. — The Indicative is also admissible in these constructions. 5. The Impf. Subjunctive is sometimes used to express possibility y as : %oA gingC tt)of)I, That might (possibly) do. 3^ bar^tc, ba§ hiarc gut, I should think that might be good ; and especially with the Modal Auxiliaries, as : ^a§ miit^tc (fiinntc, biirftc) tt)af)r fein. That may (pos- sibly) be true. 6. Observe the following idiom : 2Bte bcm audj) [ei. However that may be. EXERCISE XLIV. A. 1. Teh habe gehort, dass Sie Ihr Haus verkauft haben ; ist das wahr ? 2. Ja, meine alte Wohnung gefiel mir nicht mehr. 3. Wie kommt das ? Ihr Haus schien mir immer eine sehr elegante und bequeme Wohnung zu sein. 4. Ein besse- res lasst sicli nicht leicht finden; allein, seit(dem) die vielen Fabriken in der Nahe gebaut worden sind, gefallt mir die Umge'bung nicht mehr. 5. Das kann ich mir schon denken. Der Rauch von den Fabriken muss sehr unangenehm sein. 6. Das ist nicht das Schlimmste ; das fortwahrende Gerausch 310 LESSON XLIV. [SS>e8- bnngt cncn oft zum Vcrzweifeln. 7. Haben Sie ein andcres H.1US geknuft ? H. Nein, vorlaufig habe ich ,nir ein Haus in der Sch,Ilor.strasze gemietet. sobald id, aber einen passenden nauplatz f,„don kann. werde ici, bauen. !». Haben Sie sich sclion nach einem lianplatz umgeselien? lo. id, habe die ganze Stadt durchsud,t, aber ohne Erfolg. II. Sie mUssen sehr scliwer /u befriedigen sein. V>. Das gemde nid,t, nur bestehe ,ch auf dre. liedingungen : Frische Luft, dne ruhige btrasze und eine schone Aussicht. i;i. Warum bauen Flusses? 14. Daran habe ich schon gedacht, nur sind mir die re,se ein vvenig zu hoch. 15. Das wHrde «;V/. nicht abl,alten, so lange ich nur bekanie, was ich wiinschte. 1 fi Es w,rd m.r wohl nichts iibr.g l,Ieiben, als mich dore anzukaufen. 17. he..bsicht,gen S.e, mit Backstcin oder mit Quaderstein zu bauen? 18. Ich muss das erst mit meinem Architekten besprechen. 1<.. Welchen Architekten haben Sie gewahlt.^ ^0. Herrn Kalk, der den I'lan meines alien Hauses ent- worfen hat. 21. Dann bekommen Sie jedenfalls ein gutes Haus. Ich wiinsche Ihnen GlUck zu Ihrem Unternehmen. ^4. Danke vielmals. ^.1. An old beggar-man said: "When I was youn^r I could have worked if I had wished (M,n), and now I should be glad to work, if I could, but I cannot. Alas ! had I only been more industrious." 2. A certain French king is said to have died of hunger, for fear that he might be poisoned. 3 I wish my house were not so far from yours. 4. I too • if the way were not so long, we could visit each other oftener 5. We were astonished to see Mr. B. on the street this mornmg, as we thought he was still in England (J They say he mtended to remain three months longer in En-land but that he was obhged to come home on account of business matters. 7. What did the gentlemnn wh-»r — M-f --^ ] [§§ 208- a69j THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 3" 1 anderes Haus in iissenden Sie sich fiabe die rnUssen icht, nur le ruhige J bauen seit des iind mir <:h nicht i6. Es ikaufen. stein zu litekten ewahlt ? >es ent- n gutes ehnien. 5ung, I should I only said to i. 3. I if the iftener. 2t this They igland, isiness let ask you ? He asked me how far it was to the town-hall. 8. The messenger asserted that he could not wait longer because he had no time, but I believe it was for (au^ + dat.) another reason. !>. A certain gentleman wanted to set his watch, and asked his servant what o'clock it was. 10. The servant answered that he had no watch, but that he had seen a sun-dial in the neighbour's garden. 11. To^this the gentleman replied absent-mindedly: "Go immediately and ask him for permission to bring it up here." 12. Do you believe thu. tiie (German language is as difficult as the French? l.'i. When I began to study German, I thought it was not so difficult as French, but now I believe otherwise. 14. I should be very sorry, if the news were true which I heard this morning. 15. The boys must not skate to-day ; the ice is too thin, and they might break through and be drowned. Hi. Please tell me who translated Shake- speare's works into German. 17. Would it be worth while to take a carriage to drive to the bank ? No, I do not think so. 18. He said that of us ! I should never have believed it. H). I asked the bookseller: "Have you Schiller's works.?" He answered : " \ have not_a single copy of them left. 20. I asked the bookseller if he had Schiller's works, and he answered that he had not^a single copy of them left. LESSON XLV. THE IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE MOODS. 269. ' THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. The Imperative expresses a coimnand and corresponds precisely to the English Imperative. The Imperative proper occurs only in the 2. person, the otiier persons being supplied by the Pres. Subjunctive (see § 26^;, i, above). X.' 3^2 LESSON XLV. [§§269- Remarks. — 1. The pronoun of the 2. Pers. is only ex- pressed for the sake of emphasis or contrast, as : ©inge bu. Do jou sing, ©e^t ijr, h)ir iDerben bleiben, Vou go, we shall remain. Note. — The pronoun, if expressed, always /o//ows the verb, as above. 2. Where no definite person is addressed (e. g., when an author is address'ng his readers), man should be used with the Pres. Subj., as : 9Kttn benfe fic^ meinen ©c^recfen. Imagine my fright. 3- The Modal Auxiliaries [oaen, tniiffen, laffen are used with imperative force, as : ®u fottft nic^t toten. Thou shalt not k @r muf^ fc^reiben. He must write. Cog (lagt, laffen ©ic) ung cjefjcn. Let us go. 4. The Present and Future Indicative are sometimes used with emphatic imperative force, as : ^u hUibfi ^ier ! You are to stay here ! ®ie mcrbcn bie ©iite ^oficn, morgen fritfjcr §u fommen, ■ You will have the goodness to come earlier to-morrow! 5. The Past Participle and Infinitive are also used in ex- clamatory clauses with the force of an Imperative, as : Sugcfoircn, ^utf c^er ! Drive on, coachman ! ©tiir ftc^cn ! Stand still ! ©infieigcn! All aboard! 6. In elliptical and exclamatory clauses a command is fre- quently expressed by an adverbial prefix or prepositional phrase, without a verb, as : 5rtf(J ouf ! tameraben, oufg «?fcrb ! ttufg ^fcrb ! Up ! comrades, to horse ; to'horse ! (Schiller.) 3)rauf unb bran ! Up and at them ! #er 311 mir I (Come) hitner to me ! (Goethe, J^ausf.) \/ [§§269- only ex« remain. as above, vhen an sed with ight. sed with VO THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT JU. 313 Bs used ommen, sorrow. in ex- is fre- itional LLER.) ^aust.) THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 2 70. The Infinitive as Substantive. The Infinitive is a verbal substantive, and any infinitive may be used as a substantive of the neuter gender, declined after the Maht Model (§ 16). Remarks. — I. The tnfin. as Subst. indicates action, as: ^a^Sefen, ' (the act of) reading,'— but: gute Sectiire, ^good reading, good literature.* 2. Some Infinitives have become substantives entirely, as : ba§ Seben, life ; bag ©ntfe^en, horror. 3. The Infinitive, either with or without ju, is often used as subject of a verb, and as such may have an object by virtue of its verbal character, as : ©ute Jreunbe (ju) ^akn ift 6effer aU reic^ (ju) fein. 271. The Infinitive without m. The Infinitive without ju follows : {a) The Modal Auxiliaries (see Lesson XXXIV); also toerben in the formation of the future tense. {b) The following verbs : blei6en, remain taffen, let, allow, permit finben, find lefjren, teach ^ei^en, order, bid lernen, learn ^elfen, help mac^en, make ^oren, hear fe^en, see and, in certain phrases, i^aben, as : Tsc^ ^abe nic^t i)iel @elb auf ber '^awi liegen, I have not much money lying in the bank. ^.^ ,.,i... yvi^vU diivi vtixci verbs ot motion in such phrases as frajieren ge^en, reiten, fasten, ' to go for a walk, ride, drive ' ; 21 314 LESSON XLV. [§§271- fc^Iafen gefjen, 'to go to bed' (not = 'go to sleep,' which is einfd;Iafcn), etc. (d) As predicative subject, with beif^en, and as object with ncnncn, ^cif^en, as : ®a^ f}ci^t fcf)ne(l fo^rcn. That is quick driving. ^a§ nennc (bci^c) id; fd)Iec&t aitfttiigcn, I call that be- ginning badly. Note. — The Past Participle is also admissible in this construction; see § 281, 6, below. Remarks. — i. After luiOen, Hcibcii, finben, f)i3ren, feben, gc^cn, in the constructions given above, the German Infin. corresponds to a Present Participle in English, as : (5r blieb ftcjcn, He remained standing, etc. 2. The verbs under (/;), except bleiben and l;eiJ3en, also admit of a ba§ clause after them, as : ^d) babe gebort (gefel;cn), bnjj er angefommen fei, I have heard that he is come. 3. The verbs {;elfen, Ief)ren, lernen also take an Infin. with jtt after them, as : 3d; '\)QiSiz gelernt, ^u Gef)ord)en, I have learnt to obey. 4. For the use of the Infin. for the P. Part, with these verbs, see § 199. Note. — The verbs f)c(fen, lcf)reit, lerncii do not substitute the Infin. for the P. Part, when followed by an Infin. with ju (see Rem. 3, above, and example). . 5. For the Infin. with passive sense after laffen, see § 200,. 7 (r), Note. 272. The Infinitive with gu. The Infinitive with ju is used after other verbs, such as : {a) Those implying something to be attained, done, or lejl undone^ as : 272] THE INFINITIVE WITH JU, 315 anfangen, ) . 6eginnen, I ^"^^" berfuc^en, J ^^ unterneF) men, undertake Derbieten, forbid h)agen, venture hjarnen, warn h)un[d;en, wish befe^Ien, command bitten, beg erfauben, allow fiirc^ten, fear l^offen, hope raten, advise (^) Tnose implying a suspe^ision of judgment, as : befc^ulbigen, accuse fc^einen, seem eiubUben (refl.), imagine fc^meic^eln (refl.), flatter one's glauben, believe self, leugnen, deny {c) The se indicating various states of mind, as • bereuen repent neb [ein, be acceptable (be fmien (impers.), ) .^.^^ glad) freuen (refl.), I jeib [ein (t^un), be unaccept- able (be sorry) Remarks— I. With most of these verbs the Infinitive may be replaced by a bajj clause, and ..../ be so replaced unless the subject of the action in the dependent clause is either subject or direct object of the principal clause, as : Gr gtaubt, febr gefc^icft ju fcin, He believes himself to be very clever ; — or : ©r gtaubt, i)ttg er fe^r ge[d;icft ift. ©r ^offte, 3u fommen. He hoped to come ; — but : ^J^ ^offte, ba§ fein SSater !ommen hjerbe, (see § 26c o He hoped that his father would come. ' @g i\l when is (ioUcn) he to come here? 23. We have had -■.- good^fortunc to shoot three hares. 24. Some people would rather die than beg. LESSON XLVI. THE INFINITIVE MOOD (continued). 273. Infinitive of Purpose. The Infinitive with ^u is used to express purpose, as : 9Jicin J-rcunb !am, mid; gu marncn. My friend came to warn me. Remarks. — i. The Infin. expressing purpose is generally governed by the preposition um (see § 276, i, below), which begins the clause, as : ^d; fomme, um Sic nac^ §aufe 511 Bvingcn, I come to fetch you home. 2. An Infin. clause with ju is always preceded by a comma in German. 3. This Infin. is also used, with or without 311, after adjec- tives preceded by Jil, ' too,' or gcnug, ' enough,' as : ^d) it)ar ju miibc, (um) au^c3ct;en ju fiiuucu, I was too tired to be able to go out. ©V i[t tcid; gcuui^, (um) icicle 'J)iener batten ju Xmsrw, He is rich enough to keep many servants. [§§ 273- already sell or to k to Mr. am in a lop of G. 22. Yes. s (iot(cn) )rtune to :han beg. 875] INFINITIVE OF PURPOSE. is: came to ;enerally '), which : to fetch . comma ;r adjec- was too fiinirit, 319 274. The Infinitive after Substantives. The Infinitive with ju is used after substantives, nouns and adjecuves, akin to the verbs in § .73, to express purpose, m ^aU 8ufJ, cincn Qpa^kxQanQ ^u madjen, I have a mind to take a walk. %^\)^ii^ fcinc Scit mic^ mi^ if;m umjufclicn, I had no time to look after him. ©r ift ftet^ krcit ben ^frmen ju Ijcrfcn, He is always ready to help the poor. 275. The Accusative with the Infinitive. mo'Hern ""p''"'"' ."'' ''' '"'"^^^^" ^^ inadmissible in modern German; hence verbs denoting statement, know- ledge, perception, etc., must be followed by a boft clause, as : {E7igl) I know him to be a good man, {Germ) ^6) \q^x% baft cr ein outer 9}hnn i|l. {E?igi:) I perceived her to be inattentive {Germ) ^d; merfte, ^^^ ftc unaufincrffam mir. ^ Remarks. - i. in such sentences as those in the examples given m the above section, the passive construction with the Infin. IS also madmissible in German except impersonally, as : {Engl) He is known to be a good man {Germ) mm tocii ba§ cr mx outer mm ift; -or • ^^ ift befannt, baft cr u. f. lu. 2. Observe the different relations of the accusatives in the fcjliowing sentences : 320 LESSON XLVI. [§§275- {E?igl.) I begged him {obj. of * begged ') to come, {Germ.) ^c^ bat t^n ju fommen. {Engl.) I wish to see him {ohj. of * see '), {Germ.) ^d; h)unfd;e, t^n ju [eF^en. (^«^/.) I wish him {subj. of * come ') to come, {Germ.) ^c^ iDunfd^e, ba^ cr fommc. 3. After glauben, the Infin. is admissible in German, but not in English, when the subject of the action is the same in both clauses, as : {Germ.) ^c^ cjlaubte, redfit ge^ort ju ^ahtn, {Engl.) I believed that I had heard aright. When, on the contrary, the subjects are different, the Infin. (with accus.) is admissible in English, but not in German, as; {Engl.) I believe him to be an honest man, {Germ.) 3c^ cjtaube, bag cr ein el^rlic^er 50^enfc^ t|!. 4. The English Infin. in objectiv indirect questions is unusual in German, and should be replaced by a finite clause, as : {Engl.) He did not know where to go, {Germ.) @r tt)u|te nic^t, too^in er geJjen folltc. {Engl.) He told me what to do, {Germ.) (gr fagtc mir, trag ic§ t^un fotttc. 276. The Infinitive governed by Prepositions. I. Only three prepositions can govern an infinitive (with gu) directly, viz.: uvx, 'in order,' ojne, 'without,' and (on)Ptttt ' instead of,' as : ©r fam, urn mic^ bon btefcm Unfatt ju fietttt^niSttgcn, He came, in order to inform me of this accident. I could not look at him, without laugh/«^ heartily. 277] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 32 1 9lnfla^t mic^ cjebulbicj aujuF^orcn, unterbrad; er mid) bc[tdnbig, Instead of listen///^ to me patiently, he kept constantly interrupting me. Remarks. — i. Observe that in each of these examples the preposition stands at the beginning of the clause, the Infini- tive at the end^ with the words dependent on the Infinitive between. 2. The Infinitive after obrtc and (an)ftatt may be replaced by a ba§ clause. This is always the case when the subject of the action is different in the two clauses (compare § 224, 2, b^ Rem.). Thus we may say : Sc^ fuc^te borbeisufommen, ot?ne gefe^en ju tticrbcn (or : o^ne ba^ ic^ gefe^en hjurbe), I tried to go past without being seen ; but we must say : ^d^ fudflte borbeigufommen, o^ne bag man mid5> fo^, I tried to go past without any otie^s seeing me, because the subjects of the two clauses are different. 277. With other prepositions, the Infinitive or btt§ clause is represented in the principal clause by the adverb ba pre- fixed to the preposition, as : %^ begniigte mic^ bttmit, i^n meine Unjufriebenljeit mer!en Jtt loifcit, I was contented with showing him my dissatisfaction. SSir Derlaffen un§ borauf, ba§ ©ie fommen, We rely on your coming. 3c^ !onnte if)n nic^t btttan ber^tnbern, au^^ugc^cn, I could not prevent him from going out (or : his going out). @r ioar eiferfiic^tig borauf, bafe tuir eingelaben hjorben hJaren, He was jealous of our having been invited. 322 LESSON XLVI. a77- bannc^, ©ie itiicbcrjujc^cu. ong to 2Bir fc^ncn uno see you again (Sx finbct ^i^cirtnuflcu boraii, tinbcr ju ntdtn, He finds pleasure in teasing children. ©ie drc^erte fid; boriidcr, baft Juii [o fpdt tamen, She was angry at our coming so late. Remarks. — I. The preposition 'of ' is often omitted, as: SDic md)xi. Teh zich^ die Gc-gc jedem andern Instrumenle vor. hi. Spicit Ihr ahcstcr l^ruder nicht die Geige? 17. Ncin, aber er spicit die Klote und beglei.^et mich oft, wenn ich auf dem Klavier sj)iele. 18. Hire Familie .St uberhaupt sehr musikalisch. ]<,. Ja wohl, wir spielen fast al e mehr Oder weniger. 20. Selbst Jhre kleinen Geschwister? jl. Ja, Mane spielt die Guitarre, Anna die Geige und Frie- dricb nimmt seit einigen Monaten Stunden auf dem Violon. cU 2:2. W.ssen Sie, ob viel fur das Waisenhaus iihrig bleibt, nach- dem alle Kosten bestritten sind? till Etwa flinf hundert inaler, doch beabsichtigt man, ein zweites Konzert im Laufe des Wmters far denselben Zvveck zu gebcn. B. h Let us (indef.) not return evil for evil. 2. Do what IS right, let It cost what it may. 3. The eighth command- ment says that we are not to steal. 4. He was punished for havmg neglected his duty. .5. The teacher told us we should close our books, we had read enough for the present. u ^^^^'r ^°'' ^^^'''^' ^""^ ^^^^ y°"" ^i"'« brother your Chair. 7. In German they say of one who buys anythin- without seeing it that he buys a cat in a bag. 8. Do you care to go for a drive with us ? 9. No, thank you. Do you ride mxjn); I prefer to walk. 10. Who has left these books Ivinr on the table .Ml. John ; and he says he forgot to take them up. 1^. Bid him carry them up immediately into the study, and then let him come down here. 13. Every one thought Mr. N. to be a rich man, but he failed (perf.) lately. 14. I have not ^ single pen fit to write with, and I have a dozen letters to >-rite 15. Do not allowyourself to be disturbed by my com- ing ; do not stop writing. ] 6. The beggar, of whom we were speaking m another exercise, passed his youth in idling instead of working. 17. Little Frederick had the misfortune to break an arm while skating, and he was obliged to remain lying in bed a week. 18. Alfred the Great divided the day s8o] THE PARTICIPLES. 325 into three parts : one part was devoted to business, the second to reading, praying rnd studying, and the third to eating, sleeping and pleasure. 1 9. We wished our friends to come in, but they had no time. tiO. I am glad to have made your acquaintance, ii I . If you go hunting without your father knowing it, he will be very nuich displeased. 22. Our teacher used to insist on our writing a German exercise every day, pnd it was impossible for us to neglect this duty without his knowing it. 23. Before going home we must go to visit your old friend L. If you went away without his seeing you, he would be very sorry. 21. We heard some one coming behind us on the street, and we remained standing at the corner to see who it was. 25. Our old neighbour has three sons, but instead of their supporting him, he is obliged to support them. Is he not very much to be pitied ? LESSON XLVIL THE PARTICIPLES. 279. The Participles are properly Verbal Adjectives, and their uses and constructions are those of Adjectives. There are three Participles, the Present, the Past and the Tuture- Passive or Gerundive. The English compound Perfect Par- ticiple (e. g., * having praised '; has no corresponding form in German, and must be rendered by a clause (see § 284, below). 280. The Present Participle. The Present Participle has active force, and, like the Present Indie, marks a present or continuing state or action, the substantive which it qualifies being the subject of the action, as : I 326 LESSON XLVII. [§§ 280 '^a^ Wkfcnbe ilinb.. The sleeping child (= 'the child that sleeps '). @ine l;aarftrflu!icnbc G5efd;ic^te, A story that makes one's hair stand on end. The Present Participle is for the most part used only attnhuttvely, as in the above examples. It is used predica- tively only : {a) When it is a true adjective in function, without any idea of time^ as : eeine ^ranf^cit ift mrf;t ficbfutcnb. His illness is not serious. 3)ie ©d)onf)eit biefer Sanb^afl ift cntjurfcnb. The beauty of this landscape is enchanting (1. e., delightful). {h) In apposition with the subject (sometimes also with the direct object) of the sentence in which it occurs, when the action of the Participle is ^multaneous with that of the principal verb, as : ©id; fcfmea m6^ mir umttJcnbenb, fa^ er mtr in§ ©efic^t, Turning quickly around, he looked into my face. ' Gprriitcnb fd;lu3 fie bie 2(ugen nieber, Blushing she dropped her eyes. gjrcifcnb mi Did fc^-.ijnen ^eben S^rer Sdnber 3Sert unb ^aU, ©r^,en bietc bcutfc^e giirften (Sinft ju SBonn^ tm ) fiir bie ^ufunft gcforgt That is (I call that) caring for the future. 7. It also replaces an Infinitive in such phrases as the following : Scf; mufj fort ! Sicbcr F)ier Siaca tm ©tic^e gcloffcn ' I must go ! Rather (would I) leave everything in the lurch here. (Lessing.) 8. It is used in a few absolute constructions, with or with- out a substantive, which is usually in the accusative when present, as : SwgcgcBcn, baj bieg ira^r ift. Granted that this is true. 3J?eincn 33ruber ttuSgcnommen, iuaren aHe sugegen, Ex- cept my brother, all were present. 282. The Future Passive Participle. This Participle, also called the Gerundive, has the form of the Present Part, preceded by ju. It is formed from transit //z^erbs only, and is only used attributively, being replaced m the predicate by an infinitive with gu, as : (Sine 3u lobcnbc ^anblung, An act to be praised ; but* ©me ^anblung, icelrfjc 311 loficn ij; 283. General Remarks on the Participles. I. Many words with the form of Participles have the value of adjectives. Some occur as adjectives only (see also § 194 NoteV others with a special meaning, as: ^m)xi, learned,' befannt, acquamted; i)C^fc^ieben, different j beja^rt, aged, etc. [§§ 28x. e§269,5. mt Parti- on, as t v^alking, itive, as : tiat is (I 3 as the offcn! I ig in the or with- /e when 3 is true, len, Ex- le form n tratisi- eplaced d; but* k^alue of 3 § 194, earned ; i, etc. 284] GENERAL REMARKS ON THE PARTICIPLES. 329 2 All Participles (except the Past Part, of some intransitive verbs, see § 281, Rem. 2, above) may be used as pure adjec- tives, and as such may be compared or used as adjectival substantives (see § 122), frequently with concrete meaninc. as: bcr gieifenbe, the traveller; ber Scfcnbc, the man wh" reads; ber SSor[i^cnbe, the chairman; bag ©elcfcne, what one nas read. 3. Participles, unless they have become pure adjectives are used sparingly as adverbs; but the Participle in apportion (see §§ 280, /., 281, 3, above) may sometimes be construed as an adverb, e. g. : Sr^lBcigcnb briicfte er mir bie §anb. Silently (in silence) he pressed my hand. Remark. -This participial adverb of manner may be replaced by an adverbial clause with inbem. 4. The Participle, when used attributively, always follows all words qualifying or modifying it, and immediately precedes Its substantive ; as predicate, it sometimes, especially in poetry, precedes them (see § 280 b, above), but generally and more correctly follows, as : , 2)ag t)on feinen ©Item tnnig gcltefitc Jlinb, The child ' dearly beloved by its parents. ' m ber einen §anb fdimunmenb, mit ber anbern bag ^tnb uber bem 2l^a[fer cm|ior^ortcnb u. f. tt). Swim- ming with one hand, with the other holding the child above water, etc. 2)ag 3SoIt uom ,^urften untcrbrurft u. f. to., The people oppressed by the prince, etc. ' 284. English Participial Constructions. I. The Present Participle is never used in German, as it so frequently is m English, to express adverbial relations of time 22 330 LESSON XLVII. [§284 or cause, and must be replaced, where so used, by a regular adverbial clause, introduced by the proper adverb or con- junction, as follows : {a) To express time, the conjunctions ba, al§, 'when,' iubcm, tuiiJjrcub, 'while,' must be used, as : Seeing him turn pale, I hastened to his assistance, ^tt (ttig) \d} ibn crblcidk'n fa^, ciltc id; ibm jur .s^^Ife f;crbci. Recovering himself, the orator continued, ^H^i^ni cr fid) fammclte, \\\{}x bcr ^Hcbncv fort. Remarks. — i. The English Perfect Participle is replaced by a clause with narfjbciU (or n(6^, with the Pluperfect, as : Having examined his papers, they let him go, Slnf^s bcm man fcinc ^^sapierc untcrfud;t Jattc, Iicj3 man il;n gelicn. 2. The clause with inbcm, indicating simultaneous action, may be replaced by a participial clause in the case specified in § 280, b, above. (p) To express cause, the conjunctions ba, tnbctn, *as,' * since,' or hicif, 'because,' must be used, as: Being an honest man, he may be trusted, SBcK er ein e^rlid^^cr ^33iann i[t, fo tann man il;m Irauen. Hoping to see you soon, I remain ever yours, ^itbcitt icf) l;o[fc, 3ie balb ju fehcn, i^crbletbe id; [tct^5 bcr l^j^rigc. Not having found him at home, I went away, ^0 ic^ \hn nid;t 511 §aufe gcfuubcn ^attc, oi»a icf; fort. 2, The Present Participle qualifying a preceding sub stantive or pronoun is changed: {a) Into a regular ?rhitive clause with finite verb, as ; A loaf was found at Herculaneum, still retaining its form, uiri 'i'vot iintitc 5U .'perculanuni ycfunbeu, toelf^cg uDc^) bie gorm bcibc^iclt. [§284 I regular or con- * when,' sistance, fe f;crbei. replaced :, as : o, 9ln(^» man il;n ; action, jcified in cm, * as,' i( er ein , Snbem r S^ricjc. vay, 2)0 iort. ng sub as; taining iCfunceu, §284] ENGLISH PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 331 The ship, having come straight towards us, showed the black flag, Xa^ ed;i[t tucldicd gcrabe auf m^ augcfommcn tuar, scigtc bie \d)\vaxic jragge. with ?r; ~; T' *'"'" ''^, '^' ''''^ ^" ^'^^ ^^'""^'^''-^^ '^^"^'^ ^^''^' correspond with that of the principal verb, as shown above, the Pluperfect, however generally replacing the English Perfect Participles. (/^ Into an attributii^e participial clause, in wiiich the Participle will immediately precede the substantive (see § 283, 4, above), as : A man passing on the street, ©in auf ber etrafec tiot* Dcigcjcnbcr gjiann. 3. A Participle preceded by an adverbial conjunction is replaced by a finite clause with the corresponding coniunc- tion, as : => J While travelling in Europe, we met a great many Americans, ^ Juir m Guro|)a reiften, trafen iuir mit biclen 5lmertfanern aufammen. For the Infinitive in -ing, or Gerund, and its German equi- valents, see § 276, above. EXERCISE XLVIL A, 1. Haben Sie Ihr Billet schon gelost? 3. Nein, noch nicht. 3. Dann mussen wir uns beeilen ; wir soUten erst etwas gemessen, ehe wir abreisen. 4. Hier ist der Schalter : soil ich auch ein Billet fiir Sie nehmen > 5. Danke, ich habe meins schon gelost. (J. Jetzt bin ich fertig, aber wir haben kaum drei Viertelstunden Zeit, bis der Zug abfahrt. 7. Dann mussen wir nachder ersten besten Restauration gehen. 8. Dort druben ist eine 9. Das trifft sich gut; gehen wir gleich hinein. 10. Kellner, wir haben es sehr eilig. 1 ] . Nehmen Sie Platz, meine Herren; ich werde Sie sofort bedienen; hier ist die Speise- karte.^ 1:>. Geben Sie mir gefalligst einen Teller Suppe. I0. Uiid Sie, mein Herr? \\, Bringen Sie mir zuerst eine Serviette. 15. Entschuldigen Sie, hier ist sie. IG.Ichnehme 332 LESSON XLVII. [§284 eine Forelle. 17. Eedaure, es ist keine mehr da. 18. Nun, dann bringen Sie mir ein Sttick Lachs. 19. Hier ist die Wein- karte ; trinken die Herren Wein ? 20. Bringen Sie eine Flasche Rotwein und Glaser. 21. Wie schmeckt Ilinen der Fisch? 22. Ausgezeiclinet. 23. Diese Suppe schmeckt mir gar nicht. 24. Lassen Sie sicli doch Fisch kommen. 25. Ich mache mir nichts aus Fisch ; — Kellner ! 26. Zu Befehl. 27. Eine Portion Entenbraten mit griinen Erbsen. 28. Wiinschen Sie keine Kartoffeln ? 29. Javvohl, gebratene Kartoffeln. Brin- gen Sie auch Brot. .HO. Noch etwas? lU. Nein. Was wiinschen Sie, Herr B. ? 32. Bitte, reichen Sie mir die Speisekarte. Ich bestelle mir Kalbskoteletten mit Kartoffeln und gelben Riiben. .33. Sonst noch Gemiise ? 34. Etwas BUimenkohl. 35. Erinnern Sie sich schon f riiher hier gespeist zu haben, Herr B. ? 30. Nicht dass ich wusste ; die Restauration scheint neu zu sein. 37. Des- halb wird man vielleicht so gut bedient. 38. Ist den Herren etwas gefalHg ? 39. Bringen Sie mir eine Portion Eis und eine Tasse Kaffee. 40. Und mir eine Tasse Chocolade und eine Portion Erdbeeren mit Sahne, und schreiben Sie alles auf meine Rech- nung. 41. Hier ist die Rechnung, mein Herr. 42. Wie viel betragt sie ? 43. Sieben Mark funfzig Pfennig. 44. Hier sind acht Mark; das Ubrige ist Ihr Trinkgeld. 45. Jetzt miissen wir fort ; es hat soeben auf dem Bahnhofe zum ersten Male gelautet. B. 1. A sleeping fox catches no chicken. 2. Sleeping dogs do not bite. 3. The past cannot be helped (changed) ; let us rather think of what is to come. 4. It is much better to think without speaking than to speak without thinking. 5. Man is a speaking animal, a fire-using animal, a laughing animal : these are some of the definitions which have been proposed by philosophers. G. We learn to speak German in speaking German. 7. Well hit (trcffcu) ! I call that well played ! 8. I wanted to show you an article in yesterday's [§284 §284] si;-tlish participial constructions. 333 paper, but it is nowhere to be found. 0. Let me know when you think of coming to town. 10. The skill of ants in the building of their nests is astonishing. 1 1. Smiling, he began to read the letter, but before having read the half of it, he threw it furiously on the floor. 12. A hussar came galloping down the street and said the battle was beginning. 13. The Paradise Lost of Milton is one of the most important works of English literature ; it was written in the seventeenth cen- tury, but this does not prevent its being still much read. 14. After having been so well received by us, I wonder that he is not ashamed to speak evil of us. 15. The morning was cool and charming, but towards noon the heat became oppressive, and we saw great clouds rising in the west. 16. He says the matter is perfectly clear, but his saying so does not make any difference. 17. He went away complain- ing that there was no use talking to people who did not want to understand. 18. That was because he was angry, and because he had not succeeded in making himself understood (Dcrftdnblic^O- 19. Make no mistakes in copying your exercise, or else a second copying will be your punishment. 20. Besides making mistakes the last time, you wrote very badly. 21. " The danger to be avoided," said he, "is not yet past." 22. Going (^inge^en) to visit our friends in Schiller-street this afternoon, we met them coming to visit us. 2:3. His being rich is no excuse for his being lazy ; we do not need to be idle merely because we are not forced to earn our bread. 24. A certain man, just before dying, called his sons to him, and told them there was a treasure lying hidden somewhere in his field. 25. Believing they would find it, they began digging everywhere, but without finding the wished-for (erhjunfd;t) treasure. 26. One of them, wiser than the others, finally guessed what his father had meant by having told them this. 27. This son said that since digging the ground the crop had been much better, and that this was the treasure the father meant. I 334 LESSON XLVIII. LESSON XLVIII. CONCORD AND APPOSITION. t§a8s 285. Concord of SunjKcr and Verb. 1. The predicate verb {t\\Q /inite part, or that containing the copula) agrees vvitli its subject in number and person. 2. Two or more subjects require the verb in the plural, as : 'M'iwx 'iHitor luib nicinc %'uttcr finb l;icr gcluefen. My father and mother have been here. Remarks. — i. If the suliject nearest to the verb be singu- lar, the verb is sometimes in the singular, especially if the subjects folloiv tiie verb, as : ecuic .v»abfmtit, fcinc iipvioc Sckn^art, fcin l;o*fabvcnbc§ 3lU'fcn brodjtc bic (vrbitterunt^ n^'O*^" i^;» «"f^ i)ocf;[te. His avarice, his luxurious mode of living, his arro- gant behaviour, excited the animosity against him to the highest point. (Schiller, Egmont's Lcben unci Tod.) Dbcu bci bcm ^brone log ber 5lonig unb bic AUnicjin, Above near the throne lay the King and Queen. (Grimm, Doniroschen.) Note. — This is especially the case when the subjects, indicating things or abstract ideas, are regarded as forming together one idea, or are more less synonymous, e. g. : .C»0Ui1 unlJ §of tit Ucrfaitft, House and home are sold. @clD untl OJut mai^t nid)t ghutlid), Money and property (= wealth) do not make [one] happy ; or when particular attention is called to the last (as forming q climax), e. g.: -Mnw 3)ermi3gen, mciii Oiuf, mcin «clien fie^t nid)t auf bem ©pirle, My property, my reputation, my life (the most important of all), are not at stake. I§38s §285] CONCOKD OF SUBJECT AND VERB. 335 itaining son. iral, as : 'en. My i singu- ' if the ihvcnbcg !s arro- nst him r Lcben lonigin, n. he?i.) idicating idea, or : wealth) ming q : ©pirle, t of all), 2. If the subjects be of different persons, the verb agrees in person with the first rather than the second or third, and with the second rather than the third, tiie plural pronoun of the proper person being usually (always with the second per- son) expressed before the verb, as : SDu unb tc^ (mcin il^rubcr unb id;), mir Gingcn aug. You and I (my brother and I) went out. SDu unb bcine Sd;i»c[tcr, i^r fcib au^gcgangcn. You and your sister went out. 3. With titles of rank and compliment the verb is usually in the plural (see also § 49), as : ©cine gjiajeftcit fjoku geru^t u. f. \o., His Majesty has been pleased, etc. 4. Collectives, if singular, take a verb in the singular, unless followed by a plural substantive in apposition or in the geni- tive, as : ©inc gro^e ^J^mfdjenmenge ttjor jugecjen ; — but : eine gvofjc HKenge gj?enfd)eu hjorcn gugegen, A great number of people were present. ^ Notes.— I. The singular may also be used in such cases as that given in the second example above, unless the collective is considered with reference to its component parts individiMlly. ^ 2. With nouns of Number in the sing, (see § 185, i) the verb is used m the plur. only when an mdefinite quantity is meant, as : . Nur einige Schritt(e) von hier, Nummer fUnf, um die Kcke ; ich werde Sie begleiten. 7. Das wiire mir sehr angenehm. H. Sic schdnen ein groszer Biicher- freund zu sein. 9. Ja, das ist eine Schwiiche, die mich viel Geld kostet, aber mir auch viel Vergniigen mac^t. 10. Hier ist der Laden ; ich erwarte Sie auf meinem Bureau, wenn Sie fcrtig sind. 11, Ich danke vielmals fiir Ihre Aufmerksamkeit. Also, auf Wiedersehen. 1;2. Zeigen Sie mir gefalligst einige Exem- plare von Schillers W:'rken. 13. Gebunden oder ungebunden ? 14. Zeigen Sie mir beides. 15. Aus wie vielen Banden besteht dieses Exemplar? 16. Aus zwolf, und ich mochte Sie arf den ausgezeichneten IjtucV aufmerksnm machen. 1 7. Der Druck ist sehr klar; haben Sie noch sonstige (andere) Ausgiben > 18. Wir haben Ausgaben in groszerem Format', aber nur gebunden. Hier sind sie. 19. Das Format gefallt mir besser, aber ich mag den Einband nicht. 20. Dem ist leicht abzuhelfen. Ich bestelle Ihaen em Exemplar und lasse es nach Ihrem Ge- schmack einbinden. 21. Gut, ich mochte es in braunem Leder niit Titel gebunden haben ; aber wie viel soil ich Ihnen dafur bezahlen? 22. Die Ausgabe kostet zehn Thaler, der Ein- band fiinf. 23. Bekomme ich Rabatt'.? 24. Ja, zehn Prozent ^Qgen bare Bezahlung. 25. Ich bczahle bar ; das macht zwei und vierzig Mark. 26. Wiinschen Sie noch etwas ? 27. Ich ^''$'% 340 LESSON XLVIII. §289- mochte auch (^oethes saniiiuliche Werke in demselben Format unci Kinband hal)cn. 2.S. Es thut mir leid, dass wir keinc nichr haben, aber icli kann sie bestellen und gleich mit der anderen Ausgabe einbinden lassen. 29. Zum selben Preise? 80. Nein, es wird mit Einband aciitzelin Thaler netto betragen.' 31. Dann besorgen Sie es gefalligst, und scliicken Sie mir^'die Werke nebst Rechnung an diese Adrcsse ; liier ist meine Karte. 32. Icli besorge alles aufs Sorgfultigste ; binnen acht Tagen sollen Sie die Biicher haben. B. 1. "Books," said Alfonso the Wise of Spain, "are my most honest councillors : neither fear nor hope prevents them telling me what my duty is." 2. "It is not my courtiers," said this king, "who tell me most honestly what my duty is, it is my books." 3. "No courtier dares to say to a king! * Your Majesty is wrong,' but my books tell me so every day!" 4. I as'ced a gentleman standing near me, if he knew what time it was, and he answered me that it was exactly twelve o'clock. 5. More than two hours have passed since then, so it must now be between two and three o'clock. (>. Was it you that came to see me yesterday, when I was away from home } 7. Yes, my brother and I wanted to visit you, and we were sorry not to find you at home. 8. Margaret, the eldest daughter of Henry VII. of England, married James IV. of Scotland. 9. These were the grand parents of Mary Stuart, Queen of Scotland. 10. To do whatjs^right, and to be huppy, is one and the same, for virtue is its own reward, n. Dear father and mother, do you remain sitting here until I go for a carriage to drive you home, for I know you are too tired to walk. 12. Twelve and twelve make twenty-four, and twelve times twelve is one hundred and forty-four. \\\. After having seen London and Paris, we had not much desire to see other cities. 14. I wrote to K., inviting him to pass his holidays with us, and by return of post received a letter, §289- n Format :inc nichr ■ anderen se ? 30. jetragen. mir die le Karte. t Tagen in, " are Drevents Lirtiers," duty is , a kinjj : ry day." 2w what I twelve then, so Was it ay from oil, and ret, the James )f Mary ht, and reward, re until are too Lir, and r. J 3. I desire letter, ^90] THE APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVE. 341 saying we might expect him in a fortnight. 15. I asked you first as my oldest friend to assist me in this embarrassment. 1(). I know we should avoid asking our friends for help until we have done our utmost to help ourselves. 17. The hunts- man whistled, and his dogs came running from the wood. 18. Our teacher was^in^the^habit^of telling: us we should do what was right, let it cost what it would. J 9. Is your teacher still living ? Yes, he is still living, but he is getting very old now. 20. Goethe and Schiller are the two greatest poets of Germany : it is difficult to say which of the two is most beloved by the German people. 'fV. If you think we are right, give us some sign of approval : a word, a smile, a glance v/ill suffice. 2:2. All the rest of our party arrived at the top of the mountain before sunset, but my friend and I arrived only at nine in the evening. '23. Expect us on Thurs- day next, health and weather permitting. 24. The gentleman coming out of that shop is Dr. B., and the lady accompanying him is his niece, Miss L. 25. Did you ever see the Emperor William ? I have never seen him as Emperor of Germany, but I saw him many years ago as King of Prussia. LESSON XLIX. APPOSITION (continued): -APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVES. - SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 290, The Appositive Adjective. I. Attributive Adjectives and participles are said to be vised appositively when they are separated from their substan- tive, as : %zx ^agc, jung, (jiiOfffj unb gcifireic^, \o) During the eruption of the volcano, the dark- ness occasioned by :he ashes was so profound, (ii) \ ^^^"^ nothing like it was ever experienced. {Germ.) Sl^af^rcub bc^3 %\x^hx\x^t^ beg 5l?ulfang tear bie '^mi:) bic 3()d;c bcrurfarfjtc Jyinftcrnig [o ticf, hJte man nic ctlDag ^ir^nH^cg tuabrgenommen f)atte. .K , • -.^'^^""Sh the participle « occasioned ' is here in apposition to Uie subject 'darkness,' yet the position of the subject afUr the verb for- bids the use of the appositive construction in German, as also in the followmg sentence : (iii) j <^^'''^^-) ^t was a place advantageous for defence. ( {Gcrm.^ Cr^ luar einc gur ^i^erteibiguno flunftiflc ©tette. (./) ^//^V/V/ Appositive Adjective = 6?,r;;/^// y?.r/^//z;^ Clause : {Engl) This plant has changed into two distinct vegetables, as unlike each other as is each of ^ them to the parent-plant. {Germ) 2)ic[e %\\^ntbor iticine^ 3?atCv«, Yesterday evening my father's brother died. Soluol;! (nid)t nur) mciu ilsatcr, Juie (fonbcni auc^O "H^in •i^rubcr lunr .^luicncii, IJoth (not only) my father, and (but also) my brother were (was) present. Remarks. — i. As in the last three examples above, the first membsr of the sentence may be complex, with several attributes, complements, etc. ; the verb is still the second idea. 2. The coordinating conjunctions proper (§ 236) do not count as members of the sentence (see the last exaniple above), but r^^/wr/^/V// conjunctions throw the subject after the verb. Note. Certain adverbial phrases, of a ni re or less interjectional nature, such as: fvcilid), true; \me, I shall be at iiome. ,,'^d) w'lU iiicinc 5(ufAabe nidit leiucn/' jrfjric ber unartii^e ATnabc " I will hot learn my Lst^on, CTi d the naughty boy. Notes. - i. After dependent conditional and adverbial clauses (except those of iimc) the particle fo usually inuouuces the pinapal sentence, as : S)Q td) iiid)t iclbft fonuiieu fonntf, fo fd)idtc iu, meinen e<^[\i\. Senn ev fommon joUtc, fo mxbc id) jn .^->anfe jein. 2. This particle fo should alw. vs be inserted after ac nditioi al clause with tnenn omitt. d ; in coli:.quial usage, however, ^he principal sentence sometimes I^ is the subject de/ore the verb, fo bein, .mitted, as: Sdre IT fviil)a gcfonimcn, fo l)atte ef mid) Gcfcl)en ; or (colloquially) : 2B(ue ci frul)er gcfommen, cr Jjiilte mid) nc|e{)cn. This latter cor.struction, however, should not be imitated. 3. lnproporiio7itl clauses introduced by jr, Ucfio, or umfo, the depen- dent clause comes first, .nd the verb is preceded by the word expres- smg the comparison, as well as by tlie particle j", etr is: 3e (angci- bie 9fead)te finb, JjcfJo fiirjfv fma ^ Jujie, The longer the nights are, the shorter are the days if) The Verb is last in dependent sentences and ques- tions (en pare §§ 32 ; 88), as: S* n^ei^, 0o§ r)c ^Dfenfd^ fterblic^ ift, I know that man is mortal. @in 9Jiann, hjclijer neftern fjter ttittr, A man, who was here yesterday. Sc^ Ge^e, tticiJ etttcr haU \d) nid;t cjefefien, I did not see my father. ©cftcrn fam id) 511 f^>dt, I came too late yesterday. 2. The relative position of objects, abverbs, etc., is the same in principal and subordinate sentences. 'JS^S, Position of othb:r Members of the Sentence. 1. Attributive Adjectives and Participles immediately precede the substantive they modify, as : ©lit pf SSerteibic^uui^ fcfjr giinftigcr ^xi, A place very fa^oisrable for defence. ^a^ auf bem .^piigel ftc^cnbe §au§. The house standing on the hill. 2. Prepositions precede their case, with the exceptions given in the lists (see §§ 46 ; 51 ; 222^). 3. Conjunctions come between the words or clauses they connect, as : 5DUnn 33rubev uilb feinc Jatnilic finb bier. My brother and his family are here. %^ \c>^\% bofj 3ie ntd}t !omtrten merben, I know that you will not come. ■ 35^ LESSON L. [§§298- NoTE. — In dependent clauses that precede the sentence on which they depend the conjunction is first, as: SBcir id) franf nmr, fonnte id) nid)t fommcn, Because I was ill, I could not come, 29f). Construction of Incomplete Clauses. The \\'ord-order of Incomplete or Elliptical Clauses is the same as that of Complete Clauses, there being no Verb in the former. In Infinirve Clauses the Infinitive comes last; and in Appoiiitive Clauses, the Adjective or Participle comes last, thus : &nU Jreunbe (311) fjndcii ift cin gvof^e^ Giliicf, To have good friends is a j^reat blessinji. 3)ic iliinft in Dl i^n malcn. The art of painting in oil. S* lucrbe mid) fveucn, Sie morgen ju fcjcn, I shall be glad to see you to-morrow. ^ic§ arrcf> bei mir bcnfenb, fc(Uicf id; ein. Thinking all this to myself, I fell asleep. 3?on bcm £drm nufgcfrfjrcift, frrang er au§ bem 33ette, Aroused by the noise, he jumped out of bed. 300. Interrogative Sentences. 1. Direct Questions always /?e^m %vith the questio7i-word, the other members of the sentence occupying the same relative position as in principal sentences. For the position of the Verb and Subject, see §§ 293, 294, above. 2. Questions in German very frequently have the form of a principal assertive sentence, the question being marked only by the rising inflexion of the voice, as : 1^u fjoft bcine Settion nic^t gelevnt? You have not learnt your lesson .? Notes.— I. This constru::tion often occurs with a Doi^ in the sen- tence, as : [§§298- on which [ was ill, I 301] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 359 IS is the rb in the t ; and in ist, thus : o have g in oil. shall be king all m ^iik, d. 'or^, the relative I of the irm of a ed only ive not the sen- • 2)u tuirf! to^ fommen? You will be sure to come (will you not?). 6r ift tlO^ nic^t fraiif ? He is not ill (is he ? I hope not). 2. Exclamatory sentences frequently have the construction of depen* dent questions, but may also have that of direct questions, as : 2Bcr iuit(]cl)en tiirfte ! (Happy he) who might go with you ! Sle ifl bag SScttcr fcl)bn ! How beautiful is the weather ! RECAPITULATION. 301. General Remarks on German Construction. The following are the principal points in which German differs irom English Construction : 1. The Verb (containing the Copula) is the hinge on which the sentence turns, and has its position most absolutely fixed. 2. The Subject does not, as in English, necessarily precede the Verb in Principal Sentences ; but if any other member of the sentence precede the Verb, an inversion of the subject takes place, and it is thrown after the verb. Notes. — i , The terms invcrsioyi, inverted sentence, often used by grammarians, refer to the Subject only, not to the Verb. 2. This inversion of the Subject is also found in Interrogative and Imperative Sentences (see §§ 293 ; 294 ; 300, above). 3. The relative rank of sentences is marked by the varying position of the Verb, which is last in Dependent Sentences. 4. All the other parts of the sentence, except what precedes the Verb, are included ox bracketed h^Xv/^en the Verb and the Predicate. 5. Dependent Sci^;:ences (including Infinitive and Appositive Clauses; see § 299, above) are niifked off from the sentences on which they depend by commas. ^6o suppli:mentary lksson g. [§^302 I SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON G. COMPLEX SENTENCES. -CLAUSE-ORDER. 303. Compound and Complex Sentkncks. 1. A sentence is n>;;t/>oum/ when it contains more than one cdfly,iinatt cl.iiuse ; complex when it contains a subordniatc clause^ thus : Compound: Cvrf) iiiun nn il)m VHn-[)pi, faniitc i()n nbrr iuii)t, I went past him, hvA did not know him. Complex : tSr f oa^tp iiiir, bnft or fomiiion Uicrbc, lie told me that he would come. 2. Any subordinate clause may itself he com|^lex, having another clause dependent upon it, as: 3rfi n-maiti'te ilm ncftcnt, toni cr niir ncfrfjviolicn I)attr, &nft \n\\z C''Hl'i1)aftr balb luu'iibi;it inii Uu'ironi, I expected liim yesterday, because he had written nie, that his business would soon be finished. NoTK. -In tlR. ah(«vf .xaniplc, the clause lucil cr, etc., depends on t\\& princif>al clause nremli.r it; Nvlien-as the clause bafifciuc ©cfcDiifte, etc, depends on the clause tucil Sd) I)iibi' Urn bicint Mjkv, i)aft cr jcbc .^ttnMuit0 migticutc, fcl)ou oft liorocuunrni, I have often reproached him with this mis- take of misinterpreting every action. Srf) fomite bic Jmin', ob toir fiimcn, nic!)t bcantmortcu, I could not answer the question, whether we were coming. 305. Relative Clauses must immediately follow the antecedent : (a) When the latter (whether subject or not) precedes the verb of a principal sentence, as : 3:cr Tlami, inclf^cr gcficrn ^icr iaat. ift I)cute irlcbergcfommeit, The man who was here yesterday came again to-day. S)cii Tlami, tuclificr 0C|lcvn l)icr ttiar, Ijabc irf) itirf)t gctaimt, I did not know the man, who was here yesterday. Note. -If the antecedent docs not precede the verb, the relati- , is introduced after the conchision of the principal sentence, except as under (i), below, thus: fQcntc ift ber Tlann tuicbergcfommeu, lucldjer 11. f. 10. ^d) l)abe ben DJanit nid)t flcfannt, mcUbcv a. f. m. (d) When their separation from the antecedent would cause ambi- guity, as: ©eftcrii l)abc id) ineiucu grcuiib, bcii ic^ Iniiflc nid)t .Kiel)en, Bei mciitcm i^ntbcr flctroffcn, Yesterday I met at my brother's my fnend, whom I had not seen for^ajong^time. isToTR - If the relative clause were placed after the conclusion ot7he principal sentence the rehuive ben might refer to Sruber. $62 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON G. [§306 I 306. A Subordinate or Dependent Clause (with the exceptions specified in Remarks 3, 4, below) may also, whether subjective, objective or adverbial, precede the principal clause, in which case it throws the Subject after the Verb, as : Ob id) fommcn fonn {subjective clause), ifi ijttjeifel^aft, It is doubtful whether I can come. aBcr gar ju Uiel bebcnft [subjective clause), trirb lucnig Iciften, He who considers too much, will accomplish little. ^o§ er mir ntdjt gefdirlcficn {subjective clause), morf)t mir ®orgen, [The fact] that he has not written to me, causes me anxiety. C6 ti^ tDcrftc fommen fbnncn (objective clause), njeig ic^ nici)t, I do not know, whether I shall be able to come. $0ft er fron! ifl (objective clause), \)a\it \&j gcftern ge^ort, I heard yesterday, that he was ill. ^Q icf) fronf toor (adverbial clause), fonnte if nicf)t fommen, As I was sick, I could not come. Remarks.— I, Such a clause takes the place of a subject, object or predicate, as the case may be, before the verb (compare §§ 293, b, Rem. 4; 294, Rem. 2; 295, Rem.)- 2. Adverbial clauses in this way bring expressions of time, place, etc., but more especially those of cause, nearer to the verb, which is the part of the sentence they modify. 3. Or\\y subjective relative clauses with the compound relative Xntx, tt)Q8, can stand at the head of a sentence, as in the second example above. Note. — The relative ber is sometimes used instead of roer as compound relative (including both relative and antecedent), especially in the plural, as : !Dlc fic^ 8U l^art oergangen fatten, flo^en au3 bem 2anbc. (Schiller) ; i. e., iCieicnigcn, weldje u. f. nj. ; or : aBer ftc^ ju tjort cergangen ftatte (sing.), flof) u. f. to., Those who had committed too great offences, filed from the country. 4. Clauses which modify not the whole sentence but a particular member, cannot stand at the head of the sentence, but stand either immediately after the word to which they refer, or after the conclusion of the sentence (compare § 297, above). This remark applies especially to relative clauses (but see Rem. 3, above, and Note), and to camparative clauses with oIS, as : @cin Unglucf voax grower, aid er erttogen fonttte (or : ju grog, 0l§ OaH er eg u. f. W,), His misfortune was greater than he could bear. [§306 §306] COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES. 363 Note. — Comparative clauses with nit may precede, u: ffiie im 2aub ber SBogel ftitgt, "JJla^] fic^ jeber fliitlid) t^im, As the bird sings amid the boughs, let every one enjoy himself. (Schiller). EXERCISE G. 1. It seems impossible, says a great botanist, to give, in the present state of our knowledge, a complete definition of what (= that which) is to be considered as an animal, in contradistinction to what one must regard as a plant. 2. The good king Robert Bruce, who was always watchful and prudent, had received information (.Hllllbc) of (uoii) the intention of these men to attack him suddenly. 3. Bruce caused his men to lie down to take some sleep at a place about half a mile distant from the river (see § 290, r, i), while he himself, with two attendants, went down to watch the ford through which the enemy must pass, before they cair.e to the place where king Robert's men were lying. 4. " If I go back," thought the king, "to call my men to (the) arms, these men will get (fommcu) through the ford unhindered; and that would be [a] pity, since it is a place so advantageous for defence." 5. In the confusion, five or six of the enemy were slain, or, having been borne down by the stream, [were] drowned. 6. With the natural feeling of a young author (2c!)riftftcUcr), he had ventured (it) to go (fief) niifmadjcu) secretly and witness (bcUuol)neii 4-dat.) the first representation of his tragedy at Mannheim. 7. He resolved to be free, at whatever risk (ailf jebc @efal)r l)iii); to abandon (=give up) advantages which he could not buy (eriaufeil) at such a price ; toquithisstepdame (fticfmiitterltd), adj.) home, and go forth (fortmanbcrn)' though friendless and alone, to seek his fortune in the great market (3al)rmarft) of life. H. Having well examined the place (Crt), the soldier reported his discovery to Marius, and urgently (briugcilb) advised (anraten + dat.) him, to make an attack upon the fort from that side where he had climbed up, offering (fid) evbictcu) to lead (=show) the way. 9. He ordered his men to advance against the wall with their shields held together in the manner which the Romans named ' testudo ' or tortoise (9cf)ilbtri3tc). 10. His mother was present on (bci) this joyous occasion, and she produced (==: showed) a paper of (= with) poison, which, as she said, she meant to have given her son in his liquor (©ctrciuf, ace.) rather than that he should submit (himself) to personal disgrace- I En PART THIRD GERMAN R It A I ) E R WITH EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION Entered according to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousand nine hundred, by Thk Copp, Clark Company, Limited, Toronto, Ontario, in the Office of the Minister of Agriculture. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) /> // rM^ mp.. :/. & ^ ^^ 1.0 I.I 1.25 I "- IIIIM 12.0 1.8 U IIIIII.6 Photographic Sciences Corporation :\^^ ^ L1>^ :\ \ ^.\. ;\ 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 m .^\^^ >;^ '^ Q, 6 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. [The references at th<' head of the exercises are to the sections in the Grammar on which the exercises are based.] EXERCISE I, a. (§§ 1-2.) A. Continue the following, conjugating the verb throughout the singular and plural : 1. ^d^ 'i:)ahi @olb unb ©il&ev, bu l^aft ®Dlb unD (Silkr, tc, 2. 2Bag ^abe ic^ V, rooS ^a\t bu ?, jc. 3. §abc id) 33rot unb miid) ?, ^cft bu 33rot unb 3Jlilrf) ?, 2c. £. Supply the proper form of the present indicative of ^ben in the blank spaces: 1. ^ol^ann (John) — 33rot. 2. 6r — 23rot. 3. mark (Mary) — gOiilc^. 4. (Sic — 5mitd). 5. 2Ba§ — er? 6. 3Bq§ — fie? 7. ^o^ann unb aj^aric — 33rot unb Wil^, 8. (Sic — 23rot unb SUJild). 9. 2Ba§ — id) ? 10. ^u — gleifd). 11. 2Ba§ — wir ? 12. mx — ®olb unb (.Silbcr. C. 1. John has milk. 2. Mary has some bread. 3. He has some milk. 4. She has br-vad. 5. They have bread and milk. 6. What have we 1 7. We have water and wine. 8. Have I gold or silver ? No. 9. Hast thou also bread and milk 1 Yes, I have bread and milk. 10. What have they ? 11. They have some meat, some bread, some wine and some water. 12. Ye have silver, but we have gold. EXERCISE II, a. (§§3^5.) A. Continue the following, as in Exercise I, a. above : 1. ^0) l)ahe bag 33uc^ unb bic geber, bu })a\t, jc. 2. §abe 16) ben @tod ?, Ijaft bu ?, jc. 3. ma§ ^abe i6) ?, raaS 'i)a\t bu ?, 2c. B. Supply the proper form of the definite article in the blank spaces : 1. ,^abc i6) — 33ud) ? 2. §aft bu — geber ? ♦These exercises are more elementary than tnose in the body of the Grammar, and may be used as a prelimihary course. 364 EXERCISES II-III. lS, sections 365 oughout . bu ^aft ni ?, 2c. id) ?, 2C. itive of rot. 2. - 5mitcl). — 33rot — id) ? - ®olb He has id milk. i. Have c? Yes, ey have 12. Ye 3ve t 1. tc^ ben u ?, 2C. in the geber ? Ulnar, and 5. 3. .^at mavie ~- 231ume ? 4. ^cr ^at — a)?e[[cr (sing.) ? ^aben roir — aHeffcr (plur.)? 6. S:)aht i^r— q3ferb ? 7. ^abcn fie — ^unb ? 8. — §unb ^at e^eifc^. 9. — ^e^rcr t^at — . 1. I am tired. 2. I am getting (I become) tired. 3. In summer I often got tired. 4. We often fall (become) ill in summer. 5. In autumn we get well again. 6. My father fell ill in the winter. 7. In spring he got well again. 8. The weather is getting fine again. 9. He will get well. 10. You (2 sing.) are getting large and strong. 11. My father and mother are getting old. 12. You (2 plur.) are getting old. 13. In spring the garden became beautiful again. 14. In summer the leaves were green, and the apples were getting large. 15. We were idle, but now we are becoming attentive. 16. When were the brothers of these girls here? 17. They were here yesterday. 18. They are here now. 19. Here they are. 20. Are they getting tired ? 370 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. EXERCISE VII, a. (§§ 21-23). A. Dcclino tlio f()llo\vin«,' tlirrni^ri„)ut : bev ^o\}n, inein .r^uiib, bie ,f>anb, bicfcv momt, eiii ;\oljv, lucldjcr ^^lpfcl6auiu, fcin ^eiiib, uufcv .Uoiiig, i(;v Xcppicf;, fciii ^^iimjUng. £. Give the «,^('nitivo .sinjnrular and tlio nominative plural of : ^rcunb, rvetiib, ciiibc. 1l>. 3Jiciue '(\ieuube luaven gefrern nid;t 511 ,r>au)c. 1.3, l^ic SIH-iibcv mcijic:; grcunbc^ fiub jel^t l;iev. 14. ^ie (>5euevalc bc^^ Siai^cv-S (iub \ci\t in bicfcv etabt. 15. ^^Tic ®o(;nc meiue^S edjiuagci^^ fiub jcbt groH. 16. ®ie ^^orI;ange meine^ Bimmcvo fiub rot. 17. .^dj Ijabe eiuen leppid) in meiuem Bimmev. 18. '^Diefc Xeppid;e uub ^orl)duge fiub fe^r fdjiin. I>. (Oral.) 1. Wie viele (how mmiy) Tage hat eine Woche? 2. Wie viele Monate hat ein Jahr? 3. Wie viele Hande habenwii'? 4. Wie viele Fusse haben die Hunde? 5. fSind die Fiisse der Hunde gross? 6. Hat dein Vater Apfelbaume in seinem Garten ? 7. Sind seine Apfelbaume gross 1 8. Wie viele Sohne hat der Kaiser ? 9. Haben die Hunde Fleisch 1 10. Was haben sie? 11. Wo sind die Generale ? 12. Wann waren die Offiziere in dieser Stadt ? 13. Haben sie viele Freunde hier ? 14. Hat Johann viele Feinde ? ^. 1. A week has seven days. 2. The days of the week are Sunday, etc. 3. A year has twelve months. 4. I have two hands and two feet. 5. A dog has four feet. 6. My father has apple-trees in his garden. 7. His apples are getting EXEUCISES VII-VIII. 371 11. ripe now. 8. The king lias thrt^o sons and two daughterH. 9. The ofRc(3rs are in tlie city. 10. Wliero is tlie gcnoral's Hon ? 11. llo is in the city too. 12. Have you many friiaids? 13. I have many fricjida and no enomios. 14. My windows have curtains. 15. The carpet of my room is red. 16. These cari)ots are rod. 17. Kings have generals. 18. Generals have officers. EXERCISE VIII, a. (§§ 24-26.) A. Continue tlio following: 1. 3d) I;a6e ?ficd)t C[ef)aU, bit I)nft, jc. 2. ^obe id) dkd)t Q,ci)abt '^, l)i\ft bu, :c. 3. ^d) l)i\tte ben ©tocf nid;t c^cljaht, bit, jc. 4. S:)atk id) ben ©tocf uid)t getjabt?, jc. 5. ^d) wcvbe md &dh Ijabcn, bu, jc. fi. ^veibc id) Did Cklb ^ahcn ?, jc. 7. ^c^ tDeibe vid 'ikvc^-, uiir^cn (\d)aht l)ahcn, bu, jc. 8. ^d) raiirbe fern ^ergniigen o,d)aht l)ahcn, hn, ?c. B. 1. ®er Jlnak I)ot eincn 5lvfcl gefjabt. 2. liefer .^err Ijatte oiel (s5elb geljobt. 3. Xic 33ettler l)aben fciue Sdju^e geljabt. 4. 9[isiv luevbcn Ijeute ein ©eiuitter Ijabcn. 5. ^ie edjiiler luevbeu tnorgeu eincn ^ctertag Ijokn. 6. 3Sivft bu morgen bein 33nd) Ijoben ? 7. ^er ^aij'er luiirbe uiete C^Jenerale Ijaben. 8. 'Xiejev 2d)m' miirbe Dielc (Sdjiiler l)aben. 9. 3!J?ein ^•vennb mivb in ber (Bia'i)t vid 33evgniigen geljobt ^aUn, 10. ^sd) ^Qbe in biefev eiobt t)iele gvcunbe geljobt. 11. ^iefe iJJiabdjen lucvbcn ntovgen $onb] djulje ^ben. 12. aSir fatten ^kd)t gel)Qbt. 13. S:^aft bu 9^edjt gef)abt ? 14. SBiivbe id) ))kd)t '()ahcn ober llnvcd)t? 15. ^u tuitrbeft Unred)t ^ben., 16. 3c^ roevbe morgen einen ^eiertag Ijaben, benn id) bin miibe. C. (Oral.) 1. Wer hat mein Buch gehabt ? 2. Wer hat den Stock meines Bruders gehabt ? 3. Was hast du gehabt ? 4. Was haben Johann und Marie gehabt ? 5. Habe ich deine Feder gehabt ? 6. Haben wir gestern ein Gewitter gehabt ? 7. Werden wir morgen ein Gewitter haben ? 8. Wann werden die Schiller einen Feiertag hal^en ? 9. Warum hatten sie 372 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. einen Feiertag gehabt ? 10. Wird deine Sch wester morgen ihro Ilaiulschuho Iial)en ? 11. WVrden wir morgen Geld halK'n? 1"J. Wie viole Hunde Miirdo Johann haben ? 13. Wirst du vi(4 Vergniigen in der Stadt gehabt hal)en ? 14. Hatte ich Rodit gehabt? 15. Wer hatto Unrecht gehabt? 16. Wiirden wir Rt^eht oder Unrecht haben ? D. 1. Tlio girl haa her book. 2. Tlie girl has had her book. ;5. We liavo had many friends. 4. They have had gold and silver. 5. The bc^ggars have had no money. 6. Had they had bread ? 7. They had had no bread. 8. My friends had had much pleasure in the city. 9. Will they have much pleasure to-morrow ?XiO. I shall have money to-morrow. 11. We shall have a holiday tomorrow. 12. Will our friends have had much money ? 13. The emperor will have had generals and officers. 14. We shall have had friends and enemies. 15. I should be rijrht. 16. I should have been right. 17. 18. You would have been wrong. You would be wronjr EXERCISE IX, a. (§§ 27-34.) A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) lobe nieinen ^^reunb, \i\x, }c. 2. 9J?ac^e id; einen epa^iergang ?, mac^ft bu, k. 3. ^d) ^abc etn ^aug gefauft, 'tiw, jc. 4. ^d) irerbe ntorgen einen ©pajier; gang madjen, bu, jc. 5. ^d; luurbe fpielen, raenn \6) '^txi ^atte, bu, K. 6. 2Benn id) 3eit geijobt ^cittc, roenn \)Vi, jc. 7. ^d^ ^atte Dier geternt, bu, jc. 8. ^^ glaube, bag er @elb \)Cii, bu, JC. B. 1. !5)er Sit%xtx lobt ben (S^iiler. 2. !Die Setter (oben bie (Sd)iUer. 3. SBir loben unfere ©c^ulev. 4. 3»ir ^aben unferc Sel^rer gelobt. 5. 3Der ^aifev luirb [eine ©cncrale loben. 6. 2)ic ©enerale luerben il^rc Offisieve lobeu. 7. SBtr fpielten geftcrn im (^^xitw. 8. W\x \)(x\it\\ uiel gckdjt. 9. ^^er ^mU fpielte mtt feinem J^unbe. 10. 'Oi^ivft bn morgen einen i2)pa ^liergang mad)en? 11. ;^d) madjc einen epa^ieigang burd; ben 3i3aH). EXERCISE IX. 373 12. ^rf) mac^tc gcftcrn cincn ©pajicrgang. 13. ^6) rotirbc einen ©pagicrgang mad)en, tocnn id) ^eit Ijdttc. U. ^6) gluube nid;t, ba§ ic^ 3eit l^abcn rocrbc. 15. .5)cutc Icrncn tuir 3)cut[d). 16. aJJovgen tuevbcn rair I'atcm Icrncn. 17. 2Bir lucrbcn old gclernt l^abcn. 18. 3)ie JJiuttcr l)attc ^anb[d)u^e fiir t^re Zo(i)c tex gcfauft. C. (Oral.) 1 . Lernst du heute Deutsch otler Latein ? 2. V7a.s wirst du morgen lernen ? 3. Was haben wir gestern gelernt 1 4. Ilat Johann Deutscli gelernt? 5. Wird er auch Latein lernen 1 6. Wird er in einem Jahre viol gelornt haben ? 7. Spielten die Miidchen gestern im Garten ? 8. Haben nie viel gelacht ? 9. Werden wir morgen einen Spazlergang machen? 10. Wiirden wir einen Spaziergang machen, wenn wir Zeit batten? 11. Wtirde der Kaiser seine Generale loben? 12. Was hat die Mutter fiir ihre Tochter gekauft? 13. Was hatte unser Vater fiir den Bettler gekauft? 14. Hat der Bettler Geld? 15. Glaubt dieser Herr, dass er Geld hat? 16. Glaubt der Lehrer, dass wir Larm machen ? D. 1. The pupil is praising his teacher. 2. The teachers are praising their pupils. 3. I was praising my brother because he was industrious. 4. I have bought shoes for the becirar. 5. We should buy a house if we had money. 6. We are studying (lernen) Latin to-day. 7. We shall study German to-morrow. 8. We were studying German yesterday. 9. We shall have learnt much in a year. 10. To-morrow I shall take a walk through the town. 11. Yesterday I was taking a walk in the garden. 1 2. Why was your brother laughing ? 13. He was laughing because he was merry. 14. Will he laugh if he is merry ? 15. Shall we lau.srh if we are merry ? 16. Do we laugh if we are merry? 17. We shall cry if we are sad. 18. We have ci'ied because we were sad, 374 8UPPLKMKNTAUY KXEKC18KS. I i EXERCISE X, a. (SS 35-37) A. Continin, tl.ofoilowii.^.: 1. ;\cl; nvbeitcte ,^u oict, bu ^c 2. Xaiv.c id) ^n uicl y, taii^cjf bu, ,c. 11 M) tnblc bic .Uiubcr nid;t, bu, K. 4. ad; l)abc in bcr ^la'ot ftubicvt, bu, jc. 5. ^d; Ijabe mciu Wclb uer)\i)!ucubci, bu, jc. /?. Decline tho following tlir(.i,<.l„.ut : bicfcci 'ITovf bnc$ ^ crt.nieut, mciu .Ulcib, [ciu .Uinb, il;r ii^ud;, uufer .Oau., feiu mann, ciu .r^uf^u, lueldicv ili^nlb V C. 1. !Der (Martncv id)iUtcU ben ^^IpfcKmum. 2. Tcr etunn Ijat bie matta von bcii ^^^.iuntcu qc)d)uttclt. 3. Xcr Vcl)icv tQbcU bic .Uiubcr. 4. mv tabclu bicfcu Offi^icr, lucil cr bao (^5elb uid)t bc3n()(te. 5. maxmn Ijat cr bao (Mclb uid)t hc^Mt V 6. aScil cr fcin O^clb t^attc. 7. ih' l)at [ciu (s'iqcutuui ucr. [d)U)cubet. 8. !3)ic .Uiubcr rcbctcu ^n mcl. 9. ITcr i^ef^rcr tabcltc bic .Uiubcr, u,cir fie 5u uicl rcbctcu. 10. Tcr .Uouin Ijat [ciuc («cucralc ^ctabclt. 11. ^icfe ^Jiauucr fiaOcu .Ulciber fiir iftrc SBeibcr uub ^iiubcr gcfauft. 12. ^JJ^ciu ^?atcr fiat aiuci .i>au[cr gefouft. 13. ^d) rubrc gccjeu ben etroui. 14. 'jd) gc6c mciucr @d;u)cftcr bic ^^iid)cr. 15. ^IDic (ficr bicfcr .»>iiljucr"fiuD cp-nH U. ®ie ^Matter bicfcr U3aume fiub gclb. 17. 3)ie .r^ofpitalr m bicfcr etabt fiub grof^ uub fd)ou. 18. Tcv .Tloifcr Irnt roci @d;li)ffer in bicfcr ^Btaht, D. (Oral.) 1. Wosinddio Kinder? 2. Fiir wen (whom) kauft der Mann Kleider ? 3. 8ind die Blatter der Baume grun Oder gelb ? 4. Waiuni sind sie ^h ? 5. Wie viele Haiiser hat dieser Herr gekauft ? G. Warum tadelt der Lehrer die Kinder ? 7. Wie viele 8chl6sser hat der Kaiser in dieser Stadt ? 8. Hat der Offizier das Geld bezahlt ? 9. Warum hat er das Geld nieht bezahlt? 10. Hat deine Mutter die Eier verkauf t ? 1 1 . Hat sie aiu^h die Hiihner verkauf t ? 1 2. Arbeitete Johann gestern ? 13. Sind diese Manner reich oder arm? 14. Studierten die Jijnglinge im Winter oder im Sommer ? 15. Wer hat die Regimenter gelobt ? KXKHCISKS X-XF. S'^.'i K. 1. Tho tcadier blames 'lici childron. 2. Tlio inothfTs did not bla.no their dauKhtors. ;i. I },la,„..d this man In^cause ho ha, G. (Sure (Slteru lieBeu i.\x6), 7. ,3§ve (SU tern liebeu fie. 8. ^Ijve eUern lieben eie. 9. 3)a§ 9}Mbd)eu liebtif)ie 9}?utfcv. 10. ^d; lundje mcine 5lufgak. 11. JTsanu u)irft bu bciue ^lufgnbe niadjeu ? 12. ^avl mad;t [eiue 5lufgak; er madjt fie jel^t. 13. '4^ie tiuber flub \\\ ber ed)ule. 14. (gie inad)en tljve ^luigavcu. 15. 8ie luaieu geftevn in ber ^tvd;e. 16. !5)a§ @il6ev ift lueig, baS ®otb ift gel6. 17. 3)ie SCo^el EXERCISE XII. IS Buch ? el haben bezahlt ? [adchen ? hr«)r mit ? zu viel ? 2. These lis house e teacher teachers uses ; he 9. This lamed of had it. hall visit •rrow. ?Iufgok, ^ gelobt, I wuxht't f 2C. 5. mix bte )ic^, 3. . Itnfcre \^xc (St= 3}Mbdjeu . mann tufgak; 14. ®ie : Jlti'd;e. e SCogel 377 ^oBen ^riigcl. 18. ^^ve J^Higel finb reicr;t unb ftaxf, 19. ^-cr ^ater biefe^ ^iinglingg ift ^^aufmann. 20. Gr reift oft in bev ©cfiiDeij unb in 3^eut[c^ranb. 21. (Sx m^nt in ber ed)iaer. |tro§e. 22. ^er %xit fd)itttelte ben ^lopf. 23. (Sr Ijatte feine ^offnung. 24. ^arl ^at fic^ bie §anb uerle^t. C. (Oral.) 1. Wer liebt uns? 2. Lieben die Eltern ihre Kinder ? 3. Liebt die Mutter ihre Tochter. 4. Lieben sie ihre Mutter ? 5. Liebt das Madchen ihre Mutter ? 6. Hast du deine Aufgabe gemacht ? 7. Haben sie ihre Aufgaben gemacht ? 8. Wann machten die Madchen ihre Aufgaben ? 9. Wosind die Kinder heute? 10. Wo waren sie gestern ? 11. 1st sein Vater Arzt oder Kaufmann ? 12. Wohnt er noch in der Schillerstrasse ? 13. Wo reist er im Sommer? 14. 1st das Silber weiss oder gelb ? 15. Haben die Wtirmer Fliigel ? 1 6. Wo leben die Wiirmer ? 1 7. Warum weint das Madchen? 18. Warum schiittelte der Arzt den Kopf f 19. Sind Sie jetzt mit Ihrer Arbeit fertig ? 20. 1st der Lehrer mit der Arbeit zufrieden ? />. 1. My parents love me. 2. Our parents love us. 3. The mother loves her daughters. 4. Her daughters love her. 5. They lov- one another. 6. The girl loves her mother. 7. The girls love their mother. 8. Do you (plur.) love your parents? 9. Parents love their children. 10. Parents send their children to school. 11. Birds have wings. 12. The wings of birds are light and strong. 1 3. Is your father a merchant ? 14. No, he is a doctor. 15. He is travelling in Switzerland now. 16. In summer he often travels in Germany. 17 We are living in Schiller-street. 18. Why are you crying, Chlrles? 19. I am crying because I have hurt my hand. 20. I hurt it as I was working with an axe.. 378 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. EXERCISE XIII, a. (§§ 45-46.) A. Continue the following : 1. ^d) \d)\dU geftevu bem ^ef)vtx ein 33ud), bu, jc. 2. ^d) fdjirfte ifjin gcftern bie ^ud)ev, bu, jc. 3. ^d) l^abe if)m l^eutc bie 23ud)cr gefdjidt, bu, 2c. 4. ^i^d) ^a6e fie iljm ge[d)idt, bu, 2c. 5. f^^mk ^6e id) i(jm bie md)cx gefdjidt, l^eute ^aft bu, 2c. B. Supply the proper form of the definite article in the blanks: 1. gu — ^inbe. 2. 23et — geuftev. 3. Urn — 23aum. 4. 5lu§ — ©tabt. 5. SSiber — ^eiube. 6. aj^it — geber. 7. ':Sjnxd) — ®trom. 8. ^iiv — 9JJanner. 9. (Bdt — 3:oge. 10. 9^ac^ — ^mutter. 11. ©egen — jtaifer. 12. Ot;ue — §anb[d;ur;e. 13. %u[^cv — ^oc^ter. 14. ^on — eitcrn. t C. 1. tBir raaren geftevu 16ei meiuer tantc. 2. ®ie luoljut in ber @tobt» 3. ®ie raol^ut feit bvei >r;reu iu ber (Bta'ot 4. dlad) bem 9)Jittagge[fen madjten luiv niit \l)v eiuen ©vagievgang. 5. Unfere Zank l^atte eiue Df^eife nad) ^^eutfdjlaub gemadjt. 6. (Bie er^d^lte (told) uu^ uiel uon i^rev ^teife. 7. Urn uier U^x fc^idte fie um nad) ^:^an\c. 8. Uui fiiuf ll{)r raaren rair lyieber gu §aufe. 9. 3Eir raaren uiit unfeveni 33e[ud)e (visit) fe^r jufrie- ben. 10. W\x waxen ber ^ante fet;r bonfbav. 11. aj^eiue Zante !aufte mir geftevu ein ®efd;ent 12. ©ie faufte e§ Dom £auf. maun in bev ®d)iaevftva§c. 13. ©ie l^at e^ miv ^eute gefd)idt. 14. ©eftevn !aufte id) meiner ®d)n)eftev ein ©efdient 15, ^eute ^ahe id) eg i^r gefdjidt. 16 ©ic ift mir feljv baufbav bcifuv. 17. 2Ba§ fagte fie (ju) S^uen V 18. ®ic fogte : ,,^d) bin biv fel^v banf bav. " I). (Oral.) 1. Wo wohnt Ihre Tan to ? 2. In welohei- Strasse wohnt sie ? 3. Seit wann wohnt sie in die.ser Strasse ? 4. Wann besuchten Sie Ihre Tante? 5. Waren Sie gestt'i!! bei ilir ? 6. Machte Hire Tante einen Spaziergang mit Ihnen 1 7. Wann machten Sie einen Spaziergang? 8. Was erzahltc EXERCISES XTII-XIV. 379 )cnt 2ef)xix ex, bu, K. ic 33u(i)er le in the 3. Urn — 3. Wit — 9. (Beit ifer. 12. . 35on — : luolint in 5ta't)t, 4. asievgang. iiodjt. 6. I uiev lll;r uir luteber i'i)x jufrie; dne jtonte om ^auf; e gefdjicft. 15, .'^eute ax bcifuv. d) bin biv . welohei' <: 8trasse ? it Ihnen ? } erzahlte Ihnen Ihre TiinU) 1 9. Sind Sici niit Tlnem Besiiche zufrieden ? 10. Haben Siu jonials eino Rei.so nach Ueutschland geniacht 1 11. Wann haben Sic Ihicr Sch wester das Geschenk gekauft? 12. Von wem (whom) haben Sie es gekauft ? i;3. Wo wohnt dieser Kaufmann ? 14. War Ihre Schwester fiir das Geschenk dankbar ? 1 5. Was hat sie (zu) Ihnen gesagt ? B. 1. Yesterday 1 bought my brother a present. 2. I bought it from a merchant in the city. 3. I shall send it to my brother to-morrow. 4. He is at my aunt's now. 5. He has been at her house for three months. 6. We often visit my aunt in the town. 7. After dinner we take a walk with her through the town. 8. Yesterday ghe took a walk with us. 9. She told us a-great-deal (uiel) about her journey to Germany. 10. She often travels in Germany. 11. Have you ever taken a journey to Germany ? 12. When did you send your mother a letter? 13. Have you sent her a letter to-day? 14. To- morrow I shall send her a letter. 15. She sent me a letter yesterday. 16. I am very thankful to her for her letters. 17. I sent a letter home to-day. EXERCISE XIV, a. (§§ 52-59). A. Decline the following throughout : ber Rnahc, btefer ■D^enfci^, biefer .l^evv, [eine Zantc, Uin ©olbat, itjre (Sdjwefter, mcine 33lume, ein ^ren^e, bte ©rdfin, biefev ©tubent. B. Continue the following: 1. ^d^ tin ®olbat genjorbcn, bu, jc. 2. 23{n t^ nad^ ^eutfc^Ianb gereift ? btft bu, k. 3. ^c^ bin nad) §au[e geeilt, 'an, k, 4. ^d) Vm biefem $errn ^eutc kgegnet, bu, k. C. 1. Waxk ift nadj Ottaiua gereift. 2. HJlavie l^at t^re tanien in OttaiDtt befud)t. 3. @ie ift bei i^ren Zantm in Ottaiua gerae[en. 4. %U fie bei if}ven Xanten xoax, ^atte fie uiel 55evgniigen. 5. SJlein 9kffe ift ®olbat geroovben. 6. 9Jceine 380 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. S^effcii finb ©olbotcii qciuoibcu. 7. 3>cr i)ic[fc be^J (^ha^en {ft etubcut. 8. ^ic 'mmncn im ©arteii bicfcv 4)ame fiiib [cI;ou. 9. !3)ie mmnen bicfev 4^amen finb fcfjv fd)ou. 10. 3){e 33nrcn nub .^afcn lebcn im ^albe. 11. ®ev ©olju biefe^ .r^evni ift arm gciDovben; ev f;at [ein C^igeutum uev[d;iuenbet. 12.'3)er '^^reuile ift ein a:)elb. 13. ^k ^^reuf^en finb .)>lbeu. U. 5Biv reben uiel uon ben Zljatm ber §elben. 15. hex ^^atcr meine^ 9^ef[en ift mein 33ruber. 16. 3)ie (Sof^ne meiner ©d^juefter finb meine 9^cffen. 17. ^:)enk finb wix bem ©rafen begennet. 18. !3)ie|c ^amen finb in ber jlirc^e geioefen. 19. ®ie 9JJe[[ev nnb 0a6e(n finb auf bem 2:i)d;e. 20. ^^ahcn @ie bie ^ebevn bcs jinaben obev be^ 3}Jdbdjcn^ ? J). (Oral.) 1. Wo sind die Federn dieses Knaben ? 2. Wo sind die Mes>.or und Gabeln ? 3. War die Tocliter dieser Dame in der Kirche ? 4. Sind die Grafinnen in Berlin gewesen? 5. Hat der Sohn des Giifen die Wissenschaften studiert ? 6. Wo hat Thr Neffe die Wissenschaften studiert ? 7. Wem sind Sie heute begegnet ? 8. Wo wohnt Ihr Neffe ? 9. Wo wohnen Ihre Neffen ? 10. 1st der Sohn dieses Herrn reich Oder arm? 11. Wo leben die Baren und Hasen ? 12. Wohin (to where) ist Marie gereist ? 13. Wen hat sie da besucht ? 1 i. 1st sie bei ihrer Xante gewesen 1 15. Wann ist sie nach Haiise gereist ? £J. 1. My sisters have been in Berlin. 2. They have visited their aunts in Berlin. 3. They have been at their aunt's in Berlin. 4. The nephew of the count has become a student 5. He has studied the sciences in Berlin. 6. I met him on the street when i was in Berlin. 7. This gentle- man's son was rich, but he became poor. 8. Do you admire this flower ? 9. Do you admire the flowers of this garden ? 10. Who has had this boy's pens? 11. Have you had the books and pens of the student? 12. The son of my brother or of my sister is my nephew. 13. My nephews are the sons '•hofen ift lib [d;bn. :n ift arm Sir reben :e^ S^effeii tub meine 18. 5^ie[e b &aMn i ^tuaben f 2. Wo er dieser 1 Berlin ischaften studiert ? r Neffe? 3s Herrn Hasen 1 hat sie '. Wann ey have at their ecome a ). I met gentle- admire garden 1 had the brother :he sons EXERCISKS XIV -XV. 381 of my brothers or my sisters. 11. We spc^ak much of the deeds of the Prussians. 15. These soldi(>rs are heroes. 1(5. We admire and praise the deeds of heroes. EXERCISE XV, a. (§§ 60-65.) A. Decline together throughout: b'er ©ebanfe, inein 9?ac^= hax, biefer mdjftahc, [ein better, i^r %uqc, fein %mxtc, uufer Ji. Supply the definite^ article in the blanks: 1. ^c^ fdjirfte — md)cx an — M^rer (plur.). 2. i&v legtc — gebern auf — Xifc^. 3. @eorg jogte — §unb Ijinter — Ofen. 4. — Xa- nieii ge^en (go) nad) J)au[e. 5. — ^erren finb in — 2Salbe. 6. — 33ilb ^cingt iiber — ^enfter. 7. ^6) fteUe — (Stiif^le neben — Zi^d), 8. ^or — tird)e fk^t (stands) ~ 5Ikum. 9. (5r eilte liber — gluj?. 10. — ma'od)m ftelite — ^Uimen oor — ^enfter. C. 1. @r fc^reibt (writes) tm D^antcn be§ taiferS. 2. ^iefc Jlnaben lernen 3)ie DIamen ber ©fitter ber dUmcw 3. Itnfeve 3Settern finb je^t bei un§. 4. 3^{e ^mutter meineS q3etter^ ift meine ^ante. 5. 'Xcx 9^effe beg ®oftorg ift ©olbat geraovben. 6. ®ie @i)r;ne unfere^ m6)hax^ mol)mn jet^t in ber (Btaht 7. 2Bir njerben morgen unferc S^odjbarn befndjen. 8. ^ie 5tugen meine§ ^rofefforg finb fe^r \d)\md), 9. 2Bir legten bie 33iidjer ber ^^rofefforen auf ben ^i[d). 10. ©inb fie nodj auf bem tifdje ? 11. mx lernen uiel oon unferem ^:|3rofef[or. 12. ^(m g^ontag gefjen rair jur ©c^nre. 13. (?g fk^m jiuei 33(iunie vox unierer 3:^iir. 14. BiDifc^en bm 23aumen fteljen ^tuet ^iinfe. 15. ^x fkiikn bie S3an!e ^njtfdien W 33aume. 16. 'Xk SBanfcn finb nodj nic^t offen. IT. Da§ 33ilb yon mdmx mntkx (jcingt an ber 3Banb neben bem genfter. 18. 2Cir Ub.a im ^riebcn mit unferen ^Qd)finrn. D. (Oral.) 1. In wessen Namen schreibt er ? 2. Hat dieses Kind schon die Namen der Buchstaben gelernt ? 3. Wo 382 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. wolint j(3tzt dcr Yctter des Doktors ? 4. Wo wohncn dit^ VetUn-n Hirer Nachbarn ? 5. Lebt dieser Maim im Frieden mit seineii Naclibar-i ? 6. Be.suclien 8ie oftniaLs Ihre Nachbar- innen? 7. Warum sind die Augen des Professors schwach? 8. Wohin haben Sie die Biicher der Professoren g(^legt ? 9. Wo stehen die Banke? 10. W^ohin haben Sie die Banke gestellt? 11. Sind die Banken am Sonntag offen ? 12. Wo hangt das Bild von unseren Eltern ? 13. Haben diese Worter viele Buchstaben? 14. Wo arbeitet der Gartner? 15. Geht er in den Garten, um zu arbeiten ? -£'.1.1 speak in the name of the emperor. 2. Mary has learned the names of the letters. 3. Our neighbours visited us yesterday. 4. Our neighbour's daughters will visit us to-morrow. 5. My cousins are at our house now. 6. The father of my cousins is my uncle. 7. I have learnt a great deal from my professors. 8. My eyes are weak because I have studied too much. 9. Are my books on the table? 10. No, I have laid them on the bench near the door. 11. I shall hang this picture on the wall. 12. The banks will not be open on Monday. 13. The gardener goes into the garden to work. 14. He is working in the garden now. 15. The garden is in front of the house. EXERCISE XVI, a. (§§ 70-75.) A. Give, with the definite article, the nom. sing., the gen. sing., and the nom. plur. of: 33vuber, ©lurne, 2Balb, 9lpfeU baum, SKagen, ^anb, ^orf, 9Za^6ar, ©olbat, ^uc^ftak. Refer each of the above to its corresponding model. B. 1. aSa^renb meiner dtti^e Bcfu^te ic^ bie ® tabic ^Berlin unb gJarig. 2. ®ie @tabt SSerlin tft bie §auptftabt !3)eutfd)ranbo. 3. mdm @rtern rao^nen in Devlin, 4. 3)er di^ein tft ein %hi\^ (iiUropao. 5. 2Sir Beujunbcrn bie Sd^onl^eiten bes ucijeiuee. G. 3)ie 23evge bcv ®d;iue{a fi"^ auc^ [el;r fd)on. 7. StaxH 33vubev EXERCISE XVI. 383 Imcn (lit^ Friedeii Nachbar- schwach? legt ? 9. e Banke 12. Wo 3 Worter 15. Geht ^ary has s visited visit us 6. The a great le I have 10. No, , I shall . not be arden to e garden the gen. e. jvlin unb 'd)lanbo. lies. 6. 33vubev unb Souifen^ Sdjiucftern fiub jet^t ki meincin 35etter Wax an\ il3e|ud). 8. 9}JuUcv^ lunrcn and) gcftern bei i(;m. 9. i'Duife Ijat i&iiiahctl) ^himen jum ©ebuvt^tatj gefdjicft. 10. ®ie l;at i()v ©lumen \tatt md)ex gefdjirft. 11. iBegcu beg 9fiegen§ ^at fie eiifobet^ nidjt k[ud)t. 12. M) t;ai)e ed;illev^ 3Sevfe unb ^Surns' @ebid)te in meiner ©tMiotljef. 13. !j)ie itonigin uon (gnglonb l^eifet (the name of the Queen of England is) i^jictorta (nom.). 14. S)ev toiler con !5)eutfd)ranb ^ei^'t 2iBiir;erm. 15. ®ie etra^en 2:orontog finb fdjon unb Breit. 16. 2Bir berounbern aud) bie ©trafeen oon ^ari§. 17. ^>d) le[e t^eute bie 33riete be^ (Jicero anftatt bev Oteben beg ©emoftljeneg. 6\ (Oral.) 1. Wo wohnen Ihre Eltern ? 2. Wie heisst (cf. 13 and IJf above) die Hauptstadt Deutschlands % 3. Haben Sie jemals Berlin und Paris besucht % 4. Haben Sie auch die Stadt London besucht? 5. Wann haben Sie die Stadte Berlin und Paris besucht? 6. Wo ist der Rhein ? 7. Haben Sie die Schonheit des Rheines bewundert? 8. Was sagen Sie von den Bergen der Scbweiz ? 9. Wo sind Karls Bruder? 10. Sind Louisens Schw astern auch bei Ihrem Vetter Max auf Besuch ? 11. Wer hat Louise Blumen zum Geburtstag geschickt? 12. Weshalb hat Elisabeth Louise heute nicht besucht? 13. Wer hat Ihnen Schillers Werke geschenkt? 14. Wie heisst der Kaiser von Deutschland ? 15. Wie heisst die Konigin von England? 16. Wie heisst die Hauptstadt Frankreichs ? D. 1. The capital of Germany is Berlin. 2. The capital of France is Paris. 3. I have visited the cities of Paris and Berlin. 4. My parents live in Berlin. 5. The Rhine is very beautiful. 6. Do you not admire the beauty of the Rhine ? 7. Yes, and I admire also the mountains of Switzerland. 8. Charles' sister is now in Switzerland. 9. The Miillers are travelling in France. 10, What is the name of Louisa's brother ? 11. What is the name of the emperor of Germany? 384 SUPPLKMKNTAHY EXKUCISKS. 12. AVliat is tlic luiiiK^ of tin; ({xuHm (►£ Knglaiul / 1.'}. Tho capital of France is eall(«(l Paiis. 1 L Tho, stivctH of Paris are wicJe and iMviutiful. 15. ai,o stn^ts of Toronto aro wide too. 1(). On account of tho rain wo sliall not visit our friends to-day. 17. We sliall not tak(^ a walk during tho rain. 18. My father will send Fred to-day instead of George. EXERCISE XVII, a. (§§ 79-88.) A. Continue the following : 1. $IBo'5 fiir eineu ^^^nt l)aU id) ?, —l)aft bu, 2c. 2. 5lBeld)e^ [inb iiieiue .Omii'lcljur^e ?, lucldje^ [inb beine, k. 3. ^d) ^a^k, ^a^ ev hant fei, \>n, jc. 4. ^d) [agte cr fei frauf, bu, k. 5. ^c^ fragte, ob (whether) er txanf ]d, bu, K. i?. 1. 2Bev ift biefe ^amc ? 2. $©effen ^od)ter ift fie? 3. 2Bem nerjorcn biefe ^cbeni ? 4. §a^a§ Ijobeit eie ju mir gefagt ? 5. Sorouf fel3eu fic^ bie iltuber in ber @d)ure ? 6. @ie fel^n fid) auf etitljle ober ^^nnfe. 7. SS^^etcfier .C^rv raor geftern Bei ^^nen ? 8. Seldjev uon bic[eu .Oen-eu ift iiarls 3.^ruber ? 9. aBeld;e ^ebev Ijat Staxl ? 10. 2Beld;e von meincu g-ebern Ijat er ? 11. 35^eldjem ^}JMbd;eu fdjidt 9J?avie 23rumen ? 12. Seldjem uon biefeu 9J?dbd)en fdjidt fie ^numen ? 13. 2Betd)en ^veunb Befudjen @ie Ijeute ? 14. mddjm von unferen ^reuuben Befu. djen luiv Ijeute ? 15. 3i^erdje^ md) Ijat ber IMjrer geljoBt ? 16. 2Beld)e5 von biefen 33iidjent Ijot er geljobt ? 17. SeldjeS ift ^Ijre (Sdjiuefter ? 18. ^dd)c^, finb ^^re eoufinen ? 19. ma?j fiir eineu .r^ut l)at '^ol)ann gefouft ? 20. 2Bag fitr .f^onbfdjurje l)at er gefouft? 21. Sag fitr eine 23rume ift bie ^ifie ? 22. SSa§ fiir Si^ctter merben luir niorgen Ijahcn ? 23. 9BGg fiir iliuberu gebeu luir ©efdjenfe ? 24. (Sr fagte : ,,mdn SBoter ift nidjt feljr luoljL" 25. (?r fogte, bQ§ fein Q^ater ntd)t rao^l fei. 26. (^r fagte, feiu ^kter fei nidjt wol)l 27. ^d; fragte mcinen ?freunb, oh fcln ^iater uid)t iuoi;l fei. 28. (Sr fagte, fein ^ater fei feit brei 3:agen front EXERCISKS XVII-XVIII. 385 1.*}. Tho of Paris ai'o wide ir friends lin. 18. a6e id) ?, tdjea [inb ^d) [agte vanf fet, fie ? 3. gcfagt ? ok fel^en fteru Bet er ? 9. I;at er ? ©eldjem ^veunb m Befu; gerjoBt ? SeldjeS Lifinen ? \^a§ H'lv ift bie ? 23. ,,3!)?etu er ntdjt 27. ^d; 28. (5r (7. 1. Whose (laiijL^liter is tliis girl? 2. Who are her parents? 3. Whidi stiek iM'iongs to Charles? 4. Whieh of these sticks 'oelongs to hiui ? 5. Whicli friends sliall w(^ visit to-day ? G. Which (phtr.) of our friends shall we visit to-day ? 7. To whom shall we send these flowers ? 8. What did the pupils say to their teacher ? 9. About what are the pupils reading in school to-day? 10. Which books has your father bought you ? 11. Which of these books has he bought you? 12. Which is my pen ? 13. Which are my pens ? 14. What kind of a carpet have you bought for your room ? 15. What kind of curtains have you bought? IG. What kind of pupils does the teacher praise? 17. What kind of weather shall we have to-day? 18. What kind of a man is Mr. Miilier ? 19. Our neighbour's father is ill. 20. Our neighbour said (that) his father was ill. 21. He said : " My father has been ill.'' 22. We asked him if his mother was ill too. 23. He answered that she had been ill. 24. He said that she was well now. EXERCISE XVIII, a. (§§ 89-91.) A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) UuK gern 'A:)eut\d), hu, jc. 2. ^c^ mad;e gern bee. a}Jorgeu§ eineit (Spo^iergaug, bu, 2c. 3. ^eute uor ad)t Xagen wax id) in O^ranfreid), bu,' k. 4. ^eute iiber ad)t Jage ;yerbe id) hd meinen eUern fein, — — hu h ' jeiuen, jc. B. State the rule for the gender of : ber ^anbfc^u^, ha^ ©efdjeuf, bie Itniuerfitat, bie ©djonljeit, bie 33lume, bag C^igeutum, ^a§ ^rciuleiii, bcr ©arten, bag Oiubern, ber ^an'o, ber finger,' hie ^ugenb, bie imelobie, bie ^?adj6arin, bie i^raft. . C. 1. ®er ©arten ineiner mad)haxin ift \d)o\u 2. mix 6e= luuubern hie ©c^on^eit itjreg ©arteng. 3. ^axie mad)t gern einen vipa^iergang mit bent .tod)terd)en unferer OJadjbarin. " 4. mH^dm kxnt gern ^mtid), 5. (Sr lernt jefet jeine mtion. 38r, SUPPLEMFNTAUY EXERCISES. 6. eeine 2dt\on ift fd)U)cr, obcv cv (cvnt fie ncni. 7. aJiein ed)iucftcvd;cii [picU cine yjt'clobic aiif bcm .Ulai)icr. 8. ;)d) l^bve gcvii biefe ^JJiclobie. 9. ^Ticfcv .C^anbfdjutj c^dpvt mciucnr^d)iuc). teid)cn. JO. Tuin, ev geljbit jcucm '(Ifiaulciu. 11. 3>og ^aiib Quf bem C^ut bici>:i ^vanleind ift iiid;t fd)oii. 12. ^d) legte eineu i^onb von ©oet()e^ ii^evfeu auf ben Zi\d), 13. 3^ic ^Iraft bcv eouue ift im eommev fetir gioH. 14. ^-^cute oor od)t Zac^en raiifte id) eineu 3:eppic^ fiir meiii 8 d; la f dimmer. 15. ^cute iiber ad)t tage veifen luir md) J>ufe. 16. !5^iefe i^eute l)abcn i^x eigeutiim uevfdjiuenbct. 17. Xa^ ^tubevii ift l;eute feiu SSergniigeu, benu ber $Binb ift fet;r ftarf. D. (Oral.) 1. Lernstdu jetzt deine Lektion ? 2. Lernst du sie gern ? 3. 1st sie heute leiclit oder schwer ? 4. Wer spielt auf dem Klavier ? 5. Was spielt sie auf dem Klavier ? 6. Horen Sie gem diese Melodie ? 7. Gehort dieser Handschuh dem Tochterchen unserer Nachbarin? 8. Wem gehort er ? 9. Bewundern Sie nicht die Sehonheit dieses Frauleins ? 10. Wo hat Ihr Schwesterchen dieses Band gekauft ? 11. Welchen Band legten Sie auf den Tisch ? 12. Wann ist die Kraft der Sonne sehr gross? 13. Wann kauften Sie diesen Teppich ? 14. Wofur kauften Sie ihn ? 15. Hat Ihre Tante ihr Eigentum nicht verkauft ? 16. Warum ist das Rudern heute kein Vergnugen ? 17. Wo werden wir heute iiber acht Tage sein? B. 1. Our lesson is easy to-day. 2. A week ago to-day it was very hard. 3. We like to learn our lesson when it is easy. 4. My little sister is learning German in school. 5. After school she often takes a walk with our neighbour's little daughter. 6. This young lady is very beautiful. 7. Do you not admire the beauty of this young lady? 8. I admire the ribbon on her hat, but I do not admire her. 9. The power of the sun is vM great in winter. 10. I do not like to hear this tune. 11. This young lady is always playing it on the piano. EXERri8p:S XVIII-XIX. 387 '.'2. My uncle has sold his property. 13. This carpet is very fine; I shall buy it. i;. I like to row on the river. 15. Rowing is a pleasure. 16. A veek from to- lay we shall bo at our uncle's. EXERCISE XIX, a. (§§ 92-99.) A. Complete the following: 1. ^d) cvfannte bicfen S^mn nid)t, bu, K. 2. S^abt id) il;m basJ (S5elb uid)t gcfaabt, Ijaft bu, 2c. 3. ^d) ^abe bie 3Jad)vid)t gtbvadjt, bu, jc. J^. Complete the following by supplying suitable relative pronoun forms : 1. 3)ev Wdnn, — ()ier wax, 2. 3)ie ^rau, bei un§ ift. 3. 3)cr S^cvx, — eoljii (jier xvol)nU 4. ®cr greunb, — id) eiii ©cfdjeuf fd)i(fe. 5. !5)ie greimbc, — mix ®e[d;enfe [djicfen. 6. 3:)cr ©chiller, — bev Server lobt. 7. ®er :ecr;rer, — ben (Sd)iUer lobt. 8. !5)er ©tirtner, — meinen 3[kter lobt. 9. T)k ^ame, — n)ir bte sytumen fc^irften. 10. 3)ie Jante, — aJJaric be[ud)te. 11. S^ie 2:ante, — 33ilb \ia ^ngt. 12. ^a^ ^ilb, — ba ^ngt. 13. ;l)ag 33uc^, — ber i'efiver brauc^t. 14. !3)tc 23{lber, — ba ^ngen. 15. ^te mdjex, — ber Mjxcx hxaud)t 16. 5tflcg, — id) fagte. C. 1. §ier ift ein 33rief, ben mcin Onfef miv gefanbt l^at. 2. 3)ie 9^ad)ric^t, bie bavin fte()t, ift traurig. 3. Xk geber, bie id) r^atte, ift auf bem Xifdje. 4. ^ie SDame, beven !^od)ter bei ung roar, ift je^t in ©nglanb. 5. Xcx ^err, befl'en ®or;n roir befuditcn, ift fe^r reid;. 6. 3)er ^aufniann Ijat ben 3:eppic^ nid)t gefdjidt, roetdjen id; beftellte. 7. ^iennen (Sie ben .^^errn, ber geftern ^i^r max ? 8. ^^vd) evfannte bie 3)amen nid)t, bie un^ begegneten. 9. ®er ^^vv, bent roir bcgegneten, l)ut urn n\d)t erfannt. 10. Wix erfannten bie ^erven nid)t, bcnen luir begeg? finb. 11. Xev X)iener Ijat aUe^5 gebrad)t, xm^ lutv beftellt Ijabeu. 12. SDa^ ^Bilb, lueldjeS ber 90^alcr gebrad;t l)at, Ijiinc^t an bev ^anb. 13. SDag ^ilb, H^ an ber 2Banb pngt, -{^at ber Wlakt geftern gebrac^t. 14. 3)er ®raf ^at fein ©igentum t)er[d)n)en'. 388 SUPPLKMENTARY KXKUCISES. bet, m^ Mr fd)abc iff. ir,. Tcr Vofthote \)at bcu !^^iicf qe= l)iad)t, luoiQuf mil- luartetcn. Ki. ^mv feiuc (^vcuubc f)at, ift {d)v ungliicflid) (unfortuimtc). />. (Oml.) i. Kunnon Si(; don Mann, (hm wir be^egnot Hind ? 2. Ist er nicht dcr Bnuler der Uanic, dio g('st(rrn Ixji Ihnen war? 3. Wtu- hat da.s ii.icli, das dor Lchrcr hraucht? 4. Halx'n Sio dio Biichcr, die ich })raucli(! ? 5. Wio liciHst der Herr, dossen Sohn \m Ihnen auf licsuch ist ? G. Wio hois.st dio Damo, doron Bild an der Wand hangt ? 7. Wio hoisst der Maler, wc^U-hor das Bild genialt liat ? 8. Wer hat den Brief gcbradit, worauf wir wartcteii ? 9. \\^) wohnon die Freundinnon, dcncn Mario dio Bhiinon gosandt liat ? 10. Hat der KaufmaTin alios gosandt, was wir Ix^stollton ? B. 1. Tho gentleman who was here is a doctor. 2. The lady who was with him is his sister. 3. Did you recognize the gentleman whom we met? 4. No, but I recognized the lady whom wo have just met. 5. The ladies wliom we have just met did not recognize us. 6 Where is the letter which the postman brought ? 7. My little sister has the books which I need. 8. Who painted the picture which hangs near the window ? 9. Where is the picture hanging which the painter brought yesterday ? 10. The friend whose property we have bought is now in Germany. 11. The lady whose beautv we have admired is a countess. 12. She has wasted her property, which is a pity. EXERCISE XX, a. (§§ loo-iii.) A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) fang Wone Sieber, bu, K. 2. .r^nbe id) fdjfine IMebcr gefungen ?, laif hn, jc. 3. ^d) bin auf Vic Chbe gefallen, hu, k. 4. ;^d) rucvbc fingen uub taiu sen, bu, K. 5. einge eiii fdu i--^ 2id, fiitge cv, jc. Give the past participle il uerbrenueu, beffellen. iUn, EXEIU'ISK XX. 389 Ji. 1. 9J?avic Ijat fc()onc ^Mumeii. l'. Ww Ijabcn flute« 33rot unb fiiid)c auild). 3. ,Vi) fiille Da«S (Mlao mit fiifdicm ^I^qiicv. 4. ,r->ciT ^OJfiiUev ucrfaufl j^utcu altcu ^iiJciii. 5. (Vanc^ l)at [djiucve ^-?lufnabcu neinad)t. 0. iiU^ l)a6cii (^utc lVad)btuii. 7. .£)cute Ijahcn lutv [d)onc?J liBetter. 8. iTicfc ed)uler (;ol)cu qute i\ebcvn aOer [d)rcd)te'j ^i^npicr. 9. ^d; l)a6c (\iite\\ Alafc unb gutesJ islcifd;. 10. Tcv il^ote brr.ditc unci \d)icd)tc 9?ad)vid)t. 11. Vicbcv (dear; T^ntcr, Ditte, faufe mir biefe il^lunieu. 12. $tebe 9Jhiucv, faufe mir [d)oue .Ulcibcv. i;i. (Mutcu ^JJiovc^cu, Wcbc Aienubc. 1 L Ta^ Sl'ui'o ift au[ ciueu ^tciu rtcfalleu, unb Ijcii \Ui) oie .^;>aub ucrlctjt. 15. :^d) luiiibe (^e| uneven Ijahcn, mnn id) nidjt fvnuf geu'efeu uiiive. C (Oral.) l.WaH fiiivBlumoii hat Thr Scliwestercln'ii ? 2. Haben die Kinder r^ute fri.sohe ^lilch ? 3. Haben sie auch gutes Brot ? 4. Was fiir Lektioneii halx'n die Schiiler heute gehabt ? 5. Was fiir Wetter werden wir mor^'en habiiii 1 6. Hal)en Sie gutes Pai)i(>r, mein Herr ? 7. Was fiir Tinte haben Sie ? 8. Was fiir Kiise verkauft Herr Miiller ? 9. Was fiir Kleider hat dir deine Mutter gekauft ? 10. Hat der Brief gute oder schlechte Kachricht gebracht I 11. Sind neue Freunde immer gute Freuride ? 12. Hat der Redner etwas Wichtiges gesagt ? 13. Liebe- Bruder, was hast du mir gebracht ? 14. Wie hat sich das Kind die Hand verletzt ? B. 1. My little sister has pretty flowers. 2. The children have good milk and fresh bread. 3. Please fill my glass with fresL water. 4. We have had hard exercises to-day. 5. They will not be so hard to-morrow. 6. Our teachers have indus- trious pupils. 7. Large trees do not always have good fruit. 8. Mr. Braun sells good cheese. 9. Dear mother, have you brought me good news ? 10. The orator said a great deal, but he said nothing important. 11. Good old wine is always dear. 12. If I had good paper and good ink, I should do my exercise now. 13. Good morning, dear father. 14. Do you 390 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. think we shall have fine weather to-day ? 15. George's sister has fallen on a stone, and has hurt her head. EXERCISE XXI, a. (§§ 112-114.) A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) luerbe beftraft, bu, k. 2. ^ct; bin von bem 2d)xtr beftraft luorben, bu, jc. 3. !^d) luerbc immer oom I'e^rev hcftxa\t, bu, :c. 4. (5^^ u)trb miv erlaubt, einen (Spa^^iergaug ju madjeu, e^ tyirb biv, 2c. 5. Tlan glaubt mir nidjt, man glaubt bir nid)t, k, 6. 9UJeine 5lr6eit ift fcl;ou gemadit, beiue, 2C. i?. 1. ®ag jlinb raivb gclobt, lueit ce> ortig ift. 2. ^ie Jtinbcr lucvben Dom Sel)ver gelobt. 3. Tk ©djiilcv finb von ben Vetjvevn beftvaft luorben. 4. Wix luerbeu beftraft luevben, luenu luir tvdgc f»nb. 5. ^iv tuuvben iiiiniev uon unferen (gltern gelobt, menu luir tlci^tg luareu. 6. ^a§ §au§, luorin mix xDot)ntm, ift oerfouft ujovben. 7. ®a§ §aug meiner ^ante rairb oerfauft roerben. 8. Unfere :i^efttouen finb fdjon genmdjt. 9. @ic raerben immer Dor bem 3D^iitag^effen gemadjt. 10. @g murbe nad) einem ^Irjte gefdjidt. 11. (Sg ift unij gefogt morben, \)a^ @ie franf feien. 12. (S§ mivb mir nidjt geglaubt. 13. 9D?on glaubt bief^m ^naben nid)t. 14. ©inb bie Soben fdjon gefc^loffen (closed) ? 15. dlcln, aber fie merben foeben ge]d;loffen. 16. ®ie[eg 33ilb murbe uon meiner ©djiuefter gemalt. 17. ®ie 23ilber, bie von biefem ^iinftler gemalt morben finb, finb fd)on uerfauft. 18. "J^iefe U!^r murbe mir von meinem ^ater gefd)enft. 19. ©ie murbe mir geftern ge[d;idt. C\ (Oral.) 1. Wer loht das Kind ? 2. Von wem wird das Kind gelobt ? 3. Warum ist das Kind gelobt worden 1 4. Wird deine Schwester gelobt werden 1 5. Von wem wii-d sie gelobt werden ? 6. Warum wurden die Schiiler bestraft ? 7. Warum sind sie bestraft worden ? 8. Ist dieses Haus verkauft 1 9. Wann wurde es verkauft ? 10. Wird das Haus Ihrer Tante morgen verkauft werden ? 11. Wann EXERCISES XXr-XXII. 391 e's sister , bu, 2C. ]d) luerbc ibt, einen iiir nid)t, gemocfjt, ie ^inbcr uir tvdge mnn mix oerfouft roerbcn. n iinmer em ^Irjte nt feten. t bief^m slosed) ? [e§ 33ilb bie Don ft. 18. 19. ®ie !m wird vorden ? ^m wird testraf 1 1 s Haus ird das Waiiii werden Ihre Lektionen gelernt ? 1 2. Sind sie schon gelcrnt ? 13. Warum glaubt man diesem Madchen nicht ? 14. Von wem ist Ihnen gesagt worden, dasz ich nicht zu Hause sei? 15, Von worn wurde Ihnen diese Uhr geschenkt? 16. Wann ist «ie Ihnen geschickt worden ? 17. Wird heute viel stTidiert Note. —When the participle is clearly a Predicate Adjective, translate "to be" (the copula) by "sein," otherwise by "werden,'' e.g.. The soldier is wounded, Der Soldat ist verwundet. The house was (being) built, Das Haus wurde gebaut. I). 1. The father praises the child. 2. The child i^ praised by its father. 3. The pupils are punished by th?ir teacher. 4. This pupil has been punished by his teacher. 5. He will be punished if he is lazy. 6. They will be punished if they are not industrious. 7. They were always punished when they did not do their exercises. 8. Their exercises are done already. 9. Our lessons are always learnt before dinner. 10. My uncle's house has been sold. 11. These houses will be sold. 12. I think they are sold already. 13. By whom were they bought? 14. The shops are clcs.-I already. 15. This man is never believed; he never tells the truth. 16. By whom was this watch given to you ? 17. When was it sent to you? 18. By whom was it brought? 19. A doctor will be sent for. 20. We w<^re told yesterday that your father was ill. EXERCISE XXII, a. (§§ 115-118). A. Continue the following: 1. 3a^ ndnc .^inb won biefcr Qvincu <\rau luuvbe von emcm bbfcu ,f>imb ncfcifjcn. 5. ':5)Qci a)Mbd)cu [d)nitt eiii '^tiirf uom nelbcii ikiibc ab. G. ^cr eorjii bicfccj nrnicit anauucd iff rrant. 7. (Mcffcvii Ijnbcn luir uiciutu Oiifel ill ber etobt bc[ud)t. 8. mdnc nvof^cn ^H-iibcr finb ouf bev Uuiucvfitnt. 9. mavk Ijat \l)x [djoncs iicucd .Ulcib .^crviffcu. 10. eic ift eiu uuavtigcd iliiib. 11. ^d) l;abe miv locate cine gutc, ncuc ^-cbcv oeFoiift. 12. -Die ^ilufnoben bicfer flcif^incn ©djiilcr fiiib [el)r gut gcmadjt. 1.3. Tcv flute altc Velji-cr bbt feiue flcif^iflcu ed)ulcv. 14. T^cv 'X^atcv gicbt [einen flcinigcu ^iubcvu ciu l)ubid)ec^, (Me[d)euf. 15. ^icfe vcidje '^anie uxjljut iu eineni fd)oucu, gvof^u J^oufe. 10. (Mcfteni Ijat fie il;vev Xodjtev cine pvad)tifle, golbcue ■^•eber gcfdjcuft. C. (Oral.) 1. AVen hatdor boso Himd gobissen? 2. Eh war ein baser Hund, nicht wahr ? 3. War es ein kloines Kind, das gebisseii wurde ? 4. Was fiir Hundo habon die kleinon Kinder gebissen ? 5. War es der Hund der alten Frau, von dem das kleine Kind gebissen wurde ? G. Die Tochter dieser arni(>n Frail ist krank, nicht wahr ? 7. War die Tochter Ihrer arnum Naclibarin nicht krank 1 8. Wer hat ein Stiick vom gellx'n Bande abgeschnitten ? 9. Wann haben Sie Ihren guten alten Onkel besiicht ? 10. Wohnt dieser gute Onkel nicht jetzt auf dem Lande ? 11. Wo sind jetzt Ihre grossen KSchwestern ? 1 2. Ist die kleine Marie nicht ein unartiges Kind 1 13. Weshalb sagen Sie, dass sie ein unartiges Kind ist? 14. Wo ist die gute, neue Feder, die Sie sich gekauft haben? 15. Sind Sie mit den Aufgaben dieser fleissigen Schiiler zufrieden ? IG. Wo wohnt diese reiche Dame? 17. Was fiir eine Feder hat sie ihrer jungen Tochter gekauft? 18. In was fiir einem Hause wohnt Ihre Nachbarin ? i>. K This (bie§) is a cross dog. 2. lie l,r.„s bitten a little girl. 3. The little girl has been bitten l)y a cross dog. 1. The cross dogs will bite us if we tease (necfcn) them. 5. The little on biefcr 5. Tia^ ex ^ofjii r mciuLU [iiib ouf ^crviffcn. eute eine fleifiigcn )rcr loht flcinigen \Vf)l)nt in Xodjtev , Eh war ind, das Kinder dem das ' arnieii r arnicn . gellx'ii 3n alteii etzt auf •n? 12. Veshalb ist die lind Si(^ 16. Wo hat sie I Hause a little 1. The le little EXERCISES XXII-XXIII. 393 daughter of this rich lady was bitten by a cross dog in (auf) the street. 6. Was your neighbour's little daughter not ill ? 7. Where does your good old uncle live now ? 8. He lives in a large city in Germany. 9. Little Mary is a naughty child. 10. She has torn her new dress. 11. Where is your new pen ? 12. I laid it on the large table in the library. 13. Are you satisfied with the work of these industrious pupils ? 14. Who lives in this fine, large house? 15. A rich lady from (aug) Germany and her daughter live in it. 16. She has given her nephew a fine gold watch. 17. Where are your young nephews now ? 18. They are in a good school in Berlin. EXERCISE XXIII, a. (§§ 119-120.) A. Supply suitable possessive pronoun forms in the blanks • 1. ^c^ madie meine 3lufga6e ; ^o^ann mad)t — ; Waxk ma6)t - ; fie madjm _. 2. Waxk l^at i\)x 33uc^ ; ^o^nn ^t - ; id; fiabe - ; ^te l)ahm -. 3. ^c^ [age eg ju meincm ^rcunbc ; hnMt eg su -; fie fagt e§ ju -. 4. ^c^ Uhtc meine ©diuler ; er lobte - ; fie lobten - ; (Sie lohUn - 1 mx lobten — . £. 1. ^d) fc^rie6 geftern an meinen 3Sater, unb @eorg fd^rieb an feinen. 2. mdn ^akx ift iel^t in ^arig, aber ber feinige ift m ©erlm. 3. ©eovg Ijat gute§ papier, aBcr mein§ ift fe^r fd)led)t 4. ©eine ^inte ift rot, unb bte meinige ift fd)wax^. 5. 5j)tefe,r ^^nt ift nieiner ; rao ift ber ^tirige ? 6. Set§en (Sic mix ^r)re mdjcx, unb id) raerbe ^§nen hie meinigen auc^ tet^en. 7. ®ie 5rpfel unfereg mad)Ux^. finb retf, aber hie unfrigen finb nod; nic^t reif. 8. ®{e ^(;rtgen finb auc^ reif, nic^t n^aBr ? 9. aJJeme It^r ift am ©olb; feine ift am ©ilber. 10. 2«arten§ 2:ante unb hie nteinige mad;en etne dieife aufammen na^ ^arig. 11. 3Jieine Zank ift fd)on ha geroefen, aber hit i^rtge nidit 12. mx lohen unfeven l'el;rer, unb (Sie loben ben .^^rigen 13. !Die ^ent\d)en lieben if)r ^^atexlanh, unb luir licben 'ha§ 394 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. unfcre. 14. ^c^ bin m'lt mciner 9trbett fertic^ ; .^arl ift mtt fcincr and) fevtig, abev l^ouife ^ot bie t()vige nod) nidjt geinarf)t. C. (Oral.) 1. Sind Sie mit Threr Arbeit fertig? 2. 1st Louise mit der ihrigen fertig 1 3. I.st Karl mit der seinigen aiich fertig ? 4. Warm wirst du an deinen Vater schreiben ? 5. Wann hat dein Freund an den seinigen geschrieben ? 6. Sind diese Handschuhe die Ilnngen ? 7. Wo sind die meinigen ? 8. Hat Georg audi die seinigen ? 9. Hat Marie auch die ihrigen ? 10. Meine Tinte ist schwarz ; ist die Ihrige schwarz oder rot ? 11. Wessen Buch haben Sie ? 12. Wessen Biicher hat Louise? 13. Sind die meinigen auf dem Tische in der Bibliothek ? 14. Wo sind die meinigen ? D. \. 1 have written to my parents. 2. George has written to his. 3. They have written to theirs. 4. Your teacher is young, but mine is old. 5. This hat is yours ; where is mine ? 6. These gloves are yours ; where are mine ? 7. If they lend us their books, we sliall lend them ours. 8. Charles has learnt his lesson. 9. I have learnt mine too. 10. Louisa hasn't learnt hers yet. 11. Your aunt has been in Paris, but mine has not been there yet. 12. My aunt and yours took a journey to Germany togetli^}r. 13. My book is on the bench. 14. Has George his? 15. We haven't ours yet. 16. Ours are on the table in the library. 17. I have lent mine to my brother George. 18. I lend my books to him, and he lends his to me. 1 9. What sort of paper do you want, blue or white ? EXERCISE XXIV, a. (§§ 121-124.) A. Decline throughout : ber ^ranfe, ein ^Blinber, bie .^xanU, bcr Bevii^mte ^iinftlev, ba?. [d)one hlanc 5tugc, bev fdjone Ijolje 33onm, ein 9tei|enbev, ber ITentfdje. B. Continue the following: 1. ,^\d) go|,' bno "ii^nffev an^i, bn, K. 2. ^d) rod) bie fd)one Oiofe, bu, jc. 3. ^jd) fled)te eineu EXERCISE XXIV. 395 [ ift mtt nad)t. 2. 1st seinigen ireiben ? irieben 1 sind die ,t Marie ie Ihrige Wessen a Tische ! written acher is is mine ? ley lend rles has . Louisa iris, but I took a ) bench. 6. Ours i to my ends his [• white 1 hte Ijolje jev auoi, l;te eium ilvaii^ au^ Diofeit, bit, 2c. 4. ^d) bcqof^ bie 33tumeu im (sjavtcu, bu, 2C. 5. ,3d) {juk bee '^lOcubci bie Jtiilje nemolfeu, bu, k. C. 1. 3)ie[e gate 2)ame bc[urf)t bie ^Ivnufeu im ^-^ofpitol. 2. ®{e bvingt ben llvanfeu jebcu Za^ ^Mumeu. .3. Unter ben £ranfen ift ein armei ^linbev. 4. Cfr ift ber guten ^ome feljr bontbar, unb l^at il^r befljalb einen fdjonen fteinen koxh ge[lod)ten. 5. ©in beriifjmter ^itnftler woljnt neben un§. 6. mx fennen biefen bevitljmten 9JJann ganj gut. 7. (Sjv ift ein :Deutfd)er. 8. ^iele ©eutfdje ^ahcn hiaut ^itugen. 9. Unfer ^ad)hax ^at and; fdjone, blaue 5tugen unb langeg, blonbeg ^aar. 10. @ein §au§'ift jet^t ge[d)lo[[en, benn er befudjt bie ^arifer 3lugfteUung. 11. ®er 9teif enbe, ber geftern bet un§ tear, loirb au6) Vic 5lu§fteaung befuc^en. 12. ^n unferem ©arten fte^t dn fd)oner, ^o^er 5lpfel6aum. 13. (gg finb oiete reife 3ipfel barauf. 14. 5ll§ i6) auf bem ^anhc wax, IjaU id) oft bie itii^e gemolfen, unb bie 53tumen begoffen. JJ. (Oral.) 1. Warum ist das Haus Ihres Nachbars geschlossen ? 2. Wohin ist er gereist ? 3. Welche Ausstellung besucht er 1 4. Ist Ihr Nachbar nicht ein deutscher Kunstler ? 5. Ist er nicht ein beriihmter Mann ? 6. Was fur Augen hat er ? 7. Was fiir Haar hat er ? 8. Haben die Deutschen oft grosse, blaue Augen 1 9. Heisst dieser Reisende nicht Miiller ? 10. Besucht er auch die Pariser Ausstellung? 11. Wie heisst der arme Blinde, der uns soeben begegnet ist ? 12. Sind viele Kranke in diesem Hospital ? 13. Besucht deine Mutter die Kranken im Hospital ? 14. Bringt sie den Kranken Blumen? 15. Wie heisst der Blinde, der ihr den Korb geflochten hat? 16. Haben Sie den schonen Apfelbaum bemerkt? 17. Ist das grosse Gebaude in dieser Strasse nicht eine Kirche ? 18. Wer begiesst die Blumen ? 19. Wer hat sie gestern begossen ? ^. 1. This artist is a celebrated man. 2. I think he is a German. 3. He has large blue eyes and long blond hair. 396 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. 4. He lives in a large house beside ours. T). In front of his house stands a tall tree. 6. He is not at home now and his house is closed. 7. He is in Paris. 8. He is visitiiiir the Paris exposition. 9. His wife (jvvau) is a kind lady. 10. She visits the sick, and brings them bread and wine. 11. A patient in the hospital has woven a pretty little basket for her. 12. He is a blind man. 13. The blind often weave baskets. 1 4. The gardener was watering the flowers. 1 .^. The maid was milking the cows. 16. Are the cows milked ? 17. A:.^ the flowers watered ? 18. Yes, the gardener has watered them. 19. He always waters them in the evening. 20. When I was at my uncle's I used to water the garden every evening. EXERCISE XXV, a. (§§ 125-131.) A. Supply comparative and superlative forms in the blanks : I. ®er veidjc STconn, bev — Wlann, bev — 9Jlann. 2. (§:in alteg ^kib, tin — ^leib, ein — jtleib. 3. ^d) bin gvof^, \)u hift — , er ift — . 4. S)iefer 33aiun tft I)oc^, jener i\t — , ber S3aum vox bem §au[e ift — . 5. ^axk ift ftavf, I'ouife ift — , (Sophie ift — . 6. ^d) lenie uiel, bu lernft — , er lernt — . B. 1. Die ^oge finb Icinger iir griiljUng al^ im SSintev, aber tm ©ommer finb fie am Idngften. 2. ^m ©ommer l^oben loir bie langften ^age unb im SBintev bie fiivgeften. 3. Da§ ^Better ift im (Bommer am mdrmften, unb im SBinter am fdlteften. 4. !lDie (Slbe ift ein bveiterer glu^ aU bev dll)dn. 5. ^c^ ^abe meine ht\tc i^eber uerloren. 6. ^d) ^abe bie ^cber uevloren, bie am beften fd)rieb. 7. SiJJein dltefter 33niber befudjt jel^t hk Unioerfitdt. 8. SJleine jiingfte @d)iuefter ift in 33evlin auf ber (Bd)uU, 9. Unfer S^an^ ftel^t ber ^ircjie ndl^er al^ bag S^jvige. 10. Unferc ^tufgaben finb (jeutc fd^raerer, aU fie geftern raaren. II. ^d) rtloiifip. fig finh ficute pfien fn Iptfbt ^fc^ rtpftprn 19 9^ir l^aben immer am ^reitag bie l'eid)teften ^ilufgaben. 13. ®a§ EXERCISE XXV. S97 eifeii ift iiiitaicf)cv aU ba^ ©olb ; c^ ift ba^ uiUjiarf)fte 3!}Jctaa. 14. !l)ag i)iiil3lid)e ift beffer al^ ba^ ec^oiie. 15. iifiiv 3ogeu unfeve luiinnfteii .Hleibev an, m'li bo^ iBettev (iuf^eift fait lyar. 16. Ta- Sivanh ocvUevt jeben Xag ilraft ; ev ift t;eute [djiucidjer alg geftevn. C. (Oral.) 1. Wanii ist das Wetter am warmsten ? 2. Sind die Tage langer iin Winter als im Sommer ? 3. In welcher Jahreszeit {season) haben wir die kiirzesten Tage? 4. In welcher Jahreszeit sind sie am liingsten ? 5. Ist der Sankt Lorenz langer als die Elbe? 6. Ist er auch breiter ? 7. Ist er der breiteste Fluss Amerikas ? 8 Wo ist jetzt Karls jiingster Bruder ? 9. Wo ist seine alteste Sch wester ? 10. Welche von Ihren Federn haben Sie verloren ? 11. Welclies ist das niitzlichste Metall ? 12. Welches ist am schwersten, das Blei oder das Gold? 13. Sind Ihre Aufgaben eben so schwer im Sommer als im Winter? 14. Warum ziehen die Leute heute ihre warmsten Kleider an ? 15. Weshalb hat Georg sei ne Handschuhe ausgezogen ? 16. Ist dieser Apf elbaum hoher aL ^ener ? 17. Giebt der hochste Baum immer die besten Apfel ? D. 1. The tallest trees do not always bear the best apples. 2. This is a tall tree. 3. The apples on it are extremely small. 4. The days are longer now than they were in winter. 5. The weather too is warmer. 6. The nights are longest in winter, and the days coldest. 7. My best gloves are lost. 8. I put them on yesterday. 9. I took them off in the garden, and lost them in the grass. 10. Iron is the most useful of the metals. 11. It is not so valuable (tuertuon) as gold, but it is more useful. 12. Mr. Miiller is a richer man than Mr, Braun. 13. My youngest brother is as tall as I am, but he does not weigh as much. 14. lie weighed more two years ago. 1 5. The largest people are not always the strongest. 398 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. EXERCISE XXVI, a. (§§ 132-144.) A. 1. T)a^^ ift mciiic ,Vbcv. 2. '^Mco [iub mciiic bcftcn i^cbern. 3. 3)a^ ift bei[el6c ,^>cn-, ber nm gcftciii bcgcgnetc. 4. !l)tt§ finb bicfclbcn S)amen, bie gefteru ?ibenb im itonjert gefuugcii Ijabcu. 5. ®ieg ift bie ^rau eine^ berii^mten ^unftier^, uub bag ift bie ^xau eiueg veidjen ^aufmanneg. 6. @old) gute ©dngerinneu \)ahe id) uie geprt. 7. 2)crienige, iyelcl;er reid) ift, ift nid)t immer aufrieben. 8. 2Ber arm ift, ift nid^t immer ungliidlid;. 9. Unfer ^am ift uerfauft morben, roie and) ba^jenige, juorin rair uor ^loei >^ren iuol;nten. 10. 3)ieier SfJing ift lyertuoUer, aU berjenige meiner ©d)n)efter. 11. 2)ergleidjen D^iuge finbet man nid)t in ben fleinen Sdben. 12. 2Bir ()aben unferc 33iid)er, raie aud; biejenigen ber anbern ®d)uler, au\ bem ^ifc^e gefunben. 13. ^er ^err, ber ertrunfen ift, ift ber[el6e, mit bem id) md) 2)eut[c^raub reifte. 14. Cicero unb 35ergil maren beru^mte 9tomer ; biefer tear ^iditer, jener mar ^ebner. 15. ^d) erinnere (mid) beffen), mag unfer alter .Seper »on i^nen erja^lte. 16. Sffiir ]^a6en nie [0 einen guten :ge^rer geljabt, alg ben. 17. S^erjenige, hen mir je^t ^ben, gibt ung immer [djmere 5lu[gaben, unb ift babei auc^ [e^r ftreng. B. (Oral.) 1. Wer waren Cicero und Yergil ? 2. Was war dieser ? 3. Was war jener ? 4. Wer hat Ihnen von denselben erzahlt? 5. Erinnern Sie (sich dessen) noch, was er von denselben erzahlte? 6. War er ein guter Lehrer? 7. 1st derjenige, den Sie jetzt haben, nicht besser ? 8. Der Lehrer, den Sie jetzt haben, ist derselbe, den Sie seit einem Jahr haben, nicht wahr? 9. Ist der nicht sehr streng? 10. Haben Sie jemals einen so prachtigen Ring gesehen? 11. 1st er nicht wertvoller, als der der Frau Miiller? 12. Haben arme Leute solche Ringe? 13. Sind das meine Biicher auf dem Tische? 14. Wohin hat Georg mein Buch und dasjenige meiner Schwester gelegt ? 1 5. Ist der, der arm ist, immer im^liicklich ? 16. War das deine Tante, die uns auf der Strasse begegnete? It i^cbern. 3)a§ finb eii l)abcu. lag ift bie ttgerinnen d)t immer 9. Un[er ' uor ^raei bevjenige : n\d)t in toie aud; 13. !3jer utfc^laub : ; biefer cc (mid) 16. mx )crjenige, , unb ift if^.^as war enselben er von 7. I.st Lehrer, r haben, -ben Sie 3r nicht e Leute Tische ? meiner icklich ? ;egnete ? EXERCISES XXVI-XXVII. 399 17. Tst (lies nicht mcinc Foder ? 18. Tst jeno Dani(^ nidit dio Frau ('iru!.s Ijcriilimton Kiiii.stlcr.s ? 0. 1. Cicero and Vergil wore Romans; the latter was a poet, and the former an orator. 2. I remember what I learnt about them in school. 3. Do you not admire this ring ? 4. Yes, I have never seen so fine a ring. 5. Is it finer thin your aunt's ? 6. Only very rich people have such rings. 7. Who is the lady whom we just met ? 8. That is the lady who sang such a beautiful song at the (ini) concert. 9. I do not think that is the same lady. 10. I found your book on the table, and your brother's on a bench. 11. This is not my pen ; it is my sister's. 12. He who is rich is often unhappy. 13. Those who are poor are often happier than the rich. 14. Which Mr. Miiller did you know? 15. I knew the one who was drowned last year, when he was travelling in Switzerland. EXERCISE XXVII, a. (§§145-159.) A. Continue the following : 1. ^^c^ ^be jemanb gel^olfen, bu, ic. 2. ^d) ^be nid)tg lueggeiuorfeu, 'ou, k. 3. ^c^ marf ctma§ auf hm Xifc^, bu, jc. 4. ^ebermann lobte mtc^, — lobte bic^, K. 5. ^d) lourbe niemonb ^elfen, bu, jc. 6. ^d) oerlor feing von meinen 33udjern, bu, k. R 1. ^ebevmonn ^at btefen iungen §crrn gem. 2. Tlan fogt md @uteg oon i^m. 3. $Riemanb [agt etu)a§ gegen i^. 4. ajJan rei^t i^m gem @elb, mnn er fein§ ^t. 5. (Sr ^ilf; and) benjentgen gem, bie ntc^t§ ^ben. 6. ^eberniann rutrb Sr;nen bosfelbe von i(jm [agen. 7. Wlc^xm von meinen g^reunben ^aben mir ©efdienfe ^um @eburt§tag gefdjidt 8. (Sinige baoon finb fefir mertooa. 9. Wlan [agt, baj^ man fid) am letditeften erfaltet, itjenn man miibe ift. 10. mand)ex ^at eine '>ilxheit begonnen, biefer nic^t ooaenbet ^at 11. Giner oon biefen 5{pfeln ift uerbovben ; idj luevbe i^n raegtuerfen. 12. ^d) l;abe fc^on me^rere baoon meggeioovfen. 13. 2Bevfen @ie feine ivcQ, 400 SUPPLEMENTARY EXIillCISES. bic nod) flut fiiib. 14. '^hw mcnij^c Vcute i)ahcn biefcn '2ommcv ^^ovi'^ i)t|iict)t. 15. i^ie .Uauflciitc l)abcu beol)alb miv lucuii^ (Mclb ciuj^cnonimcii. Ki. ii^cuilpft beffer al'5 c\ai' nid)tci. 17. ;^ebcv; maun lobt bic 8d)u lev, bic flcif^ij^ [iiib. IS. 3iicmaub luiib gclobt, bcv [eiiie ^ilufgabeu n\d)t rid)tig madjt. 6*. (Oral.) 1. Sagt man viel Gutes von den iloisHigen Schuloi-n? 2. Worden sie von jcdcrinann gelobt? 3. Wird jemand gelobt, der nicht gut arbeitet ? 4. Sagt man etwaa Gutes von den triigen SuhiiU'i'n ? 5. Von wem sagt man nichts Gutes ? 6. Jedermann hat Herrn Miiller gern, nicht wahr ? 7. Hilft er gern jederinann ? 8. Leiht cr einem gern Geld, wenn man keins hat '( 9. Hat irgend jemand diese sell were Aufgabe rich tig gemacht ? 10. Wurde irgend jemand gestern vom Lehrer gelobt 1 11. KSind einige von diesen Apfeln verdorben 1 12. Sie haben mehrere Freunde in Paris, nicht wahr 1 13. Hat Karl eins von seinen Biichern verloren ? 14. Wann erkaltet man sich am leichtesten ? 15. Hat dieser General nicht manche Schlacht gewonnen 1 16. Haben Sie etwas verloren, mein Herr ? D. 1. Nobody likes this young man. 2. People (man) say a great deal of bad about him. 3. Everybody says something against him. 4. Nobody says any good of him. 5. He helps nobody. 6. He has never helped anybody. 7. He gives nothing to the poor. 8. My sister received (er^lten) several presents on her birthday. 9. Some of them were very pretty. 10. One of George's books is spoilt. 11. Somebody found it in the grass under a tree. 12. One takes cold easily when one is tired. 13. We have taken (madjen) many a journey to Switzerland. 14. That lady has lost something, and she is looking for it. 1 5. The maid is helping her to look for it. 16. Nobody has helped us to do our exercises. 17. We have been promised help. EXERCISE XXVIII. 401 Wird gives EXERCISE XXVIII, a. (i,i^ 163-167.) A. Cinitimn' (lu« folic. vvin^' : I. ,^\d) lpicii)c uom bcut[d)CU £oi[cr, bii, K, 2. ;\d) fom inimcv bed imn(^ciid an, bu, jc. 3. ^d; I;nl)e eiii 9)k[icv nc6vod)cu, bad filiif Wiaxt lueit iuav,'bu* K. 4. j;ia6e id; bcu iuuflcii 3Jiaun enipfoljleii V, t;aft bu, jc. //. 1. i9m minnte \)at [ed;^ig ©cfunbcn. 2. (?ine etunbe Ijat [edj^ig ^JJ^imitcii. -A. {^m lag l)at uier imb jioan^ig etimben. 4. (fine 5l9od)e l)at ficbcii 'lage. 5. {S:in monat l)at gciubljulid) b'-ei[^ig !lage. 0. !5)ev Wlomt ^ebruar ()at eutiueber adjt imb 5iuanjig obev neun imb ^wan^iq ^oge. 7. ^n einem (^^alt\ai)vc (leap year) Ijat ev neun unb ^luan^ig ^age. 8. ^ier von ben 9JJonaten l)ahcn nuv brciilig Xage. 9. C^in ,/Dortar" dou unferem ©elbe Ijat rimibeit „^fentd." 10. Sir aiifjten nad) (by) „ bollard'' unb „(5entd.'' 11. ^n ^eutfc^tanb acirjtt man bad @elb nac^ 9Qkvfeu unb ^fennigen. 12. ^n einer 9)Jarf finb ^unbert ^i^fennige. 13. (fine ^axt ift ungcfnlji- fo uiet toert, aid fiiuf unb siuanaig ,,^mt^^^ von unferem @elbe. 14. Um „ bollard " in 9J?avfen ^u mec^[eln, multipiciert man mit uier. 15. Um 9^arten in „ bollard " ju med^feln biuibiert man im ©egenteil mit oier. 16. 3um 23eifpiel, M. 7,20 betragt (amounts to) in unferem ®elbe einen ,,T)oHax" adjtjig ,,(?entd." 17. a^ein 33ater i)at fein ^aud fiir ^e^n taufenb brei ^unbert unb fiinfjig a^arf uerfauft. 18. 2Bie mel mad)t bad in 5(merifanifd)em @elbc ? C. (Oral.) 1. Count in German up to 30. 2. Repeat in German: 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 1000. 3. Wie ziihlt man das Geld in Deutschland ? 4. Wie viele Pfennige hat eine Mark ? 5. Wie viele Pfennige sind in drei Marken ? 6. Wie viele Marken sind vier " Dollars " wert ? 7. Wie wechselt'man Marken in "Dollars"? 8. Wie wechselt man " Dollars " in Marken ? 9. Wie viel von unserem Gelde sind M. 8,60 wert? 10. Wie viel haben Sie fiir dieses Buch 402 8UPPLKMKNTAKY KXKUCM8KS. bczalilt ? 11. \Vi(i vicl jiat das f luus Tlircs NuchlMirs ^('kostct ? 12. Wio vicl (Jcld luitdcr Die!) <,'('.st<)lili'n '? \:\. Wic vicl war (las Fciistr die ganzo Zoit an dor Strasse? 11. Habon Sio Ihm etwas gegobon ? 12. Woshalb halnm Sio ihra koin Geld gegoben ? 13. Hatton Sie koins boi sich {with you)'i 14. Wio vioie KirscluMi haben Sic ihm gegobon? 15. Hat er alio Kirschen gloich gegesson ? 1(5. Hat er audi alios Brot gegesson ? D. 1. There are people who beg who are not poor. 2. Not all the people who beg are poor. 3. Some people have not enough to eat, but they do not beg. 4. The beggar of whom this school-boy tells was really poor. 5. He had lain in the hospital a whole year. 6. At last he had got well. 7. He sat in front of the school, and asked the people for something to eat. 8. Many people went past, and gave him nothing. 9. Some believed his story, and gave him a little money. 10. The school-boy saw that he was weak and hungry. 1 1. He gave the poor sick-man a icw cherries. 12. It was not much, but it was all he had with him. 13. He had forgotten his purse. 14. All his money was in his purse at home. 15. All this happened yesterday. 1 o. The poor-man does not always forget the kindness of the lich. EXERCISE XXX, a. (§§ 182-186.) A. 1. ^d) l)ahc eijicii 'i^vicf nn meinen iHrubcr ju fdivciben. 2. '^d} [d)vei6e ifjiit breimal bev ^^i3odje, urn iljiu ^^u er^idt^leu, lua^ ic^ jeben Xag madje. 3. ^eute Mn id) md) ber (Bta'ot gefaf)ren. 404 SUPPLKMKNTARV EXERCISES. 4. ^unft neun nijv ftanb ber "Bac^cn vox bcv 3:(juvc. 5. ^d) ftic(j ein, unb bcv .Hutfd^er ful^r ah. 6. 3^ie ©tabturjr fdjlug tjolb 5cr;u, als loir aufamen. 7. ^d; I)Iic6 einc ^i^ievtelftunbe beim ed;neibcv, urn mciucii neueu 5(n^ug (suit) an^uprobiereu (try on). 8. Qx luivb M. 75,00 roftcii. ' 9. lliii seljii Winut.n Dor 5e(;u luar ic^ beim ,Outmad;er. 10. Wi iljm Ijahc id) miv cincu ^iit bcftellt, bcv M. 9,50 fofteii luirb. 11. llm ciii "^kxtd auf elf bc[ud)te id; ,^um ^wciicn mal bcii ?trU. 12. ^d) Ijattc i(;ii [d)on uov ad)t ^agcu jitm crften mnl befudjt. 13.^ Uin ein ^iertel auf eiu^ Ijahc id) 511 mitten^ oeneffcu. U. ®ie 9ied;uimg betrug M. 3,75, mit 25 ^4?fennig '4:iinfnelb. 15. $Rad) bem ©ffen bin id; im ^avt fpa^ieven nefaljveu, unb uni 25 9J£inuten Dov fed;g luar id) tuiebcr ,^u .r)aufe. IG. 'a: ami l)ahe id) eine ^ofje 3:r;ee (^ctrnnfcn, unb jet^t luerbe id; nieiuen ^Brief fdjveiben. i?. (Oral.) 1. Hcute liaben wir den zelinten, nicht wahr ? 2. Wie viel Ulir ist es nach Ihrer Ilhr ? 3. Sind Sie heute nach der Stadt gc^faliren ? 4. Uni wie viel Uhr sind Sie abgefahren? 5. Urn wie viel Uhr sind Sie angekoi.imen ? 6. Bei wem sind Sie ziierst gewesen ? 7. Wie lange sind Sie beim Hutmaclier geblieben ? 8. Wie viel kostet Ihr neuer Anzug ? 9. Urn wie viel Uhr sind Sie beim Schneider angekomnien? 10. Wo waren Sie urn ein Viertel auf elf? If 1 1 . Uin wie viel Uhr essen Sie gewohnlich zu Mittag 1 12. Una wie viel Uhr haben Sie lieute zu Mittag gegessen ? 13. Wie viel Trinkgeld liaben Sie dem Kellner gegeben ? 14. Was haben Sie nach dem Essen gemacht ? 1 5. Waren Sie vor sechs Uhr zu Hause? 16. Haben Sie heute Abend zwei Tassen Thee getrunken ? 1 7. Weshalb schreiben Sie an Ihren Bruder ? C. 1. My brother writes to me twice n week. 2. He tells me what he does every day. 3. The day before yesterday he drove to the city. 4. The clock was striking ten when he set out. 5. He visited liis tailor and his hatt(M'. 6. He remained only a iiuarter of an hour at the hatter's. 7. At the tailor's EXERCISES XXX-XXXI. 405 5. m d)v f dj lug :vte(fhmbe iprobiereii JJ^inutcit e id) mir In ^iertel ^d) Ijattc . Uin ein !)Jed)uung lad) bem 3)£inuten id) eine |d;reiben. t wahr ? ie heute sind Sie ouimeii ? sind Sie ir neuer Lihneider Eiuf elf ? 12. Uiii 13. Wie 4. Was 'or sechs Tassen Briider ? Fie tells rday he I lie set 3maiTie(l tailor's he ordered a suit which will cost eighty-five marks. 8. His new hat will cost him twelve marks and a half. 9. He dined at a quarter to one. 10. The bill amounted to five marks and forty-five pfennigs. 11. Hg gave the waiter thirty or (bis) forty pfennigs. 12. After dinner ho visited the doctor. 13. He will visit him for the third time a week from to-day. 14. At ten minutes to four he went for a drive in the park. 16. In an hour and a half he was at home again. 16. Then he dj-ank two cups of tea, and wrote a few letters. 17. All that is interesting (iutereffant) (for) him, perhaps, but it is not interest- ing (for) me. EXERCISE XXXI, a. (§§ 187-188.) A. @iu (5belmann (nobleman) ging radr^rcnb grower ©onnens Ijil^e (heat of the sun) in [eincm ©orten fpc^ieveu unb \a^ ben ©cirtner, ber biejcn 33eiud) nid)t txwaxkt i)atk, unter einem ^kume [djlafen. Bornig ging ev auf il;n log (go at, attack) unb rief : „ ©djelm H liegft l)ier, anftatt 3U avBeiten ; bu uerbienft \M)t, ha^ hid) bie ®oune he]d)eint'' S)er ©cirtner antwoxtcH: ,, ©erobe be§l;alB \)aht id) mid) in 'i)tn (^d)aik\x gelegt." B. Continue the following: 1. ^d) ging ini ©arten [pajiercit, bu, K. 2. ^c^ fdjlafe unter einem 33aume, \i\\, jc. 3. ^d) \d)\it\ unter einem 33aume im ©arten, \i\i, jc. 4. ^d) ging auf "t^txv ©(irtner lo§, )i\x, jc. 5. ^d) liege l;iev m\Mi ^u arbeiten, bu, }c. 6. Give the principal parts (§ 28) of fa^, liegft, kfc^eint. G. (Oral.) 1. Von wem erzahlt man diese Geschichte ? 2. Wo ging der Edelmann einst spazieren ? 3. War das Wetter sehr heiss ? 4. Wen sah der Edelmann ? 5. Was machte der Gartner 1 G. Erwartete er wohl diesen Besuch ? 7. Gefiel dem Herrn das Betragen {conduct) des Giirtners ? 8. Auf wen ging der Ilerr los ? 9. Was rief er dem Gartner ■/Ml 10. Arbeitete der Gartner? 11. Was that er, anstatt I 406 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES. zu arbeiten ? 12. Wohin hatte er sich gelogt ? 1 3. Wo lag er ? 14. Besclnen ihn die Soiino ? 15. Logte er sich in den Schatten, auf (hi.ss die Sonne ihn nicht bescheine 1 D. 1. How are you to-day ? 2. Have you gone for a walk? 3. We went for a walk in tlie garden. 4. I shall go for a drive. 5. The gardener is sleeping. 0. 'J'lie gentleman calls his gardener. 7. He does not let him sl(;ep {infin). 8. The gardener runs to him. 9. He attacks the gardener. 10. He calls to him : " You are lying in the shade ; you were sleeping instead of working ; tliis does not please me ; why did you lie down (fid^ legeii) under a tree («cc.)'?" 11. The gardener begins to speak, and answers thus : " I am in the wrong ; I do not deserve that the sun should shine-on me ; therefore I lay down in the shade." ^. 1. A lazy gardener was working in the garden of a nobleman. 2. He had cut down (umljaiien) a tree, and was tired. 3. He lay down under a tree, and was sleeping. 4. His master went for a walk in the garden. 5. He found the man lying (infin.) in the shade. 6. He went at him angrily, and called to him. 7. " Rascal, why are you lying here 1 8. You were sleeping instead of working. 9. Such people don't deserve that the sun should shine-on them." 10. The gardener began to speak, and said. 11. "You are right; I was lying in the shade, because I did not deserve that the sun should shine-on me, and therefore I lay down under a tree." J % i EXERCISE XXXII, a. (§§ 189-194.) A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) bttte um ©ntfd^ulbigung (pardon), bu, k. 2. ^d) 6ot bem airmen ein ^iM 33vot, bu, k. 3. !^d) bete immev niovgeuS unb abenb^j, bu, k. 4. ^d; hat um O^-ntfd^ulbigung, hu, u\ 5. !^d) Ijahc sn (^ott K^chcki, hn, k. 6. !^d) lag uutcv ciiicm bicfcu ^-Ikume, bu, ic. 7. 'M) l)ahc oubcvt- l)a\h (^tuubeu ba (3elc(3eu, bu, jc. 8. '^d) legte 'oa^e!tion levnen, I am to (ought to, am told to) learn this lesson. 10. ^d) mill meiue i'eftion levnen, I will (wish to, intend to) learn my lesson. 11. ^d) mevbe fie uor ge^ \Xf)X levnen, I shall learn it before ten o'clock. B. Continue the following: 1. ^d) meij^ mo bie[ev J^evv n)ol)nt, bn, 2c. 2. ^d) tenne \)a^ ,g)an§, movin ev moljnt, bu, jc. 3. ^d) bavf l^ente nid)t auggel)en, hu, k. 4. ^d) fann biefen (Sal) md)t vcx\td)cn, bu, k. 5. ^d) mag gevn be^ movgen^ fpajteven ge^en, 'ou, k. 6. ^d) mag biefen C^evvn nidjt, hn, k, 7. 'M) mu| Dor funf Uljv ju ^aufe feln, bu, k. 8. ^d) fott "ocn ganjcn ^ag ju §aufe bleiben, bu, k. 9. ^d) mitt tjeute xcd)t fleiBig arbeiten, bu, 20. 10. ^d) mevbe movgen obev iibevmovgen ttbreifen, ^n, 2C» C 1. I must now write a letter to my father. 2. I am to write this letter before (the) tea (5lbenbeffen). 3. I cannot find my pens. 4. Will you lend me a pen? Charles will not lend me his. 5. With pleasure (3Sevgniigen), but you must not lose it. 6. I do not like this pen ; it is too soft (meid)). 7. Nobody likes to write with a bad pen. 8. We know this lady, but we do not know where she lives. 9. Can you tell me where she lives? 10. Mary cannot learn this hard lesson. 11. Are we to study the whole evening? 12. No, you may go for a walk- after dinner ((Sffen). 13. May I go out w^ien I have w^-itten my EXERCISES XXXIII XXXIV. 409 ?cftiou, I 1 do not i)t lernen, lerucn, I ^d) mag i) inac^ [ic [pa^^ieven • a walk. ^ou were? 1 told to) n, I will DC fie uor efev .^evv it, bu, K. iefen (Sat^ [pajiemt . 7. 'M) en gan^cn d)t fleiBig krmorgeu , I am to mnot find t lend me 3t lose it. , Nobody y, but we Adhere she , Are we or a walk 'itten my exercise? 1 i. You may go out now if you wish. 15. I do not wish to go out yet. 1 G. Do you like to take a walk in the morning? 17. Can you {2 sing.) not take a walk with me, George ? 18. We must not remain [any] longer ; we must go now. 19. When will you (2 siny.) learn your lesson, Louisa? 20. You must know it to-morrow. 21. Louisa must know her lesson before six o'clock, or she will not be allowed to go to the Cms) concert. 22. Thou shalt not steal. 23. Charles is not to lend his books to the other boys. 24. We will not lend you {2plnr.) our books. 25. We do not like to lend our books. 26. Do you know where (luorjin) I laid my gloves? I cannot find them. 27. Does Mary know where they are? 28. I know not what I shall do. 29. May I ask you to lend me some money ? 30. I do not know you, and therefore I do not know how I can lend you money. EXERCISE XXXIV, a. (§§ 197-202.) A. Observe the following: 1. m^ id) Jung max, fonnte x^ fe^r gut fdjicimmen, When I was young I could swim very well. 2. ^c^ fijnnte beffer fd)reiben, loenn \6) tint gute '^eber Ijaiit, I could write better if I had a good pen. 3. ^d) ^abe nie gut [c^reiben fonnen, I have never been able to write well. 4. ^c6 ^(itte \n^ ^onsert gefjen fonnen, luenn ic^ geraoat ^citte, I could have gone to the concert if I had wished. 5. ^c^ wevbe morgen ni^t tn§ ^onsert gel^en fonnen, I shall not be able to go to the concert to-morrow. 6. %{^ ^inb muf^te id) \x\\l) ^u 33ette getjen, When I was a child I had to go to bed early. 7. ^d; mitfete au .^oufe bleiben, loenn \^ meine ^tufgobc nidjt mad)te^ I should have to stay at home if I did not do my exercise. 8. ^d) ^abe meine 5Iufgabe abfdireiben miiffen, I have been obliged to copy my exercise. 9. ^d) ^citte ju J>ni|e blciben miiffen, luenn \d) meine 5lufga6e nid;t gemad)t l)Uit, I should have had to remain at home if I had not done my exercise. 10. ^d) mevbe nod) 110 SUFPLKMENTARY KXEIKMSKH. ^tDci (Btuubcn av6citcn niiiffeu, I shall liavo to work two hours nioro. 11. ^^Uo .Uinb modjte id) uidjt $iiv Sd)ulc a,d)cn, aber id) mu^te, As a child I did not like to go to school, hut I had to. 12. !^d) mod)te ^-jjari^ bc[ud)en, lucnn id) (^clb qcnui^ Ijiittt, I should lik(3 to visit Paris if 1 had fuiough money. 13. ^d) Ijahc l)eute nid)t au^geljen nii3(^cu, T liavo not cared to go out to- day. 14. ^d) (jcittc 'Oa^ ]d)cn mbo^cn, I should like '.-> have seen that. B. Continue the following: 1. ^d) !onnte nidjt frii()ei !ommeu, bu, 2C. 2. !^se exercises are badly written ; we shall have to copy them. 1 5. We have been (jbliged to write every exercise twice. 16. We did not wish to do it, but we have been obliged to do it. 17. If the weather had been cold, we should have had to stay at home. 18. We had to stay at home, because the weather was ho cold. 19. We must stay at liome. 20. We are not allowed to go out in the evening. 21. As [a] child George was la/y, and did not like to study. 22. I should like to take KXKHCISKS XXXI \ -X.X'XV 111 WO hours , aber id) I had to. ()dtte, I 13. ^c^ JO out to- vdvc seen )t friiljci m, bu, 2C. evbe biefe have not )e able to she had e able to years ago ad better narks if I e-as-much school to- exercise. em badly, did them hull have y exercise sn obliged )uld have 'cause the }. We are Id George ke to take a walk after dinm«r if the weather is Hj.p. l';!. SImmiM you like to go with me? L>1. T do not ean^ to go for a wulk when it is dark. 25. ] should have liked to visit BerUn when I was in Germany. 1>G. 1 liad to come home earlier than T liked ((]efaUcn). 27. Could you lend me a good pen ; T should like to write to my father. 28. You might write with this [one]. 29. 1 hav(. tried to wi-ite with it, but I have not Ixvn able to do it. 30. Do you think you will be able to do this exercise, without mistakes ? EXERCISE XXXV, a. (gj^ 197-202.) A. Observe the following : 1. Xa^^ .fliub buvfte nie fpiit auf61etben, The child was nc.ver allow.vl to stay up late. 2. iS^ biivfte aufbleikn, wmi eg luoUte, It might (would be permitted to) stay up if it wished. 3. ^dj ^Be feine dlomam lefeii biivfen, I was not (have not been) allowed to read any novels. 4. ::^d) lydtk fie gelefen, jyeun tc^ geburft tjcitte, I should have read them if I had been allowed. 5. ^c^ lyevbe Ijmte ahmh Pi^^geljen biirfen, I shall be allowed to go out this evening. 6. T^er Sefiver [agte, t^ fotte feine ^tonmue lefcu, The teacher said I should not read any novels. 7. liefer Oting foil Ijunbcvt ^avt gefoftet ^oben, This ring is said to have cost a hundred marks. 8. ^n Ijiitkft beiuein i^ruber rjclfen foUeu, You ou-ht to have helped your brother. 9. ^d) lUolUe iljin l^elfeu, abix^id) fonute e§ md)t, I wanted to help him, but I could not. 10. (5r follte mix fein 33u^ Icifieu, ahcv cv ^at nid)t geiuollt, He was to lend me his book, but he would not. 11. liefer a)?anii iviii bev eol)n eim^^ ©vofeu fein, akr niemanb glaubt iljin, lliis man asserts that he is the son of a count, but nobody believes him. 12. Saffen @ie mid) ^I^r neneS mc\in' feljen, Let me see your new knife. 13. i^affen ©ie e6 \a nidjt au[ hm 33oben fallen, Be .sure you don't let it fall on the floor. U. ^d) Ijahc mix einen neuen 5lnsug niodjen loffen, I have had a new suit made for me. 412 SUPPLEMENTARY EXER(MMEvS. I'). '>Bo ift bcv ^^lu^U(^, bcii ^ic (id) l)al)cn imulicii luiJcnV Wlicrci is tlio suit you luivo liad uv.uU) (tor yourself) ? n. Contimu^ i\w following: 1. ;\d) bihftc biefcii ^Komon Icfcu, lucmi id) luolltc, bu, 2C. 2. ;\d) l)attc c-C) il)iu (^Icid) [ac^cn foUcn, bu, K. .'5. ^Vi) i)«l>c Co uid)t neuuiUt, u)cil id) d uid)t (^ciDolU l)obc, bu, 2C. 4. M) t)"^^c il)u txi'i uid)t tl)uu laffcu, bu, K. 5. .^^icv ift baCi .r-^au^ri, ii)cld)C':i id) uiiv Ijabc baucu Infjcu, l)icv ift — , u)cld)C'j bu biv, H\ C. 1. We were only allowed to read novels in the holidays. 2. T should (u)iivbc) read this novel if 1 mciv, allowed (subj.) 3. I should hav;3 read it if I had been allowed. 4. I shall be allowed to read it in the holidays. 5. 1 might (would be permitted to) read it if I wished. G. I should (univbc) read it if I were allowed [to do] it. 7. Tlu^ teacher said that I might (biivfcn) read it. S. Are you allowed to read novels when you should be writing {iujlu.) your exercises. 9. You should not read novels when you have something else to do. 10. We should not sit up late to read novels. 11. If everybody did what he should, the world would be much better. 12. You should not have sat up so late to read novels. 13. My brother should have helped me to do my exercises, but he would not [do] it. 14. He was to help me; he promised to (e<3). 15. I told him that he should have helped me, but he only laughed. 16. This lady is said to be the daughter of a countess, but I do not believe it. 17. She is said to have been six years in America. 18. Her relatives (33eri»anbte) are said to have Ix^en very rich. 19. The child wished to sit up late, but it was not allowed to. 20. George wished to get (l)abeu) thirty marks from me, but I did not want to lend him so much. 21. We did not go for a walk ; George could not, and I would not (per/.). 22.1 wouldn't, becausa I wouldn't ; that is all. 23. This man asserts that he has learnt German, but he knows nothing about it. 24. He pretends to have EXKUCISKH XaXV-XXXVF. 4\:\ Wlic I'd dioman .\d) fac^cu eei uid)t tficu, bu, ffcu, Ijiev liolidays. d (subj.) . I shall vould be; I'bc) read b I might els when )U should 10. We very body 12. You y brother le would 1 to (e^). b he only iter of a to have erwanbte) ed to sit vished to it to lend rge could wouldn't ; German, to have been two years in (Jernutny. 25. Are you having a house ],uilt mthisstnrt? 2(1. Wlurr, is the house, wl.icl, the count has had built for hin,s(>lf? 27. L(.t n.e see the present your father gave you. 28. T^ct us take a walk through tlu; city. 29. If you let n.y pen fall, I shall not let (cilaubcu) you use it again. EXERCISE XXXVI, a. NoTi;. The follcvvin^r ,„nf imuMis jmssa-cs an^ int.'iul.-d to servo as -i trans,,,,,,, to the IJeu.le,., unci „..y l'- u.lv.,.t,ageo„sly use 1 o" , ae c-e in M.a.nma,-, ,ansIa.,on, <„al wo.k, an.l cunpos'itio,,/ A few wo, Is no eM^;;' u/^hj^;;;;:;:t ;:^:^;^'-y -« ^-^'--^ ^^y — k a.^! Z A. {im ^Mfdjof frnntc eiu Atinb von ncuii ,^n(jven : „9J(Vin fleincr (Svcuiib, [in^e uiir, wo i^htt wohnt, unb id) iDevbe b'ir eiiic Vlpfclfine^ flc()cn."-,(S^uabiGeV-' ^^err-'/' autwoxtctc bn^^ ^{inb, „u)cuu eie miv aber fagcn, luo (S3ott nidjt ift, \o lucibc id; ^ftncn R iSln ^hMcv evmaljiites feineu ^otjn, ^^ aiv -iiftdjen, unb ev5(i[)(te iljin bie (Me|d)id)te uou eincr ^sevfon, iuc(d;e rriif) morgeuo cine il^ovfe^ mit (Mdb gcfunbcii Ijabc-.^^o/' faqte bcr JUiabe, .bie ^;uT|on, lucldje ba^ ®elb oevloveu Ijat, ift akv bod; nodi frii{;cr ttuf(]cftanben. " C, ^cfiiug fam eineS ^Iknb^ nod; ^^aufe unb flopfte on feine ^r;iivc. S^cr 5>^cbicnle fal; aug bem g-enfter, evfaunte feineu ^^ervn tm ST mfeln nid;t nnb rief : „Xcv ^id)kv ift nid;t gu ^aufe."— „@d;abet5 nid)tS^" antioortete I'effing, ,id) u^evbe ein anbermal tt)iebev fonimen, " nnb ging rnl;ig fort. B. llnter bent gro§en ^JuPaunie^ bei ber (Ec^eune^ unfre§ 9kd)bavg fanben jiDei itnaben eine dln^, „eie gel;ort mix, " rief ber eine, ,bcmi id; ^abe fie ^uerft gefefien." „9^ein, fie gef)i)rt mir," fd;rie ber anbre, „benn id) ^ht fie Qufget;oben'. " 33eibe gerieten in eincn I;eftigen ©treit.^ ^^^d; tuill bem etreit tin Gnbe madjen/' fogte ein gri3Berer 5;unge, ber thtn ba^u^ lam.^ @r fteate fid; ^raif d;en bie jruei tnoben, fnadteio bie )Ru^ unb fprnc^ : „rie eine ©d;aleii gel;6rt bem, ber iiie ^u^ guerft faf) ; I 414 S U I' I' I , K M IINT A H V KX K UC IS KS. bic nnbvc viduilc (\c\mt bcm, bcv |"ie ^^ucxii nii|l)ob ; bcii .Ucru>'' nbcv l)cl)oUe'"' id) [iir bcii Uvtciloipvud) "," J^. Kin KijjiIm', dci- voii scincn KItci'ii auf ciiu'ii Jjihrniurkt ,£?c'sandt wur, uin verscliiodene^'^ Artikcl zu vt'ikiiufcn, wurdo auf dein Ileiinwog^" von eincm IIuuIm'I''" /u Pf«'rd ani^cluilton. Der Knaho licf^^ davon^^, so schnoll ilin seine Fiiss(^ tiagon Uoniitcn, \vui-d(! alK'i" bald cinijjcliolt'''. Del" I Jim her sticg^^ ab-" und f«>i(l(U-t(!-' das Geld dcs Knaben. Da zo^' dit'sor seinon GcKUxHitcl licraus und strcuto den TnliMlt-"- dcssclbon auf doni l^xxlcn umlior. Wabrcnd das Geld nun von deni IMubci- aufgolosen-^ wiu'do, s})iang der Knabc blit/scbnoll aif das Pfci'd und galoppiorte davon. Zu Ilause angekonnnen, wurde das Pfei'd in doni 8t;dl angebundcn ; darauf v/urdon di(5 Satteltaschen-^ untersucht'^^ und es fand sicb ausser z\v(u gela- denen Pistolen eino bcdeutende-^ Sunnne bares Geki darin. F. Du Bachk'in^'', silberhell-^ und kkir, Du eilst voriiber innuerdar-'*. Am Ufer steh' ich, sinn'^^ und sinn': Wo konnnst du her, wo gehst du bin? Ich konmi' aus dunkler Felsen Schooss ; Mein Lauf geht iiber Blum' und Moos; Auf meinem Spiegel schvvebt so mikl Des blauen Himmels freundlijh Bild. .X < D' rum hab' ich fiohen^^ Kindersi i'^^; Es treibt'^- mich fort-^-, weiss nicht wohin. Der mich gerufen aus dem Stein, Der, denk' ich, wird mein Fiihrcr^^ sein. ' orange. my lord, -''exhort, ''purse, ^it doesn't matter, •'wahiut- tree. "barn, '^quarrel, ^conie up, come along, ^"crack open. i^«;hell. '^kernel, ^^keep. ^^scntence, judgment, ^^different, various, ^''way home, -"robber, ^-run away, "overtake. ^-dlHmount. -'dcinand. ^^contents. -''gather up. ^4 gjj^(|j|ig.}jj^g 25 i^gj^j.(.|j 26pQ,J^.i^^^J^.r^^|J]e_ ^"brooklet, streamlet. ^silvery bright. ^''forever'. ^"think, nmse. ^Hhc happy spirit of «i child, ^^drive onward. •Xi guide. irni.'irkt , \viir(l<» 'lull ton. tragcn sti('g2o J (licsor vsst'llK'n >ii (k'ln noil a if Diiniioii, don di(5 ^ei gela- [ durin. ''walnut- 11 shell. 1'' way iloiiianil. iderable. GliRMAN RKAI)1:R. I. Hotfappd^en. (5«J mv einrial eiiic Heine fiif^e Vjvm, t?ie ()atte ietermnnn lieb, foj bfv )tc nur onfab, nm aUerliebften aber ihre ®ropmuttcr, tie luufjte nar wi&jt, tViivJ fie allei? bent .Hinte j^et^en fo(Ue. (Sinmal fd)cnftc f!e c/ v.y()m ein ^ci>pcl|en^ »on rotcm ©animet, unl^ iveit i()m ba^ fo )vol)I flanb, nnb e^ nirfit^ anbercf nte()r tragen lyolfte, l)ief) e^ nnr bag 6 .^otfapprf)en. Sined laj^e^J f^rac^ feine g}httter ju ibm Jonim, 3iotfap)3cl)en, ba l)nfl bn ein @tiicf ^i\d)tn unb cine g(afc{)e SBein, Orini]' bag ber ©vo^mutter t)inaug ; fie ift franf unb fd)ivacl) nnb ./'•'. tv j^,irt) fid) baran la ben. SWfl^t)tc| aiil bevor eg Ium^ wirb, unb -^ :.ity:\ n?enn bu (jinaucfommjil, fy (^e^ ^iibfe^ fittfom unb (auf nid)t oomiOv^ ' • ^'^'^ ^^' I£H2 P'^^^f* ^" ""^ S»-''^t>nd)ft bag «Hag unb bie ®ro§mutter i^at nid)tg. Unb n?enn bu in i|re (SmbiJomnifl, fo »ergi^ nic^t " <«^ guten ?)torgen ^u fagen unb'^uH' nid)t erft in aUc'^en berum." „3cl) tt)t(( fc^on aik^ gut mad)en/' fagte 9flotf;ip))d>en jur ^^utter, unb gab i()r bie ^anb barauf. Xie ©rojjii-.utter aber n)cl)ntci5 braufien im 2Ba(b, eiue ^albe. (Stnnbe »om X)orf. 2Bie nun 3*lot=' fappd)en in ben SBalb Urn, begegnete i()m ber 2Qotf. S^lotfappc^cn aber wn^te nid)t, \\)iU bag fiir ein bojeg 3:ier tvar, unb fiird)tete ftc^ nid)t ttor i()m. „®uten Jag, Slotfappc^en/' fprad) er. ,,(Srt)oncn i:an!, 3^oIf." „2Co t)inaug fo friil), Slotfapp^en '^" „3ur ®ro§=2o mutter." „2Bag tragfl bu unter ber &^^tV' „jlud)en Uub SGein: geflern l)a1)m tvir gebaden^ba foU fid) bie franfc unb fd)mac^e ®ro^mutter tt^iU su gut t()un, unb ftd) bamit ftarfen." „dlf>U fiipp^en, n?o wo^nt beine ©ropmutter ?" / „5^oc^ etne gutc 35iertclftunbe meiter im S3alb, unter ben brei grs^fjen Sid) baumen, 25 415 41(3 9lotfd|)|id)ett* ba ftoht ihr .»>»uii<, imtni ftiit> tii' "Jhjfdu'ifcn l»»iv< UMrfttii ja iviffcii/' fiiflte aiotfappdu'ti. Xcr ^A>olf taii)tc bci fid) „taiJ ^uiij^c j.irtc Uf, 'X)m], tiiiJ tfl cin fetter iM|Jen, ber unrt> noit) beffer frf^niecfen aU t»ie Slltc : tu mupt v'jj liftii] nnfanjK", t^amit bu bcitc erfd)iuippft." 80 Da fliitii er ein 2i:seild)cn neben Stotfappdien, bann fprad) cr „9bt- fa))pd)en, flet) einntat bie fdunicn ilMumen, bie vi\\c\^ um()er ftetjen, Wiuum jimfft bit biit nid)t um? id) flirtubc bu l)i)v\t c^ax nid)t, rvie bic 5)oj^Ieiii fu licHid) ffiiiien'c' bu jicl)ft ja fiir bic^ Ijin aU menu bu 3ur ed)ule niiuift, uiib ift fu luftu] t)aufuMi in bem S^alb." 85 JRotfappd^en fd)(un bic ^lui^en auf, uub aU cd fat) tvie bie ®onnen« Prat)Ien burd) bie 23aumc l)in uub t)cr tan^ten, uub allc^J ^olt fdumer S3tumen jlaub, tadjtt ti „mnn ic^ ber (yropmuttcr einen frifd)en (5trau§ mitbriujie, ber ujirb i()r aud) ^reubc mad)cn ; eg ift fo friit) am ZaQ, ba§ id) boc^ ju red)ter 3eit aufomme/' lief oom SCege ah 40 in ben SBatb l)ineiu uub fud)te ^IMumeu. Hub lueun ecJ eine gebroc^en t)atte, meinte e5, weiter t)iuauiJ ftaubc eiue fd>i)ucre, uub lief baruad), unb j^criet immer ticfer in ben 2BaIb t)iuein. X)er $QoIf aber ging gerabe^JwegiJ nac^ bem J^aud ber (yro^mutter, unb llopftc an bie J^iire. „2Ber ift braupen?" „jRotfappc^en, bad 45briugt ^ud)en unb SDein, mad)' auf." „X)riid' uur auf bie ^liufe/' rief bie ©rof mutter, „id) hin ju fr^mad) unb fann ni^t auffle{)en." Der SBoIf briicfte auf bie ^(iufe, bie 3:biirc fprang auf unb er ging, o^nc ein aCort ju fprecfcen, gerabe 3um aSett ber ©ropmutter unb »crfc^Iudte fte. T>ann ti)at er i^re ^(eiber an, 50 fe^te i^re ^aube auf, tegte ftc^ in it)r 33ett unb 309 bie 5Dor^ange »or. Sluiuippc^en aber mar nac^ ben Slumen l^erumgeraufen, unb aU eg fo yiet gufammen !^atte, ba^ eg feine me^r tragen fennte, fiel i^m bie ©ro^mutter iuieber ein unb eg mad)te fii^ auf ben 2Beg ju i^r. 56 (Sg tuunberte fid), ba§ bie 3;()iire aufflanb, unb tvk eg in bie (^tnU trat, fo fam eg i^m fo feltfam barin oor, bag eg bac^te ,,ei, tt>it angj^Ii^ tuirb mirg ^wte ju "iWut, unb Un fonjl fo gerne M bfr fioilapp^tn. 417 \^( jurtc ccfcn aU )iuip)jft." n „d\ot- iid)t, tvic lU menn 5onnen= i fitijner frifcbcn : fo friii) BJcj^e ah e& einc ore, unt) t. 3)cr ter, unb )en, t)a^ auf tie itn nic^t fprang iBett ter iter an, or^angc unt alg fiel t^m 3U i^r. ; " '-^^ctt unt 309 tie ^i^orl)antie ,u«rucf : ta Iflfl tic (i)ro§m!«ttcr, unt l)atte tie Ipaubc tief {n<5 CWefic^t ^iefe(jtoo unt fa^ fo uninterliii) auv<. „(Si, Wropmuttcr, m^ Ija^ tu fiir grope Dt)ren!" „Xap id) tid) bejTer t)oren fann." „(Si, ®ro§* mutter, mi ()iift tu fur grof^e 5(ugen !" „Vi\^ ic^ tid) bejfer febcn fann.^' „(5i, (SJropmuttcr, wai ()aft tu fiir (^rope .pante!" „Tci^ ic^ tid) beffcr pacfcn fann." „2lbcr, ©ropmuttcr, wad t)aft66 tu fiir cin entfetUid) grojjei? ^JOJauI !" „i:a9 id) tic^ kffcr freffen fann." jlaum ^atte tcr SCoIf tad gefac^t, fo t^at er einen ®a^ am tent ^^cttc unt ijerfd)(ang tad arinc 9totfdppcl?en. 2©ie ter 2Co(f fein ©cliiftcn gejlint l)atte, legte er fid) wieter in« 33ett, fd)lief ein unt ftng an iibcrUnit ju fd)narc^en. Tev 3ager7o giUi^ eben an tern ^ani oorbei unt tad)tc „tuie tic altc i^vau fc^narc^t, tu mupt tod) fe()cn ob il)r (ttoaa fe()(t." X)a trat er in tic (BtnU, unt wit er i)ov tad 33ett tarn, fo fa^ er tap ter SCoIf tarin lag. „?5intc ic^ tid) ^ier, tu alter ©iinter," fagte cr, „id^ ^abe tid) lange gefud)t." ^f^un njoUte cr feinc S3iid)fc anlegcn, ta 75 ftel i^m ein, ter SBolf fijunte tie ©ropmutter gefrejyen ^aUn, unt ftc ware noc^ au rettent fd)op ni^t, fontcrn nal)m cine (Sc^eerc unt ftng an tern fc^Iafenten SGoIf ten S3auc^ auf^uf^neiten. 2Qie cr cin paar ®d)nitte getl)an ^atte, ta fa| er tad rote ^appc^cn lcud)ten, unt noc^ ein paar @d)nitte, ta fprang tad ^Mtc^enso ]^eraud unt rief „ac^ wie war tc^ erf^roden, wie ward fo tun!el in tern aColf fcinem Seib!" lint tann tarn tie altc ©ropmuttcr auc^ noc^ lebentig ^craud unt fonnte faum atmen. ^Hotfappc^cn aber l)olte gefc^wint grope ©teine, tamit fiiaten fte tern SColf ten Seib, unt wic cr aufwai^te, wottte er fortfpringen, aber tic (Steincss waren fo fc^wer, tap er gleid^ nieterfan! unt f!c^ tot ftel. / ^u ,v„,,,i »w.v vivi vugnugi, cci o"yci 3^9 van z^zij pen yeij al unt ging tamit ^cim, tic ©ropmuttcr ap ten ^u6^tn unt tran! 418 JRotfii|)|irf)ciu ben K^tin, bcii <'Kotfap).Hi}f" (K^radU I)attf, unt> crboltc ftd> Juict»cr, 90 3lotfappcl)cu abcr tnd)tc ^tu ivillft tcin Vcbtiij^ nid)t jvictcr aUctu oom JCcc^e nl^ in t>en ^GaliD (.»i!fen, ivcnn biv^ tie 'i)}hitter »cr6oten di ivirt) nuc^ erjnhlt, ba9 cinntal, aii 3'^otfai>pd)e!i bcr n(tcn ©ro^mutter luieber Ci)ebrtdcnc(3 lMad)tc, cin anbcver JGoff it)m 95augefprod)en unb Cv^ yom JBcge I)a('e ablciten tvodcn. 9f{Lnfap))d)en aber ^ittete ftc^ unb (^ing gerabe fort fciuc«5 SBeoi^ unb fagte bcr ®ropmuttcr, ba§ eg bem SGolf begcgnet tvare, bcr ibm gutcn lag genjitnffbt, abcr fo boci au5 ben ^Ixu^cn gegucft t)dtte: ^tueun^ nic^t auf ojfner ©tra^e geivefen ivare, er t^iitte mid) gefreffen." ioo„^omm/' fagte bie ©ropmutter, „tt?ir \vo\kn bie Jbiire «erfd)Iie§en, baf er ni(^t l)ereiu fann." 33alb barnad) flopfte bcr 2Bolf an unb rief „mad)' auf, (Dro^mutter, ic^ bin bag 3flotfappd)en, ic^ bring' bir ^cUdtnt^." em l^anbe &ifi tu getutg fd^on geiucfen; bu wirfi tt>o^I aud^ fo ein red)r alteg Sauern^aug mit einem (Strcl)bad) geft|cn i^ahtn, SDZoog unt) tranter n?ad)fen »on felbft auf bcm 1)ad)e; ein (Storcb- neft befiubet, fi^ auc^ auf bem ©ipfet be^felben, ber ^torcb ift wnenibe^rlid^ ! Die 2Banbe vcd .paufe^ [tub fdifef.; bic genfteno niebrig unb nur eiit ein^igeg gcnfter ijl fo ^"genSiei, ba§ eg geoffnet ipcrben fanu; ber 33adofen ragt aug ber Sflnb ^er^or; ber gliel^eftaitm l)anc|t liber ben 3aun ()inaug unb unter feinen Jrod^m am gu§e besg Banned ifi ein 'Se{4 in n?eld)em cinige tntcn riegen. (^in alter ^unb, ber aUc unb ieben'^miVellit, iflie auc^ ba. ©erabe fo dn 33internl)aug ftanb brau^en auf bem Sanbe unb in biefem ^laufe a^o^nten tin ^aar alte ?eule, dn 33auer unb fcine %xan. mk wenig fte au^ l)atten, ein @tiic! tuar bocb barunter, bag ent6el)rlic^ ivar—ein ^Pferb, bag fid) »on bem (55rafe ni^rte,2o wel^eg eg an ber ?anbftra§e fanb. Der alte 33auer ritt jur @tabt auf ^iefem ^ferbe, oft (ie^en eg and) fcine 9^a(^krn ijon il)m unb efmiefen ^m alten Seuten mand)en anbern I)ienft ^afiir. M(\p am ientiinftiaf en iviirbe eg moftl fcin. iiscnn fte bn^ m^r't) ^"'^^^ite^f I'ber eg gegen ttm'ag anbereg yertaufd)ten ma il)neu 25 mcl)r nu|en fiJnnte. 5lbcr \m^ lonnte bag mi)\ fein ? 419 420 Bic'S bcr mtc mar^t, ip'8 immcr tcrjt „Dag njirfl tu filter am Ibeflen iviffcn/' facjte i^m bie ^rau. „^eute ifl gcrabc 3a^rmarft, rcitc ^ur ®tat)t, gieb ba^ ^ferb fiir @elt) ^in, ober mac^c cinen gutctt 3:auf«^ ; Ovie J?u ei5^tiu^;inac^j^, somir ijl'g rcd^t." ©iefniipftc i^m fcin |)aWtuc^ ""^' JSSf . ^.^^^f^^"^ fie bcjfer al« cr ; fJe fniipfte e« i^m mit eincr 3)o|)|)eIfd)Ieifc urn ; bag njar fc|r pbf^ ! eie ftric^ feincn ^ut glatt mtt i^rer flad)cn ^anb unb gab i^m bann einen ^up gum 5lbfc^icb. Darauf ritt cr fort 35 auf bem ^ferbe, njelc^e^ t?erfauft obcr oertaufc^t njcrbeu follte. Die Sonne branntc ^eij, feini SBoIfe war am ^immel gu fe^en. 2luf bcm SCegc luar eg fe^r jkiiSg, ijieic Seute, bie ben 3jki«arft befuc^en iroUten, fu^ren, ritten ober gingen gu 5u§. gfirgenbg gab eg ©c^atten gegen bit Sonne. 40 Untcr anbern ging and:) einer beg SBegeg ba^in, ber einc ^u^ ^n SJJarfte tricb. X)ie ^u() mar fo fc^on tuie eine ^u^ nur fein fann. „Dic giebt gett)i§ auc^ gute Wliiii)," bac^te ber ^auer, „bag ware cin gang guter Jauf^, bie ^u^ fitr bag ^ferb." „Jpeba, bu ba mit ber ^u^ V fagte cr, „ttjei§t bu wa^ ? Sin « 5^ferb^Jo|Ite ic^ meinen, foflct me:^r alg eine ^u^, aber mir ifl: bag glel^Tltig, id) l^abe me^r ^u^tn tton ber ^u^ ; ^afl bu i?ufl, fo taufd)cn njir." „greili(^ will i^ bag/' fagte ber ^ann mit ber ^u^, unb bann tauf^ten fie. . 50 1;ag war alfo abgemae^t unb ber 33auer ptte nun umfe'^ren fonnen, benn er ^atte nun bag getban, wag, er tt)u foHte ; aUtin ba er flc^ einmal auf tm 3a^rmar!t befeitet iatte, fo woflte er au(^ ^in, biog urn i^n anaufe^en, unb beg^alb ging er mit feiner ^u^ nac^ ber Stabt. 55 X)ie c^wl fiU)rcab fc^ritt er rafc^ gu, unb nac^ fur^cr 3eit waren 5tau. ert) fiir ;e beffer x& toax er fort > 1 fe^en. )rmarft t fann. 3 n?arc ' (Sin ift bag ufl, fo ) bantt fe'^rctt atleitt r au(^ r ^u^ warctt 99Bic'g iier ^Htc motit, ift'g immcr xt^U 421 flc eittem 5)?annc siir ectte, ber ciii (2d)af trieb. (Sa^u mx ber mmn^ fogleid) kreif unb ber 3:auf(^ fanb flatt. Unfer 33auer gtng nun mit bcm (Bd}ii\c auf ber Sanbftrafie loeitcr. ,u .--.^v-- S3alb fa^ er akrmalg einen 9}?ann, ber ijom gelbe auf biees Sanbftra^e trat unb eine grope ®cin^ unter bem 5lrmc trug. „Va^ ijl tin fc^mereg Ding, bag bi|^^ l^aJJ^ eg l^at gebern unb ^(tt, bafj eg dne guft ift; bie jyurbe fic| fe()r gut""augne^men, njenn fte bei ung bayeun an eiuer^^emc am SBaffer ginge. 2)ag ware m^ fiir meine Sllte; n)ie oft ^at fie ni^t gefagt: mnn tt>ir nurro j|l"L^i"lSfi?J^"- ^^^^ ^'^"" ^^ ^ielleic^t eine Befommen— unb ic|i.g, fotl fit fie ()aben.— SBoden i»ir taufc^en ? 3^ gcbc bir bag @(^af fiir bie %9|^nb fd)i)nen T)anf ba^u." 'Dagegen ^atte ber anbere ni(^tg ein/umenben unb fo taufc^ten fie, unb ber ©auer befam bie ®ang. ^5 3e^t war er f^on nal)e M ber Stabt; bag ©ebranae auf ber 8anbftra§e nal)m tmmer su ; ^enfi-^en unb 33ie^ brangten fic^; fie gingen auf ber ©trape unbtangg ber 3aune, ia,.fie gingen fo'goT *?cr^ilo^ ^^^^^^ ^artoffelfelb t)incin, m ein tin]ifti ^u|n an einer @c^nur ging, bamit eg iiBer bag ©ebrange nic^t etfc^rclctt'unb ftc| so njd)t |erlaufen fotlte. T)ag j^u^n ^atte zimn tureen ©djojanj, eg Min^elte mit einem 5j[ugc unb fa^ fe^r "ftug'aug. „^rud, fiucf!" fagte bag ^u^n. 3Bag eg fid) babei bac^te weip i^ nid)t ^u fagen, abcr alg unfer ^amx ..3 f,^A^ t>ad)te cr fog(eid) : ^'^a^ ifl bag fc^onfic Jpul)u, bag i^ fe gcfc^cn ()a6c, eg ifl fogar fc^oncr alg begse 422 mit'a bcr mtt Mittcit, iiV^ immcr vt(i)t. ftut»et ev5 f farrerg ^^citnc. S^aci ^uI)njitoc{)tc id) Men ! Sin ^')u()ii fti iinmer jlorner, c^ faun ^id)^fa^"\db\t ernat)rcn ; id) gKiute, anirt'e ein guter Jaufdi [ein, ivcnn id) c^ fitr bic (5Jan^ bcfommen fonntc—SBoUen \mx taufd)cn?" frac^te er^ „Iaufd)en?" fra^tc »ober antere, „ia, ba^ ivare gar nid)t iiM.'' Unt) fo taufc^tcn ffc. t)a^ mv fc()r ^ief, wa^ er auf bcr 3^c{fc ^ur ©tabt ii%ftmd)t ()atte ; l)cip mv ei and) nub cr n?ar nmbc. din i^nin! unb etiua^ 3um (SlJcn t()alen il)ur$iotf Kilb l^efanb rr fid) am 2Birtgl)aufe. (Sr mUk ebcn Ijincinge^en, alg bcr .^ncd)t ^cranfam, imb fie kgcgneten 95 fic^ in ber 2:()ure. 2)er ^ned)t trug eincn gefiiUten ortete bcr ^ncd)t, „einen gan^eu ^ad loott, genug fiir bie @^n?dne." "%^t-^^. ^^^ ^"^^ ^" ^^''^^^ 33erfd)jt»enbung. S^cnn nuv mcine 100 5nte bai)eim bag fer)en fijnnte. 55LH-ige^ 3al)r trug ber dte 33aunt am (BtaU nur eiuett^dnjigen 5(pfel; ber n.>urbc a^kjoWn iinb jlanb auf bm (pri^^^^^ m er ganj fert^afb unb ^cr^ef* Ta^ {^ bo^ immer '2Bol)Iftaiit, fagte meine 5Hte, ^ier fonnte fie akr erft 2Bol)(ftanb fe^en, einen ganjen (Bad uoU ! SCe(d> eine greube 105 luiirbe fie beim SlnMid l^aben !" „a?a(3 tviirbct i^r fiir ben irb ffc mtc^ unb jagcn : SBie'g ber 2llte madbt, ifr^ immer rec^t." 3oaeipir^.et^' fasten bie Snglunber. ,^«„bert ?)fu„b ober erne Jonnc Wn^ten @o(be^, wenn Sie moHen." „(Sm ^c^effel ge/Tqt fc^on/' entgegnete ber 33auer, ,,ic^ fann itur 125 ben (3c()effet 2tpfel bagegen fel^en, unb mic^ fe(&ft unb meine alte g:au baau ; bag, ba(^te tit, ware boc^ auc^ gute/'STp)' ,,®ut! 2(ngenommen!" fagten bie Snglanber unb bie S3ette luar gemac^t. Der 2Bagen beg mn^ |i!|? Sfer unb bie Snglanber unb beri3o 33auer jliegen ein ; »ormartg ging eg unb kib l^ielten jlc »or bem ^augc^en beg 33auerg an. „®utett menb, mtt," ,,®uten 2l&enb, 2l(ter." „!Dcr 2;auf^ if! fd^on gcmacBt." rv . < ' O / / , 136 : r'4?^r^''"^ ®^^)llC f«9te bie erau t^n ^uma^^^b? unb beac^tete meber ben ®acf no^ bie fremben (3a^k. ,,3(^ ^a6e bag 5)ferb gegen tint ^u^ getaufd^t." .®ott fei Vantl m gute gjiilc^ bie n^ir nun Uhtn merben unb auc^ 33utter uub ^t auf bem ^if^^e! 'S^a^ mx tin^^&ruo 2;auf(t V „3a, after bie ^u^ tauf^te ic^ luieber gegen tin Sc^af." .2lc^, bag i|l urn fo BefiTer!" eno^e bie 5rau, „bu benfji tmmer ^ ' ^''^'^i V"--«'vi^ <«eiui:gt'nug; luollene (strumpfe unbtvoaene^anbfc^u^e! I)ag giebt bie .^u^ic^t f SCtebuboAus an aUeg benfft" ^ m^ 424 mit'i ber %lit maH^t, tfl'8 immct xti^U „W>tx tai @c^af ^abc ic^ miebcr gcgen cine Q5an« ticrtaufc^t." „5lIfo biefcg 3a^r njerben wir wirfUd^ ®anftbraTcn ^^aben, mcin licber Sitter! Du benfjt immer baran, mir eine greube au ma(^cn» 150 SCic Verrli^ ij^ ta^ ! 2)ie ®an« fann mon an einer Seine gc^en unb ftc ttoc^ fetter wcrben laffcn, be^or ton fie lirdtcn."'^ „5lber bie ©and ^abc ic^ gegcn ein J^u^n ttertaufi^t," fogte ter mann. „Sin ^u^n! bad war cjnjuter laufc^!" cntpcgnete bie fjrau. 165 „T)a&^^ni^n legt (Sier, bie brutet cd au«, wir frTegen ^itc^Iein, n?ir frilgen einen gan^en ^ii^ner^of ! 2lc^, ben ^abe ic^ mir erj^ re^t 0ett)iinf(^t!" »/3«f «6er bag J^u^n gab ic^ wicber fiir einen tx* .^t^^'^lriippelter Si^jfel ^in." * 160 „2Cag ? 3e^t mu§ ic^ bi(^ erjl rc^t fitflfen!" ttcrfe^tc bie grau. „'3Jlnn (icbed, guted S^Jann^en! 3c^ werbe biretmad erja^len. ©ie^fl bn, aU bn fort njarfl ^eute morgcn, ba^te id^ baritber nac^, jie ic^ bir ^ente abenb etwag red)t ®uteg gu cjfen mac^en fiJnnte. 5pcS^unb eier mit S^i^n, bac^te i^ bann. I)ie Sier ^atte id^ 165 unb ben a3 bcr 9«onb mir craa^U: 3d^ ^aBc ben ^'abetten Dffiaier werben unb fic^ jum erjlcn mal in feine prac^tigc Uniform neiben fet^en : id^ ()abc bag junge TObd^cn in i^rcm 33raut|taate gefet)cn unb beg prften jungc 33raut qIMU^ in i|rem 33raut- anaufje ; aber nic ^abe ic^ eine ©eligfeit erMidt, a^nlic^ bcr eincg 5 flcinen i?icr|a^rigcn 5f«ab^cng, ii?cld)cg id) (jcutc STbcnb beobadtetc. @ie ^attc ein ncucg blaucg ^Icib er^alten unb einen neucn mo^a- ^ut ; ccr (Btaat mx cften angclcgt unb aUt riefcn nac^ Sic^t, bcnn beg 5JJonbeg ©tra^Icn, bie bur^ bag ^cnflcr brangcn, marcn nic^t IcU gcnug, gana anberc gic^ter mn^kn angcBrannt tucrben. Daio [lanb bag flcinc 5)?ab(^cn [Icif tuie einc ^uppe, bie 5lrme angfllid^ i)on bem ^leibe ab augftrcdcnb, bie ginger hjcit augcinanber 9cf|)rci3t. D mclc^e (Scligttit firat)Uc aug if)ren Slugen, aug i^rem ganjen ®efici)t! „9J?orgen follfl bu in bem ^(eibe augge^cn," fagte bie Sautter, unb bie ^(eine blicfte auf ju i^rem ^ut unbis' micber nieber an i^rem ^(eibe unb lac^elte felig. „gjZutter!" rief fte, „mag luerben ml^l bie ffeinen ^iinbc^en benfen, mnn jie mid^ in biefem en tton t>cr fd^wimmcnbcu (Stabt. 3ergottcten ^uppctn, tic gidnscuten ilugetn ringdum gtdnsen in meinem 8id)tc: tic ^rdd)tigen elKrneu S^loffc tort ol>en l^aUn 9leifen gemad)t, wic tad 30 cl)crnc ^fcrt im '3J?drd)cn, fie ftnt erft ()ier()cr, tann fort i)on ^icr unt njieter i)icr|er gercift. @ie()fl tu tic Imntc ^ra^t tcr ^O^aucrn unt ter genjlcr ? Sd ()at tad 5lnfel)en, aid ob tad ®cnie ten ?aunen eined tinted nad)gegefcen pttc, intcm cd ticfen fcltfamcn S^emvei fd)miicftc. ®iei)ft tu auf tcr ©duic ten gcfliigclicn "oiuc-n? 35 Tad 05olt gidnjt nod), tie gliigct aber fint getninten, ter nm ift tot, tcnn tcr .f^ijuig ted ^:»Zccred ijl tot, tic grojen J^aUcn jic^en SlotMi^ilb. 427 ^ mogen tot, feitt bu tiefe 5uff^Iag > ^crum, i griinc r (Statt, le ®tat»t c^en ten taufenbe 5luf brci [ ft^t ftia ibc (e^nt ^aen, tie t. X)ie :u^t t>ort ifc^t, btti? Iter i^rer jcnfd)to^, :ft)te: tie ttjic bag i)Ott ^ier Wlamxn kttic ben feltfamen !2on)e ift ;ett jie^en toerebet, unb tvo fru()cr bie t)crrlirf)jlen (Siemnlbe prongten, fctieint ie^t bfc nacfte SJiauer burd^. t)cx Sajaarunc frf)Iaft iinter bcm 53ogengangc, bcffcn gu^tobcn friiher nur bcr t)urnel)mfic 5lbel bctrcten burfte. 5tug bent tiefen Srunnen obcr ami) ijieUeic^t and 40 ben ($)efangniffen bei ber ©eufjerbriide tont 3ammer, roie ,m ber 3cit/ als bad 3;ambourin au^ ben bunten ®onbc(n erfc^otl, aU ber 53rautring \)on bem j^Ianjenbcn 53uccntoro jur SIbrIa ^inunterflog, aur 2lbria, ber ^^nigin ber mmt, Slbria ! ^uUe bic| in 5^e()el ! Sa^ ben 2Bitwcnfcl)leier beinen S3ufeu i3cr()iillen, l)ange il)n iiber46 bag ?0^aufoleum beineg S3rautigam{J : bag nmrmorne gefpenftige ^jnebig." V. KotI|fd?tIb, „3(^ tt)ia bir ein 33ilb aug ^'^ranffurt Itcfern/' [agte ber mont). „^cfonberg ein (SJebaube &etrad)tete ic^ bort, eg mx nici)t ©oet^e'g ©eburtg^aug, nic^t bag alte S^iat^aug, biirc^ beffen gegitterte genfter bie ge^ornten ©d^abel ber Deafen noc^ ^ervorragen, bie bei ber .^aiferfronung gckaten unb preiggegeben tuurben ; nein, eg njar 5 ein biirgerlic^eg Jpaug, griin ange[trid)en unb eiufac^, na^e an ber f^malen 3ubengaffe, eg war 3flot^fc^iIb'g ^aug. 3c^ blidte burc^ bie geijffnete I^iir, bie Sreppc war ^etl erleuc^tet, Sebiente nttt brennenben ^er^en auf [c^wercn filbernen ^eu^tern ftanben ba unb neigten fic^ tief locr ber alkn ^xau, bie auf cinem 10 2;ragfejyet bie 3:reppe l)inunter gebrad)t wurbe. T)tx 33efi^er beg ^aufeg ftanb mit entblo^tem ^opfe unb brittfte e^rerbietig einen ^n^ auf bie ^anb ber ^llten. (£g war feine ^JJutter, fie nicfte ii)m unb ben 35ebienten freunbli(^ gu, unb fie fii(}rten fie in bie enge bunHe ®ajfe in ein fieineg Jpaug; eg war i^re 2Col)nung; biens batte fie i^re J^Hnber geboren, »on ^ier aug war il)r (31M aufge= blii^t J wpUte fie bie ijerac^tete ©ajfe unb bag Heine ^aug yerlaffen, 428 ^er Oiir* [o n)urt)c bad (^li'uf auc^ fie verlaffen ! Tai wax nun i^r Wlaiibe." 20 — Tcr 'iJJiout) fvjiiljlte wcitcr nict)td; gar ju fuq war fein 53e[u(t) ^eutc Slbcnt) ; ic^ aber tacbte an tie altf ^van in ter eugcn, tterad)- tetcn ®affe ; nur c i n SJurt, unt il)r glua^^entecf fyawi flante an tcr I^cmfe; nur cin 5Bort unt> it)rc SDilla lage am (i)oIf »on 9leapel. 25 „5Qcnn ic^ t)a« geringc ^aud tterlic§c, au« bem ta« C^Mud • meiner ®ij()ne cm|jorbIi'tt)tc, t)a iwiirbc tad ©liicf fie oerlajfen ! " — Sd tjt ein 5lbcrfllaube; abcr tjon tcr 5(rt, t)a§, a"-"n man tie ©efdii^tc fennt unt tad 33ilt crblicft; swci JCorte aid Unterfc^rift geniigcn, y m ed ju i)crpc()cn : „S i n e ^ u 1 1 c r." , VI. Der Bar. (5d war in cincm ^roijinsialflattc^en, fagtc tcr iB^iont, frcilic^ ttjar ed im ocrgangcncn 3a^re, abcr tad t^ut nic^td ^ur ©acbc, ic^ fat) ed fet)r teutUc^ ; ^eute 5lbent lad id) in ten Beitungen ta»on, aber ta war ed lange nic^t fo teutlic^ : 3" tcr (S^aflftubc faf tcr 5 33arenfii{)rcr unt af fein 5lbentbrot ; ter 33ar ftant traupcn l)inter tern ^olsflo^c angebuntcn, tcr arme ft^, tcr nicmant ctwad ju Icitf t()at, obwo()t er grimmici Qtnvi^ audfa^. ^htn in ter Dac^* lammcr fpiclten in mcinen 8trablcn trei ficiw .ttnter; tad altcflc moc^te fcd)d ^aljvt alt fein, tad jiungfte ni^t me^r aid jwei. lo^Iatfc^; !(atf(i^! fam ed tic Zvtppe. t)inauf; wer fonntc tad wol)t fein? X)ie 3:{)iir fprang auf— ed war ter ^e|, ter gro^e aottige ^ar! Sr ^attc 2angcwcilc gcl)abt iinten im ^ofc unt I)atte nun ten 3Gcg jur 2:re))pc l)inauf gefuntcn; id) l)abc aUi^ gcfct)en, fagtc ter ^OZont. X)ic .Winter erfc^raten fe^r iibcr tad gro§c 15 jottige Jier ; Jetcd frod^ in feinen Sinfet, er enttccftc fie abcr adc tret unt befc^niiffcUe ftc, t^at i^ncn abcr nic^td ju Icitc. „t)a& ifl gewip ein grof er ^unt," ta(^ten fie, unt tann fircic^cUcn fie ^imnteliffi^Iuflel. 429 n ^efuct) I, tjerad)- fliinbe an i)oIf »on a« (5Mucf rlajfen ! " man t)tc lUcrfc^rift 5ad)c, i(^ t fa^ t>cr icn l){ntcr etiua^ ju er ©ac^== fl^ altefle t)a5 n?ol)l pc jottige jatte nun 9efe()en, fl^ gro§e a^er ade :. „t)a& ^elten fte Urn; er Uc\k fid) auf t>eu gugbotcn, >?cr flcinftc 3uniie fJettcrtc auf i()n ^inauf unt) fpie(t« mit fcincm j^oltdorfic^cn ^upfrfjcn ^2>Ciflci?en in bem Vic^ten fc^jvarsen fti^. ^e^t na^m tcr altef^c .^nabe feine 20 Irommel ur\t> fc^Iug tarauf, tap e« tro^ntc ; ter S5ar ert)ob flc^ auf ben ^Interfiipen nnt ftng an ^u tanjen; e« n?ar aUerliebjl ansufil)cn. 3et)cr ^nabc nai;m |e^t fein ®ettjet)r, auc^ ber S3ar mupte eind ^aben, unt) er ^telt C(5 rcc^t orbentlid) fefl ; c(8 ttjar ein prac^tii^er ^amcrab, ben fie gefunbcn l)atten; unt) bann marfd)ierten 2b fie: „C£ing, ^tvei, (§,mi, ^ujei!"— Da griff jemanb m bic Zt^ux, fie ging auf, e^ mv bie SKutter bwr jlinber. Du i)attcfl fie fctjen foUen, i^ren lautlofen @djrec! fel)cn, bag freibetuei^e ®efid)t, ben ^albgeiJffneten ^unb; bie flieren 2Iugen. 5lber ber f (einfle 3unge nicf tc [celenyergniigt unb rief ganj so laut in feiner ©prac^e : „2Bir fpielen nur ©olbaten!"— Unb bann tarn ber 33arenfiU)rcr ! VII. fjimmelsfdjluffeL Der ^eilige ^etrud ()attc einmal au^mart^ su t^un, barum fleUte er ben S|erub mit bent grof en ^^lammenfc^ttjcrt an^ ^immzUt^ov unb fprad^ : „U^ niemanb herein, aU mx einen (S(^Iit|fel mitbringt unb fclbft auffci)liegt; benn alien 9)^eufct)en, bie ^eute fterben foKen unb in ben ^immel ge^orcn, njerbe id^ einen J^immeUfd[)IiiffeI 5 fenben. Unb wer feinen @d)liiffel t)at, gel)ort nic^t in ben JpimmeL" 9?ad)bem er bas gefagt ^atte, ging er fort. a^ (cbten nun auf ber Srbe ein clter $?otfe nameui? 3iirgen unb fein 2Ceit), bie tt?o()rien in nnm fleinen, blanfen Jpau^c^en, m man auf bie Dime ^inau^faf) unb bag Tim branben ^orte. Dort 10 3urit(f, bag fel)r gliidlic^ war, benn fic Hebten fid) innig, l^atten 430 $itnmcl0f4lufjeU {mmer ?cit) unt) Srcutc ^ufammen ^ftra^en unt) cinattber nie eitt bofe« ftOort gefnqt. Unt |c alter fie wurtcn, tefto iuniger licbten isfie ffc^ unt) teflo jncl)r Ijingen ftf am £ebcn. |( ®erat»e an tern lai^c, tc. tcr ^ciligc '•Petru^J nici^t im ^immcl war, fut)lte tcr altc SiJi^^^fn^ ^^^ cr fterbcn miiffe, unb a wurte i^m fc^r fc^auT, wic oft cr and? ^wif^cn t>ett 5CcUen tern lot) itii Slugc gcfcl)aut t)atte. „?fb' wol)\, VA^i& 5Bcib," fagtc er traurig, <>o„le6'»ot)I unti auf 3Cietierfel)cn!" Tanx: tjcrlor cr bad ^^cwu^tfcin. 9la(^ cincr JBeile offnctc cr noc^ cinntal tic ^lucjen unt) fprac^ nttt fc^ioac^cr ©timmc : „Vu ! . . . bring mir t»a3 gvOpc 9lc^ ^cr, t)a(5 mill ic^ mitnc^mcn, tenu cincn ?otfen brauc^en fic im J^immcl nid)t; aber wain t)cr liebe ®ott bovt, ta§ fc^ mtc^ auc^ aufd 25gifd)cn oerftcl)c, »crn>cntct cr mic^ tiel!lcid)t aU ^immcldfi|'d)cr, tenn 'iJJJii^iggang giebt'a im ^Immel nic^t." '£)ann fcuf^te cr cin Ic^tcd ^al unt) (tarb. Slid cr gcftovbcn mar unt) fic^ cben auf 'tin 2Ccg nad) tcm ^immcl mac^cn moUtc, fam cirt (Snc;lcin flcflogen, brac^te cincn sogoltcncn (Sd)liiffct uiib fagtc: „Sinen f^oncn ®ru§ torn Ijciligcn ^ctrud, unt) er ^dttc (jeratc bcutc aucimartd 3U t()un; tarum modUet ibr nur felbft bad -'pimmcidtl)or auffc^Uepcn unt o^nc Umftanbe cintrctcn.'' Dcr altc 3«i'i^f" banftc unt ftccfte ten Jpimmeldfc^IuflfcI in fein ssSBamd, tann lut cv tad fd)n?erc 5^c^ auf tie ©c^uUcrn unt btQann tic brcitc SJolfenftva^e binauf^uftcigcn. Stuf tcm ^egc fc^autc cr immcr urn unt fprad) bei fic^ : ./^J^einc Slltc mirt gemi^ bait nad)tommcn, tcnn fic iibcrlcbt mcinen 3:ot nid)t langc." Sr gclangtc aber toc^ bid and gro^c ^'^immeldt()or, o^nc ta§ i^m ioicmant nad)gcfommen ware, unt ta cine Ijoljerne f^cint ta»or jiant, warf er tad ^(^ auf ten Sutcn, fe^tc ftc^ nietcr unt wartete. Denn cr molltc nid)t ot)ne fein 2©cib in ten Jpimmcl cittgetiett unt tac^te: „Senn fic ^erauffommt unt fie^t tad pra4>J'gc 2:^or, gctraut fic ftc^ oicUeic^t nic^t aufjufd^liegcn." ^tmmcl0fd)luffe(. 431 @fii biUiertf nidjt laiii^c, fo fal) er jiMiutnt>, t)fr fid) inii^fam fcic.s ©trapc l)prauffd)lcpt)te; c^ luar intccJ iiU-^t feln SiJcib, foutcrn f{n ©olt)at, eiii noc^ iunacci, frifi^ed ?3l;'t, aUx mitten burd) t)ie 53rufl gefc^offen. Gr fliiotc [ic^ aaf u-itt, it ©abol unt) flol)ntc bcl fcbem @(^ritt, tenn tie 20imti.- branntc luic ^ciier. TO cr ans ^inmtimjov Qeian^k, foimte er nid)t ^inein, tveil cr reinciuo ^imme(i^fd)luJTeI t^atte. ta le()nte cr ftd) and It or, fd)Io§ bie Slugen unt) 3ittertc am gaujen Seibe, benn eg war fc()r fait, unt> ba« gicber fd)uttelte i^ii. X;em alten 3ur(^en t^at U& ^m \mi), njie er il)n fat), unb er bacltc : ,,®anft ^etriid t)at gett)i§ ocrgeffen, ba^ ber fo fc^neU jierben 56 ttJurbe, fonfl tiatte cr iljm iinm ^i»',.netdfc^luf]rel gefanbt. X)cnn cin cl)r(td)cr ©olbat, bcr im offenen ^am))fe fattt, i3el)ort boc^ in ben dimmer!"— Unb eg ver^telt ftd> auc^ wtrf(id) fo: bcm ^tm- meleiVfovtner war c3 gan^ nub gar entfaKen, ba^ ber braoe ^rtegg* mann ()eute flerben wiirbe; er ^at auc^ immer gar fo ^icl jn benfeneo unb gu forgcn ! „3c^ njitt einmat bcm ^eiligen ^etrud ind ^anbmert grcifen/' bac^tc ber gutmutige 3urgen unb erl^ob fid), gab bcm (Solbaten fcinen cigcnen ©c^Iiiffel unb fprady: „®el)t nur (){uein, {()r l)abt'i3 notiger aU tc^, unb la^t cud) ijon ben dngcln ^immclebalfam auf 65 bieSCunbc traufetn!" // 3)cr eolbatbanfte unb fc^lop auf; auf bcr ®d)wetrc afecr wanbtc cr |ic^ urn unb fagte : „2BoUt tl)r nic^t auc^ g(cic^ mitfommen ?" Tia rfef ber gngcl mit bcm glammenfc^wcrt, ber Winter bem I^orc (ianb: „^nv mv eincn ec^liiffcl l)at, barf ^crcin!" unb7o fc^Iug bag Zf)ox 3u, bap eg frac^tc. 92ac^bcm bcr alte 3«rgen wteber etnc SBcilc gooartet ^attc, fa^ cr wirflic^ cin alk^, gebudteg SJiiittcrc^cn bie Bolfenftrape ^crauf- ficigen unb erfannte, ba§ eg fein 2Gcib war. T>a (ief er % cntgcaen, fc fc^nett feinc alten 33einc H)n tragcn wotttcn, Mnb76 umarmtc fie, unb bcibc frcuten ftd^ fe^r. yf*. 432 ^immclnfi^mifel* I „(^W gffif^ t)iucln!" fviv^te er, cim ciJ ijl fait nut) uiuuirfd) l)ier aufmu" Xa fie aber ^orte, ta§ er fcinen (Sc^Iujyet ^erfAcuft Ijcitk, mlite ftc nic()t 8ol)incin9el)cn, fonbcrn hit il^n, t>cn iljriijcn su iiel)meu. ©ic tinirc ol)nct)ic^ miibe uitt) miipte »ort)cr tin iucuig aii^ritt)en, faiite fie, Sr «a()m akr il)ren ^immel^frf)lu|jel nid)t; unt) fo Hic^en fie fccitc augcn, fc0tcn ftc^ ncben einanbcr auf tie l}or3erne 33anf unt) iDartetcn. 86 !Da fa^cn ftc ein ^inb :^crfomuicn, bad ^attc Monte ?oc!en unt gro^c, blaue Slugen unt) ging im (Sterbel}enitcl)en. SD^it teni ^{pfel t»e($ Jpembd)en0 trodnetc e(3 t)ic 3:t)rancn, tie il)m iiber bic ^acfen linaMicfen. „2lrmeS ^inb, nje^ijalb n^cinjl bu fo fet)r?" fragtc bic 5Ilte. 90 „SCctl ic^ ijon meincm Wattivdjcn l)at>e fort miiffen/' eranberte ba0 ^ittb. „^er licbc ^ott |at eg fo gcwom," fagtc bie ^Ilte, unb cr wirb fc^ott nnjlen, tuarum. „Teg^)aIb lueine nic^t mcl)r, niein ^inb! 3c^ tviU bir au(^ eine Wlntkv fein, big beine njirnid)c SJiutter nad)- 95fommt. (3df nur gleic^ in ben ^inimet ()inein, bann befommft bu cin faax fd)one, n?eipe giiigei unb anrft ein (Sngelein.— !Du {)aft bo^ beinen ^immelgfc|liijfel nid)t oerloren?'' i „(5r ifl mir au^ bcr ^anb gcfallen, unb {^ babe it ' ntc^t me^r ftnben fihuien," fagte bag ,$ltnb unb begann aneber ^u njeinen. 100 2IIg bic 2Ute bag t)orte, nal)m ftc t()rcn eigr.cn ©c^liiffcl, f^Io^ bic 3;t)iir auf, unb bag ^inb ging in ben ^immel ein. ^a fagen fie nun, bie bciben Sllten, ne!en cinanber auf ber ^anf, unb feincg l^attc einen J^immelgfc^IiijfcL @g tvuvbe aber 9'Jad)t unb tt?ar jo ftnfter, ba^ fie ftd) fiir^tcten. Xann famen bie 106 (Sterne gcrotlt unb poUerten in ilbren ^abnen. Unb bie gutcn, ttlten Scute tjcrlorcn ganj ben Mut unb bcgannen leife ^u tt^eincn. $immcl!if4iufie(« 433 ■v^C()0lf<'tt ' ftc aber I'tc nid)t 5ic tviirc ao^k fie, [te bcitc mi unt) tfen itnt 111 3ipfel jvanberte cr Wirt (I mnt)l ter nad)* mmft t)u c^t me:§r en. auf ber vbe afeer imen bie e autin, ceincn. 5l6er ttcr licbc ©ott t)ortc auf feinem %i)xom t>05 SBeinen unt fjjra.l; : „(Sl)crub, tuer tveint ijor t)cm Jptmmcl^t()orc?" Da cqai)Ue i^m ber 6()erub toa^ gefc^c^en wax, bcnn er ^atte atteg burd)^ (Sc^luffetloi^ mit angefe^cn. 511^ ber liebc ©ott bag no \)ernal)m, ftieg cr f^ncU tjon feinem I^rone, fam felbfl and J^im- mcIdtt)or unb ()ie§ bic bciben 2tlten cintreten. Unb 3itrgcn ttjurbe ivirtlic^ ^immclgftf^cr, bcnn er l^atte fcin 9Je0 ni^t ttergeffen, fonbern in ben ^immet mit ^ereingenommen. Da mu§tc er bie feurigen 1;^ranen bed ^eiligen Saurentiud, bic aU ii5 ©ternf^nuvpcn im J^immetdraum um^erfc^mimmen, mit feinem gro^en 9?c^e ftfc^en, bamit nid)t atlju ijiele auf bie Srbe ^inunter* regneten. 9?a^ eincr 3fit bcmerfte aber ber liebc ®ott, ba§ bicfc 5(rbeit fiir ben atten Wlann ^u :^art unb mii^coott war; be^tjalb rief eri2o i{)n ju jtc^ in bie @d)ar ber 5lugeriva()(ten unb eriaubte i^m, eincm i)on ben Sngletn, bie ju ^n^m bed gottlic^en 3:t)roned mufijieren, ben gro^en 33rummba^ su l)alteu ; unb ba^J Snglein fpieltc noc^ ttiel' fc^i)ner aU »orl)ev, benn ed fonnie nun ben giebelbogen mit beiben ^anben fii^ren ivie cine (Sage. Da fam fii^ ber a(te 126 3iivgen gar wi^tig i)or unb fprad) oftmald ^u feinem SBeibe: „^aU i^ bir'cs nic^t immer gefagt? ^Jiu^iggang giebt'g im ^immcl nic^t!" — Der golbene ^immeUfd)Iiiffet aber, ben bag arme «Kinb tjerloren ^atte, war burc^ bie SCoIten auf cine griine SBiefe ^inabgefatlen. i30 Dort tjerwanbelte er fii^ in eine fleine, gelbe 33hime, bie itberall blit^t, wo gute ^enfd)en wo{)nrn. Unb wer bie S3(ume fte()t, yergigt fiir eincn 5lugeublid \oa^ ii)n bcbriicft, unb traumt Don eincr fd)i3neren 3«f"«ft. >< 434 ^aS eifcrne llreu). VTir. Das etfcrnc l{rcu5. @tiva ein 3iit)»^ "^f^ 53ecnt»J4U.n(5 "tjci bciit[c^«=fran5i)rifci)en ^riege^ flc^t einnial ein pommerfd)er (l)ut0()crr an einem ^orgcn unter [eincn Ivbcitcru anc^ einen pcmil 3;agcli)()ner, fcer ^a3 eifcrne ^reua auf ter S3ruft ()atte. 51(3 gcierftunbe iuar, ruft er i()n ; vin't> sbamit ber manlfaulc ^ommer an^ 9iet)Ctt fDmmt, giebt er il)m juerft etma^ Drtentlic^e^ in tien ^DJagen, bcnn 'tann fiingt bie ^iit)Ic an gu kufcn. X)a fragtc er i^n benn, tuie er ^itm eifcrnen ^reu^ gefommen fei. „^a/' meintc ter ^ommer, „tiajj i[t einc langc ©cfc^ic^tc — benn 10 id^ l^abe e0 »om ;^5nig 2ffiiU)cIm fclber gefriegt uxCo jiuar fiir^ 6in()auen." I)arauf t^ut tcr Rummer einen or mic^ l)in, attc rcc^td, ba§ ic& nur fo ^ugreifen 6raud)e unb fd)ie§e loi?. 1)a tommen akr immer me^r grangofen t)evaud; bent Dberft ttjirb bie @a^c bebenflic^, 25 unb er lagt gum 3wi^«cf9fi)^« btafen. 3i^ V^^^ ^^^ — ^c"f^ a&er: „Sinpai!en bie patronen all' ift rtid)t angenet)in, unb Hegen lajfen ba0 liebe ®ut fannft bu and) ni^t— alfo bu lii^t ben ^erl ^aS eifcrne Itteuj. 435 unt) Hafctt unt) Meibjl ^ier unb ttcrfc()ic9cfl bctne ^atronen, bann fannft t)u bic^ immcr noc^ ^uf bic .^acfen macftcn." 3^ bir [o cbcn rcc^t im @c^ie§cn, ba fommt unfer 5lbiutant ^ergcfprencjt unb f(^reit:3o „^erlg, guriic!, ()abt jk benn feine D{)ren?" „5ld) m^," fag' i(^ unb bre^e mi^ fo l)a(kec^tg ()crum, „id) will nur evft bic ^atronen oerfd)iepcn." Unb fort tuar ber ^Ibfutant, unb nidU^ mc^r su fc^cn. Bulc^t "^tn ic^ gana allein gewefcn unb »or mtr atleg rot oott granjofen, faum amanaig ®d)ritt wcit. 2Btc i(^ bic le^tcss ^atrone oerfd)ojTe«. ^^ ^f^ff ^^) • //^"« <*^f^ ^P'^ ^^^^ 3«it» ^^^^ bu bid) tvegmad)ft." 3c^ ne()mc alfo bie ^a^^n unter bic 53cine unb fpringc njic cin ^irfc^ l)inter bent JRegimcntc ^cr. T)ic granaofcn fd)ojycn mir nac^, bag war cin ^agelwetter, akr atlc^ s« ^od^, unb id) fontmc ganji ntuntcr beim 9iegimcntc an. 2Cic i(^40 eintrctcn mU, fc^ ic^ ben ^^bjutanten mit bem DBcrflen ^arlicrjn unb ntit bcr ^anb aufmic^ beutcn. Da benf i(^ : „5l^a--ic^t gicbt'g toa& in bic ^rcibc »on tvegcn bcm ^^lic^tpariercn." ij Unfcr Dberft ttjar cin frcuaBrattcr ?f??ann, bcr fommt auf mic^ jugcrtttcn unb lac^t iibcr baiJ ganjc ©cfti^t unb fagt : „^txl, (inb 45 beinc ^noc^en no^ allc bei cinanber?" „Sn Sefet)I, ^crr Dberftl" fagc id). Da lac^t cr wicbcr unb fagt : „yia, ^crl, ba fannfl bu mc^r aU S3rot cffcn." 3d) bcnfc: „^a— bic^mal ifl bie ©a^c glatt abgelaufcn unbeo bcm 5lbfutantcn fcinc ^laufc^crci ^at boc^ nid)tg genit^t." Da ^ei§t'g am folgcnben Stag ^I6^ti(^ : „(Scine 5J?afcflat bcr ."^onig fommt."— 9la— bag war fo cine grcubc, aU bcr altc ^crr fam. (5r ful)r ijorbci, unb ic^ ^attc mir fd)on dn paax ^artoffctn tierma^rt, benn t^ t)attc cincn ^eibcnmafigcn hunger. Da fommtss plofetid) unfer ^tbiutant auf mid) krangefprcngt unb fagt, ic^ folic auf ber SteUc ju Seiner 5]'iajeftat fonimen. Sfla, i(^ benfc, ber ©^lag foil mid) riit)ren, aber ic^ fammic 436 2!oS cifcmc ^rcuj* ml^ wfcbcr unv fagct ,,3u SSefe^I ! 3(^ ^abe ja nic^ts 236fc0 Be eoganaen." X!cr 5lt>iutflnt grinfle abcr fo mit bcm ©efldfjte, als njotltc cr fagcn: „2Barte, ^erl, nun ^abc i^ bi(^ gcfriegt fitr tag S'lid^t- pariercn, tu foCfl bo^ nic^t fo lei^t nje^fommcn." 3c^ tiaU wa^r()ofHg ntd^t getacfot, taf cin ?0?enfd) [o ^intert)aUii5 fein fann. 86 5llfo mir [!nt> tie 33eine luacfetig, unb id) irerbc fo in ein ^aug gcfii^rt \tn'i> banit in einen ©aal, ta ^afg gcroc^en, bap einem bag SCaffer im ^aut aufammengelaufen ift, fo gut. 3c^ bcnfc eben : „9la, n?er ba mitcffett fonnte/' ba mu§ ic^ f^on ing 5^ebcn3immcr. 3e^t fommt ber J^ijnig auf mid^ ju wnb ifi fo 7ofrcunbIi^ ttjic bie liebc (Sonne unb fagt: „5}?ein ©o^n, ttJie ioax benn bic ©efc^i^tc geflcrn mit ben ^atronen ? (ix^ai)k mir einmal aOcg mag bu meift, ganj gena'\" „3u S3efel)I, 5}?aieftat/' fage id), unb erja^Ic fo atlcg gerabe njie'g gen?efen i% unb ba§ i^ bag (Signal n)ot)I ge()ort, aBer bag Tsliebe ©ut nid^t pttc liegen lajfen luotlen, unb mie ber Slbjutant ge!ommen unb gef^vieen ^atte: „3uriic!, ^ertg!"— ba ^atte id) atlerbingg geglaubt, ba§ feine 3eit ^um ^om^jlimentmad^en fei, unb pttc fo gefagt: „%d) wag— ic^ i)erfrfne§e crfl meine ^atronen. Dag ifl bag ©anje gemefen, ^err ^iinig, tueiter ^ab' ic^ nic^tg 80 i)crbro(^en»" Da (ad)te ber ^i)nig iiBer bag ganjc ©eftci^t unb fagte: „Dag ^afl bu feraij gemac^t, mein @o|n." 3c^ benfe: „5^a— nun ifl'g gut, nun mag ber Slbjutant fagen, ivag er njitt." Da fragt mid) ©einc ^riajcjlat: „^a|t bu fc^on ^u SHittag gegejfen, mein (BoljnV 86 „3u 33efc^I, (Sure maU^'dt ! " fag^ i^, M ^^n nod) jlodnitd^tern/' „Du l^ajl tt>ol)l tiid)tigen hunger?" fagte Seine mait^'dt weiter. „3a/' fag' i^, „unb ber Durfl ift and) nid)t fd)red)t." Da lac^te ber ^iinig Jwieber iiberg gan3e ©efic^t unb fagte, id) foUc mitejfen. // ^a0 ctfcrnc Itreu). 437 3c^ fe^e mtc^ benit an ben fd^oncn, grofen Jifc^ mit at(* ben 90 l^o^cn J^erren unb (3tmxaU. Da tvar ©uppe, Srbfenfuppe, akr nic^t tton ber 33er(tner SrbiJwurfi. (S^ war abcr bcr letter nur l)alb ooU, bag ic^ bac^te: „333enn bu uur me^r 'oon ber ©uppc l^aben fonntefl." 2l(g i(^ fafl fcrtig rt>ax, rief ber ^ijnig ^criiljer : ,MW^^ i*" 95 nod) ttwa& (Suppe i^aben, mein ®o^n?" „3« 33efe^I, (Sucr SJiaieftaV fagc i^ ^ttjcnn noc^ cin M^cfeen ba ijl." 2)a lac^ien bit ^erren, unb eincr toon ben ^ammerbienern brac^te mir no(^ [0 cimn ZtUtx tooH. ^err, bic ©uppe fc^mecft mirioo ^eutc no(^ gut im ^alfe ! T)a fommt bann Siner therein unb kingt einen ^alb^bratcn, fajl fo C(ro§ ttJte ein Dc^fenyiertel, unb ein anberer nimmt fo ein grof eg Wlt^ix unb fa&elt ^crunter tmmer ein ©tiicf auf bag anberc auf etncn gro§en Shelter. 105 „^a/' benfc t(^— „ber »erfte^fg [d)on bejfer aU ber mit ber ©uppc." X)er groge Metier fommt an mic^ juerfl, unb id) ne()me tl)n ijor mid^ unb bann auc^ fo ein ^[fiettc^en mit .^artoffeln baju. 3c^ benfe jttjar: „(Sg i[t ein bi^^en toiel, aber bu barffl bii^ :^icr nid^t no lumpen taffen," unb ejje ju. Die i)eUen Xropfen finb mir auf ber ©time geftanben, Big bie ^appc^en atle gegejfen njaren. SBic icb bcnn nun fertig mar, unb ber ^evr nebcn mir f^enfte immer tapfer cin, ba§ tc^^g gut t)erunterfriegte, fragt mi(^ ©eine DIJJaieftat ber ^onig: „2Bic ift'g, mein ®obn, mod)teft bu noc^ met)r ^aUnV 115 3«^ fage : „3u 33efe()(, ^J^ajeftat, mmi no^ ein U^^^n ba ift." Da (ac^ten alie J^crren an^ ijoUcm ^alfe, unb and) @eine ^afefidt fagte : ,,'^cm, eg ift gut fiir I)eute, mein (Sobn, je^t fotf ein anbereg ®cvic^t fommeu." 120 438 9lmiima* ^ia, id) wax frol), ta§ (.& mit bent ^albcibratcn aUt tear, unb tenfe: „2Cag mvt) nun fommcn?"— t»a tritt cin l)ot)er Offigier mit ©d^niiren auf ten Sc^ultern an mic^ l)cran unt) ^ncjt mir ba« eifcrne ^rcnj an. 125 2Bie ic^ wicbcr bei meinem Stcgimentc anfomme, ta lac^tc tcr Sltijutant ttJieter libera i^an^e ©efic^t unt) fcrct)te fcincn ©ciinauabart l)ernm unt gab mir t>ic Jpanb. 3rf) freute mic^, tap cr tvieber gut tt)ar, unt» feine ^(aufd)erei bei 2)iajeftat fl)m torb nid)t3 cjenu^t unt) ic^ fiir^ Sinl)auen an bcr lafcl auc^ noc^ bat? eifcrne ^rcus »on .80®ciner SOcajeftat felbft gctriegt i)attc. ©0 tp e^ iiefommen unt nid}t anter«. — IX. ZTtcottana. X;ic ticfc SBtrtin flanb, mit einer fc^nccnjci^cn (Bd^iirjc anget^an, i)or tcr 3:i)iir ter 2CaIt)fdbenfe. !I^ie ?infe ^attc fte in tic (Scitc gcflemmt, au^ tcr SflcAtcn aber ma(^te fie cin ^Dad^Iciu fiir tic 5(ugcn, an^ tcncn fie fc^arf au^Iugtc, ob nic^t ©ape m^ tcr (£tatt 5im Sln^ugc fcicn. 5lbcr auf tent 2Beg, tcr fic^ turc^ SBogen rcifenbcr M)vm teit ^iigct t)crauf^og, jvar fcine ?0?enfd)cnfceIe ^u cnttccfcn. ©g h?ar cin fd)a>iilcr ©ommcrnad)mittag, unt tie @tattlcute fiirc^tetctt n)oI)I tie fc^tvarjblaucn SBolfcn, tie fid) itbcr ten be»t)i»Itctett ^itgcln a>ic cin mad)tigeg ©cbirgc aufgctiirmt 10 l)attcn. Sbcn iwoflte tie mi^mutige SQBirtin in tag ^nntve teg ^aufeg guriidfel)rcn, dU smifdKu ten ^ornfcltcrn cine flcinc ©cflalt ftd^tbar a^urte, judd)c auf tie ©d^cnfe 5ufd)ritt. ;Dcr 5ln!i)mmling tuar cin lunged 33iirfd)d)cn von l)od)ftcng ijicrjclm 3a^rcn. @r trug ciiip i5bunte SKi'tt^c auf tcni braunen J?rau£!fopf unt fcibivang eiucii fnotigcn 8tcif in tcr 3lcd)tcn. 3©iirtcooU griipent l)iclt er fciuni Dttcotiana* 430 jar, unb ^\tx mit niir ba^ icl)tc ter taujbart eber gut u0t unt iget^an, ic ©cite fiir t)ie r Stabt SBogcn i)enfeelc unb bie d) itber getiirmt jtd^tBar wax ein I eiueii Sfn^ug, fuc^te f!t1j int ©artcn t)intcr bcm ^au3 efnen fd^attigcn W^ unb bcfieate SBtcr. Die SCirtin brac^te bag ^Jcrlanj^tc unb fat) Iad)crnb ^n, toit lev ®afl mit (^ro^tv Umfianblic^feit cine (a^tgc Xabafgpfeife 3ufam*2o ntcnf^raubtc unb fte ftopftc. X)ic ^feife mt mit buntcn Ouaflcn gcjiert unb auf bem g)or3ctIanfo))f mv bcr ^ijnig ®ambrinng abgemalt, 5Dic SGirttn fe^te ben fc^aumenben Sicrfrug auf ben lifc^, fa^tc: „2Bol)l bcfomm'g/' unb lifp bann ben 53urfc^cn bei ^feife unb 9J?a^frug aaein , bag mar i^m eben rcrf)t. ' Sr t§at25 einen tud^tii^en ©c^lucf, bann flcmmte er ben (iabogen auf bcit 2ifd^ unb qualmte n?ie ein (Sc^Iot. Unb wie cr fo bafa§ unb [ic^ iibcr bic Stauc^molfen freute, vie empornjirbelfm unb in Maulic^ca ©treifen fi^ ijer^ogen, Urn fid) ber ^nitpi fo ert)aBen \>ox, ttjie Siii^ auf feinem SOoIfenttjron. so 3e^t entflieg bem ^fcifenfojjf ein ivunberfc^oner bfauer min^d, Slber er aerflo^ nid)t, njie bag fonf^ ju gefc^e^en pflcgt, fonbern er i)erbi^tete fic^ ^u einem 5^ebelfnaul unb ttjurbe grofier unb immer grower; bann tnlk ftc^ bic 2Bolfe mie ein ?5enfieri3or^ang, unb »or bem erjlaunten ^naben ftanb eine aierlic^e SJJabd^engeflalt, etmass eine Sttc ^o^. !Dic ^leinc trug tin ^attanafarbeneg ^ledfc^cn unb in ben brau= nen Sodfen ein 3)iabem »on 33ernftein, an ben (Sc^ultern r)atte fie citt ^aar gliiget au^ eigaretten)japier unb in ber ^anb ^ielt fie cine blii^enbc Jabafg^flanjc. 40 2)ag nicblid>e ^fJiabc^en fnirte, unb ber 33urf^e 309 ^ofli^ feinc S^ulic. T)ann t()at bic ^(eine i^ren ^JZunb auf unb forac^ : „3^ Un bic 2abafelfc 9?icotiana. min ^err unb ©ebietcr, ^iinig ^naf^er ber ®elbc, feubet mid) 3U euc^. 3()r ()abt iOin ^tnk sum erflen mal ein 33ranbopfer 9ebrad)t, unb ber muc^45 luifs vjimiDi'S t)t Dig 3u il)m gcbrungen. (*r entbietct cuc^ feincn ®ruf unb labt cuc^ ein, ijor feinem J^ron au crfc^einen. <5eib i^r QcwiUt, mir ju folgen, fo witl i^ euc^ ju ^ofe aeleiten." / / 440 9{tcotiana, 60 Zix ^mU tvar tin te^er^tcr S3urf(^e, iinb t>a« 9lkntcuer toav Boganj na^ fcincm ©inn, tarum fprac^ cr ol)ne ^i^Qf^^" ifW ^^^^^ fein 33icr au^ unb ertldrte flc^ fiir reifefculg. „^aU i^r tticHcic^t einen Drac^cntuagcn ^ur J;anti, ?^ran(ein 9?icotiana?" fragte cr. „9?cin, ten traud)t'^ ntd)t/' ewiterte tic (SIfc. „3d) ^a6c, wic 3br fel)t, ?5lit(^el, nnt) unig euc^ antctrifft, fo ifl and) Iciest gc^ot- 66 fen. tteurer jtt iu^en., 50a rief t)ie m^min: „^aUl" utCt) »ie ein geWultc* «Hog MieJ We 2:a6afi?pfeife mit i^rem JHefter (Ic^en. Der ^xmt offnete bie Slugen. 25or i^m faf auf ciner riefl0en ZaMixoUt StonxQ ^nafler. (Sein 2lntli0 mx gebraunt »ie ange- rauclter S^eerfc^aum, gclb njar fein 9r?antel, auf tern ^aupte trug er £6 eine Jlrone au« ^arfunfeljleinen, wie lebenbige ^o^Ien anjufc^auen, unb 3tt)if(^ctt ben 3a^nen Wt er eine mad^Hae Stak!i3»)feife, beren ^opfnjieeinJ^od^ofenglii^te. ,,@ei gegruft!" fprac^ ber ^onig au bem Slnfommling, ber j!(^ »or ©^wtnbel unb Slngfl faum noc^ auf ben -Seinen ^alten fonnte.w „X)tin mxkt ^o|e e^re. 3^ ^aU bic^ a« meinem 5)feifenftoj)fer erforen/' i » i m 9«{t biefen SCorten ergriff ^nafler ber ©erte ben aitternben Sungen beim ©(^opf unb mt m f^wefeenb iiber feinen qual- menben ^feifenfo»)f. ^er ©epeinigte mUtt fd^reien, aber SRau^ofi unb ^i^e fd^Ioffen i^m ben mnnt>i er metnte, fein le^te^ ©tiinblein fei gefommen. 3:)a auf einmal brang ^n feiner ««afe ein lieMid^er 2)uft tt)ie »on fr{f(^ gebranntem ^affee. Sl«^ ^o„ig ^„a|ier fc^ien ben ®eruc^ wa^raune^men, benn er lieg bie |)anb, njelt^e ben ^feifenjlopfer loo ^ielt, jlnfen unb n^anbte fein ©afic^t nac^ ber ^ic^tung, i)on j»etAer ter Duft promte. ^ „^eine geinbin, bie gee SWoffa !" murmerte er ingrimmig. eine Blaulid^e SCoIfe, bie parfenben SCo^Igeru^ tjerkeitete mutt ^eran, unb auf ber SCotfe \a^ eine fc^iine, fc^maragefleibete 105 5rau mit fanft Micfenben Slugen. 3n ber |)anb trug jle einen flropen, ftrberncn ^affeeliiffel. .Wt tin I" rief bie gute gee. „Mt tin, graufamer ^onig ""* ^'-'" ^Fici (icyi unrer meinem v^^u^." @ie Berii^rte ben ^rm beg ^iJ„igg mit bem (SilBerBffel j bie 110 ^ciujt, bie ben @c^o))f be^ Surf^en ge^alten ^atte, offnete ftt^, ««b 442 $er (9olbtiautn« fopfiiber, fopfunter ftiir^te ticfcr in bie fAtt>inteInbe Xiefe, ba§ i^m ^oren unt @cbp»* ttfrgiiii Sr fd)lug ^art auf aU cr unten att*nm Mnt> t)tt« brac^te i^n ii5n>lcber ju Sefinnung. !Danf cinem C|iu.ft!'d)en Bwf^^tl njar er an bcrfelbcn ©tcOc nieDerf^cfluqt, »ou ttjdcfjer er ntit bcr GIfc -Hico- tiana aufgcflogcn ttjar. 5Il« cr urn [Ic^ blicftc, fant) er fii^ unter tern 3;ifd?, an bent er eine 55t?rtclfluntie juoor trinfcnb unt) rauc^cnt) gefeffcn ()atte, neben i^m auf tern 3^ot)i:n la^ tie jer* i2obro^cne ^feife. Sr froc^ unter bent Sifc^ ^^erttor unb ric^tete (ic^^ auf. 5lrme unb S3einc waren '^eil, aber unfdglid^ n?e^ n?ar e« bent arnten aungen ju 9J?ut. i!Jiut)fetig \A)Upp\t er f!(^ bis su bent naci^llen 33aum, an beffen Stamm er feine ntit 5lngflfc^n>et§ ubergojfene ©tirn le^nte. 126 3n ber I^iir bcr 2BaIbf(^enfe aber erfci^ien bie bicfe SBirtin, eine raud^enbe (B6)aU in bcr J^anb t)altcnb. „Jpicr, jungcr J^err," fprac^ f!c mitleibig, ,M^t i^ 3^nen cine Za^t f^wargen ^affee gelod^t. 3c=^ ^aU mir'S gleic^ geba^t, ba§ bie ®efc|ic^te ein fol(|e3 (Snbe ne^men wiirbc." 130 Unb ntilb la^elnb flo§te fie bem 3erfnirf(^tett ben f^warjen Jranf ber S3eru^igung iiber bie bleic^en ?ippen. X. Der (Bolbbaum. Das Gemach, in welchem unsre Geschichte beginnt, sah sehr einfach und i^clitern aus. An den geweissten Wanden, deren einzigen Schmuck ein paar vergilbte Landkarten bilde- ten, standen zwei schmale Betten, ein Biicherbrett und ein 5 Kieiderschrank, auf welchem eine Erdkugei Platz geiunden hatte. Die Mitte des Zimmers nahm ein langer, mit vielen ir er an fc DRico* ii) unter nit) unt> vie jcr* mar ed ^ Ms 3U iflfc^njeif SBirtin, !r J^crr," in ^affcc n folc^ed c^warjcn ^cr ®oIb6aum* 443 int, sah A^anden, Bn bilde- und ein [eiunden it vielen Tintenklexeii gezierter Tisch ein, und an dem Tisch sassen auf harteii HoizstUhlen zwei Knaben von etwa zwolf Jahren. Der Blonde briitete iiber einer schwiorigen Stelle des Cor- nelius Nepos und walzte seufzeud di*-^ sriiwere L dkon ; derio Braune aber miihte sich, aus einer nrunstelligen Zahl die Kubikwurzel zu ziehen. Der Piniwlogf hieas Hans, der Mathematiker Heinz. Zuweilen hob n die Knaben ihre ivopfe in » e Hohe und blickten sehnsiichtig aach dem geoffneten Fenster, durchis welches die Fliegen suramend ein- und ausflogen. Im Garten lag goldener Sonnenschein auf Biiumen und 'lecken, und wie zum Hohn blickte in bluhender Hollerzweig in das i^ nudier- zimmer der beidcu HoflFi -ingsvoUen. Noch eine Stunde mussten die Armen siti n uud schwitzen, b^vor sie in's Freie20 dui'^ten, ui I die Minuten schlicheii dahin e die Schnecken an don Stachelbeerljiischen draussen im Garten. An eine eigenmachtige Abkiirzung der Arbeitszeit war auch nicht zu denken, den^i im Nebenzimmer sass am Schreibtisch der 'i; Doktor Schlagentzwf ', dem die Knaben zur Zucht und Lehre25 iiberantwortet waren, md die Verbindunsrsthiir stand offen, so * dass der Doktor sich zu jeder Zeit von der An ' esenheit seiner Schu^zbefohlenen iiberzeugen und ihr Trei* en nberwachen konrite. „Hannibal hatte auch was gescheiteres thun koniien /iNgo iiber die Alpen i ziehen," knirschte ffans, und „neunmai einundachtzig ist siebeahundertneunundzwanzig," murraelCe Heinz mit dumpfer Stimme. Dann blic ' ten sie beide von ihrer Arbeit empor, schauten sich an und gahnten. Plotzlich vernahmeu sie ein lautes Summen. Ein Gold- 35 kafer, der draussen auf -^em liolleibaum gesessen haben mocntej hatte sich in's Zimmer verin " Dreimal schwenkte I 444 2)er (iolbliaum. er sich im Kreis um die Kopfc der Knalx^n, und dann — plums — lag' er im Tintciifass. 40 „Eigentlich geschieht es ihm ganz reclit,** sagte Heinz, „warum bleibt er nicht, wo es ihm gut geht. Aber in Tinte ersaufen, das ist doch ein zu olender Tod. Wart', Kamerad, ich werde dich retten." ^^^t. Er woUte dem zappelnden Kafer mit dem Stahlfederhalter 46aus der Tinte helfen, aber schneller vollbrachte Huns das Rettungswerk mit dem Finger. Und dann trock iten die Knaben den armen Sclielm sauberlich mit dem Loschblatt - ab und sahen zu, wie er sich mit den Vorderfiissen putzte. „Er hat einen roten Spiegel auf dem Brustschild sound schwarze Horner," sagte Hans, indem er seinen tinten- geschwarzten Finger am Haupthaar abwischte, „es ist der Goldkaferkonig. Er wohnt in einem Schloss, das ist aus Jasminbliithen gebaut und mit Rosenblattern gedeckt. Gril- len und Heimchen sind seine Musikanten und Johanniswiirm- 66chen seine Fackeltrager." || „Du bist ein Faselhans," sprach Heinz. „Und wer dem Goldkaferkonig begegnet," fuhr Hans fort, „der ist ein Gliickskind. Gieb acht, Heinz, uns steht etwas bevor, ein Abenteuer oder sonst etwas Absonderliohes, und 60 heute ist noch dazu der erste Mai, da geschieht mehr als ein Wunder. Sieh, wie er uns mit den Fiihlhornern winkt und die Fliigeldecken hebt. Jetzt wird er sajh gleich verwandeln und vor uns stehen als Elfe mit einem Konigsmantel angethan und einem Goldhelm auf dem I^opf.*' 65 „Fortfliegen wird er," sprach Heinz und lachte. „Schnurr — da hast du's." Die Knaben traten an's Fenster und sahen dem Kafer nach. In weitem Bogen durchschnitt das blitzende Kleinod ^♦v V t)tx ^olbbaum. 446 die Luft und verschwaiid jtiiiaeitM der Garteiiinauer. Jetzt wurde iin N el )enzi miner ein Rauspern vernehinbur, und die 70 beidon Schiiler kehrten eilig zu ilireii Biichern zuriick. „Da hahen wir dM„s Wunder," fluwterte Hans seinem Kame- raden zu und zeigte auf das Tintenfass-. Aus dem Tintenfass heraus ragte ei'i ghines llcis, das wuchs zusoherr's und stieg zur Decke hinan. j | 75 „Wir triiumen," sagte Heinz und rieb sich die Augen. „Nein, das ist ein Marchen," jubolte Hans, „ein lebendigea Marchen, und wir spielen mit." Und dac Reis wurde starker und trieb Aeste und Zweigo mit Blattern und Bliiten. Die Decke des Zimniers verschwand, go die Wande wichen, und eine dammernde Waldhalle uniting die staunenden Knaben. „Vorwarts!" rief Hans und zog den widerstrebenden Heinz mit sich fort. „ Jetzt kommt das Abenteuer." Die bliihenden Gestrauche thaten sich von selbst aus- 86 einander und bffnefcen den Knaben einen Pfad. Gebrochen biinkte das Sonnenlicht durch Jas Gitterdach der Waldbaiime und malte tausend goldene Augen auf das Moos, und aus dem Moos stiegen Sternblumen von brennenden Farben, und griines, krauses Geranke sclilang sich um die bemoostenoo Stamme. Droben aber in den Zweigen flatberten singende Vogel in schimmernden Federkleidern, und Hirsche, Rehe und andere Waldthiere sprangen lustig durch die Biische. Jetzt lichtete sich der Wald, zwischen den Stammen biinkte es wie Feuerschein, und Hans raunte seinem Gefahrten zu : 96 „ Jetzt kommt's." Sie betraten eine Waldwiese, in deren Mitte ein einzeliier Baum stand. Aber das war kein gewohnlicher Baiim ; das war der Wunderbaum, von dem Hans so oft gehort hatte, der 44G ^cr ^olbftaum. I lOoBauiu mit den goldoiieri Bliittern. Die Kiiaben standen starr vor Stauneii. Da trat hinter dem Staiiim ein Zwerg liervor, nicht grosser als ein dreijiihriges Kind, aber nicht dickkdp% und platt- fiissig, wie genieiniglich die Zwerge sind, sondorn schlank und i05zierlich gewachsen. Er trug einen griinen Mantel und einen Goldhehn, und die beiden Knaben wussten, wen sie vor sich batten. Der Zwerg trat ein paar Scbritte vor und verneigte sich. „Die verzauberte Prinzessin harrt auf ihren Erlos^r," sprach iioer, „wer von euch beiden will das Wagestiick unternehmen?" „Ich," sprach Hans mit freudiger Stinime. Und alsbald fiihrte der Zwerg ein Rosslein heran, das war milchweiss und biss in einen goldenen Ziigel. „Thu's nicht, Hans !" mahnte Heinz angstlich, aber Hans li5sass bereits iiu Sattel. Wiehernd stieg das Zauberpferd in die Hohe, dann warf es den Kopf zuriick und nmnte mit fliegender Mahne in den Wald hinein. Ein leuchtender Gold- kafer aber flog als Wegweiser voraus. Noch einmal wandte Hans den Kopf zuriick und sah seinen Kameraden unter dem i20Goldbaum stehen dann verlor er Baum und Freund aus dem Gesicht. Das war ein lustiger Ritt. Hans sass so sicher und fest im Sattel, als ob er statt eines Rosses die gewohnte Schulbank unter sich gehabt hiitte. Wenn er daran dachte, dass er i25noch vor einer Stunde beim Cornelius Nepos geseufzt und vor dem Doktor Schlagentzwei gezittert habe, musste er lachen. Der kleine Schulknabe in dem kurzen Jackchen war zum stattlichen Reitersmann geworden mit Koller und Mantel, Schwert und Goldsporen. So flog er hin Jurch den 130 Zauberwald. ^cr ©albboum. 447 en starr grosser i platt- mk uud id einen vor sich te sich. ' sprach imen?" alsbald dss und r Hans iferd in ite mit r Gold- wand te iier dem us dem fest im lulbank iass er 'zt und sste er ickchen er und •ch den Jetzt erhob sein Riissloin ein frohlichos Gewieher. Der Wald wurde liclit. Noch ein paar Spninge, und Uoss und Reiter liielten vor einoni .schimuioinden Schloss. Bunte Fahnen weliten von den Thiirnien, Horner und Trompeten schallten, und auf dem Soller stand die Prinzessin und liess I3t ein weisses Tucli wehen. Sie sah fast aus wie Nachbars Lenchen, mit der Hitter Hans gespielt hatte, als er noch ein Knabe war und in die Schule ging, nur war sie grosser und tausendmal schonei. Hans sprang aus dem Sattel und eilte mit klirrenden Sporen 140 die Marmortreppe hinan. In dem geoffneten Schlossthor stand ein Mann, vermuthlich derlgofmarschallider Prinzessin, der kam unserm Hans sehr bekannt vor. Tu^XtTliJl Und der Hofmarschall streckte seine Hand aus, fasste Ritter Hansen am Ohr und rief : 145 „Eingeschlafen ist der Schlingel. Wart' ich will dich !" Da war der Zauber zu Ende. Hans sass wieder an dem tintenbeklexten Tisch, vor ihm lag der Cornelius Nepos und das lateinische Lexikon, ihm gegeniiber sass Heinz und schrieb, dass die Feder knirschte, und neben ihm stand der 150 Doktor Schlagentzwei und blickte durch seine Brillenglaser den Traumer unheimlich an. Als endlich die Stunde der Freiheit geschlagen hatte und die beiden Knaben draussen im Garten unter dem Hollerbaum mL ihr Vesperbrot vcrzehrten, theilte Hans seinem Freund mit, 155 was er getraumt hatte. „Das ist wunderbar," sagte Heinz, als Hans geendigt hatte, „h6chst wunderbar. Den gleichen Traum habe audi ich gehabt. Nur der Schluss ist anders ; ein Zauberschloss kommt in meinem Traum niclit vor." I60 „Erzahle !" drangte Hans. 448 Sorelei* ,,uis zum Ooldbauni stiinrufc inein Trauin genau mit dem deinigen iiberein. Du stiegst auf das weisse Pferd und rittest fort um die Prinzessin zu erlosen. Ich aber — " 165 „Nun?** fragte Hans gespannt. „Ich biieb zuriick, schiittelte den Baum und steckte niir alle Taschen voll goldene Blatter. Dann weckte mich der dumme Doktor, und da war es mit der Herrlichkeit vorbei." „Heinz," sprach Hans feierlich, und fasste den Freund bei 170 der Hand. „Wenn zwei einen und denselben Traum haben, so geht er bestimmt in Erfiillung. Der Traum war ein prophetischer. Denk' du an mich." Dann assen die Knaben die Reste ihres Vesperbrotes auf und wandten sich dem Ballspiel zu. 175 Gingen die Traume der Kna}>en in ErfwJIung 1 Ja. Hans wurde ein Dichter und liess sein Rosslein durch den griinen Marchenwald traben. Heinz aber, der im Traum den Gold- baum geschiittelt hatte, wurde sein Verleger. XI. €orekl 3d^ ttjeig ttici^t, was foil e« ^eteuten, !Daf ic^ fo traurig bin ; @itt ^atj^en aus aUcn Beitett, Dag fommt mir nicfct aus tern ©inn. T)xt guft ifi tiil)( unb eg bunfelt, Unb ru|ig fltcft ter ^^tin t T)tx ®{|)fc( tesf Sergei funfelt 5tm 2tBenbfDnttPiifffcpiM- Hans Su atei mte eitie liBIume. 2)ort obcn n?unt)cr&or, ©ic fammt t()r goIbcneiS ^aor. (Sic fammt eg mit goltenem ^amme, Unb ftngt ein Siet baki, I)ag l^at etne tvunberfamc ©cwdtige ^elobci. 2)ctt ©c^iffer fm Hcineit ©(^tffe grgrcift eg mit njilbem 3Kel) ; (Sr fc^aut ni^t bie gelfenriffe, (Sr fd^aut nur ()inauf in bic ^o^\ 3c^ glauBe, bie SBctten ^erfe^Iingen Sim Subc (5(^iffer unb Ma^n, Unb bag |at mit i^rem (Singcn X)ie Sorclei get^an. 449 IQ 15 XII. Du btst u)k due Blame* Du Mfl wie eine SBIume Z/V vun uHv ja;vu UUD yyiP* I 450 ^aS iibittDlfcii (SiluL %ai Sd)Iog am 9Rccrc* Unb ten 9J?ont> bariibcr (Ic^en Unt) S'lcbel tveit iim()fr." ^er SCint) unb tc^ ?0^eere« SCaUcii, ®abcn ffe frifdjeu Jllang ? SScrna|mfl tu ani l)o^en fallen @aiten unt ^eftgcfang ? „I)Ie SBinbe, tic SBogcn aHc Sagen in tiefer JRu^^ Sincm illagclict (tug tcr ^aKc ^ovf i(^ mit Zijxdmn ^n," (Sa'^efl tu okn gc^cn !i:en ^onii^ unt fein ®ema!^I, !J^cr rotcn *i!0'?antel 2Ce^en, Der goltnen kronen ©tra^l ? git^rtcn fie nic|t mit SBonnc Sine fd^onc Sungfrau tar, J^errli(j^ n>ic tie ©onnc, ©trai^Ient im goltcncn J^aar? „2Bo^( fa^ id^ tie (Sftcrn beite, O^ne tcr .kronen iMc^t, 3nt fd)iD'pjen J^rauerHeite ; 2)ie Sungfrau fal) i^ nic^t" 1 1 451 10 16 25 80 452 5)a8 Sr^log ©onrourt XV. 10 15 20 Das 5djIo§ 3oncourt * 3c^ traiim* afg ^int) mic^ jurudfc Unt) fd^iittle mein gtttfcg J^aupt : SBie fud^t i{)r mic^ ^cim, t.()r 53ilt>er, Die laug' i^ ijcrgcpn gegtauM? ^oc^ ragt au^ fc^att'gcn ©e()cgett @in fc^tmmcrnbcg (Sc^bft l^erijor, 3<^ fenne Die iiirme, bie Binncn, Die fieinenie 53iucfc, bag I^or, @g fc^aucn ttom SBappenf^ilbc 5)ie Sotucn fo trautid^ mic^ on, 3c| grille bie rtlten 58efanntctt Uttb eile ben 33urgl)of ijimn, t)0vt Itegt bic (S|)()iny am Srunncn, 2)ort flriint ber gcigenbaum, ^ort Winter biefeit gcnflcrn Sertraumf ic^ ben erflen 2;raum. 3c^ trcf in bic ^Burgfapeac Unb fuc^c beg 5I()n^errn ®rnb ; SDort ift'g, bort ()dngt »om 5>fei(cr 2)ag alte ©ewaffen ()eraK 9?0(^ (efen umflort bie Sliigen Die 3iige ber 3nfci)nft nic^t, 2Cie l^ell burc^ bie bnnten ©d^ciben S)a0 l*i(S^t bariiber auc^ brid^t. ^ic Stcriic. ©0 flel)fl bu, (Sc{>(o^ meiner 5Sater, 9)?ir treu unb fefl in bent (Sinn, Unb bifl tton ber (Srbc i)erfd)ttjunben, 3^er g)fl«g gc^t uber bic^ ^in. ran, Unt) einen Sled »on ©olbc fd^tDcr, 2Ber sal)U t)ic X)inge alle l)ei' ? 9(n feinen ©c^nurvbart fa^ man nur ^iJiit ®rafcn unt mit ©rau^, Unt) babci fa:^ er ^on 9latur ®ar njtlt) nnb grimmig au^, @ein (Sarra^ wax, man glaubt e^ faum,. (So grog fc^ier ali? ein JGekvKium. @r ^rtttc ^nod)cn n?ie ein ©flul Unt) cine fred)e Stirn, Unt) ein entfei^Iid) grof e^ ?(}?aul, "1)0* nur ein Heine^ ^ixn ; 2)cr Wicfc ©oHatJ, ®a6 3ct)em efnen JWippenPog Unb flunfcrte unt pxai^ltt grop. ©0 !am er aUc Jagc ^er Unt) fprac^ 3frael J^oI)n : ,,2Ccr ijl bcr 3J?ann, tvcr wagt'^ mft m{r? ©ei'5 SSater otcr @o^n I (Sr fommc ^er, tcr Sumpen^imt), 3^ ttjerf'i^n nieber auf ben ©runb." T)a fflm in feinem 8diafcrrocf (Sin Oiingling aort unb fein ; Sr ^attc nic^tg alg eincn ©totf, Die ©c^Icuber unb ben (Stein, Unb fjjrac^ : „, wo tie Gitronen Hut)n, 3i>i tunfein Vaub tie (J)olt'eran^fn Atiit)n, ^ '^ - ' (Sin fanftiT Sl^inti \)om blauen .^"^inmiel n>fIU, Die 'iJJJvrtc fliU unt) I)ud) tcv ^orbecr fli1)t? 6 Jlennfl t)u ccJ iuo()t ? T>a^in ! 'Dfll)iu ! 5)Zo(^f ic^ mit bir, u mciu ©diebter, 3icl)u. .tlennfl bit ta *i)J?armevHIter flebn unt> fet)n niict) an: „3C4U^ hat man tir, t)u armckJ jlint, get^au?" ^cnnfl t>ii cv5 m\)\ ? 1)at)iu ! 3)fll)in ! W6d)V id) mit bir, o mein 33cfc^it^er, ^iet)n. 16 ^ennfl t>u ben ^qvc^ nnb feincn SBoIfenfteg ? T>a^ *i))?aultier fuii^t im 9?cbfl feincn 3^e(^; 3n ^^i3blen irot)nt ber Drad)en alte 5Brut; (Svj ftiint ber ^^cU unt iiber i:^n bie glut. ,^ennp bu eg ti>obI ? 80 2)a^in! Da^in! @ebt nnfer SBeg ! o S3atcr, Ia§ un^ 3iel)n I ■ vM. •• Der (frlfuiiig. 457 XJX. Dcr c^rlfonig. ai^er reitct fi |>(if mrf- .-ftt unt> 2i:;int)? (Sr i)at ^en .Hmibeii luoyi m tern ?lrm, CSr fagt I ffc^cr, er l;alt il)ii juorm. „Sicl)ft, i3atcr, feu ten (Srifunig nif{)t? I^cu (Sdcnfonig mi* 'run' mt 8rf)iveif ?"— „„T)n Hekg Jlinb, fomm, get)' ma mir I (i^hx fd)()ae (Spicle fpiel' id^ mit t)ir, lo 9J?nnc^' hirttc 53himen ffnb an bcm (Straiib, 9)i'einc Gutter l)at mand) giilten ©etuant." " — „^ein 2>ater, mcin ikter, unb t)orefl bu n{c(^t, aCrt^ Srlenfonig mir leife tterfjjric^t?" „®ei nil)ig, bleibe rnt)ig, mein jtinb ! 15 3ii barren 33Iattern faufcit ber 2Binb."— „ „2QiUfl, feiner ^nnbe, bu mit mir ge^n, mmxt %iid)kv follen bic^ ttjarten fd)on ; 9}?eine 2;oc^ter fiil^ren ben nac^tricl)en ^dijn, Unb tDiegen unb tan^m unb ftngen bic^ ein.'' " 20 „^e{n 3Sater, mein 50ater, unb fier)fl bu nicfct bort (SrlBnigkj 'Xocf)ter am biifteren Ort?" — „^?ein u,<vi..vc 2)er .^na5e fam, ber ^onig rief : „Saft mir herein ben SlUen!" „®egriiget feib mir, eble ^errn, ©egritjt i^r, fd)ijne 2)amen ! SBelc^ rei(^cr ^immel ! ©tern bei ©tern 2Cer fennet il)re 9?amen ? 3m (Saal ijoU ^rad)t wnb J^errlic^feit cr (Ranger* !X)er (Sanger briicff' tk SJHuQcn ein Unb fd^lug in ijoUen SToncn ; Die flitter fd)auteu mut()ig bretn, Unt) irt ben (5c^oo§ bie ©(^oncm Der ^iinig, bcm bag Steb gcftel, Sic^, i^n gu c^ren fiir bad ©piel, Sine golbne ^ette reid^en. ,;Dte golbuc ^'ette gib mix nic^t, :Dic ^ettc gib ben mUkvn, SSor beren fii^nem 5ttngef!(^t 2)cr ^einbe Sangen fplittern ; ®ib [ic bem .^angler, otn bu ^ajt, Unb Ia§ i^n noc^ bie golbne Sajl 3u anbern Saflen trugen. 3c^ finge, Jt?ie ber 33oge( jtngt, !I^er in ben Btt^cigcn iro^nct; J)ai3 Sieb, bag and ber ^e^Ie bringt, 3jl So^n, ber reic^li(^ lo^net. SDod^ barf i^ bitten, bitt' i* eing : 8a§t mir ben bej^cn SBed^er 2Cein« 3n purem ®oIbc reic^en," dv fe^f {|n an, er tranf i^n mi ; „D Jrant oott fu§er Sabc ! D tuo^t bcm ^o(^begliicften ^ani, 2Co bai3 ifl Heine ®aU I (£rgel)t'g euc^ m^, fo ben!t an ntid^, Unb banfet ®ott fo warm, aU ic^ giir biefen 3;runf euc^ banfe." 459 15 20 25 80 85 40 460 2)er afinBling nm ©oi^e. XXI. 10 16 20 Der 3iin9ltng am ^ad?e. ©lumen mnti cr fJd^ ^um ^rana, Unb er fa| fie fortgerijfen, STret&en in ber SCetlen lanj. Unb fo flie^en meinc Za^i, me bic Queue, rafllog r)in ! Unb fo Hcic^et meine Sugenb, ma bie ,^ranae fd^neti mm^n, graget nic^t, tiarum td^ traurc 3ttbeg Meng SBliiten^eit! 2iae0 freuet fi(^ unb ^offet, SCcnn cer 5ru()Hng fic^ erneuh Sl^cr biefc taufenb ©timmen !Der ertuoc^enben 5latur SBedfen in bcm Hefen 33ufen ^ix ben fcfenjeren Summer nur. 3Bag fotr mir bie f^reube frommen, ©ie bcr fc^one Sen^ mir 6eut? (Sine nur ifl'g, bie id) fuc^e, ©ie ifl naf) unb ewig tueit ©e^nenb keif idf) meine Strme SfJad^ bem teuren @(^attcnbi(b, C9, ic^ fann eg nti^t erretd^en, Unb bag J^era MeiM ungejlitlt! 2)cr aungling cm ®or^c. 461 Unb »ev(a^ bcin ftol^c^ @cl)lo9 ' SBIumen, bie ber ^en^ c^cboren, (Streu' id) bir in beinen ©c^oo^. ^or^, ber ^atn crfc^alit ijon Sicbern, Unb bic Ouctle ricfelt Har ! JRaum ifl in ber fletnfien ^iitte giir eiu gliidlic^ liebenb ^aar. 2b 80 COMPOSITION EXERCISES BASED ON THE GERMAN READER. Note. -Words in [ ] are to be omitted in German ; thrvse in ( ) are to be inserted in German ; words connected by hyphens are to be rendered by a single word in German. EXERCISE I. (Wie'a der Alte macht, ist's immer recht, pp. 419-425.) In an old cottage with crooked walls and low windows, where an elder-bush hung over the hedge, and ducks swam in a little pond, [there] lived an aged couple, a peasant and his wife, who were quite contented and happy, although they possessed very little indeed. There was one thing, however, which they thought they could do-without (enthehren) • this was a horse, which lived on iyon) the grass on the side of the high-road, and they deter- mined {beschliessen) to sell it for money, or exchange it for something more useful. So the wife said to her old [man] one day : " Take the horse to (the) town, for to-day is fair [day], and sell the horse, or exchange him for something else ; no matter what you do, I shall be satisfied," and kissed him good-bye. \\ It was very hot and dusty, and [there] were many people riding, driving and walking to the fair. Among others he saw a man driving a cow to market, and thought it would be a very good bargain {Handel, m.) to exchange his horse for this cow. So he proposed (vorschlagen) this exchange [to] the man, 463 464 COMPOSITION KXErjCISES. whoof courso w.-ia viwy ^'lad to make so profitable {vorteilhaft) a bargain, and the peasant thouf^ht it would l)o very nice to have tlie fresh milk from the cow, even though tlio horse was wortli more. ^ This being settled, the peasant thought he would like to go and have-a-look-at the fair, and so he drove his cow along to the town. After a short time he met a man driving a sheep. Then he said [to] himself, that perhaps a sheep would be even {noch) better than a cow; for it could find grass enough by their hedge, and in the winter they could take it into the house. So he asked the man if he would exchange. Of course the latter was quite {gem) ready to do this ; so the exchange was made, and the peasant went on with the sheep. Presently, however, he overtook (einhokn) another man, carrjang a fat goose under his arm. " Aha ! " he cried-to (zurufen) the man, "what a fine fat goose you {Ihr) have under your arm ! My old [woman] has long wished-for a goose (for- herself), and she shall have one, if you will exchange the goose for this sheep." The other had no objections to this, and so the peasant got his goose, ] As he trudged (schreiten) along with the heavy goose under his arm, our good peasant saw in a potato-field a fowl tied to a string, so that it could not run away. It had a short tail, and looked very wise, and he thought he had never seen so fine a fowl in his life. So he asked the owner (Eigentumer) of the fowl if he was willing to exchange it for his goose. The latter said he had no objections, so they exchanged. Our old [man] had now done a good deal of business, and, being very hot and tired, he was very glad to see the tavern ; for he had a good appetite, and a mighty thirst too. As he was just going to enter, he met the hostler [Knecht) in the door, carrying a sack. The peasant asked him what was in EXERCISE I. 46r» goose the sack, and the other reph-.v! that it was withered apples f„r the pi^rs. The peasant considered this a great waste. " Wliy (ei)," he erierl, « our old tree at home only bore a single apple last year, which we kept carefully uiitil it was quite decayed. What would my old [woman] say, if she saw a whole sack-full i How delighted she would be, to be sure ! " Then the hostler asked him what he would give for the sack-full ; whereupon the old peasant replied that he would gladly give him his fowl. Having concluded (schliessen) the bargain he went into the tavern, and set his sack against the stove. There were many guests present, and among them two Englishmen, who of course were, as usual with Englishmen, so rich that they didn't know what to do {anjmigen) with their money. Now, the stove being very hot, the apples in the sack soon began to roast and sizzle (zischen). "Why (na), what in all the world is that noise?" asked one of the Englishmen. " Those are my apples," said our peasant ; and then he told them the whole story of all the business (Handel) he had done (machen) during the day, from the horse down to the fowl. I' Well (na)," said the Englishmen, laughing, "we will bet [with] you a hundred pounds in gold, or whatever you like, that you'll get [a] jolly-good (iuchtig) scolding (Schelte, f.) from your old [woman] when you get home." " Scolding ! " cried our friend, " not in the least ! I'll bet my peck of apples against a peck of your gold, and myself and my old wife into-the-bargain, that she will kiss me instead of scolding me, and say : ' Whatever the old [man] does, is always right.' " " Done ! " said the Englishmen, and the bet was made. So the old peasant got into the carriage with the English- men and drove back to his cottage. 466 COMPOSITION EXERCrSES. m ■I' When they arrived there, tlie ohl people bade (hlrten) each other good evening, and tht; peasant told his wife that the exchange had heen (effected. His wife said she was (juite cer- tain that he had done what was best, and embraced and kissed him without looking at either the strange guests or the sack. When the old [man] told his wife he had exclianged the horse for a cow, she rejoiced at the good milk, butter and cheese they would now have. Then he confessed {bekennen) that he had exchanged the cow for a sheep. " So much the better," replied his wife, adding that he always thought of everything, and that they could now have woollen stockings, and gloves. "Yes, but I gave the sheep for a goose." " Well (ei), well ! " said the old [woman], " how splendid ! Who would have thought of that but you ! Now we can have [a] real roast-goose, and the feathers into the bargain ' I will make a pillow (Kop/kissen, n.) [for] you of them, so that you may sleep better than on the hard pillow of straw." " I'm afraid I shall have to sleep on the old hard pillow, for I changed the goose for a fowl." "Why, (ja) that was an excellent bargain," rejoined his wife, "for a hen will lay (lays) eggs and hatch (hatches) them, and then we shall have chickens, and a whole poultry-yard. I have been wanting that for years (jahrelang). "Yes, but I gave the fowl for a sack of withered apples. What do you say to that, old [woman] ?" "What do I say to it? Come here, and let me give you a good kiss, my dear, good husband ! Do you know, after you had gone this morning, I thought to (bei) myself: 'How I should like to make something really nice for my old [man] to eat when he comes home this evening, bacon and eggs with onions.' But alas ! I had no onions. So I went to the schoolmaster's wife, for I know thaiu she has onions, and asked her to lend me a few. But she is very stingy, and EXERCISE II. 4G7 rlen) each tliat tiio quite cer- md kissed ' the sack. I the horse nd cheese i) that he e better," *^erything, id gloves. splendid ! } can have i« I will I that you pillow, for joined his les) them, iltry-yard. Bd apples. ^ive you a after you : *How I I [man] to eggs with nt to the ions, and ingy, and declared that she hadn't even a withered apple in her garden. And now I can lend her a whole sack full ! Oh, I'm so glad," and she kissed her husband again heartily. "Why that is splendid!" cried the Englishmen, and cheerfully paid a peck of gold-pieces to tiie peasant. Most stories contain {enthalten) a moral (Lehrey f.) ; this one contains several : First, that we should never bet; for (the) betting is a dangerous game, at which (the) one party {Teil, m.) must always lose; and it is always uncertain who will gain the wager. Moreover, betting is an attempt to get something for nothing ; which is always wrong. Secondly, if man and wife were always as willing to trust each other as these two simple but good old people, many marriages {Ehe, f.) would be happier than they are. And lastly (endlich) the old [people] lost nothing after all ; for the peck of gold was worth a great deal more than the horse which the peasant had traded-off for the cow, and so forth. But I am afraid that this last remark contradicts the first moral which I drew from the story ; and the moral of that is: Never draw a moral, unless you are sure it will fit. EXERCISE II. (Veiiedig, pp. 425-427.) The city [of] Venice is very different (vsrschieden) from all other cities in the world. It is actually (wirklich) in the water, for it is built on a number {Menge, f.) of small islands in the Adriatic Sea {Meer, n.). The city originated {entstehen) in the 5th century before Christ, the f(yunders {Grilnder) having taken refuge {Zvflncht) there, in order to escape from the Huns ( Ifunne, pi. -n), who under ^ ttila were ravaging {verheeren) the A 468 COMPOSITION EXERCI8K8. north of Italy at that time. The first officer {Ikamte, adj. subst.) of tlio now state was culled the Doge or Duke. During the Middle- Ages (Mittelalter, n. sing,), Venice y)ecame one of the inoHt powerful states in Europe, and occupied {einnehmen) the same position {Stellnng) which England occupies in our own age {Zeitalter, n.) as mistress {Heherrscherin) of the sea (Meer). This supremacy [Ilerrschaft) began, just as that of England [did], with the extension {Anabreilung) oi its commerce ( HanJel, m. ). In the 1 2th ai d 1 3th century this supremacy attained (erreicheri) its greatest height (llohe, f.). In [the year] 1177 Pope Alexander III. bestowed-upon {verleihen + dat.) the Doge a precious (kostbar) ring, with which he {diesrr) annually celebrated (feiern) the nuptials {Ilochzeit, f. sing.) of Venice with the ocean. This ceremony (Feier, I ) was attended by (verbinden mit) great splendour and pomp {Ilerrlichkei.). The Doge, accompanied by a retinue {Gp/ohje, n.) of Senators (Sena'tor), went (fahren) out on the high sea in a magnificent ship called the Bucentaur, and threw a precious ring made (verfertigen) for the purpose into the ocean, as [a] symbol ( Vorbild, n.) of the rule of the republic over the waves. In 1 204 the Doge Dandolo waged (/uhren) a victorious war against the East-Roman (ostromisch) or Byzantine {byzantinisch) empire (i?eic/i,n.), at the i.',onc\\ii^ion{Beendigiing) of whi^h a largo portion of that [empire], including {um/a'ssen) the Peloponnesus or Morea and the islan* 1 of Candia or Crete (Kreta) was annexed {annekticrt) to the republic. It was in this war that the famous bronze (broncen) horses, which still stand above the portals {Thor)oi (the) St.-Mark's-church {Markus-Kirche) were brought to Venice. Napoleon took (fuhrte) them off to Paris in 1797, but they were brought back and placed in (afi + acc.) their former position (Statte) ngain in 1815 by the Emperor Francis II. of Austria. Venice was a repu])lic, or rather {vielmehr) its form-of-government was that of an oligarchy. This is a Greek word signifying (bedeuten) the rule (Herrschn/t) of a small amte, adj. During Tie one of nnehmen) OS in our i tlie sea .a that of commerce upremacy [the year] n ^- dat.) e (dieser) sing.) of I attended rlichkeiJ). Senators agnificent ing made i] symbol '■es. rious war %ntinisch) i'"h a largo )ponnesus 3 annexed be famous le portals e brought sin 1797, cc.) their r Francis Jmehr) its s a Greek f a small EXERCISE II. 469 ^gering) nuu.ber {Anzahl, f.) of citizens. The Doge was elected by {durch) tiio votes {^timme, f.) f the iNobles {Adel, m. ding.) alone; in later times the real pcnver was in tlie hands of a body called the Council of Ten. Life and pro,,erty {GiU, n.) be- came very insecure, as anybr.dy might bo denoanced {angehen) to this council in secret by unknown persons. Venice was annexed by A^x^ivm iti 1796 by {darch) the treaty of Campo Forinio, and incorporated [with] {einverleiben + dat.) the Kingdom of Italy in 1866. The oommerce of the republic had been declining {sinken), ever {achoyi) since the discovery of a new route ( Weg, m.) to India round the Cape oi Good ilope by Vasco de Gama -n 1497, and the loss of her mastery of the seas, and Venice now possesses but the memory of its past glory, and is, as Hans Andersen says, only the ghost of a city. There remain, however, many beautiful edifices which bear-witne>.s of her former magnifi- cence ; for instance, the Palace-of-the-Doges, with its grand staircase and splendid halls. Tnis palace is connected with a dreadful prison by a bridge, called the Bridge of Sighs, because over this bridge, it is said, prisoners who had been condemned {verdammt) to (the) death were led to hear their sentence {Urteil, n.), and then led back to be executed (hinrichten). The church of St. Mark, the patron saint of Venice, wnose body is said to rest in its walls, is one of the most beautiful and gorgeous churches in the world, and has bee>i described by the celebrated English critic {Kritiker), the late {verstorbm) John Ruskin, in his [well] known work, "The Stones of Venice." In front of it rise up (emporragen) two immensely high masts, erected (errichten) to celebrate the conquests [Eroherung) acquired (erring^n) by Venice in the beginning of the 13th century. On the so-callod Piazzetta, which leads from this church past the palace to the Grand Canal, there is a column, on which stands the winged lion of St. Mark. 470 COMPOSITION EXERCISES. The streets of Venice are perhaps (irohl) tlie most remark- able [thing] in tliis wonderful city. The paved [gepjlastert) streets are for pedestrians {Fitsz(jan this tradition, and tells how one day Peter had so much business (pi.) to do {verrichten) elsewhere, that he had to send every person who died that day a key, and ordered the angel at the gate to admit nobody who had not such a key. Now it happened that on this day an old pilot called Jiirgen felt that he was dying ; so he bade farewell to his wife, whom he loved dearly (innig), until they should meet again in heaven. Immediately after his death an angel came flying down from heaven with a golden key, bringing a greeting from St. Peter, and told him that he must open the gate with this key himself. On his road up to the gate-of-heaven, Jiirgen kept looking round to see whether his dear old wife was not following him, for he was sure that she would not survive him Ions:. When he arrived at the gate without her appearing, he sat down on a wooden bench in front of it to wait for her ; for he thought perhaps she might be afraid to enter alone, the gate being so splendid, and guarded moreover by an angel with a flaming- sword. It was not long before he saw some one dragging him- self up the road-to-heaven with difficulty, leaning on a sword, and groaning at each step. This was a brave young soldier who had fallen on the battle-field for his native country so suddenly that Peter had not had time to send him a key. The old pilot was sorry for him (leid thun), for his wound burned like fire, and he trembled violently. So Jiirgen gave the soldier his own key, and told him to (that he should) go in and get the angels to drop balm on his wound. The soldier accepted the offer (Anerhicien, n.) with thanksj and asked his benefactor ( Wohlthdter) to come in with him ; but the angel EX'^RCISE IV. in/+ ace. ^ so much le had to 'dered the a key. lot called o his wife, leet again 473 ing down ting from gate with pt looking wing him, g. When t down on le thought >e being so a flaming- ging him- n a sword, mg soldier jountry so key. his wound irgen gave should) go rhe soldier asked his the angel shut the door in his face, crying that no one was allowed fto comej in who had not a key. '■ So the old man sat down again on the bench to wait for his wife ; and it was not long before he saw her coming up As soor, as he caught-sight-of (erblicken) her, he ran to meet her, and they were both very glad. But when he wanted (wolkn) her to (that she should) go in alone, because he had given his key to the soldier, she refused to go in without him. She said she would rather rest awhile as she was very tired, and begged him to take hers. But he togetheT '' '""* '" ""^ ^'^ '''* ^°™ "'' *« '«''<='' Presently a little blue-eyed child with golden curls came along the road-to-heaven, walking in its little-shroud, and weeping bitterly. The old woman wiped away the tears that were running down the poor child's cheeks, and asked it why It wept^ ..Because I had to leave my darling mother," answered the child. Then the old woman tried to console the htt e one and promised to be a mother [to] it, until its own mother should follow. Then the child took the key and entered in at the gate, and the angel with the flajning-sword shut the gate again Now the two old [people] were left (bleiben) alone outside, for the angel would not let them in without [a] key. Then the night came on, and it grew very dark and cold, and the poor old fisherman and his wife felt (zu Mute sein) verv miserable, and at last they began to be very [much] afraid and to weep. ' ' Presently, however, St. Peter came back, and saw the old couple sitting on the bench and weeping. Then he asked them how It came that they were sitting outside in the dark, cold night, instead of going into heaven ; for he was quite sure that he had sent both .f them a key-to-heaven. 474 COMPOSITION EXERCISES. As soon as the old [people] h;id told him their story, how the fisherman had given away his key to the soldier, who had died so suddenly on the battle-tield, and his good old wife had given hers to the poor little child that had lost its own on the way-to-heaven, the heavenly-porter unlocked the gate for them, and let them in ; and a specially good place was given them among the Elect. But the key the child had dropped (let fall) on its way up to the gate-of-heaven turned into a beautiful flower, properly {eigentlich) called primrose (Primel) ; but its popular-name (Volksname) in Germany is [the] Key-to-heaven. EXERCISE V. (Das eiserne Kreuz, pp. 434-438.) The Iron Cross is a military (militarisck) distinction (Aus- zeichnung), which is given in the German army {Armee, f.), as [a] reward (Belohnung) for brave deeds performed (ausge/uhrt) on the battlefield. It is of iron, not of gold or silver, like (the) most war-medals (Kriegsmedaille, f.), to indicate that it is a mark- of -honour (Ehrenzeichen, n.), the value {WerL m.) of which does not depend (abhangen) on (von) the value of the metal of (aus) which it roMsists (fies^eAen). It corresponds to (entsprechen + dat.) the Victoria Cross, which is so [much] coveted (begehren) a distinction in the British army. Many stories are told of the brave deeds for which the latter distinction has been bestowed (erteilen). In the last Boer-war (Burenkrieg) in South- Africa it was bestowed, among others, on (dat. without prep.) the only son of [the] Field-Marshal Lord Roberts, who sacrificed {aufopfern) his young life in an attempt ( Versuch) to save the British guns (Geschutz, n.) at the disastrous {unglucklich) battle of Colenso, under General Buller, on the 15th of December, 1899. This story, by Dr. Emil Frommel, the famous court-preacher (Ilo/prediger) at Berlin, shows how brave deeds are sometimes EXERCISE V. 475 ry, how ^ho had I'ife had 1 on the 3r them, 5n them way up properly ar-name m (Aus- ?.),as[a] lihrt) on he) most a mark- lich does of (aus) rechen + tegehren) Id of the )estowed h-Africa •ep.) the acrificed save the lilcklich) 15th of preacher imetimes done without the doers knowing that they are doing anything else but their duty {PJlicht, f., und Schuldigkeit). During an engagement {Treffen, n.) in the great war which was waged between France and Germany in the years 1870 to 1871, a Pomeranian regiment had been sent out by its Colonel with the orders {Befehl, m. sing.) to hold a certain post {Posten, m. ) against the French, until their comrades had come up. Th J French troops {Trnppe, f.), however, advanced {vorrucken) in such groat numbers {Anzahl, f. sing.), that the conimanding {kommandieren) officer at length commanded his adjutant to give the men {Leute) the order to retire. One soldier, however, refused (sich weigern) to obey this order, because [he said] he had no time to pack up his cartridges, which he had spread out in front of him {sich) for convenience' {Bequemlichkeit) sake, and did not want to let the king's property fall into the hands of the enemy. So he first shot off {abschieszen) all [the] cartridges, and then ran back to the regiment as fast as his legs could carry him. Although the Frenchmen shot at {nach) him, [so] that the bullets flew in a regular {ordentlich) hail- storm, they shot too high, and he reached his regiment unharmed. As he came up, he saw the Adjutant talking to the Colonel, and at the same time pointing to him with his finger. Our hero thought that the Adjutant was reporting {anzeigen) him to (6e^) the Colonel for {wegen) disobedience (Ungehorsam, m.), and was much relieved {erleichtert) when the latter received him kindly, for it had never occurred to the Pomeranian that his action had been particularly brave. On the following day it was suddenly reported that the King of Prussia, who. afterwards became the first German Emperor, was coe.I vq. To the great surprise ( Verwmiderung) of our hero, he (dieser) received the order from the Adjutant -_ i...,h/;e)-of -jugglers, with (bei) which Wilhelm had discovered lier. In this troupe there was also a strange {fiigenartig) old-man (Greis), a harper (Ilar/ner), with long white hair and beard, half insane (tvahnsinnig), who had committed without knowing it some mysterious (geheim- nisvoll) crime (Verbrechen, n.). The thought of this crime embittered (verbittern) his life, and drove him to [the] despair (Verzweijiung) and [to the] suicide {Selbstmord^ m.). It is he who sings the beautiful ballad, "The Minstrel," also contained in this selection (Auswahlj f.). The ballad of Mignon describes in beautiful language the un- happy girl's dim recollections of (an + ace.) the lovely country of her birth — Italy, the land of beauty and of n,rt, as well as (tvie auch) of the splendid house in which she liveo ; I loving parents, surrounded by every luxury [Luxus, m.) ^vhich wealth can give, and of the cloud-capped-path over the high mountains, over which her captors f Entfuhrer) had brought her. Each stanza (iS'rophe, f.) concludes with the touching appeal (Bitte) to (an + ar.O' li<:r kfid new master (fferr), whom she calls her beloved, ]« " o;'otector, and her father, to take {filhren) her back to tlictu beautiful country, where she had passed such a happy childhood. i,^^ EXEROIRE VIII. 483 as But tlie poem oxpreases rtt-the-Hamo-timo tho yeai .ling {Sehnen, n.) of the author (bidder) himself for {nach) that land, the honi {lleimaidtte) of art and beauty, which he had so long desired to see with his own eyes. A few years later Goethe at-last (endlich) had the opportunity to spend a year or more in that lovely country, and to observe the beauties of art and nr^ure there. This was a great advantage ( Vorteil, m.) for his poetry ; and here he completed three of his finest dramas (Schauspiel, n.), ABBREVIATIONS. -»<>•- that is. L German : 2lum. = Mnmerfuni], note. 21. Z. = antes leftamcnt, Old Testament. a. a. D. — am nngefiilirten Crte, in tlie place referred to. bfll., bergl.= berflleidien, the like. b. = any case of the definite article, b. 1^.= hai [;eif)t, b. i, = ba§ ift, b. 3. = biefcS ^^nl)ve<3, of this year. b. 9Jl.= bicfeS OTonatS, of thismontli. Tr. = J)oftor, Doctor. GtD., eiur. = Guer, (Sure, ©urer (in titles). fl. = (Sulbcii, florin. ^r. = '(vrau, Mrs. j^r^r. = J^reiljerr, Baron. grl. = ^raulein, Miss. gcb. = gclioren, born. gcft. = geftovben, died. @r.= ©lofdien (a coin). If., I^etl. = Ijeiliiv holy, saint. ^r., $ini. = i'crr, .^I'nn, Mr. i. 3. = im ^afjvc, in the year- Raip. =: 5IaviteI, chapter. Six. = .Rieujcv (a coin). I.= lies, read. 3)1., 9}if., M. = Warf (money). 3JJffr.= SDlanuffript, manuscript. ajtaj. = aJJnieftat, Majesty. 31., 31. 9J. = 3Jome, name. n. Cl)r. = ttac^ (il)rifto, after Christ. 9i. 3. = Diartifcfirift, postscript. 9i. 3:. = 51euc§ Jeftament, New Testa- ment. m., ^;5fb. = f. — 'i'feimig, penny. pp. = unb fo nu'iter, and so forth. Se., er. = Seine, Seiner, his (in titles) ®. = Seite, page. St., S!t.= Sanlt, Saint. f. = fiche, see. f. 0. = ftcl)e cben, see above. f. 11. = ficl)e unten, i f. m. u. = ftel)e lueiter unten, ) Z., Xf)., a:i)I.= 2cil, Xl)eH, part. Xi)lr. = 2l)a[n- (money). u. a. m. = unb anberc me^r. u. bgl. m.= uub berg[eid)cn mel^r, u. f. f. = unb fo fort, u. f, XV. = unb jo ttjeiter, 33. = aSer§, verse. 0. GI;r. = t)or COvifto, before Christ. »ergl., »g(.= oergleid^e, compare. 0. 0. = Don obcn, from the top. t). u. = »on imtcii, from the bottom j. 93. = jum 93cifpiel, for example. see below. et ca- tera. II. Latin (in addition to others which are used in English also) : A. C. = Aftfio Christ i, in the year of Our Lord (Christ). a. c. = a»ni curreniis, of the current year. S. T. = Sah'o T/i'u/o, without prejudice to the title (used in addresses where the proper title of the person addressed is uncertain). VOCABULARY. GERMAN— ENGLISH. Explanations.—]. The numerals refer to the ,\ 2. All verbs are weak and regular, unless referred to a § ; the conjugation of others will be found under the § indicated. 3- A — indicates that the word in question is to be supplied ; under masc. and neuter substantives, the terminations of the gen. sing, and nom. plur. are given ; thus : JBagcu (— g ;— ) means that the gen. sing, of 2Bagcn is SCacjen^, and the nom. plur. the same as the nom. sing. The sign'- indicates Umlaut in the pi, e.g.: G>3rtrten, (-3 ; ") means that the gen. sing, of this word is C^artciitS a-nd the nom. pi. ®arten ; ®i'm (-e^ ; -e) means: gen. sing. (So()neg, nom.pl. (5o()ne ; under fem. substs. the pi. only is given. 4. With adjectives, -er indicates Umlaut in the compar. and super]. 5. Proper names are not given when they are the same in German as in English. et • ca- tera. 21. m, off, from. 2l'beut>, m. (-c^; -e), evening; l^eute — ; this evening. 2(bent)brot, n. (-eiJ ; -e), supper. abe;*t)i3, in the evening. 2l6ent)fonnenfd)ein, m. (-eg), evening sunshine. 5l'bentcuer, n. (-g; — ), ad- venture. 5l'benteurcr, m. (-g ; — ), ad- venturer. flber, but ; however. ^I'berglaiibc, m. (-n and -ns), superstition. abermalg, again, a second time, once more. abfa^ren (186; fein), to set off, depart, go ; set sail. aM)iiltcn (188), to hinder, deter. aM)aucn (188), to hew off, cut off. ab^elfen (159), to help, re- medy ; bent ift lei^t ah^uUU fen, that is easily remedied. ab()oleit, to call for. abtul)Un (ftcb), to (get) cool. Stbfitrgunj^, / (-en), abbrevia- tion, curtailment. aManfcn (188; fein), to run off; come off, turn out, end. aMeiten, to lead away, lead off, abmaAen, to finish, dispose of, settle. 485 486 VOCABULARY. aBmalen, to portray. abreifen (fein), to set out, start, depart. 5l6fc^iefc, m. (-ti), farewell. abfc^ncifeen (118), to cut off. abfo'nbcrlic^, peculiar, special. aUxodmn, to dry. abnjifc^en, to wipe off. abaie^en(131),topulloff, takeoff ad), ah ! oh ! alas ! — jua^ ! pooh ! nonsense ! ac^t, eight ; — Slage, a week. Slci^t,/, attention, care ; f{(^ in — nel)men, to be careful, take care ; — gcben, to pay attention. (ici^^cn, to moan. abbieren, to add. ' 2lt>cl, m. (-g), nobility. Slbjuta'nt, m. (-en; -en), adju- tant. Slbreffc,/ (-n), address. 5lt)ria,/, Adriatic (sea). af)a', aha ! ho ! ho ! 2l6n^err, m. (-n ; -en), ancestor. a^ntic^, like, similar ( -f- dat.) Si^re,/ (-n), ear (of grain). 3irgebra,/, algebra. flttetn', adj., alone, only ; conj., but, only. (iU{n, c, eg), all, (the) whole; atlc 31oge, every day; aUt fein, to be at an end, be all gone (vulgar). 2lUeg, n. sing., all, everything. attert»in(;g', adv., certainly, of course. aHerlie'bfl, dearest of all ; most lovely. a'lIjn^iele,too many altogether. 2ll|jen (pi. only), Alps. aU, than, as ; as a ; when ; aii ob, as if. al^balb, immediately, at once. alfo, thus, so; so then, ac- cordingly. nit C'er), old, ancient. Sitter, n. (-g), age, old age. 5lmcrtfaner, m. (-g, — ), Ameri- can. an (dat. or ace, 65), on, at (227), to, towards, in, by, near, of (231). anbetfen, to bark at. anbetreffen (167), to regard, concern. anbieten (131), to offer. cinbtnben (1 44), to tie up, fasten. Slnblid, m. (-eg; -c), sight, pros- pect, view. anblicfen, to look at. anbrennen(99),to kindle, light. 5lnben!en,w. (-g; — ),memorial, memory. anber,other; ni(^tg — g, nothing else. cinbern, to alter, change; eg Vd^t ftc^ nid^t — , it cannot be helped. anberg, otherwise. anbert^alb, one and a half. Slnfang, m. (-eg; -e), commence- ment, beginning. anfangen (188), to begin, com- mence ; to go about a thing, attempt. anfangg, in the beginning, at first. anfajjen, to seize, take hold of, grasp. angemeffen, appropriate, suit- able. VOCABULARY. 487 angene^m, pleasant, agreeable. Slngcftdjt, n. (-eg; -cr), face, countenance, anget^an, clad, dressed. ^H%/- ("e), fright, terror, fear, dread. angftUd^, frightened, timid, anxious. 2lngftfc^n?ft§, m. (-c^), sweat of terror, chill of dread, an^altcn (188), to continue; to stop. mt^'dnc^tn, to suspend, hang upon. 2lnl)o|)e,/ (-n), hill. anfaufcn (fid)), to settle, buy- up property. anfleiben (fid^), to dress. anflopfen, to knock at the door. antommcn (167; fetn), to ar- rive. (efter, am ef)eflcn), soon, shortly. 33aafpiel, w. (-eg; -e), game of ball. ^^n ("er), timid, anxious, afraid. 33ant>, n. (-eg, -c), bond, tie; (-eg ; -tx), ribbon ; m. (-eg j -e), volume. 33auf, / (-en), bank; (M, bench. kv, (paid in) cash, ready (of money). 53ar, m. (-en ; -en), bear. 53arenfii()rer, m. (-g ; — ), bear leader. 33ar6ier, m. (-eg ; -e), barber. 33ancfe, m. (-eg; '^c), stomach, belly. 6auen, to build. 33auer, m. (-n or -g ; -n), peas- ant, cuuniryman. Sanernl)aug, w. (-eg; %), peas- ant's house, farm house, hut. 53nuin, m. (-eg; '-^e), tree. 490 VOCABULARY. 53au^)ta^, w. (-e« ; -e), site. bcac^tcn, to consider, observe, notice. t)eIJen, to tremble. 53cAer, m. (-g; — ), goblet, beaker, cup. bcbfluerU; to pity; regret; (id)) betauvc, I am sorry. Betcnfcn (99), to consider. bctenflic^, serious. beteuten, to indicate, mean. bcUenen, to serve, wait upon ; fid) — , to help one's self. S3et)iente(r), m., servant {adj. subst.) 33et)ingung, / (-en), condition. l>ct)rii(fen, to oppress, trouble. bccilen (fid)), to hasten, hurry. 93ccnt)iguttc|, /. (-en), ending, completion. S3eere,/ (-n), berry. SBefet)!, m. (-etxtiti, already. S3cr9, m. (-e^; -e), mountain, hill. fccrgcn (159), to hide. S3ern|lein, m. (-eg), amber. bcrjtcn (159), to burst. 33cru^igung,/, quiet, comfort, ease of mind. bcrit^mt, famous, celebrated. berii^ren, to touch. befc^ciftic^en, to occupy, employ; bcfrf)aftigt, busy, employed, Befc^nitffeln, to sniff at, smell at. S5efd)it^er, m. (-g ; — ), protec- tor. kftnnen (ficfe ; 158), to deli- berate, reflect. 33eftnnunc5,y!, consciousness, re- flection. kft^en (181), to possess, own. Seft^er, in. (-^; -), possessor, owner. befonter^, particularly, especi- ally. beforgen, to attend to. befvred)en (167), to discuss. beffer (sec gut), better. bcft (superl. of gut, which see), best; gum SBej^en, for the benefit of; am bej^cn, best /r^i oll\ befteben (186), to undergo, pass (an examination); — aii^, to consist (of) ; — auf ( + ace), to insist upon. befteigcn (120), to ascend. tu'ftcttcn, to order. beftimuit, fixed, certain. bcftrafen, to punish. [nfreiten (118), to defray. 33efud), m. (-eiJ; -e), visit, visi- tors; — l)aben, to have visi- tors; — c mad)en,make calls; bei 3emanb auf — fcin, to be on a visit at any one's. be)'ud)en, to visit; tie llui^cr- fttat — , to study at the uni- versity. bcten, to pray, say prayers. betrac^ten, to observe, consider. betrageu (186), to amount to; firf) — , to behave. 33etragen, n. (-^), behaviour, conduct. betreffeu (167), to concern; wa^ m\6) betrifft, as for me. betreten (181), to enter. betriigen (131), to cheat, de- ceive. Sett, n. (-e^ ; -en), bed. 53ett(er, 7ii. (-^ ; — ), beggar. beijo'r, before. bcoo'rftet)ett (186), to be in store. beivalbet, wooded. benjegen (131, R.), to induce; to move. bettjeifen (120), to prove, de- monstrate. betuunbern, to admire. Senju'f tfein, n. (-g), conscious- ness. bejablen, to pay (ace. of thing; dat. of person and ace. oj 492 VOCABULARY. I thing when both are present, otherwise ace. of per sort) . 53cial)Iun(5,/. (-en), payment. 33ibli0tt)ef'/ (-f»)' ljl>niry. bicgcn (131), to bend. 33icr, n. (-cs ; -e), beer, ale. SBicrfru^, m. (-(H; '-'c), beer-mug. bieten (131), to offer, bid. 33ilt>, w. {-ii; -cv), picture, por- trait, image. bilteit, to form, shape, make, constitute. $8ilt)uug,/, education. S3iUet' {pron. bill-yett), ?^ (-tci3; -te), ticket. tifli^, cheap. binben (144), to bind, tie, fasten. '' Ibiunen {dat.\ within. Ibi^ (34), till, until, up to, as far as; jttjci — trei, two or three; — ju, — nad), as far as. Sifcbof, m. (-eg, -e), bishop. bi§cl)en, n. (indecL), little, bit. bitten (181 ; for, urn), to ask, beg; (i^) bitte, if you please, please {lit., I beg, pray) ; njenn ic^ — barf, if you please {lit., if I may ask). SBiffen, m. (-g ; — ), bite, sup. blanf, bright, shining, clean. blafen (188), to blow. «8Iatt, n. (-eg ; -er), leaf. blau, blue. blaulic^, bluish. Heiben (120; fein), to remain. Meicb, pale. btcicben, to bleach. SBIeifiift, m. (-eg ; -e), lead-pencil. Hidnx, to look, glance. blinb, blind. Minfen, to blink ; to peep. blin^eln, to blink, wink. Sli^, m. (-eg; -e), lightning, flash. bli^en, {impers.), to lighten, flash. blont), fair. blo§, naked, mere; ac?v., merely, only. b(iil)en, to bloom, blossom, flourish. 33lninp,/. (-tt), flower. 33lumento^i, m. (-eg), cauli- flower. Slut, n. (-eg), blood ; fin jun* geg — , a young fellow. 53liite,/. (-n), blossom, flower. Sliitenflen.qcl, m. (-g ; — ), flower-stalk. -Sliiten^ett,/, blossoming time. 58ot)en, m. (-g; — ), ground, soil, earth, floor. 33ogen, m. (-g ; — ), arch, curve. 33ogen^an(^, w. (-eg ; -e), arcade. bombarbicren, to bombard. 33o!jt, n. (-eg ; Sole or -c), boat. bofe, bad, evil, wicked ; cross, angry. 33ofemid)t, m. (-eg; -er), villain. Sote, m. (-n ; -n), messenger. branben, to roar (of the break- ers). 33ranbopfer, n, (-g ; — ), burnt- offering. braten (188), to roast. braucben {gen. or ace.), to re- quire, want, need, use, make use of ; {impers. ), be neces- sary ( +acc. of thing). braun, brown. VOCABULARV. m braunen, to turn brown, bronze. ^vaut, /. C'e), bride, spouse, affianced lady. SrautaujUCJ, m. {-(S; -c\ bridal costume. 33rautigam, m. (-evJ ; -e), bride- groom, spouse, affianced. S3rautring, m. (-eg ; -e), bridal ring, wedding ring. Sruutftaat, m. (-eg), bridal array, brao, excellent, good, upright, honest. btcd)en (167), to break; to pick (flowers, etc.) Brett, broad, wide. Breiten, to spread. brennen (99), to burn, be burn- ing. Srief, m. (-eg; -e), letter, epistle. SSritlengfag, n. (-eg; -er), spec- tacle-glass. bringen (99, 2), to bring, take. 33rot, n. (-eg ; -e), bread ; loaf. S3riidfe,/ (-n), bridge. 23rut)er, m. (-g ; -), brother. S3rummba§, m. (-^z^ ; ^'ge), bass- fiddle. S3nmnen, m. (-g ; — ), well. Sruft,/ (-e), breast, bosom. SBrujtfc^ilt), m. (-eg ; -e), breast- piece, cuirass, breast-plate. S3rut,/, brood. bruten, to brood ; to hatch. S3ucentor, m. Bucentaur (the barge of ^ tate from which the Doge of Venice per- formed the ceremony of marrying the Adriatic"). 53uc^, n. (-eg ; '^er), book. ^Biic^erbrett, n. (-eg ; -er), book- shelf. 33ucf)crfrcunb, m. (-eg ; -e), lover of books. 33itct4)anblcr, m. (-g ; — ), book- seller. 33ud)()anMung, / (-en), book- shop. ^«cl)fe, / (-n), box; gun, rifle. biicfen, to bend, bow. bunt, many-coloured, bright, coloured, motley. 53iireflu (pron. bu-ro'), n. (-g; -g), (business) office. ^"^^9^/ (en), castle ; borough, biirgerlid), citizen-like, plain, ordinary. 33urgernieifter, m. (-g; — ), mayor. 33urgl)of, m. (-eg; ^'e), castle yard, courtyard. ^Surgfapelle,'/ (-n), castle chapel. Surfd)(e), m, (-n; -n), boy, fellow, chap. 53itrfd)c^en, n. (-g; — ), little fellow. 53ufc^, m. (-eg ; -e), bush, shrub. S3ufen, m. (-g ; —), bosom. Sutter,/, butter. a. Sfte'rub, m. (-g), cherub. ef)o!oIate,/, chocolate. Shrift, m. (-en ; -en), Christian, digarettenpapier, n. (-eg), cigar- (Sitrone,/ (-n), lemon, citron. Souftne,/ (-n), cousin. 494 VOCABULARY. X). ta, there, in that place ; here; then; conj., as, when, be- cause, since. tobci, thereby, thereupon, at the same time, on this oc- casion. ^^^d^j, n. (-eg ; -cr), roof. 'Dact)fammcr,/. (-n), attic. Dadjlein, n. (-d; — ), little roof. tdfiir, for that, for it, for them {oj' things). tagegen, against that, to that. t»a^er, thence, hence, therefore. ta^in, thither, along. t)aiingel)en (188 ; fein),to walk along, go alqng ; pass away. bal^eim, at home. tamit, therewith, with it, with that, in order that, so that {conj.). tammevnt), darkling, dim. !DanivferUnie, /. (-n), steam- ship-line. ranipffdnff, n. (-e« ; -e), steam- boat, steamer. tona^, after that; afterwards. !Danf, m. (-eg), thanks, grati- tude ; fc^oneu — , many thanks ! bantbar, thankful, grateful. X^antbarfeit, / thankfulness, gratitude. tanfen (dat), to thank ; id) tanfe (3^nen), (no) thank you. t-ann, then. tar, there. t)aran, thereon, on it, etc. taraiif, thereon, ^ it, on them {of things), etc ; tluueupon. tarin, therein, in that, in it. farnad), after it, etc. taviiber, over that, over it; about it, ; ', it. tarum, therefore ; about it. tauintcr, among them, tag, n, o/tcr, which see. tafelb^, there, in that place, taft^en (181), to sit (there), tauern, to last, en lure. t)a§,that; (auf) — , in order that. ba»on, thereof, of it, etc. ta^or, in front of it, etc. taju, to it, etc.; in addition (to that), besides, for this purpose. Xecfe, f. (-n), ceiling, tecfen, to cover. Xccfung,/., covering, cover, bcin, tcine, bein, thy. t>eintg(e), thine, benfen (99; gen. or usually an -f ace. ), to think ; fid) — , to imagine, benn, for, conj. ter, Die, tag, def. art, the (4 ; 44); rel. pr., who, which, that (92, 93, 95) ; dem. pr., the one, he, she, it, that (133; 140-143). terb, coarse, sturdy, terjcnige, ttejenige, tagjenigc (135; 140), that, this, the one ; he, she, it. tcrfelbe, tiefelbe, tagfelbc (136; 143), adj. andpr., the same; he, she, it, etc. tcg'balb, for this or that reason, therefore, on that account. VOCABULARY. 495 :, on them luueupoii. it, in it. over it ; DOUt it. n. see. tt place. (there). re. Drderthat. etc. etc. I addition !, for this , cover. r usually ik; fid)—, t.y the (4 ; o, which, [ dem. pr., , it, that ta^lenigc , this, the [elbc(136; , the same; tiat reason, t account. tejlo, (all) the, so much the; — bcffcr, so much the better ; Je mc^r — bejjer, the more, the better. be^ivcgcn, on that account. tieuten, to point. bcutlid), clear, distinct; clearly, distinctly. beutfcb, German; auf T;eiitfcfc, tm Teutfd)en, in German. teutfcfc-franaofifc^, Franco-Ger- man. 'Deutfd)'(ant), n. {-i), Germany. Diabcm', n. (-e^ ; -e), diadem. X)iamant', m. (-g or -en ; -en), diamond. t)id)t, thick, dense. I^id^ter, m. {-i, — ), poet, bid, thick, stout, bidfopftq, thick-headed. Dteb, m. (-eg ; -e), thief. Dicner, m. (-^ ; _), servant. X)ienj^, m. (-eg ; -e), service. 3)iengtag, w. (-e^; -e), Tuesday, biefer, t)iefe, W\t^ (t>teg), (6; 134, 140, 143), this, that; the latter, tie^'mal, this time, tie^'fcitg, adv., on this side. I)ing, n. (-eg ; -e and -er), thing. X)irne,/ (-n ), girl, maid, wench, bittibieren, to divide, boc^, yet, however, but, after all, pray, well, just, I hope. 3)ortor, m. (-g ; Dofto'ren), doctor. 1)onner, m. (-g ; — ), thunder, tonnern, to thunder. Donnergtag, m. (-eg; -e), Thurs- day. 'Coppelfc^Ieiff, / (-n), double bow. I)orf, n. (-eg ; ^er), village. tort, there, yonder, in that place. Trad)e, m. (-n ; -u), dragon. X)rad)enwagen, m. (-0 ; — ), dragon-chariot. trangen, to press, urge, c^cwd, push. braufn^n, outside. bref)en, to turn, twist. bret, three. breifad), three - fold, triple, treble. breiid()rig, three-year-old. breimal, three times, thrice. breinfdjfluen, to look on, look. bret§ig, thirty. brefd)en ( 1 59), lothresh, thrash. brtngen (144; im^an or fein), to press, pierce, penetrate. britte^alb, two and a half. broben, above. bro^nen, to rumble, ring, re- verberate, hum, buzz. britben, over there, over the way. Txud, m. (-eg), printing, print. briiden, to squeeze, press, im- print (a kiss). bu, thou, you. bumm (-er), stupid. bumpf, hollow (of sound), stupid. 2)une, / (-n), dune (sandbank blown up by the wind on the sea-shore). - — ....... ...viiv, ii i v/\./iil y , I^unfeUjeit,/, darkness, gloom, bunfein, to grow dark. 496 VOCABULARY. biitin, thin. turct) (34), through ; by. burd)aui3', absolutely, entirely ; — nicbt, by no means, not at all. turd)fd)nei't)cn (118), to cut through. turc^fd^mei'fen, to roam over, traverse. burcl)fucl)'cn, to search through. biirfeu (196-202; permission), to dare ; be permitted, al- lowed ; tarf id) '^ may 1 1 tiirr, dry. !X)urfl, m. {-(&), thirst; —ijaUn, to be thirsty. biijlcr, dark, gloomy. , t)tt0'cnt), n. {-ta ; -e), dozen. @. e6cn, adv., even, just; exactly; fo — , just now. @(fe,y! (-n), corner, c'tcl, noble. @'t)elftein, m. (-e^ ; -e), precious stone, jewel, e^c, afl?v. andconj., ere, before, c'l^ern, (of) bronze, ^^l^f//- (-tt)/ honour, respect. e(>ren, to honour, esteem, e^rerbietig, respectful, c^rlic^, honest ; — ma^rt am langjlen, honesty is the best policy. @i, n. (-eg ; -er), egg. ei ! ah ! oh ! Stc^e,/ (-n), oak. @id)baum, m. (-ed ; -e), oak-tree, eigen, own. ctgenmad)t{(^, of one's own power, arbitrary. fi'f^enttic^, retd, actual, ; tidv. really, strictly spt^aking. (Siflcntum, n. (-e« ; ''er), prop- erty, possession, estate. (Silc,/ haste, hurry; tua<5 l)aft t>u fiir — ? what is your hurry? eilen, to hasten, hurry, cilicj, hasty, speedy ; ci< — ba* bfU, to be in a hurry, be in haste. (Jimcr, m. (-g ; — ), pail, ein, einc, eiii (9), a, an; one; t»ie (Siiien, some, eincinter (dat. and ace), one another, each other ; bei — , together, "all there." (Sinbant), m. (-eci; "e), binding, einbinben (144), to bind (a book). einbrirt(;en(144; fein)/oenter by force ; rush in ; press in, penetrate, ciner, eine, im(t)i (150), pron., one {eqiuvaletit of wuwx). etnbriideii, to press in ; to close (the eyes), einfad), simple, plain, eittfaden (188; fein), to occur, come to mind ( -f- dat. ; im- pers.). ctnfdltig, simple, silly, einfliegen (131; fein), to fly in. @influ§, m. (-feg, ^'fc). influ- ence. cin(^e6en (188; fein), to go in, enter, einbalten (188), to hold in; to sto'. .. ir " ctnbaum (188), to hew away, slash away, peg away. VOCABULARY. 497 finige, somo, several, a few. einlaDen (186), to invito. einmal, once; aiif — , at once. Sinmaleinfif, n. (imlecL), mul- tiplication-table. elnnc^imcn (167), to take up, occupy. einpiicfen, to pack up. einrec^nen, to reckon in ; com- prise in account. cinric^tc! , to arrange. eiufcl)cnfen, to pour in, fill. einfd^Iiifen (188; fein), to fall asleep. einfcijlai^en (186, fcin), to strike (of lightning). einfc^reiben (120), to book, in- scribe, check (luggage). einfel)en (181), to perceive, comprehend, see. einfcitig, one-sided. einfinjien (144), to sing to sleep. ctnft, once upon a time. einjleif^en (120; feinX to mount into, get into (carriage, etc. ). eintanjen, to dance to sleep. eintrcten (181; fein), to enter. Sin'trittgeya'men, n. (-g; _)^ entrance-examii ition, ma- triculation-examination. etnimba(^tj{(^, eighty-one. einrtjenten (99), to object. einnjtegcn, f-^ rock to sleep. Sinirot^ner, m. (-^; — ), inhabi- tant. ein>Iii, solitary, single, iso- lated. (in^i^, single, only. ^mil^, m. {-ti; h), entry; — ^alten, make entry, march in. (Sii?, n. (-f(j), ice ; ice-cream. Gifcn, n. (-kJ), iron. (Sifcnbabn,/ (en), railway. eifcrn, (of) iron. eleyiant', elegant. (Sn^Diien, m. {-^; --), elbow. e'lenb, wretched, miserable. C5If, m. (-en; -en)Hairv, sprite, GIfe,/(-n) I elf * ^«e,/ (-n), yard. (£(tern {no sing.), parent!*. empfel)(en (167), to recommend. emv^ftiitcn (144), to feel, ex- perience. cmpo'r, up, upwards, on high. em)?o'rbliil)en (fein), to begin flourishing, flourish. cnipo'ninrbeln, to roll upwards. (int)e, n. (-« ; -n), end, termin- ation; ein — nel)meii,tocome to an end; \\\ — , at an end ; am — , after all. entlic&,atlast, finally, at length. enc|(e), narrow. en()el, m. (-& ; — ), angel. (5n(;(e)rein, n. (-&; —), little angel. (Sn'nianber, m. (-g; — ), Eng- lishman. cnn(ifd), adj., English; auf (^niilifd), in English, entbe^rliit, unnecessary, super- fluous, entbieten (131), to send (greet- ing), entblo^en, to uncover, bare, entfeerfen, cc discover. (5nte,/ (-n), duck. (Sntenbraten, m. (-^ ; _), roast duck, entfoden (188; fein), to escape 498 VOCABULARY. (the memory) ; (i ifl niir — , I have foi*gc>tten. entilf'v^cu, towards. Cttti^c>n>^ebcn (188; fctn; dat.), to go to meet. entflc'iicuTommen (167; fciii ; dat.), to come to meet. cntgc'cjeulaufeu (188; fcin), to run to meet. entv^Ci^tcn, to reply, rejoin. entfdjlic^eii (fid); 123), to re- solve, decide. entfd)lufj, m. {-)(i; "\c), re- solve, deteriiiiuation. entfftUid), terrible, tlreadfu'l. entfd)ultiiicn, to excuse. entflcii^en' (120; fciii), to rise from ( + dat. ) entwetcr, either; cnttvcter... olDcr, either ... or. enttrcrffU (159), to draw (a plan, etc.) ; design. entuuft, delighted, charmed. er, he ; it. crblicfcrt, to behold, see. Srbfe,,/. (-n), pea. (Srtfcnfuppc, f. (-n), pea-soup. SrbiJlinirfl, /. ("c), pea-sausage (used for soldiers' rations). (5vt>beben, n. (-^ ; — ), earth- quake. (Srtbcere,/ (-n), strawberry. iixt(,J'., earth, ground. Srtfugcl, /. (-n), terrestrial globe. crftnt)en (144), to invent. (Srftntun^,/ (-en), invent'on. (Srfoli^, m. (-eg ; -c), success. ClflllliU \lOL ; |iiu;, tu iiCuze, be frozen. SrfitHunQ,/ (-en), fulfilment, accomplishment; in — 9et)eii, to be fulfilled. crp,cl)t<; (188 ; fcin), to go, fare {impers. +dat. of pern.). ixc\Hi\\ (fid)), to delight, take pleasure. cvi^rcifeu (118), to seize. . cvl)alH'n, lofty, exalted. crl)aUni (188), to receive, get, keep, preserve. evl)cbcn (131), to raise; pd) — , to rise. ovbelou (ftdO, to recover. crinneru, to remember; to re- mind (of, K\\\+aci\); fid) — , to remember, recollect ( -f- (jen. of thing). crfiilteu (fid)), to catch cold. (Svfiiltuni^,/ (-cu), cold. crfenncn (1)9), to recognize. cvlwircn, to explain, declare. crIuu'Pijicu (ftclO* to inquire ; fid) bci icnianti nad) ehvad— , to inquire of anyone about anything. erf it vcu or erficfcn ( cvf or, ei'ter cu), to choose, select. criaubcn {dat. o/pers.), to per- mit, allow. erlcbcn, to experience. (Srt(en)!ouijl, m. (-ecs), erlking, alderking (a mischievous sprite). crleud)ten, to illuminate, light up. erlijfen, to release, rescue. (Sriijfer, m. (-ij ; — ), rescuer. port. ernennen (99), to nominate, n—Qd)n\, <> g^. fare )(')S.) gl><'> take ize. . d. eeive, get, 56 ; fid) — , ver. er ; to re- ••); fid)— jollect ( 4- 3h cold, jld. ognize. declare. I inquire ; 'one about or,cvtercn), s.), to per- ), erlking, lischievous nate, light escue. rescuer, (urish, sup- nominate, VOCABULARY. 499 appoint ; gum (^outoerneur — , to appoint (as) govcuTior. erncucu, to renew. crobcrn, to conquer, overcome. crrcid)cn, to reach. cvfaufeu (123; fcin), to he drowned, drown. erfd)atlen (131 ; fein), to re- sound, sound. erfd)cincn (120; fcln), to ap- pear. erfd)nappen, to snap up. erfc^rccfcii (107; fcin), to be frightened. erj^, first; fitrd erfle, for the present; tcr crfte bffte, the first which comes to hand ; adii, first, only, not before, not till ; really. crj^rtunen (fcin), to be amazed. erflcn^, first, in the first place. erftidcn (fein), to choke, be choked. ertrinfen (144 ; fein), to drown, be drowned. cnund)cn (fcin), to awake. cninit)Ieu (ju), to elect (as). crtuartcn, to expect, wait for. erwcifcn (120), to prove, to show ; cincn X)icnft — , do a service. criuibern, to answer, reply. enwiinfclKn, to wish for, desire. cqdl)Icn, to relate, narrate, tell. eg (38, 39), it ; they ; he ; she (of diminutives), there ; cr ifl— , itishe; e^ flint) ban- ner, thev are men. @fc(, m. (-5 ; — ), ass, donkey. effcn (181), to eat; ju ^J^ittai^ — , to dine. G iff n, n. (-«), eating, food, meal. ctlid)c, some, a few, several. ctiua, nearly, about. ctiuag, something, anything ; some, any. cuer, cure, euer, your. (f uropa, n. (-g), Europe. cmicj, eternal, everlasting. (ira'men, m. {-^ ; — ), exam- ination. Srcmplar', n. (-g ; -c), copy (of a work, etc.). S. f^flbrif,/. (-en), factory. gadcltraflcr, m. {-a ; — ), torch- bearer. ^a'tni, m. (-« ; ''), thread. 5ai)ne,./: (-n), flag. fa()rett(186; fein),togo, drive, ride (in a conveyance) ; travel ; sail. ^a^xtj. (-en), journey, voyage; ride, drive. ^aU, m. (-eg ; -c), fall ; case, event ; in tent ^aUt, in that case. fallen (188; fein), to fall; ftd> tot — , to be killed by a fall. fatig, in case. ?5ami'He,/ (-n), family. fangen (188), to catch. ^arbe,/ (-n), colour. 3a'fel^ang,w. (-en; -en), drivel- ler, idiot. faffen, to seize, grasp. faji, almost, nearly; — nie, hardlv ever. ?!auft,/'(''e), fist. ?^cbruar, m. (-g), February. fcd)ten (124), to fight, fence. I jg • 500 VOCABULARY. geber, / (-n), feather; pen; | geuerfd^ein, wi. (-eg), firelight. ^|H ^^^^^^H^i ' spring. feurtg, fiery, ardent, spirited. ^^^H < gfi'erfleit), n. (-eg ; -er), feather ?5teber, w. (-g ; — ), fever. ^^^H robe. giebclfeogen, m. (-g; — ), fiddle- ^^^^H gee,/ (-U\ fairy. bow. ^^^M Oeenfrf)lof , n. (-[eg ; -fer), fairy ftnben (144), to find; meet ^^^^H castle. with ; think, be of opinion. ■ fe^Ien, to be wanting, lacking, to ail (dat. of per s.). fcierlic^, solemn, fciern, to celebrate. i5tnger, m. (-g ; — ), finger, ftnfter, dark, gloomy. ' i^\]dt), m. (-eg ; -e), fish. ^H 1 geterflunte,/ (-n), leisure hour (when work is done). fffc^en, to fish, angle. gifc|en, n. (-g), fishing, angling. ^I^H geiertag, m. (-eg ; -e), holiday. flac^ (-er), flat, level. ^^^1 gcigenbaum, m. (-eg ; ''e), tig- gtad)e,/. (-n), surface. ^^^^^^^B tree. Stagge,/ (-n), flag. ^hH fein, fine, delicate, refined. glammenjc^trert, n. (-eg ; -er), [lfl[ pretty. flaming sword, sword of H^^H geint), m. (-eg ; -e)\__„^^ gcinfcin,/ (-nen) J^^^^^y- flame. ^^H glafd)e,/ (-n), bottle. ^^H 5elb, w. (-eg ; -er), field. flattern, to flutter. ^^H Oelf(en), m. (-eng or en; -en), flec^ten (124), to weave. ^^^1 i rock. gteifcb, n. (-eg), meat. ^Hb gelfenriff, m. (-eg; -e), rocky fleiftg, diligent; industrious; ^^H 1 reef. diligently, etc. ^^H ■ genfter, n. (-g ; — ), window. f^Heberbaum, m. (-eg; -e), elder- ^^H gen(leri3or^ang, m. (-eg ; -e), tree, alder; lilac. ^^H window curtain. gliege,/ (-n), fly. ^^H 1 ?5f^^f"/ P^- (^<^ sing.), vacation, fliegen (131 ; fein), to fly. ^^H holidays. fliejen (131; fein), to flee. ^^B f^erne,/ (-n), distance ; in ber ^liefe,/ (-n), flag-stone. ^^H — , at a distance. fliefen (123; fein), to flow. ^^m , ' fcttig, ready, done ; — fein flo^en, to pour. ^^H (mit),tohave finished (with). giote,/ (-n), flute. ^^B fejl, fast, firm. ^liigel, m. (-g ; ), wmg. ^H geftgefang, m. (-eg ; -e), festive glitgeltede, / (-n), wing-cover- W^m song. ing. ^H gej^Iic^tett,/ (-en), festivity, gett, n, (-eg ; -e), fat. flunfern, to brag. \^\WX,f. (-en), meadow, plain. ■■^ ^B fett, fat. giu§, m. (-[eg ; "fe), river. L ($ener, n. (-g ; — ), fire. t fliiftern, to whisper. VOCABULAHY. 501 irelight. jpirited. ver. -), fiddle- id ; meet opinion, nger. I* -angling. -fg ; -cr), word of e. iistrious ; ■e), elder- fly. flee. le. flow. ing. Qg-cover- , plain, ver. 5tut,/ (-tn), flood, tide, wave, billow. folgen (fein; dat), to follow. goreUe,/ (-n), trout. format', n. (-eg ; -e), size (of a book). fort, forth; away, gone; on; n?ir mil jfen — , we must be off. fortfa^ren (186; fein), to con- tinue ; to drive away. fortfliegen (131 ; fein), to fly off. fortge^en (188; fein), to go away, fortreipen (118), to tear away; carry off. fortfpringen (144; fein), to run away. fortnja^renb, perpetual, con- tinual, incessant. gorum, n. (-g), forum, market- place, public square. fragen (186), to ask questions. Sragen, n. (-g), questioning, asking questions (action of). ?5tanfrei5, n. (-g), France. grango'fe, m. (-n ; -n). French- man. fransijfifc^, French. gran, /. (-en), woman, wife, lady, madam, mistress, Mrs. Sraulein, /*. (-g; — ), young lady. Miss; mein — , Mis . frc(f>, bold, insolent. frei, free; im — e, into the open air. freige&ig, liberal, generous. 5rct^eit/(-en),freedom,liberty. freilaffen (188), to set free, liberate. freijlel^ent), standing alone, iso- lated. frcitid^, to be sure, indeed, of course. Sreitag, m. (-c« ; -c), Friday, fremb, strange, foreign. Oremfce, (adj. suhst.) m. or /., stranger, foreigner. ?5rcmt)l{ng, m, {-ti ; -c), stranger, frejfen (181), to eat (said of beasts), devour, ereube,/ (-n), joy, delight, freubig, glad, joyful, freuen (ft'rf) ; at, uUx + acc), to rejoice, be glad; eg freut mi(^, I am glad, greunt, m. (eg; -e), friend; \^ bin ein — tton, I like, ^reunbin, / (-nen), friend (female), freunblid), friendly, kind. greunt)fd)aft,/( n), friendship. Oriebe(n), m. (-ng or n), peace, grietrid^, m. (-g), Frederick. griet)ri^ftrafe,Frederick-street. ^rieren (131), to freeze; feel cold; eg friert micfe, I feel cold; mtcfe friert, I am cold, frtfd), fresh. %x% m. (-eng), Fred, Freddy, frofe, joyful, glad; frozen ?D?uteg, cheerfully. fro{)lic^, joyous, merry, frommen, to be of use, avail {impers. +dat. o/pers.). gruc^t,/ ("e), fruit. frucbtbar, fruitful, fertile. frit^, early; fritter, earlier; formerly. ?5viibling, m. (-eg ; -eV spring, friib'ftiirfen, to breakfast. ?^nitg, m. (-eg ; '^e), fox. fiit;len, to feel 502 VOCABULARY. gii^t^orn, n. (-eg ; -er), feeler, antenna (of an insect). fut)ren, to lead, guide, git^rerin,/ (-ncn),leader, guide. fiiUcn, to fill, fiinf, five. fiinf*<'balb, four and a half, fiinfjig, funfji(^, fifty, funf cln, to flash, sparkle, gleam. gunfe(n), m. (-n« or n; -n), spark, fitr (34), for. gurd)t,/ fear (of, »or). fiird^ten, to fear ; firf> — ^or ( + c?a<.), to fear, be afraid of. %\xx% m. (-en; -en), prince, sovereign. ^n% m. {-ii ; "t), foot, gu^oten, m. (-« ; — ), floor. ®. mUJ. (-n), gift, ga^nen, to yawn. (i)am&ri'nug, m., a mythical king of Brabant, reputed inventor of beer. ®aniS,/. C'e), goose, ©anfcbraten, m. {-€ ; — ), roast goose. Qan^, adj., whole, entire ; the whole of; ao?v., quite, wholly, altogether, entirely. Qani unt> gar, altogether, oat and out. gar, even ; very ; — nicfct, not at all ; — nic^t^, nothing at all. ©artcn, m. (-^ ; -), garden. ®artenmauer, / (-n), garden wall. Partner, m. (-i ; — ), gardener, (^affe,/. (-n), street. &a% m. (-es ; -c), guest. ®aftt)aug, n. (-ed; "er), inn, hotel, ©aflflube, / (-n), guest-room, parlour of an inn. ®aul, m. (-eg ; -e), horse, nag. ©ebadeneg, n. {a<^j. subst), baked meats, cakes and pastry. gebdreu"(167), to bear, bring forth. gebcn (181), to give; im- pers., eg giebt, there is, there are; n?ag giebt'g ? what's the matter; je^t — waS in tie ^retbe, now there'll be the mischief to pay (viii., 43 ». (Sebieter, m. (-g ; — ), lord, master. ®ebirgc,rt. (-g; — ), mountain- range. ®ebot, n. (-eg; -e), command- ment. gebiicft, bent, bowed down. ®eburtg^aug, n. (-eg ; -'er), house where a person was born. ©eburtgtag, m. (-eg; -e), birth- day ; jum — , as a birthday- present. ©etanfe, m. (-ng or -n; -n), thought, idea. getei^cn (120; fein), to thrive. get)en!en (99), to intend; to remember (-HS'e^.) ®et)t(^t, n. (-eg ; -e), poem. ©etrange, n. (-g; — ), throng, crowd, press. gebr^ngt, packed, compressed, crowded, VOCABULAKY. 503 inn, ©ebutb,/, patience. gefa^rlici), dangerous ; adv., dangerously. ©efa^rte, m. {-n; -n), com- panion. gefaUen (188), to please, suit; n)ie ciefaQt eg 3t)ncn in ^o&^ ton ? ho w do you like Boston ? gefddig, pleasing, complaisant, kind; ifl tern .i;->ciTn etma?—? will the gentleman be help- ed to anything 1 gcfatligfi, if you please. ®efan9ntg,w.(-feg; -fe), prison, gaol. flcfIii(jeU, winged. ©efii^l, n. (-eg; -e), feeling, emotion, gegcn (34), towards, against, about; for. gcgenii'ber, opposite ( + dat.). (jegittert, latticed. ®e|e(^e, n. (-g ; —\ hedge, en- closure, precinct. 9C^en(188; fe{n),togo; walk; to fare, be; wit qel)t eg 3^nen? how do you do? how are you 1 ge^orcn (dat.), to belong (to). pe^ornt, horned. ®"9f/ / (-n), violin. ®eigenfpiel, n. (-eg), violin- playing, gci^tg, miserly, avaricious, niggardly, gelangen (fein), to reach, ficlb, yellow. ®elt), w. (-eg ; -er), money. (Bmmtel, m. (-g ; — ), purse. 9f»f<^ett, convenient ; oppor- tune; nic^tg fonnte mir ge- legener fein, nothing could suit me better, geleiten, to accompany, escort. ®eliebte(r), m. {adj. subsL), be- loved, lover. geHngen (144; fein), to succeed; eg gelingt mir, I succeed, gelten (159), to be worth, to be at stake; fe^t gilt'g, now you'll have to fight, ©eliiften, n. (-^), lust, appetite, desire. ^mad:), n. (-eg; -er), room, apartment. ®cma|)r, m. (-eg ; -e), husband. ©ema^I, n. (-en n .58^. to win. ffain. gen)i§ (gen.), certain (^ot); cer- tainly, surely. getviffen^aft, conscientious. VOCABULARY. 505 ), jewels, vated. lers and lompany, and -i), ^sense of) vision ; ific^tc, vi- ■), gliost, y, spec- >laymate. e, figure, (), bush, til re. ur, weap- violence, rerful. "er), gar- un, small neighing, in. ffain. [oi); cer- tious. ©emitter, n. {-& ■ ~), thunder- storm, storm. ®ett)o^n^eit, / (-en), custom, habit; bie — ()aben, to be accustomed. gejDObnlic^, usual, customary; ordinary, common ; adv. generally, usually, gemo^nt, accustomed, piemen (123), to pour. ($)ipfeI,m.(-£<; —), summit, top, peak. ®ittert>iid^, n. (-h), latticed roof, leafy tracery (of tree tops), glaii^cn, to shine, glitter, (plangent), brilliant, ©lag, n. {-H ; ^'er), glass, glatt, smooth, slippery. ®Iaiibe(n), m. {-m or \\), faith, belief. oiianhtn (dat. of pers.), to be- lieve; think, gleic^, like, similar ; the same, identical; adv., at once, at the same time, immedi- ately, directly ; fo — , imme- diately, etc. gletc^en (118), to be like, re- semble (+, n. (-eg), gold. ®olt)baum, m. (-eg; "c), gold tree, golten, of gold, golden. (^olt()cIm, m. (-eg ; -e), golden helmet, ©olbfafer, m. (-g ; ~), rose- chafer, golden beetle. @olt)!aferfiJn{(^, m. (-eg; -c), king of the golden beetles. ' golblocfig, with golden curls, ©olbmiinae,/ (-n), gold coin, (yolboran.qe, / (-n), golden orange (/?row. g as in French). ©olbftiicf, n. (-eg; -e), gold piece (coin). ©olbfporn, m. (-eg; -e a^id -f))oren), golden spur. ®0lf, m. (-eg ; -e), gulf, bay. ©onbel,/. (-n), gondola. ®ott, m. (-eg ; ^'er), God, deity; ber (iebe~, [the dear] God (comp. Fr. «le bon Dieu"). gottlic^, godlike, divine. ®oui)erneur', m. (-g ; -e), gov- ernor {pron. as in Fr.) ®rab, n. (-eg ; ^'er), grave, graben (x86), todig. ®rab, m. (-eg ; -c), degree, ©raf, m. (-en ; -en), count, earl. C^rdftn,/ (-nen), countess, ©ramma'tif,/ (-en), grammar. ®rag, n. (-eg ; ^'er), grass, ©rafen, n. (-g), horror, fright, shudaenng. gratuUeren { + dat.\ to con- gratulate, grau, gray. 506 VOCABULAHY. 'i<* 1 (3xaiiUp\, m. {-ti; -e), gray- head. ®rau^, m. (-c«), dread, awe, dismay, graufant, cruel. graufen, to feel horror, be ter- rified, shudder {imj)ers. + dat. o/pers.). grcifcn (118), to grasp, seize, touch; einemin^^antivcr! — , to interfere with anybody's business, grci^, gray, old. ®ricd)enf nabe, m. (-n ; -u),Greek boy. ©dfc^entant), n. (-e^), Greece, ©rillc,/ (-n), cicada, cricket, grim mig, furious, grim, savage, grinfcn, to grin, gro^ (-cr, sup. gropt), great, large, big, tall. ®ro§mutter, / {"), grand- mother, gritn, green. ©runt), m. (-eg ; "e), ground. griint»lid); thoroughly, griinen, to be green, flourish. ®ru§, m. (-eg; -e), greeting, salutation, grii^en, to greet, salute, bow to ; 3f)r §rcunt> la^t t^aar, n. (-eg ; -c), hair of the head, ^auptmautt, w. (-e^ : -Teute), captain, ^auptflatt,/ C^e), capital, ^aug, w. (-eg j -er), house ; ^u ^m\i, at home ; narf) .ert)e,/. {-u), flock, herd. ^evcin, in (to, towards). ^ercintommen (167; fein), to come in, enter. !^creinnet)men (167), to tase in. ^erfommen (167 ; fcin), to come hither, come along, come up, come forward, ^err, m. (-n ; -en), master ; gentlemaVi; Lord; Mr.; 3i)r — 53ater, your father. ^errli(^, glorious, splendid. ^errUd[)feit,/. (-en), glory, splen- dour. ()erfprengen (fein), to galop along, galop up (to). beriiber, over (towards), across. beruin, around, about. l)erum(aufen (188 ; fcin), to run about. t)erunter, down, off. t)erunterfrie9en, to get down, swallow. t)ertjor, forth. l)ert)orrcgen, to stand forth, project. ^eryjortreten (181 ; fein), to come forth, come forward. .Iperg, n. (-cng ; -en), heart. I)er3a^(en, to count up. i)tx^\i6^, heartily, exceedingly. immel, m. (-g; —), heaven, sky. ^immelg balfam,m. (-g), heaven- ly balm. ^immel^fifd)er,m. (-g; -—), fish- erman in heaven. ^immcUpfortner, m. (-g ; — ), heavenly porter, janitor of heaven (St. Peter). ^immeUraum, m. (-eg ; -'e), space of heaven, heaven. Jpimmelgfcblitffel, m. (-g; — -), key to heaven ; primrose. VOCAUULABY. 609 galop , across. ), to IQII i down, I forth, to come 1. art. edingly. »nt), this tn, this t)ierje^n rtnight ; lys. , in this ti this, heaven, , heaven- —), fish- (-« ; -)> mitor of -'e), space (-«; ~)> imrose. ^immeI<5tt)or,n.(-eC;-c), heaven's gate. J^intmctf^cU, n. (-e«), canopy of heaven, sky, fumanjent. !^in, hence, away from j off, away ; down ; along ; — wnt) ^er, up and down. t^inah, down (from). ^tnabfoKcn (188; fcin), to fall down, ^inabtaufen (188; fein), to run down, '^inabfcbauen, to look down, ^inan, 1 , ?{nauf>P' "P^^^^«- ^tnaufgc()en (188; fein), to go up. ()inauf^c(fftt (159), to help up. ^inauffietgcn(120; fein),torise, rise up, climb up, ascend, ^inau^, out (from), ^inau^fommen (167; fein), to come out, get out (of the door), ^inaugfekn (181), to look out (at the window, jum genfier). l^inein, into. ^ineinge()en (188; fein), to go into, enter. ^ine{ngeraten(188; fein), to get into. ^ineinlaufen (188; fein), to run into. ^infaUen (188; fein), to fall down, ^ingeben (181), to give away, give up. ^inneben (188; fein), to go (hence) ; go anywhere ; p< .ss away. l)ing(eih'n (lift: fffrt), to glide along. ()infe0en,to8etdown, put down, place. r)inter (65), behind. J£)intcrfup, m. (-ci5 ; "c), hind- foot. Ijinter^altip, sneaky, deceitful. ^inunter, down (from). ^innnterflieiien (131 ; fein), to fly down. ^Inuntcrregnen, to rain down, pour down. Jpirn, n. (-c«), brain. ^irfd), m. {-t€ ; -e), stag, deer. Jpi^e,/ heat. l)0(^ (loses c in inJlectio7i; corn- par. t)i>ber, sup. l)ocbft), high. t)0d)6eglit(ft, highly fortunate, highly delighted, very happy. Jpocbofen, m. (-^; -), furnace, forge. IbiJc^ft, very, exceedingly, most. I)orf)ften0, at most. ^of, m. (-eg; -'e), court, yard, courtyard, farm, farmyard. ftoffen, to hope. l)of'fentlid), adv., (it is) tc be hoped, I hope. .^of[nung,/ (-en), hope. i)pffnungg»oa, hopeful. I)oflid), courteous, polite, ^ofmarfcliaa, m. {-H ; -e), court marshal. ^6l)e,/ (-n), height; in tie—, up, aloft. V^{)tx,compar. of i^n^:;, which see, ^ob(c,/ (-n), cave, cavern. ^D^n, m. (-et^), scorn, mockery; — fpred^en ( + dat.\ to flout, mock, jeer at. 510 VOCABULARY. ^1 l^olt>, fair, lovoly, IwauUious. ^Olcn, to (go and) bring, fetch ; get ; — (affen, to Kond for. ^oUcrbaum, m. (-ti ; "(), elder- tree ; lilac-tree. i^oUcrjJueii^, m. (-cd ; -e), elder- bough, lilac-branch. SqoIi, 71. {-ti), wood. ^ijljcrn, wooden. ^oh[lo§, m. {-ti; "i), wood- pile. ^ol^jtul)!; m. {-ti ; "t), wooden chair. ^Ord), hark ! l^ord)eu, to hearken, listen. l^orcn, to hear ; to listen ; [ilijf il — , to hear say, hear. i>rn, n. {-ti ; "ex), horn. ]^iibf(i, pretty, nice. J^uffdjlag, rn. (-e«; -e), hoof- beat. ^iij^cl, m. {-&; — ), hill, mound. J^u^n, n. {-e€ ; "er), fowl ; chicken. ipiit)nerl)of,m. (-c^; ''e), poultry- yard. ^iillen, to veil, cover up, shroud. .^unt, m. (-e^ ; -c), dog. ^itnbd)en, n. (-^; — ), little dog; doggy. ^unbert, hundred. ^unbcrt, n. (-e^ ; -e), hundred. J^ungcr, m. (-g), hunger; ic^ |abc — , I am hungry. l^ungrig, hungry. ^i\t, m. (-c^ ; "e), hat. l^iiien, to guard, keep ; fid) — , to be careful, avoid. ^iitte,/ (-n), hut, cottage. 3. tit, I. it^m, dat. 8i7ig.o/tx,ti, which sfifi. ii^x, pera. jyroii., to her, her [dat. sing.); you (nom. pL). i^r, i^re, ibr, poas. adj., her; its; their. 3^r, 3t)rc, ^\!)X,po8s. adj., your. i^rer, i^re, il)re^, \po88.pron., i^re (bcr, tie, \>a^),\ hers; its; il)rigc(t)cr,t)ie,ta«)J theirs. 3^rcr, 3t)re, 3^red,]/>o««. 3^re (ter, btc, bn^), \pro7i., 3^nge(t)cr,t)ie,t)ai3) J yours. 3^rctiviUcn(um), for your sake, immer, always ; at all times ; no^ — , atill; — me^r, more and more, in (65; dat. or ace), in, at; into, to. intern', while, whilst. int)e'^(fen), meanwhile; whilst, inner, inner, interior; tad — c, the interior, inside, inner^atb (gen.), on the inside, within, in nig, hearty, ar ^tionate. 3nfd^rift,/. (-en), inscription. 3nfirument', n. (-eg; -e), instru- ment, intereffant', interesting, irgent ciner, — jemant; any one at all. 3rlant, n. (-«), Ireland. 3taHcn, n. (-€), Italy. 3. 3a, yes, indeed, certainly, you know ; did I (etc.) not; ja* ttJO^t, yes indeed, yes to be sure, yes certainly. VOCABULARY. 511 3flrfii)en, n. (-5 ; — ), little jacket. jaf^cn, to hunt, cliase, pur.suo. 3ai^fll, ;/. (-c), hunting (uct of). 3iiger, m. {-a ; — ), liunter, huntsman. 3fl^r, n. {-(&; -c), year. 2ai)xmaxU,m. {-(&; "e), (yeaily) fair. 3a'fob, m. (-(?), James. 3antmer,m. (-i3),misery, wretch- edness. Sa^nti'nHiite,/ (-n), jessamine blossom, faivo^l, fiee |n. je, ever (at any time); the (before comparative degree^ 1 26, 4) ; — gwei, two at a time, jcbenfatt^, certainly, at all events, jcber, iebe, j;cbe«, every, eacli, every ono, any. Ictermann (-i3), everyone, every- body, jcbcgmal, on each occasion, every time, female, ever, at any time, icmant), somebody, some one, any body, any one. jettcr, jcnc, jencg, that, that one, that person; yonder; the former. Icnfeit(^), on the other side, beyond, ff^t, now, at present. 3oc^, n. (-e5, -e), yoke. 3ol)nnn', m. (-^), John. '^nf»(l'tintiSmitrmi4\otl n (~A • ^ glow-worm, lu'bein, to shout with glee. 3iibfiijVi|To, / (-11), the Jews' street, ghotto (wIkm-o all Jews wore compelled to dwell in the various cities, until recent years). 3u'flfnt»,y:, youth. 3u'lt, w., July. Jung C'er), young. 3unge, m. (-n; -n a7id \\i), boy, lad. 3unnfraw, / (-cii), virgin, maiden. 3ungling, m. (-c^; -e), young man, youth. 3"'ni, w., June. 3i'ngen, m. (-^), George. ^. .Jtafcc'tt, m. (-en ; -en), cadet. Jlafer, m. (-«; — ), chafer, beetle. ^affec, m. {-i), coffee. ^a'ffeeloffcl, in. (-^; — ), coffee- spoon. ^at)n, m. (-c« ; "t), boat. .flaifer, m. (-^; — ), emperor. Jlaiferfronung,/ (-en), corona- tion of an emperor. ^alb^braten, m. (-g ; — ), roast of veal. ^aI6efote(ettp/(-n), veal-cutlet. Fait (^'er), cold. ^amcra't), m. (-en ; -en), com- rade, ^amin', n. (-eg ; -e), fireplace, ^amm, m. {-ti ; '^e), comb, flint men, to comb, ^ammerbiener, m. (-^; — ), va- ^ampf, m. (-eg; -e), combat, fight, struggle. K- 512 VOCABULARY. ^anjllct; m. (-^ ; — ), chancellor. Stappt,/ (-n), cap. Stappd^trifT},. {-c ; — ), little cap. Maximal' , m. (-le; -c), cardinal. Jlarfu'nfelftein, m. (-e^; -c), car- buncle. ^axl, m. {-&), Charles. ^arte,/ (-n), card. Jlartoffel,/. (-n), potato. ^arto'ffelfeib,w. (-eg ; -er;,potato- field. ^afc, m. (-g ; — ), cheese. faufen, to buy. tannXf hardly, scarcely. ^c^Ie,/ (-n), throat. fe^ren, to turn. fein, feiiie, fein, no, not a, not any. feiner, feinc, !cin(e)6, pron., no- body, not anybody, no one, none, not one. ^cUncr, m. (-g ; — ), waiter. fcnncn (99), to know, be ac- quainted with. ^enntnig, / (-fe), knowledge ; pi. acquirements, attain- ments. ^erl, m. (-eg; -c and-i), fellow, chap. ^eqe,/ (-n), taper, candle. ^iitt,f. (-n), chain. ^int), n. (-eg ; -er), child. ^trc^e,/ (-n), church. ,^lang, m. ^-ed : -e), sound, tone, note. (^(agelieb, n. (-eg ; -er), mourn- ful song, dirge, plaint. flar, ciuar. oviu|je,y. (-n), Class. ^lafjlter, m. (-g; — ), classic writer, classic. ffatfd), slap ! ,^Iat)ier', tt. (-eg ; -e), piano. ^Ictb, n. (-eg; -er), dress; jo^. clothes. !(eiben, to clothe, dress. ^Ieiterfd)raiif, m. (-eg; "t), clothes-press. ffein, small, little. ^(ei'not), n. (-eg; -e and -ten), jewel, f lettern (feitt or l)aBen), to climb. flimmen (123; fein or l)aUx\), to climb. flingeljt; to ring (said of small bells) ; eg fliUi^elt, there is a ring (at the door, etc.). Jlingen (144), to sound. ^liufe,/ v'-n), latch, handle. flirren, to clank, rattle. floijfen, to knock. flud, cluck ! flug C'er), wise, clever. I^nckbt, m. (-n ; -n), boy. ^noM, m. (eg; -e), loud quick sound ; clap, thunder-clap. ,^n after, m. (-g), (canister) to- bacco. ^ne(^t, m. (-eg ; -e), (farm) ser- vant, man-of -all- work; hos- tler (of an inn), fneifen (118), to pinch. ^nirpg, m. (-eg ; -c), little in- significant chap, mannikin. fnirfcfcen, to grind the teeth, creak, squeak. fniyen, to make a courtesy. .^noc^en, m. (-g ; — ), bone. fnuticj, knotty. lUU'pfcn, t-o button ; to tie, fasten. jloc^, m. (-eg ; -e), cook. VOCABULARY. 513 fodicn, to cook, boil. ^ol)Icn {i)l.)i coal. JloUer, m. (-cl ; — ), jacket, jer- kin, doublet. hornet', m. (-en ; -en), comet. fommen (167; fein), to come; arrive; — tajfen, to send for ; n>ie fommt ba^ ? how is that? ^ompagni'e,/ (-n), company (of soldiers). ^om|)Iime'ntma(^en,n. (-i?),mak- ing compliments, being po- lite. ^onig, m. (-ed ; -e), king. ^onigin,/ (-nen), queen. ^onig^mantel, m. (-£<; "), king's mantle. ^onigftrape,/ King-street. fonnen (196 !202; ability, etc.), to be able, can ; know, be versed in, know how. ^on^ert', n. {-ti ; -e), concert. ^opf, m. (-c«J ; ''c), head, bowl (of tobacco-pipe). ^opfd)en, n. (-0 ; — ), little head. fopfii'ber, fopfu'nter, head over heels. ^orb, m. (-e« ; 'e), basket. ^orn, n. (-e^ ; -cr), grain, corn. ^ornfclb, n. (-c^; -tx), corn- field, grain-field. ^oj!en, pi, expenses. foften, {ace. of pers. and of thing), to cost. XxCL^tn, to crack, crash. ^ra^e,/ (-n), crow. fram|jf^aft, convulsive. h'anf (tt), ill; sick; ^rante, {adj. subst.}f sick person, pa- tient. ^ranf^eit, / (-en), disease, ill- ness. .^ran^, m. (-Ci? ; -e), wreath, gar- land. h'Ciu^, curly. .Jlrau^fopf, m. (-e^; "c), curly- head. ^raut, n. (-eg ; ''er), herb. .R'reite, /, chalk ; chalk-mark used in tavern reckonings ; je^t giebt'iS \va^ in tic — , now there'll be the mischief to pay. freitemeif , white as chalk, pale as a sheet. Jtreig, m. (-eg ; -e), circle. ^reuj, n. (-eg; -e), cross; bag cifcrne — , the iron cross (a Prussian decoration given for personal valour on the battlefield, corresponding to the Victoria Cross in the British army). tveiigbrao, thoroughly good, ex- cellent. friec^en (123; fein or :^aben), to creep, crawl. StxitQ, m. (-eg ; -e), war. friegen, to get. ^deggmann, m. (-eg; -er and — leute), warrior, soldier. ^ri'tifer, m. (-g ; — ), critic. ^rone,/ (-n), crown. ^rug, m. (-eg ; "e), jug, mug. .^ubi'fnjurget,/ (-n), cube-root. ^ii(^C,/. (-tt), kitchen. ^'mbe»t, m. (-g ; — ), cake. ^iid)Iciu, n. (-g; — ), chicken, chick. .tlui^ef, / (-n), ball; bullet; globe. 514 VOCABULARY. j^^jj^^ ^ul),/ C'e), oow. fiil^i, cool. fii^n, bold. Summer, m. (-i), grief, sorrow. jtunfl,/ (-e), art. J^unjllcr, m. (-^ ; — ), artist. ^U|)pel;/ (-n), cupola, dome. furj (-cr), short. lurjlid^, not long ago, lately, recently. ^u§, m. (-fe« ; -fe), kiss. fiiflfcn, to kiss. JJutfc^er, w. (-d; — ), coach- man, driver. 8a^e,y!, refreshment. ; lac^cln, to smile. lac^en {gen. or iifecr + acc), to laugh (at). Satfeg, m. (-e0 ; -c), salmon. . labctt (186), to load ; to invite. Sftteit; m. {-i), window-shutter {pi. — ) ; shop, store {pi. -). ^a^ix, n, (-g ; — ), couch, bed. Samm, n. {-ti ; "tx), lamb. Sanb, n. (-c« ; '-er and -e), land, country; country (opposed to town); auf tent — t, in the country ; auf« — Qf^i^, to go into the country ; ju — e, by land ; ^ier gu — c, in this country. Sonbfartf,/ (-n), map. fianbfc^aft,/ (-en), landscape. Sanbflrafe, /. (-n), highway, road. laxiQ (-cr), long, tall. !ttng(c), adv. long, a long time or while, fo:* a long time ; fo — , as long as; lange iiid)t, not for a long time, not by a long way. ?angei»et(e,/, ennui; — l)abcn, to be bored. longfam, slow. lang^, along. langji, long ago, long since. Sanje,/ (-n), lance, spear. Sarm, m. {-t^), noise. lajTen (188; ::00, 7), to let, allow ; leave ; have (a thing done); fagen — , to send word; fommett — , to send for; tc^ kffc bad 33ud) ein- bittten, I am having the book bound; eS I'd^t ftc^ nid)t leugneu, it cannot be denied. 8afl,/ (-en), load, burden. Cajler, n. (-g ; — ), vice. Satein, n. {-&), Latin. lateittifc^, Latin. Saul>, n. (-e^), leaves, foliage. 2auf, m. (-eg ; "t), course. (aufen (188; fein), to run. Saune, /, (-n), whim, humour, caprice. Saureni^iug, m., Lawrence. taut, loud, aloud. lauten, to ring (of large bells), toll. lautlog, silent, dumb. Sajjarone, m. ( — ; -i), lazz,a- rone, Italian beggar. ,t1>tn, to live; be alive. Seben, n. (-g), life. leben'big, alive, lively. 2ebeW0^l,7i.(-g),farewell, adieu. Sebtag {indecl.), life, whole life. Seber, n. (-g), leather. lecjen, to lay, put, place, set. Iel)nen, to lean, set, prop. VOCABULARY. 515 Sel^re,/ (-n), teaching, instruc- tion, doctrine. Secret, m. (-g ; — ), teacher, master. £etb, m. (-eg ; -er), body. Seiche,/ (-n), corpse. Ici(^t, light, easy ; readily. Seiti, n, (-eg), sorrow, harm, injury. Icib {used as pred. with fetii, Werten and t^un), sorry, grieved; eg ifl, eg t^ut mir — , I am sorry ; j;emant>(en) etwflg gu — e t^un, to hurt, harm anyone. Iciten (118), to suffer, endure; an ctwag — , to suffer from anything. (eiber, alas ! unfortunately ! 8eit)g,w. {of adj. leit>, see above), harm, injury. leil^en (120), to lend; to bor- row. Seine,/, (-n), line, cord, string, Icifc, gently, softly, in a low tone. Sciflen, m. (-g; — ), (shoemak- er's) last. leipcn, to accomplish ; SSergi(()t — (aitf+ctcc), to decline. Seftion',/ (-en), lesson. Scnc^en, /*. (-g), Nellie. 8en3,m. (-eg; -e), spring, spring- tide. tcrnen, to learn, study. Icfcn (181), to read. Sefen, n. (-g), (act of) reading. le^t, last, final. leu^ten, to shine, flash. Seud^ter, m. (-g; — ), candle- stick. Sente, pL (no sing.), people, persons. Sejriton, n. (-g ; -fa), lexicon, dictionary. Sic^t, n. (-eg ; -er and -e), light; candle, ({(^t, light, bright ; thin, clear (of a forest), lic^ten, to clear (a forest); fid) — , (of the forest) to grow light, show a clearing, lieb, dear, precious ; — ^abett, to love. ?iebe,/, love, affection ; — ju, love of or for. tiefeen, to love. Heter (comp. of gem); conj., rather ; ic^ ge^c — , I prefer to walk, liefclic^, lovely. £iet>, n. (-eg ; -er), song, liefern, to deliver, supply, liegen (181 ; fein, t)aben), to lie; be ; be situated, linf, left ; bic — e, the left hand, linfg, to or on the left. iipptj. (-n), lip. loben, to praise. 8o^, n. (-eg ; -er), hole. Sodfe,/. (-n),curl, lock (of hair). Soffel, m. (-g ; — ), spoon. So^engrin, m. (-g), name of an opera by Wagner go^n, m. (-eg ; -e and -e), re- ward, pay. lo^nen, to reward, repay; fi(^ — , to be worth while. Sorbeer, m. (-g ; -n), laurel. :tpriiti,/., ijoreiei (witcii oi rne Rhine). So'rcni, m. {-tn^), Lawrence. 516 VOCABULARY. lo^, loose, slack ; tufl^ tjl — ? what is the matter ? Sof^blatt, 71. (-eg; "er), sheet of blotting paper. lofcn, to free, redeem; ein 33i(- Ict — , to buy a ticket. Iogfc^ie§en ( 1 23), toshoot quick- ly, shoot away. Iqgfpringcn (144; fein; auf + acc), to spring upon, leap upon. Sotfe, m. (-n ; -ti), pilot. Souife,/ (-ng), Louisa. 8ijtt)e, m. (-tt ; -n), lion. 8ut)tt)icj, m. (-g), Louis ; Lewis. 8uft,yi (-e), air, atmosphere. Suftfa^rt,/ (-cn),aerial journey. lugcn, to look, peep, peer. liigcn (131), to lie, utter a falsehood. Siigner, m. (-g ; — ), liar. Ium))Ctt, to treat shabbily ; t)U tflrffi t)ic^ nirf)t — laffcn, you mustn't let yourself be beat- en (p. 437, 1. 110). 2umpen:§unt), m. (-eg ; -e), raga- muffin, beggarly fellow. £ufl,y! C'e), lust, pleasure, de- light ; — ^aben JU, to have a mind to. lujltg, merry; flc^ iibcr einen — ma6^tn, to make sport of one. m. madden, to make ; arrange ; cause, give ; be (in arithm. calculations); tc^ mad^c mir nic^tg barauci, I care nothing for it; cine ©eercife — , to take a voyage; einen ©pa* | jiergang — , to take a walk; ftc^ auf ben 2Ceg — , to set out. ^a6)t,/. C'e), might, power. mad)ttg, mighty, powerful. ''})iat)d)en; n. (-^ ; — ), girl. ^}JZa'i)(l)engeftalt,/ (-en), girlish figure. SJJa^t), yi (-e), maid, maid-ser- vant. 5>?agen, m. (-6 ; — ), stomach. Wai, m. (-eg or -en), May. Wi%m,f. (-n), mane. ma^nen, to warn, admonish. ^ajeflat',/ (-en), Majesty. ^al, n. (-eg; -e), time (occa- sion); lyxm le^teu — , for the last time. malen, to paint. '2)?a!er, m. (-g ^ — ), painter. Walcrei',/ (art of) painting. man, pron.^ one, we, you, they, people; — Jacjt, they say, people say, it is said. man(^(er), adj. and pron., many a. ^O'Jangel, m. (-g ; ''), want. 9}?ann, m. (-eg ; ''ev), man; hus- band. ?0'?ann(l>en, n. (-g; — ), little man, mannikin ; dear hus- band. ?!)?antel, m. (-g ; ";, cloak, man- tle. 5Jlar^ett, n. (-g ; — ), fairy-tale, story. ?D?arckntt)aIb,m. (-eg; -ev), fairy forest, enchanted wood. ^3)^ir(^arete, / (-ng), Margaret. ^Jcavie,/. (-ng), Mary. '^axt,/. ( — ), mark (a coin = VOCABULARY. 617 100 pfennig or about 25 cents). SJlarft, m. (-cpt\,n. (-g), Naples. ««ebel, m. (-g ; — ), fog, mist, vapour. 9?cklfnaul, m. (-eg ; "t), ball of mist. Sf^ebelflreif, m. (-eg ; -c), streak of mist, neben (65), beside, besides; near, alongside of, by. ^iebcngimmer, n, (-g; — ), small room at the side, adjoining room, nebfl (51), together with, in- cluding. 9leffe, m. (-n ; -n), nephew, ne^men (167), to take; fid^ in Slc^t — , to take care, beware, neigen, to incline, bow. nein, no. ncnnen (99), to call, name, netto, net {commercial term). 5^e0, n. (-eg ; -e), net. neu, new. neultrf), lately, the other day, not long ago. neun, nine, neunmal, nine-times. neunfteKta, of nine places, neunte^aib, eight and a half, nic^t, not ; — me^r, no longer; — nja^r? is (it, etc.) not (so)? 520 VOCABULARY. ■ ^lic^tparierett, n. (-«), disobedi- ence ; refusal to obey orders. nid)t^ {indecl.)^ nothing, nicfen, to nod. nie, never, nieter, down. «nictcrlantc (t)ic), pi, The Ne- therlands. ntct)erftiir3cn(fein),to fall down, tumble, nicblirf), neat, pretty, charming, ntcbrti^, low, lowly, nie'maut), nobody, no one, no person, not anybody, etc. ni'rgenti^, nowhere, noc^, still, yet, even ; — eiti, one more, another; — tU nja^, something (anything) more; — einmal, over again ; — ^eute, before the end of the day, before the day is over; — immcr, up to the present time, still ; — ttor i)ier;5e^n Jagen, only a fort- night ago. «nort>'eifcnfea^n,/ (-en), North- ern-Railway. 5f^ot, / (-c), need, necessity, trouble ; — tt)un, to be ne- cessary, ttotig, necessary; — l^atcn, to have need of. 9?ooember, m. (-«), November, niic^tern, sober ; hungry, fast- ing ; plain, commonplace. 5'^u'mero, (indecL), number (Lat.). nun, now. nur, only, just. «Ru§,/ (")», nut. 9^uf^ec!e,/ (-n), nut-hedge. nii^en,)to be of use, profit, nu^cn,j avail. 9lu^en, m. (-^), profit, use. nit^Hc^, useful. D. ob, whether, if. obcn, above, up-stairs ; nad^ — , upward. Dberft, m. (-en; -en), colonel. 1^^'5'|although. !Dd)fe, m. (-n ; -n), ox. Od)f entreibcr, m. (-5 ; — ), ox- driver, drover. C)d)f entoicttel, n. (-g; — ), quar- ter of beef. ober, or. Dfcn, m. (-« ; -), stove. offen, open. Dfftjier', m. (-e^ ; -e), officer. offnen (fid?), to open. oft C'er), often, frequently. oftmal^, often. D'^eim, m. (-e« ; -e), uncle. o^nc (34), without ; but for. ojnctie^', as it is, anyway. O^r, n. (-c(5 ; -en), ear. Onfet, m. {-€ ; — ), uncle. Opfcr, n. (-g ; — ), victim. ortentti A, proper, genuine, real. JDrt, m. (-e^ ; -e andHx), place, spot. ^aax, n. (-eg ; -e), pair, couple. paax, adv., few, several, fagc, m. (-n ; -n), page, at- tendant (g soft as in French.) ^ala'fl, m. (-e^ ; "t), palace. VOCABULARY. 621 3, profit, use. colonel. — ), quar- ^e. officer. ently. uncle, but for. yway. ir. mcle. ictim. mine, real, -er), place, uir, couple, sral. page, at- iw French. ) palace. ^antoffel, m. (-e ; -n and — ), slipper. fapkt', n. {-(€; -t), paper, ^apft, m. (-c« ; -:;, pope, ^arig', n. (»on — ), Paris, parltercn, to talk, chat, jabber, pajfenb, fit, suitable. fatxom,/. (-n) cartridge, pcinigen, to torment, ^ela, m. (-eg ; -e), fur, skin. §)crle,/ (-n), pearl, ^ctrug, m., Peter, ^ctj, m. (-cne), Bruin. t)fat), m. (-c« ; -e), path, road, ^farrer, m. (-«; ~), parson, minister, clergyman. 5)feife,/ (-n), pipe, pfeifen (118), to whistle, ^feifenfopf, m. (-eg; ^'e), pipe bowl. ^feifenro^r, n. (-eg ; -e cwc^ -c), pipe stem. 5)feifen|lopfer, m (-g; — ), pipe- stopper. 3)fei(er, m. (-g; _), pillar, column. pfennig, m. (-eg ; -e), the one hundredth part of a mark, penny. 5)ferb, n. (-eg ; -e), horse. 5)fert)efca()n, / (-en), tramway, tram ; street-cars, horse- cars. ^fert)e^anbrer,m.(-g; _),horse- dealer. Wfluine,/ (-n), plum. |)flegen (weak), to attend to; to be accustomed, be wont. Wm, ^n. (-eg ; -e), plough, ^funb, 71. (-eg ; -e), pound, ^^ilologe, m. (-n ; -n), philolo- gist, student of philology; student of languages, ^^ilofop^ie',/ (-n), philosophy, ^(an, w. (-eg; -e or -c), plan, design, planet', m. (-en ; -en), planet. pldtfrf)ern, to splash, plattfii^ic;, flat-footed. ^Ifl0,m. (-eg ; -e), place ; square; — nel)men, to sit down, be seated, platen (fein), to burst, ^la^regen, m. (-g ; — ), shower, down-pour, plautern, to chat, talk, ^laufciierei', / (-en), tale-bear- ing, tattling. pto^Iirf), sudden. plmni, plump ! |)oltern, to make a noise. fommtv, m. (-g or -n; -n), Pomeranian, pommerfc^, Pomeranian, portion',/ (-en), portion, plate (of meat, etc.). 5)or3etta'n, n. (-eg), porcelain. 5)or3eaa'nfopf, m. (-eg ; -e), por- celain pipe-bowl, f oft,/ (-en), post, post-office. ?)ofibote, m. (-n ; -u), postman. 5)rad)t, / (-en), magnificence, splendour, prad^tig, magnificent, splendid, prfl^len, to boast, brag, prani^en, to be splendid, re- splendent, brilliant, ^reig, m. (-eg; -c), price; prize. l)retfen (120), to nraise. preiggeben (181),' to give up, give away, ^rinaejjin,/. (-nen), princess. 522 VOCABULARY. froccnt', n. (-c« ; -e), per cent, ^rofcjfor, m. (-« ; -en) T^rofessor. ^romotjlcrcn, to take . degree, graduate, ^ropt^e'afdj, prophetic. «»rot)ina,/. (-en), province, ^rottinjtalflabtcben, n. (-d ; — ), provincial town, ^ublifum, n. (-«), public ; audi- ence, ^unft, m. (-e« ; -e), point ; — gc^n U()r, at ten o'clock pre- cisely. «pitnftlid)teit,/, punctuality, ^uppe,/. (-n), doll, pur, pure, pu^en, to poliah, dean. Qua'bcrflein, m. (-e^; -e), cut- stone, freestone. £)ualm, m. (-e^), thick vapour, smoke. qualmen, to puff out clouds of smoke. Ouaflc,/. (-n), tassel. QucUe,/. (-n), fountain, spring, source. quetlen (124; fein), to gush, flow. giabatt', w. (-eg ; -e), discount, abatement, giat^, n. (-e t)ie — , disap- pointment; fc^reikn (Sie t»a« auf meinc — , charge that to me. rec&t, right; tie — e, th3 right hand ; adv., quite, very, me^t, n. (-ei? ; -e), right ; — ^aben, to be right, be in the right. rect)tg, to (on) the right, red^t'geitig, at the right time, punctually. 9^et)e,/ (-n), speech; oration, reben, to speak, calk. gHeformatten', / (-en), reform- ation. 9lcgen, m. (-g), rain, gie'gentropfen, m. {-i ; — ), drop of rain, regieren, to reip;n, rule, govern. JRegierung,/ (-en), government, reign; unter ber — , in the reign (of), gtegiment', n. (-c5 ; er), regi- ment, regnen, to rain. VOCABULARY. 623 advise, town- oud of I, space. ar. jar the letic. int, bill, ion; cin , disap- (Sic ta^ J that to hs right very, ght; — 36 in the it. ht time, oration. , reform- — ), drop !, govern, ernment, -f in the er), regi- SWc^, n. (-CiJ ; -f), roe, deer. reiben (120), to rub. rcic^, rich, wealthy. reidjcn, to reach, hand. rcif, ripe. reifcn, to ilpen, mature. 3flei^(c)n, m. (-^ ; — ), dance. rein, clean, pure. fReii, m. {-ti), rice. JHcig, n. {-ti ; -er), twig. 9leife,/ (-n), journey, voyage ; cine — mac^en, to take a journey. reifefcrtig, ready to start (on a journey). 3flcifefoflen, pi, travelling-ex- penses. rcifcn (fcinanc?^at)en),to travel, journey, go. 3'leifentie(r) {adj.suhst), travel- ler. reipcn (118), to tear, pull. rciten (118; fein and ^abcn), to ride. Sleiter, m. (-3 ; — ),] . , 9lcitcrgmann,m(-e«; l"^®^' ;^er and -leute), J Norseman. reijen, to charm, allure, tempt. rcnncn (99; fein and l^aben), to run, race. 9?ej^, m. (-e«; -c), remainder, remains, rest. SReftauration', / (-en), eating- house, restaurant. retten, to save, rescue. fjitiimxo^imxl, n. (-eg ; -e), life- saving work, work of rescue. reuen (impers.), to repent; eg reut mt^ {+gen.), I repent (of). ffH^tin, m. (-eg), Rhine. SH^cumattgmu^, ?». {rjen. — ), rheumatism. ric^tig, right, correct ; correct- ly > — 9ft)f n, to be correct (of a time-piece). JRic^tung,/ (-en), direction. viid^tn (123), to smell. JRiefe, m. (-n ; -n), giant. riefeln, to ripple. ^^^H> gjg^-ntic, enormous. 9lint)fleifd), n. (-eg), beef. 9ling, m. (-eg ; -e), ring. JHingel, m. (-g ; — ), ring, curl. ringen (144), to wring, wrestle. ringgum', all around, round about. vinnm (158; fein), to run, flow. aiippenflof , m. (-eg ; -e), blow in the ribs. ^litt, m. (-eg ; — e), ride. Slitter, m. (-g ; — ), knight. rittlingg, astride. 3flo(!, m. (-eg ; -c), coat. 3flo(f(^en, 7i. (-{'.; —), little coat, jacket; gown; skirt. rotten, to roll. ffioman', m. (-eg ; -e), romance, novel. JRomer, m. (-g ; —), Roman, Slofa^^iit, m. (-eg ; -e), pink hat. 3^ofe,/ (-n), rose. Stofenbtatt, n. (-eg; -er), rose- leaf. rofiq, rosy. Slo^, n. (-fe^ti; -fe), horse, steed. Slof tein, n. (-g ; — ), little horse, pony. rot, adj., red. jHot1appci)en, n. (-g), L'ttle Red (Riding) Hood. Slot'wein, m. (-eg; -e), red- wine. 524 VOCABULART. I JRiibf,/ (-n), turnip ; j^elbc — , carrot.. ^Jlubin', m. (ciJ ; -c), ru))y. JKilbel, m. (-»), sling, fi'^leiitcrn, to hurl, fling, sling. fd)(ic§en (123), to lock, shut, close ; to conclude, finish. fd)limm, bad. Sc^linv^el, m. {-i ; — ), rascal, scamp. fd)(in}ai^ev, m. {-$ ; "), brother- in-law. ©c^tuaU^e,/ (-n), swallow. (Bd)wan^, m. (-cs ; "e). tail. fc^roarj ("er), black. fc^njarjHau, bluish-black. fc^war^geneibet, clad in black. ((^meben, to hover ; be sus- pended. (Sct)iveif,m. (-e^; -c),tail; train. fcbrocifen (ffin), to wander. fc^Jueigeii (120), to be silent, keep silence. ®d)tDcigen, n. (-g), keeping silence, (act of) silence. ©c^weiii, n. (-e^ ; -e), pig. @^Wci?,/, Switzerland. ©^ttJctle,/ (-n), threshold. fd)»ellett (124; fein), to swell. fc^rocnfcn, to swing, wave; to turn, v/heel. fc^JDCr, heavy, hard, difficult. f(^njerli(^, hardly, scarcely. (Sc^ttjcrt, 'if. (-eg ; -er), sword. ^e,/ (-n), shooting- star, meteor. I^ter, staring, fixed. fliU, still ; quiet, silent. ©title,/, stillness, silence. fliflen, to satisfy. (©timme,/ (-n), voice. jltmmen, to be in tune ; agree. ©time,/ (-n), forehead. ©tocf, m. (-e^ ; -'e), stick, cane. flocfnii extern, absolutely fasting. jlo^nen, to groan, moan. @tot3, m. (-ei?), pride. jlolj, proud, haughty. jtopfen, to stuff, fill (a pipe). ©torcfc, m. (-e^ ; -e), stork. @torcl)neft, n. (-e^ ; -er), stork's nest. jlorcn, to interrupt, disturb, trouble. jlo^en (188), to push, kick, strike, bump, knock. ©trnl)(, m. (-e^ ; -en), ray, beam ; jet (of water). ftra()len, to beam. ©trant), m. (-e^), shore, beach. (Stra§e,/ (-n), street, road. jlreben, to strive, endeavour. ftrecfen, to stretch, extend. flvei(^eln, to stroke, pat. 1^1 eleven (118), to stroke. ©treifen, m. (-g; — ), stripe, strip, streak. flrciten (118), to quarrel. ftreng, severe ; severely. flreuen, to strew, scatter. ©tric^, m. (-eg ; -e), stroke, dash ; cin — buret) tic 3fle(^* nung, disappointment. @tro()bad&, n. {-t^ ; -er), straw roof, thatch. ©trom, m. (-eg; "e), stream, current. jlromcn, to stream. flro^en, to be full, bulge out. ©trum))f, m. (-eg; -e), stock- ing. ., ahbrev. for uiic fp tueitcr, and so forth, etc. 35. 5!>ater, m. (S ; -), father. 55ene't)ig, n. (-g), Venice. oeraj^ten, to despise, scorn. tterberc^en (159), to conceal, hide. tterbteten (131), to forbid. 5)erbiut)unggt{)itr, / (-en), con- necting door. tterblii^en, to fade. yerbre^cn (167), to commit a crime or fault. ijcrbreiten, to spread. tjerbrennen (99), to burn, con- sume with fire. tterbcrben (159), to spoil (intr.); — (weak), to spoil (tr.), in- jure. ttcrbii^tett, to condense. t)ertricfcn (123), to vex. 25ereinigten ©taaten (bie), pL, The United States. ijergan^en, past, last. luerc^eben^, in vain. ^ei'gel)en (188, fein), to pass away, perish. ijergelten (159), to requite, re- ward. i;>ergcffen (181), to forget. t>ergilbt, yellow, faded. ^ergnugen, n. (-g), pleasure, delight, amusement. ttergnitgt, pleased, merry. oergolbet, gilded. ttcrl^altcn (ficb, impers., 188), to be, be the case. 3^erI)aUn{g, n. (-fees -fO* ^ii*" cumstance. t>erbei'raten (ffd) mit), to marry. ijert)i4ucn, to conceal, hide. VOCABULARY. 535 »erirren (fl*), to go astray, lose one's way. iJerfaufen, to sell; tiefeg .^aiici ^1^ 3" — , this house is for sale. Hvtxuppdt, spoiled, dried up. tjerlan^en, to ask, demand, re- quire. tJcrlaffeii (188), to leave, de- sert, quit; ftc^ — auf ( + ace), to rely upon, depend upon. tJerlaufen (188, firf»),to lose one's way, run away, go astray ^ivUQn,m. (-g; —), publisher. tterleiben, to render disagree- able, spoil. »erle0en, to hurt, wound tterlicrcn (131), to lose. ^Serlufl, m. (-e^ ; "?), loss. tJermeinen, to think, suppose. ^ermieten, to let, rent. ttermtttelft (-f-^m.), by means of. ^ermutlid^, probable. tJerne^mbar, perceptible, audi- ble. »erne^men (167), to perceive, hear, learn. »crneti^en(ft(^), tobow, makea bow. t>ernunftlg reasonable. tterobet, desolate, deserted. t>errcifcn (fetn), to go on a journey. ijcrreift, absent on a journey. »erfammelii, to collect, assem- ble. ijerfcbenfen, to give away ^^rm^en (123), to shoot off, shoot away. yerfd)rie§en (123), to lock up. ^er)d)Iin.qen (1 44), \to swallow. yer|(()lucfen, / devour. Oerf^reiben (120), to prescribe, oerfc^menbcit, to squander, waste. 3?erfrf^jtjcntui^, /: (-en), waste, extravagance. oerfc^winben (144; fd,,), to disappear, vanish. »erfe0en, to move, transport; answer, reply, rejoin. »erfpre(f)en (167), to promise. '^(vMtn, n. (-^), hide-and- seek. ^erfjeften (186), to understand; fid) — niif i + acc), to be a judge of, know how. ijerflorben, deceased, ijerfuc^en, to try. i?ertaufitpn, to exchange. iJertraumcn, to dream away. yen»ant>e(n, to change. »enpa(n-en, to keep, stow away safely. 5Bcriimutte(r), (adj.subsiX rela- tion, relative, oenuenben (99), to make use of Oermiiufrf)t,cursed, confounded ycraaubent, to charm, enchant. 'Otv^Hmn, to swallow, devour »eraei()ert ^20; dat. of pers.), to pardon, excuse. torpveness; um — bitten, to beg pardon. iJerjie^en (131, ficft), to with- draw-, disappear. ^et^ireifefn, to despair. ^efperbrot, n. (-eg), supper. SSettcr, w. (-g; -n), cousin. 536 VOCABULAKY. 3?ic^, 1.. (-c»l), cattle, l^easta. ttlef (met)r, meift), much, many, a great deal ' i > ' - Ut)r, what o'clock. ttieUeicfct', perhaps, possibly. Viclmal, tticlnial<5, many times, frequently, often. »ier,four. Vicrja^rig, four-year-old. SSiertel, n. {-a; — ), fourth part, quarter. SSiertcIfluu'bc,/ (-n), quarter of an hour, tjlcrje^n, fourteen ; — 1a(^f, a fortnight. mUaJ. (55iUen), villa. SSiolonceU', n. (-t^ ; -e), violon- cello. SSogcl, w. (-« ; -)r bird. »oU {+gen. or OOU or uncled aubsL), full. \)otIbrin'gcn (99), | to finish, tootlc'nten, ) complete. ^Ott (46), of, from, by, about, concerning. t)or (65), before, of, in front of, ago; — ac^t Za^tn, a week ago. '^^^<^^'f \ahead, in front. ttorbci', over, past. »orbcigct;en (188; fctn), to go by, pass by, pass. ijorbcreiten, to prepare (for, ciuf + ace). 3Sor'terfu§, m. {-ti ; "e), fore- foot. ^orfa^uen (186 ; fein), drive up to the door, etc. »orc;ct)en(188; fcin), to go (or be) fast (of a time-piece). VOr'(\eftcrn, the day before yes tciday. ttorl)nbcu (24), to contcihplate, intend. t)a()rcut> (228), during ; while. n>»4i()a'fti55, ti uc, real, act .al , adv., upon my word. ^a^xlnit,/. (-en), truth, wa'^rne^men (hu), to perceive. waf)rfrf)cin r^, probable. iBaijtitbaitg, w. f-eg; ^'er or- phan-asylum, orphana-, . 3Balt», m. (-e^ ; ^'er), forest, wood. 2QaIt)bflum, m. (-ecs; ^'e), forest tree. 2Bart)()(j!Te,/:(-n),forestavenup. aC Ibfitenfe,^: (-n), tavern in the woods. SCaroHer, n. (-ed; -e), forest animal, wild animal. SBalbtviefe,/ (-n), forest-merd- ow, glade. W alien, to move gently, roll • wave, heave; walk. ^al^cn, to roll, turn over. aSamc n. (-eg; ^'er), jacket. scant),/ (-'e), wall. 2Bant)(c)rer, m. (-g ; — )^ tra- veller. ttJiini when? Sappenfc^ilb, n. (-eg ; -c i ), shield with p.! rnorial bearings, es- cutcheon. toaxm C'er), warm. marten ( + gen. (yr auf-f ace), to wait for, wait on, tend, nurse { + acc.). ttJarum, why, wherefore. n?ag, what, th. * which, v hich, that \ — fiir ein, eine, ein, what kind oi .^^ what. ^■M9 (adv.), why? lOiig ( = ctmag), something, any- thing. mjcben (186), to wash. SCaflfer, n. (-g; — ), water; ju — , by water, meben (131), to weave. SCeierbaum, m. (-eg; '-e), weav- er's beam. ii?ect)fel()aft, changoable. tredfen, to wake, awake, waken. SCed'u^r, / (-en), alarm-clock, meter, neither; - -. . . „o(^, neither . . . nor. SICeg, m. (-eg ; -c), way, road ; \i^ auf ten — mac^en, to set out, be off. tOtQ, away, off. megcn (223), o account of, because of, fc the sake of, for; i)on — , on account of. wegfommen (167; fein), to • ome away, get off. megmnc^en flcfe to get off, f^et out, make on*- self scarce. tDegjppifenb, showing the vay, leading, iding. SBenmeifer, m. (-g; _), leader, guide. 2Ce()(c), n. (-g), sorrow, pain, woe. n}e6(f), ;>ainful, sore; — tt)uit. to hutt, pain, mel^en, to blow ; to wave. SDe^mut,/, melancholy, sorrow. 538 VOCABULAHY. ^t{)n, n. i-i), breath. SOebr,/. (-en), armour, defoiicP. JliJeib/'M. (-Ci>; -cr), woman; wife. WeiclKU (11^), to yield, vauisli. il'icifec, / (-n), pasturage, pas- ture ; willow. 2lJcil)uad)tcn, />/., Christmas. ttjeil, because. iBcile, /. i-n), while, space of time. Sl^ein, w. (-cc ; -c), wine. tueiuen, to weep, cry. Seinfartc, /: (-u), wine-card. tvcife, adj., wise. 5Cieifc, / (-n), manner, mode, way*; iiuf ticfe — , in this way. weifen (1 20), to point out, show. tvci^, white. iuei^e"/ to whitewash. mit, far ; broad; wide; far off; afar, distant. JBeite, / (-n), distant place; width ; wide space, wetter, farther, further, ^eijen, m. (-rgen.), for the sake of. widig, willing. VOCABULARY. 639 (for =» )econie, . tenne), aiix. oj oine of. , toss. et. blier; bci sather. rtant. ist, coii- , be re- like ; — nuch. ►re. resound ; ee agaii), meeting,' i-bye till revoir, h. liani. -n), will; { + gen.), mnt, m. (-f« ; -f), wind. mnUn (Ut), to wind. 2Cinfcei$fiUifen, 7*. (-c); rushing or roaring of the wind ; Wie — , as swiftly as the wind, luinti}^, windy. SCinffl, m. {-a ; — )^ corner, nook. n)infen, to wink, beckon, signal. 2Cinter, m. (-i|Ten (19G), to know (said of knowledge) ; uidjt bap ic^ wn^te, not that I know of SBiJTenfrf^aft,/ (-en), science. miffentlid), knowingly. SCtttwenfitleler, m. (-«; — \ widow's veil. wo, where • where ? S3orf)e,/ (-n), week. 2Goge,/ (-11), wave, billow. W0h\,pred. adj., well {of health) ; mix ifl md)t — gu mut, I do not feel well ; — , adv., well, then, indeed, I suppose ; fa — , yes, to be sure. SGo^Ic^eruc^, m. (-eg ; ^'e), pleas- ant odour. comfort, prosperity. Wo^ncn, to dwell, live, reside. ©obninii^, / (-en), dwelling, hou.st), residence. SOoIfe,/ (-n), cloud. 2Dolfenfrf)i4)t, / (-en), layer of clouds. SBoIfenflejL m. (-eg ; -e), cloudy path. 20olfenflra§e,/ (-n), street of clouds. 5ffio(fcntl)ron, m. (-eg; -e), throne in the clouds. 'Boilt,/., wool. luoden, woollen, of wool. moUen (190-202), to will, de- sire, wish, want, intend, mean, like; — (Sie ein (^lag SOnffer? will you have a glass of water ? 2Conne, / (-n), pleasure, de- light. woran, whereon, on which, on what, of what, moranf, whereon, on which, for which, on what, njornug, wherefrom, f ff)m what, of what. iDorin, wherein, in which, in what. SCort, n. (-eg; '^er a7id -e), word. n)oriiber, about what, at what,* over what, tuuffcern, to increase rapidly, grow luxuriantly. 2Bunbe,/ (-n), wound. 2Bunber, n. (-g ; »_), wonder, miracle, mnnberbar, wonderful, strange, remarkable. ^Qnnberbaum, m. (-eg ; -e), ma- gic tree. 540 VOCABULARY. ttjunbern (f((^), to wonder, be astonished (at, iiber + ace); ?^ ivunbert mid) (irtdpers.), I wonder. njunberfam, wonderful, won- drous. tt)unt)erfd)on, most beautiful. S55unf(^, m. {-ti ; -e), wish. tt)itnf(i^en, to wish, desire, want; ©liid — , to congratulate, w'ish success. njitrtettoll, dignified. 2Curm, m. (-e6 ; -er), worm. SBurjl,/ (-c), sausage. SCursel,/ (-n), root. 2But,/, rage, fury. tviitcnt), furious. ^a%f. (-en), number. ja^len, to pay. ga^Icn, to count. 3a^tt, m. (-eg ; h), tooth. 3a^nnje:^, n. (-eg), tooth-ache. ga'plJeln, to kick, struggle. jort (-er and -er), tender, gentle. 3auber; m. (-g), charm, magic, enchantment. 3auberpfert), n. (-c^; -e), en- chanted horse. 3cukrfc^Io§, n. (-[eg ; -fer), en- chanted castle. 3aukrtt)alb, m. (-eg ; -er), en- chanted wood. 3aun, m. (-eg; "t), hedge, fence. 3e()n, ten. 3et(ien, n. (-g ; — ;, sign. iti^tn, to show. ipttipn ^90^. to afifiuse. 3cit, / (-en), time ; ju aUtn — en, in all ages. 3eitung,/ (-en), newspaper, jerbrec^en (167), to break to pieces, aerfatlen (188; fein), to fall to pieces, decay, gcrfliefen (123; fein), to flow away, vanish, jerfnirf^t, crushed, dejected, jerreifen (118), to tear (to pieces), jerrinnen ( 158 ; fein), to vanish, run away (of liquids), jerftrenen, to scatter, disperse. 3eug, n. (-eg ; -e), cloth ; stuff; wa& bag — fatten toitl, as hard as you can. 3eug, m., Jupiter, jie^cn (131), to draw; pull, take; extract; doff (one's cap) ; (fein), to move, march, jteren, to adorn, gierlic^, elegant, graceful. 3immer, n. (-g ; — ), room. 3innc,/ (-n), battlement. 3ipfcl, m. (-g ; — ), point, tip ; corner, jittern, to tremble, jogern, to hesitate, delay, jottig, shaggy. ju (46), to, at; — meinem Dnfel, to my uncle's; — berfelbcn 3ftt, at the same time ; adv., too ; closed, shut, jntrincien (99), to pass, spend (said of time). 3uc^t,/, discipline. 3ucfer, m. (-g), sugar, guerft', first, first of all. Vocabulary. 641 iu aUtn taper, treak to 5 fall to to flow ected. ear (to ) vanish, s). iisperse. ti; stuflf; mU, as w; pull, ff (one's }, march. ful. oom. ent. )int, tip ; lay. - meinem cle's ; — bhe same ; closed, ss, spend ^ueffen (181), to go on eating. 3ufaa, m. (-eg ; h), chance, ac- cident, aupftcrn, to whisper to. aufolge (gen. or dat; 223), in consequence of, according to. Sufriebcn, contented, satisfied. 3«g; wi. (-eg; h), feature; character; train. Biigcl, m. (-g ; _), bridle, rein, gugretfen (118), to reach out, put out the hand, au^oren, to listen, 3ufunft,/, future, aule'^t, at last, gumaiten, to shut, close, 3une{)men (167), to increase, gunicfen, to no(i to. auraunen, to whisper to. auretten(118; fein), to ride up (to). Suriidf, back. Suriidbringen (99), to bring back. 3uritcfb{ei6en(120; fein), to re- main behind; remain at home. auriicfbrangen, to force back, auriicf.qe^en (188; fein), to go back, retire, retreat, auriicfte^ren (fein), to return, aurudfummen (167 ; fein), to return, come back, auriidregen, to put by, lay up. aufammen, together, aufflmmenraufen (188; fein), to run together. anfnmmenfclrouben, to screw together. aufammenflopcn (188), to col- lide. aufc^iden, to send to { + dat) aufc^ie^en (123), to go on shoot- ing. aufd)lagen (186), to shut quickly. 3ufd)Iie§en (123), to lock up, fasten, shut. aufd)reiren( 118; fein), to stride up, stride on. awfe^en a 8 1 ), to look on, watch. aufe^enbg, while one is looking, perceptibly. au)pred)en (167 + c^a^.), to ad- dress, speak to. auijo'r, before. aumci'Ien, sometimes, at times aumenben (99), to turn to- wards, take to, have re- course to. anjanaig, twenty. amar, true, truly; to wit, namely. 3njed, m. (-eg ; -e), aim, object. anjei, two. Bweig, 7n. (-eg; -c), branch, bough, twig. attJciteng, secondly, 3tt)erg, w. (-eg ; -e), dwarf. 3n)iebel,/ (-n), onion, att>iefad), double, anjingen (144), to force. att)ifrf)en (65), between. attJolf, twelve. 11. ENGLISH— GERMAN. A. able, fa^ig, ge[(^icft ; to be — , !i)nnen, 196; im (Stonbefein. about, prep, (around), uiu, 34, 226, a ', (the person), bet, 46, 226, rf; adv., (nearly), ungefdt)r ; ettoa, 226, 6, c ; to be — to, im ^egriffe fein. above, prep., iiBer, 65. absent, abn)cfenb ; mind- ed, jerftrcut. . abuse, v., mi^^an'bctn. accept, annel^men, 167. accompany, beg lei ten (trans.). account; on — of, luegen, 223; 1c)a[h{tn), ^alber, 223 ; on that — , be§n)egen, bc§!^alb. accusation, ^nflage, /. (-n). accuse (of), anflageu {gen. of ihiny), befdjulbigeu {gen. of thiTig). accustomed, gen)of)nt ; to be — , bic @en)Dt)ni)eit ^bcn. acknowledge, auerfennen, 99. acquaintance, 33efanntfd)of t, /. (-en) ; to make the — of, tennen lernen. acquit (of), lo§fpred)en (167; gen. of thing). act, V. |anbeln ; to — amiss, mt^'^anbeln. add, abbieren. address, subst., 5lbref|c, /. (-n). address, v., anreben. admire, berounbem. advance, Dorriirfen {intr.; fein). advantage, ^^orteil, m. (-e§ ; -e). advantageous, Dor'tetl^aft, advice, diat, m. (-e§). advise, raten (1^8; dat.). affair, ten ''^I. church, Sx\v6)c,/. (-n). Cinderella, ?lf d^enputtcl, n, (-§). city, ^sptabt,/. (-C). claim to be, iwoUeu, 196. clear, f(av. clever, gc|'d)idt. cHmate, Jllima, n. (-^). climb up, {)inaufflcttern. cloak, aiioutel, m. (-^ ; ''). clock, llt)X,f. (-en). close, 3nmad)en ; fdjliej^en, ^us fd)lie9en, 123. cloth, Xnd), n. (-eg; -e or "er). clothes, Itleibcr, w. pi. {see ^leib). cloud, 2BoIfe, / (-n). coachman, jtutfd)er, m. (-§; — ). coal, ^'ol)len, pi. coat, 9fiod, m. (-e§ ; -c). coifee, Jlaffee, m. (-§). cold, fait ("er) ; to catch — , fic^ er fallen. colour, i^arbe, /. (-n). combat, It^ampf, m. (-eg ; -e). come, fommen (167; fein) ; — in, i^ereinf ommen ; — here, ^ierl^er fommen ; — down, l^ernnterfommen ; — out, l^eraug fommen ; — back, priidfommen ; — again, mieberf ommen ; what is to — , bag 33ei)orftel)enbe. coming (act of), ^bmmen, n. (-g). command, v., befel^len (167; dat.). commandment, (5^ebot, n. (-e§j company, (^efetffdjaft, /. (-en), complain- flaxen (iib*'.r -i- acc.V , n,(-3). )6. % Ben, au; or "er). p/. (see I. i-tch — , m); — — here, down, — out, back, again, it is to e. men, n. (167; n. (-e§j /: (-en). VOCABULARY. 647 complete, DoCfftdnbig. concert, ^on^evt', W. (-e^ ; -e). condition, 53cbinqunq,/. (-en). confusion, ^^kviuivium^,/. (en); ^eftiiv.^un(^,/. (-en). congratulate, ©Uicf luiinfdjen, gvotnUeren {dat.). conscious, beiDUJjt ( i-(/en.) consequence; in — of, 3ufo(Qe, 223. consider, betiadjten ; r;aUcn fiir, 188. consist (of), 6eftet)en (an§), 18G. contented, jufvieben. contradistinction, ©egenfat^, m. (-eS ; -e). contrai-y ; on the — , im ©e; gentell. convent, Jltofter, n. (-§ ; -). convince (of), iibev^cu'gen ( + gen. of thing, or oon). cool, adj., fill) I. copy (of a book, etc.), subst., eremplav', n. (-e^; -e); v., ab[d)reiben, 120. corner, C5cfe,/. (-n). correct, adj., ri(i)ttg. cost, v., toften ( + ace. or dat. of person). counsellor, D^otgeber, m. (-s ; -)♦ count, suhst., @vaf, m. (-en; -en), countess, ©vafin, /. (-nen). country, Sonb, w. (-e§; -'eu or-e ; in the — , ttuf bent :?anbe; man, iBauer, m. (-n or -§; -n). couple, ^aar, n. (-e§ ; -c). CO ui tier, «yy[Ujig, 7n. (-Cs j -c)» cousin, 33etter, m. (-§ ; -n) ; Confine, / (-n). cover, v., berfen. create, fd)affen, 180. creditor, ©laubiger, m.(-§; — ). creep, h'iec^en (123 ; fein). crime, 33er6rec^en, n. (-^ ; — ). crop, crops, @rnte, /. cry (call), rufen, 188; (weep), raeinen. cup, Xa\'\t,f (-n). curtain, i:I5ort;ang, m. (-e^; '-e). cut, fd)netben, 118; — off, o6frf)neiben; to — one's hand, fid) \\\ bie i^-anb fc^neiben. D. danger, @efo()r, /. (-en). dangerous, gefd()rl{d). dare, fid) unterftefjen, 186; bi'irfen, i96. daughter, %o6;)itx,f. ("). day, 5tcg, m. (-e^ ; -e) ; in broad — light, htx ()ettem ^age. dead, tot, deal ; a great — of, oiel. dealer, ,!^dnbler, m. {-% ; — ). dear, lieb, teuer. dearly-bought, teuev. decide, intr., fid) entid)(ic§en, 123; — d, af^'., entfd)ieben. defence, 33erteibignng, /. (-en), definition, definition, /. (-?n). deserve, oerbienen. desire, suhst., ikvlangen, n. desperate, oerjweifctt. devote, jDibineu* 548 VOCABULARY. ^ I diamond, 'Diamant', m. (-3 or -cii ; -en), dictionary, ©ortcrbud), n. (-e§; '^ev). die, fterBcn (159 ; fein\ difference, Untcrfd^tcb, m. (-c§ ; difficult, fdinjer. dig, grabcn, 186. diligence, ^lei^, m. (-e§). diligent, flei^ig. dinner, 9Jiittag§effen, n. (-§ ; — ). disagreeable, unangcnel^m. disappoint, enttdufc^en. discover, entbecfen. discoverer, ©ntbedf cv, m. (-§ ; -). discovery, (Sntbecfung, / (-en). disgrace, ©c^anbe,/. (-n). displeased, nnjufrtebcn. dissatisfied, unjufrteben. distant, entfernt. disturb, ftoren. diver, iaud)er, m. (-§ ; — ). divide, teilen. divine, gottUc^. do, t^n, 196; (make), ma= d)cn ; (as aux. is not trans- lated by a separate form; see 31, R. 3) ; how — you — ? w)te get)t e§ ^^nen ? doctor, ®of tor, m. (-§ ; !l)ofto'ren) ; (physician), %x^t, m. (-e§ ; "e) ; that is Dr.B.,bagiftbevSr)o!tov23. dog, §nnb, m. (-c§ ; -e). dollar, ^l^aler, m. (-§ ; — ). door, $;J)ur(e), /. (-en) ; at the A«* Wy doubt, s?^6«<., 3"'2ifc'^/ wi. (-§ ; -). doubt, v., graeifeln (an + dat.); I have no — of it, id) (jabe feinen B^ocifel baran. down, l^crunter ; — -stairs, untcn, l^inunter, l^eruntcr. dozen, ^u^enb, n. (-e§ ; -c). draw, jie^en, 131; geid^nen. dress, £(eib, qi. (-e§ ; -ev). dress, a>. tr., anfleiben; v. intr., fid^ anfleiben. drink, trinfen, 144; — {of beasts)f faufen, 123. drive, v. tr., treiben, 1 20 ; intr. (go in a conveyance), fal^ren(186; fein); go for a — , fpajieven fo^ren. driving (act of), gotten, n. (-§). drop, ^ropfen, m. (-§ ; — ). drown, intr.; be — ed, er; trtnfen, 144. duke, ^erjog, m. (-e§ ; -e or -c). during^ tt)a{)renb (gen.; 223). duty, g^fli^t, / (-en), dwelling-house, SCBo^nl^auS, n. (-e§; '^er). E. each, iebcr, jebe, jebe§; — other, etnanber. eagle, 5lbler, m. (-§; — ). ear, t)l)X, n. (eS ; -en), early, frii^. earn, oerbicnen. earth, (Srbe, /.; quake, ©rbbeben, w. (-^ ; — ). east, Dft(en), m. (-en§ or -en). =J> ,*lTr VOCABULARY, 549 {of eat, cffen, 181; rcffcn, 181 {said of beasts). effort, ^^Inftrcngun;], / (-en), S3cmul)ung, /. -en); 33er= fud), m. (-cS; -e). either, entraeber ; — ... or, cntroebcr . . . obrc. elect (as), ernjd^lcr (jum). elm, Ulme, /. (-n). else, or — , fonft. embarrassment, S^erlegen^cit, /• (-en). empemr, ^aifer, m. (-§ ; — ). endure, auSftel^en, 186. enemy, geinb, m. (-e^ ; -c). engaged, perfagt; I have an- other engagement, I am — elsewhere, id) Un anber^iuo oerfagt. English, englifd^; _ (lan- guage), (Snglifdi (be^ (Jng= l{fd)cn); in— ,auf (Snglifd); into — , in§ (fngli[d)e. Englishman, ©ngldnbcr, m. (-§; — ). enjoy, genie^en (123; gen. or more generally ace.) enough, genug ; be — , suffice, geniigeit. err, irren. escape, cntflte^cn (131 ; [ein; dat.) esteem, ac^ten. etc., u. f. ID. {ahhrevMtion for : unb fo iveiter). Europe, ©uropa, n. (-?y). even, adv., f ogar, fel^ft : not — , nid)t etnmal' ; — if, xmxw oudj. evening, 5l6enb, m. (-e^ ; -e). ©Ve»* i** ipmnlfa every, jcbcr, jcbc, jcbc§ ; — body, — ono, jebermonn, jcbcr, jcbiDcber, jeglid^er ; — week, aUe a6.)i tagc. everywhere, libera U. ev\\,8uhst.,'^o\t^,n.{adj.mhst.) exactly, gcrabc, cbeii. examination, (Srainen, n. (-§ ; /• examine, unterfud/en, bcob's ad)ten. exceeding, — ly, ()od)ft, fclir, du^ei'ft. ex'.ept, au§cr (c?a^.; 46). excuse, v., cnt[d;ulbigen {tr.\ t)cr5ei^en(120; dat.); suhst., (5nt[d)ulbigung, / (-en), exercise, subst., 3tuf gabe,/. (-n). expect, erroarten. expense, Soften, pi; at the — of, auf Soften, eye, Stage, n. (-g ; -n). F. fail (in business), fatlieren. fall, faacn(188; fein). family, garni lie,/, (-n). famine, ^un'gcr^not, /. (''e). far, lueit ; as — as, big noc^ {dat.); not — from, unfevn, uniDeit {gen.; 223). farewell, :^ebeiuo(j(, n. (-g). fast (quick), gefdjiuinb, fd)ne(I. father, 5Bater, m. (-g ; -). favour, ©efatten, m. (-g : — ). fear, v., furd)ten {trans.); fidj fiirc^ten {vox + dat.) fear, subst., gurc^t,/; for — , an§ gurd)t. iuawier, oeoer,/. (-n). 550 VOCABULARY. February, /^cbvuav, m. (-8). foel, fiit)leu ; (perceive), cmp; finbcn, 144; infr.{ofhpMlih), fid) befinbeu ; ,^u 'iyhite [cin ; I— ill,mivift[d)lccl)t5ii^JUeutc. few, ii)cui(^, iucui(]c ; a — , cinige, eiii poQv. field, i^elb, ?i. (ec ; -cr). fight, fcd)ten, 124;ftveitcn, 118. fill, fiiUcii. find, fiiiben, 144; — out, au6; fiubcii; cifal)vcu (l^!0); — again, luiebcvfiiibeii. fine, fd)oii. finger, ij^inger, m. (-§ ; — ). finish, uollcu'bcu; to luive — ed (with), [evtig feiii (mit) ; — ed, fevtig. fire, ^eucv, n. (-§ ; — ). first, adj., ber, bie, basi erfte ; adv., juevft; evfteii^ ; — of all, ;^uerft. fish, '^i[d), m. {-t% ; -c). fishing (act of), '^if d)en, n. (-§). fit for, — to, gut iM, five, fiinf. flatter, fd)meid)etn {dat.). flatterer, (^d)meid)lev, m. {-% ; -). fleet, suhst., %Uiit, f. (-u). floor, ^ll^boben, m. (-§ ; -). flour, SJlel^t, n. (-e§). flow, v., flie^en (123; feiu). flower, SSUnne, /. (n). fly,fliegen(131; fein); — away, iDeg^iegeu. follow, folgett (fein ; dat.). foot, ^u§, m. (-c^ ; -e). for, 229, prep, {in hehalf of), tvix (nf^r.; 34); {of purpose) ju {dat.\ 46); — reading, JiUm i'cfcn ; (( ' pant lime) fcit(c?a^.; 40); — three days (past), feit bvci Xogcn ; {of fut. time) aw] {ace. ; 229, A), 2); — three days (to come), auf brei 'Joge. forbid, ocrbicteu (131 ; dat.). force, jraingeii, 144; to be — <1, obliged (to), miiffen, 196-202. ford, %nxt, f. (-en). forest, iBalb, m. {-t% ; -er). forgery, ^-i^evfdl[d)ung, / (-eit). forget, uergcffen, 181. forgive, Dcrgeben (181 ; dat.). former, jener, jene, jetted. fort, ^t\\t, f (-n), ^eftung,/ (-en). fortieth (part), ^^iei^igftel, n. (-§ ; -). fortnight, uierjetju ^age. fortunately, gliicfUd^eriueife ; gliidf lidiev 2Bci[e. fortune, good- — , ©liidf, n. (-e§). four, uier. fox, }^i\6:^%, m. (-e§ ; -c). France, '^vanfreid), n. (-§). Francis, ^van^, m. (-en§). Fred(dy), %x\%, m. (-en^). Frederick, ^vtebrid), m. (-§); Frederick-street, bie %x\t\ii ftd)ftvaj^e. free, fret. freeze, frieven, 131. French, franco fifd) ; — (lan- guage), ^ran3ofi|c^, n. (be^ Sranjofifdien). fresh, fvtfd). ▼C BUI ART. 651 Friciay, i^rcitac^, m. (-c§ ; -e). friend, %veun'o, m. (csl ; -c). friendJesK, freunbloS. friendly, |i anbUd). fric Kshi %xv ''M\tJ.{-tn), fnghtet' ^^ crfd)rc(fen; to be- (. •' [(^vecfen, 167. frog, grofc^, »«. (-eg ; "c). >ra {direction)^ uon, oug (c?a<. ; 46); (caw^^e) am-, (time) ttber ( + acc.; 65); a week — to-day, i^twit iibcr ad)t5tagc; {disease) an {dat.-, 65); cv' n biefer Jtranf^cit geftorbeu, he died of ffiat disease, front; in— -of; not \u.aL or ace. ; 65). f"»y, gttnj. funeral, 33cgra6nt§, w. (-fe§; ■fe). furious, — ly, raiitcnb. future, Su^unft,/. G. gallop, gttloppteren; fprengen. garden, @artcn, m. (-g ; -). gardener, ©cirtner, m. (-g; — ). gather, fainnteln. general, ©eneral', m. (-eg ; -c). generally, geraofjnlic^. generous, freigeMg. gentleman, ^err, m. (-n ; -en). George, @eorg, m. (-§). German, adj., beutfd^ ; — (language), ^eutfd), n. (beg ©eutfc^en); in — , auf 3)eutfc| ; into — , tng 3)eutfci^e. Germany, 3)eutfc6lanb, w. (-g). get(bec()mG),n)eibcn(159; fcin). giH a)?dbd)cn, n. (-g ; — ). give, gei)fn, 18T ; - p, aufs gcben, glad, fro^ (grer^.); be —, fic^ freucn ; I am — , eg freut mid) ; I should be — to, should like to, ic^ m6rf)tc gern. glass, ©lag, n. (-eg ; "er). glove, .f^anbfdiu^, m. (-eg ; -e). go, ge^cn (188; fein); reifeit (fein m- ^ben); — away, Jucgge^en, fortgeljen;— back, aurudge^en; — out, (^in)s augge^en ; — down, ^n\x\u terge^en; — up, ^inauf= ge^en ; — past a place, aw einem ^la^c oorilbergetjen ; — • for, fetch, l^olen. goal, Biel, n. (-eg ; -e). God, god, @ott, m. (-eg ; '-er). Goethe, ©oet^c, w. (-g). gold, subst., @olb, n. (-eg). gold, adj., golden, golben. good, gut; be — enough, l^o6en @te bie ©iite; — morning, guten 90^orgen. goodness, @iite, /. graceful, — ly, anmutig. grand-parents, ©ro^el'tetrt, pi. grapes, %xa\xhtn, pi. grass, f .ag, n. (-eg ; -er). grateful, banfbar. great, gro^ (^'er, gro§t). green, griin ; suhsL, mm, n. (-^). grind, fc^letfen, 118. ground, 33oben,r?i.(-g); ©rbe,/ grow, raac^i'en (186 ; fein) 186 ; roerben (159; fein). I. wo\)nf)cit f)ahen ^n, etc.; pflegen. half, adj., i)a\h ; — an hour, cine l^albc (Stunbe. half, subsL, $dlftc, / (-n). hand, Qanh, /. (->.). handsome, f(i)on. handwriting, ^anbfc^rtft, /. (-en), hang, V. tr., ^ngcn ; v. intr., I^angcn, 188. happy, gliidfUd^. harbour, ^afen, m. (-§ ; -). hard, fd)n)cr. hardly, faum. hare, S^a\c, m. (-n ; -n). harvest, subsL, (Stnte, /. (-n); v., crntcn. haste, @itc, /. ; to make — , cilcn. hat, ^ut, m. (-c§ ; -e). have, ^aUn, 24; fein, 52, 53; laffcrt, 188, 200, 7 ; to — to, be obliged to, mitffen, 196-202; will you — a cup of tea? raoUcn ®ic eine Xaffc Xiice ? hay, ^cu, n. (-c§). he, cr; bcr; — who, berjes nige raelci^er, etc., luev. head, ^ofi, m. (-eg ; -c). health, ©cfunb^eit, / hear, prcn ; to — say, fagett |)oven. hearing, ®t^ox, n. (-e§). heart, ^erj, n. (cnS ; -en); by — , auSraenbig. heat, JpifeP, /. heath, .^eibe, /. (-n). heaven, .l^immcl, m. (-§ ; — ;. heavy, \S)wex ; — ily, fci)n)cr; (of rain) ftar! ; heaviest of all, am atterfd)n)crflen. help, subst.f «^ilfe, /. help, v., {)elfcn (159; dat.); it cannot bo — ed, e§ Id^t fic^ nic^t (inbern. Henry, .l^cinric^, m. (-§)> her, pers. pron., fie (ace); i^r (dat.). her, jooss. ai/., i^v, iljvc, il^r. here, l^tcr. hide, V.J tjerbevgen, 159. high, 1)06), t)i)l)er, ^o6)\t (loses C in inflexion) ; to think — ly of, ciel \)(!i\izn con, 188. him, ii^n (ace), ti)m (dat). himself (he), er felbft; (to, for) — , fid) (ace. or dat.). his, poss. adj.y [cin, feine, fein. his, poss. pron., fetner, feine, feincS ; ber, bte, ba§ feine ; ber, bie, bd§ feinige. hoarse, l^eifer. hold, mten, 188; — together, jufammen^alten. holiday, ^eiertag, m. (-e§; -e); — s, i^erien, pi. home, .^eimat, /.; adv., nad^ §aufe ; at — , §u ^aufe ; to go — , nad) .l^aufe gel)en, 188. honest, e^iltc^, rebli^, aufs rid)tig. honey, Jjonig, m. (-cS). VOCABULARY. 653 , -en); f dliBcr ; ^iest of dat.) ; 3.); t§r \t (loses ) think m, 188. it.). (to, for) K, fein. ', fcine, § feine; Dgether, ■c§; -c); mfcj to en, 188. hope, «2«6s^., §offnung, / (-en); v., 1^ off en. horse, gjferb, ti. (-e§ ; -e). hospital, ^ofpital, ©pitaL w. (-e§ ; -'er). hostess, SBirtin, f. (-nen). hot, ^ei^. hour, (Stunbe,/(-n); hand, ©tunbenjeiger, m. {-§ ; — ). house, ^am, n. (-e^ ; %) ; at your — , bei ^^nen. how, wk; — do you do ? )uie ge^t eg ^^nen ? mc befinben ©ie fic^ ? however, ahtx ; jebod^, howl, l[;eulen. human, menfcbltc^ ; —being, 3D2enfd), m. (-en ; -en), hundred, ^unbert; 52*65^., ^uns bert, n. (-eg ; -c). hunger, ^mqev, m. (-§). hungry, ^ungrig ; be — , i&unger ^aben. hunter, ^ciger, m. (-§; — ). hunting (act of), ^agen, n. (-§); (chase) ^agb, / (-en); go — , auf oie ^agb ge^en. huntsman, ^dger, m. (-g; — ). hurry, ei(e,/; lamina—, id) h'xn in ber @ile, td^ l^abe eg eifig. hurt, v., Derle^en; raeb ihm (99 ; dat.) husband, Mmn, m. (-eg ; -er). hussar, §uf ar, m. (-en or -g ; -en). I. I, td^. ice, ©ig, n. (-eg). idea, ;;)bee, / (-n), ©ebonfe, m. (-ng or -n ; -n). idle, faur, trage. idleness, idling, 9)H§iggang, m. (-eg), if, wenn; (whetlier), oh. ignorant, unrotffenb. ill, fvanf ; — -health, fcfilecfttc ©efunb^eit, / ^ illness, Bxann)Cit, /. (-en), imagine, ^i6)(dat.) benfen, 99. immediately, (fo)gleic^. importance, SBic^tigfeit, /. important, raic^tig, bebeutenb. impossible, unmoglid). in, in (dat.; 65); auf (dat.; 65, 230, a); — the country, ouf bem Sortbe. inch, 3oa, m. (-eg), induce, beiueqen, 131. industrious, flei^ig. industry, g^ei§, m. (-eg), inform, mitteilen. inhabitant, @inn)oT)ner, m (-§ ; -). ink, 3:inte or !5)tnte,/ innocence, Unfd)ulb, / inquire, fic^ erfunbigen, fragen. inside of, inner^alb (gen.; 223). insist on, hefki)m (186; auf -t-' ace.) instead of, ftatt, anftatt (gen. : 223). ' intend, beabfic^tigen, oor'^aben, 24, gebenfen, 99. intention, 5tbftd)t, / (-en), interrupt, unterbred/en, 167. into, in (ace; 65). invent, erfinben, 144. invitation, (Sinlabung, / (-en), invite, einloben, 186. iron, gifen, n. (-5); adj., cifern. 554 VOCABULARY. !.» ,, it (38, 39), c§ ; cr ; ftc ; bcr, biC; baSfcIbc ; in — , borin ; for — , baf iir ; of — , baoon ; with — , bamit; to — , ba§u. its, po88. adj., feitt, it)r. itself (nom.), C§ felbft {dat., ace), fi*^). J* James, S^J^'^^* *^- (■^)* January, 3anuar, m. (-g). John, 3o^ann', m. (-g), 3o^an* journey, SRcife,/. (-n). joyous, frotjlic^. July, 3u'H, 7?i. (-^). jump, [pringen, (144; fein); — down, ^cruntevfprmgcn, t)in* unterfpringen. June, 3u'ni, m. (-«). just, gerabe, ekn ; — now, foeBen, — as, efeenfo. justify, rec^tfertigcn. K. kick, flo^ctt, 188. kind ; what — of, toni fitr (ein, einc, ein) ; of many — s, i)ic= lerlei ; adj., gut, freunb(td) ; to be so — as to, fo gut fein unb. kindness, ®ittc,/, 03utigfeit,/, greuttblid)!eit,/ king, ^onig, m. (-e^ ; -e); King- street, t)ie ^onigjira^e. kingdom, ,^6ttigrcic^,n. (-eg; -e). knife, ?!}?e|Jer, n. (-g ; — ). knock down, ^eruntcrfd)lagett, 186. know (of acquaintance), !en- ntw, 99 ; (of knowledge ac- quired by mental effort) ttjiffctt, 196; — how, fott* nen, 196. knowledge, ilentttttiS, / (-fe), SBiffenfdjaft,/. (-en), known, feefannt. L. lady, Dame,/ (-n); young — (Miss), graulein, n. (-g; — ). lake, ©ee, m. (-3 ; -en). landscape, Sanbf^aft,/ (-en). language, (©^radje,/ (-It). lantern, ?a<:rne,/. (-n). large, gro§ (-er, gro^t). last, le^t, ttorig; at — , enb* Uc^ ; v., bauern. late, fpat. lately, neultc^, fitrjltc^. Latin, suhst, Satein', n. (-g). Utter, the — , tBHT. doiM^ laugh, kc^en; — (at), tdcS&en {gen. or iiber -face.) ; he — s at (makes sport of) you, er madjt |!(^ iiber @te lufttg. lawyer, ^Iboofat', m. (-en ; -en). lay, tegen. lazy, faul, trage. lead, 33lei, n. (-eg). lead, v., fii()ren. lead-pencil, S3leifttft, m. (-eg ; -e). leaf, ^latt, n. (-eg ; -er). learn, lemen. learned, adj., getefirt. learning (action of), Semen, n. (-g). least ; at — , ttjenigfleng. leave, laffen, 1 88 ; — behind, desert, abandon, i)er(affen ; — out, auglajfen. left, (inf ; be — , iibrig Meiben (120; fein). f VOCABULARY. 555 3w, fon* ^oung — / (-en), (-n). ). n. (-^). t), tdd&en ) ; he — 8 f) you, cr lufti^. f-en ; -en). er). ), Semen, — behind, »cr(affen ; :tg fcleiben leg, S3c{n, n. (-ti ; -e). lemonade, I'imonobe,/ (-n). lend, lei^n (120; dat. o/pers.) lesson, Slufgabe, / (-u) ; M- Hon,/ (-en), let, lajfen, 188. letter {of alphabet), 33ud)fta6e, .... (-n^ or -n; -n), (epistle), 33rief, m. (-eg ; -c). liar, gugner, m. (-g ; — .). library, ^mioti^d'J. (-en). lie (be recumbent), liegen, 181 ; —down, ftc^ ^iulegen. life, Seben, n. (-g ; — ). lighten (flash), bli^en. lightning, 3311^, m. (-es! ; -e). like, mogen, 196-202; gem ^a^ ben, 24; I should — , i^ ntod^te (gem); to — to learn, gem lemen ; I — music, id) bin (in greunt) ijon Wlu^il; how do you — Londo'^.? ivie gefaUt 3§nen Sonfcon ? lily, Silie,/ (-n). Liraburg, adj., Simburger. lion, goire, m. (-n ; -n). listen to, an()oren (tr.). literature, giteratur',/ (-en). little {of size), thin ; {ojquan- titji) ttjenig. live, Xt^in-, (dwell), ttjo^nen. living, le'bent), leben'feig. locality, ®egent),/ (-en). London, Ronton, n. (-$) ; adj., Sontoner. long, adj., (ang (''cr); ac^v., lange (-r); have you been here — ? fint) @ie fc^on knge ^ier ? he has not been here for a — time, er ifl lange nic^t ^ier gemefen ; three months —er, nud^ brei 9)?o* nate; no — er {lit., not more), nic^t uie^r. long for, v., fic^ fet)iien nac^. look for, [lichen, fuc^en nac|; — like, nugfe^^en (ivie or md)), 181 ; it — s (appears, seems) like rain, eg ft el) t nad) JRegen aug ; — up, ()inanf* fe^en, 181. lose, ijerlieren, 131. lost, tterloren. loud, — ly, laut. Louisa, gouife,/ (-ng). love, v., lieben. lo>ver, unter, nicber (adjs.), M. magiiificent, prad)tig. majesty, ^JJajeftot',/ (-en), make, mac^en. man, ^ann, m. (-eg; ''er); (hu- man being), ^})?enfc^, m. (-en ; -en); —kind, SJJenfd),^.; men (soldiers), ©olbaten; little — , '3)?dnn(ein, n. (-g ; — ). manikin, ?0?annlein, w. (-g ; _). manner, 5Cetfe,/ (-n); in that — , aufbtefe ^i\\i, many, »ie(e ; — a, — a one, mand)er, manege, iiiand)eg. March, Waxi, m. (-eg). Margaret, ?D?argarete,/ (-ng). market, ?!J?ar!t, m. (eg ; "e). marriage (-ceremony), 3;rau--= wng,/ (-en). married, oerbeiratet. marry, ^eiraten, i)er()eirflteu (ftc^ mit). marsh, @unipf, m. (-eg ; -'e). Mary, SJ?arie,/ (-ng). i i4 556 VOCABULARY. matter, 'Ba^t,/. (-n) ; what is the — ? wag gicbtg ? tpa^ ifl log? what is the — with you? mi fet)(t3fenen? May (month of), Wai, m. (-eg or -en). mjiy, v., tiirfen; fonnen; mo* gen, 196-202. mayor, 53urgermci|lcr, m. (-g; /♦ me, nii(^ (ace), mir {dat). mean ; in the — time, unter* tej^en; by — s of, ttermit- telfl, \)crmoge, gren., 223. mean, v., meinen ; to — to, intend to, tvotlen, 196-202. meat, gleifc^, n, (-eg). meet, v., begegnen (dat.) fein); to go to — , cntgegcn gc^en (188; dat.', fein). meeting, QSerfammlung,/ (-en). melon, *iJ)?elonc,/. (-n). mental, geijltg. merchant, ^aufmann, m. (-eg ; -leute). mere, — ly, b(o§. merry, merrily, lujltg. messenger, 53ote, m. (-n ; -n). metal, ^etatl', n. (-eg ; -e). microscope, ^Wifroftop', n. (-eg; -0- middle, SJ^itte,/; in the — of summer, mitten im @ommer. mile, ?U?etle,/ (-n). milk, '3J>i(d),/. mine, meincr, meine, meineg ; ter, W, bag meine ; t»er, t)ie, bag meinige. minute, ^innte, / (-n); — -hand, SJ'Jinutcnjeiger, m. (-g; misfortune^ Ungliirf, n. (-eg). Miss (young lady), graulein, n. (-g ; — ). mistake, gc^Ier, w. (-g ; — ). mock, fpotten {gen. or iiber-f- acc). moisten, bene^en. moment, Slugenblicf, m. (-eg ; -e). monarch, 3)?onarc^', m. (-en; -en). Monday, ?Olontag, m. (-g ; -e). money, ©elt), w. (-eg ; -er). month, ?0^onat, m. (-eg ; -e) ; a - - ago, ttor einem SUionat. more, me^r; one — , noc^ einer. morning, ^fj^orgcn, m. (-g; — ); in the — , beg SJJorgeng; good — , guten SJJorgcn. mostly, meifieng. mother, ^iutter,/ (-'). mountain, ^erg, m. (-eg ; -e). mourning, %XCi\xtx,f. Mr., .^err, m. (-n; -en), much, ijiet ; very — , fe^r ; as — , eben fo ttiet. music, ^fHufiff/ musician, "iS^n'ftfer, m. (-g ■— ). must, miiffen, 196-202. my, poss. adj., mein, meine, mein {also expressed hy dat. of per s. pron. -\-def. art.) myself (I), (ic^) felbft. N. name, siibst., 9?ame, m. (-ng or -n; -n) ; nennen, v., 99; what ia the — of? tt)ie ^ei§t? what is your — 1 mie ^eif en @ie? nation, Nation,/, (-en). * I. (-e«). graulein, 5; — ). rr uber + i.(-e^;-e). m. (-en; (-« ; -e). -er). jJ; -e); a !)?onat. — , noc^ (-«;-); rgen. ■e^ ; -c). I)- fe^r; as J, I, meinc, ? by dat. art) I. (-nS or 99; what le ^ei§t? ){e |cif en Vocabulary. 657 native town,®e6urt0flat»t/(-e) natural, nntiirlic^. naughty, unflrtig. near, prep., neben (dat. or ace. : 65). necessity, ^fJot,/ (-c). need, v., branch en ; be in — of, betiirfen (196 ; ^en. or ace); in — of, betiirftig (gen.) neglect, v., oernad^laffti^en. neighbour, 5f?ac^bar,wi. (-«; -n) ; — (/m.),9f?ac^knn/(-nen). neither, ttjeter; — . . .nor, tve* ber. . .ncc^. nest, gf^eji, n. (-e« ; -er). never, nie; jiieuiaU; — yet, noc^ nte. new, neu. news, «nac^rt^t,/ (-en), newspaper, 3Htung,/. (-en), next, nad)fl (see na^e). Niagara Falls, t>ic ^xaciaxa'' eaae. niece, 5f?t(^te,/ (-n). night, mm, / (^'e); at — , nadU(3; bed ?'?a(^td. no, adj., feiu, feine, fetn ; adv., nein; —body, — person, nie= mant), feiner, feine, !eined; — more, — longer, ntc^t mc|r; — , thank you, i(^ banfe (3f)nen). noble, ettel. noise, ?arm, m. (-eg), noon, 5^ittacj, m. (-eg ; -e). north, 'm^xl), m. (-eg); Shorten, m. (-g), not, nid)t; — a, !ctn, feine, fetn; —yet, nod) nid)t; — at all, gar nid)t; are (you, etc.)—? nic^t wa^r? nothing, nic^tg. notwithstanding, ungeac^tet {gen.; 223). novel, suhsL, iRoman', m. (-eg ; -0- November, S'loocinber, w. (-g), now, |e0t. nowhere, nirgenfeg. nut, ««uf,/ C^fc). O. oak, Sic^e,/ (-n). ot>ey, ge()orc^en {dat.) oblige, t)crbint)en, 144; be — d or compelled (to), niiijfen. occasion, subst., ®elegenl)cit, / (-en); v., t)erurfad)en. o'clock, ll^r {invariable); what — is lO? jvie ^iel U^r ifl eg. of (231), ijon (c?ai;.;46; 231) {material) oug (cfa^.; 46) {cause) an {dat.; 231, c/) the treaty — Paris, ter 25er trag ^u f arig ; the battle— Waterloo, t>ie @d)Iacf)t bet 3CaterIoo ; — the Alma, an ber 9({ma. oif, ab. offer, bieten ( 131 ; dat. o/psrs.); anbieten (131; dat. of per s.) officer, Offtgier, m. (-g ; -e). often, oft (-er), oftmalg, ntanc^^ mal. oh! D! old, alt C^er). on, 232, auf, an {dat. or ace. ; 65); (of time) an {dat; 232, a); {about) iiber {ace; 65). once, cinmal. one, eing; etn, eine, etn; the small — , ber, bte, bag ^leine; 658 VOCABULARY. i* I — and the same, ein^ ; — and a half, antcrt^alb. only, nur; {of time) crft; not — . . .but also, jiid)t luir. . . fonterii and). open, adj., offen; v., aufmad)fn; offneii. opinion, *D}?cinun(^,/ (-en). opportunity, ©clegcn^eit, / (■en). oppressive, briicfenb. or, obev ; three — four, brct bis x>ier ; either... — , ent* iveber . . . obcr ; — else, fonfl. orator, Stebner, m. (-g ; — ). order, v. (command), t)efcl)Icn (167 j dat. of pers.)\ (pre- scribe), yerorbuen, beftellen. other, anber; every — day, einen Zap, urn ben anbern. otherwise, fonft ; anber^. our, adj., nnfer, nnfere, unfer. ours, pron., unfer, nnfere, nw^ fcre^; bcr, bie, bag unferc; ber, bie, bag unfrit^e. out of, C[\x^ {dat; 46); {or at) the window, juin genfter ^inaug. over, liber {dat or ace, 65); — there, — the way, britben. overcoat, U'berrocf, m. (-eg ; -e); U'berjie()er, m. (-g ; — ). own, adj., eii^en. paint, nialen ; to — (other than pictures), aujheiiten, 118. painter, ^a\tx, m. (-g ; — ). painting (art of), 9}ialerei',/. palace, ^alaft', m. (-eg ; -e) ; (Sd)(o§, n. ( feg ; -fer). pale, b(eid). paper, ^a)>ier, n. (-g ; -e) ; news—, 3eitunc},/ (-en). paradise, ^arabieg', n. (-eg; -e). pardon, 5Der3Ci()nng,/ parents, Sltern,jp/. only. Paris, ^arig', n. (oon $artg). Paris, adj. ( = Parisian), ^ar* ifer. part, %t\\, m. and n. (-eg, -e); for the most — , meifteng, uieiftenteilg. party, ^efellfAaft,/ (-en). pass, V. tr., {of time, to spend, etc.), jnbriniien 99, 2; — (an examination), befiel)en, 186; intr., vergci)en (188; fein); tterflie^cn (123; fein); — through, bur^fommen (167; fein). passing, adj., ttoritberf|e|)cnb. past, oert^angen, luoriiber, »or=» bet ; to go — the house, am ^anfe ooritberge^en, ijorbei- ge^en. patient, ^ranfe, adj. subst pay, beja I) ten {ace. of thing, dat. of pers. ; ace. of pers. when pers. only is mention- ed); — attention, 5l(^t iK^ ben (181) ; — a visit, einen 33efud) mad)en {dat of pers.); befnd)en {ace. of pers.). paying (action of), SBejaljlen, n. (-g). peace, ?^riebe(n), m. (-n or -ng). pear, 33irne,/ (-n). peasant, 58a uer, m. (-n or -g ; -n). pen, 5eber,/ (-n). people {pl.\ !2eute, pi. {no VOCABULAKY. 550 siuff.); — (inrle/.), man ; — say, man fagt ; — , nation, ^>elf, n. (-e^ ; ^'er). pepper, ^feffer, m. (-S). perfect, — ly, (^an^, ijoUfommcn. perhaps, ttieafirf)t'. permission, (SrlauOniGf,/ permit, criauben (dat. o/pers.). person, ^ex\on',f. (en), personal, pfrfiinlirf). philosopher, ^^i(ofopf)',m. (en; -en), physician, Slr^t, m. (-eg ; -e). pick up, aufi)eben, 131. picture, 53ilt), n. (-eg; -er); (painting) ©enuilbe, n. (-g; /• piece, (Stiicf, w. (-eg ; -c). pigeon, Zanhe,/. (-n). pinch, fneifen, 118. pity, v., betauern ; it is a — , eg i\t fcbobe. place, subst., ^(aft, w. (-eg; -'e); Drt, m, (-eg; -e or-'er); to take ■—, ftattffnben, 144; in that — , ba, bafelbft, tort, place, v., fiellen, fe^cn. plant, ^flan^e,/ (-n). plate, 3;eUer, m. (-0 ; — ). play, v., f)jtelen. pleasant, angene^m. please, "(^efaUen (188 ; dat.); (if you) please, (id)) bitte, tuenn ic(> mkn barf, flcfadigft. pleasure, 25ergniigen, n. (-g); trip, (short) excursion, Slugflug, m. (-eg, -e). plum, «Pflaunie,/ (-n). poem, ®efctd^t, n. (-eg ; -e). poet, Dic^ter, m. (-g ; — ). point; cardinal _ (of the compass), jpimme (giieiKnb, ./.' (-en) ; to be upon the — of, im ^^ej^riffe fein. poison, subst., ©ift, n. (-eg ; -e); ^•, vergiften. policeman, ^oliselticner, m. (-g; — ); ©rt)u^mann, m. (-eg; -{cute). poor, arm ("er). position, (Stetle,/ (-n); etel- I"»g./ (en). possess, beffl^cu, 181. possible, moj^lifb. post, — office, fc%/. — man, VofiMe,m. (-n;-n); by re- turn — , mit umge()en\)er f ofl, umiic()enb. postage-stamp, 33riefmarfe, / (-n). postpone, auPieben, 131. pound, ^fnnb, n. (-eg). power, .^raft,/ ("e). praise, v., bben ; prcifen, 120. pray, v., beten; interj., bitte! precise, — ly, (^enau. prefer, voraiet)en, 131 ; I — to walk, id) (^ebe lieber iju gu§. prepare; to — for, fic| tjor* bereiten niif (ace). presence, @eiienn?art,/ present, adj., gecicnjrartig ; for the — , fiir'i? grfte. present, subst., ©cfd^enf, '>^ (-eg ; -e). president, 5)rafibent', m. (-en; -en), press (urge), v., brtncjen, 144. pretty, |>iibfcb, fd)i)n ; ^adv. (tol- erably), jiemlicb. prevent, tjer^inbern. ; 560 VOCABULARY. V, i 1> price, fx({«, m. {-ti ; -e). prince, ^vix% m. (eii ; -en); ^riii^, w. (-en ; -en), prison, ©efangnid, n. (-fefii; -fe). probable, probably, n)a()r|d^eiii= li(^ ; probably, wo^l. professor, ^rofejyor,w. (-«;-en). promise, v., t)erfpre(t)en, 167. propose, t)orfd)Iagen, 186. proud (of), fiolj (auf + acc.) proverb, ©pricfewort, n. (-c^: ^'er). province, ^vovin\',/. (-en), prudent, ijorfici^tig. Prussia, ^reu§en, n. (-^). Prussian, subst, ^rcupe, m. (-n ; -n). public, offcntlic^. ' punish, bcflrafen, flrafeii. punishment, ©trafc,/ (-n). pupil, (Sc^itlcr, m. (-g ; — ). pure, rein, put on (coat, etc.), an;|ie^cn, 131 ; (hat), auffe^en. Q. quality, gfcjenfrfjajl,/ (-en), quarrel, v., flrciten, 118; f{^ jlreitcn (mit). quarter, 35iertel, n. (-i; — ); — of an hour, SSicrteljlunbe, / (-n). queen, Mn\Q\n,f. (-nen). quick, — ly, fct)netl ; quickly, quit, v., ^ertaflfen, 188. quite, ganj. R. railway-station, S3a^n|of, m. rain, szibst, JRcgen, m. (-«) ; v, regnen. raise, l)eben, 131. rather, et)cr, Heber. raven, Mcib(, m. (-n ; -n). read, lefen, 181 ; to — to, ijor- lefen (dat. of per s.) reading (act of), ficfcn, n. (-^). ready, fertig, bercit; readily, leid)t. reason, (35runt>, m. (-ed ; -e). receive (get), erbaltcn, 188; empfaiigen, 188; befommen, 167 ; — (as a host), aufn?^- mcn, 167. recover (from illness), qenefen (181; ffin). red, adj., rot(-er); aubat, 'S{\ii,n. Reformation, ^Reformation, / (-en), refuse, intr., fld^ ttjeigem. regard, anfe^tn (181 ; fitr -f- acc.)', betrad^ten (ate), regret; I regret, ed tl)ut mir Ieit». reign, S^e(|ternng,/ (-en), relate, erja^len. related, »ern?ant)t (dat. or mit). rely upon, fic^ ttertajfen (188; auf-t-acc). remain, bleiben (1 20; fein); — at home, — behind, juriidfblei* ben; — over,iibrig bleiben; — standing, ftet)en (186) btetben. remarkable, merfn?iirfcig. remember, fld^ erinnem (gen.); erinnern (ace); I wish to be — ed to him, \^ lajfe i^n grii^cn. remind of, erinnem Ci,n{-{- ace.) rent, v., ttermietctt. repeat, iviebert^o'len. VOCABULARY. 561 reply, subat, %ntmxt, /. (-en). reply, v., onttporten, erwitern, tterfe^cn. report, v., bcrid^ten. representation, 33orflcaung, / (-en). resemble, aimUd) fein (c'at.); gletc^en (118; dat.) reside, ttJO^nen. resist, roiberjle'^en (186; dat.) resolve, v., fic^ entfdjlie^en, 123. rest ; all the — , atte anbern ; retire to —, flc^ fc^Iafcn (188) legen. return, tjergelten (159); — good for evil, S3ofeg mit ®utent ©ergelten; by — of post, mit umge^cnber ^ejl, um9el)cnb. reward, subst, ^ot)\\, m. (-U), rheumatism, 3^()cuinatigmu«,m. (beg — ). ribbon, 5©anb, n. (-eg ; "er). rich (in), ret(^ (an4-o?a«.) rid, log ; to get — of, log tt)er= ten ( -i- ace.) ride, reiten (118); (in a con- ^ veyance), fasten (186; fein). riding (act of; not in a con- veyance), 9leiten, n. (-g). right {adj.), red)t; (correct), rtd^Hg; in the — way, auf bie rirfjtic^c silBeifc ; subst, S^ec^t, rj. (-eg; -e); to be (in the) — , 'Siz^i ^aben. righteous, gercc^t ; the — (man), ber (S^ered^te. ring, subst, 9llng, m. (-eg ; -e) ; — , v., la u ten (of a large bell), flingeln (of a small bell); there is a — at the door, eg tlingelt. ripe, reif. rise (g«?t up), aufflel)en (186 ; fein); (ascend), auffteiaen (120; fein). river, ^lup, m. (-feg ; '^fe). road, «roe9,m.(-eg;-e);®trage, Roman, .Corner, m. (-g ; — ). room, (apartment), ©tube,/ (n) ; dimmer, n. (-g ; — ). rose, 3*lofe,/ (-n). row, v., rubern. run, laufen (188; fein); — after, nac^Iaufen (188; fein; dat.); — away,bat)on'laufett. Russia, Sflu§lflnb, n. (-g). Russian, subst., ^Huffe, m. (-n; -n). S. oad, traurig. safe, f!cl)er. sailing-ship, ^cgelfc^iff, n. (-eg ; sale; f or — , ju tjerfaufen. same, adj. and pron., ber, 'Qk, bflgfelbe; ber, bie, bagfelbipe; ber, bie, bag namlic^e ; at the — time, ju fifei^er 3eit; all the — , one and the — , einerlei. Sarah, ©ara,/ (-g). satisfied, gufricben. Saturday, @onnabenb,»w. (-eg); (Samgtag, m. (-eg), save, rctten; I — d his life, ic^ rettetc ib;m bag :3eben. say,, f^S'^n ; to hear — , ^a^tn ^oren ; (assert, claim to be), wottcn (196-202); to be said, fotlen (196-202). / 562 VOOABULAHY. scholir (pupil), elten, 159. Scotland, ©rfjottlant), n. (ij). scream, fdjrcieii, 120. searcli (for), fu^ctt. seat one's self, sit down, fid) fe^en. second, num. adj., jivfitf. second (of time;, aubst., tge* fiinbf, /. (-n). secret, — ly, gel)eint, l)eiinlid). see, feben, 181. seek, fud)i'n. seem, fd)einfn, 120. self, felbfl. ' sell, tterfrtufen. send, fd)icfen ; — to, 3ufd)icffn; — word to, beiiad)rid)tii^cu (ace. o/pers.); — for, ^olflt Inffen (188), fd)icfen nad). September, September, m. (-^). servant, Diener, m. (-g ; — ); X)icnftbotf, m. (-« ; -n) ; ^^Jkat), / C^e). serve, tienen (dat.) ; — (of a meal), fcroifren. set, tr. (of a time-piece), flef:= leit; intr. (of the sun), uti'= teri^e^en (188;fi'in); —free, befreien. settler, 5lnftet)Ier, m. (-ji ; — ). seven, ficbeit. several, eini(^e; etli^c; me()verc. shake, f^iittellU shall, foHen (196-202). she, fie. shield, @cbilb, m. (-eg ; -e). ship, ©c^iff, n. (-eg; -e). Hhoe, (»dMib, m. (-e« ; -e). siioemaker, 3d)ufter, m. (-« ; — ); 'cd)ul)uiad)cr,m. {-t ; — ). shoot, fdncpen, 123. shop, Vuten, tn. (-g ; "). shore, Ufer, n. (c .; — ). short, hwy, — ly, nad)ftn»J. shout, fd)rcicn, 120. show, jjcij^en. shutter, ^abfll, m. (-eak, fprec^cn, 167, rften ; — with or to, fprc^en {ace. of pers. ). speaking (act of), ©pred>cn, n. (-«). spectacles (pair of), 33ri (I e/ (-n ). speech, JRfbe,/ (n). spite; in — of, trofc (gr^n.; 223). spoil, r tr., ofiieiten. .sport ; iv> mak J — of any one, ffcb iibcr temant(cn) \acc.\ luflig mac^cn. spread (out), fid) tjerbreltcn. spring, v.. fprinc^fti (144 ; jein); subat., ^rii^Iin^^, m. (-e«;-e). square (in a town), ^la^, m. (-6(8 ; '-'e). St. Lawrence, cl(t;eg; c?e- monstr. pron., bcr, bie, bag ; con;., bafi. the, ber, bie, bag; adv., \t, bejlo; urn fo. their, i^r, i'^re, i^r. them (ace), fte; (dat), i^nen. then, tann ; since — , feitbcm. there, ba ; — is, — are, eg iji, eg fiub ; eg gie&t, 2iiO. therefore, barum. thereupon, barauf. they, fie, eg ; (indef.), man. thief, 1)ieb, m. (-eg ; -e). thin, biinn. think, benfen, 99; — of, lenfen, gen. or au-l-acc. ; (believe), glaukn ; I should — so, bag foKte ic^ meinen; — highly of, esteem, etc., Jjtel l^altcn (188; won). third, brittc. thirsty, biirfiig ; to be — , Vmilt ^akn, 24. VOCABULARY. 565 thirty, brci^ig. this, adj. and pron., biefct; bicfc, biefe^. those, bieienii^cn ; bie ; jienc. though, obglcic^. thousand, taufent); subsL^ lau* fent), n. (-c^ ; -c). three, brei. through, burc^ {ace. ; 34). throw, njcrfen, 159; fd)mci§en, 118; — away, njcgrverfen. thunder-storm, ®ewittcr, n. Thursday, DotttterStflg, m. (-eg; -e). tie, binben, 144. till, m, 34. time, 3fit,/ (-f^); (occasion), 9)kl, n. (-e^; -e); what — is it? njtc »icl Ut)r ifl e^ ? for the third — , gum brittcn 'MaU; atther'ght — , rec^t* jciti^; at the same — , gu 9lci(^er 3"^* tired, miibe. title, 3^ite(, m. (-g ; — ). ■,Oy 233, 311 (dat; 46); (m«A names of places) nac^ (c?a<. ; 46); nn, auf, in (ace; 65, 233) ; — the concert, in«! ^onjert; (before inf.) ^u, 272- 274; (r>/'jo?*r^o5e)um3U,273. to-day, ^eute. to-morrow, ntorcjcit; — morn- ing, ntorgeu friil). too, 3U ; (also), auc^. top, ®if)fel, m. (-^ ; — ). tortoise, iMv'6f^,f. (-n). towards, gegeu (aco.; 34). town, (Strtbt,/ (-e); —-hall, JRat^au^, n. (-e^ ; -er). tragedy, Jraucrfplel, n. (-c^; -e); Irflf^oble,/ (-n). train (on a railway), ^UQ, m. (-e^; -c); the Boston — , bcr 3«9 toon (nad)) 33ofton. translate, iiberfc^'en. transparent, bur^'flc^tig. travel, reifen (^oben or fein). traveller, S^leifenbe, ao^'. subst. treasure, Scba0, m. (-ecs; -e). treaty, 3?ertra.q, m. (-ec ; -e). tree, 53aum, m. (-e^ ; -e) ; little — , 33dumd)en, n. (-f ; — ). triumph, Iriumpb', m. (-c£5; -e). true, lua^r; (faithful), trcu (dat.) trunk (of a tree), S3aumjlamm, m. (-e^ ; -e). trust, v., trauen (o?a«.) truth, 2Bn()rtieit,/ (-en), try, loerfucften. Tuesday, !E)ien«tag, w. (-c«; -c). two, jnjei ; beibe ; — at a time, it gmci ; • — and a half, brit* te()alb. U. umbrella, ^legcnfd^irm, m. (-c3; urcle, O^cim, m. (-eg; -c); Dnfef, m. (-3 ; — ). under, uuter (dat. or ace; 65). understand, begreifeii, 118;tter« [te^en, 186; to make one's self understood, fid) verfianb* lid) mad)en. undertaking, Unteme^'men, n. unfortunate, Uttgliicfiid) ; — ly, leiber. unhindered, unge^inbert 566 VOCABULARY. I. 'I United States (The), tie 55cr* eini^teu (Btaattn, university, Uni^erfitat',/ (-en), until, conj., big (ba§). untruth, Unwa^r^eit,/ (-en). upon, auf (t^a<. or ace. ; 6.")). upper, ober. up-stairs, oben, nac^ oben, ^in- auf. use ; of no — , un'nit^. useful, nii^Iii^; the — , bag 9lii^ti(^e. utmost, moglicbfl. V. vainly, in vain, ^ergebfic^ j »ergebeng. valley, Z^a\, n. (-eg;'"er). venture, v., njagen. verse, 35crg, m. (-eg ; -e). very, fel^r; rec^t; — much, fe^r. vex, argern ; be — ed (at), \\6^ argern (iiber-hacc.) victory, ©ieg, m. (eg ; -e). village, Dorf, n. (-eg ; -cr). vinegar, Sffig, w. (-g). violet, 5BeiIc^en, n. (-g ; — ). virtue, lu^qent),/ (-en). visit, 33efud), m. (-eg; -e); to be on a — at any one's, bei lemant auf S3e[ucf) fein ; v., befudjen; einen 53efuc^ nb^ flatten, madden {dat. ofpers.) visitor; to have — s, ^efu^ ^aben. voice, @ttmme,/ (-n). voyage, JReife, / (-n), ©eereife, / (-n). w. wait for, ttjarteu ttnf {ace.) waiter, j^cUner, m. (-g ; — ). walk, suhgt.^ (Spajiergang, m. (-eg; -'e); take a — , einen ^pajiergang maci^cn ; fpogter- en ge^en (188; fein). walk, v., ge^en (188; fein); fpajieren geben. walking (act of), ®c^en, n. (-g); ©pajierengei^cn, n. (-g). want, tt)iinfci^en;n?onen,l 96-202. wanting; to be — , fel^Ien((ia<.), mangeln {dat.) war, ,^rieg, m. (-eg ; -e). warm, — ly, warm (-er). warning, fcamung,/ (-en), waste, »erfc^njent)cn. watch, suhst, \[%x, f. (-en); 3;afc^enu:^r, / (-en); u, be^* njad^en. watchful, tuacfefam. watch-key, U^rfd^liiffel, m. (-g; -)• water, SlJajfer, n. (-g ; — ). waver, fc^manfen. way, 3Beg, m. (-eg ; -e) ; (man- ner), 3Ceife, / (-n) ; in this — , auf biefc SBetfe. we, luir. weak, (in), fc^wad^ {an + dat.) wear, v. intr. (of clothes), fid) tragen, 186. weather, S^i^etter, n. (-g); in fine — , bei fd)6nem Sl^etter. Wednesday, ^}?ittlt)od^, m. (-g). week, 5Qod)e, / (-n) ; ad)t 2;age ; for a — past, feit acbt iagen. weigh, intr., ttjiegen, 131. welcome, tviUfom'men. wall nrir^ofl. "•'"3 ; "• adv., gut; as — as, foiool^l alg ; — known, befonnt^ VOCABULARY. 567 f West, S©e(!(en), m. (-^). wet, nap ("er). what, interrog. pron., wad? interrog. adj., trelc^er, ttjcldje, ttjclc^cd ; —kind of, toai fiir (ein, cine, ein); rel. pron. ( ■-- that which), tua^; — a! h)ei^ ! — is that in German 1 n)te ^cift bag auf DcutfA ? when, interrog., tuann ? »u ttjel* c^er 3cit? con/., menu: a(g, 58. where, ttjo. whether, ob. which, interrog. adj., ttJcId^er, tt)c(cfec, JDclc^ee; re/, jp-on., iwelcfccr, toetc^e, tveldjeg; ber, btc, bag ; that — , tuag. while, whilst, wa^renb (bfl§), inbeffcn. whistle, pfetfcn, 118. white, n)ei§. who, interrog., xotx ? re?, pron., raelc^er, xod^t, raelc^eg; ber, bie, bag; he — , the one — , tt)er. whole, ganj ; the — of, ganj. whom, racn (ace), roem (rfa^;.) whose, interrog., weffen ? reZ., beffcn, m. w. sing.; beren,/. why, roarum ? n)e§^al6 ? wide, breit. will, rooaen, 196-202. William, SBil^elm, m. (-§). willing; to be — , raoHen, 196. wind, SStnb, m. (-eS; -e). wind up, auhteficn, 131. window, gcnftcr, n. (-§ ; — ). windy, rainbig. wine, ^txxi, m. (-e§ j -c). wing, gluger, m. (-S ; — ). winter, SBintcr, »w. (-§ ; __). wise, iBctfc; flug ("cr). wish (for), tDunfc^en. with, 234, mit (dat.; 46); bet (G?a^.; 46). without, o^ne {ace; 34). witty, roi^ig. wolf, 3Bolf, m. (-e§ ; ^'e). woman, grau, /. (-en). wonder, 5Bunbev, n. (-§ ; —\ ; I — , eg iBunbert mid^, id^' rcunbere mtc^; ~ of the world, SBeltDunbcr, n. (-g ; -). wood, SBatb, m. (-eg ; -er). word, SSort, t?. (-eg; -e or 'er); to send — , benad)rtc^= tigen. work (labour), 5Ubcit, /. (-en); (thing done), ilBerf, n. (-eg; -e); v., arbeiten. world, SBelt, / (-en); in the — , auf ber SSelt. worth, adj., raert ; — while, ber SSlix^t raert. wound, v., oerrounben. wring, ringen, 144. write (to), fc^retben (120; dat. or an + ace. of pers.) writing (act of), ec^retben, n. wrong ; to be (in the) — , Utts red)t ^aben. Y. yard (meas^re)^ ^Mt,f. (-tt). year, ^a^r, n. (-eg ; -c). yellow, gelb. yes, ja. w^M «68 TOOABULART. yesterday, ge'fteni; — '8, oon geftern, gcftrig. yet, noc^ ; not — , nod^ nid^t. yonder, bort you, 38, 40, i^r; ®ic; bu; cud^; ®ie; bic^; ^l^ncn; bir. young, jung (-cr) ; — man, wangling, w. (-c§ ; -c). your, 40, 43, cucr, cure, cucr; bctn, bcine, bcm ; 3^r, 35re, yours, bcr, hit, ba§ eurc, cus rigc; bcr, bic, baS ^^rc, Si^rigc ; bcr, bic, bo§ bcinc, bctnigc; curcr; betncr; ^l^rcr. youth (time of), ^ugenb, / ; (young man), ^iingling, m. -I ^¥, 3i^^% I ill eurc, cus ba§ bcinc, itgcnb, / ; tgling, m. INDEX. N -Vot T'T" T 'A **^^^r^*^°"« ^"'^ su),sections. unless otherwise specified! N. - Note ; R. = Remark ; O. = Observation; p. =. page. -I Abbreviations, p. 404. o6er, conj.,286. Ablaut, 105, R , 110. 'About,* how rendered in Germ., 226. Absolute accusative, 255; ab- solute superlative, of adjs. , 127,2; ofadvs.,190,4-6. Abstract substs., take article, 44,1 (3): plural of, 66,3; App. H. Accentuation, p. 10; in com- pound verbs, 117, 3, 204, 205, 3, 208, 209, 212; of compound adv. prefixes, 206, 2, N. r. Accusative, use of, 8, 262- 255; place of, 296, 4; af- ter preps., 84, 50, 65, 228, 19, R. 2; expresses time, 184,1 ; measure, 185, 4; after reflexive verbs, 216; after .mpers. verbs, 217, 2, («), 219, 220; after adjs., replacing gen., 244, R. 1, 2; double ace, 258; after intrans. verbs, 264; cognate ace, 254, 1; ad- verbial ace, 265; absolute ace, 256, 2; before advs. of direction, 224, 1. Address, modes of, 40, 48, 47. Adjects, place of, 296, 1, 297, R. 1. Adjectives, when spelt with a capital, pp. II, ,2; predi- cative, not declined, 14, 100; place of, 18, 20,0. 3, 295, 296, 8; attributive, decl. of, 101; strong, 102, weak, 116, mixed, 116, ta- ble, 121, general remarks, 122; place of, 290, (3), N. 2, 298, 1, 299; in- declinable in ser, 122, 9; as advs., 122, 8 ; of colour, 122, 3; in sel, sen, ser, 122, 6 ; a succession of, 122, 5; after pers. prons., 122, 10; after indef. prons. and numerals, 122,11, 12; after roeld^e, 122,13; used I as substs., 122, 2; compa- rison of, 125-127; without Umlaut, App. L. ; incapa- ble of comparison, 161, N. ; adjs. used as attri- butes only, 160 ; as predi- cates only, 161; as pre- fixes to verbs, 206, 4, 212; governing gen. and ace, 244; dative, 261; preps., 291; possessive adjs., 43, 44, 6, (a); interrogative, 84- 86 ; appositive adj., 290 ; concord, 288; derivation, by suffixes, 318, by pre- fixes, S!1tt; composition, 820. Adverbial clauses, 806. Adverbial conjunctions, co- ordinating, 287; throw the subject after the verb, R. 1. Adverbial expressions, place of, 45, 297. Adverbs, 187 ; place of, 45, 297; formation, 182, (a), 183, (c), 189; compari- son, 128, 190 ; numeral adverbs, 18'^, 188; idio- matic uses of certain ad- verbs, 195 ; advs. with an accusative, 224, 1; with preps., 224, 3, 4. =age, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (e). Agent, with passive, 112, R. 3. »al, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. 'all ' expressed by gatij, 170, 1; 'at all,' 167. aCein, conj., 286, 241, 1. ttUer, -e, -eS, 169;aller*be. fore superlatives, 127, 1, N. ; oUeS of a number of persons or things, 162, 2; before adjs., 122, 12. Alphabet, German, pp. i, 5, 13- al§, conj., 239, 3 {3); after a comparative, 126, 1 ; dis- tinguished from roenn and tDonn, 58, 241, 6, 8 ; 'but,' 241, 19; al§ clause replaces Engl. part, of time, 9S-1. 1 (fr\ . jj,»„j.._: an opposition, 289,6; with comparative clauses, 806, R. 4. 570 INDEX. !ii 4i 'J i M ha%, after adjs. with ju, 878, N. alS Ob, aid loenn, 289) 3, (i), and R. 4. cm, before a superl., 127, 1, (6), 128, 190, 3. «n, prep., 65 ; expresses date, 184, 2, (a); of loca- Uty, 227, (a), 2, 282, (c), 2, 288, (c), 2; of cause, with diseases, 281, (c) ; with names of battles, 231, (a{l, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. pat, foreign substs. in, declen- sion, 22, 2, 6. ' at,' of time of day, 184, 3, (c)', how rendered in Germ. , 227 ; after verbs, etc. , 291 , 1. 'at all'; see 'all.' Attributive adj., see Adjec- tive. and), adv., after rel. prons., 96, 6, idiomatic use of, 195, 9; conj., 286, 287, R. 2, 288. auf, prep., 65; with abs. superl. of advs., 190,6; of locality, 227, (a), 3, 230, («), 282, (c), 238, (c), 2 ; of future time, 229, (3), 2 ; after adjs. and verbs, 245, 1,291,2, 7, 10; after reflexive verbs, 216, 1, (6). auf bag, 289, 3, (6), 268, 3. ou3, prep., 46 ; of cause, 229, (c). oufeett, adv., 189, 3; com- parison, 180. aufeer, prep., 46. auger^alb, 228, 3. fiugerft, with absolute superl., 127, 2, 190, 4. Auxiliary is verb in com- pound tenses, 26, 82. Auxiliary verbs of mood, see ' Modal Auxiliaries.' Auxiliary verbs of tense, 25, 53; place of, with Modal Auxiliaries, 199, 3; omitted in dependent clauses, 287. balb, comp?j-ison of, 190; bolb . . . bolb, 288. (bar, sufiix of adjs., 818, 1. 'be,' with p. part., how ren- dered in Germ., 112, R. 5. be;, insep. prefix, 85, R. 6, 204 ; meaning of, 814, 1. bci, prep., 46; = 'with,' ' about,' 226, (; of bat. ties, 281, (d), I. bcibc, beibeS, 165, 3. beigen Model, 118. beoor, 241, 13, 14. binnen, 51, 1. bis, prep., 84, 50,4; conj., 289, 3, id). bleiben Model, 120. Slume Model, 56. 'both. . . and,' 288. ' but,* rendered by al3, 241, 19. 'by,' with passive, 112, R. 3 ; how rendered in Germ., 228. Capitals, use of, p. 11 ; 122, 2, 9, N., 11, O. Calling, verbs of, 242, 8, 258; with p. part., 281, 6. Cardinal numerals, 168,165 ; gender as substs., 80, 2, (c), 166, 10. Cases, use of, 8 ; syntax of, 242-265; place of , 296. Cause, adverbial expressions of, 284, 1, (3), 806, R. 2 ; their place in a sentence, 45, Rule 5. .d^en, substs. in, declension, 16,17; gender, 89, 3, (a); subst. suffix, 812, 2 ; pro- duces Umlaut, 826, R. 2, (c). Choosing, verbs of, 242, 3, N., 263. Clauses, conditional, 69, 267, 293, (a), 3; proportional, see ' Comparative clauses,' below; dependent, preced- ing principal, 298, (6), R. 4, 294, (3), R. 2, 806; with benn, 241, 18, 293, (c), R, ''r ; incomplete or elliptical, 299; order of clauses, 802-806; ^posi* l,(;, 266, K. '2; use, 280, {b), 241, 3; express- ing purpose, 268, 3. baft clauses governed by preps., 224, 2, («); for in- fin., 272, R. 1, 296, 276, R. 2, 277. Date, how expressed, 184, 2, {a). Dative, uit of, 8, 248; place of, 296, 4 ; ethical dat., 249; dat. after verbs, 250 ; after adjs., 251 ; after preps., 46, 51, 65, S28 ; after reflexive verbs, 216, 2 ; after impersonal verbs, 217, 2, {b), 219, 1} after fein and luerbcn, 217, 2, (c); after interjections, 240, 4, (3). ^iimi)ten, see beitc'^fen. biln* len. »be, subst. suffix, 812, 1. Declension ; see " Substan- tives," "Adjectives," ''Pro- nouns," "Numerals." Definite Article; see "Arti- cle." Degrees of comparison; see "Comparison," bcm after fein, 250, (e), 268, G. Demonstrative pronouns; see " Pronouns." benn, conj., 286; adv. conj., 237,239,241,7,18,298, (c), R. 4. bennoc^, adv. conj,, 287. Dependent seuteuces ; see " Construction," " Sen- tences," Dependent iue«tions ; see " Constrif^ion," " Sen- tences," "Indirect ques- tions." ber, bie, ba«; see "Article, definite"; demonst. pron,, 182, 188. 185, 2, 140, 1, («), (^), 142, 148, 1, 2; after loer, 162 ; relative pron., declension, 08 ; use, 05, 140, 2 ; replaced by 100 before preps., 05, 2 ; used for roer, 806, R, 3, N. bcrfllcic^en, rel, pron., 97; demonstr. pron., 182, 189, 2. beicn, gen. pi, of demonstr. pron., when used, 188, 2, N. Derivation, 807-817 ; of nu- merals, 182, 188; of advs., 189; see also "Adjective," etc. bcricjiiiic, 182, 185, 140, 1. {b). bcro, 49. bcrfelb(ifl)c, 182, 186; re- places poss. adjs. and pers. prons., 148, 2-4, be3fllcid(;en, rel, pron,, 97; demonst. pron., 189, 1; adv., 189, 1, N. beffcn, used for gen. of «jel» ci^er, 95, 1, («); precedes its case, U5, 8; of neut. pers. pron., 143, 1; for poss. adj., 143, 2. beffciiungcacf)tet, adv. conj., 237,241,21, befto, 126, 4, 287, 241, 2, 293, (/'), R. 4, N, 3. beudjtcn, 99, 2, biefcr Model, 6. bicfcr, declension, 6; use, 132, 184, 140,1, (a), 141; replaces pers. prons. ,148,3. bie§feit(§), 228, 12, R, Digraphs, consonantal, pp, 4, 8, 14, Diminutives, gender, 89, 3, (a); formation, 812, 2; origin, 826, R, 2, (c). Diphthongs, pp. 4, 6, 14, Direct objects, clause or neut. pron. as, 260, R. 2; infio. as, 272, R, 2; see also "Accusative," " Cases," "Object." Direct questions; see also " Questions," " Interroga- live Sentences." Direction, expressed by l^in* and \)tx* before verbs, 210; with an accusative, 224, 1. Distance, measure of, 186, 4. bod^, adv., idiomatic use,105, 8; adv. conj., throws subj. after verb, 287, R. 3, 298, {b), R, 3 ; in questions, 800, 2, N. I. Dorf Model, 86,87; origin of Umlaut in, 826, R. 2,(5). Double Accusative, 258. " Gender, 91 ; App, J. " Plurals, 64; App. G.* " Prefixes, 207, 210, 218. " Vowels, pp. 4, 6, 14; do not take Um- laut, p. 12. bvet, declension, 165, 2. bilnfen, 99, 2. burd^, prep., 84; prefix, 208. biivfcn, conjuKation of, 196- 199; use, 200, 1. e, in conjugation of verbs, 81,R. 1,85, R. 2-4,107, R. 1 ; in imperative, etc., 167, B., R. 3, 181, O. 4; in subjunctive, 81, R. 2, 107, O. 3; in dat. of substs., 21, («), O. 4, 46, R. 2; in adjs,, 102, R. 2, 122, 6, 125, R. 5, 6, 126, 5; in poss, adjs., 48, R, 2 ; in poss, prons., 119, (a) Obs.. ic). N. i: re- presents Umlaut of a, 826, R.3. se, adjs. in, declension, 102, :lauM or neut ', R. 2; infia. 2; see also ' " Cases," is; see also ' " Interroga- j." ;ssed by l)iu» efore verbs, ii accusative, re of, 186, 4. atic use,105, throws subj. 7, R. 3, 298, n questions* I) 87 ; origin 126, R. 2,(5). ve, 268. 91; App. J. B4;App.G.* 207, 210, pp. 4, 6, 14; t take Um- . 12. 166, 2. ; prefix, 208. ion of, 196* ).l. 3n of verbs, R. 2-4, 107, jrative, etc., , 181, O. 4; , 81, R. 2, in dat. of 0, O. 4. 46, s., 102, R. 56, R. 5, 6, ss. adjs., 48, prons.,119, N. i: re. ut of a, 826, ension, 102, INDEX. R. 2 ; comparison, 196, R. 6. •e, substs. in, declension, 64, 67, 1, 61; gender, 89,2, u); subst. suffix, 812, 4. ctien, 106, 2. ebenfo, 287, 241, 8. e^e, conj., 241, 13, 14; com- parison, 180. •ei, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, («) ; subst. suffix, 812, 6. tin, see "Article, Indefi- nite." ein, numeral, 168,166, 1; with def. art., 166, 1, (c), einanber, 42, 2. [and N. einer, indef. pron., 145, 160; cardinal numeral, 168, 166, 1, {6). einerlet, 182, (c), N. einerfeita, 288. einige, einigeS, etlic^c, etii. d^eS, indef. pron., 146, 162; numeral, 168, 178, 180 i before adjs., 122, 12. einmal, 182, (a), N. 2, 3. ein« in counting, 166, 1, (d). einft, 182, (a), N. 2; 187, 1. w. •el, substs. in, declension, 16, 17 ; fems. in, 67, R. 2;gender, 89,1, («), App. I.; adjs. in, declension, 122, 6; comparison, 125, R. 6; subst. suffix, 812, 6. »el, verb-stems in, drop c, 85, R. 4. »e(d)ett, diminutive suffix 812, 2, N. a. Elliptical constructions, 59, 289, R. 2, 4, 266, N. 4, 267, 6, N., 268, 2, N., 269, R. 6, 278, 298, (S), R. 4, N. 2, 299. »eln, verbs in, conjugation, 86,'R.4; formation.aila. »em, substs. in, declension, 16,17,69,1; gender, 89, 1. (a). «tnp., Insep. prefix, 86, R. e, 204; meaning, 814, 2. »en, substs. in, declension, 16,17; gender, 89, 1, (a), App. I.; adjs. in, declen- sioM, 122, 6; comparison, 126, K. fl; not used as predicates, 160; advs. in, 189,3; subst. suffix, 812, 7; adj. suffix, 818, 2. •en fo" »ea in gen. sing, of adjs., 102, R. 1. »enb, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (i); subst. suffix, 812, 18. Endings of weak verbs in simple tenses, 86 ; of strong do., 107; of substs., 70; of adjs., 121. English, its relations to Ger- man, 822. Enlarged form of strong de- clension, 70, 4. »en«, termination of advs., 188, (r),189, !,(«'), 190, 7. ents, insep. prefix, 86, R. 6, 204 ; meaning, 814, 2. etitGcgen, 61, 2. eiitlaitfl, 228, 19, R. 2. enttoeber... ooer,288,286, R. 6, N. I. sCiij, foreign substs. in, gen- der, 89, 2, (e). er», insep. prefix, 86, R. 6, 204; meaning, 814, 3. scr, substs. in, declension; 16,17;fems. in, 67, R. 2, gender, 89, 1, (a), App. I. ; adjs. in, declension, 122, 6; comparison, 126, R. 6, 126, N. ; subst. suffix, 812, 8. ser, verb-stems in, drop t, 85, R. 4. ser, Plural ending, 86; ori- •erei, subst. suffix, 812, 6, N.2. »ern, Adjs '', not used as 573 predicates, 160; »dj, ■u^ fix, 811, 2. •ern, Verbs in, conjugation, 86, R. 4; formation, 811,2. erft, adv., idiomatic use. 19fi» 4. erftena, &dv., distinguished from juerft, !96, 6, N. ®ri», subst. prefix, 816, 1. e«, neut. pron., uses of, 89; omission of, 118, 2, N. j for a number of persons or things, 162,2; as subject of impersonal verbs, 217, 220, 2, R. 2, N.; afte< adjs. governing ^en., S44, R. 1; representing a fol. lowing infin., 272, R. 2. e3 giebt, eS ift, etc., 220. effeu Model, 181. Ethical dative, 249. ctlic^e ; -e«, see einige. etn)0, 187, II.T.,226,(4 ettoaS, indef. pron., 146, 149; indef. numeral, 168, 177 ; before adjs., 122, 11. ' even,' rendered by felbft, 42, 3, R. ' ever,' after rel. prons., 96, 6. Exclamatory clauses, 269, R. 6, 298, (A), R. 3, 800, N.2. »fac^, sfaitig, form multipii. cative numerals, 182, (6). faUen Model, 188. falls, subord. conj., 289, 3 »faitig; see »fac^. Factitive accusative, 268. Factitive predicate, 268, 264, 3. Family names, 74, 76, 4, 8. fec^ten Model, 124. 'few,' how rendered in Ger., 145, 152, 168, 178, 176. 'for,' how rendered in Ger., 229; after verbs, subste. and adjs., 291, 2-4 574 INDEX. Foreign substs., accentua- tion, p. lo, bottom; de- clension, 22, 6, 87, 4, App. 1).,67, 6, 68,1,77; gender, 80, 2, {e). Fractional numbers, 188, {a), UeiUd), 187, IV.; does not count as a member of a sentence, 293 (3), R. 2, N. Frequentatives, how formed, 816, 2, (c). frieren Model, 181. 'from,' after verbs, 291, 5. fUr, prep., 84; not used of purpose, 229, (a); after verbs of considering, !b68. Future Tense, how formed, 26,2; use, 261; replaced by present, 257, 5. Future-perfect Tense, how formed, 26, 3 ; use, 262 ; replaced by perfect, 269, 4. gattj, indef. numeral, 168, 170. ges, prefix of p. part., 80 ; when omitted, 86, R. 5, 6, 109, 112, R. 2, 204; of verbs, 85, R. 6, 204, 314, 4 ; with sep. verbs, 117,2, 205,2; withmi6=,209;of substs., 815, 2 ; of adjs., 316 ; declension of substs. beginning with ge», 16, 17, 2,86, 37, 3; gender, 89, 3, (d). gegen, prep., 34. gegenUbef, 51, 4. gel^ett with infin., 271, (c). gemaB, 61, 5. gen, 50, 2. Gender of substs., according to meaning, 80, and form, 89; of compound substs., 90, 4, App. I., p. 388; uoubie gender, 91, App. J. ; general remarks on, 00 ; exceptional gender, App. I. Genitive, use of, 3, 248; af- ter adjs., 244 ; after verbs, 24o ; adverbial, of time a. id nianner, 184, 2, (i>), 189,2,246;ofpLice,246; after reflexive verbs, 216, 216 ; after impers. verbs, 219, 2, (a); after interjec- tions, 240, 4, (a); after preps., 222, 228; unin- flected appositive genitive, 289, 3, N. 2 ; ix>sition of in a sentence, 296, 4-7. genug, indef. num. and adv., 168, 178 ; followed by inf., 273, 3. German language, its rela- tions to English, 322 ; his- torical sketch, 322-826. Germanic languages, 322, 828; diagram of, p. 376. gem, comparison of, 190, 1; idiomatic use of, 195, 3. Gerunds, or Infin. in -ing, not to be confounded with pres. part., 277, k.3, 4,6. Gerundive, 282. glautPit, infin. after, 275, gteic^, prep., 61, 6. [R. 3. »glcic^cn, 48, 97, 139. ©raf Model, 65. Grimm's Law, 826. grofe, comparison, 125, 5. ®runbfpracf)e, 322. gut, comparison, 129; as adv., 195, 10, N., 298, (3), R. 2, N. i), mute before consonants, after vowels and after t, p. 9; when rejected after t, p. 12. i^aben, conjugation, 24 ; use, 25; with infin., 271, (d), andR. 1,272, R. 2; omis- sion of in dependent sen- tences, 287, 298, (c), R. 6. •^oft, suffix of adjs., 313, a f)alb, numeral, 188, (a), N. 2. (i). f)alb(en), ^alber, prep., 222, 228, 1. ' half,' how rendered in Ger., 188, (a), N. 2 ; (/,). half-hours, 184, 3, («). i^cifien with infin., 271, ( s in, take t., 35, R. t 'J i by oi •ifl, 8ub9t«. In, <^<*clcn»Jon, 22,2; gender, is% !,(«); adjs. in, not used as predi- cates, 160; advs. in, superl. of, 190, 6; suffix of poss. prons. , 119, (<:) ; subst. suf- fix, 812, 18; adj. suffix, 813,5; before »teit, 812, iO, N. ; after »f)a\t, 313, 3, N. ; produces Umlaut, 826, (/). 3I)V0, 49. »it, foreign substs. in, gen- der, 80, 2, (e). imtticr, adv., 187, I., (, 157. sifd), adjs. in, not used as predicates, 160; adj. suf. fix, 313, 6. Italics, not used in Germ., p. 12. 'it,' when rendered by er, fie 13. \, pujduces Umlaut, 826. \a, idiomatic 10'j, n. ja, jaiuof ... ;-)« ted ar member . .J98, {b), R. 2, N. je, before cardinal numerals. 166, 9. ie . . . befto, 126, 4, 289, 3,(^),298,(n, 166, 10, ur, 184, 3, 204, 209, prefix, ixive verbs, 1, 180. ttelft. of substs., »djs., 116, 196-202; 196, R. 1- 198; fur- ,199;idi- 202. >n, 196< 1,202. edension, ). B., C, ^9, 1, (a). how ex- h (*). their use, 256 278; see alto "Con- ditional," " Indicative," etc. * most,' with absolute super- lative, 127,2. Motion, neuter verbs of, con- jugated with fein, 68, (6). tnUflen, conjugation, 196- 199; use, 200, 4, 202. SDlut, fern, compound A of, App. I, p. 388; ju j/fam, adj. in, superl. of, 190, 5; adj. suffix, 818, 9. famt, 51, 9. »fc^aft, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (a); subst. suffix, 812, 15. fd^iegen Model, 128. fc^Iagen Model, 186. fd^ott, idiomatic use, 196, 6. Script, German, pp. 13-16. fe^r, with absolute super!., 127, 2, 190, 4. fein, * to be,' use as auy""a- ry, 25, 4 ; conjugation, 62 ; verbs conjuga\.>^d with, 68; with post part., 112, R. 5, (3) ; as impersonal, 217,220; with dat., 250, {e)\ with infin., 272, R. 2; omitted in dependent sen- tences, 287. fcit, prep., 46, 241, 12, (a) ; conj., 239, 241, 12. feitbem, adv. conj., 237 ; subord. conj., 289, 241, 12, W. *fe[, substs. IP gender, 89, 3, (<:); subst. suffix, 812, 14. f elber, felbft, 42, 3, and R. felbig, 186, N. felbft; see f elber. Sentences, construction of, 292-306; essential parts of, 292 ; construction of assertive principal, 20, 26, 59, N., 293, (3), 294, (3), 296,2, 297, R. 1, 801, 2, 306; of dependent, 82, 33, 98, 298, (<:), 294, {c), 295, 2; relative, 98, 305, 806, R. 3 and N., R. 4; interrogative, 28, 88, 298, (a), I, 298, (0, 187, II., (c); before preps., replacing '"terrog. prons., 88, 3, and relative prons., 96, 2, 96, 7. roo^r, comparison of, 190; idiomatic use, 195, 10. rooUen, its conjugation, 196- 199; its use, 200, 6, 201, 202. roorben, for geroorben, in passive voice, 112, R. 2; when omitted, 112, R. 4. ' you,' how rendered in Ger., 40; indef. pron., 146. sjel^n, in compound num- erals, 166, 5. jers, insep. prefix, 86, R. 6, 204; meaning, 814, 7. »5'g, in numerals, 166, 6. au,prep., 46,227,(rt),4,(^), 2, (c), 228, (r), 229, (a), 230, (c), 282, (^), 288, (3), (c), 2, (ii) ; with Infinitive, 272-277; place of, 109, 117, R. 2; with insep. verbs, 206, 2 ; followed by alg ba% or um ju, with verbs of choosing, 242, 3, N., 268 ; after adjs., 244. auerft, 195, 5. Siifolge, 228, 11, R. SunadEjft, 61, 7. Suroiber, 61, 3, jroet, declension of, 166, 2. groifd^cn, prep., 66. 22 54C812 • 2 ; construe* ices express- 2. dN. I. (c) ; before ing '"terrog. 1 and relative 96,7. an of, 190; 195, 10. gation, 196- JOO, 6, 201, worben, in 112, R. 2; 112, R. 4. ;red in Ger., ™., 146. ound num. c, 85, R. 6, 814, 7. , 165, 6. '»(«), 4, (^), , 229, (a), 5), 283, {b), 1 Infinitive, e of, 109, 'ith insep. followed by I JU, with ig, 242,3, adjs., 244. R. f, 166, 2.